background image

FACTORY AUTOMATION

• Approach to the leading 

drive performance

• Security & safety

• Easy setup 

& easy to use

• Eco-friendly factories

• System support

L(NA)06075ENG-F(1707)MEE

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

Mitsubishi  Electric  Corporation  Nagoya  Works  is  a  factory  certified  for  ISO14001  (standards  for 
environmental management systems)and ISO9001(standards for quality assurance management systems)

FR-A

800

INVERTER

FR-A800

Unparalleled Performance. Uncompromising Quality.
  [Parallel operation function compatible model added to the line-up]


background image

4

18

26

27

34

46

61

66

108

166

170

192

198

204

226

230

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Features

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

Connection Example

Standard Specifications

Outline Dimension Drawings

Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specification Explanation

Operation Panel (FR-DU08(-01)), LCD Operation Panel (FR-LU08(-01))

Parameter List

Explanations of Parameters

Protective Functions

Option and Peripheral Devices

Low-Voltage Switchgear/Cables

Precaution on Selection and Operation

Compatible Motors

Compatibility

Warranty, Inquiry

Global Player

Contents

GLOBAL IMPACT OF

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

Through Mitsubishi Electric’s vision, “Changes for the Better“ are possible for a brighter future.

We  bring  together  the  best  minds  to 
create  the  best  technologies.  At 
Mitsubishi  Electric,  we  understand 
that technology is the driving force of 
change  in  our  lives.  By  bringing 
greater comfort to daily life, maximiz-
ing  the  efficiency  of  businesses  and 
keeping  things  running  across 
society, we integrate technology and 
innovation  to  bring  changes  for  the 
better.

Mitsubishi Electric is involved in many areas including the following

Energy and Electric Systems
A wide range of power and electrical products from generators to large-scale displays.

Electronic Devices
A wide portfolio of cutting-edge semiconductor devices for systems and products.

Home Appliance
Dependable consumer products like air conditioners and home entertain-
ment systems.

Information and Communication Systems
Commercial and consumer-centric equipment, products and systems.

Industrial Automation Systems
Maximizing productivity and efficiency with cutting-edge automation technology.

2


background image

4

18

26

27

34

46

61

66

108

166

170

192

198

204

226

230

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Features

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

Connection Example

Standard Specifications

Outline Dimension Drawings

Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specification Explanation

Operation Panel (FR-DU08(-01)), LCD Operation Panel (FR-LU08(-01))

Parameter List

Explanations of Parameters

Protective Functions

Option and Peripheral Devices

Low-Voltage Switchgear/Cables

Precaution on Selection and Operation

Compatible Motors

Compatibility

Warranty, Inquiry

Global Player

Contents

GLOBAL IMPACT OF

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

Through Mitsubishi Electric’s vision, “Changes for the Better“ are possible for a brighter future.

We  bring  together  the  best  minds  to 
create  the  best  technologies.  At 
Mitsubishi  Electric,  we  understand 
that technology is the driving force of 
change  in  our  lives.  By  bringing 
greater comfort to daily life, maximiz-
ing  the  efficiency  of  businesses  and 
keeping  things  running  across 
society, we integrate technology and 
innovation  to  bring  changes  for  the 
better.

Mitsubishi Electric is involved in many areas including the following

Energy and Electric Systems
A wide range of power and electrical products from generators to large-scale displays.

Electronic Devices
A wide portfolio of cutting-edge semiconductor devices for systems and products.

Home Appliance
Dependable consumer products like air conditioners and home entertain-
ment systems.

Information and Communication Systems
Commercial and consumer-centric equipment, products and systems.

Industrial Automation Systems
Maximizing productivity and efficiency with cutting-edge automation technology.

3


background image

Unparalleled Performance. Uncom    promising Quality.

APPROACH TO THE LEADING DRIVE PERFORMANCE

The enhanced Real sensorless vector control and 

vector control serve the needs of all machinery types.

SECURITY & SAFETY

Rapid response is obtained 

when an unexpected trouble occurs.

EASY SETUP & EASY TO USE

Fully equipped with a variety of simple functions and 

equipment to improve work efficiency.

01

02

03

What is required of inverters in this constantly changing world?

At Mitsubishi Electric, we have pursued the answer to this question through constant innovation and evolution.

Introducing our extensive range of high-value, 

next-generation inverters delivering outstanding drive performance in any environment, 

and a wealth of functionality covering startup to maintenance.

We utilized the traditional Mitsubishi Electric philosophy to further perfect our inverters.

ECO-FRIENDLY FACTORIES

Save energy while increasing factory production.

SYSTEM SUPPORT

Numerous functions and the extensive lineup of 

models are ready to support various systems.

04

05


background image

Unparalleled Performance. Uncom    promising Quality.

APPROACH TO THE LEADING DRIVE PERFORMANCE

The enhanced Real sensorless vector control and 

vector control serve the needs of all machinery types.

SECURITY & SAFETY

Rapid response is obtained 

when an unexpected trouble occurs.

EASY SETUP & EASY TO USE

Fully equipped with a variety of simple functions and 

equipment to improve work efficiency.

01

02

03

What is required of inverters in this constantly changing world?

At Mitsubishi Electric, we have pursued the answer to this question through constant innovation and evolution.

Introducing our extensive range of high-value, 

next-generation inverters delivering outstanding drive performance in any environment, 

and a wealth of functionality covering startup to maintenance.

We utilized the traditional Mitsubishi Electric philosophy to further perfect our inverters.

ECO-FRIENDLY FACTORIES

Save energy while increasing factory production.

SYSTEM SUPPORT

Numerous functions and the extensive lineup of 

models are ready to support various systems.

04

05


background image

01

Excellent Drive

Performance

*1 

: At 3.7 kW with no load. Differs depending on the load conditions and motor capacity.

*2 

: The option (FR-A8AP, FR-A8AL, or FR-A8TP) is required.

Speed response: The speed response indicates how fast the inverter follows the change in the 
speed command.  (The larger value indicates the better speed trackability.)

*4

 : Refer to page 13 for the multiple rating setting.

Speed (r/min)

Fast response terminal

The response delay time is reduced.

•Terminal response
A700: 5 to 20 ms       A800: 2 to 3 ms

Speed

80 ms

170 ms

80 ms

170 ms

FR-A800

FR-A700

FR-A800

FR-A700

Features

Features

1

1

APPROACH TO THE LEADING 

DRIVE PERFORMANCE

The new series is equipped with the new state-of-the-art high-speed 

processor developed by Mitsubishi Electric. With better control 

performance and response level, safe and accurate operation is assured 

in a diverse  range of applications.

The enhanced Real sensorless vector control and vector control serve the needs of all machinery types.

Swift, Smooth, yet Robust

The vector control is available when a vector control compatible option is installed.

(1) For high-quality products

High response

Real sensorless vector control 

50 Hz

*

1

Vector control 

130 Hz

*

2

A700: 20 Hz

A700: 50 Hz

Response speed

Improved speed response ensures minimal 
speed fluctuation due to load changes.

Time (s)

0

100 ms/div

0

100

900

 Speed 

(r/min)

Tor

que

 (%)

Load torque

[Example of changes in actual rotation speed with impact load]

(With Real sensorless vector control, SF-PR 4P motor (3.7 kW))

Line control

Line control is necessary for the 
machining of elongated products 
such as paper, thread, wires, all 
kinds of sheet, and tape. This will 
respond rapidly to changes in line 
speed and suppress the 
occurrences of winding unevenness. 
This contributes to a steady supply 
of high-quality products.

Operating frequency

Real sensorless vector control and vector control 

400 Hz

V/F control 

590 Hz

*

3

(2) Perform ultra-fine processing

High-speed rotation

A700: 120 Hz

A700: 400 Hz

FR-A800

FR-A700

120 Hz

400 Hz

590 Hz

400 Hz

Running frequency

approx. 

3.3

 times

approx. 

1.5

 times

Real sensorless vector control,

vector control

V/F control

Machine tool

Cutting-edge machine tools are 
harder and thinner than ever before 
to be applicable to diverse new 
materials.
High-speed rotation is required 
more than ever before in order to 
be applicable for fine and precise 
cutting on hard and 
difficult-to-grind materials.

*3

 : According to the review result of the export control order about frequency changers, the upper 

    limit of output frequency was determined to be 590 Hz for standard models.

High torque at low speed

(3) Swiftly move heavy weights

Real sensorless vector control 

200%

 (ND rating)

*

4

,

Vector control 

200%

 (ND rating)

*

4

(150% of initial setting for 5.5K and higher)

Vector control 

200%

.

 (

Select HD rating.)

*

4

V/F control 

1:10

 

(6 to 60 Hz: Driving)

Advanced magnetic flux vector control 

1:120

 

(0.5 to 60 Hz: Driving)

Real sensorless vector control 

1:200

 

(0.3 to 60 Hz: Driving)

Vector control 

1:1500

 

(1 to 1500 r/min: Both driving/regeneration)

Starting torque

Speed control range

Zero-speed torque

(When at 0.3 Hz)

[Example of speed-torque characteristics with Real sensorless vector control]

Tor

que (%)

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

-200

-150

-80

0

80

150

200

Tor

que (

%

)

50

150

-200

-150

-80

0

80

150

200

Low speed area enlarged

When offline auto tuning is performed for the SF-PR 4P motor (15 kW). In the 
low-speed range, the torque increases by the increased magnetic excitation. 
Torque characteristics in the low-speed range can be set in the parameters.

Cranes

Cranes are in operation daily at ports 
carrying fully-laden containers in 
response to strong demand from all 
over the world. Our new inverter 
realizes smooth cargo handling work 
at low speed and high torque for the 
slow and stable movements required 
for heavy objects.

(4) For accurate and stable transport between machines

PM sensorless vector control

Power supply

Inverter

Sensorless

PM

motor

PM sensorless vector control

Main circuit area

Encoder

Encoder

not required

Current

detection

Control area

Speed detection

Model adaptive

speed control

Comparison of

SF-PRF 1.5 kW 4P and MM-CF152

• What is a permanent magnet (PM) motor?

A PM motor is a synchronous motor with strong permanent magnets 
embedded in its rotor.  The two major PM motor types are: the 
interior permanent magnet (IPM) motor with its magnets embedded 
inside the rotor, and the surface permanent magnet (SPM) motor 
with its permanent magnets attached on the rotor surface.

• What is PM sensorless vector control?

The speed and magnetic pole positions, the two essential bits of 
information to control a PM motor, are detected without a sensor 
(encoder). The speed detection internally-performed in an inverter 
enables highly accurate control of a PM motor, almost as 
accurate as an AC servo 
system, without the need of 
a sensor (encoder)

*

5

. 

Combining with Mitsubishi Electric 
MM-CF series IPM motors 
facilitates aspects of high-level 
control with no encoder such as 

“simple positioning”

*

6

 and 

“zero speed torque”

.

• Easy maintenance for sensor (encoder)-less motor

•No additional cables means less 

wiring space required.

•Improved reliability is obtained in 

unfavorable operating 
environments. (e.g. high vibration)

•PM motors are usually smaller and 

lighter than induction motors.

Transfer of 

circuit boards

The Simple positioning control 
delivers a precision workpiece, 
such as a printed substrate, to a 
precise position.
Transfer of fragile glass substrates 
can be performed with a highly 
accurate driving system.

*5

: Speed fluctuation ratio: ±0.05% (digital input)

*6

: Positional accuracy (with no load) of 1.5K and lower: ±1.8°, 2K and higher: ±3.6°

Speed fluctuation ratio

 = 

×100(%)

Speed under no load − Speed under rated load

Rated speed

• The cutting-edge auto tuning function

The PM motor auto tuning function, which has been newly 
developed, enables sensorless operation of other manufacturers' 
permanent magnet (PM) motors.
Operation with all Mitsubishi Electric induction motors and PM 
motors, in addtion to induction motors and PM motors from other 
manufacturers

*

7

, is possible. That means you need less motors for 

spare and stocks. 

(With IPM motors other than MM-CF and PM motors manufactured by other 
companies, starting torque is limited to 50%, and simple positioning control and 
zero speed torque cannot be used even if tuned.)

(5) Taking motor performance to the max

Induction motors and magnet motors can be combined freely

*7

: Tuning may not be available depending on its motor characteristics.

Mitsubishi Electric

vector control dedicated motor

SF-V5RU

Mitsubishi Electric

IPM motor

MM-CF

Mitsubishi Electric

IPM motor

MM-EFS

Induction motor

by other

manufacturers

PM motor by

other manufacturers

Mitsubishi Electric

general-purpose (induction)

motor SF-PR

• Low speed, high torque realized with SF-PR motor

By combining with Mitsubishi Electric's high-performance, 
energy-saving motor SF-PR, 100% continuous operation is 
possible from a low speed of 0.3 Hz for inverters of any capacity. 

(when using Real sensorless vector control)

• Sharing the spare inverter

One spare inverter is enough for the two types of motors (IM and PM).

Before

Now…

Inverter

Inverter

Inverter

Drive unit

Drive unit

Spare inverters for each

One spare inverter for

different motors

Induction 

motor

PM motor

85

80

90

95

100

70

65

45

0

3 6

20

30

40

60

120

Output tor

que (%)

Output tor

que (%)

Output frequency (Hz)

5.5K

0.4K to 3.7K

7.5K to 30K

100

45

0

0.3

60

120

Output frequency (Hz)

All capacities (0.75K to 55K)

SF-JR continuous operation torque characteristics

(Motor input voltage: 200 V)

SF-PR continuous operation torque characteristics

(Motor input voltage: 200 V)

37K to 55K

37K to 55K

6


background image

01

Excellent Drive

Performance

*1 

: At 3.7 kW with no load. Differs depending on the load conditions and motor capacity.

*2 

: The option (FR-A8AP, FR-A8AL, or FR-A8TP) is required.

Speed response: The speed response indicates how fast the inverter follows the change in the 
speed command.  (The larger value indicates the better speed trackability.)

*4

 : Refer to page 13 for the multiple rating setting.

Speed (r/min)

Fast response terminal

The response delay time is reduced.

•Terminal response
A700: 5 to 20 ms       A800: 2 to 3 ms

Speed

80 ms

170 ms

80 ms

170 ms

FR-A800

FR-A700

FR-A800

FR-A700

Features

Features

1

1

APPROACH TO THE LEADING 

DRIVE PERFORMANCE

The new series is equipped with the new state-of-the-art high-speed 

processor developed by Mitsubishi Electric. With better control 

performance and response level, safe and accurate operation is assured 

in a diverse  range of applications.

The enhanced Real sensorless vector control and vector control serve the needs of all machinery types.

Swift, Smooth, yet Robust

The vector control is available when a vector control compatible option is installed.

(1) For high-quality products

High response

Real sensorless vector control 

50 Hz

*

1

Vector control 

130 Hz

*

2

A700: 20 Hz

A700: 50 Hz

Response speed

Improved speed response ensures minimal 
speed fluctuation due to load changes.

Time (s)

0

100 ms/div

0

100

900

 Speed 

(r/min)

Tor

que

 (%)

Load torque

[Example of changes in actual rotation speed with impact load]

(With Real sensorless vector control, SF-PR 4P motor (3.7 kW))

Line control

Line control is necessary for the 
machining of elongated products 
such as paper, thread, wires, all 
kinds of sheet, and tape. This will 
respond rapidly to changes in line 
speed and suppress the 
occurrences of winding unevenness. 
This contributes to a steady supply 
of high-quality products.

Operating frequency

Real sensorless vector control and vector control 

400 Hz

V/F control 

590 Hz

*

3

(2) Perform ultra-fine processing

High-speed rotation

A700: 120 Hz

A700: 400 Hz

FR-A800

FR-A700

120 Hz

400 Hz

590 Hz

400 Hz

Running frequency

approx. 

3.3

 times

approx. 

1.5

 times

Real sensorless vector control,

vector control

V/F control

Machine tool

Cutting-edge machine tools are 
harder and thinner than ever before 
to be applicable to diverse new 
materials.
High-speed rotation is required 
more than ever before in order to 
be applicable for fine and precise 
cutting on hard and 
difficult-to-grind materials.

*3

 : According to the review result of the export control order about frequency changers, the upper 

    limit of output frequency was determined to be 590 Hz for standard models.

High torque at low speed

(3) Swiftly move heavy weights

Real sensorless vector control 

200%

 (ND rating)

*

4

,

Vector control 

200%

 (ND rating)

*

4

(150% of initial setting for 5.5K and higher)

Vector control 

200%

.

 (

Select HD rating.)

*

4

V/F control 

1:10

 

(6 to 60 Hz: Driving)

Advanced magnetic flux vector control 

1:120

 

(0.5 to 60 Hz: Driving)

Real sensorless vector control 

1:200

 

(0.3 to 60 Hz: Driving)

Vector control 

1:1500

 

(1 to 1500 r/min: Both driving/regeneration)

Starting torque

Speed control range

Zero-speed torque

(When at 0.3 Hz)

[Example of speed-torque characteristics with Real sensorless vector control]

Tor

que (%)

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

-200

-150

-80

0

80

150

200

Tor

que (

%

)

50

150

-200

-150

-80

0

80

150

200

Low speed area enlarged

When offline auto tuning is performed for the SF-PR 4P motor (15 kW). In the 
low-speed range, the torque increases by the increased magnetic excitation. 
Torque characteristics in the low-speed range can be set in the parameters.

Cranes

Cranes are in operation daily at ports 
carrying fully-laden containers in 
response to strong demand from all 
over the world. Our new inverter 
realizes smooth cargo handling work 
at low speed and high torque for the 
slow and stable movements required 
for heavy objects.

(4) For accurate and stable transport between machines

PM sensorless vector control

Power supply

Inverter

Sensorless

PM

motor

PM sensorless vector control

Main circuit area

Encoder

Encoder

not required

Current

detection

Control area

Speed detection

Model adaptive

speed control

Comparison of

SF-PRF 1.5 kW 4P and MM-CF152

• What is a permanent magnet (PM) motor?

A PM motor is a synchronous motor with strong permanent magnets 
embedded in its rotor.  The two major PM motor types are: the 
interior permanent magnet (IPM) motor with its magnets embedded 
inside the rotor, and the surface permanent magnet (SPM) motor 
with its permanent magnets attached on the rotor surface.

• What is PM sensorless vector control?

The speed and magnetic pole positions, the two essential bits of 
information to control a PM motor, are detected without a sensor 
(encoder). The speed detection internally-performed in an inverter 
enables highly accurate control of a PM motor, almost as 
accurate as an AC servo 
system, without the need of 
a sensor (encoder)

*

5

. 

Combining with Mitsubishi Electric 
MM-CF series IPM motors 
facilitates aspects of high-level 
control with no encoder such as 

“simple positioning”

*

6

 and 

“zero speed torque”

.

• Easy maintenance for sensor (encoder)-less motor

•No additional cables means less 

wiring space required.

•Improved reliability is obtained in 

unfavorable operating 
environments. (e.g. high vibration)

•PM motors are usually smaller and 

lighter than induction motors.

Transfer of 

circuit boards

The Simple positioning control 
delivers a precision workpiece, 
such as a printed substrate, to a 
precise position.
Transfer of fragile glass substrates 
can be performed with a highly 
accurate driving system.

*5

: Speed fluctuation ratio: ±0.05% (digital input)

*6

: Positional accuracy (with no load) of 1.5K and lower: ±1.8°, 2K and higher: ±3.6°

Speed fluctuation ratio

 = 

×100(%)

Speed under no load − Speed under rated load

Rated speed

• The cutting-edge auto tuning function

The PM motor auto tuning function, which has been newly 
developed, enables sensorless operation of other manufacturers' 
permanent magnet (PM) motors.
Operation with all Mitsubishi Electric induction motors and PM 
motors, in addtion to induction motors and PM motors from other 
manufacturers

*

7

, is possible. That means you need less motors for 

spare and stocks. 

(With IPM motors other than MM-CF and PM motors manufactured by other 
companies, starting torque is limited to 50%, and simple positioning control and 
zero speed torque cannot be used even if tuned.)

(5) Taking motor performance to the max

Induction motors and magnet motors can be combined freely

*7

: Tuning may not be available depending on its motor characteristics.

Mitsubishi Electric

vector control dedicated motor

SF-V5RU

Mitsubishi Electric

IPM motor

MM-CF

Mitsubishi Electric

IPM motor

MM-EFS

Induction motor

by other

manufacturers

PM motor by

other manufacturers

Mitsubishi Electric

general-purpose (induction)

motor SF-PR

• Low speed, high torque realized with SF-PR motor

By combining with Mitsubishi Electric's high-performance, 
energy-saving motor SF-PR, 100% continuous operation is 
possible from a low speed of 0.3 Hz for inverters of any capacity. 

(when using Real sensorless vector control)

• Sharing the spare inverter

One spare inverter is enough for the two types of motors (IM and PM).

Before

Now…

Inverter

Inverter

Inverter

Drive unit

Drive unit

Spare inverters for each

One spare inverter for

different motors

Induction 

motor

PM motor

85

80

90

95

100

70

65

45

0

3 6

20

30

40

60

120

Output tor

que (%)

Output tor

que (%)

Output frequency (Hz)

5.5K

0.4K to 3.7K

7.5K to 30K

100

45

0

0.3

60

120

Output frequency (Hz)

All capacities (0.75K to 55K)

SF-JR continuous operation torque characteristics

(Motor input voltage: 200 V)

SF-PR continuous operation torque characteristics

(Motor input voltage: 200 V)

37K to 55K

37K to 55K

7


background image

Safety stop function (STO) 
cuts down the number of 
MCs to one!*

2

02

Security & Safety

1

1

Features

Features

SECURITY & SAFETY

Swift recovery ensured by preventing trouble beforehand.

The FR-A800 has been developed with reliability and safety 

foremost in mind.

Safety standards compliance

(1) Improved system safety

NEW

For Improved Equipment Reliability

Rapid response is obtained when an unexpected trouble occurs.

In addition to the existing power supply input terminals (R1 and 
S1) of the control circuit, 24 VDC input is equipped as standard.
The 24 VDC power supplied from outside can be fed to the 
control circuit locally, enabling the parameter settings, 
communication operation and safety maintenance without 
turning ON the main power.

Standard 24 VDC power supply for the control circuit

(2) Reliable and secure maintenance

NEW

OFF

24 VDC

24 V external power supply

input indication

The inverter is equipped with an internal temperature sensor, which 
outputs a signal when the ambient temperature is high.
This facilitates the detection of rises in temperature inside the 
inverter following cooling fan malfunction, or rises in ambient 
temperature due to inverter operating conditions.

Prevention of trouble with temperature monitoring

NEW

Easy fault diagnosis

(4) Quick reaction to troubles

•

The operating status (output frequency, etc.) immediately before 
the protection function activates can be stored in the inverter 
built-in RAM with the trace function. The stored data (trace 
data) can be copied to a USB memory device or directly 
imported to a computer, facilitating trouble analysis using the 
inverter setup software (FR Configurator2).

Trace  data  stored  in  the  built-in  RAM  is  deleted  when  the  power  is  turned  OFF  or  the 
inverter is reset.

NEW

•

Clock setting is now available in addition to the 
already-available cumulative energization time. The time and 
date at a protective function activation are easily identified. 
(The clock is reset at power-OFF.) The date and time are also 
saved with the trace data, making the fault analysis easier.
By using the real-time clock function with the optional liquid 
crystal display (LCD) operation panel (FR-LU08) (when using 
battery), the time is not reset even when the power supply is 
turned OFF.

•

The service life of the cooling fans is now 10 years

*

3

.

The service life can be further extended by ON/OFF control of 
the cooling fan.

•

Capacitors with a design life of 10 years

*

3

*

4

 are adapted.

With these capacitors, the service of the inverter is further 
extended.

•

Estimated service lifespan of the long-life parts

Long life components

•

An internal thermal sensor is equipped to 
all inverters as standard, which enables 
monitoring of the installation environment.
Use this function as a guide for the life 
diagnosis.

•

Maintenance timers are available for up 
to three peripheral devices, such as 
motor and bearing.

Enhanced life diagnosis function

(3) Long life components and life check function

"Maintenance 1 output"

warning

*3

: Surrounding air temperature: Annual average of 40˚C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, 

oil mist, dust and dirt).
The design life is a calculated value from the LD rating and is not a guaranteed product life.

*4

: Output current: 80% of the inverter LD rating

*5

: Excerpts from “Periodic check of the transistorized inverter” of JEMA (Japan Electrical 

Manufacturer’s Association).

Components

Cooling fan

Main circuit smoothing capacitor

Printed board smoothing capacitor

10 years

10 years

*

4

10 years

*

4

2 to 3 years

5 years
5 years

NEW

*

5

Guideline of JEMA

*

5

Estimated lifespan of the FR-A800

*

3

•

The inverter installation method is the 
same as that for the FR-A700 series, 
eliminating any concerns over replacement.
Furthermore, FR-A700 series control 
circuit terminal blocks can be installed 
with the use of an option (FR-A8TAT).

•

The terminal response adjustment function allows a user to adjust 
the response speed in accordance with the existing facility.

•

The conversion function of Inverter Setup Software (FR 
Configurator2) enables parameter copy from an FR-A700 and 
even from an FR-A500 (to be supported soon).

Intercompatibility with existing models

(5) Renewal assurance

Design considering the hazardous environment

(6) Reasons for high quality

NEW

For the compatibilities and differences with the FR-A700 series, 
refer to page 226.

*6

: The usage beyond the product's specified service condition is not guaranteed.

3D-vibration analysis is performed to confirm the vibration 
resistance. The analysis is also useful to find the best layout 
position and to further improve the product's rigidity.
Assuming a hazardous 
service condition, the 
product reliability is 
thoroughly assessed in the 
design stage. Every effort 
is made to ensure the best 
quality of the Mitsubishi 
Electric inverter.

*

6

Resistance against heat is what makes an inverter reliable. 
A well-designed heat-resistant power module is essential in a 
reliable inverter. From the power module's design stage, its heat 
resistance is carefully considered.

*

6

Heat control for high quality

3D-vibration analysis

Hydraulic analysis and heat simulation

Backup/restore

•

The GOT can be used for backing up inverter's parameter 
settings and the data used in the PLC function of inverter, and 
the backup stored in the GOT can be used to restore the data 
in the inverter.

NEW

GOT

Programmable controller

CC-Link IE Field Network

Ethernet

Backup

Restore

FR-A800-GF or

FR-A800 with FR-A8NCE

Controls with safety functions can be easily performed.
The Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function is supported by the 
inverter. The inverter with the safety function can comply with 
the safety standards without incurring much expenses.

•

PLd and SIL2 are supported as standard.

•EN ISO 13849-1 PLd / Cat.3
•EN 61508, EN 61800-5-2 SIL2 

Safety shutdown

signal of the

inverters is

hard-wired.

Safety shutdown

signal of the

inverters is

hard-wired.

MELSEC iQ-R series 
safety programmable 
controller

CC-Link IE Field

Network safety

remote I/O module

Inverter output shutoff

Alarm/failure

Magnetic 
contactor 
(MC)

•Low cost
•Low maintenance (maintenance for one)
•Small installation space

*1

: Safety communication is available between a safety programmable controller and a remote I/O module.

*2

: One MC is required to shut off the power at an activation of the protective function.

Safety stop function (STO) 
cuts down the number of 
MCs to one!

*

2

Up to 120 units can be connected to the remote station.

*1

Emergency stop

8


background image

Safety stop function (STO) 
cuts down the number of 
MCs to one!*

2

02

Security & Safety

1

1

Features

Features

SECURITY & SAFETY

Swift recovery ensured by preventing trouble beforehand.

The FR-A800 has been developed with reliability and safety 

foremost in mind.

Safety standards compliance

(1) Improved system safety

NEW

For Improved Equipment Reliability

Rapid response is obtained when an unexpected trouble occurs.

In addition to the existing power supply input terminals (R1 and 
S1) of the control circuit, 24 VDC input is equipped as standard.
The 24 VDC power supplied from outside can be fed to the 
control circuit locally, enabling the parameter settings, 
communication operation and safety maintenance without 
turning ON the main power.

Standard 24 VDC power supply for the control circuit

(2) Reliable and secure maintenance

NEW

OFF

24 VDC

24 V external power supply

input indication

The inverter is equipped with an internal temperature sensor, which 
outputs a signal when the ambient temperature is high.
This facilitates the detection of rises in temperature inside the 
inverter following cooling fan malfunction, or rises in ambient 
temperature due to inverter operating conditions.

Prevention of trouble with temperature monitoring

NEW

Easy fault diagnosis

(4) Quick reaction to troubles

•

The operating status (output frequency, etc.) immediately before 
the protection function activates can be stored in the inverter 
built-in RAM with the trace function. The stored data (trace 
data) can be copied to a USB memory device or directly 
imported to a computer, facilitating trouble analysis using the 
inverter setup software (FR Configurator2).

Trace  data  stored  in  the  built-in  RAM  is  deleted  when  the  power  is  turned  OFF  or  the 
inverter is reset.

NEW

•

Clock setting is now available in addition to the 
already-available cumulative energization time. The time and 
date at a protective function activation are easily identified. 
(The clock is reset at power-OFF.) The date and time are also 
saved with the trace data, making the fault analysis easier.
By using the real-time clock function with the optional liquid 
crystal display (LCD) operation panel (FR-LU08) (when using 
battery), the time is not reset even when the power supply is 
turned OFF.

•

The service life of the cooling fans is now 10 years

*

3

.

The service life can be further extended by ON/OFF control of 
the cooling fan.

•

Capacitors with a design life of 10 years

*

3

*

4

 are adapted.

With these capacitors, the service of the inverter is further 
extended.

•

Estimated service lifespan of the long-life parts

Long life components

•

An internal thermal sensor is equipped to 
all inverters as standard, which enables 
monitoring of the installation environment.
Use this function as a guide for the life 
diagnosis.

•

Maintenance timers are available for up 
to three peripheral devices, such as 
motor and bearing.

Enhanced life diagnosis function

(3) Long life components and life check function

"Maintenance 1 output"

warning

*3

: Surrounding air temperature: Annual average of 40˚C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, 

oil mist, dust and dirt).
The design life is a calculated value from the LD rating and is not a guaranteed product life.

*4

: Output current: 80% of the inverter LD rating

*5

: Excerpts from “Periodic check of the transistorized inverter” of JEMA (Japan Electrical 

Manufacturer’s Association).

Components

Cooling fan

Main circuit smoothing capacitor

Printed board smoothing capacitor

10 years

10 years

*

4

10 years

*

4

2 to 3 years

5 years
5 years

NEW

*

5

Guideline of JEMA

*

5

Estimated lifespan of the FR-A800

*

3

•

The inverter installation method is the 
same as that for the FR-A700 series, 
eliminating any concerns over replacement.
Furthermore, FR-A700 series control 
circuit terminal blocks can be installed 
with the use of an option (FR-A8TAT).

•

The terminal response adjustment function allows a user to adjust 
the response speed in accordance with the existing facility.

•

The conversion function of Inverter Setup Software (FR 
Configurator2) enables parameter copy from an FR-A700 and 
even from an FR-A500 (to be supported soon).

Intercompatibility with existing models

(5) Renewal assurance

Design considering the hazardous environment

(6) Reasons for high quality

NEW

For the compatibilities and differences with the FR-A700 series, 
refer to page 226.

*6

: The usage beyond the product's specified service condition is not guaranteed.

3D-vibration analysis is performed to confirm the vibration 
resistance. The analysis is also useful to find the best layout 
position and to further improve the product's rigidity.
Assuming a hazardous 
service condition, the 
product reliability is 
thoroughly assessed in the 
design stage. Every effort 
is made to ensure the best 
quality of the Mitsubishi 
Electric inverter.

*

6

Resistance against heat is what makes an inverter reliable. 
A well-designed heat-resistant power module is essential in a 
reliable inverter. From the power module's design stage, its heat 
resistance is carefully considered.

*

6

Heat control for high quality

3D-vibration analysis

Hydraulic analysis and heat simulation

Backup/restore

•

The GOT can be used for backing up inverter's parameter 
settings and the data used in the PLC function of inverter, and 
the backup stored in the GOT can be used to restore the data 
in the inverter.

NEW

GOT

Programmable controller

CC-Link IE Field Network

Ethernet

Backup

Restore

FR-A800-GF or

FR-A800 with FR-A8NCE

Controls with safety functions can be easily performed.
The Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function is supported by the 
inverter. The inverter with the safety function can comply with 
the safety standards without incurring much expenses.

•

PLd and SIL2 are supported as standard.

•EN ISO 13849-1 PLd / Cat.3
•EN 61508, EN 61800-5-2 SIL2 

Safety shutdown

signal of the

inverters is

hard-wired.

Safety shutdown

signal of the

inverters is

hard-wired.

MELSEC iQ-R series 
safety programmable 
controller

CC-Link IE Field

Network safety

remote I/O module

Inverter output shutoff

Alarm/failure

Magnetic 
contactor 
(MC)

•Low cost
•Low maintenance (maintenance for one)
•Small installation space

*1

: Safety communication is available between a safety programmable controller and a remote I/O module.

*2

: One MC is required to shut off the power at an activation of the protective function.

Safety stop function (STO) 
cuts down the number of 
MCs to one!

*

2

Up to 120 units can be connected to the remote station.

*1

Emergency stop

9


background image

Split-type covers are adapted for all 
capacity models.
Maintenance is now easy because all an 
operator has to do is to remove the 
cover for the target wiring area.

Reduced wiring check time

One of the selectable mode by the operation panel is the Group 
parameter mode, which provides intuitive and simple parameter settings. 
(The conventional parameter setting mode is selected by default.)

Easy-to-follow parameter configuration

A 5-digit, 12-seg display has been adopted for the operation panel 
(FR-DU08) for a more natural character display. Furthermore, an 
optional LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) adopting an LCD panel 
capable of displaying text and menus is also available. 

Easy-to-read operation panel

Serial number reading is possible using the optional LCD operation 
panel (FR-LU08) or the Inverter Setup Software (FR Configurator2). 
Administration of different inverters has become much more simple.

Maintenance and control of multiple inverters 

(Option)

(3) To aid with maintenance

NEW

NEW

E
F
D

H

M

T

C
A
B
N
G

Environment
Acceleration/deceleration
Start and frequency commands
Protective function
Monitor
Multi function I/O terminal
Motor constant
Applications
Applications (position control)
Communication
Control

Major

division

Group number

Minor

division

Conventional 
parameter (A700)

New parameter 
(A800)

Pr.

Pr.

+

+

8

C

1

1 8

1 2

Parameter number

NEW

FR-DU08 (12-segment type)

FR-LU08 (LCD type) (option)

Major

division

Name

Inverter

FR Configurator2

USB cable

Mini-B

connector

03

Easy Setup

&

Easy to use

04

Eco Factory

FR-A800

FR-CV

FR-A800 FR-A800

ACL

FWD

REV

STOP

RESET

REV

FWD

STOP

RESET

P.RUN

PU
EXT
NET

MON
PRM

IM
PM

FWD

REV

STOP

RESET

REV

FWD

STOP

RESET

P.RUN

PU
EXT

NET

MON
PRM

IM
PM

1

1

Features

Features

EASY SETUP & EASY TO USE

A range of equipment and functions are prepared allowing 

work to be performed anywhere to suit product life cycles.

From Startup to Maintenance

Fully equipped with a variety of simple functions and equipment to improve work efficiency.

•

A USB host connecter (A type), which allows external device 

connections, has been added.
Parameters can be copied to commercial USB memory devices. 
(Refer to page 63)

Parameter copying with USB memory

(1) Streamlining the startup process

NEW

USB 2.0 (full speed) supported

•

It is a software which is easy to use and has unity as Mitsubishi Electric 

FA products with MELSOFT common design and good operability.

•

Easy plug-and-play connection to USB terminal equipped as 

standard

Easy setup with the Inverter Setup Software 

(FR Configurator2)

•

Free trial version, which contains start-up functions, is available. It 

can be downloaded at Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website.

For FR Configurator2, please refer to page 24.

Spring clamp terminals have been adopted for control circuit terminals.
Wires can be protected against loosening under vibrations during 
transportation of the inverter. Ten additional terminals are used as 
compared to the FR-A700 series. Round crimping terminals can 
also be used by employing a control terminal option (FR-A8TR).

Easy wiring to the control circuit 

NEW

Easy wiring.

Just insert.

Assures the

tensile strength

of the DIN

standards.

Easy operation with GOT

(2) Easy-to-follow display improves the operability

•

Automatic communication is possible without 

specifying any parameter settings simply by 
connecting to the GOT2000 series.

•

The PLC function device monitor can be 

displayed at the GOT2000 series.
Batch control of multiple inverter device 
monitors is possible with a single GOT unit.

•

The sample screen data for the A800 can be found in the screen 

design software of the GOT2000 series. The newest version of the 
screen design software can be downloaded from the Mitsubishi 
Electric FA Global Website.

NEW

ECO-FRIENDLY

FACTORIES

The power consumption by motors is said to amount about the half of 

all power consumption made by the Japanese manufacturing industry.

Factories can save more energy without dropping their production.

Less energy and more production—the FR-A800 series will help you to 

get the both.

The Next Step 

Go Green

Save energy while increasing factory production.

• Check the energy saving effect at a glance

•You can check the energy saving effect on the energy saving 

monitor.

•The measured output power amount can be output in pulses.

• Reduce power consumption during standby

•Control circuits other than those for power-related parts can be 

operated with 24 VDC power supplied from an external power 
source.
Since the control circuit can use the external 24 VDC, other 
power control circuits can stay OFF while no driving is required, 
and that saves the standby energy.

•By turning the cooling fan ON/OFF based on the inverter status, 

wasteful power consumption during stoppages can be reduced.

(1) Energy-saving function tailored to system, application

Variety of functions

NEW

• Save energy with Optimum excitation control

The excitation current is constantly adjusted to drive the motor in 
the most efficient method which leads to energy saving.
For example, with optimum excitation control with motor load 
torque of 10% when using the SF-JR, motor efficiency has 
increased by approximately 15% over the previous V/F control 
method.

• Effective use of regenerative energy 

(option)

Multiple inverters can be 
connected to the power 
regeneration common 
converter (FR-CV)/high 
power factor converter 
(FR-HC2) via a common 
PN bus.
Regenerative power is used at other inverters, and surplus 
energy is returned to the power supply, resulting in energy saving.
The 315K or higher models are inverter-converter separated 
types, which are suitable for power regeneration.

NEW

NEW

(2) PM motor contributes to the energy saving in factories

PM motor

If the inverter is being used for an application requiring constant-torque, such as a conveyor, factory energy savings can be achieved by 
replacing your current induction motors with permanent magnet motors (PM motors).
(Tuning is required for an IPM motor other than MM-CF, and for the PM motors of other manufacturers.)

• Why is a PM motor so efficient?

•The current does not flow to the rotor (secondary side), so there 

is no secondary copper loss.

•Magnetic flux is generated by permanent magnets, so less 

current is required to drive a motor.

Conveyor

A conveyor transports different 
goods and products according to 
its application. A PM motor can 
keep the carrying speed constant 
while saving energy.

[ Comparison of motor losses ]

(Example of 1.5 kW motors)

100%

46%

SF-JR

MM-CF

Induction motor

IPM motor

Primary

copper loss

Iron loss

Other

Iron loss

Primary

copper loss
(stator side)

Secondary

copper loss

(rotor side)

Other

10


background image

Split-type covers are adapted for all 
capacity models.
Maintenance is now easy because all an 
operator has to do is to remove the 
cover for the target wiring area.

Reduced wiring check time

One of the selectable mode by the operation panel is the Group 
parameter mode, which provides intuitive and simple parameter settings. 
(The conventional parameter setting mode is selected by default.)

Easy-to-follow parameter configuration

A 5-digit, 12-seg display has been adopted for the operation panel 
(FR-DU08) for a more natural character display. Furthermore, an 
optional LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) adopting an LCD panel 
capable of displaying text and menus is also available. 

Easy-to-read operation panel

Serial number reading is possible using the optional LCD operation 
panel (FR-LU08) or the Inverter Setup Software (FR Configurator2). 
Administration of different inverters has become much more simple.

Maintenance and control of multiple inverters 

(Option)

(3) To aid with maintenance

NEW

NEW

E
F
D

H

M

T

C
A
B
N
G

Environment
Acceleration/deceleration
Start and frequency commands
Protective function
Monitor
Multi function I/O terminal
Motor constant
Applications
Applications (position control)
Communication
Control

Major

division

Group number

Minor

division

Conventional 
parameter (A700)

New parameter 
(A800)

Pr.

Pr.

+

+

8

C

1

1 8

1 2

Parameter number

NEW

FR-DU08 (12-segment type)

FR-LU08 (LCD type) (option)

Major

division

Name

Inverter

FR Configurator2

USB cable

Mini-B

connector

03

Easy Setup

&

Easy to use

04

Eco Factory

FR-A800

FR-CV

FR-A800 FR-A800

ACL

FWD

REV

STOP

RESET

REV

FWD

STOP

RESET

P.RUN

PU
EXT
NET

MON
PRM

IM
PM

FWD

REV

STOP

RESET

REV

FWD

STOP

RESET

P.RUN

PU
EXT

NET

MON
PRM

IM
PM

1

1

Features

Features

EASY SETUP & EASY TO USE

A range of equipment and functions are prepared allowing 

work to be performed anywhere to suit product life cycles.

From Startup to Maintenance

Fully equipped with a variety of simple functions and equipment to improve work efficiency.

•

A USB host connecter (A type), which allows external device 

connections, has been added.
Parameters can be copied to commercial USB memory devices. 
(Refer to page 63)

Parameter copying with USB memory

(1) Streamlining the startup process

NEW

USB 2.0 (full speed) supported

•

It is a software which is easy to use and has unity as Mitsubishi Electric 

FA products with MELSOFT common design and good operability.

•

Easy plug-and-play connection to USB terminal equipped as 

standard

Easy setup with the Inverter Setup Software 

(FR Configurator2)

•

Free trial version, which contains start-up functions, is available. It 

can be downloaded at Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website.

For FR Configurator2, please refer to page 24.

Spring clamp terminals have been adopted for control circuit terminals.
Wires can be protected against loosening under vibrations during 
transportation of the inverter. Ten additional terminals are used as 
compared to the FR-A700 series. Round crimping terminals can 
also be used by employing a control terminal option (FR-A8TR).

Easy wiring to the control circuit 

NEW

Easy wiring.

Just insert.

Assures the

tensile strength

of the DIN

standards.

Easy operation with GOT

(2) Easy-to-follow display improves the operability

•

Automatic communication is possible without 

specifying any parameter settings simply by 
connecting to the GOT2000 series.

•

The PLC function device monitor can be 

displayed at the GOT2000 series.
Batch control of multiple inverter device 
monitors is possible with a single GOT unit.

•

The sample screen data for the A800 can be found in the screen 

design software of the GOT2000 series. The newest version of the 
screen design software can be downloaded from the Mitsubishi 
Electric FA Global Website.

NEW

ECO-FRIENDLY

FACTORIES

The power consumption by motors is said to amount about the half of 

all power consumption made by the Japanese manufacturing industry.

Factories can save more energy without dropping their production.

Less energy and more production—the FR-A800 series will help you to 

get the both.

The Next Step 

Go Green

Save energy while increasing factory production.

• Check the energy saving effect at a glance

•You can check the energy saving effect on the energy saving 

monitor.

•The measured output power amount can be output in pulses.

• Reduce power consumption during standby

•Control circuits other than those for power-related parts can be 

operated with 24 VDC power supplied from an external power 
source.
Since the control circuit can use the external 24 VDC, other 
power control circuits can stay OFF while no driving is required, 
and that saves the standby energy.

•By turning the cooling fan ON/OFF based on the inverter status, 

wasteful power consumption during stoppages can be reduced.

(1) Energy-saving function tailored to system, application

Variety of functions

NEW

• Save energy with Optimum excitation control

The excitation current is constantly adjusted to drive the motor in 
the most efficient method which leads to energy saving.
For example, with optimum excitation control with motor load 
torque of 10% when using the SF-JR, motor efficiency has 
increased by approximately 15% over the previous V/F control 
method.

• Effective use of regenerative energy 

(option)

Multiple inverters can be 
connected to the power 
regeneration common 
converter (FR-CV)/high 
power factor converter 
(FR-HC2) via a common 
PN bus.
Regenerative power is used at other inverters, and surplus 
energy is returned to the power supply, resulting in energy saving.
The 315K or higher models are inverter-converter separated 
types, which are suitable for power regeneration.

NEW

NEW

(2) PM motor contributes to the energy saving in factories

PM motor

If the inverter is being used for an application requiring constant-torque, such as a conveyor, factory energy savings can be achieved by 
replacing your current induction motors with permanent magnet motors (PM motors).
(Tuning is required for an IPM motor other than MM-CF, and for the PM motors of other manufacturers.)

• Why is a PM motor so efficient?

•The current does not flow to the rotor (secondary side), so there 

is no secondary copper loss.

•Magnetic flux is generated by permanent magnets, so less 

current is required to drive a motor.

Conveyor

A conveyor transports different 
goods and products according to 
its application. A PM motor can 
keep the carrying speed constant 
while saving energy.

[ Comparison of motor losses ]

(Example of 1.5 kW motors)

100%

46%

SF-JR

MM-CF

Induction motor

IPM motor

Primary

copper loss

Iron loss

Other

Iron loss

Primary

copper loss
(stator side)

Secondary

copper loss

(rotor side)

Other

11


background image

05

System Support

•

Parameters and setting frequency can be changed at the program.

•

Inverter control such as inverter operations triggered by input 

signals, signal output based on inverter operation status, and 
monitor output can be freely customized based on the machine 
specifications.

•

All machines can be controlled by the inverter alone, and control 

can also be dispersed.

•

Time-based operation is possible by using in combination with the 

real-time clock function (optional LCD operation panel (FR-LU08)).

•

The FR-A800-E enables communication between multiple 

inverters using the I/O devices and special registers of the PLC 
function, which can create a small-scale system by Ethernet using 
the inverter-to-inverter link function.

Built-in PLC function in an inverter

(4) PLC control with an inverter

Rated current and four different overload capacity ratings (SLD rating (super light duty), LD rating (light duty), ND rating (normal duty), HD 
rating (heavy duty)) can be selected with parameters. The optimum inverter can be selected to suit the application, and by selecting an 
inverter with SLD or LD rating, equipment size can be reduced when compared with the FR-A700 series. The HD rating is best suited for 
applications requiring low speed and high torque.
If using an inverter with capacity of 75K or higher, or motor with capacity of 75 kW or higher, always select and install the inverter based on 
the capacity of the motor with DC reactor.

Multiple rating

(3) Selection of optimum capacity to suit the application

Refer to page 22 for the details.

Refer to page 16 for the inverter rating selection.

NEW

When an object is moved by a crane, swinging at the time of stopping is suppressed on the 
crane's transverse axis or traveling axis. This control cuts down the tact time and facilitates 
efficient operation.

Anti-sway control

(2) Reduced tact time with functionality suited to the application

NEW

Deceleration time can be reduced without a brake resistor.
Tact time can be eliminated at conveyor lines, etc.

Increased magnetic excitation deceleration

NEW

NEW

Rating

Application

Pr.570 (E301) setting

Overload current rating

(inverse-time characteristics)

Surrounding air temperature

0

110% 60 s,

120% 3 s

40°C

1

120% 60 s,

150% 3 s

50°C

2 (Initial value)

150% 60 s,

200% 3 s

50°C

3

200% 60 s,

250% 3 s

50°C

SLD

Super light duty

LD

Light duty

ND

Normal duty

HD

Heavy duty

Fan and Pump

Conveyor

Cranes, Press

FWD

REV

STOP

RESET

REV

FWD

STOP

RESET

P.RUN

PU
EXT
NET

MON
PRM

IM
PM

Crane

Conveyor

Fan

FR Configurator2

1

1

Inverter

Programmable

controller

GOT

Inverter

Ethernet cable

CC-Link IE Network

FR-A800-GF 
or FR-A800 & 
FR-A8NCE

FR-A800-GF 
or FR-A800 & 
FR-A8NCE

(                     )

Up to 120 units

can be connected

When only inverters

are connected

Features

Features

SYSTEM SUPPORT 

(FUNCTION)

High Equipment Functionality

Numerous functions and the extensive lineup of models are ready to support various systems.

Compatibility to various open networks

(1) Various network compatibility brings all the control in your hand

With FR-A700

With FR-A800

Inverter

15K

Motor 15 kW

Inverter

11K

(LD rating example)

Motor 15 kW

Space

saving

Shield Machines, Winding and Unwinding,

Printing Machines

Inverter

Hub

Router

Firewall

Inverter

Inverter

GOT

Programmable

controller

Factory

Equipment

Office

FR Configurator2

FR Configurator2

Office outside of the factory

Internet

FR-A800-E

FR-A800-GF

Using a controller, the inverter can be controlled and monitored via various types of network.

• Ethernet communication

•The CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is supported, so the network can be created easily. The inverter's status can be monitored and the 

parameters can be set via Internet. (MODBUS/TCP is also supported.)

• Other network communication

•CC-Link, SSCNETIII (/H), DeviceNet™, 

PROFIBUS-DPV0 are supported using a compatible 
communication option. Other Ethernet-based 
communication such as the CC-Link IE Field Network 
communication and the FL remote communication can 
be also supported.

•A function block (FB) programming for CC-Link 

communication is available for the MELSEC-Q/L series to 
create the inverter control sequence programs easily. (The 
FB library (collection of FB elements) can be downloaded 
from the Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website.)

•The standard model with an RS-485 interface 

(Mitsubishi inverter protocol, MODBUS

®

 RTU protocol) 

enables communication with other devices without 
using a communication option.

•The inverter has the CC-Link IE Field Network communication function, which 

enables immediate operation via the CC-Link IE Field Network.

NEW

For details of the CC-Link family compatible with the FR-A800 series inverters, refer to page 228.

12


background image

05

System Support

•

Parameters and setting frequency can be changed at the program.

•

Inverter control such as inverter operations triggered by input 

signals, signal output based on inverter operation status, and 
monitor output can be freely customized based on the machine 
specifications.

•

All machines can be controlled by the inverter alone, and control 

can also be dispersed.

•

Time-based operation is possible by using in combination with the 

real-time clock function (optional LCD operation panel (FR-LU08)).

•

The FR-A800-E enables communication between multiple 

inverters using the I/O devices and special registers of the PLC 
function, which can create a small-scale system by Ethernet using 
the inverter-to-inverter link function.

Built-in PLC function in an inverter

(4) PLC control with an inverter

Rated current and four different overload capacity ratings (SLD rating (super light duty), LD rating (light duty), ND rating (normal duty), HD 
rating (heavy duty)) can be selected with parameters. The optimum inverter can be selected to suit the application, and by selecting an 
inverter with SLD or LD rating, equipment size can be reduced when compared with the FR-A700 series. The HD rating is best suited for 
applications requiring low speed and high torque.
If using an inverter with capacity of 75K or higher, or motor with capacity of 75 kW or higher, always select and install the inverter based on 
the capacity of the motor with DC reactor.

Multiple rating

(3) Selection of optimum capacity to suit the application

Refer to page 22 for the details.

Refer to page 16 for the inverter rating selection.

NEW

When an object is moved by a crane, swinging at the time of stopping is suppressed on the 
crane's transverse axis or traveling axis. This control cuts down the tact time and facilitates 
efficient operation.

Anti-sway control

(2) Reduced tact time with functionality suited to the application

NEW

Deceleration time can be reduced without a brake resistor.
Tact time can be eliminated at conveyor lines, etc.

Increased magnetic excitation deceleration

NEW

NEW

Rating

Application

Pr.570 (E301) setting

Overload current rating

(inverse-time characteristics)

Surrounding air temperature

0

110% 60 s,

120% 3 s

40°C

1

120% 60 s,

150% 3 s

50°C

2 (Initial value)

150% 60 s,

200% 3 s

50°C

3

200% 60 s,

250% 3 s

50°C

SLD

Super light duty

LD

Light duty

ND

Normal duty

HD

Heavy duty

Fan and Pump

Conveyor

Cranes, Press

FWD

REV

STOP

RESET

REV

FWD

STOP

RESET

P.RUN

PU
EXT
NET

MON
PRM

IM
PM

Crane

Conveyor

Fan

FR Configurator2

1

1

Inverter

Programmable

controller

GOT

Inverter

Ethernet cable

CC-Link IE Network

FR-A800-GF 
or FR-A800 & 
FR-A8NCE

FR-A800-GF 
or FR-A800 & 
FR-A8NCE

(                     )

Up to 120 units

can be connected

When only inverters

are connected

Features

Features

SYSTEM SUPPORT 

(FUNCTION)

High Equipment Functionality

Numerous functions and the extensive lineup of models are ready to support various systems.

Compatibility to various open networks

(1) Various network compatibility brings all the control in your hand

With FR-A700

With FR-A800

Inverter

15K

Motor 15 kW

Inverter

11K

(LD rating example)

Motor 15 kW

Space

saving

Shield Machines, Winding and Unwinding,

Printing Machines

Inverter

Hub

Router

Firewall

Inverter

Inverter

GOT

Programmable

controller

Factory

Equipment

Office

FR Configurator2

FR Configurator2

Office outside of the factory

Internet

FR-A800-E

FR-A800-GF

Using a controller, the inverter can be controlled and monitored via various types of network.

• Ethernet communication

•The CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is supported, so the network can be created easily. The inverter's status can be monitored and the 

parameters can be set via Internet. (MODBUS/TCP is also supported.)

• Other network communication

•CC-Link, SSCNETIII (/H), DeviceNet™, 

PROFIBUS-DPV0 are supported using a compatible 
communication option. Other Ethernet-based 
communication such as the CC-Link IE Field Network 
communication and the FL remote communication can 
be also supported.

•A function block (FB) programming for CC-Link 

communication is available for the MELSEC-Q/L series to 
create the inverter control sequence programs easily. (The 
FB library (collection of FB elements) can be downloaded 
from the Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website.)

•The standard model with an RS-485 interface 

(Mitsubishi inverter protocol, MODBUS

®

 RTU protocol) 

enables communication with other devices without 
using a communication option.

•The inverter has the CC-Link IE Field Network communication function, which 

enables immediate operation via the CC-Link IE Field Network.

NEW

For details of the CC-Link family compatible with the FR-A800 series inverters, refer to page 228.

13


background image

The inverters with PCB coating (IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2) and conductive 
plating are available for improved environmental resistance. ("-60" or "-06" 
is affixed to the end of the inverter model name.)

Circuit board coating

(3) Protected in hazardous environment

In addition to the 22K and lower, 400 V class 30 to 55K models 
have also been equipped with a built-in brake transistor. In an 
application where the motor is hardly decelerated, connecting a 
brake resistor can shorten the deceleration time; no brake unit or 
power regeneration converter is required. Wiring, space, and 
ultimately the cost will be all saved.

Built-in brake transistor

(4) Wire saving, space saving

Compliant with a variety of standards, our extensive range of the FR-A800 series inverter covers various applications.

90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10

0

30

50

70

100

200

300

[dBμV/m]

Frequency [MHz]

EN 61800-3

Category C3 QP level

EN 61800-3

Category C3 QP level

FR-A700 QP value

FR-A700 QP value

FR-A800 QP value

FR-A800 QP value

  NK 

(Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

  ABS 

(American Bureau of Shipping)

  BV 

(Bureau Veritas)

  LR 

(Lloyd's Register of Shipping)

 DNV GL  (DNV GL AS)
  CCS 

(China Classification Society)

  KR 

(Korean Register of Shipping)

Certification body

1

1

*1

: The IP55 compatible model with a built-in C3 filter is not compliant with the ship 

  classification standards.
For details of the models compliant with global standards, contact your local sales office.

•

Inverters can be installed nearby the machine, minimizing cable 

length between the inverter and motor.

•

Support is available for use even in high-humidity or dusty 

environments, facilitating a more flexible choice of installation 
locations.

•

By enclosing a DC reactor, it requires less wiring and less space.

•

Compatible with cable glands to meet the IP55 specification at the 

wiring section.

IP55 compatible

(5) Direct installation by the machine

•

Complies with UL, cUL, and EC Directives (CE marking), and the 

Radio Waves Act (South Korea) (KC marking). It is also certified as 
compliant with the Eurasian Conformity (EAC).

•

The inverters are compliant with the EU RoHS Directive (Restriction 

of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and 
Electronic Equipment), friendly to people and to the environment.

•

For the 400 V class

*

1

, compliance with various countries ship 

classifications allows use on ship equipment. (A noise filter is 
required for the FR-A840 inverter and the FR-CC2 converter unit, 
and a ferrite core is required for the FR-A846 inverter. (Refer to 
page 191).)

Compliance with a variety of standards

(2) Global compatibility

NEW

NEW

The inverter module and the converter module are physically separated for the 315K or 
higher capacity models.
  Inverter module :  FR-A842
  Converter module : FR-CC2
This facilitates flexible support for a variety of systems such as common bus line (to be 
supported soon) and parallel operation, allowing the installation space to be minimized 
and costs to be reduced. The converter unit can be run with 12-phase rectifier power 
supply. Motors up to 1350 kW (LD rating) can be driven by the inverters with parallel 
operation function (FR-A842-P) and the converter units (FR-CC2-P).

Separate inverter and converter modules

(6) Flexible configuration to meet the needs

NEW

IP 5 5

•First digit

 (protection rating against solid objects)

•Second digit

 (protection rating against water)

05

System Support

Features

Features

Installation Anywhere

(1) Comprehensive noise countermeasures

Troublesome acquisition of standards is unnecessary.

•

The FR-A800 series is equipped with an EMC filter as standard for 

compliance with EMC Directive with the inverter alone. 
(EN 61800-3 2nd Environment Category C3)

•

The newly developed drive technology and the power supply 

technology minimize the EMI emitted from inverters.

Compliance with EU EMC Directive with inverter alone

55K or lower
75K or higher

Standard (built-in)
Standard (built-in)

Option (sold separately)
Option (sold separately)

Standard (built-in)

Option (sold separately)

Capacitive filter

 (radio noise filter)

Input-side

common mode choke

(line noise filter)

DC reactor

Inverter module

Converter module

Separate

Common bus

Parallel operation

Some functions from the standard inverter are limited 

or not available. (Refer to page 229.)

SYSTEM SUPPORT 

(ENVIRONMENT 

ADAPTABILITY)

Class 5

Protection against dust. No ingress of 
dust that may inhibit normal operation.

IP rating

Description

Class 5

Protection against water jets 
from all directions.

IP rating

Description

M

Inverter

module

Motor

Inverter module

Converter

module

FR-CC2

FR-A842

FR-A842

M

Motor

M

Inverter

module

Inverter module

Converter

module

Converter module

M

FR-CC2-P

FR-A842-P

FR-A842-P

FR-POL

*

2

a

a'

FR-POL

*

2

FR-CC2-P

Motor

*2

: When the cable length from 

an inverter to the node point 

(a/a') is less than 10 m, 

install the FR-POL. (Refer to 

page 178.)

14


background image

The inverters with PCB coating (IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2) and conductive 
plating are available for improved environmental resistance. ("-60" or "-06" 
is affixed to the end of the inverter model name.)

Circuit board coating

(3) Protected in hazardous environment

In addition to the 22K and lower, 400 V class 30 to 55K models 
have also been equipped with a built-in brake transistor. In an 
application where the motor is hardly decelerated, connecting a 
brake resistor can shorten the deceleration time; no brake unit or 
power regeneration converter is required. Wiring, space, and 
ultimately the cost will be all saved.

Built-in brake transistor

(4) Wire saving, space saving

Compliant with a variety of standards, our extensive range of the FR-A800 series inverter covers various applications.

90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10

0

30

50

70

100

200

300

[dBμV/m]

Frequency [MHz]

EN 61800-3

Category C3 QP level

EN 61800-3

Category C3 QP level

FR-A700 QP value

FR-A700 QP value

FR-A800 QP value

FR-A800 QP value

  NK 

(Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

  ABS 

(American Bureau of Shipping)

  BV 

(Bureau Veritas)

  LR 

(Lloyd's Register of Shipping)

 DNV GL  (DNV GL AS)
  CCS 

(China Classification Society)

  KR 

(Korean Register of Shipping)

Certification body

1

1

*1

: The IP55 compatible model with a built-in C3 filter is not compliant with the ship 

  classification standards.
For details of the models compliant with global standards, contact your local sales office.

•

Inverters can be installed nearby the machine, minimizing cable 

length between the inverter and motor.

•

Support is available for use even in high-humidity or dusty 

environments, facilitating a more flexible choice of installation 
locations.

•

By enclosing a DC reactor, it requires less wiring and less space.

•

Compatible with cable glands to meet the IP55 specification at the 

wiring section.

IP55 compatible

(5) Direct installation by the machine

•

Complies with UL, cUL, and EC Directives (CE marking), and the 

Radio Waves Act (South Korea) (KC marking). It is also certified as 
compliant with the Eurasian Conformity (EAC).

•

The inverters are compliant with the EU RoHS Directive (Restriction 

of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and 
Electronic Equipment), friendly to people and to the environment.

•

For the 400 V class

*

1

, compliance with various countries ship 

classifications allows use on ship equipment. (A noise filter is 
required for the FR-A840 inverter and the FR-CC2 converter unit, 
and a ferrite core is required for the FR-A846 inverter. (Refer to 
page 191).)

Compliance with a variety of standards

(2) Global compatibility

NEW

NEW

The inverter module and the converter module are physically separated for the 315K or 
higher capacity models.
  Inverter module :  FR-A842
  Converter module : FR-CC2
This facilitates flexible support for a variety of systems such as common bus line (to be 
supported soon) and parallel operation, allowing the installation space to be minimized 
and costs to be reduced. The converter unit can be run with 12-phase rectifier power 
supply. Motors up to 1350 kW (LD rating) can be driven by the inverters with parallel 
operation function (FR-A842-P) and the converter units (FR-CC2-P).

Separate inverter and converter modules

(6) Flexible configuration to meet the needs

NEW

IP 5 5

•First digit

 (protection rating against solid objects)

•Second digit

 (protection rating against water)

05

System Support

Features

Features

Installation Anywhere

(1) Comprehensive noise countermeasures

Troublesome acquisition of standards is unnecessary.

•

The FR-A800 series is equipped with an EMC filter as standard for 

compliance with EMC Directive with the inverter alone. 
(EN 61800-3 2nd Environment Category C3)

•

The newly developed drive technology and the power supply 

technology minimize the EMI emitted from inverters.

Compliance with EU EMC Directive with inverter alone

55K or lower
75K or higher

Standard (built-in)
Standard (built-in)

Option (sold separately)
Option (sold separately)

Standard (built-in)

Option (sold separately)

Capacitive filter

 (radio noise filter)

Input-side

common mode choke

(line noise filter)

DC reactor

Inverter module

Converter module

Separate

Common bus

Parallel operation

Some functions from the standard inverter are limited 

or not available. (Refer to page 229.)

SYSTEM SUPPORT 

(ENVIRONMENT 

ADAPTABILITY)

Class 5

Protection against dust. No ingress of 
dust that may inhibit normal operation.

IP rating

Description

Class 5

Protection against water jets 
from all directions.

IP rating

Description

M

Inverter

module

Motor

Inverter module

Converter

module

FR-CC2

FR-A842

FR-A842

M

Motor

M

Inverter

module

Inverter module

Converter

module

Converter module

M

FR-CC2-P

FR-A842-P

FR-A842-P

FR-POL

*

2

a

a'

FR-POL

*

2

FR-CC2-P

Motor

*2

: When the cable length from 

an inverter to the node point 

(a/a') is less than 10 m, 

install the FR-POL. (Refer to 

page 178.)

15


background image

Extensive lineup

0.4K

00046

0.4K

00023

110K

03250

0.75K

00077

0.75K

00038

132K

03610

1.5K

00105

1.5K

00052

160K

04320

2.2K

00167

2.2K

00083

185K

04810

3.7K

00250

3.7K

00126

220K

05470

5.5K

00340

5.5K

00170

250K

06100

7.5K

00490

7.5K

00250

280K

06830

11K

00630

11K

00310

15K

00770

15K

00380

18.5K

00930

18.5K

00470

22K

01250

22K

00620

30K

01540

30K

00770

37K

01870

37K

00930

45K

02330

45K

01160

55K

03160

55K

01800

75K

03800

75K

02160

90K

04750

90K

02600

2
4

Symbol Voltage class

200 V class
400 V class

0

Symbol Structure, functionality

Standard model

None

GF

Symbol

Function

Standard type

With built-in

CC-Link IE Field

Network function

None

GF

P

Symbol

Function

Standard type

With built-in

CC-Link IE Field

Network function

Parallel operation

None

P

Symbol

Function

Standard type

Parallel operation

None

60

06

*3

Symbol Circuit board coating

 (IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2 compatible)

Plated

conductor

Without

With
With

Without
Without

With

0.4K to 280K

Inverter ND rated

capacity (kW)

Description

4

Symbol Voltage class

400 V class

H

Symbol Voltage class

400 V class

2

Symbol Structure, functionality

Separated converter type

None

60
06

Symbol Circuit board coating

 (IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2 compatible)

Plated

conductor

Without

With
With

Without
Without

With

315K to 500K

Inverter ND rated

capacity (kW)

Description

: Released model

0.4K

00023

110K

03250

0.75K

00038

132K

03610

1.5K

00052

2.2K

00083

3.7K

00126

5.5K

00170

7.5K

00250

11K

00310

15K

00380

18.5K

00470

22K

00620

30K

00770

37K

00930

45K

01160

55K

01800

75K

02160

90K

02600

Three-phase

400V class

FR-A846-

(with a built-in

DC reactor)

•Standard model

•IP55 compatible model

Inverter by rating

Inverter model

FR-A820-

SLD (Super light duty)

Rated current

(A)

LD (Light duty)

ND (Normal duty initial value)

HD (Heavy duty)

0.4K

0.75K

1.5K
2.2K
3.7K
5.5K
7.5K

11K
15K

18.5K

22K
30K
37K
45K
55K
75K
90K

00046
00077
00105
00167
00250
00340
00490
00630
00770
00930
01250
01540
01870
02330
03160
03800
04750

1.5

3
5
8

11

17.5

24
33
46
61
76
90

115
145
175
215
288

0.2
0.4

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75

3
5
8

11

17.5

24
33
46
61
76
90

115
145
175
215
288
346

0.4

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75
90

4.2

7

9.6

15.2

23
31
45
58

70.5

85

114
140
170
212
288
346
432

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75
90

110

4.6
7.7

10.5
16.7

25
34
49
63
77
93

125
154
187
233
316
380
475

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75

90/110

132

•Overload current rating

Rated current

(A)

Rated current

(A)

Rated current

(A)

Inverter model

FR-A84-

0.4K

0.75K

1.5K
2.2K
3.7K
5.5K
7.5K

11K
15K

18.5K

22K
30K
37K
45K
55K
75K
90K

110K
132K
160K
185K
220K
250K
280K
315K
355K
400K
450K
500K

00023
00038
00052
00083
00126
00170
00250
00310
00380
00470
00620
00770
00930
01160
01800
02160
02600
03250
03610
04320
04810
05470
06100
06830
07700
08660
09620
10940
12120

0.8
1.5
2.5

4
6
9

12
17
23
31
38
44
57
71
86

110
144
180
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866

0.2
0.4

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75
90

110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450

1.5
2.5

4
6
9

12
17
23
31
38
44
57
71
86

110
144
180
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866
962

0.4

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75
90

110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500

2.1
3.5
4.8
7.6

11.5

16
23
29
35
43
57
70
85

106
144
180
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866
962

1094

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75
90

110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560

2.3
3.8
5.2
8.3

12.6

17
25
31
38
47
62
77
93

116
180
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866
962

1094
1212

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55

75/90

110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630

SLD

LD

ND
HD

110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40°C
120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

*1

: The applicable motor capacity is the maximum applicable capacity of a Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.

•200 V class

•400 V class

F R - A 8 4 2 -

•Separated converter type

F R - C C 2 - H 315K - 60

60
06

Symbol Circuit board coating

 (IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2 compatible)

Plated

conductor

With
With

Without

With

315K to 630K

Symbol

Applicable motor capacity (kW) 

Description

•Converter unit

F R - A 8 4 6 -

*1

FM

(terminal FM equipped model)

CA

(terminal CA equipped model)

1

1

*1

*1

*1

Features

Features

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

SLD (Super light duty)

Rated current

(A)

LD (Light duty)

ND (Normal duty initial value)

HD (Heavy duty)

Rated current

(A)

Rated current

(A)

Rated current

(A)

*1

*1

*1

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

For selection of the DC reactor and the converter unit, refer to page 204.

Symbol

*

1

Symbol

*

1

Type

*

2

Three-phase

200V class

FR-A820-

*

4

Three-phase

400V class

FR-A840-

*

4

*

1

0.4K to 132K

Symbol

*

1

Inverter ND rated capacity (kW)

Description

4

400 V class

Symbol Voltage class

Symbol Structure, functionality

6

IP55 compatible model

C2
C3

Symbol EMC filter

Built-in C2 filter
Built-in C3 filter

60
06

With
With

Without

With

Symbol

Circuit board coating

(IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2 compatible)

Plated

conductor

*1

: Models can be alternatively indicated with the inverter rated current (SLD rating).

 

(For the FR-A842-P and the FR-A846, the current rating is LD or ND. However, the rated current used to represent the model is the SLD rated current of the standard model.)

*2

: Specification differs by the type as follows.

*3

: Available for the 5.5K or higher.

*4

: For using the 75K or higher inverter and a 75 kW or higher motor, always install a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.

*5

: Always install the converter unit (FR-CC2(-P)). (Not required when a high power factor converter (FR-HC2) is used.)

Terminal FM (pulse train output)
Terminal AM (analog voltage output (0 to ±10 VDC))
Terminal CA (analog current output (0 to 20 mADC))
Terminal AM (analog voltage output (0 to ±10 VDC))

Sink logic

Source logic

60 Hz

50 Hz

OFF

ON

9999

(same as the power supply voltage)

8888

(95% of the power supply voltage)

Type

Monitor output

Built-in EMC filter

Initial setting

Control logic Rated frequency

Pr.19 Base frequency voltage

F R - A 8 2 0 - 0.4K - 1 -

1
2

E1
E2

Symbol

Communication

type

FM
CA
FM
CA

RS-485

Ethernet

Type

*

2

1
2

E1
E2

Symbol

Communication

type

FM
CA
FM
CA

RS-485

Ethernet

Type

*

2

1
2

E1
E2

Symbol

Communication

type

FM
CA
FM
CA

RS-485

Ethernet

315K - 1 -

7.5K - 1 - 60 C3

For the details of the lineup, please contact your sales representative.

315K

07700

—

355K

08660

—

400K

09620


450K

10940


500K

12120


*

5

Three-phase 400V class

*

5

FR-A842-(-E)(-GF)

FR-A842--P

315K

—

355K

—

400K


450K


630K

—

560K


500K


Three-phase 400V class

(with a built-in DC reactor)

FR-CC2-H

FR-CC2-H-P

16


background image

Extensive lineup

0.4K

00046

0.4K

00023

110K

03250

0.75K

00077

0.75K

00038

132K

03610

1.5K

00105

1.5K

00052

160K

04320

2.2K

00167

2.2K

00083

185K

04810

3.7K

00250

3.7K

00126

220K

05470

5.5K

00340

5.5K

00170

250K

06100

7.5K

00490

7.5K

00250

280K

06830

11K

00630

11K

00310

15K

00770

15K

00380

18.5K

00930

18.5K

00470

22K

01250

22K

00620

30K

01540

30K

00770

37K

01870

37K

00930

45K

02330

45K

01160

55K

03160

55K

01800

75K

03800

75K

02160

90K

04750

90K

02600

2
4

Symbol Voltage class

200 V class
400 V class

0

Symbol Structure, functionality

Standard model

None

GF

Symbol

Function

Standard type

With built-in

CC-Link IE Field

Network function

None

GF

P

Symbol

Function

Standard type

With built-in

CC-Link IE Field

Network function

Parallel operation

None

P

Symbol

Function

Standard type

Parallel operation

None

60

06

*3

Symbol Circuit board coating

 (IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2 compatible)

Plated

conductor

Without

With
With

Without
Without

With

0.4K to 280K

Inverter ND rated

capacity (kW)

Description

4

Symbol Voltage class

400 V class

H

Symbol Voltage class

400 V class

2

Symbol Structure, functionality

Separated converter type

None

60
06

Symbol Circuit board coating

 (IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2 compatible)

Plated

conductor

Without

With
With

Without
Without

With

315K to 500K

Inverter ND rated

capacity (kW)

Description

: Released model

0.4K

00023

110K

03250

0.75K

00038

132K

03610

1.5K

00052

2.2K

00083

3.7K

00126

5.5K

00170

7.5K

00250

11K

00310

15K

00380

18.5K

00470

22K

00620

30K

00770

37K

00930

45K

01160

55K

01800

75K

02160

90K

02600

Three-phase

400V class

FR-A846-

(with a built-in

DC reactor)

•Standard model

•IP55 compatible model

Inverter by rating

Inverter model

FR-A820-

SLD (Super light duty)

Rated current

(A)

LD (Light duty)

ND (Normal duty initial value)

HD (Heavy duty)

0.4K

0.75K

1.5K
2.2K
3.7K
5.5K
7.5K

11K
15K

18.5K

22K
30K
37K
45K
55K
75K
90K

00046
00077
00105
00167
00250
00340
00490
00630
00770
00930
01250
01540
01870
02330
03160
03800
04750

1.5

3
5
8

11

17.5

24
33
46
61
76
90

115
145
175
215
288

0.2
0.4

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75

3
5
8

11

17.5

24
33
46
61
76
90

115
145
175
215
288
346

0.4

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75
90

4.2

7

9.6

15.2

23
31
45
58

70.5

85

114
140
170
212
288
346
432

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75
90

110

4.6
7.7

10.5
16.7

25
34
49
63
77
93

125
154
187
233
316
380
475

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75

90/110

132

•Overload current rating

Rated current

(A)

Rated current

(A)

Rated current

(A)

Inverter model

FR-A84-

0.4K

0.75K

1.5K
2.2K
3.7K
5.5K
7.5K

11K
15K

18.5K

22K
30K
37K
45K
55K
75K
90K

110K
132K
160K
185K
220K
250K
280K
315K
355K
400K
450K
500K

00023
00038
00052
00083
00126
00170
00250
00310
00380
00470
00620
00770
00930
01160
01800
02160
02600
03250
03610
04320
04810
05470
06100
06830
07700
08660
09620
10940
12120

0.8
1.5
2.5

4
6
9

12
17
23
31
38
44
57
71
86

110
144
180
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866

0.2
0.4

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75
90

110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450

1.5
2.5

4
6
9

12
17
23
31
38
44
57
71
86

110
144
180
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866
962

0.4

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75
90

110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500

2.1
3.5
4.8
7.6

11.5

16
23
29
35
43
57
70
85

106
144
180
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866
962

1094

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55
75
90

110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560

2.3
3.8
5.2
8.3

12.6

17
25
31
38
47
62
77
93

116
180
216
260
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
770
866
962

1094
1212

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55

75/90

110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630

SLD

LD

ND
HD

110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40°C
120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

*1

: The applicable motor capacity is the maximum applicable capacity of a Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.

•200 V class

•400 V class

F R - A 8 4 2 -

•Separated converter type

F R - C C 2 - H 315K - 60

60
06

Symbol Circuit board coating

 (IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2 compatible)

Plated

conductor

With
With

Without

With

315K to 630K

Symbol

Applicable motor capacity (kW) 

Description

•Converter unit

F R - A 8 4 6 -

*1

FM

(terminal FM equipped model)

CA

(terminal CA equipped model)

1

1

*1

*1

*1

Features

Features

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

SLD (Super light duty)

Rated current

(A)

LD (Light duty)

ND (Normal duty initial value)

HD (Heavy duty)

Rated current

(A)

Rated current

(A)

Rated current

(A)

*1

*1

*1

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

Motor capacity

(kW)

*1

For selection of the DC reactor and the converter unit, refer to page 204.

Symbol

*

1

Symbol

*

1

Type

*

2

Three-phase

200V class

FR-A820-

*

4

Three-phase

400V class

FR-A840-

*

4

*

1

0.4K to 132K

Symbol

*

1

Inverter ND rated capacity (kW)

Description

4

400 V class

Symbol Voltage class

Symbol Structure, functionality

6

IP55 compatible model

C2
C3

Symbol EMC filter

Built-in C2 filter
Built-in C3 filter

60
06

With
With

Without

With

Symbol

Circuit board coating

(IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2 compatible)

Plated

conductor

*1

: Models can be alternatively indicated with the inverter rated current (SLD rating).

 

(For the FR-A842-P and the FR-A846, the current rating is LD or ND. However, the rated current used to represent the model is the SLD rated current of the standard model.)

*2

: Specification differs by the type as follows.

*3

: Available for the 5.5K or higher.

*4

: For using the 75K or higher inverter and a 75 kW or higher motor, always install a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.

*5

: Always install the converter unit (FR-CC2(-P)). (Not required when a high power factor converter (FR-HC2) is used.)

Terminal FM (pulse train output)
Terminal AM (analog voltage output (0 to ±10 VDC))
Terminal CA (analog current output (0 to 20 mADC))
Terminal AM (analog voltage output (0 to ±10 VDC))

Sink logic

Source logic

60 Hz

50 Hz

OFF

ON

9999

(same as the power supply voltage)

8888

(95% of the power supply voltage)

Type

Monitor output

Built-in EMC filter

Initial setting

Control logic Rated frequency

Pr.19 Base frequency voltage

F R - A 8 2 0 - 0.4K - 1 -

1
2

E1
E2

Symbol

Communication

type

FM
CA
FM
CA

RS-485

Ethernet

Type

*

2

1
2

E1
E2

Symbol

Communication

type

FM
CA
FM
CA

RS-485

Ethernet

Type

*

2

1
2

E1
E2

Symbol

Communication

type

FM
CA
FM
CA

RS-485

Ethernet

315K - 1 -

7.5K - 1 - 60 C3

For the details of the lineup, please contact your sales representative.

315K

07700

—

355K

08660

—

400K

09620


450K

10940


500K

12120


*

5

Three-phase 400V class

*

5

FR-A842-(-E)(-GF)

FR-A842--P

315K

—

355K

—

400K


450K


630K

—

560K


500K


Three-phase 400V class

(with a built-in DC reactor)

FR-CC2-H

FR-CC2-H-P

17


background image

Traveling motor

Crane

Lift motor

Traverse motor

Traveling motor

W

IM

Inverter

Rail

Traveling
wheel

Power

regeneration

converter

IM

IM

IM

Printing

section

Deviation

sensor

PLC

Main speed 
setter

Main speed (0 to 10V)

Dancer position

(contactless

potentiometer)

Reference axis

Intermediate axis

IM

IM

2

2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

BEST SUITED FOR EVERY MACHINE

Application example

Line Control 

(Winding and Unwinding)

Point

Point

Point

Typical industries

Material tension is kept constant by 
employing speed control and torque control 
to eliminate slack and uneven winding.
By using a motor with the speed ratio 
most appropriate for the machine, the 
inverter capacity can be downsized. 

Textile industry

Steel industry

Pulp, paper, paper products manufacturing industries

Dancer control

The dancer control detects the dancer roll positions and performs 
PID operation to keep the sheet tension constant.

Traverse function

The traverse function, used for the traverse axis of spinning machine, 
prevents uneven winding or collapsing.

Torque accuracy

NEW

NEW

Real sensorless vector control

Vector control

Torque control range
Absolute torque accuracy

*

1

Repetitive torque accuracy

*

2

1 : 20

±20%
±10%

1 : 50

±10%

*

3

±5%

*

3

*1

: Difference between the actual torque and the torque command

*2

: Fluctuation between the average of the actual torque and the actual measured torque (repeatability of the torque)

*3

: When online auto tuning (adaptive magnetic flux observer) enabled

Cranes

Point

Point

Point

Relentless operation is possible with HD 
rating when lifting. And when traveling, 
vibrations applied to objects being conveyed 
are suppressed with anti-sway control, 
facilitating efficient operation.

Typical industries

Steel industry

Warehousing

Water transportation

Textile industry

Metal products manufacturing

Lumber, wood product

manufacturing industries

[Starting torque] 

Real sensorless vector control 200% 

(ND rating) 

 

Vector control 200% 

(ND rating)

 

(150% of initial setting for the 5.5K and higher)

[Zero-speed torque] 

Vector control: 200% 

(Select HD rating.)

Anti-sway control

When an object is moved by a crane, swinging at the time of stopping 
is suppressed on the crane's transverse axis or traveling axis.
This control cuts down the tact time and facilitates efficient operation.

High torque at low speed

PLC function

By employing synchronous operation for gate-type cranes, positional 
displacement of both axes is corrected during travel, achieving highly 
accurate control without using an external controller.

NEW

NEW

Shield Machines

Point

Point

Point

Inverters can be used to provide 
high starting torque for digging, 
and for transferring earth and sand 
after digging. A lineup of products 
compatible with the IP55 protective 
structure is available as a separate 
series.

Typical industries

Construction industry

Tor

que (

%

)

Real sensorless vector control

Motors are controlled without encoders, which are 
susceptible to hazardous environment. Use of 
such motors naturally provides higher reliability. 
Torque accuracy has also improved because the 
temperature is better controlled.

Droop control

This function balances the load between motors when using multiple inverters.

CC-Link IE communication

CC-Link IE communication enables a programmable controller or a GOT to 
control multiple inverters. By using Ethernet cables, less wiring is required. 

Temperature/torque characteristics

Temperature (°C)

140

130

120

110

100

90

80

28.3

55.8

70.1

79.6

86.0

90.8

94.1

96.2

97.7

98.5

99.1

Machine Tools

Point

Point

Point

The rotation speed can be set according 
to the material being processed. Stable 
high-speed rotation is also possible.

Typical industries

Metal products manufacturing

High-speed operation

[Operating frequency] 

V/F control 

590 Hz

 

Vector control  400 Hz

 

Real sensorless vector control 400 Hz

Torque limit function

This is effective in preventing machine damage (tool damage 
prevention, etc.) due to sudden disturbance torque.

Orientation control

 (vector control)

The inverter can adjust the stop position (Orientation control) using an 
encoder attached to a place such as the main shaft of the machine.

Jig driving motor

Grindstone driving motor

Insert a workpiece

Grindstone

Jig

Cutter

section

CC-Link IE

Inverter

GOT

PLC

Shield Machine

Enclosure

Pinion

Motor

R

R

IM

IM

18


background image

Traveling motor

Crane

Lift motor

Traverse motor

Traveling motor

W

IM

Inverter

Rail

Traveling
wheel

Power

regeneration

converter

IM

IM

IM

Printing

section

Deviation

sensor

PLC

Main speed 
setter

Main speed (0 to 10V)

Dancer position

(contactless

potentiometer)

Reference axis

Intermediate axis

IM

IM

2

2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

BEST SUITED FOR EVERY MACHINE

Application example

Line Control 

(Winding and Unwinding)

Point

Point

Point

Typical industries

Material tension is kept constant by 
employing speed control and torque control 
to eliminate slack and uneven winding.
By using a motor with the speed ratio 
most appropriate for the machine, the 
inverter capacity can be downsized. 

Textile industry

Steel industry

Pulp, paper, paper products manufacturing industries

Dancer control

The dancer control detects the dancer roll positions and performs 
PID operation to keep the sheet tension constant.

Traverse function

The traverse function, used for the traverse axis of spinning machine, 
prevents uneven winding or collapsing.

Torque accuracy

NEW

NEW

Real sensorless vector control

Vector control

Torque control range
Absolute torque accuracy

*

1

Repetitive torque accuracy

*

2

1 : 20

±20%
±10%

1 : 50

±10%

*

3

±5%

*

3

*1

: Difference between the actual torque and the torque command

*2

: Fluctuation between the average of the actual torque and the actual measured torque (repeatability of the torque)

*3

: When online auto tuning (adaptive magnetic flux observer) enabled

Cranes

Point

Point

Point

Relentless operation is possible with HD 
rating when lifting. And when traveling, 
vibrations applied to objects being conveyed 
are suppressed with anti-sway control, 
facilitating efficient operation.

Typical industries

Steel industry

Warehousing

Water transportation

Textile industry

Metal products manufacturing

Lumber, wood product

manufacturing industries

[Starting torque] 

Real sensorless vector control 200% 

(ND rating) 

 

Vector control 200% 

(ND rating)

 

(150% of initial setting for the 5.5K and higher)

[Zero-speed torque] 

Vector control: 200% 

(Select HD rating.)

Anti-sway control

When an object is moved by a crane, swinging at the time of stopping 
is suppressed on the crane's transverse axis or traveling axis.
This control cuts down the tact time and facilitates efficient operation.

High torque at low speed

PLC function

By employing synchronous operation for gate-type cranes, positional 
displacement of both axes is corrected during travel, achieving highly 
accurate control without using an external controller.

NEW

NEW

Shield Machines

Point

Point

Point

Inverters can be used to provide 
high starting torque for digging, 
and for transferring earth and sand 
after digging. A lineup of products 
compatible with the IP55 protective 
structure is available as a separate 
series.

Typical industries

Construction industry

Tor

que (

%

)

Real sensorless vector control

Motors are controlled without encoders, which are 
susceptible to hazardous environment. Use of 
such motors naturally provides higher reliability. 
Torque accuracy has also improved because the 
temperature is better controlled.

Droop control

This function balances the load between motors when using multiple inverters.

CC-Link IE communication

CC-Link IE communication enables a programmable controller or a GOT to 
control multiple inverters. By using Ethernet cables, less wiring is required. 

Temperature/torque characteristics

Temperature (°C)

140

130

120

110

100

90

80

28.3

55.8

70.1

79.6

86.0

90.8

94.1

96.2

97.7

98.5

99.1

Machine Tools

Point

Point

Point

The rotation speed can be set according 
to the material being processed. Stable 
high-speed rotation is also possible.

Typical industries

Metal products manufacturing

High-speed operation

[Operating frequency] 

V/F control 

590 Hz

 

Vector control  400 Hz

 

Real sensorless vector control 400 Hz

Torque limit function

This is effective in preventing machine damage (tool damage 
prevention, etc.) due to sudden disturbance torque.

Orientation control

 (vector control)

The inverter can adjust the stop position (Orientation control) using an 
encoder attached to a place such as the main shaft of the machine.

Jig driving motor

Grindstone driving motor

Insert a workpiece

Grindstone

Jig

Cutter

section

CC-Link IE

Inverter

GOT

PLC

Shield Machine

Enclosure

Pinion

Motor

R

R

IM

IM

19


background image

Compressors

Printing Machines

Feeding table

IM

Lumber

IM

Speed setting

Inverter

2

2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

BEST SUITED FOR EVERY MACHINE

Application example

Wood Processing Machines

Point

Point

Point

Even when processing areas of varying 
hardness such as lumber knots, 
processing time delays are suppressed 
by minimizing reductions in motor speed.

Typical industries

Lumber, wood product

manufacturing industries

Forestry

Real sensorless vector control, vector control

Improved speed response to sudden load fluctuations when 
compared with the previous model (FR-A700).
[Response speed]
  Real sensorless vector control 50 Hz

*

1

 (A700: 20 Hz)

  Vector control 130 Hz (A700: 50 Hz)

Torque limiting function

This function is effective in preventing machine damage (tool damage, 
etc.) due to sudden disturbance torque.

*1

: At 3.7 kW with no load. Differs depending on the load conditions and motor capacity.

Conveyance

Point

Point

Point

The new series offers a wealth of 
functionality suited to applications such 
as high-accuracy conveyance and target 
position stoppage, which contributes to 
reduction in tact time.

Steel industry

Metal products manufacturing

Textile industry

Water transportation,

fishing industry

Warehousing

Typical industries

Lumber, wood product

manufacturing industries

PM sensorless vector control

Multiple axes are strictly controlled to run at the same speed without 
using a driving belt. This control method provides driving accurate 
enough for transporting glass substrates without damaging them.
Simple positioning control is also available.

(when high frequency superposition control selected in combination with MM-CF)

Increased magnetic excitation deceleration

Deceleration time can be reduced without a brake resistor.
Tact time can be eliminated at conveyor lines, etc.

PLC function

When a few sensors are used to check the presence of goods on a 
conveyor and the arrival of such goods, the inverter can directly 
receive such signals from the sensors for the PLC control.

NEW

NEW

NEW

Move

Fork

Lift

Inverter

Power regeneration

converter

Inverter

Ink roller

Water roller

Paper

Point

Point

Point

The highly-accurate speed control 
minimizes color unevenness and 
displaced prints.

Printing and related industries

Typical industries

Speed control

PM sensorless vector control

The speed fluctuations of the ink roller axis and water roller axis are 
minimized to eliminate print unevenness.
[Speed fluctuation ratio]  ±0.05% (Digital input)
"No encoder" means less trouble and higher reliability.

Real sensorless vector control

PM sensorless vector control

Vector control

Speed response

Speed control 
range

50 Hz

*

1

1:200

(when power drive

at 0.3 Hz to 60 Hz)

130 Hz

1:1500

(both driving/

regeneration

*2

)

50 Hz

1:1000

*

3

(when HD rating selected)

*1

: At 3.7 kW with no load. Differs depending on the load conditions and motor capacity.

*2

: If using regeneration unit (option) during regeneration

*3

: When high frequency superposition control selected in combination with the MM-CF

Point

Point

Point

The PM sensorless vector control is useful 
in generating high starting torque. By using 
this control method with an IPM motor, 
much power can be saved.

 This small 

motor also makes the machine small.

Steel industry

Metal products manufacturing

Textile industry

Warehousing

Typical industries

Lumber, wood product

manufacturing industries

Water transportation,

fishing industry

PM sensorless vector control

Smooth operation is possible even at start-up under high load.
[Starting torque]  1.5 kW or lower: 200%, 2.0 kW or higher: 150%

When high frequency superposition control selected in combination 
with MM-CF

PID control

Pressure can be automatically adjusted by converting signals from 
the encoder to inverter input signals and feeding them back.

Parallel operation function

Even a large compressor can be operated by FR-A842-P inverters 
with parallel operation function, which can operate a 630 kW or 
higher motor.

GOT

Inverter

Tank

Compressor

20


background image

Compressors

Printing Machines

Feeding table

IM

Lumber

IM

Speed setting

Inverter

2

2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

BEST SUITED FOR EVERY MACHINE

Application example

Wood Processing Machines

Point

Point

Point

Even when processing areas of varying 
hardness such as lumber knots, 
processing time delays are suppressed 
by minimizing reductions in motor speed.

Typical industries

Lumber, wood product

manufacturing industries

Forestry

Real sensorless vector control, vector control

Improved speed response to sudden load fluctuations when 
compared with the previous model (FR-A700).
[Response speed]
  Real sensorless vector control 50 Hz

*

1

 (A700: 20 Hz)

  Vector control 130 Hz (A700: 50 Hz)

Torque limiting function

This function is effective in preventing machine damage (tool damage, 
etc.) due to sudden disturbance torque.

*1

: At 3.7 kW with no load. Differs depending on the load conditions and motor capacity.

Conveyance

Point

Point

Point

The new series offers a wealth of 
functionality suited to applications such 
as high-accuracy conveyance and target 
position stoppage, which contributes to 
reduction in tact time.

Steel industry

Metal products manufacturing

Textile industry

Water transportation,

fishing industry

Warehousing

Typical industries

Lumber, wood product

manufacturing industries

PM sensorless vector control

Multiple axes are strictly controlled to run at the same speed without 
using a driving belt. This control method provides driving accurate 
enough for transporting glass substrates without damaging them.
Simple positioning control is also available.

(when high frequency superposition control selected in combination with MM-CF)

Increased magnetic excitation deceleration

Deceleration time can be reduced without a brake resistor.
Tact time can be eliminated at conveyor lines, etc.

PLC function

When a few sensors are used to check the presence of goods on a 
conveyor and the arrival of such goods, the inverter can directly 
receive such signals from the sensors for the PLC control.

NEW

NEW

NEW

Move

Fork

Lift

Inverter

Power regeneration

converter

Inverter

Ink roller

Water roller

Paper

Point

Point

Point

The highly-accurate speed control 
minimizes color unevenness and 
displaced prints.

Printing and related industries

Typical industries

Speed control

PM sensorless vector control

The speed fluctuations of the ink roller axis and water roller axis are 
minimized to eliminate print unevenness.
[Speed fluctuation ratio]  ±0.05% (Digital input)
"No encoder" means less trouble and higher reliability.

Real sensorless vector control

PM sensorless vector control

Vector control

Speed response

Speed control 
range

50 Hz

*

1

1:200

(when power drive

at 0.3 Hz to 60 Hz)

130 Hz

1:1500

(both driving/

regeneration

*2

)

50 Hz

1:1000

*

3

(when HD rating selected)

*1

: At 3.7 kW with no load. Differs depending on the load conditions and motor capacity.

*2

: If using regeneration unit (option) during regeneration

*3

: When high frequency superposition control selected in combination with the MM-CF

Point

Point

Point

The PM sensorless vector control is useful 
in generating high starting torque. By using 
this control method with an IPM motor, 
much power can be saved.

 This small 

motor also makes the machine small.

Steel industry

Metal products manufacturing

Textile industry

Warehousing

Typical industries

Lumber, wood product

manufacturing industries

Water transportation,

fishing industry

PM sensorless vector control

Smooth operation is possible even at start-up under high load.
[Starting torque]  1.5 kW or lower: 200%, 2.0 kW or higher: 150%

When high frequency superposition control selected in combination 
with MM-CF

PID control

Pressure can be automatically adjusted by converting signals from 
the encoder to inverter input signals and feeding them back.

Parallel operation function

Even a large compressor can be operated by FR-A842-P inverters 
with parallel operation function, which can operate a 630 kW or 
higher motor.

GOT

Inverter

Tank

Compressor

21


background image

2

2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

The PLC function will help you to provide the control sequence best suited 
for the machine specifications.

PLC function

FREELY CONTROL MACHINES 

PLC function

•

A set of operations (operation at different signal inputs, signal and monitor outputs at different inverter status, etc.) can be freely 

programmed in accordance with the machine specifications. For example, a shutter opening/closing can be performed based on a signal 
from a sensor, or based on the opening/closing times. 
Control programs can be created in sequence ladders using the inverter setup software (FR Configurator2).

•

The control of the whole system is decentralized to inverters that 

mange their subordinating devices individually.

•

A group of dedicated sequence programs is created and saved in 

each inverter. The master controller no longer has to process all 
the sequence programs, and the decentralized system accepts 
program changes more flexibly. 

• User parameter

Up to 50 parameters, which are linked with the data registers, 
can be saved. The variables (data registers) used in the PLC 
function can be saved as inverter parameters. Furthermore, 
parameter settings can be saved in the EEPROM of inverter. 
When results of calculation using the PLC function are saved in 
the parameters, the data can be retained after the power is 
turned OFF.

• User initiated fault

Inverter output can be shut off under conditions other than those 
of the existing protective functions. Up to five specific 
fault-initiating conditions can be set to activate a protective 
function and shut off the inverter output.

• Monitored item for the user

Special register values can be displayed for monitoring on the 
operation panel. Arbitrary data designated by the user such as 
results of calculation using the PLC function can be displayed.

• Inverter parameter read/write

Parameter settings can be changed using sequence programs. 
The acceleration/deceleration patterns can also be set with 
sequence programs to be changed at certain operation statuses. 
You can choose RAM or EEPROM to save the parameter settings. 
When the settings are changed frequently, choose RAM.

• PID function

Two different loops of PID inverter operations can be pre-set, and 
those can be controlled using sequence programs.

• Inverter operation lock

The inverter operation can be restricted for the command 
sources other than the sequence programs.

•

With the real-time clock, automatic operation can be performed at 

certain times (when the optional LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) is 
used).

I/O
General-purpose I/O

Analog I/O

Pulse train I/O
Inverter parameter read/write

User parameter

CC-Link
Special function
PID operation
User initiated fault
Fault clear
Inverter operation lock
Monitored item for the user

Sequence programs enable I/O signal transmission to/from the inverter and its plug-in options.
Sequence programs enable reading of analog input values or analog output transmission by the inverter, 
and analog output transmission to the plug-in options.
Sequence programs enable pulse train inputs (to terminal JOG) and pulse train outputs (from terminal F/C(FM)).
Sequence programs enable inverter parameter write/read.
Fifty user parameters (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199) are available and are linked with the data registers D206 to D255, 
which accept direct access by sequence programs.
A plug-in option (FR-A8NC) enables handling of remote registers as arbitrary data in the sequence programs.

Inverter's PID operations can be set (up to two loops).
Up to five fault-initiating conditions can be set to activate a protective function.
The protective function occurring in the inverter can be reset.
Inverters can start up while the PLC function is running. 
Desired data is displayable on the operation panel.

Item

Description

1

Inverter operation sequence customized for the machine

2

Realizes the decentralized control

3

Automatic operation in accordance with the time

4

Useful functions

Crane control

Application example

User initiated fault

Up to five protective functions operating under specific conditions can be set.
Protective functions can be triggered to block inverter output at such 
times as when positional displacements are not eliminated even after 
offsetting speed over a fixed period of time, or pulses from the PLGs on 
both wheels are not input.

The traveled distance (total number of travel pulses) 
of each wheel is directly read from the encoder 
installed at the wheel. The pulses from the two 
wheels are then compared, and their speed is 
adjusted to synchronize the wheel positions.
There is no need to use an external controller to 
offset speed, allowing high accuracy control.

Point

Point

Point

Crane

Spring

Spring

Spring

Spring

Stabilizer and

encoder1

Left edge wheel

drive inverter

Right edge wheel

drive inverter

Travel pulses

(FR-A8AP)

*1

Travel pulses

(FR-A8TP)

*2

Travel rail

Travel wheel

Travel wheel

Stabilizer and

encoder2

Crane movement dir

ection

Crane movement dir

ection

*1

: FR-A8AP (Plug-in option)

*2

: FR-A8TP 

  (Control terminal option)

Extruding

machine

Stop sensor 

Workpiece

Workpiece

Deceleration sensor

Start sensor

Conveyor robot

Motor

Power supply

Inputs X0 to 2
Outputs Y0 to 1

X1

X0

Y0

Y1

X2

Conveyor control

The workpiece positions detected by sensors are 
directly reported to the inverter, and the inverter 
sends out the operation commands to the conveyor 
robot and to the extruding machine. Whole control 
can be performed by an inverter, in accordance 
with the movement of its peripheral equipment.

Inverter parameter read/write

Inverter operation lock

Changes can be made to inverter parameters from the sequence program.
The acceleration/deceleration time and pattern can be set based on the 
type of workpiece.

Operation is possible only when the sequence function is enabled.
Changes to settings caused by operator error can be avoided.

Point

Point

Point

Fan control

Signals sent via the enclosure (relay panel, etc.) such as input magnetic 
contactor signals, watt hour meter signals, and sensor signals can be 
read directly into the inverter and controlled. A fan can be controlled in 
accordance with the conditions without using relays, etc.
Furthermore, by using an external 24 VDC power source for the 
control power supply, input machine signals can be turned ON and 
OFF regardless of whether there is an input power source. And by 
employing an external 24 VDC power supply for the control power, 
input machine signals can be turned ON and OFF, regardless of the 
existence of a main circuit power supply.

CC-Link

A plug-in option (FR-A8NC) enables handling of remote registers as arbitrary data in the 
sequence programs.
A variety of equipment inside the factory can be centrally controlled with a CC-Link Network.

Point

Point

Point

Host PLC

Enclosure

MC

FAN

Sensor signal

Network

Power supply

for control circuit

Wh

24 VDC

Power

supply

Sensor

22


background image

2

2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

The PLC function will help you to provide the control sequence best suited 
for the machine specifications.

PLC function

FREELY CONTROL MACHINES 

PLC function

•

A set of operations (operation at different signal inputs, signal and monitor outputs at different inverter status, etc.) can be freely 

programmed in accordance with the machine specifications. For example, a shutter opening/closing can be performed based on a signal 
from a sensor, or based on the opening/closing times. 
Control programs can be created in sequence ladders using the inverter setup software (FR Configurator2).

•

The control of the whole system is decentralized to inverters that 

mange their subordinating devices individually.

•

A group of dedicated sequence programs is created and saved in 

each inverter. The master controller no longer has to process all 
the sequence programs, and the decentralized system accepts 
program changes more flexibly. 

• User parameter

Up to 50 parameters, which are linked with the data registers, 
can be saved. The variables (data registers) used in the PLC 
function can be saved as inverter parameters. Furthermore, 
parameter settings can be saved in the EEPROM of inverter. 
When results of calculation using the PLC function are saved in 
the parameters, the data can be retained after the power is 
turned OFF.

• User initiated fault

Inverter output can be shut off under conditions other than those 
of the existing protective functions. Up to five specific 
fault-initiating conditions can be set to activate a protective 
function and shut off the inverter output.

• Monitored item for the user

Special register values can be displayed for monitoring on the 
operation panel. Arbitrary data designated by the user such as 
results of calculation using the PLC function can be displayed.

• Inverter parameter read/write

Parameter settings can be changed using sequence programs. 
The acceleration/deceleration patterns can also be set with 
sequence programs to be changed at certain operation statuses. 
You can choose RAM or EEPROM to save the parameter settings. 
When the settings are changed frequently, choose RAM.

• PID function

Two different loops of PID inverter operations can be pre-set, and 
those can be controlled using sequence programs.

• Inverter operation lock

The inverter operation can be restricted for the command 
sources other than the sequence programs.

•

With the real-time clock, automatic operation can be performed at 

certain times (when the optional LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) is 
used).

I/O
General-purpose I/O

Analog I/O

Pulse train I/O
Inverter parameter read/write

User parameter

CC-Link
Special function
PID operation
User initiated fault
Fault clear
Inverter operation lock
Monitored item for the user

Sequence programs enable I/O signal transmission to/from the inverter and its plug-in options.
Sequence programs enable reading of analog input values or analog output transmission by the inverter, 
and analog output transmission to the plug-in options.
Sequence programs enable pulse train inputs (to terminal JOG) and pulse train outputs (from terminal F/C(FM)).
Sequence programs enable inverter parameter write/read.
Fifty user parameters (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199) are available and are linked with the data registers D206 to D255, 
which accept direct access by sequence programs.
A plug-in option (FR-A8NC) enables handling of remote registers as arbitrary data in the sequence programs.

Inverter's PID operations can be set (up to two loops).
Up to five fault-initiating conditions can be set to activate a protective function.
The protective function occurring in the inverter can be reset.
Inverters can start up while the PLC function is running. 
Desired data is displayable on the operation panel.

Item

Description

1

Inverter operation sequence customized for the machine

2

Realizes the decentralized control

3

Automatic operation in accordance with the time

4

Useful functions

Crane control

Application example

User initiated fault

Up to five protective functions operating under specific conditions can be set.
Protective functions can be triggered to block inverter output at such 
times as when positional displacements are not eliminated even after 
offsetting speed over a fixed period of time, or pulses from the PLGs on 
both wheels are not input.

The traveled distance (total number of travel pulses) 
of each wheel is directly read from the encoder 
installed at the wheel. The pulses from the two 
wheels are then compared, and their speed is 
adjusted to synchronize the wheel positions.
There is no need to use an external controller to 
offset speed, allowing high accuracy control.

Point

Point

Point

Crane

Spring

Spring

Spring

Spring

Stabilizer and

encoder1

Left edge wheel

drive inverter

Right edge wheel

drive inverter

Travel pulses

(FR-A8AP)

*1

Travel pulses

(FR-A8TP)

*2

Travel rail

Travel wheel

Travel wheel

Stabilizer and

encoder2

Crane movement dir

ection

Crane movement dir

ection

*1

: FR-A8AP (Plug-in option)

*2

: FR-A8TP 

  (Control terminal option)

Extruding

machine

Stop sensor 

Workpiece

Workpiece

Deceleration sensor

Start sensor

Conveyor robot

Motor

Power supply

Inputs X0 to 2
Outputs Y0 to 1

X1

X0

Y0

Y1

X2

Conveyor control

The workpiece positions detected by sensors are 
directly reported to the inverter, and the inverter 
sends out the operation commands to the conveyor 
robot and to the extruding machine. Whole control 
can be performed by an inverter, in accordance 
with the movement of its peripheral equipment.

Inverter parameter read/write

Inverter operation lock

Changes can be made to inverter parameters from the sequence program.
The acceleration/deceleration time and pattern can be set based on the 
type of workpiece.

Operation is possible only when the sequence function is enabled.
Changes to settings caused by operator error can be avoided.

Point

Point

Point

Fan control

Signals sent via the enclosure (relay panel, etc.) such as input magnetic 
contactor signals, watt hour meter signals, and sensor signals can be 
read directly into the inverter and controlled. A fan can be controlled in 
accordance with the conditions without using relays, etc.
Furthermore, by using an external 24 VDC power source for the 
control power supply, input machine signals can be turned ON and 
OFF regardless of whether there is an input power source. And by 
employing an external 24 VDC power supply for the control power, 
input machine signals can be turned ON and OFF, regardless of the 
existence of a main circuit power supply.

CC-Link

A plug-in option (FR-A8NC) enables handling of remote registers as arbitrary data in the 
sequence programs.
A variety of equipment inside the factory can be centrally controlled with a CC-Link Network.

Point

Point

Point

Host PLC

Enclosure

MC

FAN

Sensor signal

Network

Power supply

for control circuit

Wh

24 VDC

Power

supply

Sensor

23


background image

[Compatible operating systems]

Windows

®

 10, Windows

®

 8.1/Pro/Enterprise, Windows

®

 8, Windows

®

 7, (32-bit, 64-bit), 

Windows Vista

®

 (32-bit)

2

2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

FR Configurator2 

(SW1DND-FRC2)

DELIVERING A COMFORTABLE INVERTER  OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

Inverter setup software

From inverter startup to maintenance, 

this versatile software allows the user 

to specify settings easily at the computer.

Easy connection with a USB cable

A USB connector (Mini-B connector) is provided as standard.
Easy connection to the computer without the need for 
a converter.

Sequence control (Developer function)

The Developer function is used for creating sequence 
programs and writing them to the inverter to enable the 
use of the PLC function of the inverter.

Work can be carried out away from the equipment using a USB memory device

By loading trace data and parameter settings copied to a USB memory device into FR Configurator2, analysis and 
adjustments can be carried out with ease away from the equipment.

Intuitive user interface

Connected inverters are displayed in tree view format.
Windows for each function can be accessed by 
changing the tab for maximum efficiency.

Inverter

USB memory device

Computer

USB cable

Mini-B connector

FR Configurator2

Graph function

Editing the USB memory parameter copy file

The function with the marking above is available in the free trial version 
(usable free of charge with limited functions). It can be downloaded at 
Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website.

A full functional trial version, which has the same functionality as the release version, is 
also offered for a limited period of 20 days.

 Free trial version

Supported

Parameter list
Diagnosis
Graph
Batch monitor
Test operation
I/O terminal monitor
Convert

Function

Free trial

version

Developer
USB memory 
parameter copy file edit
Ethernet parameter setting
iQSS backup file conversion
Help

Function

Free trial

version

1

Efficient startup settings

Startup

System settings

This sets the method used to 
connect the inverters and the 
computer. Automatic recognition of 
connected inverters can also be set. 
The station number, model, capacity, 
and plug-in options of the connected 
inverters can also be set manually.

Test operation

Operating commands, frequency 
settings, and the operating mode 
can be set for the selected inverter.

Conversion function

Parameters can be set with the parameter auto conversion 
function when renewing from the FR-A700 series or FR-A500 
series (to be supported soon).

FR-A500

(support scheduled)

FR-A700

Computer

FR-A800

 Free trial version

Supported

 Free trial version

Supported

 Free trial version

Supported

2

Perform pre-operation adjustments and checks during operation with ease

Operation

Parameter list

Parameters for selected station numbers can be displayed and changed.

I/O signals can be assigned using settings by function.

USB memory parameter copy file edit

Parameter settings (USB memory device parameter copy file) 
read from the inverter to a USB memory device can be edited.
With the iQSS backup file conversion function, the files in the 
backup/restore format generated by the GOT can be converted 
and edited.

Offline auto tuning

Tuning is performed in wizard format after specifying necessary 
parameter settings.

Batch monitor function

Multiple inverter monitor items can be 
monitored simultaneously.
With a terminal monitor, the ON/OFF 
status can be monitored.

 Free trial version

Supported

3

Easy-to-follow platform facilitates easy maintenance

Maintenance

Diagnosis (faults history)

Inverter faults history can be read 
and displayed together with the 
alarm occurrence time.
Activating faults can be displayed, 
and inverters can also be reset.

Help

Displays the content of inverter and 
software Instruction Manuals.

Life diagnosis 

[to be available soon]

Life information read from the inverter is displayed.
Check marks appear in the life alarm fields of inverter parts that 
have exceeded their replacement schedule.
Diagnosis results can also be output to a file.

Graph function

Inverter data can be sampled and 
displayed in a graphical format. 
Trace data can also be read and 
displayed in a graph.

 Free trial version

Supported

 Free trial version

Supported

 Free trial version

Supported

: Available,    : Not available

SERIAL

＊＊＊

FR Configurator2

MODEL  SW1DND-FRC2-J

MADE IN JAPAN

COPYRIGHT(C)2013

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Tab change

Tree view

24


background image

[Compatible operating systems]

Windows

®

 10, Windows

®

 8.1/Pro/Enterprise, Windows

®

 8, Windows

®

 7, (32-bit, 64-bit), 

Windows Vista

®

 (32-bit)

2

2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2

FR Configurator2 

(SW1DND-FRC2)

DELIVERING A COMFORTABLE INVERTER  OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

Inverter setup software

From inverter startup to maintenance, 

this versatile software allows the user 

to specify settings easily at the computer.

Easy connection with a USB cable

A USB connector (Mini-B connector) is provided as standard.
Easy connection to the computer without the need for 
a converter.

Sequence control (Developer function)

The Developer function is used for creating sequence 
programs and writing them to the inverter to enable the 
use of the PLC function of the inverter.

Work can be carried out away from the equipment using a USB memory device

By loading trace data and parameter settings copied to a USB memory device into FR Configurator2, analysis and 
adjustments can be carried out with ease away from the equipment.

Intuitive user interface

Connected inverters are displayed in tree view format.
Windows for each function can be accessed by 
changing the tab for maximum efficiency.

Inverter

USB memory device

Computer

USB cable

Mini-B connector

FR Configurator2

Graph function

Editing the USB memory parameter copy file

The function with the marking above is available in the free trial version 
(usable free of charge with limited functions). It can be downloaded at 
Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website.

A full functional trial version, which has the same functionality as the release version, is 
also offered for a limited period of 20 days.

 Free trial version

Supported

Parameter list
Diagnosis
Graph
Batch monitor
Test operation
I/O terminal monitor
Convert

Function

Free trial

version

Developer
USB memory 
parameter copy file edit
Ethernet parameter setting
iQSS backup file conversion
Help

Function

Free trial

version

1

Efficient startup settings

Startup

System settings

This sets the method used to 
connect the inverters and the 
computer. Automatic recognition of 
connected inverters can also be set. 
The station number, model, capacity, 
and plug-in options of the connected 
inverters can also be set manually.

Test operation

Operating commands, frequency 
settings, and the operating mode 
can be set for the selected inverter.

Conversion function

Parameters can be set with the parameter auto conversion 
function when renewing from the FR-A700 series or FR-A500 
series (to be supported soon).

FR-A500

(support scheduled)

FR-A700

Computer

FR-A800

 Free trial version

Supported

 Free trial version

Supported

 Free trial version

Supported

2

Perform pre-operation adjustments and checks during operation with ease

Operation

Parameter list

Parameters for selected station numbers can be displayed and changed.

I/O signals can be assigned using settings by function.

USB memory parameter copy file edit

Parameter settings (USB memory device parameter copy file) 
read from the inverter to a USB memory device can be edited.
With the iQSS backup file conversion function, the files in the 
backup/restore format generated by the GOT can be converted 
and edited.

Offline auto tuning

Tuning is performed in wizard format after specifying necessary 
parameter settings.

Batch monitor function

Multiple inverter monitor items can be 
monitored simultaneously.
With a terminal monitor, the ON/OFF 
status can be monitored.

 Free trial version

Supported

3

Easy-to-follow platform facilitates easy maintenance

Maintenance

Diagnosis (faults history)

Inverter faults history can be read 
and displayed together with the 
alarm occurrence time.
Activating faults can be displayed, 
and inverters can also be reset.

Help

Displays the content of inverter and 
software Instruction Manuals.

Life diagnosis 

[to be available soon]

Life information read from the inverter is displayed.
Check marks appear in the life alarm fields of inverter parts that 
have exceeded their replacement schedule.
Diagnosis results can also be output to a file.

Graph function

Inverter data can be sampled and 
displayed in a graphical format. 
Trace data can also be read and 
displayed in a graph.

 Free trial version

Supported

 Free trial version

Supported

 Free trial version

Supported

: Available,    : Not available

SERIAL

＊＊＊

FR Configurator2

MODEL  SW1DND-FRC2-J

MADE IN JAPAN

COPYRIGHT(C)2013

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Tab change

Tree view

25


background image

26

Connec

tion Ex

ample

3

Connection example for standard models

Earth

(Ground)

R/L1S/L2T/L3

P1

P/+

N/-

P/+

P/+(P3)

PR

PR

PR

P/+

P/+

: Install these options as required.

U

Earth (Ground)

V W

IM connection

PM connection

Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 
or earth leakage current breaker 
(ELB), fuse

AC reactor
(FR-HAL)

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

USB connector

High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)

EMC filter (ferrite core)
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)

U V W

Earth 

(Ground)

Induction motor

Contactor
Example) 
No-fuse switch (DSN type)

IPM motor (MM-CF)

Line noise filter
(FR-BLF)

High power factor 
converter 
(FR-HC2)

Power regeneration 
common converter 
(FR-CV)
Power regeneration 
converter (MT-RC)

Resistor unit
(FR-BR, MT-BR5)

Brake unit (FR-BU2)

Magnetic contactor (MC)

Inverter

Three-phase AC power supply

USB

Must be within the permissible power 
supply specifications of the inverter.

Must be selected carefully since an inrush 
current flows in the inverter at power ON.

For the FR-A820-
03800(75K) or higher, the 
FR-A840-02160(75K) or 
higher, and when a 75 kW 
or higher motor is used, 
always connect a DC 
reactor. (IP55 compatible 
models are equipped with 
the DC reactor.)

The FR-A820-03160(55K) 
or lower and the 
FR-A840-01800(55K) or 
lower are equipped with 
the common mode choke.

Connect this for an 
application where a PM 
motor is driven by the 
load even while the 
inverter power is OFF. 
Do not open or close the 
contactor while the 
inverter is running 
(outputting).

Personal computer
(FR Configurator2)

USB host
(A connector)

Communication
status indicator
 (LED)(USB host)

USB devuce
(Mini B connector)

Install this to ensure safety.
Do not use this to start and stop the inverter. 
Doing so will shorten the life of the inverter.

(Refer to page 27)

(Refer to page 192)

(Refer to page 176) (Refer to page 177)

(Refer to page 179)

(Refer to page 180)

(Refer to page 179)

(Refer to page 199)

(Refer to page 220)

(Refer to page 204)

(Refer to page 183)

(Refer to page 185)

(Refer to 
page 63)

(Refer to page 193)

(Refer to page 179)

(Refer to page 180)

(Refer to page 24)

(Refer to page 184)

Connection Example


background image

27

4

S

ta

n

da
rd S

p

ec

if

ic

at

ions

Rating (Standard model)

200 V class



The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.



The 0.2 kW motor capacity is applicable under V/F control only.



The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220 V for 200 V class.



The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter 
and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.



The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, the maximum 

point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about 

.



Value for the built-in brake resistor



Value for the ND rating



The rated input current indicates a value at a rated output voltage. The impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor and cables) affects the 
rated input current.



The power supply capacity is the value when at the rated output current. It varies by the impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor and 
cables).

 FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector section)

Model FR-A820-[ ](-E)(GF)

00046 00077 00105 00167 00250 00340 00490 00630 00770 00930 01250 01540 01870 02330 03160 03800 04750

0.4K

0.75K

1.5K

2.2K

3.7K

5.5K

7.5K

11K

15K

18.5K

22K

30K

37K

45K

55K

75K

90K

Applicable motor 
capacity (kW) 



SLD

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

90/110 132

LD

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110

ND (initial setting)

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

90

HD

0.2 



0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

Out

put

Rated 
capacity (kVA) 



SLD

1.8

2.9

4

6.4

10

13

19

24

29

35

48

59

71

89

120

145

181

LD

1.6

2.7

3.7

5.8

8.8

12

17

22

27

32

43

53

65

81

110

132

165

ND (initial setting)

1.1

1.9

3

4.2

6.7

9.1

13

18

23

29

34

44

55

67

82

110

132

HD

0.6

1.1

1.9

3

4.2

6.7

9.1

13

18

23

29

34

44

55

67

82

110

Rated current 
(A)

SLD

4.6

7.7

10.5

16.7

25

34

49

63

77

93

125

154

187

233

316

380

475

LD

4.2

7

9.6

15.2

23

31

45

58

70.5

85

114

140

170

212

288

346

432

ND (initial setting)

3

5

8

11

17.5

24

33

46

61

76

90

115

145

175

215

288

346

HD

1.5

3

5

8

11

17.5

24

33

46

61

76

90

115

145

175

215

288

Overload 
current rating 



SLD

110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40°C

LD

120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

ND (initial setting)

150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

HD

200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

Rated voltage 



Three-phase 200 to 240 V

Regenerative 
braking

Brake transistor

Built-in

FR-BU2 (Option)

Maximum brake torque 



150% torque/3%ED 



100% torque/
3%ED 



100% torque/
2%ED 



20% torque/continuous

10% torque/
continuous

FR-ABR
(when the option is used)

150% torque/
10%ED

100% torque/10%ED

100% torque/6%ED

―

―

―

―

―

―

Po

we

r s

u

pp

ly

Rated input
AC voltage/frequency

Three-phase 200 to 240 V 50 Hz/60 Hz

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation

170 to 264 V 50 Hz/60 Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation

±5%

Rated input 
current (A) 



Without DC 
reactor

SLD

5.3

8.9

13.2

19.7

31.3

45.1

62.8

80.6

96.7

115 151 185

221

269

―

―

―

LD

5

8.3

12.2

18.3

28.5

41.6

58.2

74.8

90.9

106 139 178 207 255 ―

―

―

ND
(initial setting)

3.9

6.3

10.6

14.1

22.6

33.4

44.2

60.9

80

96.3 113 150 181 216 266 ―

―

HD

2.3

3.9

6.3

10.6

14.1

22.6

33.4

44.2

60.9

80

96.3 113  150  181  216  ― 

―

With DC 
reactor

SLD

4.6

7.7

10.5

16.7

25

34

49

63

77

93

125

154

187

233

316

380

475

LD

4.2

7

9.6

15.2

23

31

45

58

70.5

85

114

140

170

212

288

346

432

ND
(initial setting)

3

5

8

11

17.5

24

33

46

61

76

90

115

145

175

215

288

346

HD

1.5

3

5

8

11

17.5

24

33

46

61

76

90

115

145

175

215

288

Power supply 
capacity (kVA) 



Without DC 
reactor

SLD

2

3.4

5

7.5

12

17

24

31

37

44

58

70

84

103

―

―

―

LD

1.9

3.2

4.7

7

11

16

22

29

35

41

53

68

79

97

―

―

―

ND
(initial setting)

1.5

2.4

4

5.4

8.6

13

17

23

30

37

43

57

69

82

101

―

―

HD

0.9

1.5

2.4

4

5.4

8.6

13

17

23

30

37

43

57

69

82

―

―

With DC 
reactor

SLD

1.8

2.9

4

6.4

10

13

19

24

29

35

48

59

71

89

120

145

181

LD

1.6

2.7

3.7

5.8

8.8

12

17

22

27

32

43

53

65

81

110

132

165

ND
(initial setting)

1.1

1.9

3

4.2

6.7

9.1

13

18

23

29

34

44

55

67

82

110

132

HD

0.6

1.1

1.9

3

4.2

6.7

9.1

13

18

23

29

34

44

55

67

82

110

Protective structure (IEC 60529) 



Enclose type (IP20)

Open type (IP00)

Cooling system

Self-cooling

Forced air cooling

Approx. mass (kg)

2.0

2.2

3.3

3.3

3.3

6.7

6.7

8.3

15

15

15

22

42

42

54

74

74

Standard Specifications


background image

28

S

ta

n

da
rd S

p

ec

if

ic

at

ions

4

400 V class



The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.



The 0.2 kW motor capacity is applicable under V/F control only.



The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440 V for 400 V class.



The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter 
and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.



The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, the maximum 

point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about 

.



Value for the built-in brake resistor



Value for the ND rating



The rated input current indicates a value at a rated output voltage. The impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor and cables) affects the 
rated input current.



The power supply capacity is the value when at the rated output current. It varies by the impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor and 
cables).

 FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector section)
 For the power voltage exceeding 480 V, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection. (For details, refer to ).
 The regenerative braking capability of the inverter can be improved with a commercial brake resistor. For the details, please contact your sales representative.

Model FR-A840-[ ](-E)(GF)

00023 00038 00052 00083 00126 00170 00250 00310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160 01800 02160 02600 03250 03610 04320 04810 05470 06100 06830

0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K 90K 110K 132K 160K 185K 220K 250K 280K

Applicable motor 
capacity (kW) 



SLD

0.75 1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5 22

30

37

45

55

75/
90

110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355

LD

0.75 1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5 22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315

ND (initial setting)

0.4

0.75 1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5 22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110 132 160 185 220 250 280

HD

0.2



0.4

0.75 1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5 22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110 132 160 185 220 250

Outpu

t

Rated 
capacity 
(kVA) 



SLD

1.8

2.9

4

6.3

10

13

19

24

29

36

47

59

71

88

137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521

LD

1.6

2.7

3.7

5.8

8.8

12

18

22

27

33

43

53

65

81

110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465

ND (initial setting)

1.1

1.9

3

4.6

6.9

9.1

13

18

24

29

34

43

54

66

84

110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417

HD

0.6

1.1

1.9

3

4.6

6.9

9.1

13

18

24

29

34

43

54

66

84

110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367

Rated current 
(A)

SLD

2.3

3.8

5.2

8.3

12.6 17

25

31

38

47

62

77

93

116 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 683

LD

2.1

3.5

4.8

7.6

11.5 16

23

29

35

43

57

70

85

106 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610

ND (initial setting)

1.5

2.5

4

6

9

12

17

23

31

38

44

57

71

86

110

144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547

HD

0.8

1.5

2.5

4

6

9

12

17

23

31

38

44

57

71

86

110 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481

Overload 
current rating 



SLD

110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40°C

LD

120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

ND (initial setting)

150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

HD

200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

Rated voltage 



Three-phase 380 to 500 V

Regenerative 
braking

Brake transistor

Built-in

FR-BU2(Option)

Maximum brake torque 



100% torque/2%ED 



20% torque/continuous

10% torque/continuous

FR-ABR
(when the option is 
used)

100% torque/10%ED

100% torque/6%ED

― 



―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

Po

we

r su

p

p

ly

Rated input
AC voltage/frequency

Three-phase 380 to 500 V 50 Hz/60 Hz 



Permissible AC voltage fluctuation

323 to 550 V 50 Hz/60 Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation

±5%

Rated input 
current (A) 



Without DC 
reactor

SLD

3.2

5.4

7.8

10.9 16.4 22.5 31.7 40.3 48.2 58.4 76.8 97.6 115 141 ―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

LD

3

4.9

7.3

10.1 15.1 22.3 31

38.2 44.9 53.9 75.1 89.7 106 130 ―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

ND
(initial 
setting)

2.3

3.7

6.2

8.3

12.3 17.4 22.5 31

40.3 48.2 56.5 75.1 91

108 134 ―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

HD

1.4

2.3

3.7

6.2

8.3

12.3 17.4 22.5 31

40.3 48.2 56.5 75.1 91

108 ―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

With DC 
reactor

SLD

2.3

3.8

5.2

8.3

12.6 17

25

31

38

47

62

77

93

116 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 683

LD

2.1

3.5

4.8

7.6

11.5 16

23

29

35

43

57

70

85

106 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610

ND
(initial 
setting)

1.5

2.5

4

6

9

12

17

23

31

38

44

57

71

86

110 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547

HD

0.8

1.5

2.5

4

6

9

12

17

23

31

38

44

57

71

86

110 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481

Power supply 
capacity 
(kVA) 



Without DC 
reactor

SLD

2.5

4.1

5.9

8.3

12

17

24

31

37

44

59

74

88

107 ―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

LD

2.3

3.7

5.5

7.7

12

17

24

29

34

41

57

68

81

99

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

ND
(initial 
setting)

1.7

2.8

4.7

6.3

9.4

13

17

24

31

37

43

57

69

83

102 ―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

HD

1.1

1.7

2.8

4.7

6.3

9.4

13

17

24

31

37

43

57

69

83

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

With DC 
reactor

SLD

1.8

2.9

4

6.3

10

13

19

24

29

36

47

59

71

88

137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521

LD

1.6

2.7

3.7

5.8

8.8

12

18

22

27

33

43

53

65

81

110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465

ND
(initial 
setting)

1.1

1.9

3

4.6

6.9

9.1

13

18

24

29

34

43

54

66

84

110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417

HD

0.6

1.1

1.9

3

4.6

6.9

9.1

13

18

24

29

34

43

54

66

84

110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367

Protective structure (IEC 60529) 



Enclose type (IP20)

Open type (IP00)

Cooling system

Self-cooling

Forced air cooling

Approx.  mass  (kg)

2.8

2.8

2.8

3.3

3.3

6.7

6.7

8.3

8.3

15

15

23

41

41

43

52

55

71

78

117 117 166 166 166


background image

29

4

S

ta

n

da
rd S

p

ec

if

ic

at

ions

Rating (Separated converter types)

400 V class (Standard type)

 • Inverter



The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.



The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440 V.



The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time 
for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.



The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, 
the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about 

.



ND rating reference value



FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector section)



For the power voltage exceeding 480 V, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection.

 • Converter unit (FR-CC2)



The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time 
for the converter unit and the inverter to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.



The converter unit output voltage varies according to the input power supply voltage and the load. The maximum point of the voltage waveform at the 
converter unit output side is approximately the power supply voltage multiplied by 

.



The power supply capacity is the value when at the rated output current. It varies by the impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input 
reactor and cables).



The permissible voltage imbalance ratio is 3% or less. (Imbalance ratio = (highest voltage between lines - average voltage between three lines ) / average 
voltage between three lines 

 100)

Model FR-A842-[ ](-E)(GF)

07700

08660

09620

10940

12120

315K

355K

400K

450K

500K

Applicable motor capacity 
(kW) 



SLD

400

450

500

560

630

LD

355

400

450

500

560

ND (initial setting)

315

355

400

450

500

HD

280

315

355

400

450

Ou

tp

ut

Rated capacity (kVA) 



SLD

587

660

733

834

924

LD

521

587

660

733

834

ND (initial setting)

465

521

587

660

733

HD

417

465

521

587

660

Rated current (A)

SLD

770

866

962

1094

1212

LD

683

770

866

962

1094

ND (initial setting)

610

683

770

866

962

HD

547

610

683

770

866

Overload current 
rating 



SLD

110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40°C

LD

120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

ND (initial setting)

150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

HD

200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

Rated voltage 



Three-phase 380 to 500 V

Regenerative 
braking torque 



(When the converter 
unit (FR-CC2) is 
used)

Maximum brake 
torque

10% torque/continuous

In

put

 po

w

er DC power supply voltage

430 to 780 VDC

Control power supply auxiliary input

Single phase 380 to 500 V 50 Hz/60 Hz 



Permissible control power supply auxiliary 
input fluctuation

Frequency 

5%, voltage 10%

Protective structure (IEC 60529) 



Open type (IP00)

Cooling system

Forced air cooling

Approx. mass (kg)

163

163

243

243

243

Model FR-CC2-H[ ]

315K

355K

400K

450K

500K

560K

630K

Applicable motor capacity (kW) 

315

355

400

450

500

560

630

Outp

ut Overload current rating 



200% 60 s, 250% 3 s

150% 60 s, 
200% 3 s

120% 60 s, 
150% 3 s

110% 60 s, 
120% 3 s

Rated voltage 



430 to 780 VDC 



P

ow

er s

upp

ly Rated input AC voltage/frequency

Three-phase 380 to 500 V 50 Hz/60 Hz

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation

Three-phase 323 to 550 V 50 Hz/60 Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation

5%

Rated input current (A) 

610

683

770

866

962

1094

1212

Power supply capacity (kVA) 



465

521

587

660

733

833

924

Protective structure (IEC 60529)

Open type (IP00)

Cooling system

Forced air cooling

DC reactor

Built-in

Approx. mass (kg)

210

213

282

285

288

293

294


background image

30

S

ta

n

da
rd S

p

ec

if

ic

at

ions

4

400 V class (parallel operation function compatible model)

 • Inverter



The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440 V.



Total output current of the inverters operated in parallel.



The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time 
for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.



The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, 
the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about 

.



ND rating reference value.



For the power voltage exceeding 480 V, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection.



FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector section)



Total mass of the inverters operated in parallel.

 • Converter unit (FR-CC2)



The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time 
for the converter unit and the inverter to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.



The converter unit output voltage varies according to the input power supply voltage and the load. The maximum point of the voltage waveform at the 
converter unit output side is approximately the power supply voltage multiplied by 

.



The permissible voltage imbalance ratio is 3% or less. (Imbalance ratio = (highest voltage between lines - average voltage between three lines ) / average 
voltage between three lines 

 100)



The input current is the total current of the master and slave converter units during the parallel operation.



The power supply capacity is the value when at the rated output current. It varies by the impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input 
reactor and cables).



The mass is the total mass of the master and slave converter units during the parallel operation.

Model FR-A842-[ ]-P

Two in parallel

Three in parallel

400K

450K

500K

400K

450K

500K

09620

10940

12120

09620

10940

12120

Applicable motor capacity (kW) 

LD

710

800

900

1065

1200

1350

ND (initial setting)

630

710

800

945

1065

1200

Out

put

Rated capacity (kVA) 



LD

1056

1173

1334

1584

1759

2002

ND (initial setting)

939

1056

1173

1409

1584

1759

Rated current (A) 



LD

1386

1539

1750

2078

2309

2626

ND (initial setting)

1232

1386

1539

1848

2078

2309

Overload current rating 



LD

120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

ND (initial setting)

150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

Rated voltage 



Three-phase 380 to 500 V

Regenerative braking torque 



(When the converter unit is used)

Maximum brake 
torque

10% torque/continuous

Inp

ut p

ower

DC power supply voltage

430 to 780 VDC

Control power supply auxiliary input

Single phase 380 to 500 V 50/60 Hz 



Permissible control power supply auxiliary input fluctuation

Frequency 

5%, voltage 10%

Protective structure (IEC 60529) 



Open type (IP00)

Cooling system

Forced air cooling

Approx. mass (kg) 



486

486

486

729

729

729

Model FR-CC2-H[]-P

Two in parallel

Three in parallel

400K

450K

500K

560K

400K

450K

500K

560K

Applicable motor capacity (kW) 

630

710

800

900

945

1065

1200

1350

Ou

tp

ut Overload current rating 



150% 60 s, 200% 3 s

Rated voltage 



430 to 780 VDC 



Po

we

r su

pp

ly Rated input AC voltage/frequency

Three-phase 380 to 500 V 50/60 Hz

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation

Three-phase 323 to 550 V 50/60 Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation

5%

Rated input current (A) 



1232

1386

1539

1750

1848

2078

2309

2626

Power supply capacity (kVA) 



939

1056

1173

1334

1409

1584

1759

2002

Protective structure (IEC 60529)

Open type (IP00)

Cooling system

Forced air cooling

DC reactor

Built-in

Approx. mass (kg) 



564

570

576

586

846

855

864

879


background image

31

4

S

ta

n

da
rd S

p

ec

if

ic

at

ions

Rating (IP55 compatible model)

400 V class



The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.



The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440 V.



The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, 
allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.



The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. 
However, the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about 

.



Value for the ND rating.



The rated input current indicates a value at a rated output voltage. The impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor 
and cables) affects the rated input current.



The power supply capacity is the value when at the rated output current. It varies by the impedance at the power supply side (including those of 
the input reactor and cables).



For the power voltage exceeding 480 V, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection.



UL Type 12 Enclosure-Suitable for Installation in a Compartment Handling Conditioned Air (Plenum)

 For compliance with IP55, remove the protective bushes and install the recommended cable glands.

Model FR-A846-[ ](-E)

00023 00038 00052 00083 00126 00170 00250 00310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160 01800 02160 02600 03250 03610

0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K

15K 18.5K 22K

30K

37K

45K

55K

75K

90K 110K 132K

Applicable 
motor capacity 
(kW) 



LD

0.75 1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5 22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110 132 160

ND
(initial setting)

0.4

0.75 1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5 22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110 132

Ou

tpu

t

Rated
capacity
(kVA) 



LD

1.6

2.7

3.7

5.8

8.8

12

18

22

27

33

43

53

65

81

110 137 165 198 248

ND
(initial setting)

1.1

1.9

3

4.6

6.9

9.1

13

18

24

29

34

43

54

66

84

110 137 165 198

Rated
current (A)

LD

2.1

3.5

4.8

7.6

11.5 16

23

29

35

43

57

70

85

106 144 180 216 260 325

ND
(initial setting)

1.5

2.5

4

6

9

12

17

23

31

38

44

57

71

86

110 144 180 216 260

Overload
current
rating 



LD

120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40°C

ND
(initial setting)

150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40°C

Rated voltage 



Three-phase 380 to 500 V

Regenerative
braking

Maximum 
brake torque 



10% torque/continuous

Po

we

r su

pp

ly

Rated input
AC voltage/frequency

Three-phase 380 to 500 V 50 Hz/60 Hz 



Permissible AC voltage 
fluctuation

323 to 550 V 50 Hz/60 Hz

Permissible frequency 
fluctuation

±5%

Rated input 
current (A) 



LD

2.1

3.5

4.8

7.6

11.5 16

23

29

35

43

57

70

85

106 144 180 216 260 325

ND
(initial setting)

1.5

2.5

4

6

9

12

17

23

31

38

44

57

71

86

110 144 180 216 260

Power 
supply 
capacity 
(kVA) 



LD

1.6

2.7

3.7

5.8

9

12

18

22

27

33

43

53

65

81

110 137 165 198 248

ND
(initial setting)

1.1

1.9

3

4.6

6.9

9

13

18

24

29

34

43

54

66

102 110 137 165 198

Protective
structure

IEC 60529

Dust- and water-proof type (IP55) 



UL50

UL Type12 



Cooling system

Self cooling + internal fan

Forced-air-cooling + internal fan

DC reactor

Built-in

Approx. mass (kg)

15

15

15

15

16

17

26

26

27

27

59

60

63

64

147 150 153 189 193


background image

32

S

ta

n

da
rd S

p

ec

if

ic

at

ions

4

Common specifications (Standard type)

Co

n

tr

o

l sp

eci

fi

cat

io

n

s

Control method

Soft-PWM control, high carrier frequency PWM control (selectable among V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector 

control, Real sensorless vector control, Optimum excitation control), vector control



, and PM sensorless vector control

Output frequency range

0.2 to 590 Hz (The upper-limit frequency is 400 Hz under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector

control, vector control



, and PM sensorless vector control.)

Frequency 

setting

resolution

Analog input

0.015 Hz/60 Hz (0 to 10 V/12 bits for terminals 2 and 4)

0.03 Hz/60 Hz (0 to 5 V/11 bits or 0 to 20 mA/approx. 11 bits for terminals 2 and 4, 0 to ±10 V/12 bits for terminal 1)

0.06 Hz/60 Hz (0 to ±5 V/11 bits for terminal 1)

Digital input

0.01 Hz

Frequency 

accuracy

Analog input

Within ±0.2% of the max. output frequency (25°C ± 10°C)

Digital input

Within 0.01% of the set output frequency

Voltage/frequency 

characteristics

Base frequency can be set from 0 to 590 Hz. Constant-torque/variable-torque pattern or adjustable 5 points V/F can be 

selected.

Starting torque 



SLD Rating:120% 0.3 Hz, LD Rating:150% 0.3 Hz, ND Rating:200% 0.3 Hz



, HD Rating:250% 0.3 Hz



(Real sensorless vector control, vector control



)

Torque boost

Manual torque boost

Acceleration/deceleration 

time setting

0 to 3600 s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode, 

backlash countermeasures acceleration/deceleration can be selected.

DC injection brake 

(induction motor)

Operation frequency (0 to 120 Hz), operation time (0 to 10 s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable

Stall prevention 

operation level

Activation range of stall prevention operation (SLD rating: 0 to 120%, LD rating: 0 to 150%, ND rating: 0 to 220%, 

HD rating: 0 to 280%). Whether to use the stall prevention or not can be selected. (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux 

vector control)

Torque limit level

Torque limit value can be set (0 to 400% variable). (Real sensorless vector control, vector control



, PM sensorless vector 

control)

O

p

er

ati

o

n

 sp

ec

if

ic

ati

o

n

s

Frequency 

setting 

signal

Analog input

Terminals 2 and 4: 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA (0 to 20 mA) are available.

Terminal 1: -10 to +10 V, -5 to +5 V are available.

Digital input

Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit

Four-digit BCD or 16-bit binary (when used with option FR-A8AX)

Start signal

Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.

Input signals

 (twelve terminals)

Low-speed operation command, Middle-speed operation command, High-speed operation command, 

Second function selection, Terminal 4 input selection, Jog operation selection, Selection of automatic restart after 

instantaneous power failure, flying start, Output stop, Start self-holding selection, Forward rotation command, Reverse 

rotation command, Inverter reset

The input signal can be changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

Pulse train input

100 kpps

Operational functions

Maximum and minimum frequency settings, multi-speed operation, acceleration/deceleration pattern, thermal protection, DC 

injection brake, starting frequency, JOG operation, output stop (MRS), stall prevention, regeneration avoidance, increased 

magnetic excitation deceleration, DC feeding



, frequency jump, rotation display, automatic restart after instantaneous power 

failure, electronic bypass sequence, remote setting, automatic acceleration/deceleration, retry function, carrier frequency 

selection, fast-response current limit, forward/reverse rotation prevention, operation mode selection, slip compensation, 

droop control, load torque high-speed frequency control, speed smoothing control, traverse, auto tuning, applied motor 

selection, gain tuning, RS-485 communication, Ethernet communication



, PID control, PID pre-charge function, easy 

dancer control, cooling fan operation selection, stop selection (deceleration stop/coasting), power-failure deceleration stop 

function, stop-on-contact control, PLC function, life diagnosis, maintenance timer, current average monitor, multiple rating, 

orientation control



, speed control, torque control, position control, pre-excitation, torque limit, test run, 24 V power supply 

input for control circuit, safety stop function, anti-sway control

O

u

tput s

igna

l Open collector output 

(five terminals)

Relay output 

(two terminals)

Inverter running, Up to frequency, Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage, Overload warning, 

Output frequency detection, Fault

The output signal can be changed using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection).

Fault codes of the inverter can be output (4 bits) from the open collector.

Pulse train output

(FM type)

50 kpps

Indi

c

a

ti

o

n

For

 me

te

r

Pulse train output

 (FM type)

Max. 2.4 kHz: one terminal (output frequency)

The monitored item can be changed using Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection.

Current output

(CA type)

Max. 20 mADC: one terminal (output frequency)

The monitored item can be changed using Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection.

Voltage output

Max. 10 VDC: one terminal (output frequency)

The monitored item can be changed using Pr.158 AM terminal function selection.

Operation 

panel

(FR-DU08)

Operating 

status

Output frequency, Output current, Output voltage, Frequency setting value

The monitored item can be changed using Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection.

Fault record

A fault record is displayed when a fault occurs. Past 8 fault records and the conditions immediately before the fault (output 

voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time/year/month/date/time) are saved.

Protective/

warning 

function

Protective 

function

Overcurrent trip during acceleration, Overcurrent trip during constant speed, Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop, 

Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration, Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed, Regenerative 

overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop, Inverter overload trip, Motor overload trip, Heatsink overheat, Instantaneous 

power failure



, Undervoltage



, Input phase loss



, Stall prevention stop, Loss of synchronism detection



, Upper limit fault 

detection, Lower limit fault detection, Brake transistor alarm detection



, Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, Output 

short circuit, Output phase loss, External thermal relay operation



, PTC thermistor operation



, Option fault, Communication 

option fault, Parameter storage device fault, PU disconnection, Retry count excess



, CPU fault, Operation panel power 

supply short circuit/RS-485 terminals power supply short circuit, 24 VDC power fault, Abnormal output current detection



, 

Inrush current limit circuit fault



, Communication fault, Analog input fault, USB communication fault, Safety circuit fault, 

Overspeed occurrence



, Speed deviation excess detection



, Signal loss detection



, Excessive position fault



, Brake 

sequence fault



, Encoder phase fault



, 4 mA input fault



, Pre-charge fault



, PID signal fault



, Opposite rotation 

deceleration fault



, Internal circuit fault, Abnormal internal temperature



, Magnetic pole position unknown



Warning 

function

Fan alarm, Stall prevention (overcurrent), Stall prevention (overvoltage), Regenerative brake pre-alarm



, Electronic 

thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU stop, Speed limit indication



, Parameter copy, Safety stop, Maintenance signal 

output



, USB host error, Home position return setting error



, Home position return uncompleted



, Home position return 

parameter setting error



, Operation panel lock



, Password locked



, Parameter write error, Copy operation error, 24 V 

external power supply operation, Internal fan alarm



, Continuous operation during communication fault



, Load fault 

warning, Ethernet communication fault




background image

33

4

S

ta

n

da
rd S

p

ec

if

ic

at

ions



Available only when a vector control compatible option is installed. (The protective function may or may not be available depending on the type of the 
connected communication option.)



For PM sensorless vector control, refer to page 224.



In the initial setting of the FR-A820-00340(5.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-00170(5.5K) or higher, it is limited to 150% by the torque limit level.



Enabled only for standard models and IP55 compatible models.



This protective function is not available in the initial status.



Available for the standard model only.



Available for the IP55 compatible model only.



Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.



For the installation at an altitude above 1,000 m up to 2,500 m, derate the rated current 3% per 500 m.

 2.9 m/s

2

 or less for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher.

 Available for the FR-A800-E only.

PLC function specifications



The scan time is approximately 40 ms for 1K steps as inverter control is also performed in actual operations.



The signals same as the ones assigned to the inverter I/O terminals are used.
One point is always required for a sequence start (RUN/STOP).



Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection must be set.



There is no device latch function for power failures.
Use the Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 PLC function user parameters 1 to 50 (D206 to D255) to store device values in the EEPROM.

NOTE

 • There is no buffer memory.

En

vi

ro

n

m

en

t

Surrounding air 

temperature

-10°C to +50°C (0°C to +50°C for the FR-A800-GF) (non-freezing) (LD, ND, HD ratings)

-10°C to +40°C (0°C to +40°C for the FR-A800-GF) (non-freezing) (SLD rating, IP55 compatible model)

Surrounding air humidity

95% RH or less (non-condensing) (With circuit board coating (conforming to IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2), IP55 compatible 

model)

90% RH or less (non-condensing) (Without circuit board coating) 

Storage temperature 



-20°C to +65°C

Atmosphere

Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt, etc.)

Altitude/vibration

Maximum 1000 m 



, 5.9 m/s

2

 



 or less at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)

Item

A800 PLC function specifications

Control method

Repeated operation (by stored program)

I/O control mode

Refresh

Programming language

Relay symbolic language (ladder)
Function block

No. of 
instructions

Sequence instructions

25

Basic instructions

84

Application instructions

37

Processing speed

Sequence instructions 1.9 μs to 12 μs/step



Number of I/O device points

128 (input: 64 points, output: 64 points)
19 points built-in (input: 12 points, output: 7 points)



FR-A8AX (input: 16 points)
FR-A8AY (output: 7 points)
FR-A8AR (output: 3 points)

Number of analog I/O points

3 input points built-in (Terminals 1, 2, and 4), 
FR-A8AZ: 1 input point (Terminal 6)
2 output points built-in (Terminals F/C(FM/CA) and AM), 
FR-A8AY: 2 output points (Terminals AM0 and AM1), 
FR-A8AZ: 1 output point (Terminal DA1)

Pulse train I/O

Input

Terminal JOG maximum input pulse: 100k pulses/s 



Output

Terminal FM maximum output pulse: 50k pulses/s 



Watchdog timer

10 to 2000 ms

Program capacity

6K steps (24k bytes) (0 to 6144 steps can be set)
Contained in one program

Device

Internal relay (M)

128 (M0 to M127)

Latch relay (L)

Not used (Can be set with parameters but will not latch)



Timer (T)

Number of points 16 (T0 to T15)

Specifications

100 ms timer: 0.1 to 3276.7 s can be set
10 ms timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s can be set

Retentive 
timer (ST)

Number of points 0 (up to 16 by parameter assignment)

Specifications

100 ms retentive timer: 0.1 to 3276.7 s can be set
10 ms retentive timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s can be set

Counter (C)

Number of points 16 (C0 to C15)

Specifications

Normal counter: Setting range 1 to 32767
Interrupt program counter: Not used

Data register (D)

256 (D0 to D255)

Special relay (SM)

2048 (SM0 to SM2047) with limited functions

Special register (SD)

2048 (SD0 to SD2047) with limited functions


background image

34

Outline Dimens

ion 

Draw

ings

5

Standard model

FR-A820-00046(0.4K), FR-A820-00077(0.75K)(-E)(GF)

FR-A820-00105(1.5K), 00167(2.2K), 00250(3.7K)(-E)(GF)
FR-A840-00023(0.4K), 00038(0.75K), 00052(1.5K), 00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K)(-E)(GF)

(Unit: mm)

(Unit: mm)

6

95

110

7.5

245

(7.5)

260

(1.5)

7.5

5

D1

D

2-

φ6 hole



The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position 
has an additional 2.1 mm depth.

Inverter model

D

D1

FR-A820-00046(0.4K)

110

20

FR-A820-00077(0.75K)

125

35



150

5

140

(1.5)

245

7.5

260

45.5

(7.5)

6

12.5

125

FAN

2-

φ6 hole



FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00052(1.5K) are 
not provided with a cooling fan.



The LED display cover attached to the FR-
A800-GF in this position has an additional 
2.1 mm depth.





Outline Dimension Drawings


background image

35

5

Outline Dimens

ion 

Draw

ings

FR-A820-00340(5.5K), 00490(7.5K), 00630(11K)(-E)(GF)
FR-A840-00170(5.5K), 00250(7.5K), 00310(11K), 00380(15K)(-E)(GF)

FR-A820-00770(15K), 00930(18.5K), 01250(22K)(-E)(GF)
FR-A840-00470(18.5K), 00620(22K)(-E)(GF)

(Unit: mm)

(Unit: mm)

6

195
220

7.5

H1

(7.5)

H2

H

2.3

D1

12.5

D

FAN

2-

φ6 hole



The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm 
depth.

Inverter model

H

H1

H2

D

D1

FR-A820-00340(5.5K), 00490(7.5K)
FR-A840-00170(5.5K), 00250(7.5K)

260

245

1.5

170

84

FR-A820-00630(11K)
FR-A840-00310(11K), 00380(15K)

300

285

3

190

101.5



250

230

10

10

(1.5)

380

(10)

400

2.3

190

93.3

10

FAN

2-

φ10 hole





The LED display cover attached to 
the FR-A800-GF in this position has 
an additional 2.1 mm depth.


background image

36

Outline Dimens

ion 

Draw

ings

5

FR-A820-01540(30K)(-E)(GF)
FR-A840-00770(30K)(-E)(GF)

FR-A820-01870(37K), 02330(45K), 03160(55K), 03800(75K), 04750(90K)(-E)(GF)
FR-A840-00930(37K), 01160(45K), 01800(55K), 02160(75K), 02600(90K), 03250(110K), 03610(132K)(-E)(GF)

(Unit: mm)

(Unit: mm)

10

325

270

10

550

(10)

530

3.2

(15)

520

15

195

4-

φ20 hole for hanging 17

2-

φ10 hole





The LED display cover attached to 
the FR-A800-GF in this position has 
an additional 2.1 mm depth.

W

12

W1

10

H1

(15)

H

3.2

D

18

H2

(18)

FAN

2-

φ12 hole

D1

4-

φd hole



For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or whenever a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC 
reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.



The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.

Inverter model

W

W1

H

H1

H2

d

D

D1

FR-A820-01870(37K), 02330(45K)
FR-A840-00930(37K), 01160(45K), 01800(55K)



435

380

550

525

514

25

250

24

FR-A820-03160(55K)



465

410

700

675

664

25

250

22

FR-A820-03800(75K)



, 04750(90K)



465

400

740

715

704

24

360

22

FR-A840-02160(75K)



, 02600(90K)



465

400

620

595

584

24

300

22

FR-A840-03250(110K)



, 03610(132K)



465

400

740

715

704

25

360

22




background image

37

5

Outline Dimens

ion 

Draw

ings

FR-A840-04320(160K), 04810(185K)(-E)(GF)

FR-A840-05470(220K), 06100(250K), 06830(280K)(-E)(GF)

Always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.



The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.

 (Unit: mm)

Always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.



The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.

(Unit: mm)

3-

φ12 hole

12

200

498

10

985

(15)

1010

3.2

380

13

984

(13)

22

FAN

4-

φ16 hole

200



300

680

12

300

13

984

(13)

1010

3.2

380

13

984

(13)

FAN

22

4-

φ16 hole

3-

φ12 hole




background image

38

Outline Dimens

ion 

Draw

ings

5

Separated converter type

Inverter

FR-A842-07700(315K), 08660(355K)(-E)(GF)

FR-A842-09620(400K), 10940(450K), 12120(500K)(-E)(GF)(-P)



The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.

(Unit: mm)



The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.

(Unit: mm)

185

185

23

12

70

200

540

440

4.5

4.5

200

(70)

(15)

1300

(17)

17

1296

15

1330

3-

φ12 hole

8-

φ25 hole



185

185

23

12

100

240

680

440

4.5

4.5

240

(100)

(15)

1550

(17)

17

1546

15

1580

3-

φ12 hole

8-

φ25 hole




background image

39

5

Outline Dimens

ion 

Draw

ings

Converter unit

Equipped with a DC reactor.



Do not remove the cover on the side of the converter unit.

FR-CC2-H315K, H355K

(Unit: mm)

FR-CC2-H400K(-P), H450K(-P), H500K(-P), H560K(-P), H630K

(Unit: mm)

3-

φ12 hole

8-

φ25 hole

185

185

23

12

100

200

600

440

4.5

4.5

200

(100)

(15)

1300

(17)

17

1296

15

1330

∗1

∗1

3-

φ12 hole

8-

φ25 hole

185

185

23

12

100

200

600

440

4.5

4.5

200

(100)

(15)

1550

(17)

17

1546

15

1580

∗1

∗1


background image

40

Outline Dimens

ion 

Draw

ings

5

IP55 compatible model

Equipped with a DC reactor.

FR-A846-00023(0.4K), 00038(0.75K), 00052(1.5K), 00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K), 00170(5.5K)(-E)

(Unit: mm)

FR-A846-00250(7.5K), 00310(11K), 00380(15K), 00470(18.5K)(-E)

(Unit: mm)

520

238

271

2.3

508

5

201

18.5

8

(7)

(18.5)

2-

φ8 hole

650

238

285

23

610

20

2.3

632.5

8.5

201

18.5

10

(20)

(9)

(18.5)

2-

φ10 hole

4-

φ20 hole

FAN


background image

41

5

Outline Dimens

ion 

Draw

ings

FR-A846-00620(22K), 00770(30K), 00930(37K), 01160(45K)(-E)

(Unit: mm)

FR-A846-01800(55K), 02160(75K), 02600(90K), 03250(110K), 03610(132K)(-E)

(Unit: mm)

345

10

300

22.5

12

(22.5)

(10)

2-

φ12 hole

790

770

357

24

754

18

2.3

(18)

4-

φ25 hole

FAN

420

35

175

175

(35)

15

10

H1

(H2)

H

2.3

456.6

23

H3

(23)

24

3-

φ15 hole

4-

φ25 hole

FAN

Inverter model

H

H1

H2

H3

FR-A846-01800(55K) to 02600(90K)

1360 1334 16

1314

FR-A846-03250(110K), 03610(132K)

1510 1482 18

1464


background image

42

Outline Dimens

ion 

Draw

ings

5

Operation panel (FR-DU08, FR-LU08)

<Outline drawing>

<Panel cutting dimension drawing>

27.8

Operation 
panel

66

72.5

78.5

3

3

3

3

72

16

17

3.2max

66

72.5

21

5

22

20

2-M3 screw

Panel

Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP) (option)

Operation panel connection 
cable (FR-CB2[ ] ) (option)

120 or more

∗1

Air-bleeding hole 

∗1 Denotes the space required to connect an optional 

operation panel connection cable (FR-CB2[ ]). When 
using another cable, leave the space required for the 
cable specification.

(Unit: mm)


background image

43

5

Outline Dimens

ion 

Draw

ings

Protruding the heatsink through the panel

When encasing the inverter or the converter unit in an enclosure, the heat generated in the enclosure can be greatly reduced by protruding 
the heatsink of the inverter or the converter unit. When installing the inverter in a compact enclosure, etc., this installation method is 
recommended. For the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher, a heatsink can be protruded outside the enclosure without using an attachment.

When using a panel through attachment (FR-A8CN)

For the FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-04750(90K) and FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to FR-A840-03610(132K), a heatsink can be protruded 
outside the enclosure using a panel through attachment (FR-A8CN). Refer to the Instruction Manual of the panel through attachment (FR-
A8CN) for details.
 • Drawing after attachment installation (when used with the FR-A8CN)

 • Enclosure cut dimensions (when used with the FR-A8CN)

Type

W

H

H1

H2

H3

D

D1

D2

FR-A8CN01

150

389.5

260

111.5

18

97

48.4

24.3

FR-A8CN02

245

408.5

260

116.5

32

86

89.4

21.3

FR-A8CN03

245

448.5

300

116.5

32

89

106.4

21.3

FR-A8CN04

280

554

400

113.5

32

96.7

102.4

40.6

FR-A8CN05

357

654

480

130

44

130.8

64.2

105

FR-A8CN06

478.2

650

465

145

40

96

154

55

FR-A8CN07

510.2

805

610

150

45

130

120

105

FR-A8CN08

510.2

845

650

150

45

176.5

183.5

40

FR-A8CN09

510.2

725

530

150

45

152.3

147.7

65

(Unit: mm)

FR-A8CN01

FR-A8CN02

FR-A8CN03

FR-A8CN04

FR-A8CN05

FR-A8CN06

FR-A8CN07

FR-A8CN08

FR-A8CN09

For a compatibility table between the attachment and the inverter, refer to page 175.

W

H

H3

(H1)

H2

D

D1

Attachment

Panel

D2

Panel

Attachment

6-M5 screw

112

100

90

280

7.5

265

365

136

145

(Unit: mm)

6-M5 screw

175

102

90

280

7.5

265

367

195

212

(Unit: mm)

6-M5 screw

175

102

90

320

7.5

305

407

195

212

(Unit: mm)

6-M8 screw

12.5

230

40

40

102

335

517

244

200

260

90

440

(Unit: mm)

6-M8 screw

265

516

270

95

290

540

85

12

330

(Unit: mm)

61

1

380

440

4-M10 screw

510

105

590

15

380

410

(Unit: mm)

615

440

477

4-M10 screw

662

108

740

13

410

470

(Unit: mm)

770

440

477

4-M10 screw

702

108

780

13

400

470

(Unit: mm)

810

440

477

4-M10 screw

582

1

08

660

13

400

470

(Unit: mm)

690


background image

44

Outline Dimens

ion 

Draw

ings

5

Heatsink protrusion through the panel for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher

 • Enclosure cutting

Cut an enclosure according to the capacity of the inverter or the converter unit.

FR-A840-04320(160K)
FR-A840-04810(185K)

FR-A840-05470(220K)
FR-A840-06100(250K)
FR-A840-06830(280K)

FR-A842-07700(315K)
FR-A842-08660(355K)

FR-A842-09620(400K)
FR-A842-10940(450K)
FR-A842-12120(500K)

FR-CC2-H315K
FR-CC2-H355K

FR-CC2-H400K
FR-CC2-H450K
FR-CC2-H500K
FR-CC2-H560K
FR-CC2-H630K

200

200

484

13

954

18

985

Hole

6-M10 screw

Hole

300

300

662

15

954

15

984

6-M10 screw

520

200

200

15

15

1300

1270

Hole

6-M10 screw

660

240

240

15

15

1550

1520

Hole

6-M10 screw

580

200

200

15

15

1300

1270

Hole

6-M10 screw

580

200

200

15

15

1550

1520

Hole

6-M10 screw

(Unit: mm)


background image

45

5

Outline Dimens

ion 

Draw

ings

 • Shift and removal of a rear side installation frame

 • Installation of the inverter or the converter unit
Push the inverter heatsink portion outside the enclosure and fix the enclosure and the inverter or the converter unit with upper and lower 
installation frame.

NOTE

 • Having a cooling fan, the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure cannot be used in the environment of water drops, oil, mist, dust, 

etc.

 • Be careful not to drop screws, dust etc. into the inverter or the converter unit  and the cooling fan section.
 • The FR-A7CN panel through attachment cannot be installed on the FR-A800 series.

For the FR-A840-04320(160K) to FR-A840-06830(280K)

For the FR-A842-07700(315K) to FR-A842-12120(500K), 
FR-CC2-H315K to FR-CC2-H630K

One installation frame is attached to each of the upper and lower parts of 
the inverter. Change the position of the rear side installation frame on the 
upper and lower sides of the inverter to the front side as shown below. 
When changing the installation frames, make sure that the installation 
orientation is correct.

Two installation frames are attached to each of the upper and 
lower parts of the inverter or the converter unit. Remove the rear 
side installation frame on the upper and lower sides of the 
inverter or the converter unit as shown below.

Upper 
installation 
frame

Lower 
installation 
frame

Shift

Shift

Removal

Upper installation 

frame (rear side)

Removal

Lower installation 

frame (rear side)

Inverter/

Converter unit

Inside the 
enclosure

Enclosure

Exhausted air

Installation 
frame

Dimension of 
the outside of 
the enclosure

Cooling 

wind

Enclosure

There are finger guards behind the enclosure. 
Therefore, the thickness of the panel should be 
less than 10 mm (

∗1) and also do not place 

anything around finger guards to avoid contact 
with the finger guards.

Finger guard

140 mm

6 mm

10 mm

∗1

185 mm


background image

46

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

6

Standard models and IP55 compatible models

FM type



For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor (FR-
HEL), which is available as an option. (To select a DC reactor, refer to page 27, page 204, and select one according to the applicable motor capacity.)
When connecting a DC reactor, if a jumper is installed across terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor.
The IP55 compatible model has a built-in DC reactor. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or 
higher.)



When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21. IP55 compatible models do not have terminals 
R1/L11, S1/L21, and jumpers.



The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 136.)



Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.



Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the voltage/current input 
switch OFF. To input a current, set the voltage/current input switch ON. (Refer to page 123.)



It is recommended to use 2 W 1 k

 when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.



If connecting a brake resistor, remove the jumper between PR and PX (FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00250(7.5K)).



Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 
01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discharging resistors.



Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3.

 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195, Pr.196). (Refer to page 137.)

 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 137.)

 Terminal F/C (FM) can be used to output pulse trains as open collector output by setting Pr.291.

 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel.

 Do not change the initially set ON (enabled) position of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector in the case of the inverter with a built-in C2 filter (IP55 compatible 

model). The Class C2 compatibility condition is not satisfied with the EMC filter OFF. The FR-A846-00250(7.5K)-C2 to FR-A846-00470(18.5K)-C2 are not 
provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. The EMC filter is always ON.

Three-phase
AC power
supply

MCCB

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

R1/L11
S1/L21

PC

24VDC power supply

(Common for external power supply transistor)

Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

Start self-holding selection

Middle speed

High speed

Low speed

Jog operation

Second function selection

Output stop

Reset

Terminal 4 input selection

(Current input selection)

Selection of automatic restart

after instantaneous

power failure

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

10E(+10V)

10(+5V)

2

(Analog common)

2

3

1

Auxiliary
input

 Terminal 4 input
(Current input)

1

4

Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ

∗6

Running

Up to frequency

Instantaneous
power failure
Overload

Frequency detection

 Open collector output common

 Sink/source 

common

F/C

(FM)

SD

Control input signals 
(No voltage input allowed)

∗3

Jumper

Motor

Relay output 1
(Fault output)

C1

B1

A1

U
V

W

P1

Indicator
(Frequency meter, etc.)

+

-

(-)

(+)

Analog signal output
(0 to ±10VDC)

Earth

(Ground)

AM

5

DC0 to ±5V selectable

DC0 to ±10V

Multi-speed
selection

Open collector output

∗11

Moving-coil type
1mA full-scale

         Contact input common

Calibration
resistor 

∗13

Earth

(Ground)

Main circuit terminal

Control circuit terminal

DC0 to 5V

DC0 to 10V selectable

MC

Main circuit

C2

B2

A2

Relay output 2

Relay output

∗10

M

DC0 to 20mA

DC0 to 5V
DC0 to 10V

selectable

DC4 to 20mA

TXD+

Terminating

resistor

TXD-

RXD+

RXD-

GND

(SG)

Data 
transmission

GND

RS-485 terminals

PU
connector

USB A 
connector

USB
mini B
connector

SINK

SOURCE

∗4

∗5

∗5

∗12

∗5

∗5

Connector for plug-in option connection

STF

STR

STP(STOP)

RH

RM

RL

JOG

RT

MRS

RES

AU

CS

SD

RUN

SU

IPF

OL

FU

SE

Data 
reception

(+)
(-)

5

EMC filter
ON/OFF
connecter

ON

OFF

+24

24V external power

supply input

SD

Common terminal

VCC

(+)
(-)

5V
(Permissible load current 100mA)

Sink logic

∗2

Earth (Ground)

R

R

Connector 1 Connector 2

Connector 3

Jumper

Jumper

PX

PR

N/-

P/+

Control circuit

Initial value

Initial value

Initial value

ON

4

2

OFF

Voltage/current
input switch

Brake unit

(Option)

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

∗1

Brake resistor
(FR-ABR)

∗7∗8

Safety monitor output

Safety monitor output common

So (SO)

SOC

S1

S2

PC

SD

SIC

Safety stop signal

Safety stop input (Channel 1)

Shorting
wire

Safety stop input common

Safety stop input (Channel 2)

Jumper

P1

Earth

(Ground)

R

P3

PR

N/-

P/+

Brake unit
(Option)

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

∗1

Brake resistor

∗8

∗9

FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)

∗14

24V

Inrush current
limit circuit

24V

Output shutoff
circuit

Inrush
current 
limit circuit

Terminal Connection Diagram


background image

47

6

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

CA type



For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor (FR-
HEL), which is available as an option. (To select a DC reactor, refer to page 27, page 204, and select one according to the applicable motor capacity.)
When connecting a DC reactor, if a jumper is installed across terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor.
The IP55 compatible model has a built-in DC reactor. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or 
higher.)



When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21. IP55 compatible models do not have terminals 
R1/L11, S1/L21, and jumpers.



The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 136.)



Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.



Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the voltage/current input 
switch OFF. To input a current, set the voltage/current input switch ON. (Refer to page 123.)



It is recommended to use 2 W 1 k

 when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.



If connecting a brake resistor, remove the jumper between PR and PX (FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00250(7.5K)).



Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 
01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discharging resistors.



Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3.

 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195, Pr.196). (Refer to page 137.)

 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 137.)

 Do not change the initially set ON (enabled) position of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector in the case of the inverter with a built-in C2 filter (IP55 compatible 

model). The Class C2 compatibility condition is not satisfied with the EMC filter OFF. The FR-A846-00250(7.5K)-C2 to FR-A846-00470(18.5K)-C2 are not 
provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. The EMC filter is always ON.

Analog current output
(0 to 20mADC)

F/C

(CA)

R

Three-phase
AC power
supply

MCCB

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

R1/L11
S1/L21

PC

Common for external power

 supply transistor

Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

Start self-holding selection

Middle speed

High speed

Low speed

Jog operation

Second function selection

Output stop

Reset

Terminal 4 input selection

(Current input selection)

Selection of automatic restart

 after instantaneous power failure

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

10E(+10V)

10(+5V)

2

(Analog common)

2

3

1

Auxiliary
input

 Terminal 4 input
(Current input)

1

4

Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ

∗6

Running

Up to frequency

Instantaneous
power failure
Overload

Frequency detection

 Open collector output common

Sink/source common

Control input signals
 (No voltage input allowed)

∗3

Jumper

Motor

Relay output 1
(Fault output)

C1

B1

A1

U
V

W

P1

(-)

(+)

(-)

(+)

Analog signal output

Earth

(Ground)

AM

5

DC0 to ±5V selectable

DC0 to ±10V

(DC0 to ±10V)

Multi-speed
selection

Open collector output

∗11

         Contact input common

Earth

(Ground)

Main circuit terminal

Control circuit terminal

DC0 to 5V

DC0 to 10V selectable

MC

Main circuit

C2

B2

A2

Relay output 2

Relay output

∗10

M

DC0 to 20mA

DC0 to 5V
DC0 to 10V

selectable

DC4 to 20mA

TXD+

Terminating

resistor

TXD-

RXD+

RXD-

Data 
transmission

GND

RS-485 terminals

PU
connector

USB A 
connector

USB
mini B
connector

SINK

SOURCE

∗4

∗5

∗5

∗5

∗5

Connector for plug-in option connection

STF

STR

STP(STOP)

RH

RM

RL

JOG

RT

MRS

RES

AU

CS

SD

RUN

SU

IPF

OL

FU

SE

Data 
reception

(+)
(-)

5

EMC filter
ON/OFF
connecter

ON

OFF

+24

24V external power

supply input

VCC

(+)
(-)

5V
(Permissible load current 100mA)

Sourse logic

∗2

Earth (Ground)

R

Connector 1 Connector 2

Connector 3

Jumper

Jumper

PX

PR

N/-

P/+

Control circuit

Initial value

Initial value

Initial value

ON

4

2

OFF

Voltage/current
input switch

Brake unit

(Option)

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

∗1

Brake resistor
(FR-ABR)

∗7∗8

Safety monitor output

Safety monitor output common

So (SO)

SOC

Safety stop signal

Safety stop input (Channel 1)

Shorting
wire

Safety stop input common

Safety stop input (Channel 2)

S1

S2

PC

SD

SIC

SD

24VDC power supply

Jumper

P1

Earth

(Ground)

R

P3

PR

N/-

P/+

Brake unit
(Option)

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

∗1

Brake resistor

∗8

∗9

FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)

GND

(SG)

∗12

Inrush
current 
limit circuit

Output shutoff
circuit

24V

Inrush current
limit circuit

Common terminal

24V


background image

48

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

6

Separated converter type

FM type



Terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 are connected to terminals P/+ and N/- with a jumper respectively. When using separate power supply for the control circuit, 
remove the jumpers from R1/L11 and S1/L21.



The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178 to Pr.189).



Terminal JOG is also used as the pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.



The X10 signal (NC contact input specification) is assigned to terminal MRS in the initial setting. Set Pr.599 = "0" to change the input specification of the 
X10 signal to NO contact.



Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the voltage/current input 
switch OFF. To input a current, set the voltage/current input switch ON. Terminals 10 and 2 are also used as a PTC input terminal. (Pr.561)



It is recommended to use 2 W 1 k

 when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.



The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195, Pr.196).



The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194).



No function is assigned in the initial setting. Use Pr.192 for function assignment.

 Terminal FM can be used to output pulse trains as open collector output by setting Pr.291.

 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel.

R1/L11
S1/L21

PC

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

10E(+10V)

10(+5V)

2

(Analog common)

2

3

1

Auxiliary
input

Terminal 4 input
(Current input)

1

4

Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ

Running

Up to frequency

Overload

Frequency detection

 Open collector output common

 Sink/source common

F/C

(FM)

SD

Motor

Relay output 1
(Fault output)

C1

B1

A1

U
V

W

Indicator
(Frequency 
meter, etc.)

+

-

(-)

(+)

Analog signal output
(0 to ±10VDC)

Earth

(Ground)

AM

5

0 to ±5VDC selectable

0 to ±10VDC

Open collector output 



Moving-coil type
1mA full-scale

Calibration

resistor 



Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal

0 to 5VDC

0 to 10VDC

C2

B2

A2

Relay output 2

Relay output 



M

0 to 20mADC

0 to 5VDC

0 to 10VDC

selectable

4 to 20mADC

TXD+

TXD-

RXD+

RXD-

Data
transmission

GND

RS-485 terminals

SINK

SOURCE













Connector for plug-in option connection

STF

STR

STP(STOP)

RH

RM

RL

JOG

RT

MRS X10

RES

AU

CS

SD

RUN

SU

IPF

OL

FU

SE

Data
reception

(+)

(-)

5

VCC

(+)

(-)

5V

Sink logic



Earth (Ground)

N/-

P/+

Initial value

ON

OFF

4

2

Safety stop signal

Safety monitor output

Safety monitor output common

So (SO)

SOC

Safety stop input (Channel 1)

Shorting
wire

Safety stop input common

Safety stop input (Channel 2)

S1

S2

PC

SD

SIC

+24

SD

Brake unit
(Option)

Jumper



(Permissible load 
current 100mA)

Connector 1 Connector 2

Connector 3

24V external power

supply input

Common terminal

24VDC power supply

(Common for external power supply transistor)

Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

Start self-holding selection

Middle speed

High speed

Low speed

Jog operation

Second function selection

Reset

Terminal 4 input selection

Selection of automatic restart

after instantaneous power failure

Control input signals 

(No voltage input allowed) 



Multi-speed
selection

         Contact input common

Main circuit

Control circuit

PU
connector

USB A 
connector

USB
mini B
connector

Voltage/current
input switch

selectable

Terminating

resistor

Initial value

Initial value

Output stop

         RDA

RDI

Converter
unit

      RSO

SE

N/-

P/+

      IPF

      RDB

      FAN

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

OH

RES
SD

PC

+24

C1

B1

A1





GND

(SG)

24V

24V

Output shutoff
circuit


background image

49

6

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

Converter unit (FR-CC2)

When the sink logic is selected

For a 12-phase application



When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumpers from R1/L11 and S1/L21.



The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178, Pr.187, Pr.189).



The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195).



The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194).



The connector is for manufacturer setting. Do not use.



Plug-in options cannot be used.



For manufacturer setting. Do not use.



To use RDA signal of the converter unit, select the NC contact input specification for the input logic of MRS signal or X10 signal of the inverter.
To use RDB signal of the converter unit, select the NO contact input specification for the input logic of MRS signal or X10 signal of the inverter. 
(For changing the input logic, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.)

Three-phase
AC power
supply

MCCB

Jumper

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

R1/L11
S1/L21

PC

24VDC power supply

(Common for external power supply transistor)

Reset

External thermal relay input

Contact input

Inverter operation enable 
(NO contact)

Inverter operation enable 
(NC contact)
Inverter reset

Instantaneous 
power failure

Cooling fan fault

Open collector output common

 Sink/source common

Control input signals
(No voltage input allowed) 



Relay output
(Fault output)

C1

B1

A1

Earth

(Ground)

Open collector output 



Contact input common

Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal

MC

Main circuit

Relay output 



TXD+

Terminating

resistor

TXD-

RXD+

RXD-

GND

RS-485 terminals

PU
connector

SINK

SOURCE

Connector for manufacturer setting

RES

OH

RDI

SD

RDA

RDB

RSO

MRS

(X10)

IPF

FAN

SE

VCC

5V (Permissible load
current 100mA)

Sink logic

Inverter





Connector 1

N/-

P/+

Control circuit

DC reactor

+24

24V external power

supply input

Common terminal

SD

RES

SD

EMC filter
ON/OFF
connecter

ON

OFF



USB
mini B
connector



N/-

P/+

88R

88S



Data reception

Data transmission

GND

(SG)

ON

OFF

24V

Inrush current
limit circuit

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

R1/L11
S1/L21

MC

∗1

N/-

P/+

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

N/-

P/+

R2/L12
S2/L22
T2/L32

MC

Main circuit terminal

Control circuit terminal

Three-phase
AC power
supply

MCCB

Inverter

DC reactor

Inrush current
limit circuit

EMC filter
ON/OFF
connecter

Main circuit

Jumper

MCCB

Earth

(Ground)

Power circuit for
control circuit


background image

50

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

6

FR-A800-E

FM type



For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor (FR-
HEL), which is available as an option. (To select a DC reactor, refer to page 27, page 204, and select one according to the applicable motor capacity.)
When connecting a DC reactor, if a jumper is installed across terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor.
The IP55 compatible model has a built-in DC reactor. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or 
higher.)



When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21. IP55 compatible models do not have terminals 
R1/L11, S1/L21, and jumpers.



The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 136.)



Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.



Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the voltage/current input 
switch OFF. To input a current, set the voltage/current input switch ON. (Refer to page 123.)



It is recommended to use 2 W 1 k

when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.



If connecting a brake resistor, remove the jumper between PR and PX (FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00250(7.5K)).



Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 
01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discharging resistors.



Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3.

 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195, Pr.196). (Refer to page 137.)

 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 137.)

 Terminal F/C (FM) can be used to output pulse trains as open collector output by setting Pr.291.

 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel.

 The option connector 2 cannot be used because the Ethernet board is installed in the initial status. The Ethernet board must be removed to install a plug-in 

option to the option connector 2. (However, Ethernet communication is disabled in that case.)

 Do not change the initially set ON (enabled) position of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector in the case of the inverter with a built-in C2 filter (IP55 compatible 

model). The Class C2 compatibility condition is not satisfied with the EMC filter OFF. The FR-A846-00250(7.5K)-C2 to FR-A846-00470(18.5K)-C2 are not 
provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. The EMC filter is always ON.

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

R1/L11
S1/L21

PC

10E(+10V)

10(+5V)

2

2

3

1

1

4

 

F/C

(FM)

SD

C1

B1

A1

U
V
W

P1

AM

5

C2

B2

A2

M

SINK

SOURCE

∗4

∗9

∗5

∗12

Ethernet
connector

∗14

STF

STR

STP(STOP)

RH

RM

RL

JOG

RT

MRS

RES

AU

CS

SD

RUN

SU

IPF

OL

FU

SE

(+)
(-)

5

ON

OFF

(+)
(-)

∗2

∗15

R

R

∗14

PX

PR

N/-

P/+

ON

OFF

4

2

So (SO)

SOC

S1

S2

PC

SD

SIC

+24

SD

P1

R

P3

PR

N/-

P/+

Three-phase
AC power
supply

MCCB

24VDC power supply

(Common for external power supply transistor)

Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

Start self-holding selection

Middle speed

High speed

Low speed

Jog operation

Second function selection

Output stop

Reset

Terminal 4 input selection

(Current input selection)

Selection of automatic restart

after instantaneous

power failure

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

Auxiliary
input

 Terminal 4 input
(Current input)

Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ

∗6

Running

Up to frequency

Instantaneous power failure

Overload

Frequency detection

 Open collector output common

Sink/source common

Control input signals 
(No voltage input allowed)

∗3

Jumper

Motor

Relay output 1
(Fault output)

Indicator
(Frequency meter, etc.)

+

-

(-)

(+)

Analog signal output
(0 to ±10VDC)

Multi-speed
selection

Open collector output

∗11

Moving-coil type
1mA full-scale

         Contact input common

Calibration
resistor 

∗13

Earth

(Ground)

Main circuit terminal

Control circuit terminal

MC

Main circuit

Relay output 2

Relay output

∗10

PU
connector

USB A 
connector

USB
mini B
connector

Connector for plug-in option connection

EMC filter 
ON/OFF 
connecter

24V external power

supply input

Common terminal

Sink logic

Earth (Ground)

Connector 1 Connector 2

Connector 3

Jumper

Control circuit

Voltage/current
input switch

Brake unit

(Option)

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

∗1

Brake resistor
(FR-ABR)

∗7∗8

Safety monitor output

Safety monitor output common

Safety stop signal

Safety stop input (Channel 1)

Shorting
wire

Safety stop input common

Safety stop input (Channel 2)

Jumper

Earth

(Ground)

Brake unit
(Option)

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

∗1

Brake resistor

∗8

FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)

Earth

(Ground)

Jumper

(Analog common)

DC0 to ±5V selectable

DC0 to ±10V

DC0 to 5V

DC0 to 10V selectable

DC0 to 20mA

DC0 to 5V
DC0 to 10V

selectable

DC4 to 20mA

∗5

∗5

∗5

Initial value

Initial value

Initial value

24V

24V

Inrush

current 

limit circuit

Inrush current
limit circuit

Output shutoff
circuit


background image

51

6

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

CA type



For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor (FR-
HEL), which is available as an option. (To select a DC reactor, refer to page 27, page 204, and select one according to the applicable motor capacity.)
When connecting a DC reactor, if a jumper is installed across terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor.
The IP55 compatible model has a built-in DC reactor. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or 
higher.)



When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21. IP55 compatible models do not have terminals 
R1/L11, S1/L21, and jumpers.



The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 136.)



Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.



Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the voltage/current input 
switch OFF. To input a current, set the voltage/current input switch ON. (Refer to page 123.)



It is recommended to use 2 W 1 k

 when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.



If connecting a brake resistor, remove the jumper between PR and PX (FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00250(7.5K)).



Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 
01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discharging resistors. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed).)



Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3.

 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195, Pr.196). (Refer to page 137.)

 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 137.)

 The option connector 2 cannot be used because the Ethernet board is installed in the initial status. The Ethernet board must be removed to install a plug-in 

option to the option connector 2. (However, Ethernet communication is disabled in that case.)

 Do not change the initially set ON (enabled) position of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector in the case of the inverter with a built-in C2 filter (IP55 compatible 

model). The Class C2 compatibility condition is not satisfied with the EMC filter OFF. The FR-A846-00250(7.5K)-C2 to FR-A846-00470(18.5K)-C2 are not 
provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. The EMC filter is always ON.

NFB

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

R1/L11
S1/L21

 

C1

B1

A1

P1

MC

C2

B2

A2

SINK

SOURCE

STF

RUN

SU

IPF

OL

FU

SE

ON

OFF

∗2

∗13

R

R

PX

PR

N/-

P/+

AM

5

So (SO)

SOC

2

3

1

∗5

(+)
(-)

(+)
(-)

∗12

S1

S2

PC

SD

SIC

PC

∗4

STR

STP(STOP)

RH

RM

RL

JOG

RT

MRS

RES

AU

CS

SD

+24

SD

F/C

(CA)

∗12

Analog current output
(0 to 20mADC)

Three-phase
AC power
supply

Common for external power

 supply transistor

Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

Start self-holding selection

Middle speed

High speed

Low speed

Jog operation

Second function selection

Output stop

Reset

Terminal 4 input selection

(Current input selection)

Selection of automatic restart

 after instantaneous power failure

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

Auxiliary
input

 Terminal 4 input
(Current input)

Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ

∗6

Running

Up to frequency

Instantaneous power failure

Overload

Frequency detection

 Open collector output common

Sink/source common

Control input signals
 (No voltage input allowed)

∗3

Jumper

Relay output 1
(Fault output)

(-)

(+)

(-)

(+)

Analog signal output

Earth

(Ground)

(0 to ±10VDC)

Multi-speed
selection

Open collector output

∗11

         Contact input common

Earth

(Ground)

Main circuit terminal

Control circuit terminal

Main circuit

Relay output 2

Relay output

∗10

PU
connector

USB A 
connector

USB
mini B
connector

Connector for plug-in option connection

EMC filter
ON/OFF
connecter

24V external power

supply input

Sourse logic

Connector 1 Connector 2

Connector 3

Jumper

Jumper

Control circuit

Voltage/current
input switch

Brake unit

(Option)

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

∗1

Brake resistor
(FR-ABR)

∗7∗8

Safety monitor output

Safety monitor output common

Safety stop signal

Safety stop input (Channel 1)

Shorting
wire

Safety stop input common

Safety stop input (Channel 2)

24VDC power supply

Common terminal

Ethernet
connector

10E(+10V)

10(+5V)

2

(Analog common)

1

4

DC0 to ±5V selectable

DC0 to ±10V

DC0 to 5V

DC0 to 10V selectable

DC0 to 20mA

DC0 to 5V
DC0 to 10V

selectable

DC4 to 20mA

∗5

∗5

∗5

5

Initial value

Initial value

Initial value

24V

24V

ON

OFF

4

2

U
V

W

M

P1

R

P3

PR

N/-

P/+

∗9

FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)

Jumper

Earth

(Ground)

Brake unit
(Option)

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

∗1

Brake resistor

∗8

Inrush
current 
limit circuit

Motor

Earth (Ground)

Inrush current
limit circuit

Output shutoff
circuit


background image

52

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

6

FR-A800-GF

FM type



For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor (FR-
HEL), which is available as an option. (To select a DC reactor, refer to page 27, page 204, and select one according to the applicable motor capacity.)
When connecting a DC reactor, if a jumper is installed across terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor.
(The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)



When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21.



The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 136.)



Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.



Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the voltage/current input 
switch OFF. To input a current, set the voltage/current input switch ON. (Refer to page 123.)



It is recommended to use 2 W 1 k

 when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.



If connecting a brake resistor, remove the jumper between PR and PX (FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00250(7.5K)).



Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 
01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discharging resistors.



Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3.

 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195, Pr.196). (Refer to page 137.)

 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 137.)

 Terminal F/C (FM) can be used to output pulse trains as open collector output by setting Pr.291.

 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel.

Three-phase
AC power
supply

MCCB

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

R1/L11
S1/L21

PC

24VDC power supply

(Common for external power supply transistor)

Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

Start self-holding selection

Middle speed

High speed

Low speed

Jog operation

Second function selection

Output stop

Reset

Terminal 4 input selection

(Current input selection)

Selection of automatic restart

after instantaneous

power failure

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

10E(+10V)

10(+5V)

2

(Analog common)

2

3

1

Auxiliary
input

 Terminal 4 input
(Current input)

1

4

Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ

∗6

Running

Up to frequency

Instantaneous
power failure
Overload

Frequency detection

 Open collector output common

 Sink/source 

common

F/C

(FM)

SD

Control input signals 
(No voltage input allowed)

∗3

Jumper

Motor

Relay output 1
(Fault output)

C1

B1

A1

U
V

W

P1

Indicator
(Frequency meter, etc.)

+

-

(-)

(+)

Analog signal output
(0 to ±10VDC)

Earth

(Ground)

AM

5

DC0 to ±5V selectable

DC0 to ±10V

Multi-speed
selection

Open collector output

∗11

Moving-coil type
1mA full-scale

         Contact input common

Calibration
resistor 

∗13

Earth

(Ground)

Main circuit terminal

Control circuit terminal

DC0 to 5V

DC0 to 10V selectable

MC

Main circuit

C2

B2

A2

Relay output 2

Relay output

∗10

M

DC0 to 20mA

DC0 to 5V
DC0 to 10V

selectable

DC4 to 20mA

TXD+

Terminating

resistor

TXD-

RXD+

RXD-

GND

(SG)

Data 
transmission

GND

RS-485 terminals

PU connector

USB A connector

USB mini B connector

SINK

SOURCE

∗4

∗5

∗5

∗12

∗5

∗5

Connector for plug-in option 

connection

STF

STR

STP(STOP)

RH

RM

RL

JOG

RT

MRS

RES

AU

CS

SD

RUN

SU

IPF

OL

FU

SE

Data 
reception

(+)
(-)

5

EMC filter
ON/OFF
connecter

ON

OFF

+24

24V external power

supply input

SD

Common terminal

VCC

(+)
(-)

5V
(Permissible load current 100mA)

Sink logic

∗2

Earth (Ground)

R

R

Connector 2

Connector 3

CC-Link IE Field Network 

communication connector

PORT 1

PORT 2

Jumper

Jumper

PX

PR

N/-

P/+

Control circuit

Initial value

Initial value

Initial value

ON

4

2

OFF

Voltage/current
input switch

Brake unit

(Option)

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

∗1

Brake resistor
(FR-ABR)

∗7∗8

Safety monitor output

Safety monitor output common

So (SO)

SOC

S1

S2

PC

SD

SIC

Safety stop signal

Safety stop input (Channel 1)

Shorting wire

Safety stop input common

Safety stop input (Channel 2)

Jumper

P1

Earth

(Ground)

R

P3

PR

N/-

P/+

Brake unit
(Option)

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

∗1

Brake resistor

∗8

∗9

Inrush
current 
limit circuit

FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)

24V

Inrush current
limit circuit

24V

Output shutoff
circuit


background image

53

6

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

CA type



For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor (FR-
HEL), which is available as an option. (To select a DC reactor, refer to page 27, page 204, and select one according to the applicable motor capacity.)
When connecting a DC reactor, if a jumper is installed across terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor.
(The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)



When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21.



The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 136.)



Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.



Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the voltage/current input 
switch OFF. To input a current, set the voltage/current input switch ON. (Refer to page 123.)



It is recommended to use 2 W 1 k

 when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.



If connecting a brake resistor, remove the jumper between PR and PX (FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00250(7.5K)).



Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 
01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discharging resistors.



Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3.

 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195, Pr.196). (Refer to page 137.)

 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 137.)

Analog current output
(0 to 20mADC)

F/C

(CA)

R

Three-phase
AC power
supply

MCCB

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

R1/L11
S1/L21

PC

Common for external power

 supply transistor

Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

Start self-holding selection

Middle speed

High speed

Low speed

Jog operation

Second function selection

Output stop

Reset

Terminal 4 input selection

(Current input selection)

Selection of automatic restart

 after instantaneous power failure

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

10E(+10V)

10(+5V)

2

(Analog common)

2

3

1

Auxiliary
input

 Terminal 4 input
(Current input)

1

4

Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ

∗6

Running

Up to frequency

Instantaneous
power failure
Overload

Frequency detection

 Open collector output common

Sink/source common

Control input signals
 (No voltage input allowed)

∗3

Jumper

Motor

Relay output 1
(Fault output)

C1

B1

A1

U
V

W

P1

(-)

(+)

(-)

(+)

Analog signal output

Earth

(Ground)

AM

5

DC0 to ±5V selectable

DC0 to ±10V

(DC0 to ±10V)

Multi-speed
selection

Open collector output

∗11

         Contact input common

Earth

(Ground)

Main circuit terminal

Control circuit terminal

DC0 to 5V

DC0 to 10V selectable

MC

Main circuit

C2

B2

A2

Relay output 2

Relay output

∗10

M

DC0 to 20mA

DC0 to 5V
DC0 to 10V

selectable

DC4 to 20mA

TXD+

Terminating

resistor

TXD-

RXD+

RXD-

Data 
transmission

GND

RS-485 terminals

SINK

SOURCE

∗4

∗5

∗5

∗5

∗5

STF

STR

STP(STOP)

RH

RM

RL

JOG

RT

MRS

RES

AU

CS

SD

RUN

SU

IPF

OL

FU

SE

Data 
reception

(+)
(-)

5

EMC filter
ON/OFF
connecter

ON

OFF

+24

24V external power

supply input

VCC

(+)
(-)

5V
(Permissible load current 100mA)

Sourse logic

∗2

Earth (Ground)

R

Jumper

Jumper

PX

PR

N/-

P/+

Control circuit

Initial value

Initial value

Initial value

ON

4

2

OFF

Voltage/current
input switch

Brake unit

(Option)

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

∗1

Brake resistor
(FR-ABR)

∗7∗8

Safety monitor output

Safety monitor output common

So (SO)

SOC

Safety stop signal

Safety stop input (Channel 1)

Shorting wire

Safety stop input common

Safety stop input (Channel 2)

S1

S2

PC

SD

SIC

SD

24VDC power supply

Jumper

P1

Earth

(Ground)

R

P3

PR

N/-

P/+

Brake unit
(Option)

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

∗1

Brake resistor

∗8

∗9

FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)

GND

(SG)

Inrush
current 
limit circuit

PU connector

USB A connector

USB mini B connector

Connector for plug-in option 

connection

Connector 2

Connector 3

CC-Link IE Field Network 

communication connector

PORT 1

PORT 2

Output shutoff
circuit

24V

Inrush current
limit circuit

Common terminal

24V


background image

54

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

6

Separated converter type (FR-A842-P)

FM type



Terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 are connected to terminals P/+ and N/- with a jumper respectively. When using separate power supply for the control circuit, 
remove the jumpers from R1/L11 and S1/L21.



The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178 to Pr.189).



Terminal JOG is also used as the pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.



The X10 signal (NC contact input specification) is assigned to terminal MRS in the initial setting. Set Pr.599 = "0" to change the input specification of the 
X10 signal to NO contact.



Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage (0 to 5 V/0 to 10 V), set the 
voltage/current input switch OFF. To input a current (4 to 20 mA), set the voltage/current input switch ON. Terminals 10 and 2 are also used as a PTC input 
terminal. (Pr.561)



It is recommended to use 2 W 1 k

 when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.



The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195, Pr.196).



The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194).



No function is assigned in the initial setting. Use Pr.192 for function assignment.

 Terminal F/C (FM) can be used to output pulse trains as open collector output by setting Pr.291.

 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel.

NOTE

 • For the system configuration for the parallel operation, refer to the FR-A802-P Instruction Manual (Hardware).

R1/L11
S1/L21

PC

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

10E(+10V)

10(+5V)

2

(Analog common)

2

3

1

Auxiliary
input

Terminal 4 input
(Current input)

1

4

Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ

Running

Up to frequency

Overload

Frequency detection

 Open collector output common

 Sink/source common

F/C

(FM)

SD

Relay output 1
(Fault output)

C1

B1

A1

U
V

W

Indicator
(Frequency 
meter, etc.)

+

-

(-)

(+)

Analog signal output
(0 to ±10VDC)

Earth

(Ground)

AM

5

0 to ±5VDC selectable

0 to ±10VDC

Open collector output 



Moving-coil type
1mA full-scale

Calibration

resistor 



Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal

0 to 5VDC

0 to 10VDC

C2

B2

A2

Relay output 2

Relay output 



0 to 20mADC

0 to 5VDC

0 to 10VDC

selectable

4 to 20mADC

TXD+

TXD-

RXD+

RXD-

GND

(SG)

Data
transmission

GND

Master/slave communication

SINK

SOURCE













Connector for plug-in option connection

STF

STR

STP(STOP)

RH

RM

RL

JOG

RT

MRS X10

RES

AU

CS

SD

RUN

SU

IPF

OL

FU

SE

Data
reception

(+)

(-)

5

VCC

(+)

(-)

5V

Sink logic



N/-

P/+

Initial value

ON

OFF

4

2

For manufacturer

So (SO)

SOC

Shorting
wire

S1

S2

PC

SD

SIC

+24

SD

Jumper



(Permissible load 
current 100mA)

Connector 1 Connector 2

Connector 3

24V external power

supply input

Common terminal

24VDC power supply

(Common for external power supply transistor)

Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

Start self-holding selection

Middle speed

High speed

Low speed

Jog operation

Second function selection

Reset

Terminal 4 input selection

Selection of automatic restart

after instantaneous power failure

Control input signals 

(No voltage input allowed) 



Multi-speed
selection

         Contact input common

Main circuit

Control circuit

PU
connector

USB A 
connector

Voltage/current
input switch

selectable

Terminating

resistor

Initial value

Initial value

Output stop

         RDA

RDI

Converter

unit

(Master)

      RSO

SE

N/-

P/+

      IPF

      RDB

      FAN

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

OH

RES
SD

PC

+24

C1

B1

A1





To motor

Inverter

(Master)

24V


background image

55

6

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

Converter unit (FR-CC2-P)

When the sink logic is selected



When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumpers from R1/L11 and S1/L21.



The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178, Pr.187, Pr.189).



The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195).



The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194).



The connector is for manufacturer setting. Do not use.



Plug-in options cannot be used.



For manufacturer setting. Do not use.



To use the RDA signal of the converter unit, select the NC contact input specification for the input logic of MRS signal or X10 signal of the inverter.
To use the RDB signal of the converter unit, select the NO contact input specification for the input logic of MRS signal or X10 signal of the inverter. (For 
changing the input logic, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.)

NOTE

 • For the system configuration for the parallel operation, refer to the FR-CC2-P Instruction Manual.

Three-phase
AC power
supply

MCCB

Jumper

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

R1/L11
S1/L21

PC

24VDC power supply

(Common for external power supply transistor)

Reset

External thermal relay input

Contact input

Inverter operation enable 
(NO contact)

Inverter operation enable 
(NC contact)
Inverter reset

Instantaneous 
power failure

Cooling fan fault

Open collector output common

 Sink/source common

Control input signals
(No voltage input allowed) 



Relay output
(Fault output)

C1

B1

A1

Earth

(Ground)

Open collector output 



Contact input common

Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal

MC

Main circuit

Relay output 



TXD+

Terminating

resistor

TXD-

RXD+

RXD-

GND

(SG)

GND

Master/slave communication

PU
connector

SINK

SOURCE

Connector for manufacturer setting

RES

OH

RDI

SD

RDA

RDB

RSO

MRS

(X10)

IPF

FAN

SE

VCC

5V (Permissible load
current 100mA)

Sink logic

Inverter

(Master)



Connector 1

N/-

P/+

Control circuit

DC reactor

+24

24V external power

supply input

Common terminal

SD

RES

SD

EMC filter
ON/OFF 
connecter

ON

OFF



USB
mini B
connector



N/-

P/+

88R

88S



Data reception

Data transmission



ON

OFF

Converter unit

(Master)

24V

Inrush current
limit circuit


background image

56

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

6

Connection of motor with encoder (vector control) (when the sink logic is selected 
and the FR-A8AP is used)

Speed control

Torque control

Standard motor with encoder (SF-JR) and 5 V differential line driver

Vector control dedicated motor

(SF-V5RU, SF-THY) and 12 V complementary

Standard motor with encoder (SF-JR) and 5 V differential line driver

Vector control dedicated motor

(SF-V5RU, SF-THY) and 12 V complementary

Three-phase

AC power

supply

MCCB

MC

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

SF-JR motor
with encoder

U

V

W

U

V

W

E

C

∗3

∗1

∗2

∗4

∗6

R

PA1

FR-A8AP

PA2

PB1

PB2

PZ1

PZ2

PG

PG

SD

SD

Differential

Terminating

resistor ON

OFF

Complementary

A

N

B

P

H

K

IM

Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

Contact input common

STF

STR

SD

PLG

Earth
(Ground)

Inverter

10

2

2

3

1

Torque limit

command

(±10V)

1

Frequency command

Frequency setting

potentiometer

1/2W1kΩ

5

(+)
(-)

5VDC power supply

(+)

(-)

∗5

*4

*6

*3

PA1

FR-A8AP

PA2

PB1

PB2

PZ1

PZ2

PG

PG

SD

SD

*1

Differential

Terminating

resistor

ON

OFF

Complementary

SF-V5RU, SF-THY

U

V

W

U

A
B

C

V

W

E

G1
G2

A

Earth
(Ground)

*2

Three-phase

AC power

supply

MCCB

MC

OCR

B

PA1

PA2

PB1

PB2

PZ1

PZ2

PG

PG

SD

SD

C

D

F

G

S

R

IM

FAN

PLG

External
thermal
relay input

 

*8

Thermal
protector

*7

RH(OH)

SD

Inverter

PC

2W1kΩ

12VDC power 
supply

(+)

(-)

*5

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

SF-JR motor
with encoder

U

V

W

U

V

W

E

C

∗3

∗1

∗2

∗4

∗6

R

PA1

FR-A8AP

PA2

PB1

PB2

PZ1

PZ2

PG

PG

SD

SD

Differential

Terminating

resistor ON

OFF

Complementary

A

N

B

P

H

K

IM

Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

Contact input common

STF

STR

SD

PLG

Earth
(Ground)

Inverter

5VDC power supply

(+)

(-)

∗5

10

2

2

3

1

Torque command

(±10V)

1

Speed limit command

Frequency setting

potentiometer

1/2W1kΩ

5

(+)
(-)

Three-phase

AC power

supply

MCCB

MC

*4

*6

*3

PA1

FR-A8AP

PA2

PB1

PB2

PZ1

PZ2

PG

PG

SD

SD

*1

Differential

Terminating

resistor

ON

OFF

Complementary

SF-V5RU, SF-THY

U

V

W

U

A
B

C

V

W

E

G1
G2

A

Earth
(Ground)

*2

Three-phase

AC power

supply

MCCB

MC

OCR

B

PA1

PA2

PB1

PB2

PZ1

PZ2

PG

PG

SD

SD

C

D

F

G

S

R

IM

FAN

PLG

External
thermal
relay input

 

*8

Thermal
protector

*7

RH(OH)

SD

Inverter

PC

2W1kΩ

12VDC power 
supply

(+)

(-)

*5


background image

57

6

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

Position control



The pin number differs according to the encoder used.
Speed, control, torque control, and position control by pulse train input are available with or without the Z-phase being connected.



Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio must be 1:1.



Earth (ground) the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure using a tool such as a P-clip. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed).)



For the complementary, set the terminating resistor selection switch to OFF position. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed).)



A separate power supply of 5 V/12 V/15 V/24 V is necessary according to the encoder power specification.
When the encoder output is the differential line driver type, only 5 V can be input.
Make the voltage of the external power supply the same as the encoder output voltage, and connect the external power supply across PG and SD.



For terminal compatibility of the FR-JCBL, FR-V7CBL, and FR-A8AP, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed).



For the fan of the 7.5 kW or lower dedicated motor, the power supply is single phase. (200 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz)



Connect the recommended 2W1kΩ resistor between terminals PC and OH. (Recommended 
product: MOS2C102J 2W1kΩ by KOA Corporation)
Insert the input line and the resistor to a 2-wire blade terminal, and connect the blade terminal to 
terminal OH.
Insulate the lead wire of the resistor, for example by applying a contraction tube, and shape the 
wires so that the resistor and its lead wire will not touch other cables. Caulk the lead wire securely 
together with the thermal protector input line using a 2-wire blade terminal.
(Do not subject the lead wire's bottom area to an excessive pressure.)
To use a terminal as terminal OH, assign the OH (external thermal O/L relay input) signal to an 
input terminal. (Set "7" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189. For details, refer to page 136.)



Assign the function using Pr.178 to Pr.184, Pr.187 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).

 When position control is selected, terminal JOG function is invalid and simple position pulse train input terminal becomes valid.

 Assign the function using Pr.190 to Pr.194 (output terminal function selection).

Vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU, SF-THY) and 12 V complementary

Torque limit command

(±10V)

1

5

(+)
(-)

Three-phase

AC power

supply

MCCB

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

∗4

∗6

∗3

PA1

FR-A8AP

PA2

PB1

PB2

PZ1

PZ2

PG

PG

SD

SD

Forward stroke end

Reverse stroke end

Pre-excitation/servo on

Clear signal

Pulse train

Sign signal

Preparation ready signal

STF

STR

LX 

∗9

CLR 

∗9

CLEAR

JOG 

∗10

NP 

∗9

∗1

Differential

line driver

Terminating

resistor

ON

OFF

SF-V5RU, SF-THY

U

V

W

U

A
B

C

V

W

E

G1
G2

A

Earth
(ground)

∗2

Three-phase

AC power supply

MCCB

MC

OCR

B

C

D

F

G

S

R

IM

FAN

PLG

External thermal protector
relay input 

∗8

Thermal
protector

∗7

RH(OH)

SD

Inverter

Positioning unit

MELSEC iQ-R RD75P[ ]

MELSEC-Q QD75P[ ]N/QD75P[ ]

MELSEC-L LD75P[ ]

PC

2W1kΩ

12VDC 
power supply

(+)

(-)

∗5

PULSE F

PULSE R

PULSE COM

CLRCOM

RDYCOM

READY

PC

RDY 

∗11

SE

FLS

RLS

DOG

STOP

COM

24VDC power supply

MC

Complementary

PC

Resistor (2 W1kΩ)

Insulate

Insulate

RH (OH)

To thermal protector

2-wire blade terminal

When OH signal is assigned to terminal RH
(Pr.182 = "7")


background image

58

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

6

Inverter

 indicates that terminal functions can be selected from Pr.178 to Pr.196 (I/O terminal function selection).

Terminal names and terminal functions are those of the factory set.

Type

Terminal 

Symbol

Terminal Name

Description

Main circuit

R/L1, S/L2, 

T/L3



AC power input

Connect to the commercial power supply.

U, V, W

Inverter output

Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor or PM motor.

R1/L11, 

S1/L21



Power supply for 

control circuit

Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To retain alarm display and alarm output, apply external 

power to this terminal.

P/+, PR



Brake resistor 

connection

Connect an optional brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR. Remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX for 

the inverter capacity that has terminal PX. (FR-A820-00630(11K) or lower, FR-A840-00380(15K) or lower)

P3, PR



Brake resistor 

connection

Connect an optional brake resistor across terminals P3 and PR. (FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-

00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K))

P/+, N/-

Brake unit connection

Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) or regeneration common converter 

(MT-RC) and high power factor converter (FR-HC2).

Do not connect the DC power supply between terminals P3 and N/-. Use terminals P/+ and N/- for DC feeding.

Connect the separated converter type to terminals P/+ and N/- of the converter unit. (Wire one terminal P/+ to another 

terminal P/+, and do likewise for terminal N/-.)

P3, N/-

Brake unit connection



P/+, P1



DC reactor connection

Remove the jumper across terminals P/+-P1 and connect a DC reactor. For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-

A840-02160(75K) or higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor, which is available as 

an option. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)

PR, PX



Built-in brake circuit 

connection

When the jumper is connected across terminals PX and PR (initial status), the built-in brake circuit is valid. The built-in 

brake circuit is equipped in the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.

Earth (Ground)

For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).

Control ci

rcuit/input signal

Con

tact input

STF

Forward rotation start

Turn on the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it off to stop.

When the STF and STR signals 

are turned on simultaneously, 

the stop command is given.

STR

Reverse rotation start

Turn on the STR signal to start reverse rotation and turn it off to stop.

STP 

(STOP)

Start self-holding 

selection

Turn on the STOP signal to self-hold the start signal.

RH, RM, RL

Multi-speed selection

Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH, RM and RL signals.

JOG

Jog mode selection

Turn on the JOG signal to select Jog operation (initial setting) and turn on the start signal (STF or STR) to start Jog 

operation.

Pulse train input

JOG terminal can be used as pulse train input terminal. To use as pulse train input terminal, the Pr.291 setting needs to 

be changed. (maximum input pulse: 100k pulses/s)

RT

Second function 

selection

Turn on the RT signal to select second function selection

When the second function such as “Second torque boost” and “Second V/F (base frequency)” are set, turning on the RT 

signal selects these functions.

MRS

Output stop

Turn on the MRS signal (2 ms or more) to stop the inverter output.

Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by electromagnetic brake.

MRS

(X10)



Output stop

(Inverter operation 

enable)

Connect to terminal RDA of the converter unit (FR-CC2). When the RDA signal is turned OFF, the inverter output is shut 

off. The X10 signal (NC contact) is assigned to terminal MRS in the initial setting. Use Pr.599 to change the specification 

to NO contact.

RES

Reset

Used to reset alarm output provided when protective circuit is activated. Turn on the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then 

turn it off. Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.

AU

Terminal 4 input 

selection

Terminal 4 is made valid only when the AU signal is turned on.

Turning the AU signal on makes terminal 2 invalid.

CS

Selection of automatic 

restart after 

instantaneous power 

failure

When the CS signal is left on, the inverter restarts automatically at power restoration. Note that restart setting is 

necessary for this operation. In the initial setting, a restart is disabled.

SD

Contact input common 

(sink)



Common terminal for the contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal FM.

External transistor 

common (source)



Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector output) device, such as 

a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by undesirable current.

24 VDC power supply

common

Common terminal for the 24 VDC power supply (terminal PC, terminal +24)

Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.

PC

External transistor 

common (sink)



Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector output) device, such as 

a programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid malfunction by undesirable currents.

Contact input common 

(source)



Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).

24 VDC power supply

Can be used as 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply.

Frequency setting

10E

Frequency setting 

power supply

When connecting a frequency setting potentiometer at an initial status, connect it to 

terminal 10. 

Change the input specifications of terminal 2 when connecting it to terminal 10E.

10 VDC, permissible load 

current 10 mA

10

5 VDC, permissible load current 

10 mA

2

Frequency setting 

(voltage)

Inputting 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA) provides the maximum output 

frequency at 5 V (10 V, 20 mA) and makes input and output proportional. Use Pr.73 to 

switch from among input 0 to 5 VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10 VDC, and 4 to 20 mA. Set 

the voltage/current input switch in the ON position to select current input (0 to 20 mA).

Voltage input:

Input resistance 10 k

 1 k

Maximum permissible voltage

20 VDC

Current input:

Input resistance 245 

 5 

Maximum permissible current

30 mA

4

Frequency setting 

(current)

Inputting 4 to 20 mADC (or 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) provides the maximum output 

frequency at 20 mA and makes input and output proportional. This input signal is valid 

only when the AU signal is on (terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr.267 to switch from 

among input 4 to 20 mA (initial setting), 0 to 5 VDC, and 0 to 10 VDC. Set the voltage/

current input switch in the OFF position to select voltage input (0 to 5 V/0 to 10 V). 

Use Pr.858 to switch terminal functions.

1

Frequency setting 

auxiliary

Inputting 0 to ±5 VDC or 0 to ±10 VDC adds this signal to terminal 2 or 4 frequency 

setting signal. Use Pr.73 to switch between input 0 to ±5 VDC and 0 to ±10 VDC 

(initial setting) input.

Input resistance 10 k

±1 k

Maximum permissible voltage

±20 VDC

5

Frequency setting 

common

Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4) and analog output terminal AM, CA. Do not earth 

(ground).

The

rm

is

to

r

10

2

PTC thermistor input

For receiving PTC thermistor outputs.

When PTC thermistor is valid (Pr.561 

 "9999"), terminal 2 is not available for 

frequency setting.

Applicable PTC thermistor 

specification Overheat detection 

resistance: 500 

 to 30 k

(Set by Pr.561)

Po

w

er

suppl

y i

npu

t

+24

24 V external power 

supply input

For connecting 24 V external power supply.

If the 24 V external power supply is connected, power is supplied to the control circuit 

while the main power circuit is OFF.

Input voltage 23 to 25.5 VDC

Input current 1.4 A or less

Terminal Specification Explanation


background image

59

6

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n



Terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, PR, P3, P1, and PX are not provided in the separated converter type.



Terminals R1/L11, S1/L21, PR, P3, and PX are not provided for the IP55 compatible model.



Available for the FR-A820-00770(15K) to FR-A820-01250(22K), and the FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to FR-A840-01800(55K).



The sink logic is initially set for the FM-type inverter.



The source logic is initially set for the CA-type inverter.



Terminal FM is provided in the FM-type inverter.



Terminal CA is provided in the CA-type inverter.



Function and name of the separated converter type.



The terminals are for manufacturer setting for the FR-A842-P. Do not connect anything to these. Doing so may damage the inverter.

Do not remove the shorting wires across the terminals S1 and PC, the terminals S2 and PC, and the terminals SIC and SD. Removing either shorting wire 

disables the inverter operation.

Control circuit/output signal

Relay

A1, B1, C1

Relay output 1

(alarm output)

1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter protective function has 

activated and the output stopped. Alarm: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across 

A-C), Normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity across A-C) 

Contact capacity 230 VAC

0.3 A (power factor =0.4)

30 VDC 0.3 A

A2, B2, C2

Relay output 2

1 changeover contact output

Open collector

RUN

Inverter running

Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or higher than the starting 

frequency (initial value 0.5 Hz). Switched high during stop or DC injection brake 

operation.

Permissible load

24 VDC (maximum 27 VDC)

0.1 A

(The voltage drop is 2.8 V at 

maximum while the signal is ON.)

LOW is when the open collector 

output transistor is ON 

(conducted). HIGH is when the 

transistor is OFF (not conducted).

SU

Up to frequency

Switched low when the output frequency reaches within the 

range of ±10% (initial value) of the set frequency.  Switched 

high during acceleration/deceleration and at a stop.

Alarm code (4 bit) 

output

(Refer to page 124.)

OL

Overload alarm

Switched low when stall prevention is activated by the stall 

prevention function.  Switched high when stall prevention is 

cancelled.

IPF

Instantaneous power 

failure

Switched low when an instantaneous power failure and 

under voltage protections are activated.

IPF



Open collector output

No function is assigned in the initial setting.

The function can be assigned setting Pr.192.

FU

Frequency detection

Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to 

or higher than the preset detected frequency and high when 

less than the preset detected frequency.

SE

Open collector output 

common

Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU

Pulse

FM



For meter

Select one e.g. output frequency from monitor items. (The 

signal is not output during an inverter reset.)

The output signal is proportional to the magnitude of the 

corresponding monitoring item.

The output signal is proportional to the magnitude of the 

corresponding monitoring item.Use Pr.55, Pr.56, and Pr.866 

to set full scales for the monitored output frequency, output 

current, and torque.

Output item: output frequency (initial setting),

permissible load current 2 mA,

For full scale1440 pulses/s

NPN open collector 

output

Signals can be output from the open collector terminals 

by setting Pr.291. (maximum output pulse: 50kpulses/s)

Analog

AM

Analog voltage output

Output item: output frequency (initial setting),

output signal 0 to ±10 VDC,

permissible load current 1 mA

(load impedance 10 k

 or more),

resolution 8 bit

CA



Analog current output

Output item: output frequency (initial setting),

Load impedance 200 

 to 450 

Output signal 0 to 20 mADC

Communication

—

PU connector

With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485. (1:1 connection only)
• Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485)

• Transmission format: Multi-drop link

• Communication speed: 4800 to 115200 bps

• Wiring length: 500 m

RS-485 terminals

TXD+, 

TXD-

Inverter transmission 

terminal

With the RS-485 terminals, communication can be made through RS-485. (The FR-A800-E inverter does not have the 

interface.)

RXD+, 

RXD-

Inverter reception 

terminal

• Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485)

• Transmission format: Multi-drop link

• Communication speed: 300 to 115200 bps

• Overall extension: 500 m

GND 

(SG)

Earth (Ground)

Two inverters in parallel connection have the RS-485 communication via the RS-485 terminals on each inverter. (FR-

A842-P)

• Total wiring length: 5 m or less

—

USB A connector

A connector (receptacle).

A USB memory device enables parameter copies and the trace function.

Interface: Conforms to USB1.1 

(USB2.0 full-speed compatible).

Transmission speed: 12 Mbps

USB B connector

Mini B connector (receptacle).

Connected to a personal computer via USB to enable setting, monitoring, test 

operations of the inverter by FR Configurator2.

CC-Link IE

CON1

Connector for 

communication

(Port 1)

Communication can be made via the CC-Link IE Field Network.

(The FR-A800-GF inverter has the connectors. For other inverters, the communication option FR-A8NCE is available for 

the CC-Link IE Field Network communication.)

CON2

Connector for 

communication

(Port 2)

—

Ethernet connector

Using Ethernet communication, the inverter's status can be monitored or the parameters can be set via Internet. (Only 

the FR-A800-E inverter has the interface.)

Safety stop signal



S1

Safety stop input

 (Channel 1)

Terminals S1 and S2 are used for the safety stop input signal for the safety relay 

module. Terminals S1 and S2 are used at the same time (dual channel). Inverter 

output is shutoff by shortening/opening between terminals S1 and SIC, or between S2 

and SIC. In the initial status, terminals S1 and S2 are shorted with terminal PC by 

shorting wires. Terminal SIC is shorted with terminal SD. Remove the shorting wires 

and connect the safety relay module when using the safety stop function.

Input resistance 4.7 k

Input current 4 to 6 mADC

(with 24 VDC input)

S2

Safety stop input 

(Channel 2)

SIC

Safety stop input 

terminal common

Common terminal for terminals S1 and S2.

—

So (SO)

Safety monitor output 

(open collector output)

Indicates the safety stop input signal status.

Switched to LOW when the status is other than the internal safety circuit failure. 

Switched to HIGH during the internal safety circuit failure status.

(LOW is when the open collector output transistor is ON (conducted). HIGH is when 

the transistor is OFF (not conducted).)

Refer to the Safety Stop Function Instruction Manual (BCN-A23228-001) when the 

signal is switched to HIGH while both terminals S1 and S2 are open.

Permissible load

24 VDC (maximum 27 VDC)

0.1 A

(The voltage drop is 3.4 V at 

maximum while the signal is 

ON.)

SOC

Safety monitor output 

terminal common

Common terminal for terminal So (SO).

—

Type

Terminal 

Symbol

Terminal Name

Description


background image

60

Te

rmina

l Connec

tion 
D

iagra

m, T

ermina

l S
p

ec

ific
ation Ex

plana

tio

n

6

Converter unit (FR-CC2)

 indicates that terminal functions can be selected from Pr.178, Pr.187, Pr.189 to Pr.195 (I/O terminal function selection).

Terminal names and terminal functions are those of the factory set.

Type

Terminal Symbol

Terminal Name

Description

M

ain

 ci

rc

u

it

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

(R2/L12, S2/L22, 

T2/L32)

AC power input

Connect these terminals to the commercial power supply.
For 12-phase applications, use these terminals for connection with a 12-phase rectifier power 
transformer (3-winding transformer).
For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the converter unit.

R1/L11,S1/L21

Power supply for the 

control circuit

Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To retain the fault display and fault 
output, remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and across S/L2 and S1/L21 and 
supply external power to these terminals.

P/+, N/-

Inverter connection

Connect to terminals P/+ and N/- of the inverter. (Wire one terminal P/+ to another terminal P/+, 
and do likewise for terminal N/-.)

Earth (ground)

For earthing (grounding) the converter unit chassis. This must be earthed (grounded).

C

o

n

tr

o

l ci

rc

ui

t/

in

pu

t s

igna

l

C

o

n

tact

 in

pu

t

RES

Reset

Use this signal to reset a fault output provided when a protective function is activated. Turn ON 
the RES signal for 0.1 s or longer, then turn it OFF.
In the initial setting, reset is always enabled. By setting Pr.75, reset can be set enabled only at 
fault occurrence of the converter unit. The inverter recovers about 1 s after the reset is released.

OH

External thermal relay 

input

The external thermal relay input (OH) signal is used when using an external thermal relay or a 
thermal protector built into the motor to protect the motor from overheating.
When the thermal relay is activated, the inverter trips by the external thermal relay operation 
(E.OHT).

RDI

Contact input

The function can be assigned by setting Pr.178.

SD

Contact input common

(sink) (Initial setting)

Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic).

External transistor

common (source)

Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector 
output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by 
undesirable current.

24 VDC power supply 

common

Common terminal for the 24 VDC power supply (terminal PC, terminal +24)
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.

PC

External transistor

common (sink) (Initial 

setting)

Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector 
output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by 
undesirable current.

Contact input common

(source)

Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).

24 VDC power supply 

common

Can be used as a 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply.

P

o

we

r su

p

p

ly

in

p

u

t

+24

24 V external power

supply input

For connecting a 24 V external power supply.
If a 24 V external power supply is connected, power is supplied to the control circuit while the 
main power circuit is OFF.

C

o

n

tr

o

l ci

rc

u

it

/ou

tp

ut

 si

gn

al

Re

la

y

A1, B1, C1

Relay output 1

 (fault output)

1 changeover contact output that indicates that the protective function 
of the converter unit has been activated and the outputs are stopped.
Fault: discontinuity across B and C (continuity across A and C), 
Normal: continuity across Band C (discontinuity across A and C)

Contact capacity 230 
VAC 0.3 A (power factor 
= 0.4)
30 VDC 0.3 A

88R, 88S

For manufacturer setting. Do not use.

Op

en

 co

lle

cto

r

RDA

Inverter operation

enable (NO contact)

Switched to LOW when the converter unit operation is ready.
Assign the signal to terminal MRS (X10) of the inverter.
The inverter can be started when the RDA status is LOW.

Permissible load
24 VDC (maximum 27 
VDC)
0.1 A
(The voltage drop is 2.8 
V at maximum while the 
signal is ON.)
LOW is when the open 
collector output
transistor is ON 
(conducted).
HIGH is when the 
transistor is OFF (not 
conducted).

RDB

Inverter operation

enable (NC contact)

Switched to LOW when a converter unit fault occurs or the converter is 
reset.
The inverter can be started when the RDB status is HIGH.

RSO

Inverter reset

Switched to LOW when the converter is reset (RES-ON).
Assign the signal to terminal RES of the inverter.
The inverter is reset when it is connected with the RSO status LOW.

IPF

Instantaneous power 

failure

Switched to LOW when an instantaneous power failure is detected.

FAN

Cooling fan fault

Switched to LOW when a cooling fan fault occurs.

SE

Open collector output 

common

Common terminal for terminals RDA, RDB, RSO, IPF, FAN

C

o

m

m

u

ni

c

at

ion

—

PU connector

With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485. (For connection on a 1:1 
basis only)
• Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)
• Transmission format: Multidrop link
• Communication speed: 4800 to 115200 bps
• Wiring length: 500 m

RS-485 

terminals

TXD+

Converter unit 

transmission terminal

The RS-485 terminals enable the communication by RS-485.
• Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)
• Transmission format: Multidrop link
• Communication speed: 300 to 115200 bps
• Overall length: 500 m
Two inverters in parallel connection have the RS-485 communication via the RS-485 terminals on 
each inverter. (FR-CC2-P)
• Total wiring length : 5 m or less

TXD-

RXD+

Converter unit reception 

terminal

RXD-

GND 

(SG)

Earthing (grounding)


background image

61

7

O

p

er

ation P

a

ne
l (FR

-DU08

(-0

1))
, LCD

 opera

tion 
p

anel (FR-LU

08

(-01

))

Components of the operation panel

The operation panel of the inverter can be used for the converter unit.



The FR-DU08-01 is an operation panel for IP55 compatible models.



Not available for the converter unit.

No.

Component 



Name

Description

(a)

FR-DU08

FR-DU08-01

Operation mode indicator 



PU/HAND: ON to indicate the PU operation mode.
EXT/AUTO: ON to indicate the External operation mode. (ON at power-ON in the initial setting.)
NET: ON to indicate the Network operation mode.
PU and EXT: ON to indicate the External/PU combined operation mode 1 or 2.

(b)

Operation panel status 
indicator

MON: ON to indicate the monitoring mode. Quickly flickers twice intermittently while the 
protective function is activated.
PRM: ON to indicate the parameter setting mode.

(c)

Control motor indicator 



IM: ON to indicate the induction motor control.

PM: ON to indicate the PM sensorless vector control. 

The indicator flickers when test operation is selected.

(d)

Frequency unit indicator 



ON to indicate frequency. (Flickers when the set frequency is displayed in the monitor.)

(e)

Monitor (5-digit LED)

Shows the frequency, parameter number, etc.
(Using Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, the monitored item can be changed.)

(f)

PLC function indicator 



ON to indicate that the PLC function is operating.

(g)

FWD key, REV key 



FWD key: Starts forward rotation. The LED is lit during forward operation.
REV key: Starts reverse rotation. The LED is lit during reverse operation.
The LED flickers under the following conditions.

•

 When the frequency command is not given even if the forward/reverse command is given.

•

 When the frequency command is the starting frequency or lower.

•

 When the MRS signal is being input.

(h)

STOP/RESET key

Stops the operation commands.
Resets the inverter when the protection function is activated.

(i)

Setting dial

The setting dial of the Mitsubishi Electric inverters. The setting dial is used to change the 
frequency and parameter settings.
Press the setting dial to perform the following operations:

•

 To display a set frequency in the monitoring mode (the setting can be changed using 

Pr.992.)

•

 To display the present setting during calibration

•

 To display a fault history number in the faults history mode

(j)

MODE key

Switches to different modes.

Switches to the easy setting mode by pressing simultaneously with 

.

Holding this key for 2 seconds locks the operation. The key lock is invalid when Pr.161="0 
(initial setting)".

(k)

SET key

Enters each setting.
If pressed during operation, the monitored 
item changes.
(Using Pr.52 and Pr.774-Pr.776, the monitored item can be changed.)

(l)

ESC key

Goes back to the previous display.
Holding this key for a longer time changes the mode back to the monitor mode.

(m)

FR-DU08

FR-DU08-01

PU/EXT key 



Switches between the PU operation mode, the PUJOG operation mode, and the External 
operation mode.

Switches to the easy setting mode by pressing simultaneously with 

.

Cancels the PU stop also.

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)
(e)

(g)

(f)

(h)
(i)

(j)

(k)

(l)

(m)

Output frequency

Initial setting in the monitor mode

Output current

Output voltage

HAND

HAND
AUTO

AUTO

Operation Panel (FR-DU08(-01))


background image

62

O

p

er

ation P

a

ne
l (FR

-DU08

(-0

1))
, LCD

 opera

tion 
p

anel (FR-LU

08

(-01

))

7

Basic operation(FR-DU08)



For the details of operation modes, refer to page 125.



Monitored items can be changed.(Refer to page 116.)



For the details of the trace function, refer to page 163.



While a fault is displayed, the display shifts as follows by pressing 

: Output frequency at the fault → Output current → Output voltage → Energization 

time → Year → Month → Date → Time. (After Time, it goes back to a fault display.) Pressing the setting dial shows the fault history number.



The USB memory mode will appear if a USB memory device is connected. (Refer to page 63.)



Not available for the converter unit.

Operation mode switchover/Frequency setting

Function

Monitor

Parameter setting

Faults history

Blinking

Blinking

Blinking

External operation mode

∗1(

At power-ON)

First screen (Output frequency

∗2

 monitoring)

PU operation mode

∗1

PU Jog operation mode

∗1

Second screen 

(Output current

∗2

 monitoring)

Third screen 

(Output voltage

∗2

 monitoring)

Value change

(Example)

Frequency setting has been

written and completed.

Alternate display

[Operation for displaying faults history]
Past eight faults can be displayed.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)

Display the present
setting

Value change

Parameter write is completed.

Alternate display

(Example)

(Example)

(Example)

(Example)

Parameter copy

Initial value change list

IPM initialization

Parameter clear

All parameter clear

Faults history clear

Automatic parameter setting

Trace function

∗3

∗5

Faults history 1 

∗4

Faults history 2 

∗4

Faults history 8 

∗4

When no fault history exists,                        is displayed.

Group parameter setting

Hold down










background image

63

7

O

p

er

ation P

a

ne
l (FR

-DU08

(-0

1))
, LCD

 opera

tion 
p

anel (FR-LU

08

(-01

))

Parameter copy to the USB memory device

Insert the USB memory in the inverter. The USB memory mode is displayed and USB memory operations are possible.

USB memory mode

Overwrite the inverter parameter setting onto the 

designated file in the USB memory device.

Parameter setting 

file number saved in 

the USB memory 

device

(up to 99)

Copy the parameter setting 

from the inverter to the USB 

memory device.

Write the designated 

parameter setting file of 

the USB memory device 

to a parameter file of the 

inverter.

Verify the designated 

parameter setting file of 

the USB memory device 

against the parameter file 

of the inverter.

Monitor mode

Parameter setting mode

Function mode

Faults history mode


background image

64

O

p

er

ation P

a

ne
l (FR

-DU08

(-0

1))
, LCD

 opera

tion 
p

anel (FR-LU

08

(-01

))

7

Group parameter display

Parameter numbers can be changed to grouped parameter numbers.
Parameters are grouped by their functions. The related parameters can be set easily.

(1) Changing to the grouped parameter numbers

(2) Changing parameter settings in the group parameter display

Pr.MD setting value

Description

0

No change

1

Parameter display by parameter number

2

Parameter display by function group

Operation

1.

Screen at power-ON

The monitor display appears.

2.

Parameter setting mode

Press 

 to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

3.

Selecting the parameter number

Turn 

 until "

" (parameter display method) appears.

Press 

. "

" (initial value) will appear.

4.

Changing to the group parameter display

Turn 

 to change the set value to "

" (group parameter display). Press 

 to select the group parameter setting. "

" 

and "

" flicker alternately after the setting is completed.

Changing example

Change the P.H400(Pr.1) Maximum frequency.

Operation

1.

Screen at power-ON

The monitor display appears.

2.

Changing the operation mode

Press 

 to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator is lit.

3.

Parameter setting mode

Press 

 to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

4.

Parameter group selection

Press 

 several times until "

" appears.

(No need to press 

 if the previously read parameter is one of "

" to "

". Skip this operation and 

proceed to step 5..)

5.

Parameter group selection

Turn 

 until "

" (protective function parameter 4) appears. Press 

 to display "

" and make 

the group parameters of the protective function parameter 4 selectable.

6.

Parameter selection

Turn 

 until "

" (P.H400 Maximum frequency) appears. Press 

 to read the present set value. 

"

" (initial value) appears.

7.

Changing the setting value

Turn 

 to change the set value to "

". Press 

 to enter the setting. "

" and "

" flicker 

alternately after the setting is completed.


background image

65

7

O

p

er

ation P

a

ne
l (FR

-DU08

(-0

1))
, LCD

 opera

tion 
p

anel (FR-LU

08

(-01

))

 • The FR-LU08 is an optional operation panel adopting an LCD panel capable of displaying text and menus.
 • Replacement with the operation panel (FR-DU08) and installation on the enclosure surface using a connection cable (FR-CB2) are 

possible. (To connect the FR-LU08, an optional operation panel connection connector (FR-ADP) is required.)

 • Parameter settings for up to three inverters can be saved.
 • When the FR-LU08 is connected to the inverter, the internal clock of the inverter can be synchronized with the clock of FRLU08. (Real time 

clock function)
With a battery (CR1216), the FR-LU08 time count continues even if the main power of the inverter is turned OFF. (The time count of the 
inverter internal clock does not continue when the inverter power is turned OFF.)

 • The FR-LU08-01 meets the IP55 rating (except for the PU connector). It can be directly installed to the IP55 compatible model.

Appearance and parts name



HAND/AUTO key for the FR-LU08-01.

Switching the main monitor data

When Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection is set to "0", by pressing 

 or 

 6 types of monitor data are displayed in order.

Symbol

Name

Description

a

Power lamp

ON when the power is turned ON.

b

Alarm lamp

ON when an inverter alarm occurs.

c

Monitor

Shows the frequency, parameter number, etc.
(Using Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, the monitored item can be changed.)

d

FWD key, REV key

FWD key: Starts the forward operation.
REV key: Starts the reverse operation.

e

STOP/RESET key

Used to stop operation commands.
Used to reset the inverter when the protective function is activated.

f

Setting dial

The setting dial is used to change the frequency and parameter settings.
Pressing the dial shows details of the faults history mode.

g

PU/EXT key 



Switches between the PU mode, the PUJOG mode, and the External operation 
mode.

h

MON key

Shows the first monitored item.

i

MENU key

Displays the quick menu.
Pressing the key while the quick menu is displayed displays the function menu.

j

Software key (F1)

Select a guidance displayed on the monitor.

k

Software key (F2)

l

Software key (F3)

PREV

NEXT

SET

−−−

STOP

PU

Hz

0. 00

Hz Out

1:00

PREV

NEXT

SET

−−−

STOP

PU

Hz

0. 00

Hz Out

2:00

PREV

NEXT

SET

−−−

STOP

PU

Hz

0. 00

Hz Out

3:00

1:00

Inverter internal clock

Count-up

Count-up

Synchronization

Power-OFF

Power-ON

Synchronization

1:00

Inverter internal clock

3:00

1:00

2:00

3:00

Inverter internal clock

(a)

(d)

(f)

(b)

(i)
(h)

(c)

(e)

(g)

(j) (k) (l)

(PREV)

(NEXT)

First monitor

Second monitor

Third monitor

3-line monitor

The first monitor data and the
top two monitor data among 
output current, output frequency, 
and output voltage are displayed 
in rows.

Faults history monitor

(NEXT)

(PREV)

(PREV)

(NEXT)

(NEXT)

(NEXT)

(PREV)

(PREV)

(NEXT)

(PREV)

(NEXT)

(PREV)

Fourth monitor

(Displayed only when monitor data other 

than the first, second, or third monitor 

data is set as the first priority monitor.)

     

Alarm History

1 2 : 3 4

1 OHT
2 SER
3 OV2

4 OV2
5 OV2
6 OV2

7 OV3
8 

T

A

     

I  Out

1 2 : 3 4

Hz

     

Set  Hz

1 2 : 3 4

V

     

V  Out

1 2 : 3 4

0.00

60.00

  0.0

     

Hz Out

I  Out

1 2 : 3 4

0.00Hz
0.00A
  0.0V

PREV

SET

NEXT

STOP

PU

Hz

     

Hz  Out

1 2 : 3 4

0.00

PREV

SET

NEXT

STOP

PU

PREV

SET

NEXT

STOP

PU

PREV

SET

NEXT

STOP

PU

PREV

CLR

NEXT

STOP

PU

PREV

SET

NEXT

STOP

PU

V Out

When the output frequency 

is the first monitor data 

(initial setting)

When the first monitor data 

is other than output frequency, 

output current, and output voltage

Turn ON the power, or press           .

When the output current 
(initial setting) is the first 

monitor data

When the output voltage 

(initial setting) is the first 

monitor data

LCD operation panel (FR-LU08(-01))


background image

66

Para

mete

r List

8

Inverter parameter list (by parameter number)

For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial value of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the necessary 
parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made from the operation panel (FR-
DU08).

NOTE

 •

 indicates simple mode parameters. Use Pr.160 User group read selection to indicate the simple mode 

parameters only.

 • Parameter setting may be restricted in some operating statuses. Use Pr.77 Parameter write selection to change the setting.

Func

tio

n

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

ust

om

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA

B

asi

c f

u

nc

ti

on

s

0

G000

Torque boost 

0 to 30%

0.1%

6% 



108

4% 



3% 



2% 



1% 



1

H400

Maximum frequency 

0 to 120 Hz

0.01 Hz

120 Hz

 



108

60 Hz

 



2

H401

Minimum frequency 

0 to 120 Hz

0.01 Hz

0 Hz

108

3

G001

Base frequency 

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

108

4

D301

Multi-speed setting (high speed) 

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

109

5

D302

Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

30 Hz

109

6

D303

Multi-speed setting (low speed) 

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

10 Hz

109

7

F010

Acceleration time 

0 to 3600 s

0.1 s

5 s 



109

15 s 



8

F011

Deceleration time 

0 to 3600 s

0.1 s

5 s 



109

15 s 



9

H000
C103

Electronic thermal O/L relay 

Rated motor current 

0 to 500 A

0.01 A

 



Inverter rated 
current

110

0 to 3600 A

0.1 A

 



D

C

 in

je

ct

io

n

br

ake

10

G100

DC injection brake operation 
frequency

0 to 120 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

3 Hz

110

11

G101

DC injection brake operation time

0 to 10 s, 8888

0.1 s

0.5 s

110

12

G110

DC injection brake operation voltage

0 to 30%

0.1%

4% 



110

2% 



1% 



─

13

F102

Starting frequency

0 to 60 Hz

0.01 Hz

0.5 Hz

111

─

14

G003

Load pattern selection

0 to 5, 12 to 15

1

0

111

Jog

o

p

er

at

io

n

15

D200

Jog frequency

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

5 Hz

111

16

F002

Jog acceleration/deceleration time

0 to 3600 s

0.1 s

0.5 s

111

─

17

T720

MRS input selection

0, 2, 4

1

0

112

─

18

H402

High speed maximum frequency

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

120 Hz

 



108

60 Hz

 



─

19

G002

Base frequency voltage

0 to 1000 V, 8888, 
9999

0.1 V

9999

8888

108

A

cce

le

ra

ti

on

/

d

ece

le

ra

ti

on

time

s

20

F000

Acceleration/deceleration reference 
frequency

1 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

109

21

F001

Acceleration/deceleration time 
increments

0, 1

1

0

109

St

a

ll

pr

eve

nt

io

n

22

H500

Stall prevention operation level 
(Torque limit level)

0 to 400%

0.1%

150%

112

23

H610

Stall prevention operation level 
compensation factor at double speed

0 to 200%, 9999

0.1%

9999

112

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Parameter List


background image

67

8

Para

mete

r List

M

u

lt

i-

sp

eed

se

tt

in

g

24 to 

27

D304 

to 

D307

Multi-speed setting (4 speed to 7 
speed)

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

109

─

28

D300

Multi-speed input compensation 
selection

0, 1

1

0

109

─

29

F100

Acceleration/deceleration pattern 
selection

0 to 6

1

0

113

─

30

E300

Regenerative function selection

0 to 2, 10, 11, 20, 21, 
100 to 102, 110, 111, 
120, 121 



1

0

114

2, 10, 11, 102, 110, 
111 



1

10

0, 2, 10, 20, 100, 102, 
110, 120 



1

0

Fr

eq

u

enc

y

ju

m

p

31

H420

Frequency jump 1A

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

115

32

H421

Frequency jump 1B

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

115

33

H422

Frequency jump 2A

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

115

34

H423

Frequency jump 2B

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

115

35

H424

Frequency jump 3A

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

115

36

H425

Frequency jump 3B

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

115

─

37

M000

Speed display

0, 1 to 9998

1

0

115

F

re

que

ncy

de

te

ct

io

n

41

M441

Up-to-frequency sensitivity

0 to 100%

0.1%

10%

116

42

M442

Output frequency detection

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

6 Hz

116

43

M443

Output frequency detection for 
reverse rotation

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

116

Se

co

nd f

u

nct

ions

44

F020

Second acceleration/deceleration 
time

0 to 3600 s

0.1 s

5 s

109

45

F021

Second deceleration time

0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

109

46

G010

Second torque boost

0 to 30%, 9999

0.1%

9999

108

47

G011

Second V/F (base frequency)

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

108

48

H600

Second stall prevention operation 
level

0 to 400%

0.1%

150%

112

49

H601

Second stall prevention operation 
frequency

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

0 Hz

112

50

M444

Second output frequency detection

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

30 Hz

116

51

H010
C203

Second electronic thermal O/L relay
Rated second motor current

0 to 500 A, 9999 



0.01 A

9999

110

0 to 3600 A, 9999 



0.1 A

M

o

nit

o

r f

u

nct

ions

52

M100

Operation panel main monitor 
selection

0, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 
22 to 36, 38 to 46, 
50 to 57, 61, 62, 64, 
67, 71 to 74, 87 to 98, 
100

1

0

116

54

M300

FM/CA terminal function selection

1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 
21, 24, 32 to 34, 36, 
46, 50, 52, 53, 61, 62, 
67, 70, 87 to 90, 92, 
93, 95, 97, 98

1

1

116

55

M040

Frequency monitoring reference

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

118

56

M041

Current monitoring reference

0 to 500 A 



0.01 A

Inverter rated 
current

118

0 to 3600 A 



0.1 A

Automa

ti

c

re

st

ar

t

57

A702

Restart coasting time

0, 0.1 to 30 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

119

58

A703

Restart cushion time

0 to 60 s

0.1 s

1 s

119

─

59

F101

Remote function selection

0 to 3, 11 to 13

1

0

120

─

60

G030

Energy saving control selection

0, 4, 9

1

0

120

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

68

Para

mete

r List

8

Automa

ti

c

acc

el

er

at

io

n/

de

ce

le

ra

ti

o

n

61

F510

Reference current

0 to 500 A, 9999 



0.01 A 



9999

121

0 to 3600 A, 9999 



0.1 A 



62

F511

Reference value at acceleration

0 to 400%, 9999

0.1%

9999

121

63

F512

Reference value at deceleration

0 to 400%, 9999

0.1%

9999

121

64

F520

Starting frequency for elevator mode

0 to 10 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

121

─

65 



H300

Retry selection

0 to 5

1

0

121

─

66

H611

Stall prevention operation reduction 
starting frequency

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

112

Re

tr

y

67 



H301

Number of retries at fault occurrence 0 to 10, 101 to 110

1

0

121

68 



H302

Retry waiting time

0.1 to 600 s

0.1 s

1 s

121

69 



H303

Retry count display erase

0

1

0

121

─

70 



G107

Special regenerative brake duty

0 to 100%

0.1%

0%

114

─

71

C100

Applied motor

0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 
23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 
43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 
73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 
8090, 8093, 8094, 
9090, 9093, 9094

1

0

122

─

72 



E600

PWM frequency selection

0 to 15 



1

2

122

0 to 6, 25 



─

73

T000

Analog input selection

0 to 7, 10 to 17

1

1

123

─

74

T002

Input filter time constant

0 to 8

1

1

123

─

75

-

Reset selection/disconnected PU 
detection/PU stop selection

0 to 3, 14 to 17 



1

14

124

0 to 3, 14 to 17, 
100 to 103, 114 to 117 



E100

Reset selection

0, 1

0

E101

Disconnected PU detection

E102

PU stop selection

1

E107

Reset limit

0 



1

0

0, 1 



─

76

M510

Fault code output selection

0 to 2

1

0

124

─

77

E400

Parameter write selection

0 to 2

1

0

125

─

78

D020

Reverse rotation prevention 
selection

0 to 2

1

0

125

─

79

D000

Operation mode selection 

0 to 4, 6, 7

1

0

125

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA

Simple

Simple

Simple


background image

69

8

Para

mete

r List

Mo

to

r c

o

n

s

ta

n

ts

80

C101

Motor capacity

0.4 to 55 kW, 9999 



0.01 kW 



9999

126

0 to 3600 kW, 9999 



0.1 kW 



81

C102

Number of motor poles

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 9999 1

9999

126

82

C125

Motor excitation current

0 to 500 A, 9999 



0.01 A 



9999

127

0 to 3600 A, 9999 



0.1 A 



83

C104

Rated motor voltage

0 to 1000 V

0.1 V

200 V 



127

400 V 



84

C105

Rated motor frequency

10 to 400 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

127

85

G201

Excitation current break point

0 to 400 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

128

86

G202

Excitation current low speed scaling 
factor

0 to 300%, 9999

0.1%

9999

128

89

G932

Speed control gain (Advanced 
magnetic flux vector)

0 to 200%, 9999

0.1%

9999

126

90

C120

Motor constant (R1)

0 to 50 Ω, 9999 



0.001 Ω 



9999

127

0 to 400 mΩ, 9999 



0.01 mΩ 



91

C121

Motor constant (R2)

0 to 50 Ω, 9999 



0.001 Ω 



9999

127

0 to 400 mΩ, 9999 



0.01 mΩ 



92

C122

Motor constant (L1)/d-axis 
inductance (Ld)

0 to 6000mH, 9999 



0.1 mH 



9999

127

0 to 400mH, 9999 



0.01 mH 



93

C123

Motor constant (L2)/q-axis 
inductance (Lq)

0 to 6000mH, 9999 



0.1 mH 



9999

127

0 to 400mH, 9999 



0.01 mH 



94

C124

Motor constant (X)

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1% 



9999

127

0.01% 



95

C111

Online auto tuning selection

0 to 2

1

0

129

96

C110

Auto tuning setting/status

0, 1, 11, 101

1

0

127

A

d

ju

st

abl

e 5 po

in

ts

 V

/F

100

G040

V/F1 (first frequency)

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

129

101

G041

V/F1 (first frequency voltage)

0 to 1000 V

0.1 V

0 V

129

102

G042

V/F2 (second frequency)

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

129

103

G043

V/F2 (second frequency voltage)

0 to 1000 V

0.1 V

0 V

129

104

G044

V/F3 (third frequency)

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

129

105

G045

V/F3 (third frequency voltage)

0 to 1000 V

0.1 V

0 V

129

106

G046

V/F4 (fourth frequency)

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

129

107

G047

V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage)

0 to 1000 V

0.1 V

0 V

129

108

G048

V/F5 (fifth frequency)

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

129

109

G049

V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage)

0 to 1000 V

0.1 V

0 V

129

Thir

d

 f

u

n

ct

ion

s

110

F030

Third acceleration/deceleration time

0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

109

111

F031

Third deceleration time

0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

109

112

G020

Third torque boost

0 to 30%, 9999

0.1%

9999

108

113

G021

Third V/F (base frequency)

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

108

114

H602

Third stall prevention operation level

0 to 400%

0.1%

150%

112

115

H603

Third stall prevention operation 
frequency

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

0 Hz

112

116

M445

Third output frequency detection

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

116

PU c

onne

ct

or

 c

o

m

m

unica

ti

on

117

N020

PU communication station number

0 to 31

1

0

129

118

N021

PU communication speed

48, 96, 192, 384, 576, 
768, 1152

1

192

129

119

-

PU communication stop bit length / 
data length

0, 1, 10, 11

1

1

129

N022

PU communication data length

0, 1

0

N023

PU communication stop bit length

0, 1

1

120

N024

PU communication parity check

0 to 2

1

2

129

121

N025

PU communication retry count

0 to 10, 9999

1

1

129

122

N026

PU communication check time 
interval

0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s

9999

129

123

N027

PU communication waiting time 
setting

0 to 150 ms, 9999

1 ms

9999

129

124

N028

PU communication CR/LF selection

0 to 2

1

1

129

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

70

Para

mete

r List

8

─

125

T022

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 

frequency 

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

132

─

126

T042

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 

frequency 

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

132

P

ID

 op

er

at

io

n

127

A612

PID control automatic switchover 
frequency

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

133

128

A610

PID action selection

0, 10, 11, 20, 21, 
40 to 43, 50, 51, 60, 
61, 70, 71, 80, 81, 90, 
91, 100, 101, 1000, 
1001, 1010, 1011, 
2000, 2001, 2010, 
2011

1

0

133

129

A613

PID proportional band

0.1 to 1000%, 9999

0.1%

100%

133

130

A614

PID integral time

0.1 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

1 s

133

131

A601

PID upper limit

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

133

132

A602

PID lower limit

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

133

133

A611

PID action set point

0 to 100%, 9999

0.01%

9999

133

134

A615

PID differential time

0.01 to 10 s, 9999

0.01 s

9999

133

By

p

as

s

135

A000

Electronic bypass sequence 
selection

0, 1

1

0

134

136

A001

MC switchover interlock time

0 to 100 s

0.1 s

1 s

134

137

A002

Start waiting time

0 to 100 s

0.1 s

0.5 s

134

138

A003

Bypass selection at a fault

0, 1

1

0

134

139

A004

Automatic switchover frequency 
from inverter to bypass operation

0 to 60 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

134

B

ac

kl

ash

me

as

u

re

s

140

F200

Backlash acceleration stopping 
frequency

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

1 Hz

113

141

F201

Backlash acceleration stopping time

0 to 360 s

0.1 s

0.5 s

113

142

F202

Backlash deceleration stopping 
frequency

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

1 Hz

113

143

F203

Backlash deceleration stopping time

0 to 360 s

0.1 s

0.5 s

113

─

144

M002

Speed setting switchover

0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 
102, 104, 106, 108, 
110, 112

1

4

115

PU

145

E103

PU display language selection

0 to 7

1

─

134

─

147

F022

Acceleration/deceleration time 
switching frequency

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

109

Curr

e

n

t de

te

ct

ion

148

H620

Stall prevention level at 0 V input

0 to 400%

0.1%

150%

112

149

H621

Stall prevention level at 10 V input

0 to 400%

0.1%

200%

112

150

M460

Output current detection level

0 to 400%

0.1%

150%

134

151

M461

Output current detection signal delay 
time

0 to 10 s

0.1 s

0 s

134

152

M462

Zero current detection level

0 to 400%

0.1%

5%

134

153

M463

Zero current detection time

0 to 10 s

0.01 s

0.5 s

134

─

154

H631

Voltage reduction selection during 
stall prevention operation

0, 1, 10, 11

1

1

112

─

155

T730

RT signal function validity condition 
selection

0, 10

1

0

135

─

156

H501

Stall prevention operation selection

0 to 31, 100, 101

1

0

112

─

157

M430

OL signal output timer

0 to 25 s, 9999

0.1 s

0 s

112

─

158

M301

AM terminal function selection

1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 
21, 24, 32 to 34, 36, 
46, 50, 52 to 54, 61, 
62, 67, 70, 87 to 90, 
91 to 98

1

1

116

─

159

A005

Automatic switchover frequency 
range from bypass to inverter 
operation

0 to 10 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

134

─

160

E440

User group read selection 

0, 1, 9999

1

0

135

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple


background image

71

8

Para

mete

r List

─

161

E200

Frequency setting/key lock operation 
selection

0, 1, 10, 11

1

0

135

Automa

ti

c

re

st

ar

t

fu

nct

ions

162

A700

Automatic restart after instantaneous 
power failure selection

0 to 3, 10 to 13

1

0

119

163

A704

First cushion time for restart

0 to 20 s

0.1 s

0 s

119

164

A705

First cushion voltage for restart

0 to 100%

0.1%

0%

119

165

A710

Stall prevention operation level for 
restart

0 to 400%

0.1%

150%

119

Curr

e

n

t

de

te

ct

io

n

166

M433

Output current detection signal 
retention time

0 to 10 s, 9999

0.1 s

0.1 s

134

167

M464

Output current detection operation 
selection

0, 1, 10, 11

1

0

134

─

168

E000

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

E080

─

169

E001
E081

Cumu

la

ti

ve

mo

n

ito

r

cl

e

ar

170

M020

Watt-hour meter clear

0, 10, 9999

1

9999

116

171

M030

Operation hour meter clear

0, 9999

1

9999

116

Us

er

gr

oup

172

E441

User group registered display/batch 
clear

9999, (0 to 16)

1

0

135

173

E442

User group registration

0 to 1999, 9999

1

9999

135

174

E443

User group clear

0 to 1999, 9999

1

9999

135

Input

 t

e

rm

ina

l f

u

nct

ion as

signm

e

n

t

178

T700

STF terminal function selection

0 to 20, 22 to 28, 37, 
42 to 48, 50 to 53, 
57 to 60, 62, 64 to 74, 
76 to 80, 85, 87 to 89, 
92 to 96, 9999

1

60

136

179

T701

STR terminal function selection

0 to 20, 22 to 28, 37, 
42 to 48, 50 to 53, 
57 to 59, 61, 62, 
64 to 74, 76 to 80, 85, 
87 to 89, 92 to 96, 
9999

1

61

136

180

T702

RL terminal function selection

0 to 20, 22 to 28, 37, 
42 to 48, 50 to 53, 
57 to 59, 62, 64 to 74, 
76 to 80, 85, 87 to 89, 
92 to 96, 9999

1

0

136

181

T703

RM terminal function selection

1

1

136

182

T704

RH terminal function selection

1

2

136

183

T705

RT terminal function selection

1

3

136

184

T706

AU terminal function selection

1

4

136

185

T707

JOG terminal function selection

1

5

136

186

T708

CS terminal function selection

1

6

136

187

T709

MRS terminal function selection

1

24 



136

10 



188

T710

STOP terminal function selection

1

25

136

189

T711

RES terminal function selection

1

62

136

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

72

Para

mete

r List

8

Out

put

 t

er

m

inal f

u

nct

io

n

 ass

ignm

en

t

190

M400

RUN terminal function selection

0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 
25 to 28, 30 to 36, 
38 to 57, 60, 61, 63, 
64, 67, 68, 70, 79, 80, 
84, 85, 90 to 99, 
100 to 108, 
110 to 116, 120, 122, 
125 to 128, 
130 to 136, 
138 to 157, 160, 161, 
163, 164, 167, 168, 
170, 179, 180, 184, 
185, 190 to 199, 
200 to 208, 
211 to 213, 
300 to 308, 
311 to 313, 9999 



1

0

137

191

M401

SU terminal function selection

1

1

137

192

M402

IPF terminal function selection

1

2 



137

9999 



193

M403

OL terminal function selection

1

3

137

194

M404

FU terminal function selection

1

4

137

195

M405

ABC1 terminal function selection

0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 
25 to 28, 30 to 36, 
38 to 57, 60, 61, 63, 
64, 67, 68, 70, 79, 80, 
84, 85, 90, 91, 94 to 
99, 100 to 108, 
110 to 116, 120, 122, 
125 to 128, 
130 to 136, 
138 to 157, 160, 161, 
163, 164, 167, 168, 
170, 179, 180, 184, 
185, 190, 191, 
194 to 199, 
200 to 208, 
211 to 213, 
300 to 308, 
311 to 313, 9999 



1

99

137

196

M406

ABC2 terminal function selection

1

9999

137

Mult

i-s

p

e

ed

se

tti

n

g

232 to 

239

D308 

to 

D315

Multi-speed setting (8 speed to 15 
speed)

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

109

─

240

E601

Soft-PWM operation selection

0, 1

1

1

122

─

241

M043

Analog input display unit switchover

0, 1

1

0

132

─

242

T021

Terminal 1 added compensation 
amount (terminal 2)

0 to 100%

0.1%

100%

123

─

243

T041

Terminal 1 added compensation 
amount (terminal 4)

0 to 100%

0.1%

75%

123

─

244

H100

Cooling fan operation selection

0, 1, 101 to 105

1

1

138

Slip 

co

m

p

en

sat

io

n

245

G203

Rated slip

0 to 50%, 9999

0.01%

9999

138

246

G204

Slip compensation time constant

0.01 to 10 s

0.01 s

0.5 s

138

247

G205

Constant-power range slip 
compensation selection

0, 9999

1

9999

138

─

248

A006

Self power management selection

0 to 2

1

0

138

─

249

H101

Earth (ground) fault detection at start 0, 1

1

0

138

─

250

G106

Stop selection

0 to 100 s, 
1000 to 1100 s, 8888, 
9999

0.1 s

9999

138

─

251

H200

Output phase loss protection 
selection

0, 1

1

1

139

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

73

8

Para

mete

r List

Fr

eq

u

enc

y 

co

mp

en

sa

ti

o

n

fu

nct

ion

252

T050

Override bias

0 to 200%

0.1%

50%

123

253

T051

Override gain

0 to 200%

0.1%

150%

123

─

254

A007

Main circuit power OFF waiting time

1 to 3600 s, 9999

1 s

600 s

138

Lif

e

 c

h

ec

k

255

E700

Life alarm status display

(0 to 15)

1

0

139

256 



E701

Inrush current limit circuit life display (0 to 100%)

1%

100%

139

257

E702

Control circuit capacitor life display

(0 to 100%)

1%

100%

139

258 



E703

Main circuit capacitor life display

(0 to 100%)

1%

100%

139

259 



E704

Main circuit capacitor life measuring

0, 1

1

0

139

─

260 



E602

PWM frequency automatic 
switchover

0, 1

1

1

122

Po

we

r fa

ilur

e

 s

to

p

261

A730

Power failure stop selection

0 to 2, 11, 12, 21, 22

1

0

139

262

A731

Subtracted frequency at deceleration 
start

0 to 20 Hz

0.01 Hz

3 Hz

139

263

A732

Subtraction starting frequency

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

139

264

A733

Power-failure deceleration time 1

0 to 3600 s

0.1 s

5 s

139

265

A734

Power-failure deceleration time 2

0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

139

266

A735

Power failure deceleration time 
switchover frequency

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

139

─

267

T001

Terminal 4 input selection

0 to 2

1

0

123

─

268

M022

Monitor decimal digits selection

0, 1, 9999

1

9999

116

─

269

E023

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

─

270

A200

Stop-on contact/load torque high-
speed frequency control selection

0 to 3, 11, 13

1

0

140

L

o

ad

 t

o

rque

high

 s

p

ee

d

fr

eq

uen

cy co

nt

rol

271

A201

High-speed setting maximum current 0 to 400%

0.1%

50%

140

272

A202

Middle-speed setting minimum 
current

0 to 400%

0.1%

100%

140

273

A203

Current averaging range

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

140

274

A204

Current averaging filter time constant 1 to 4000

1

16

140

St

o

p

-o

n

co

nt

a

ct

con

tr

o

l

275

A205

Stop-on contact excitation current 
low-speed multiplying factor

0 to 300%, 9999

0.1%

9999

141

276 



A206

PWM carrier frequency at stop-on 
contact

0 to 9, 9999

 



1

9999

141

0 to 4, 9999 



B

ra

ke se

que

nce

 f

u

n

ct

io

n

278

A100

Brake opening frequency

0 to 30 Hz

0.01 Hz

3 Hz

141

279

A101

Brake opening current

0 to 400%

0.1%

130%

141

280

A102

Brake opening current detection time 0 to 2 s

0.1 s

0.3 s

141

281

A103

Brake operation time at start

0 to 5 s

0.1 s

0.3 s

141

282

A104

Brake operation frequency

0 to 30 Hz

0.01 Hz

6 Hz

141

283

A105

Brake operation time at stop

0 to 5 s

0.1 s

0.3 s

141

284

A106

Deceleration detection function 
selection

0, 1

1

0

141

285

A107

Overspeed detection frequency

0 to 30 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

141

, 

143

H416

Speed deviation excess detection 
frequency

Dr

o

o

p

con

tr

o

l

286

G400

Droop gain

0 to 100%

0.1%

0%

143

287

G401

Droop filter time constant

0 to 1 s

0.01 s

0.3 s

143

288

G402

Droop function activation selection

0 to 2, 10, 11, 20 to 22 1

0

143

─

289

M431

Inverter output terminal filter

5 to 50 ms, 9999

1 ms

9999

137

─

290

M044

Monitor negative output selection

0 to 7

1

0

116

─

291

D100

Pulse train I/O selection

[FM Type]
0, 1, 10, 11, 20, 21, 
100

1

0

144

[CA Type]
0, 1

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

74

Para

mete

r List

8

─

292

A110

Automatic acceleration/deceleration

0, 1, 3, 5 to 8, 11

1

0

121

F500

─

293

F513

Acceleration/deceleration separate 
selection

0 to 2

1

0

121

─

294

A785

UV avoidance voltage gain

0 to 200%

0.1%

100%

139

─

295

E201

Frequency change increment amount 
setting

0, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10

0.01

0

135

P

ass

w

o

rd

funct

ion

296

E410

Password lock level

0 to 6, 99, 100 to 106, 
199, 9999

1

9999

144

297

E411

Password lock/unlock

(0 to 5), 1000 to 9998, 
9999

1

9999

144

─

298

A711

Frequency search gain

0 to 32767, 9999

1

9999

127

─

299

A701

Rotation direction detection 
selection at restarting

0, 1, 9999

1

0

119

CC

-L

ink

 IE

313 



M410

DO0 output selection

0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 
25 to 28, 30 to 36, 
38 to 57, 60, 61, 63, 
64, 68, 70, 79, 80, 
84 to 99, 100 to 108, 
110 to 116, 120, 122, 
125 to 128, 
130 to 136, 
138 to 157, 160, 161, 
163, 164, 168, 170, 
179, 180, 184 to 199, 
200 to 208, 
300 to 308, 9999 



1

9999

137

314 



M411

DO1 output selection

1

9999

137

315 



M412

DO2 output selection

1

9999

137

R

S

-4

85

 c

o

mmu

ni

ca

ti

on

331 



N030

RS-485 communication station 
number

0 to 31 (0 to 247)

1

0

129

332 



N031

RS-485 communication speed

3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 
192, 384, 576, 768, 
1152

1

96

129

333 



-

RS-485 communication stop bit 
length / data length

0, 1, 10, 11

1

1

129

N032

PU communication data length

0, 1

1

0

N033

PU communication stop bit length

0, 1

1

1

334 



N034

RS-485 communication parity check 
selection

0 to 2

1

2

129

335 



N035

RS-485 communication retry count

0 to 10, 9999

1

1

129

336 



N036

RS-485 communication check time 
interval

0 to 999.8 s, 9999

0.1 s

0 s

129

337 



N037

RS-485 communication waiting time 
setting

0 to 150 ms, 9999

1 ms

9999

129

338

D010

Communication operation command 
source

0, 1

1

0

145

339

D011

Communication speed command 
source

0 to 2

1

0

145

340

D001

Communication startup mode 
selection

0 to 2, 10, 12

1

0

125

341 



N038

RS-485 communication CR/LF 
selection

0 to 2

1

1

129

342

N001

Communication EEPROM write 
selection

0, 1

1

0

129

343 



N080

Communication error count

-

1

0

129

─

349 



N010

Communication reset selection

0, 1

1

0

129

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

75

8

Para

mete

r List

Orie

nt

at

ion c

o

n

trol

350 



A510

Stop position command selection

0, 1, 9999

1

9999

145

351 



A526

Orientation speed

0 to 30 Hz

0.01 Hz

2 Hz

145

352 



A527

Creep speed

0 to 10 Hz

0.01 Hz

0.5 Hz

145

353 



A528

Creep switchover position

0 to 16383

1

511

145

354 



A529

Position loop switchover position

0 to 8191

1

96

145

355 



A530

DC injection brake start position

0 to 255

1

5

145

356 



A531

Internal stop position command

0 to 16383

1

0

145

357 



A532

Orientation in-position zone

0 to 255

1

5

145

358 



A533

Servo torque selection

0 to 13

1

1

145

359 



C141

Encoder rotation direction

0, 1, 100, 101

1

1

145

360 



A511

16-bit data selection

0 to 127

1

0

145

361 



A512

Position shift

0 to 16383

1

0

145

362 



A520

Orientation position loop gain

0.1 to 100

0.1

1

145

363 



A521

Completion signal output delay time

0 to 5 s

0.1 s

0.5 s

145

364 



A522

Encoder stop check time

0 to 5 s

0.1 s

0.5 s

145

365 



A523

Orientation limit

0 to 60 s, 9999

1 s

9999

145

366 



A524

Recheck time

0 to 5 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

145

E

n

co

der

 f

e

edba

ck

367 



G240

Speed feedback range

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

146

368 



G241

Feedback gain

0 to 100

0.1

1

146

369 



C140

Number of encoder pulses

0 to 4096

1

1024

146

374

H800

Overspeed detection level

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

146

376 



C148

Encoder signal loss detection 
enable/disable selection

0, 1

1

0

146

S-

p

a

tt

er

n

ac

ce

le

ra

ti

on/

de

ce

le

ra

ti

o

n

 C

380

F300

Acceleration S-pattern 1

0 to 50%

1%

0%

113

381

F301

Deceleration S-pattern 1

0 to 50%

1%

0%

113

382

F302

Acceleration S-pattern 2

0 to 50%

1%

0%

113

383

F303

Deceleration S-pattern 2

0 to 50%

1%

0%

113

Pulse tr

a

in

inp

u

t

384

D101

Input pulse division scaling factor

0 to 250

1

0

144

385

D110

Frequency for zero input pulse

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

0 Hz

144

386

D111

Frequency for maximum input pulse

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

144

O

rie

n

ta

tio

n

co

nt

rol

393 



A525

Orientation selection

0 to 2, 10 to 12

1

0

145

394 



A540

Number of machine side gear teeth

0 to 32767

1

1

145

395 



A541

Number of motor side gear teeth

0 to 32767

1

1

145

396 



A542

Orientation speed gain (P term)

0 to 1000

1

60

145

397 



A543

Orientation speed integral time

0 to 20 s

0.001 s

0.333 s

145

398 



A544

Orientation speed gain (D term)

0 to 100

0.1

1

145

399 



A545

Orientation deceleration ratio

0 to 1000

1

20

145

─

413 



M601

Encoder pulse division ratio

1 to 32767

1

1

158

PL

C

fu

nc

ti

on

414

A800

PLC function operation selection

0 to 2

1

0

146

415

A801

Inverter operation lock mode setting

0, 1

1

0

146

416 A802

Pre-scale function selection

0 to 5

1

0

146

417 A803

Pre-scale setting value

0 to 32767

1

1

146

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

76

Para

mete

r List

8

P

o

sit

ion

 c

ont

ro

l

419

B000

Position command source selection

0 to 2, 10, 100, 110, 
1110

1

0

147

, 

148

420

B001

Command pulse scaling factor 
numerator (electronic gear 
numerator)

1 to 32767

1

1

149

421

B002

Command pulse multiplication 
denominator (electronic gear 
denominator) 

1 to 32767

1

1

149

422

B003

Position control gain

0 to 150 sec

-1

1 sec

-1

25 sec

-1

149

423

B004

Position feed forward gain

0 to 100%

1%

0%

149

424 B005

Position command acceleration/
deceleration time constant

0 to 50 s

0.001 s

0 s

149

425

B006

Position feed forward command filter 0 to 5 s

0.001 s

0 s

149

426

B007

In-position width

0 to 32767 pulse

1 pulse

100 pulse

149

427

B008

Excessive level error

0 to 400K

 

pulse

, 

9999 1K pulse

40K pulse

149

428

B009

Command pulse selection

0 to 5

1

0

148

429

B010

Clear signal selection

0, 1

1

1

148

430

B011

Pulse monitor selection

0 to 5, 12, 13, 
100 to 105, 112, 113, 
1000 to 1005, 1012, 
1013, 1100 to 1105, 
1112, 1113, 8888, 
9999

1

9999

148

─

432 



D120

Pulse train torque command bias

0 to 400%

1%

0%

155

─

433 



D121

Pulse train torque command gain

0 to 400%

1%

150%

155

CC

-L

ink

 IE

434 



N110

Network number (CC-Link IE)

0 to 255

1

0

129

435 



N111

Station number (CC-Link IE)

0 to 255

1

0

129

─

446

B012

Model position control gain

0 to 150 sec

-1

1 sec

-1

25 sec

-1

149

S

eco

nd m

o

to

r c

onst

an

ts

450

C200

Second applied motor

0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 
20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 
40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 
70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 
334, 8093, 8094, 
9090, 9093, 9094, 
9999

1

9999

122

451

G300

Second motor control method 
selection

0 to 6, 10 to 14, 20, 
100 to 106, 
110 to 114, 9999

1

9999

126

453

C201

Second motor capacity

0.4 to 55 kW, 9999

 



0.01 kW

 



9999

126

0 to 3600 kW, 9999 



0.1 kW 



454

C202

Number of second motor poles

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 9999 1

9999

126

455

C225

Second motor excitation current

0 to 500 A, 9999

 



0.01 A

 



9999

127

0 to 3600 A, 9999

 



0.1 A 



456

C204

Rated second motor voltage

0 to 1000 V

0.1 V

200 V 



127

400 V 



457

C205

Rated second motor frequency

10 to 400 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

127

458

C220

Second motor constant (R1)

0 to 50 Ω, 9999 



0.001 Ω 



9999

127

0 to 400 mΩ, 9999 



0.01 mΩ 



459

C221

Second motor constant (R2)

0 to 50 Ω, 9999 



0.001 Ω



9999

127

0 to 400 mΩ, 9999 



0.01 mΩ 



460

C222

Second motor constant (L1) / d-axis 
inductance (Ld)

0 to 6000mH, 9999 



0.1 mH 



9999

127

0 to 400mH, 9999 



0.01 mH 



461

C223

Second motor constant (L2) / q-axis 
inductance (Lq)

0 to 6000mH, 9999 



0.1 mH 



9999

127

0 to 400mH, 9999 



0.01 mH 



462

C224

Second motor constant (X)

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1% 



9999

127

0.01% 



463

C210

Second motor auto tuning setting/
status

0, 1, 11, 101

1

0

127

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

77

8

Para

mete

r List

Si

m

p

le

 po

si

ti

on

 c

o

n

tr

o

l

464

B020

Digital position control sudden stop 
deceleration time

0 to 360 s

0.1 s

0 s

147

465

B021

First target position lower 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

466

B022

First target position upper 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

467

B023

Second target position lower 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

468

B024

Second target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999

1

0

147

469

B025

Third target position lower 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

470

B026

Third target position upper 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

471

B027

Fourth target position lower 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

472

B028

Fourth target position upper 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

473

B029

Fifth target position lower 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

474

B030

Fifth target position upper 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

475

B031

Sixth target position lower 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

476

B032

Sixth target position upper 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

477

B033

Seventh target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999

1

0

147

478

B034

Seventh target position upper 4 
digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

479

B035

Eighth target position lower 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

480

B036

Eighth target position upper 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

481

B037

Ninth target position lower 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

482

B038

Ninth target position upper 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

483

B039

Tenth target position lower 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

484

B040

Tenth target position upper 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

485

B041

Eleventh target position lower 4 
digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

486

B042

Eleventh target position upper 4 
digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

487

B043

Twelfth target position lower 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

488

B044

Twelfth target position upper 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

489

B045

Thirteenth target position lower 4 
digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

490

B046

Thirteenth target position upper 4 
digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

491

B047

Fourteenth target position lower 4 
digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

492

B048

Fourteenth target position upper 4 
digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

493

B049

Fifteenth target position lower 4 
digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

494

B050

Fifteenth target position upper 4 
digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

Re

mo

te

out

put

495

M500

Remote output selection

0, 1, 10, 11

1

0

149

496

M501

Remote output data 1

0 to 4095

1

0

149

497

M502

Remote output data 2

0 to 4095

1

0

149

─

498

A804

PLC function flash memory clear

0, 9696
(0 to 9999)

1

0

146

─

500 



N011

Communication error execution 
waiting time

0 to 999.8 s

0.1 s

0 s

129

─

501 



N012

Communication error occurrence 
count display

0

1

0

129

─

502

N013

Stop mode selection at 
communication error

0 to 4

1

0

129

M

a

in

te

nanc

e

503

E710

Maintenance timer 1

0 (1 to 9998)

1

0

150

504

E711

Maintenance timer 1 warning output 
set time

0 to 9998, 9999

1

9999

150

─

505

M001

Speed setting reference

1 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

115

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

78

Para

mete

r List

8

S-

p

at

te

rn

acc

el

er

at

io

n/

de

cel

e

rat

ion D

516

F400

S-pattern time at a start of 
acceleration

0.1 to 2.5 s

0.1 s

0.1 s

113

517

F401

S-pattern time at a completion of 
acceleration

0.1 to 2.5 s

0.1 s

0.1 s

113

518

F402

S-pattern time at a start of 
deceleration

0.1 to 2.5 s

0.1 s

0.1 s

113

519

F403

S-pattern time at a completion of 
deceleration

0.1 to 2.5 s

0.1 s

0.1 s

113

─

522

G105

Output stop frequency

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

150

─

539 



N002

MODBUS RTU communication check 
time interval

0 to 999.8 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

129

─

541 



N100

Frequency command sign selection

0, 1

1

0

129

USB

547

N040

USB communication station number

0 to 31

1

0

150

548

N041

USB communication check time 
interval

0 to 999.8 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

150

Com

m

unic

at

ion

549 



N000

Protocol selection

0, 1

1

0

129

550 



D012

NET mode operation command 
source selection

0, 1, 9999 



1

9999

145

551

D013

PU mode operation command source 
selection

1 to 3, 9999 



1

9999

145

─

552

H429

Frequency jump range

0 to 30 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

115

PID

con

tr

o

l

553

A603

PID deviation limit

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

133

554

A604

PID signal operation selection

0 to 3, 10 to 13

1

0

133

C

u

rr

ent

 ave

ra

ge

value

 m

o

nit

o

r

555

E720

Current average time

0.1 to 1 s

0.1 s

1 s

150

556

E721

Data output mask time

0 to 20 s

0.1 s

0 s

150

557

E722

Current average value monitor signal 
output reference current

0 to 500 A 



0.01 A 



Inverter rated 
current

150

0 to 3600 A 



0.1 A 



─

560

A712

Second frequency search gain

0 to 32767, 9999

1

9999

127

─

561

H020

PTC thermistor protection level

0.5 to 30 kΩ, 9999

0.01 kΩ

9999

110

─

563

M021

Energization time carrying-over 
times

(0 to 65535)

1

0

116

─

564

M031

Operating time carrying-over times

(0 to 65535)

1

0

116

─

565

G301

Second motor excitation current 
break point

0 to 400 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

128

─

566

G302

Second motor excitation current low-
speed scaling factor

0 to 300%, 9999

0.1%

9999

128

S

eco

nd

mo

to

r

co

nst

ant

s

569

G942

Second motor speed control gain

0 to 200%, 9999

0.1%

9999

126

Mu

lt

iple

ra

ti

n

g

570

E301

Multiple rating setting

0 to 3 



1

2

151

1, 2 



─

571

F103

Holding time at a start

0 to 10 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

111

─

573

A680

4 mA input check selection

1 to 4, 9999

1

9999

151

T052

─

574

C211

Second motor online auto tuning

0 to 2

1

0

129

PID

co

nt

ro

l

575

A621

Output interruption detection time

0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

1 s

133

576

A622

Output interruption detection level

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

0 Hz

133

577

A623

Output interruption cancel level

900 to 1100%

0.1%

1000%

133

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

79

8

Para

mete

r List

Tr

av

er

s

e f

unct

ion

592

A300

Traverse function selection

0 to 2

1

0

151

593

A301

Maximum amplitude amount

0 to 25%

0.1%

10%

151

594

A302

Amplitude compensation amount 
during deceleration

0 to 50%

0.1%

10%

151

595

A303

Amplitude compensation amount 
during acceleration

0 to 50%

0.1%

10%

151

596

A304

Amplitude acceleration time

0.1 to 3600 s

0.1 s

5 s

151

597

A305

Amplitude deceleration time

0.1 to 3600 s

0.1 s

5 s

151

─

598 



H102

Undervoltage level

175 to 215 VDC, 9999 



0.1 V

9999

151

350 to 430 VDC, 9999 



─

599

T721

X10 terminal input selection

0, 1

1

0 



114

1 



E

lec

tr

o

n

ic

 t

h

er

mal

O/

L

 re

la

y

600

H001

First free thermal reduction 
frequency 1

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

110

601

H002

First free thermal reduction ratio 1

1 to 100%

1%

100%

110

602

H003

First free thermal reduction 
frequency 2

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

110

603

H004

First free thermal reduction ratio 2

1 to 100%

1%

100%

110

604

H005

First free thermal reduction 
frequency 3

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

110

─

606

T722

Power failure stop external signal 
input selection

0, 1

1

1

139

─

607

H006

Motor permissible load level

110 to 250%

1%

150%

110

─

608

H016

Second motor permissible load level

110 to 250%, 9999

1%

9999

110

PID

con

tr

o

l

609

A624

PID set point/deviation input 
selection

1 to 5

1

2

133

610

A625

PID measured value input selection

1 to 5

1

3

133

─

611

F003

Acceleration time at a restart

0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

119

─

617

G080

Reverse rotation excitation current 
low-speed scaling factor

0 to 300%, 9999

0.1%

9999

128

Cu

mula

ti

v

e

pu

ls

e m

onit

o

r

635 



M610

Cumulative pulse clear signal 
selection

0 to 3

1

0

148

636 



M611

Cumulative pulse division scaling 
factor

1 to 16384

1

1

148

637 



M612

Control terminal option-Cumulative 
pulse division scaling factor

1 to 16384

1

1

148

638 



M613

Cumulative pulse storage

0 to 3

1

0

148

B

rake

 s

eq

u

enc

e 

fu

nct

ion

639

A108

Brake opening current selection

0, 1

1

0

141

640

A109

Brake operation frequency selection

0, 1

1

0

141

641

A130

Second brake sequence operation 
selection

0, 7, 8, 9999

1

0

141

642

A120

Second brake opening frequency

0 to 30 Hz

0.01 Hz

3 Hz

141

643

A121

Second brake opening current

0 to 400%

0.1%

130%

141

644

A122

Second brake opening current 
detection time

0 to 2 s

0.1 s

0.3 s

141

645

A123

Second brake operation time at start

0 to 5 s

0.1 s

0.3 s

141

646

A124

Second brake operation frequency

0 to 30 Hz

0.01 Hz

6 Hz

141

647

A125

Second brake operation time at stop

0 to 5 s

0.1 s

0.3 s

141

648

A126

Second deceleration detection 
function selection

0, 1

1

0

141

650

A128

Second brake opening current 
selection

0, 1

1

0

141

651

A129

Second brake operation frequency 
selection

0, 1

1

0

141

S

p

eed

sm

o

o

th

in

g

co

nt

ro

l

653

G410

Speed smoothing control

0 to 200%

0.1%

0%

152

654

G411

Speed smoothing cutoff frequency

0 to 120 Hz

0.01 Hz

20 Hz

152

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

80

Para

mete

r List

8

Ana

lo

g

 r

e

mot

e

ou

tp

ut

 f

unc

ti

on

655

M530

Analog remote output selection

0, 1, 10, 11

1

0

152

656

M531

Analog remote output 1

800 to 1200%

0.1%

1000%

152

657

M532

Analog remote output 2

800 to 1200%

0.1%

1000%

152

658

M533

Analog remote output 3

800 to 1200%

0.1%

1000%

152

659

M534

Analog remote output 4

800 to 1200%

0.1%

1000%

152

In

cr

ea

sed

 m

a

gne

ti

c

ex

cit

a

ti

on de

ce

le

ra

ti

on

660

G130

Increased magnetic excitation 
deceleration operation selection

0, 1

1

0

153

661

G131

Magnetic excitation increase rate

0 to 40%, 9999

0.1%

9999

153

662

G132

Increased magnetic excitation 
current level

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

153

─

663

M060

Control circuit temperature signal 
output level

0 to 100°C

1°C

0°C

153

─

665

G125

Regeneration avoidance frequency 
gain

0 to 200%

0.1%

100%

159

─

668

A786

Power failure stop frequency gain

0 to 200%

0.1%

100%

139

─

673 



G060

SF-PR slip amount adjustment 
operation selection

2, 4, 6, 9999

1

9999

153

─

674 



G061

SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain

0 to 500%

0.1%

100%

153

S

e

co

nd

 d

roo

p

co

nt

rol

679

G420

Second droop gain

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

143

680

G421

Second droop filter time constant

0 to 1 s, 9999

0.01 s

9999

143

681

G422

Second droop function activation 
selection

0 to 2, 10, 11, 
20 to 22, 9999

1

9999

143

682

G423

Second droop break point gain

0.1 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

143

683

G424

Second droop break point torque

0.1 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

143

─

684

C000

Tuning data unit switchover

0, 1

1

0

127

Ma

in

te

n

an

c

e

686

E712

Maintenance timer 2

0 (1 to 9998)

1

0

150

687

E713

Maintenance timer 2 warning output 
set time

0 to 9998, 9999

1

9999

150

688

E714

Maintenance timer 3

0 (1 to 9998)

1

0

150

689

E715

Maintenance timer 3 warning output 
set time

0 to 9998, 9999

1

9999

150

─

690

H881

Deceleration check time

0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

1 s

153

Elec

tr

onic

 t

h

er

m

al

O/

L r

el

ay

692

H011

Second free thermal reduction 
frequency 1

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

110

693

H012

Second free thermal reduction ratio 1 1 to 100%

1%

100%

110

694

H013

Second free thermal reduction 
frequency 2

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

110

695

H014

Second free thermal reduction ratio 2 1 to 100%

1%

100%

110

696

H015

Second free thermal reduction 
frequency 3

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

110

─

699

T740

Input terminal filter

5 to 50 ms, 9999

1 ms

9999

136

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

81

8

Para

mete

r List

Mo

to

r c

o

n

s

ta

n

ts

702 



C106

Maximum motor frequency

0 to 400 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

127

706 



C130

Induced voltage constant (phi f)

0 to 5000 mV/(rad/s), 
9999

0.1 mV/
(rad/s)

9999

127

707

C107

Motor inertia (integer)

10 to 999, 9999

1

9999

127

711 



C131

Motor Ld decay ratio

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

127

712 



C132

Motor Lq decay ratio

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

127

717 



C182

Starting resistance tuning 
compensation

0 to 200%, 9999

0.1%

9999

127

721 



C185

Starting magnetic pole position 
detection pulse width 

0 to 6000 μs, 10000 to 
16000 μs, 9999

1 μs

9999

127

724

C108

Motor inertia (exponent)

0 to 7, 9999

1

9999

127

725 



C133

Motor protection current level

100 to 500%, 9999

0.1%

9999

127

738 



C230

Second motor induced voltage
constant (phi f)

0 to 5000 mV/(rad/s), 
9999

0.1 mV/
(rad/s)

9999

127

739 



C231

Second motor Ld decay ratio

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

127

740 



C232

Second motor Lq decay ratio

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

127

741 



C282

Second starting resistance tuning 
compensation

0 to 200%, 9999

0.1%

9999

127

742 



C285

Second motor magnetic pole 
detection pulse width

0 to 6000 μs, 10000 to 
16000 μs, 9999

1 μs

9999

127

743 



C206

Second motor maximum frequency

0 to 400 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

127

744

C207

Second motor inertia (integer)

10 to 999, 9999

1

9999

127

745

C208

Second motor inertia (exponent)

0 to 7, 9999

1

9999

127

746 



C233

Second motor protection current 
level

100 to 500%, 9999

0.1%

9999

127

─

747 



G350

Second motor low-speed range 
torque characteristic selection

0, 9999

1

9999

154

P

ID c

ont

ro

l

753

A650

Second PID action selection

0, 10, 11, 20, 21, 50, 
51, 60, 61, 70, 71, 80, 
81, 90, 91, 100, 101, 
1000, 1001, 1010, 
1011, 2000, 2001, 
2010, 2011

1

0

133

754

A652

Second PID control automatic 
switchover frequency

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

133

755

A651

Second PID action set point

0 to 100%, 9999

0.01%

9999

133

756

A653

Second PID proportional band

0.1 to 1000%, 9999

0.1%

100%

133

757

A654

Second PID integral time

0.1 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

1 s

133

758

A655

Second PID differential time

0.01 to 10 s, 9999

0.01 s

9999

133

759

A600

PID unit selection

0 to 43, 9999

1

9999

133

P

ID

 pr

e-

ch

ar

g

e 

fu

n

c

ti

o

n

760

A616

Pre-charge fault selection

0, 1

1

0

154

761

A617

Pre-charge ending level

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

154

762

A618

Pre-charge ending time

0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

154

763

A619

Pre-charge upper detection level

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

154

764

A620

Pre-charge time limit

0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

154

765

A656

Second pre-charge fault selection

0, 1

1

0

154

766

A657

Second pre-charge ending level

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

154

767

A658

Second pre-charge ending time

0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

154

768

A659

Second pre-charge upper detection 
level

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

154

769

A660

Second pre-charge time limit

0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

154

Mo

n

ito

r

fu

n

cti

o

n

774

M101

Operation panel monitor selection 1

1 to 3, 5 to 14, 
17 to 20, 22 to 36, 
38 to 46, 50 to 57, 61, 
62, 64, 67, 71 to 74, 
87 to 98, 100, 9999

1

9999

116

775

M102

Operation panel monitor selection 2

1

9999

116

776

M103

Operation panel monitor selection 3

1

9999

116

─

777

A681

4 mA input check operation 
frequency

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

151

T053

─

778

A682

4 mA input check filter

0 to 10 s

0.01 s

0 s

151

T054

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

82

Para

mete

r List

8

─

779

N014

Operation frequency during 
communication error

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

129

─

788 



G250

Low speed range torque 
characteristic selection

0, 9999

1

9999

154

─

791 



F070

Acceleration time in low-speed range 0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

109

─

792 



F071

Deceleration time in low-speed range 0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

109

─

799

M520

Pulse increment setting for output 
power

0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000 
kWh

0.1 kWh

1 kWh

154

─

800

G200

Control method selection

0 to 6, 9 to 14, 20, 
100 to 106, 109 to 114

1

20

126

─

801

H704

Output limit level

0 to 400%, 9999

0.1%

9999

113

─

802

G102

Pre-excitation selection

0, 1

1

0

110

To

rq

u

e

co

mman

d

803

G210

Constant output range torque 
characteristic selection

0 to 2, 10, 11

1

0

113

, 

155

804

D400

Torque command source selection

0 to 6

1

0

113

, 

155

805

D401

Torque command value (RAM)

600 to 1400%

1%

1000%

113

, 

155

806

D402

Torque command value (RAM, 
EEPROM)

600 to 1400%

1%

1000%

113

, 

155

Sp

ee

d

 li

m

it

807

H410

Speed limit selection

0 to 2

1

0

155

808

H411

Forward rotation speed limit/speed 
limit

0 to 400 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

155

809

H412

Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-
side speed limit

0 to 400 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

9999

155

To

rq

ue

 li

mit

810

H700

Torque limit input method selection

0 to 2

1

0

113

811

D030

Set resolution switchover

0, 1, 10, 11

1

0

113

, 

115

812

H701

Torque limit level (regeneration)

0 to 400%, 9999

0.1%

9999

113

813

H702

Torque limit level (3rd quadrant)

0 to 400%, 9999

0.1%

9999

113

814

H703

Torque limit level (4th quadrant)

0 to 400%, 9999

0.1%

9999

113

815

H710

Torque limit level 2

0 to 400%, 9999

0.1%

9999

113

816

H720

Torque limit level during acceleration 0 to 400%, 9999

0.1%

9999

113

817

H721

Torque limit level during deceleration 0 to 400%, 9999

0.1%

9999

113

Ea

sy

 g

ain

tu

n

in

g

818

C112

Easy gain tuning response level 
setting

1 to 15

1

2

156

819

C113

Easy gain tuning selection

0 to 2

1

0

156

A

d

ju

st

m

en

t f

u

nc

ti

on

820

G211

Speed control P gain 1

0 to 1000%

1%

60%

156

821

G212

Speed control integral time 1

0 to 20 s

0.001 s

0.333 s

156

822

T003

Speed setting filter 1

0 to 5 s, 9999

0.001 s

9999

123

823 



G215

Speed detection filter 1

0 to 0.1 s

0.001 s

0.001 s

156

824

G213

Torque control P gain 1 (current loop 
proportional gain)

0 to 500%

1%

100%

156

825

G214

Torque control integral time 1 
(current loop integral time)

0 to 500 ms

0.1 ms

5 ms

156

826

T004

Torque setting filter 1

0 to 5 s, 9999

0.001 s

9999

123

827

G216

Torque detection filter 1

0 to 0.1 s

0.001 s

0 s

156

828

G224

Model speed control gain

0 to 1000%

1%

60%

157

829 



A546

Number of machine end encoder 
pulses

0 to 4096

1

9999

145

830

G311

Speed control P gain 2

0 to 1000%, 9999

1%

9999

156

831

G312

Speed control integral time 2

0 to 20 s, 9999

0.001 s

9999

156

832

T005

Speed setting filter 2

0 to 5 s, 9999

0.001 s

9999

123

833 



G315

Speed detection filter 2

0 to 0.1 s, 9999

0.001 s

9999

156

834

G313

Torque control P gain 2

0 to 500%, 9999

1%

9999

156

835

G314

Torque control integral time 2

0 to 500 ms, 9999

0.1 ms

9999

156

836

T006

Torque setting filter 2

0 to 5 s, 9999

0.001 s

9999

123

837

G316

Torque detection filter 2

0 to 0.1 s, 9999

0.001 s

9999

156

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

83

8

Para

mete

r List

Tor

que

 b

ia

s

840

G230

Torque bias selection

0 to 3, 24, 25, 9999

1

9999

157

841

G231

Torque bias 1

600 to 1400%, 9999

1%

9999

157

842

G232

Torque bias 2

600 to 1400%, 9999

1%

9999

157

843

G233

Torque bias 3

600 to 1400%, 9999

1%

9999

157

844

G234

Torque bias filter

0 to 5s, 9999

0.001 s

9999

157

845

G235

Torque bias operation time

0 to 5s, 9999

0.01 s

9999

157

846

G236

Torque bias balance compensation

0 to 10 V, 9999

0.1 V

9999

157

847

G237

Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias

0 to 400%, 9999

1%

9999

157

848

G238

Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 gain

0 to 400%, 9999

1%

9999

157

Add

it

iona

l f

unc

ti

on

849

T007

Analog input offset adjustment

0 to 200%

0.1%

100%

123

850

G103

Brake operation selection

0 to 2

1

0

110

851 



C240

Control terminal option-Number of 
encoder pulses

0 to 4096

1

2048

145

852 



C241

Control terminal option-Encoder 
rotation direction

0, 1, 100, 101

1

1

145

853 



H417

Speed deviation time

0 to 100 s

0.1 s

1 s

143

854

G217

Excitation ratio

0 to 100%

1%

100%

158

855 



C248

Control terminal option-Signal loss 
detection enable/disable selection

0, 1

1

0

146

858

T040

Terminal 4 function assignment

0, 1, 4, 9999

1

0

158

859

C126

Torque current/Rated PM motor 
current

0 to 500 A, 9999 



0.01 A 



9999

127

0 to 3600 A, 9999

 



0.1 A 



860

C226

Second motor torque current/Rated 
PM motor current

0 to 500 A, 9999 



0.01 A 



9999

127

0 to 3600 A, 9999 



0.1 A 



862 



C242

Encoder option selection

0, 1

1

0

145

863 



M600

Control terminal option-Encoder 
pulse division ratio

1 to 32767

1

1

158

864

M470

Torque detection

0 to 400%

0.1%

150%

158

865

M446

Low speed detection

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

1.5 Hz

116

Indica

ti

on

fu

n

ct

io

n

866

M042

Torque monitoring reference

0 to 400%

0.1%

150%

118

─

867

M321

AM output filter

0 to 5 s

0.01 s

0.01 s

160

─

868

T010

Terminal 1 function assignment

0 to 6, 9999

1

0

158

─

869

M334

Current output filter

0 to 5 s

0.01 s

-

0.02 s

160

─

870

M440

Speed detection hysteresis

0 to 5 Hz

0.01 Hz

0 Hz

116

Pr

ot

ect

iv

e

Fun

ct

io

ns

872 



H201

Input phase loss protection selection 0, 1

1

0

139

873 



H415

Speed limit

0 to 400 Hz

0.01 Hz

20 Hz

143

874

H730

OLT level setting

0 to 400%

0.1%

150%

113

875

H030

Fault definition

0, 1

1

0

158

─

876 



H022

Thermal protector input

0, 1

1

1

110

C

ont

ro

l s

yst

em

func

ti

ons

877

G220

Speed feed forward control/model 
adaptive speed control selection

0 to 2

1

0

157

878

G221

Speed feed forward filter

0 to 1 s

0.01 s

0 s

157

879

G222

Speed feed forward torque limit 

0 to 400%

0.1%

150%

157

880

C114

Load inertia ratio

0 to 200 times

0.1 times

7 times

157

881

G223

Speed feed forward gain

0 to 1000%

1%

0%

157

Reg

ene

ra

ti

on a

voida

nce

fu

nc

ti

on

882

G120

Regeneration avoidance operation 
selection

0 to 2

1

0

159

883

G121

Regeneration avoidance operation 
level

300 to 1200 V

0.1V

DC380 V 



159

DC760 V 



884

G122

Regeneration avoidance at 
deceleration detection sensitivity 

0 to 5

1

0

159

885

G123

Regeneration avoidance 
compensation frequency limit value

0 to 590 Hz, 9999

0.01 Hz

6 Hz

159

886

G124

Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 0 to 200%

0.1%

100%

159

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

84

Para

mete

r List

8

Fr

ee

p

ara

met

e

rs

888

E420

Free parameter 1

0 to 9999

1

9999

159

889

E421

Free parameter 2

0 to 9999

1

9999

159

E

n

er

gy s

avi

ng

 m

o

n

it

o

r

891

M023

Cumulative power monitor digit 
shifted times

0 to 4, 9999

1

9999

116

, 

159

892

M200

Load factor

30 to 150%

0.1%

100%

159

893

M201

Energy saving monitor reference 
(motor capacity)

0.1 to 55 kW 



0.01 kW 



Inverter rated 
capacity

159

0 to 3600 kW 



0.1 kW 



894

M202

Control selection during commercial 
power-supply operation

0 to 3

1

0

159

895

M203

Power saving rate reference value

0, 1, 9999

1

9999

159

896

M204

Power unit cost

0 to 500, 9999

0.01

9999

159

897

M205

Power saving monitor average time

0 to 1000 h, 9999

1 h

9999

159

898

M206

Power saving cumulative monitor 
clear

0, 1, 10, 9999

1

9999

159

899

M207

Operation time rate (estimated value) 0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

159

Ca

libr

at

ion p

ar

am

e

te

rs

C0

(900) 



M310

FM/CA terminal calibration

-

-

-

160

C1

(901) 



M320

AM terminal calibration

-

-

-

160

C2

(902) 



T200

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 
frequency

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

0 Hz

132

C3

(902) 



T201

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 

0 to 300%

0.1%

0%

132

125

(903) 



T202

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 
frequency

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

132

C4

(903) 



T203

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

132

C5

(904) 



T400

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 
frequency

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

0 Hz

132

C6

(904) 



T401

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 

0 to 300%

0.1%

20%

132

126

(905) 



T402

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 
frequency

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

132

C7

(905) 



T403

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

132

C12

(917) 



T100

Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed)

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

0 Hz

132

C13

(917) 



T101

Terminal 1 bias (speed)

0 to 300%

0.1%

0%

132

C14

(918) 



T102

Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed)

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

132

C15

(918) 



T103

Terminal 1 gain (speed)

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

132

C16

(919) 



T110

Terminal 1 bias command (torque/
magnetic flux)

0 to 400%

0.1%

0%

132

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

85

8

Para

mete

r List

C

ali

b

rat

io

n

 p

a

ra

me

te

rs

C17

(919) 



T111

Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic 
flux)

0 to 300%

0.1%

0%

132

C18

(920) 



T112

Terminal 1 gain command (torque/
magnetic flux)

0 to 400%

0.1%

150%

132

C19

(920) 



T113

Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic 
flux)

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

132

C8

(930) 



M330

Current output bias signal

0 to 100%

0.1%

-

0%

160

C9

(930) 



M331

Current output bias current

0 to 100%

0.1%

-

0%

160

C10

(931)



M332

Current output gain signal

0 to 100%

0.1%

-

100%

160

C11

(931)



M333

Current output gain current

0 to 100%

0.1%

-

100%

160

C38

(932) 



T410

Terminal 4 bias command (torque/
magnetic flux)

0 to 400%

0.1%

0%

132

C39

(932) 



T411

Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic 
flux)

0 to 300%

0.1%

20%

132

C40

(933) 



T412

Terminal 4 gain command (torque/
magnetic flux)

0 to 400%

0.1%

150%

132

C41

(933) 



T413

Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic 
flux)

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

132

C42

(934) 



A630

PID display bias coefficient

0 to 500, 9999

0.01

9999

133

C43

(934) 



A631

PID display bias analog value

0 to 300%

0.1%

20%

133

C44

(935) 



A632

PID display gain coefficient

0 to 500, 9999

0.01

9999

133

C45

(935) 



A633

PID display gain analog value

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

133

─

977

E302

Input voltage mode selection

0, 1

1

0

160

─

989

E490

Parameter copy alarm release

10 



1

10 



160

100 



100 



PU

990

E104

PU buzzer control

0, 1

1

1

161

991

E105

PU contrast adjustment

0 to 63

1

58

161

Mo

n

it

o

r

fu

nc

ti

on

992

M104

Operation panel setting dial push 
monitor selection

0 to 3, 5 to 14, 
17 to 20, 22 to 36, 
38 to 46, 50 to 57, 61, 
62, 64, 67, 71 to 74, 
87 to 98, 100

1

0

116

Dr

oop

c

ont

ro

l

994

G403

Droop break point gain

0.1 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

143

995

G404

Droop break point torque

0.1 to 100%

0.1%

100%

143

─

997

H103

Fault initiation

0 to 255, 9999

1

9999

161

─

998 



E430

PM parameter initialization 

0, 3003, 3103, 8009, 
8109, 9009, 9109

1

0

222

─

999

E431

Automatic parameter setting 

1, 2, 10, 11, 12, 13, 
20, 21, 9999

1

9999

161

─

1000

E108

Direct setting selection

0 to 2

1

0

161

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple


background image

86

Para

mete

r List

8

─

1002



C150

Lq tuning target current adjustment 
coefficient

50 to 150%, 9999

0.1%

9999

127

A

ddit

ion

al

fu

nct

ion

1003

G601

Notch filter frequency

0, 8 to 1250 Hz

1 Hz

0

162

1004

G602

Notch filter depth

0 to 3

1

0

162

1005

G603

Notch filter width

0 to 3

1

0

162

Cloc

k

func

ti

on

1006

E020

Clock (year)

2000 to 2099

1

2000

162

1007

E021

Clock (month, day)

1/1 to 12/31

1

101

162

1008

E022

Clock (hour, minute)

0:00 to 23:59

1

0

162

─

1015

A607

Integral stop selection at limited 
frequency

0 to 2, 10 to 12

1

0

133

─

1016

H021

PTC thermistor protection detection 
time

0 to 60 s

1 s

0 s

110

─

1018

M045

Monitor with sign selection

0, 9999

1

9999

116

Tr

ac

e

 f

u

nc

ti

on

1020

A900

Trace operation selection

0 to 4

1

0

163

1021

A901

Trace mode selection

0 to 2

1

0

163

1022

A902

Sampling cycle

0 to 9

1

2

163

1023

A903

Number of analog channels

1 to 8

1

4

163

1024

A904

Sampling auto start

0, 1

1

0

163

1025

A905

Trigger mode selection

0 to 4

1

0

163

1026

A906

Number of sampling before trigger

0 to 100%

1%

90%

163

1027

A910

Analog source selection (1ch)

1 to 3, 5 to 14, 
17 to 20, 22 to 24, 
32 to 36, 39 to 42, 46, 
52 to 54, 61, 62, 64, 
67, 71 to 74, 
87 to 98, 201 to 213, 
222 to 227, 
230 to 232, 
235 to 238

1

201

163

1028

A911

Analog source selection (2ch)

202

163

1029

A912

Analog source selection (3ch)

203

163

1030

A913

Analog source selection (4ch)

204

163

1031

A914

Analog source selection (5ch)

205

163

1032

A915

Analog source selection (6ch)

206

163

1033

A916

Analog source selection (7ch)

207

163

1034

A917

Analog source selection (8ch)

208

163

1035

A918

Analog trigger channel

1 to 8

1

1

163

1036

A919

Analog trigger operation selection

0, 1

1

0

163

1037

A920

Analog trigger level

600 to 1400

1

1000

163

1038

A930

Digital source selection (1ch)

1 to 255

1

1

163

1039

A931

Digital source selection (2ch)

2

163

1040

A932

Digital source selection (3ch)

3

163

1041

A933

Digital source selection (4ch)

4

163

1042

A934

Digital source selection (5ch)

5

163

1043

A935

Digital source selection (6ch)

6

163

1044

A936

Digital source selection (7ch)

7

163

1045

A937

Digital source selection (8ch)

8

163

1046

A938

Digital trigger channel

1 to 8

1

1

163

1047

A939

Digital trigger operation selection

0, 1

1

0

163

─

1048

E106

Display-off waiting time

0 to 60 min

1 min

0 min

163

─

1049

E110

USB host reset

0, 1

1

0

163

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

87

8

Para

mete

r List

A

n

ti

-s

w

a

y con

tr

o

l

1072

A310

DC brake judgment time for anti-
sway control operation

0 to 10 s

0.1 s

3 s

163

1073

A311

Anti-sway control operation 
selection

0, 1

1

0

163

1074

A312

Anti-sway control frequency

0.05 to 3 Hz, 9999

0.001 Hz

1 Hz

163

1075

A313

Anti-sway control depth

0 to 3

1

0

163

1076

A314

Anti-sway control width

0 to 3

1

0

163

1077

A315

Rope length

0.1 to 50 m

0.1 m

1 m

163

1078

A316

Trolley weight

1 to 50000 kg

1 kg

1 kg

163

1079

A317

Load weight

1 to 50000 kg

1 kg

1 kg

163

─

1103

F040

Deceleration time at emergency stop

0 to 3600 s

0.1 s

5 s

163

Mo

n

it

o

r

fu

n

cti

o

n

1106

M050

Torque monitor filter

0 to 5 s, 9999

0.01 s

9999

116

1107

M051

Running speed monitor filter

0 to 5 s, 9999

0.01 s

9999

116

1108

M052

Excitation current monitor filter

0 to 5 s, 9999

0.01 s

9999

116

─

1113

H414

Speed limit method selection

0 to 2, 10, 9999

1

0

155

─

1114

D403

Torque command reverse selection

0, 1

1

1

155

─

1115

G218

Speed control integral term clear 
time

0 to 9998 ms

1 ms

0 s

156

─

1116

G206

Constant output range speed control 
P gain compensation

0 to 100%

0.1%

0%

156

─

1117

G261

Speed control P gain 1 (per-unit 
system)

0 to 300, 9999

0.01

9999

156

─

1118

G361

Speed control P gain 2 (per-unit 
system)

0 to 300, 9999

0.01

9999

156

─

1119

G262

Model speed control gain (per-unit 
system)

0 to 300, 9999

0.01

9999

157

─

1121

G260

Per-unit speed control reference 
frequency

0 to 400 Hz

0.01 Hz

120 Hz 



156

, 

157

60 Hz 



PI

D

 c

ont

ro

l

1134

A605

PID upper limit manipulated value

0 to 100%

0.1%

100%

133

1135

A606

PID lower limit manipulated value

0 to 100%

0.1%

100%

133

1136

A670

Second PID display bias coefficient

0 to 500, 9999

0.01

9999

133

1137

A671

Second PID display bias analog 
value

0 to 300%

0.1%

20%

133

1138

A672

Second PID display gain coefficient

0 to 500, 9999

0.01

9999

133

1139

A673

Second PID display gain analog 
value

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

133

1140

A664

Second PID set point/deviation input 
selection

1 to 5

1

2

133

1141

A665

Second PID measured value input 
selection

1 to 5

1

3

133

1142

A640

Second PID unit selection

0 to 43, 9999

1

9999

133

1143

A641

Second PID upper limit

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

133

1144

A642

Second PID lower limit

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

133

1145

A643

Second PID deviation limit

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

133

1146

A644

Second PID signal operation selection

0 to 3, 10 to 13

1

0

133

1147

A661

Second output interruption detection 
time

0 to 3600 s, 9999

0.1 s

1 s

133

1148

A662

Second output interruption detection 
level

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

0 Hz

133

1149

A663

Second output interruption cancel 
level

900 to 1100%

0.1%

1000%

133

PLC

fu

nct

ion

1150 

to 

1199

A810 

to 

A859

PLC function user parameters 1 to 50 0 to 65535

1

0

146

─

1220

B100

Parameter for manufacturer setting.

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

88

Para

mete

r List

8

S

imp

le

 p

o

si

tio

n

 c

o

n

tro

l

1221

B101

Start command edge detection 
selection

0, 1

1

0

147

1222

B120

First positioning acceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1223

B121

First positioning deceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1224

B122

First positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1225

B123

First positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1226

B124

Second positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1227

B125

Second positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1228

B126

Second positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1229

B127

Second positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1230

B128

Third positioning acceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1231

B129

Third positioning deceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1232

B130

Third positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1233

B131

Third positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1234

B132

Fourth positioning acceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1235

B133

Fourth positioning deceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1236

B134

Fourth positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1237

B135

Fourth positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1238

B136

Fifth positioning acceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1239

B137

Fifth positioning deceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1240

B138

Fifth positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1241

B139

Fifth positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1242

B140

Sixth positioning acceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1243

B141

Sixth positioning deceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1244

B142

Sixth positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1245

B143

Sixth positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1246

B144

Seventh positioning acceleration 
time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1247

B145

Seventh positioning deceleration 
time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1248

B146

Seventh positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1249

B147

Seventh positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1250

B148

Eighth positioning acceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1251

B149

Eighth positioning deceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1252

B150

Eighth positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1253

B151

Eighth positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1254

B152

Ninth positioning acceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

89

8

Para

mete

r List

Sim

p

le pos

it

ion con

tr

o

l

1255

B153

Ninth positioning deceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1256

B154

Ninth positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1257

B155

Ninth positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1258

B156

Tenth positioning acceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1259

B157

Tenth positioning deceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1260

B158

Tenth positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1261

B159

Tenth positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1262

B160

Eleventh positioning acceleration 
time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1263

B161

Eleventh positioning deceleration 
time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1264

B162

Eleventh positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1265

B163

Eleventh positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1266

B164

Twelfth positioning acceleration time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1267

B165

Twelfth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1268

B166

Twelfth positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1269

B167

Twelfth positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1270

B168

Thirteenth positioning acceleration 
time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1271

B169

Thirteenth positioning deceleration 
time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1272

B170

Thirteenth positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1273

B171

Thirteenth positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1274

B172

Fourteenth positioning acceleration 
time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1275

B173

Fourteenth positioning deceleration 
time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1276

B174

Fourteenth positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1277

B175

Fourteenth positioning sub-function

0 to 2, 10 to 12, 
100 to 102, 110 to 112

1

10

147

1278

B176

Fifteenth positioning acceleration 
time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1279

B177

Fifteenth positioning deceleration 
time

0.01 to 360 s

0.01 s

5 s

147

1280

B178

Fifteenth positioning dwell time

0 to 20000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

147

1281

B179

Fifteenth positioning sub-function

0, 2, 10, 12, 100, 102, 
110, 112

1

10

147

1282

B180

Home position return method 
selection

0 to 6

1

4

147

1283

B181

Home position return speed

0 to 30 Hz

0.01 Hz

2 Hz

147

1284

B182

Home position return creep speed

0 to 10 Hz

0.01 Hz

0.5 Hz

147

1285

B183

Home position shift amount lower 4 
digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

1286

B184

Home position shift amount upper 4 
digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

1287

B185

Travel distance after proximity dog 
ON lower 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

2048

147

1288

B186

Travel distance after proximity dog  
ON upper 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

147

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

90

Para

mete

r List

8

Sim

p

le po

sit

ion

 c

ont

ro

l

1289

B187

Home position return stopper torque

0 to 200%

0.1%

40%

147

1290

B188

Home position return stopper waiting 
time

0 to 10 s

0.1 s

0.5 s

147

1292

B190

Position control terminal input 
selection

0, 1

1

0

147

1293

B191

Roll feeding mode selection

0, 1

1

0

147

1294

B192

Position detection lower 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

149

1295

B193

Position detection upper 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

149

1296

B194

Position detection selection

0 to 2

1

0

149

1297

B195

Position detection hysteresis width

0 to 32767

1

0

149

─

1298

B013

Second position control gain

0 to 150 s

-1

1 s

-1

25 s

-1

149

─

1299

G108

Second pre-excitation selection

0, 1

1

0

110

─

1300 

to 

1343, 

1350 

to 

1359

N500 

to 

N543, 

N550 

to 

N559

Communication option parameters.
For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the option.

─

1410

A170

Starting times lower 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

164

─

1411

A171

Starting times upper 4 digits

0 to 9999

1

0

164

─

1412



C135

Motor induced voltage constant (phi 
f) exponent

0 to 2, 9999

1

9999

127

─

1413



C235

Second motor induced voltage 
constant (phi f) exponent

0 to 2, 9999

1

9999

127

Loa

d 

cha

ra

ct

e

ri

st

ic

s

 f

aul

t d

et

ect

io

n

1480



H520

Load characteristics measurement 
mode

0, 1 (2 to 5, 81 to 85)

1

0

165

1481



H521

Load characteristics load reference 1

0 to 400%, 8888, 
9999

0.1%

9999

165

1482



H522

Load characteristics load reference 2

0 to 400%, 8888, 
9999

0.1%

9999

165

1483



H523

Load characteristics load reference 3

0 to 400%, 8888, 
9999

0.1%

9999

165

1484



H524

Load characteristics load reference 4

0 to 400%, 8888, 
9999

0.1%

9999

165

1485



H525

Load characteristics load reference 5

0 to 400%, 8888, 
9999

0.1%

9999

165

1486



H526

Load characteristics maximum 
frequency

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

60 Hz 50 Hz

165

1487



H527

Load characteristics minimum 
frequency

0 to 590 Hz

0.01 Hz

6 Hz

165

1488



H531

Upper limit warning detection width

0 to 400%, 9999

0.1%

20%

165

1489



H532

Lower limit warning detection width

0 to 400%, 9999

0.1%

20%

165

1490



H533

Upper limit fault detection width

0 to 400%, 9999

0.1%

9999

165

1491



H534

Lower limit fault detection width

0 to 400%, 9999

0.1%

9999

165

1492



H535

Load status detection signal delay 
time / load reference measurement 
waiting time

0 to 60 s

0.1 s

1 s

165

─

1499

E415

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

91

8

Para

mete

r List



Differ according to capacities.
6%: FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower, FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower
4%: FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K), FR-A840-00052(1.5K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K)
3%: FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K)
2%: FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K)
1%: FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher



The setting range or initial value for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.



The setting range or initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.



The initial value for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.



The initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher.



Differ according to capacities.
4%: FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower
2%: FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K)
1%: FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher



The value for the 200 V class.



The value for the 400 V class.



The setting is available only when a vector control compatible option is installed. Refer to the Instruction Manual of each option for details.

 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit.

 The setting range or initial value for the standard model.

 The setting range or initial value for the separated converter type.

 The setting range or initial value for the IP55 compatible model.

 The setting is available for the standard model only.

 The setting is available only for standard models and IP55 compatible models.

 The setting is available only with the 400 V class.

 The setting is available only for the FR-A800-GF or when a compatible plug-in option is installed.

 The setting range differs for the FR-A800-E. (Refer to page 92.)

 The setting is not available for the FR-A800-E.

 Parameter for manufacturer setting for the FR-A842-P. Do not set.

 The setting range differs for the FR-A842-P. (Refer to page 92.)

 The setting is not available for the FR-A842-P.

Cl

e

ar

p

a

ra

me

te

rs

Pr.CLR

Parameter clear

(0), 1

1

0

160

ALL.CL

All parameter clear

(0), 1

1

0

160

Err.CL

Fault history clear

(0), 1

1

0

160

─

Pr.CPY

Parameter copy

(0), 1 to 3

1

0

160

─

Pr.CHG

Initial value change list

─

1

0

160

─

IPM

IPM initialization

0, 3003

1

0

222

─

AUTO

Automatic parameter setting

─

─

─

161

─

Pr.MD

Group parameter setting

(0), 1, 2

1

0

64

Func

tion

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

usto

m

er

se

tt

in

g

FM

CA


background image

92

Para

mete

r List

8

List of parameters for the FR-A800-E Ethernet communication (by parameter 
number)

The following table shows the extended parameters for the FR-A800-E as compared to the standard inverters. Set the parameters according 
to the application.

Func

ti

on

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

u

st

o

m

er

se

tt

in

g

Out

put

 t

er

m

inal

func

ti

on as

signm

e

n

t

190

M400

RUN terminal function selection

242, 342 



1

0

137

191

M401

SU terminal function selection

1

1

137

192

M402

IPF terminal function selection

1

2 



137

9999 



193

M403

OL terminal function selection

1

3

137

194

M404

FU terminal function selection

1

4

137

195

M405

ABC1 terminal function selection

1

99

137

196

M406

ABC2 terminal function selection

1

9999

137

313

M410

DO0 output selection

242, 342 



1

9999

137

314

M411

DO1 output selection

1

9999

137

315

M412

DO2 output selection

1

9999

137

Et

her

n

e

t co

mm

u

n

icat

io

n

550

D012

NET mode operation command 

source selection

0, 1, 5, 9999

1

9999

145

551

D013

PU mode operation command 

source selection

1 to 3, 5, 9999

1

9999

145

1124

N681

Station number in inverter-to-

inverter link

0 to 5, 9999

1

9999

164

1125

N682

Number of inverters in inverter-

to-inverter link system

2 to 6

1

2

164

1424

N650

Ethernet communication network 

number

1 to 239

1

1

129

1425

N651

Ethernet communication station 

number

1 to 120

1

1

129

1426

N641

Link speed and duplex mode 

selection

0 to 4

1

0

129

1427

N630

Ethernet function selection 1

502, 5000 to 5002, 
5006 to 5008, 
5010 to 5013, 9999, 
45237

1

5001

129

1428

N631

Ethernet function selection 2

502, 5000 to 5002, 
5006 to 5008, 
5010 to 5013, 9999, 
45237

1

45237

129

1429

N632

Ethernet function selection 3

502, 5000 to 5002, 
5006 to 5008, 
5010 to 5013, 9999, 
45237

1

9999

129

1431

N643

Ethernet signal loss detection 

function selection

0 to 3

1

0

129

1432

N644

Ethernet communication check 

time interval

0 to 999.8 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

129

1434

N600

Ethernet IP address 1

0 to 255

1

192

129

1435

N601

Ethernet IP address 2

0 to 255

1

168

129

1436

N602

Ethernet IP address 3

0 to 255

1

50

129

1437

N603

Ethernet IP address 4

0 to 255

1

1

129

1438

N610

Subnet mask 1

0 to 255

1

255

129

1439

N611

Subnet mask 2

0 to 255

1

255

129

1440

N612

Subnet mask 3

0 to 255

1

255

129

1441

N613

Subnet mask 4

0 to 255

1

0

129

1442

N660

Ethernet IP filter address 1

0 to 255

1

0

129

1443

N661

Ethernet IP filter address 2

0 to 255

1

0

129

1444

N662

Ethernet IP filter address 3

0 to 255

1

0

129

1445

N663

Ethernet IP filter address 4

0 to 255

1

0

129

1446

N664

Ethernet IP filter address 2 range 

specification

0 to 255, 9999

1

9999

129

1447

N665

Ethernet IP filter address 3 range 

specification

0 to 255, 9999

1

9999

129

1448

N666

Ethernet IP filter address 4 range 

specification

0 to 255, 9999

1

9999

129


background image

93

8

Para

mete

r List



Setting values not mentioned above are the same as those of the standard inverters.



The initial value is for the standard models and the IP55 compatible models.



The initial value is for the separated converter types.

List of parameters for the FR-A842-P parallel operation (by parameter number)

The following table shows the extended parameters for the FR-A842-P as compared to the  standard inverters.



Setting values not mentioned above are the same as those of the standard inverters.

E

the

rn

et

 c

o

m

m

u

ni

ca

ti

on

1449

N670

Ethernet command source 

selection IP address 1

0 to 255

1

0

129

1450

N671

Ethernet command source 

selection IP address 2

0 to 255

1

0

129

1451

N672

Ethernet command source 

selection IP address 3

0 to 255

1

0

129

1452

N673

Ethernet command source 

selection IP address 4

0 to 255

1

0

129

1453

N674

Ethernet command source 

selection IP address 3 range 

specification

0 to 255, 9999

1

9999

129

1454

N675

Ethernet command source 

selection IP address 4 range 

specification

0 to 255, 9999

1

9999

129

1455

N642

Keepalive time

1 to 7200 s

1 s

3600 s

129

Func

ti

on

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

Cus

to

m

er

se

tt

in

g

Ou

tp

u

t te

rm

ina

l

fu

n

ct

io

n

 ass

ig

nm

en

t

190

M400

RUN terminal function selection

227, 327 



1

0

137

191

M401

SU terminal function selection

1

1

137

192

M402

IPF terminal function selection

1

9999

137

193

M403

OL terminal function selection

1

3

137

194

M404

FU terminal function selection

1

4

137

195

M405

ABC1 terminal function selection

1

99

137

196

M406

ABC2 terminal function selection

1

9999

137

Pa

ra

lle

l ope

ra

tion

fu

n

cti

o

n

652

N092

Parallel operation 

communication check time

0, 0.1 to 120 s

0.1 s

1 s

152

1001

E390

Parallel operation selection

1, 2, 100, 200, 300

1

100

162

F

u

nc

ti

on

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial value

Refer

to

page

C

u

st

om

er

se

tt

in

g


background image

94

Para

mete

r List

8

Inverter parameter list (by function group)

E: Environment setting parameters

Parameters that set the inverter operation characteristics.

F: Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and 
acceleration/deceleration pattern

Parameters that set the motor acceleration/deceleration 
characteristics.

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

E000

168

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

E001

169

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

E020

1006

Clock (year)

162

E021

1007

Clock (month, day)

162

E022

1008

Clock (hour, minute)

162

E023

269

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

E080

168

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

E081

169

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

E100

75

Reset selection

124

E101

75

Disconnected PU detection

124

E102

75

PU stop selection

124

E103

145

PU display language selection

134

E104

990

PU buzzer control

161

E105

991

PU contrast adjustment

161

E106

1048

Display-off waiting time

163

E107

75

Reset limit

124

E108

1000

Direct setting selection

161

E110

1049

USB host reset

163

E200

161

Frequency setting/key lock operation 
selection

135

E201

295

Frequency change increment amount 
setting

135

E300

30

Regenerative function selection

114

E301

570

Multiple rating setting

151

E302

977

Input voltage mode selection

160

E400

77

Parameter write selection

125

E410

296

Password lock level

144

E411

297

Password lock/unlock

144

E415

1499

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

E420

888

Free parameter 1

159

E421

889

Free parameter 2

159

E430

998 

 PM parameter initialization 

222

E431

999

Automatic parameter setting 

161

E440

160

User group read selection 

135

E441

172

User group registered display/batch 
clear

135

E442

173

User group registration

135

E443

174

User group clear

135

E490

989

Parameter copy alarm release

160

E600

72 



PWM frequency selection

122

E601

240

Soft-PWM operation selection

122

E602

260 

 PWM frequency automatic switchover

122

E700

255

Life alarm status display

139

E701

256 

 Inrush current limit circuit life display

139

E702

257

Control circuit capacitor life display

139

E703

258 

 Main circuit capacitor life display

139

E704

259 

 Main circuit capacitor life measuring

139

E710

503

Maintenance timer 1

150

E711

504

Maintenance timer 1 warning output set 
time

150

E712

686

Maintenance timer 2

150

E713

687

Maintenance timer 2 warning output set 
time

150

E714

688

Maintenance timer 3

150

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

E715

689

Maintenance timer 3 warning output set 
time

150

E720

555

Current average time

150

E721

556

Data output mask time

150

E722

557

Current average value monitor signal 
output reference current

150

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

F000

20

Acceleration/deceleration reference 
frequency

109

F001

21

Acceleration/deceleration time 
increments

109

F002

16

Jog acceleration/deceleration time

111

F003

611

Acceleration time at a restart

119

F010

7

Acceleration time 

109

F011

8

Deceleration time 

109

F020

44

Second acceleration/deceleration time

109

F021

45

Second deceleration time

109

F022

147

Acceleration/deceleration time 
switching frequency

109

F030

110

Third acceleration/deceleration time

109

F031

111

Third deceleration time

109

F040

1103

Deceleration time at emergency stop

163

F070

791 

 Acceleration time in low-speed range

109

F071

792 

 Deceleration time in low-speed range

109

F100

29

Acceleration/deceleration pattern 
selection

113

F101

59

Remote function selection

120

F102

13

Starting frequency

111

F103

571

Holding time at a start

111

F200

140

Backlash acceleration stopping 
frequency

113

F201

141

Backlash acceleration stopping time

113

F202

142

Backlash deceleration stopping 
frequency

113

F203

143

Backlash deceleration stopping time

113

F300

380

Acceleration S-pattern 1

113

F301

381

Deceleration S-pattern 1

113

F302

382

Acceleration S-pattern 2

113

F303

383

Deceleration S-pattern 2

113

F400

516

S-pattern time at a start of acceleration

113

F401

517

S-pattern time at a completion of 
acceleration

113

F402

518

S-pattern time at a start of deceleration

113

F403

519

S-pattern time at a completion of 
deceleration

113

F500

292

Automatic acceleration/deceleration

121

F510

61

Reference current

121

F511

62

Reference value at acceleration

121

F512

63

Reference value at deceleration

121

F513

293

Acceleration/deceleration separate 
selection

121

F520

64

Starting frequency for elevator mode

121

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

Simple

Simple

Simple
Simple

Simple

Simple


background image

95

8

Para

mete

r List

D: Operation command and frequency 
command

Parameters that specify the inverter's command source, and 
parameters that set the motor driving frequency and torque.

H: Protective function parameter

Parameters to protect the motor and the inverter.

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

D000

79

Operation mode selection 

125

D001

340

Communication startup mode selection

125

D010

338

Communication operation command 
source

145

D011

339

Communication speed command 
source

145

D012

550 



NET mode operation command source 
selection

145

D013

551

PU mode operation command source 
selection

145

D020

78

Reverse rotation prevention selection

125

D030

811

Set resolution switchover

113, 115

D100

291

Pulse train I/O selection

144

D101

384

Input pulse division scaling factor

144

D110

385

Frequency for zero input pulse

144

D111

386

Frequency for maximum input pulse

144

D120

432 

 Pulse train torque command bias

155

D121

433 

 Pulse train torque command gain

155

D200

15

Jog frequency

111

D300

28

Multi-speed input compensation 
selection

109

D301

4

Multi-speed setting (high speed) 

109

D302

5

Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 

109

D303

6

Multi-speed setting (low speed) 

109

D304 

to 

D307

24 to 

27

Multi-speed setting (4 speed to 7 speed)

109

D308 

to 

D315

232 to 

239

Multi-speed setting (8 speed to 15 
speed)

109

D400

804

Torque command source selection

113, 155

D401

805

Torque command value (RAM)

113, 155

D402

806

Torque command value (RAM, 
EEPROM)

113, 155

D403

1114

Torque command reverse selection

155

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

H000

9

Electronic thermal O/L relay 

110

H001

600

First free thermal reduction frequency 1

110

H002

601

First free thermal reduction ratio 1

110

H003

602

First free thermal reduction frequency 2

110

H004

603

First free thermal reduction ratio 2

110

H005

604

First free thermal reduction frequency 3

110

H006

607

Motor permissible load level

110

H010

51

Second electronic thermal O/L relay

110

H011

692

Second free thermal reduction 
frequency 1

110

H012

693

Second free thermal reduction ratio 1

110

H013

694

Second free thermal reduction 
frequency 2

110

H014

695

Second free thermal reduction ratio 2

110

H015

696

Second free thermal reduction 
frequency 3

110

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

H016

608

Second motor permissible load level

110

H020

561

PTC thermistor protection level

110

H021

1016

PTC thermistor protection detection 
time

110

H022

876 

 Thermal protector input

110

H030

875

Fault definition

158

H100

244

Cooling fan operation selection

138

H101

249

Earth (ground) fault detection at start

138

H102

598 

 Undervoltage level

151

H103

997

Fault initiation

161

H200

251

Output phase loss protection selection

139

H201

872 

 Input phase loss protection selection

139

H300

65 



Retry selection

121

H301

67 



Number of retries at fault occurrence

121

H302

68 



Retry waiting time

121

H303

69 



Retry count display erase

121

H400

1

Maximum frequency 

108

H401

2

Minimum frequency 

108

H402

18

High speed maximum frequency

108

H410

807

Speed limit selection

155

H411

808

Forward rotation speed limit/speed limit

155

H412

809

Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-
side speed limit

155

H414

1113

Speed limit method selection

155

H415

873 

 Speed limit

143

H416

285

Speed deviation excess detection 
frequency

141, 143

H417

853 

 Speed deviation time

143

H420

31

Frequency jump 1A

115

H421

32

Frequency jump 1B

115

H422

33

Frequency jump 2A

115

H423

34

Frequency jump 2B

115

H424

35

Frequency jump 3A

115

H425

36

Frequency jump 3B

115

H429

552

Frequency jump range

115

H500

22

Stall prevention operation level (Torque 
limit level)

112

H501

156

Stall prevention operation selection

112

H520

1480



Load characteristics measurement 
mode

165

H521

1481



Load characteristics load reference 1

165

H522

1482



Load characteristics load reference 2

165

H523

1483



Load characteristics load reference 3

165

H524

1484



Load characteristics load reference 4

165

H525

1485



Load characteristics load reference 5

165

H526

1486



Load characteristics maximum 
frequency

165

H527

1487



Load characteristics minimum 
frequency

165

H531

1488



Upper limit warning detection width

165

H532

1489



Lower limit warning detection width

165

H533

1490



Upper limit fault detection width

165

H534

1491



Lower limit fault detection width

165

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple


background image

96

Para

mete

r List

8

M: Monitor display and monitor output signal

Parameters regarding the inverter's operating status. These 
parameters are used to set the monitors and output signals.

H535

1492



Load status detection signal delay time 
/ load reference measurement waiting 
time

165

H600

48

Second stall prevention operation level

112

H601

49

Second stall prevention operation 
frequency

112

H602

114

Third stall prevention operation level

112

H603

115

Third stall prevention operation 
frequency

112

H610

23

Stall prevention operation level 
compensation factor at double speed

112

H611

66

Stall prevention operation reduction 
starting frequency

112

H620

148

Stall prevention level at 0 V input

112

H621

149

Stall prevention level at 10 V input

112

H631

154

Voltage reduction selection during stall 
prevention operation

112

H700

810

Torque limit input method selection

113

H701

812

Torque limit level (regeneration)

113

H702

813

Torque limit level (3rd quadrant)

113

H703

814

Torque limit level (4th quadrant)

113

H704

801

Output limit level

113

H710

815

Torque limit level 2

113

H720

816

Torque limit level during acceleration

113

H721

817

Torque limit level during deceleration

113

H730

874

OLT level setting

113

H800

374

Overspeed detection level

146

H881

690

Deceleration check time

153

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

M000

37

Speed display

115

M001

505

Speed setting reference

115

M002

144

Speed setting switchover

115

M020

170

Watt-hour meter clear

116

M021

563

Energization time carrying-over times

116

M022

268

Monitor decimal digits selection

116

M023

891

Cumulative power monitor digit shifted 
times

116, 159

M030

171

Operation hour meter clear

116

M031

564

Operating time carrying-over times

116

M040

55

Frequency monitoring reference

118

M041

56

Current monitoring reference

118

M042

866

Torque monitoring reference

118

M043

241

Analog input display unit switchover

132

M044

290

Monitor negative output selection

116

M045

1018

Monitor with sign selection

116

M050

1106

Torque monitor filter

116

M051

1107

Running speed monitor filter

116

M052

1108

Excitation current monitor filter

116

M060

663

Control circuit temperature signal 
output level

153

M100

52

Operation panel main monitor selection

116

M101

774

Operation panel monitor selection 1

116

M102

775

Operation panel monitor selection 2

116

M103

776

Operation panel monitor selection 3

116

M104

992

Operation panel setting dial push 
monitor selection

116

M200

892

Load factor

159

M201

893

Energy saving monitor reference (motor 
capacity)

159

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

M202

894

Control selection during commercial 
power-supply operation

159

M203

895

Power saving rate reference value

159

M204

896

Power unit cost

159

M205

897

Power saving monitor average time

159

M206

898

Power saving cumulative monitor clear

159

M207

899

Operation time rate (estimated value)

159

M300

54

FM/CA terminal function selection

116

M301

158

AM terminal function selection

116

M310

C0

(900) 



FM/CA terminal calibration

160

M320

C1

(901) 



AM terminal calibration

160

M321

867

AM output filter

160

M330

C8

(930) 



Current output bias signal

160

M331

C9

(930) 



Current output bias current

160

M332

C10

(931)



Current output gain signal

160

M333

C11

(931)



Current output gain current

160

M334

869

Current output filter

160

M400

190

RUN terminal function selection

137

M401

191

SU terminal function selection

137

M402

192

IPF terminal function selection

137

M403

193

OL terminal function selection

137

M404

194

FU terminal function selection

137

M405

195

ABC1 terminal function selection

137

M406

196

ABC2 terminal function selection

137

M410 313 

 DO0 output selection

137

M411 314 

 DO1 output selection

137

M412 315 

 DO2 output selection

137

M430

157

OL signal output timer

112

M431

289

Inverter output terminal filter

137

M433

166

Output current detection signal 
retention time

134

M440

870

Speed detection hysteresis

116

M441

41

Up-to-frequency sensitivity

116

M442

42

Output frequency detection

116

M443

43

Output frequency detection for reverse 
rotation

116

M444

50

Second output frequency detection

116

M445

116

Third output frequency detection

116

M446

865

Low speed detection

116

M460

150

Output current detection level

134

M461

151

Output current detection signal delay 
time

134

M462

152

Zero current detection level

134

M463

153

Zero current detection time

134

M464

167

Output current detection operation 
selection

134

M470

864

Torque detection

158

M500

495

Remote output selection

149

M501

496

Remote output data 1

149

M502

497

Remote output data 2

149

M510

76

Fault code output selection

124

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page


background image

97

8

Para

mete

r List

T: Multi-function input terminal parameters

Parameters for the input terminals where inverter commands are 
received through.

M520

799

Pulse increment setting for output 
power

154

M530

655

Analog remote output selection

152

M531

656

Analog remote output 1

152

M532

657

Analog remote output 2

152

M533

658

Analog remote output 3

152

M534

659

Analog remote output 4

152

M600 863 



Control terminal option-Encoder pulse 
division ratio

158

M601 413 

 Encoder pulse division ratio

158

M610 635 

 Cumulative pulse clear signal selection

148

M611 636 



Cumulative pulse division scaling 
factor

148

M612 637 



Control terminal option-Cumulative 
pulse division scaling factor

148

M613 638 

 Cumulative pulse storage

148

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

T000

73

Analog input selection

123

T001

267

Terminal 4 input selection

123

T002

74

Input filter time constant

123

T003

822

Speed setting filter 1

123

T004

826

Torque setting filter 1

123

T005

832

Speed setting filter 2

123

T006

836

Torque setting filter 2

123

T007

849

Analog input offset adjustment

123

T010

868

Terminal 1 function assignment

158

T021

242

Terminal 1 added compensation 
amount (terminal 2)

123

T022

125

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 

frequency 

132

T040

858

Terminal 4 function assignment

158

T041

243

Terminal 1 added compensation 
amount (terminal 4)

123

T042

126

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 

frequency 

132

T050

252

Override bias

123

T051

253

Override gain

123

T052

573

4 mA input check selection

151

T053

777

4 mA input check operation frequency

151

T054

778

4 mA input check filter

151

T100

C12

(917) 



Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed)

132

T101

C13

(917) 



Terminal 1 bias (speed)

132

T102

C14

(918) 



Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed)

132

T103

C15

(918) 



Terminal 1 gain (speed)

132

T110

C16

(919) 



Terminal 1 bias command (torque/
magnetic flux)

132

T111

C17

(919) 



Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic flux)

132

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

T112

C18

(920) 



Terminal 1 gain command (torque/
magnetic flux)

132

T113

C19

(920) 



Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux)

132

T200

C2

(902) 



Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 
frequency

132

T201

C3

(902) 



Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 

132

T202

125

(903) 



Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 
frequency

132

T203

C4

(903) 



Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

132

T400

C5

(904) 



Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 
frequency

132

T401

C6

(904) 



Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 

132

T402

126

(905) 



Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 
frequency

132

T403

C7

(905) 



Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

132

T410

C38

(932) 



Terminal 4 bias command (torque/
magnetic flux)

132

T411

C39

(932) 



Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic flux)

132

T412

C40

(933) 



Terminal 4 gain command (torque/
magnetic flux)

132

T413

C41

(933) 



Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux)

132

T700

178

STF terminal function selection

136

T701

179

STR terminal function selection

136

T702

180

RL terminal function selection

136

T703

181

RM terminal function selection

136

T704

182

RH terminal function selection

136

T705

183

RT terminal function selection

136

T706

184

AU terminal function selection

136

T707

185

JOG terminal function selection

136

T708

186

CS terminal function selection

136

T709

187

MRS terminal function selection

136

T710

188

STOP terminal function selection

136

T711

189

RES terminal function selection

136

T720

17

MRS input selection

112

T721

599

X10 terminal input selection

114

T722

606

Power failure stop external signal input 
selection

139

T730

155

RT signal function validity condition 
selection

135

T740

699

Input terminal filter

136

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page


background image

98

Para

mete

r List

8

C: Motor constant parameters

Parameters for the applied motor setting.

A: Application parameters

Parameters to set a specific application.

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

C000

684

Tuning data unit switchover

127

C100

71

Applied motor

122

C101

80

Motor capacity

126

C102

81

Number of motor poles

126

C103

9

Rated motor current 

110

C104

83

Rated motor voltage

127

C105

84

Rated motor frequency

127

C106

702 

 Maximum motor frequency

127

C107

707

Motor inertia (integer)

127

C108

724

Motor inertia (exponent)

127

C110

96

Auto tuning setting/status

127

C111

95

Online auto tuning selection

129

C112

818

Easy gain tuning response level setting

156

C113

819

Easy gain tuning selection

156

C114

880

Load inertia ratio

157

C120

90

Motor constant (R1)

127

C121

91

Motor constant (R2)

127

C122

92

Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance 
(Ld)

127

C123

93

Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance 
(Lq)

127

C124

94

Motor constant (X)

127

C125

82

Motor excitation current

127

C126

859

Torque current/Rated PM motor current

127

C130

706 

 Induced voltage constant (phi f)

127

C131

711 

 Motor Ld decay ratio

127

C132

712 

 Motor Lq decay ratio

127

C133

725 

 Motor protection current level

127

C135

1412



Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) 
exponent

127

C140

369 

 Number of encoder pulses

146

C141

359 

 Encoder rotation direction

145

C148

376 



Encoder signal loss detection enable/
disable selection

146

C150

1002



Lq tuning target current adjustment 
coefficient

127

C182

717 



Starting resistance tuning 
compensation

127

C185

721 



Starting magnetic pole position 
detection pulse width 

127

C200

450

Second applied motor

122

C201

453

Second motor capacity

126

C202

454

Number of second motor poles

126

C203

51

Rated second motor current

110

C204

456

Rated second motor voltage

127

C205

457

Rated second motor frequency

127

C206

743 

 Second motor maximum frequency

127

C207

744

Second motor inertia (integer)

127

C208

745

Second motor inertia (exponent)

127

C210

463

Second motor auto tuning setting/
status

127

C211

574

Second motor online auto tuning

129

C220

458

Second motor constant (R1)

127

C221

459

Second motor constant (R2)

127

C222

460

Second motor constant (L1) / d-axis 
inductance (Ld)

127

C223

461

Second motor constant (L2) / q-axis 
inductance (Lq)

127

C224

462

Second motor constant (X)

127

C225

455

Second motor excitation current

127

C226

860

Second motor torque current/Rated PM 
motor current

127

Simple

Simple

Simple

C230

738 



Second motor induced voltage constant 
(phi f)

127

C231

739 

 Second motor Ld decay ratio

127

C232

740 

 Second motor Lq decay ratio

127

C233

746 

 Second motor protection current level

127

C235

1413



Second motor induced voltage constant 
(phi f) exponent

127

C240

851 



Control terminal option-Number of 
encoder pulses

145

C241

852 



Control terminal option-Encoder 
rotation direction

145

C242

862 

 Encoder option selection

145

C248

855 



Control terminal option-Signal loss 
detection enable/disable selection

145

C282

741 



Second starting resistance tuning 
compensation

127

C285

742 



Second motor magnetic pole detection 
pulse width

127

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

A000

135

Electronic bypass sequence selection

134

A001

136

MC switchover interlock time

134

A002

137

Start waiting time

134

A003

138

Bypass selection at a fault

134

A004

139

Automatic switchover frequency from 
inverter to bypass operation

134

A005

159

Automatic switchover frequency range 
from bypass to inverter operation

134

A006

248

Self power management selection

138

A007

254

Main circuit power OFF waiting time

138

A100

278

Brake opening frequency

141

A101

279

Brake opening current

141

A102

280

Brake opening current detection time

141

A103

281

Brake operation time at start

141

A104

282

Brake operation frequency

141

A105

283

Brake operation time at stop

141

A106

284

Deceleration detection function 
selection

141

A107

285

Overspeed detection frequency

141, 143

A108

639

Brake opening current selection

141

A109

640

Brake operation frequency selection

141

A110

292

Automatic acceleration/deceleration

121

A120

642

Second brake opening frequency

141

A121

643

Second brake opening current

141

A122

644

Second brake opening current 
detection time

141

A123

645

Second brake operation time at start

141

A124

646

Second brake operation frequency

141

A125

647

Second brake operation time at stop

141

A126

648

Second deceleration detection function 
selection

141

A128

650

Second brake opening current selection

141

A129

651

Second brake operation frequency 
selection

141

A130

641

Second brake sequence operation 
selection

141

A170

1410

Starting times lower 4 digits

164

A171

1411

Starting times upper 4 digits

164

A200

270

Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed 
frequency control selection

140

A201

271

High-speed setting maximum current

140

A202

272

Middle-speed setting minimum current

140

A203

273

Current averaging range

140

A204

274

Current averaging filter time constant

140

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page


background image

99

8

Para

mete

r List

A205

275

Stop-on contact excitation current low-
speed multiplying factor

141

A206

276 



PWM carrier frequency at stop-on 
contact

141

A300

592

Traverse function selection

151

A301

593

Maximum amplitude amount

151

A302

594

Amplitude compensation amount 
during deceleration

151

A303

595

Amplitude compensation amount 
during acceleration

151

A304

596

Amplitude acceleration time

151

A305

597

Amplitude deceleration time

151

A310

1072

DC brake judgment time for anti-sway 
control operation

163

A311

1073

Anti-sway control operation selection

163

A312

1074

Anti-sway control frequency

163

A313

1075

Anti-sway control depth

163

A314

1076

Anti-sway control width

163

A315

1077

Rope length

163

A316

1078

Trolley weight

163

A317

1079

Load weight

163

A510

350 

 Stop position command selection

145

A511

360 

 16-bit data selection

145

A512

361 

 Position shift

145

A520

362 

 Orientation position loop gain

145

A521

363 

 Completion signal output delay time

145

A522

364 

 Encoder stop check time

145

A523

365 

 Orientation limit

145

A524

366 

 Recheck time

145

A525

393 

 Orientation selection

146

A526

351 

 Orientation speed

145

A527

352 

 Creep speed

145

A528

353 

 Creep switchover position

145

A529

354 

 Position loop switchover position

145

A530

355 

 DC injection brake start position

145

A531

356 

 Internal stop position command

145

A532

357 

 Orientation in-position zone

145

A533

358 

 Servo torque selection

145

A540

394 

 Number of machine side gear teeth

145

A541

395 

 Number of motor side gear teeth

145

A542

396 

 Orientation speed gain (P term)

146

A543

397 

 Orientation speed integral time

146

A544

398 

 Orientation speed gain (D term)

146

A545

399 

 Orientation deceleration ratio

146

A546

829 

 Number of machine end encoder pulses

145

A600

759

PID unit selection

133

A601

131

PID upper limit

133

A602

132

PID lower limit

133

A603

553

PID deviation limit

133

A604

554

PID signal operation selection

133

A605

1134

PID upper limit manipulated value

133

A606

1135

PID lower limit manipulated value

133

A607

1015

Integral stop selection at limited 
frequency

133

A610

128

PID action selection

133

A611

133

PID action set point

133

A612

127

PID control automatic switchover 
frequency

133

A613

129

PID proportional band

133

A614

130

PID integral time

133

A615

134

PID differential time

133

A616

760

Pre-charge fault selection

154

A617

761

Pre-charge ending level

154

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

A618

762

Pre-charge ending time

154

A619

763

Pre-charge upper detection level

154

A620

764

Pre-charge time limit

154

A621

575

Output interruption detection time

133

A622

576

Output interruption detection level

133

A623

577

Output interruption cancel level

133

A624

609

PID set point/deviation input selection

133

A625

610

PID measured value input selection

133

A630

C42

(934) 



PID display bias coefficient

133

A631

C43

(934) 



PID display bias analog value

133

A632

C44

(935) 



PID display gain coefficient

133

A633

C45

(935) 



PID display gain analog value

133

A640

1142

Second PID unit selection

133

A641

1143

Second PID upper limit

133

A642

1144

Second PID lower limit

133

A643

1145

Second PID deviation limit

133

A644

1146

Second PID signal operation selection

133

A650

753

Second PID action selection

133

A651

755

Second PID action set point

133

A652

754

Second PID control automatic 
switchover frequency

133

A653

756

Second PID proportional band

133

A654

757

Second PID integral time

133

A655

758

Second PID differential time

133

A656

765

Second pre-charge fault selection

154

A657

766

Second pre-charge ending level

154

A658

767

Second pre-charge ending time

154

A659

768

Second pre-charge upper detection 
level

154

A660

769

Second pre-charge time limit

154

A661

1147

Second output interruption detection 
time

133

A662

1148

Second output interruption detection 
level

133

A663

1149

Second output interruption cancel level

133

A664

1140

Second PID set point/deviation input 
selection

133

A665

1141

Second PID measured value input 
selection

133

A670

1136

Second PID display bias coefficient

133

A671

1137

Second PID display bias analog value

133

A672

1138

Second PID display gain coefficient

133

A673

1139

Second PID display gain analog value

133

A680

573

4 mA input check selection

151

A681

777

4 mA input check operation frequency

151

A682

778

4 mA input check filter

151

A700

162

Automatic restart after instantaneous 
power failure selection

119

A701

299

Rotation direction detection selection at 
restarting

119

A702

57

Restart coasting time

119

A703

58

Restart cushion time

119

A704

163

First cushion time for restart

119

A705

164

First cushion voltage for restart

119

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page


background image

100

Para

mete

r List

8

B: Position control parameters

Parameters for the position control setting. 

A710

165

Stall prevention operation level for 
restart

119

A711

298

Frequency search gain

127

A712

560

Second frequency search gain

127

A730

261

Power failure stop selection

139

A731

262

Subtracted frequency at deceleration 
start

139

A732

263

Subtraction starting frequency

139

A733

264

Power-failure deceleration time 1

139

A734

265

Power-failure deceleration time 2

139

A735

266

Power failure deceleration time 
switchover frequency

139

A785

294

UV avoidance voltage gain

139

A786

668

Power failure stop frequency gain

139

A800

414

PLC function operation selection

146

A801

415

Inverter operation lock mode setting

146

A802

416 

Pre-scale function selection

146

A803

417 

Pre-scale setting value

146

A804

498

PLC function flash memory clear

146

A810 

to 

A859

1150 

to 

1199

PLC function user parameters 1 to 50

146

A900

1020

Trace operation selection

163

A901

1021

Trace mode selection

163

A902

1022

Sampling cycle

163

A903

1023

Number of analog channels

163

A904

1024

Sampling auto start

163

A905

1025

Trigger mode selection

163

A906

1026

Number of sampling before trigger

163

A910

1027

Analog source selection (1ch)

163

A911

1028

Analog source selection (2ch)

163

A912

1029

Analog source selection (3ch)

163

A913

1030

Analog source selection (4ch)

163

A914

1031

Analog source selection (5ch)

163

A915

1032

Analog source selection (6ch)

163

A916

1033

Analog source selection (7ch)

163

A917

1034

Analog source selection (8ch)

163

A918

1035

Analog trigger channel

163

A919

1036

Analog trigger operation selection

163

A920

1037

Analog trigger level

163

A930

1038

Digital source selection (1ch)

163

A931

1039

Digital source selection (2ch)

163

A932

1040

Digital source selection (3ch)

163

A933

1041

Digital source selection (4ch)

163

A934

1042

Digital source selection (5ch)

163

A935

1043

Digital source selection (6ch)

163

A936

1044

Digital source selection (7ch)

163

A937

1045

Digital source selection (8ch)

163

A938

1046

Digital trigger channel

163

A939

1047

Digital trigger operation selection

163

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

B000

419

Position command source selection

147, 148

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

B001

420

Command pulse scaling factor 
numerator (electronic gear numerator)

149

B002

421

Command pulse multiplication 
denominator (electronic gear 
denominator) 

149

B003

422

Position control gain

149

B004

423

Position feed forward gain

149

B005

424 

Position command acceleration/
deceleration time constant

149

B006

425

Position feed forward command filter

149

B007

426

In-position width

149

B008

427

Excessive level error

149

B009

428

Command pulse selection

148

B010

429

Clear signal selection

148

B011

430

Pulse monitor selection

148

B012

446

Model position control gain

148

B013

1298

Second position control gain

149

B020

464

Digital position control sudden stop 
deceleration time

147

B021

465

First target position lower 4 digits

147

B022

466

First target position upper 4 digits

147

B023

467

Second target position lower 4 digits

147

B024

468

Second target position upper 4 digits

147

B025

469

Third target position lower 4 digits

147

B026

470

Third target position upper 4 digits

147

B027

471

Fourth target position lower 4 digits

147

B028

472

Fourth target position upper 4 digits

147

B029

473

Fifth target position lower 4 digits

147

B030

474

Fifth target position upper 4 digits

147

B031

475

Sixth target position lower 4 digits

147

B032

476

Sixth target position upper 4 digits

147

B033

477

Seventh target position lower 4 digits

147

B034

478

Seventh target position upper 4 digits

147

B035

479

Eighth target position lower 4 digits

147

B036

480

Eighth target position upper 4 digits

147

B037

481

Ninth target position lower 4 digits

147

B038

482

Ninth target position upper 4 digits

147

B039

483

Tenth target position lower 4 digits

147

B040

484

Tenth target position upper 4 digits

147

B041

485

Eleventh target position lower 4 digits

147

B042

486

Eleventh target position upper 4 digits

147

B043

487

Twelfth target position lower 4 digits

147

B044

488

Twelfth target position upper 4 digits

147

B045

489

Thirteenth target position lower 4 digits

147

B046

490

Thirteenth target position upper 4 digits

147

B047

491

Fourteenth target position lower 4 digits

147

B048

492

Fourteenth target position upper 4 
digits

147

B049

493

Fifteenth target position lower 4 digits

147

B050

494

Fifteenth target position upper 4 digits

147

B100

1220

Parameter for manufacturer setting.

B101

1221

Start command edge detection 
selection

147

B120

1222

First positioning acceleration time

147

B121

1223

First positioning deceleration time

147

B122

1224

First positioning dwell time

147

B123

1225

First positioning sub-function

147

B124

1226

Second positioning acceleration time

147

B125

1227

Second positioning deceleration time

147

B126

1228

Second positioning dwell time

147

B127

1229

Second positioning sub-function

147

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page


background image

101

8

Para

mete

r List

N: Operation via communication and its 
settings

Parameters for communication operation. These parameters set the 
communication specifications and operation.

B128

1230

Third positioning acceleration time

147

B129

1231

Third positioning deceleration time

147

B130

1232

Third positioning dwell time

147

B131

1233

Third positioning sub-function

147

B132

1234

Fourth positioning acceleration time

147

B133

1235

Fourth positioning deceleration time

147

B134

1236

Fourth positioning dwell time

147

B135

1237

Fourth positioning sub-function

147

B136

1238

Fifth positioning acceleration time

147

B137

1239

Fifth positioning deceleration time

147

B138

1240

Fifth positioning dwell time

147

B139

1241

Fifth positioning sub-function

147

B140

1242

Sixth positioning acceleration time

147

B141

1243

Sixth positioning deceleration time

147

B142

1244

Sixth positioning dwell time

147

B143

1245

Sixth positioning sub-function

147

B144

1246

Seventh positioning acceleration time

147

B145

1247

Seventh positioning deceleration time

147

B146

1248

Seventh positioning dwell time

147

B147

1249

Seventh positioning sub-function

147

B148

1250

Eighth positioning acceleration time

147

B149

1251

Eighth positioning deceleration time

147

B150

1252

Eighth positioning dwell time

147

B151

1253

Eighth positioning sub-function

147

B152

1254

Ninth positioning acceleration time

147

B153

1255

Ninth positioning deceleration time

147

B154

1256

Ninth positioning dwell time

147

B155

1257

Ninth positioning sub-function

147

B156

1258

Tenth positioning acceleration time

147

B157

1259

Tenth positioning deceleration time

147

B158

1260

Tenth positioning dwell time

147

B159

1261

Tenth positioning sub-function

147

B160

1262

Eleventh positioning acceleration time

147

B161

1263

Eleventh positioning deceleration time

147

B162

1264

Eleventh positioning dwell time

147

B163

1265

Eleventh positioning sub-function

147

B164

1266

Twelfth positioning acceleration time

147

B165

1267

Twelfth positioning deceleration time

147

B166

1268

Twelfth positioning dwell time

147

B167

1269

Twelfth positioning sub-function

147

B168

1270

Thirteenth positioning acceleration time

147

B169

1271

Thirteenth positioning deceleration time

147

B170

1272

Thirteenth positioning dwell time

147

B171

1273

Thirteenth positioning sub-function

147

B172

1274

Fourteenth positioning acceleration 
time

147

B173

1275

Fourteenth positioning deceleration 
time

147

B174

1276

Fourteenth positioning dwell time

147

B175

1277

Fourteenth positioning sub-function

147

B176

1278

Fifteenth positioning acceleration time

147

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

B177

1279

Fifteenth positioning deceleration time

147

B178

1280

Fifteenth positioning dwell time

147

B179

1281

Fifteenth positioning sub-function

147

B180

1282

Home position return method selection

147

B181

1283

Home position return speed

147

B182

1284

Home position return creep speed

147

B183

1285

Home position shift amount lower 4 
digits

147

B184

1286

Home position shift amount upper 4 
digits

147

B185

1287

Travel distance after proximity dog ON 
lower 4 digits

147

B186

1288

Travel distance after proximity dog  ON 
upper 4 digits

147

B187

1289

Home position return stopper torque

147

B188

1290

Home position return stopper waiting 
time

147

B190

1292

Position control terminal input 
selection

147

B191

1293

Roll feeding mode selection

147

B192

1294

Position detection lower 4 digits

149

B193

1295

Position detection upper 4 digits

149

B194

1296

Position detection selection

149

B195

1297

Position detection hysteresis width

149

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

N000

549 



Protocol selection

129

N001

342

Communication EEPROM write 
selection

129

N002

539 



MODBUS RTU communication check 
time interval

129

N010

349 

 Communication reset selection

129

N011

500 



Communication error execution waiting 
time

129

N012

501 



Communication error occurrence count 
display

129

N013

502

Stop mode selection at communication 
error

129

N014

779

Operation frequency during 
communication error

129

N020

117

PU communication station number

129

N021

118

PU communication speed

129

N022

119

PU communication data length

129

N023

119

PU communication stop bit length

129

N024

120

PU communication parity check

129

N025

121

PU communication retry count

129

N026

122

PU communication check time interval

129

N027

123

PU communication waiting time setting

129

N028

124

PU communication CR/LF selection

129

N030

331 



RS-485 communication station number

129

N031

332 



RS-485 communication speed

129

N032

333 



PU communication data length

129

N033

333 



PU communication stop bit length

129

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page


background image

102

Para

mete

r List

8

G: Control Parameter

Parameters for motor control.

N034

334 



RS-485 communication parity check 
selection

129

N035

335 



RS-485 communication retry count

129

N036

336 



RS-485 communication check time 
interval

129

N037

337 



RS-485 communication waiting time 
setting

129

N038

341 



RS-485 communication CR/LF selection

129

N040

547

USB communication station number

150

N041

548

USB communication check time interval

150

N080

343 



Communication error count

129

N100

541 

 Frequency command sign selection

129

N110

434 

 Network number (CC-Link IE)

129

N111

435 

 Station number (CC-Link IE)

129

N500 

to 

N543, 

N550 

to 

N559

1300 

to 

1343, 

1350 

to 

1359

Communication option parameters.
For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the 
option.

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

G000

0

Torque boost 

108

G001

3

Base frequency 

108

G002

19

Base frequency voltage

108

G003

14

Load pattern selection

111

G010

46

Second torque boost

108

G011

47

Second V/F (base frequency)

108

G020

112

Third torque boost

108

G021

113

Third V/F (base frequency)

108

G030

60

Energy saving control selection

120

G040

100

V/F1 (first frequency)

129

G041

101

V/F1 (first frequency voltage)

129

G042

102

V/F2 (second frequency)

129

G043

103

V/F2 (second frequency voltage)

129

G044

104

V/F3 (third frequency)

129

G045

105

V/F3 (third frequency voltage)

129

G046

106

V/F4 (fourth frequency)

129

G047

107

V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage)

129

G048

108

V/F5 (fifth frequency)

129

G049

109

V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage)

129

G060 673 



SF-PR slip amount adjustment 
operation selection

153

G061 674 

 SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain

153

G080

617

Reverse rotation excitation current low-
speed scaling factor

128

G100

10

DC injection brake operation frequency

110

G101

11

DC injection brake operation time

110

G102

802

Pre-excitation selection

110

G103

850

Brake operation selection

110

G105

522

Output stop frequency

150

G106

250

Stop selection

138

G107

70 



Special regenerative brake duty

114

G108

1299

Second pre-excitation selection

110

G110

12

DC injection brake operation voltage

110

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

Simple

G120

882

Regeneration avoidance operation 
selection

159

G121

883

Regeneration avoidance operation level

159

G122

884

Regeneration avoidance at deceleration 
detection sensitivity 

159

G123

885

Regeneration avoidance compensation 
frequency limit value

159

G124

886

Regeneration avoidance voltage gain

159

G125

665

Regeneration avoidance frequency gain

159

G130

660

Increased magnetic excitation 
deceleration operation selection

153

G131

661

Magnetic excitation increase rate

153

G132

662

Increased magnetic excitation current 
level

153

G200

800

Control method selection

126

G201

85

Excitation current break point

128

G202

86

Excitation current low speed scaling 
factor

128

G203

245

Rated slip

138

G204

246

Slip compensation time constant

138

G205

247

Constant-power range slip 
compensation selection

138

G206

1116

Constant output range speed control P 
gain compensation

156

G210

803

Constant output range torque 
characteristic selection

113, 155

G211

820

Speed control P gain 1

156

G212

821

Speed control integral time 1

156

G213

824

Torque control P gain 1 (current loop 
proportional gain)

156

G214

825

Torque control integral time 1 (current 
loop integral time)

156

G215 823 

 Speed detection filter 1

156

G216

827

Torque detection filter 1

156

G217

854

Excitation ratio

158

G218

1115

Speed control integral term clear time

156

G220

877

Speed feed forward control/model 
adaptive speed control selection

157

G221

878

Speed feed forward filter

157

G222

879

Speed feed forward torque limit 

157

G223

881

Speed feed forward gain

157

G224

828

Model speed control gain

157

G230

840

Torque bias selection

157

G231

841

Torque bias 1

157

G232

842

Torque bias 2

157

G233

843

Torque bias 3

157

G234

844

Torque bias filter

157

G235

845

Torque bias operation time

157

G236

846

Torque bias balance compensation

157

G237

847

Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias

157

G238

848

Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 gain

157

G240 367 

 Speed feedback range

146

G241 368 

 Feedback gain

146

G250 788 



Low speed range torque characteristic 
selection

154

G260

1121

Per-unit speed control reference 
frequency

156, 157

G261

1117

Speed control P gain 1 (per-unit 
system)

156

G262

1119

Model speed control gain (per-unit 
system)

157

G300

451

Second motor control method selection

126

G301

565

Second motor excitation current break 
point

128

G302

566

Second motor excitation current low-
speed scaling factor

128

G311

830

Speed control P gain 2

156

G312

831

Speed control integral time 2

156

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page


background image

103

8

Para

mete

r List



The setting is available only when a plug-in option that supports the vector 
control is installed. Refer to the Instruction Manual of each option for details.



The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the LCD 
operation panel and the parameter unit.



Setting can be made only for the standard model.



Setting can be made only for the standard model and the IP55 compatible 
model.



The setting is available only with the 400 V class.



The setting is available only for the FR-A800-GF or when a compatible plug-in 
option is installed.



The setting is not available for the FR-A800-E.



Parameter for manufacturer setting for the FR-A842-P. Do not set.



The setting is not available for the FR-A842-P.

G313

834

Torque control P gain 2

156

G314

835

Torque control integral time 2

156

G315 833 

 Speed detection filter 2

156

G316

837

Torque detection filter 2

156

G350 747 



Second motor low-speed range torque 
characteristic selection

154

G361

1118

Speed control P gain 2 (per-unit 
system)

156

G400

286

Droop gain

143

G401

287

Droop filter time constant

143

G402

288

Droop function activation selection

143

G403

994

Droop break point gain

143

G404

995

Droop break point torque

143

G410

653

Speed smoothing control

152

G411

654

Speed smoothing cutoff frequency

152

G420

679

Second droop gain

143

G421

680

Second droop filter time constant

143

G422

681

Second droop function activation 
selection

143

G423

682

Second droop break point gain

143

G424

683

Second droop break point torque

143

G601

1003

Notch filter frequency

162

G602

1004

Notch filter depth

162

G603

1005

Notch filter width

162

G932

89

Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic 
flux vector)

126

G942

569

Second motor speed control gain

126

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page


background image

104

Para

mete

r List

8

List of parameters for the FR-A800-E 
Ethernet communication (by function 
group)

D: Operation command and frequency 
command

Parameters that specify the inverter's command source, and 
parameters that set the motor driving frequency and torque.

M: Monitor display and monitor output signal

Parameters regarding the inverter's operating status. These 
parameters are used to set the monitors and output signals.

N: Operation via communication and its 
settings

Parameters for communication operation. These parameters set the 
communication specifications and operation.

List of parameters for the FR-A842-P 
parallel operation (by function group)

E: Environment setting parameters

Parameters that set the inverter operation characteristics.

M: Monitor display and monitor output signal

Parameters regarding the inverter's operating status. These 
parameters are used to set the monitors and output signals.

N: Operation via communication and its 
settings

Parameters for communication operation. These parameters set the 
communication specifications and operation.

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

D012

550

NET mode operation command source 
selection

145

D013

551

PU mode operation command source 
selection

145

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

M400

190

RUN terminal function selection

137

M401

191

SU terminal function selection

137

M402

192

IPF terminal function selection

137

M403

193

OL terminal function selection

137

M404

194

FU terminal function selection

137

M405

195

ABC1 terminal function selection

137

M406

196

ABC2 terminal function selection

137

M410

313

DO0 output selection

137

M411

314

DO1 output selection

137

M412

315

DO2 output selection

137

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

N600

1434

Ethernet IP address 1

129

N601

1435

Ethernet IP address 2

129

N602

1436

Ethernet IP address 3

129

N603

1437

Ethernet IP address 4

129

N610

1438

Subnet mask 1

129

N611

1439

Subnet mask 2

129

N612

1440

Subnet mask 3

129

N613

1441

Subnet mask 4

129

N630

1427

Ethernet function selection 1

129

N631

1428

Ethernet function selection 2

129

N632

1429

Ethernet function selection 3

129

N641

1426

Link speed and duplex mode selection

129

N642

1455

Keepalive time

129

N643

1431

Ethernet signal loss detection function 
selection

129

N644

1432

Ethernet communication check time 
interval

129

N650

1424

Ethernet communication network 
number

129

N651

1425

Ethernet communication station 
number

129

N660

1442

Ethernet IP filter address 1

129

N661

1443

Ethernet IP filter address 2

129

N662

1444

Ethernet IP filter address 3

129

N663

1445

Ethernet IP filter address 4

129

N664

1446

Ethernet IP filter address 2 range 
specification

129

N665

1447

Ethernet IP filter address 3 range 
specification

129

N666

1448

Ethernet IP filter address 4 range 
specification

129

N670

1449

Ethernet command source selection IP 
address 1

129

N671

1450

Ethernet command source selection IP 
address 2

129

N672

1451

Ethernet command source selection IP 
address 3

129

N673

1452

Ethernet command source selection IP 
address 4

129

N674

1453

Ethernet command source selection IP 
address 3 range specification

129

N675

1454

Ethernet command source selection IP 
address 4 range specification

129

N681

1124

Station number in inverter-to-inverter 
link

164

N682

1125

Number of inverters in inverter-to-
inverter link system

164

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

E390

1001

Parallel operation selection

162

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

M400

190

RUN terminal function selection

137

M401

191

SU terminal function selection

137

M402

192

IPF terminal function selection

137

M403

193

OL terminal function selection

137

M404

194

FU terminal function selection

137

M405

195

ABC1 terminal function selection

137

M406

196

ABC2 terminal function selection

137

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page

N092

652

Parallel operation communication 
check time

152

Pr.

group

Pr.

Name

Refer

to page


background image

105

8

Para

mete

r List

Converter unit parameter list (by parameter number)

Set the necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be performed from 
the operation panel (FR-DU08).

Function

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial 
value

Customer

setting

─

30

E300

Reset selection during power supply to main 
circuit

0, 100

1

0

Auto

mati

c

re

s

ta

rt

57

A702

Restart selection

0, 9999

1

9999

─

65 



H300

Retry selection

0 to 4

1

0

Re

try

67 



H301

Number of retries at fault occurrence

0 to 10, 101 to 110

1

0

68 



H302

Retry waiting time

0.1 to 600 s

0.1 s

1 s

69 



H303

Retry count display erase

0

1

0

─

75

─

Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/
reset limit

14 to 17, 114 to 117

1

14

E100

Reset selection

0, 1

0

E101

Disconnected PU detection

E107

Reset limit

─

77

E400

Parameter write selection

1, 2

1

2

PU c

onne

ctor

co

m

m

u

n

ica

ti

on

117

N020

PU communication station number

0 to 31

1

0

118

N021

PU communication speed

48, 96, 192, 384, 576, 768, 1152

1

192

119

─

PU communication stop bit length / data 
length

0, 10

1

1

N022

PU communication data length

0, 1

0

N023

PU communication stop bit length

0, 1

1

120

N024

PU communication parity check

0 to 2

1

2

121

N025

Number of PU communication retries

0 to 10, 9999

1

1

122

N026

PU communication check time interval

0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

123

N027

PU communication waiting time setting

0 to 150 ms, 9999

1 ms

9999

124

N028

PU communication CR/LF selection

0 to 2

1

1

─

161

E200

Key lock operation selection

0, 10

1

0

─

168

E000

Parameter for manufacturer setting.

E080

─

169

E001
E081

Cum

u

la

tiv

e

m

onit

o

r

cl

e

ar

170

M020

Watt-hour meter clear

0, 10, 9999

1

9999

Inpu

t term

inal

 

func

tion

 

assi

gnme

n

t

178

T700

RDI terminal function selection

7, 62, 9999

1

9999

187

T709

OH terminal function selection

1

7

189

T711

RES terminal function selection

1

62

O

u

tput termi

n

al 

fu

nctio

n

 as

sig

n

me

nt

190

M400

RDB terminal function selection

2, 8, 11, 17, 25, 26, 64, 68, 90, 94, 
95, 98, 99, 102, 108, 111, 125, 
126, 164, 168, 190, 194, 195, 
198, 199, 206, 207, 209, 210, 
214, 227



, 306, 307, 309, 310, 

327



, 9999

1

111

191

M401

RDA terminal function selection

1

11

192

M402

IPF terminal function selection

1

2

193

M403

RSO terminal function selection

1

209

194

M404

FAN terminal function selection

1

25

195

M405

ABC1 terminal function selection

1

99

─

248

A006

Self power management selection

0 to 2

1

0

Li

fe

ch

eck

255

E700

Life alarm status display

(0 to 15)

1

0

256

E701

Inrush current limit circuit life display

(0 to 100%)

1%

100%

257

E702

Control circuit capacitor life display

(0 to 100%)

1%

100%


background image

106

Para

mete

r List

8

─

261

A730

Power failure stop selection

0, 1, 2, 21, 22

1

0

─

268

M022

Monitor decimal digits selection

0, 1, 9999

1

9999

─

269

E023

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

─

290

M044

Monitor negative output selection

0, 2, 4, 6

1

0

Pas

s

word

func

tion

296

E410

Password lock level

0 to 3, 5, 6, 100 to 103, 105, 106, 
9999

1

9999

297

E411

Password lock/unlock

(0 to 5), 1000 to 9998, 9999

1

9999

R

S

-4

85

 co

m

m

u

n

ica

ti

on

331 



N030

RS-485 communication station number

0, 31 (0, 247)

1

0

332 



N031

RS-485 communication speed

3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 192, 384, 576, 
768, 1152

1

96

333 



─

RS-485 communication stop bit length / data 
length

0, 1, 10, 11

1

1

N032

RS-485 communication data length

0, 1

1

0

N033

RS-485 communication stop bit length

0, 1

1

1

334 



N034

RS-485 communication parity check 
selection

0 to 2

1

2

335 



N035

RS-485 communication retry count

0 to 10, 9999

1

1

336 



N036

RS-485 communication check time interval

0 to 999.8 s, 9999

0.1 s

0 s

337 



N037

RS-485 communication waiting time setting

0 to 150 ms, 9999

1 ms

9999

341 



N038

RS-485 communication CR/LF selection

0 to 2

1

1

342

N001

Communication EEPROM write selection

0, 1

1

0

343 



N080

Communication error count

─

1

0

Ma

int

e

n

a

nc

e

503

E710

Maintenance timer 1

0 (1 to 9998)

1

0

504

E711

Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time

0 to 9998, 9999

1

9999

─

539 



N002

MODBUS RTU communication check time 
interval

0 to 999.8 s, 9999

0.1 s

9999

C

o

mm

unic

a

tion

549 



N000

Protocol selection

0, 1

1

0

─

563

M021

Energization time carrying-over times

(0 to 65535)

1

0

─

598

H102

Undervoltage level

350 to 430 V, 9999

0.1 V

9999

─

652 



N092

Parallel operation communication check 
time

0, 0.1 to 120 s, 9999

0.1 s

1 s

─

663

M060

Control circuit temperature signal output 
level

0 to 100°C

1°C

0°C

Ma

int

enan

c

e

686

E712

Maintenance timer 2

0 (1 to 9998)

1

0

687

E713

Maintenance timer 2 warning output set time

0 to 9998, 9999

1

9999

688

E714

Maintenance timer 3

0 (1 to 9998)

1

0

689

E715

Maintenance timer 3 warning output set time

0 to 9998, 9999

1

9999

M

onito

r

funct

ion

774

M101

Operation panel monitor selection 1

2, 8, 13, 20, 25, 43, 44, 55, 62, 98, 
9999

1

9999

775

M102

Operation panel monitor selection 2

1

9999

776

M103

Operation panel monitor selection 3

1

9999

Prote

c

tive

Fun

ction

s

872

H201

Input phase loss protection selection

0, 1

1

0

─

876

T723

OH input selection

0 to 2

1

0

Function

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial 
value

Customer

setting


background image

107

8

Para

mete

r List



Parameter for manufacturer setting for the FR-CC2-P. Do not set.



The parameter is available for the FR-CC2-P only.

Fr

ee

p

ara

m

ete

rs

888

E420

Free parameter 1

0 to 9999

1

9999

889

E421

Free parameter 2

0 to 9999

1

9999

Energy

 

sa

vi

ng 

m

onito

r

891

M023

Cumulative power monitor digit shifted 
times

0, 4, 9999

1

9999

PU

990

E104

PU buzzer control

0, 1

1

1

M

oni

tor

func

tion

992

M104

Operation panel setting dial push monitor 
selection

2, 8, 13, 20, 25, 43, 44, 55, 62, 98

1

8

─

997

H103

Fault initiation

0 to 255, 9999

1

9999

Para

llel

op

e

ra

ti

o

n

1001



E390

Parallel operation selection

1, 2, 100, 200, 300

1

100

Clo

c

k

fun

c

tion

1006

E020

Clock (year)

2000 to 2099

1

2000

1007

E021

Clock (month, day)

1/1 to 12/31

1

101

1008

E022

Clock (hour, minute)

0:00 to 23:59

1

0

─

1048

E106

Display-off waiting time

0 to 60 min

1 min

0

Cl

e

a

r

p

a

ra

m

e

te

rs

Pr.CLR

Parameter clear

(0), 1

1

0

ALL.CL

All parameter clear

(0), 1

1

0

Err.CL

Fault history clear

(0), 1

1

0

─

Pr.CPY

Parameter copy

(0), 1 to 3

1

0

─

Pr.CHG

Initial value change list

─

1

0

─

Pr.MD

Group parameter setting

(0), 1, 2

1

0

Function

Pr.

Pr.

group

Name

Setting range

Minimum

setting

increments

Initial 
value

Customer

setting


background image

108 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

The following marks are used to show the applicable control method:

 for V/F control, 

 for Advanced magnetic flux 

vector control, 

 for Real sensorless vector control, 

 for vector control, and 

 for PM sensorless vector control. 

(Parameters without any mark are valid for all controls.)

……denotes parameter numbers, and 

……denotes group parameter numbers.

Connection diagrams appear with the control logic of the input terminals as sink logic, unless otherwise specified.

Voltage drop in the low-frequency range can be compensated, 
improving reduction of the motor torque in the low-speed range.
 • Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted 

according to the load, in order to increase the motor torque at 
start.

 • The RT and X9 signals enable the switching between 3 types of 

torque boost.

 • Available during V/F control.

Motor speed can be limited.
 • Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency.
 • To operate at a frequency higher than 120 Hz, adjust the 

maximum output frequency with Pr.18.
(If a frequency is set in Pr.18, the Pr.1 setting automatically 
changes to the frequency set in Pr.18. Also, if a frequency is set 
in Pr.1, the Pr.18 setting automatically changes to the frequency 
set in Pr.1.)

 • During position control under vector control, the maximum 

frequency is valid for the speed command calculated considering 
the droop pulses. The lower frequency limit is disabled.

Use this function to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) 
to match with the motor rating.
 • When operating a standard motor, generally set the rated 

frequency of the motor in Pr.3 Base frequency. When running 
the motor using commercial power supply-inverter switch-over 
operation, set Pr.3 to the same value as the power supply 
frequency.

 • When you want to change the base frequency when switching 

multiple motors with one inverter, etc., use the  Pr.47 Second V/F 
(base frequency) and Pr.113 Third V/F (base frequency).

 • Set the rated voltage (rated motor voltage, etc.) to the Pr.19 Base 

frequency voltage.

 • Available during V/F control.

Pr.

GROUP

Manual torque boost

Name

Name

0

G000 Torque boost

46

G010 Second torque boost

112

G020 Third torque boost

Limiting the output frequency 
(maximum/minimum frequency)

Name

Name

1

H400 Maximum frequency

2

H401 Minimum frequency

18

H402

High speed 
maximum frequency

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Output 
voltage

Pr.0
Pr.46

Setting 
range

Base 
frequency

0

100%

Output 
frequency
(Hz)

Pr.112

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Output frequency
(Hz)

Pr.1
Pr.18

Pr.2

Frequency setting

Clamped at the 
maximum frequency

Clamped at the
minimum frequency

5, 10V

(20mA)

0

(4mA)

Base frequency, voltage

Name

Name

3

G001 Base frequency

19

G002

Base frequency 
voltage

47

G011

Second V/F (base 
frequency)

113

G021

Third V/F (base 
frequency)

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.19

Output frequency
(Hz)

Pr.3
Pr.47

Output voltage (V)

Pr.113

Explanations of Parameters


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

109

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

Use these parameters to change among pre-set operation speeds 
with contact signals. The speeds are pre-set with parameters.
Any speed can be selected by simply turning ON/OFF the contact 
signals (RH, RM, RL, and REX signals).
 • The inverter operates at the frequency set in Pr.4 when RH signal 

is ON, Pr.5 when RM signal is ON and Pr.6 when RL signal is 
ON.

 • The frequency from 4th speed to 15th speed can be set in 

accordance with the combination of the RH, RM, RL, and REX 
signals. Set the running frequencies in Pr.24 to Pr.27 and Pr.232 
to Pr.239. (In the initial status, 4th speed to 15th speed are 
invalid.)



Operates at the frequency set in Pr.6 when RH, RM, or RL is OFF 
and REX is ON while Pr.232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8) = 
"9999".

 • Speed (frequency) can be compensated for the multi-speed 

setting and the remote setting by inputting the frequency setting 
compensation signal (terminals 1, 2).

The following parameters are used to set motor acceleration/
deceleration time.
Set a larger value for a slower acceleration/deceleration, and a 
smaller value for a faster acceleration/deceleration.
 • Use Pr.7 Acceleration time to set the acceleration time required 

to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency 
from a stop status.

 • Use Pr.8 Deceleration time to set the deceleration time required 

to reach a stop status from Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration 
reference frequency.

 • Pr.44 and Pr.45 are valid when the RT signal is ON or when the 

output frequency is equal to or higher than the frequency set in 
Pr.147 Acceleration/deceleration time switching 
frequency.Pr.110 and Pr.111 are valid when the X9 signal is ON.

 • If torque is required in the low-speed range (less than 10% of the 

rated motor frequency) under PM sensorless vector control, set 
the Pr.791 Acceleration time in low-speed range and Pr.792 
Deceleration time in low-speed range settings higher than the 
Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time settings so 
that the mild acceleration/deceleration is performed in the low-
speed range. Enabled especially under the current 
synchronization operation.
(This function is not available for the FR-A842-P.)

Multi-speed setting operation

Name

Name

4

D301

Multi-speed setting 
(high speed)

5

D302

Multi-speed setting 
(middle speed)

6

D303

Multi-speed setting 
(low speed)

24

D304

Multi-speed setting 
(speed 4)

25

D305

Multi-speed setting 
(speed 5)

26

D306

Multi-speed setting 
(speed 6)

27

D307

Multi-speed setting 
(speed 7)

28

D300

Multi-speed input 
compensation 
selection

232

D308

Multi-speed setting 
(speed 8)

233

D309

Multi-speed setting 
(speed 9)

234

D310

Multi-speed setting 
(speed 10)

235

D311

Multi-speed setting 
(speed 11)

236

D312

Multi-speed setting 
(speed 12)

237

D313

Multi-speed setting 
(speed 13)

238

D314

Multi-speed setting 
(speed 14)

239

D315

Multi-speed setting 
(speed 15)

Pr.28 setting

Description

0 (initial value)

Without compensation

1

With compensation

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Time

ON

ON

ON ON ON ON ON ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON ON

ON ON

ON ON ON ON

RH

RM

RL

REX

∗1

ON ON ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Speed 1

(High speed)

Speed 2
(Middle speed)

Speed 3
(Low speed)

Speed 4

Speed 5

Speed 6

Speed 7

Speed 8

Speed 9

Speed 10

Speed 11

Speed 12

Speed 13

Speed 14

Speed 15

ON

ON

ON

Output frequency (Hz)

Acceleration/deceleration time

Name

Name

7

F010 Acceleration time

8

F011 Deceleration time

20

F000

Acceleration/
deceleration 
reference frequency

21

F001

Acceleration/
deceleration time 
increments

44

F020

Second acceleration/
deceleration time

45

F021

Second deceleration 
time

110

F030

Third acceleration/
deceleration time

111

F031

Third deceleration 
time

147

F022

Acceleration/
deceleration time 
switching frequency

791

F070

Acceleration time in 
low-speed range

792

F071

Deceleration time in 
low-speed range

Pr.21 setting

Description

0

 (initial value) Increment: 0.1 s

Set the increment for the 
acceleration/deceleration time 
setting.

1

Increment: 0.01 s

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Running 
frequency

Acceleration 
time

Deceleration 
time

Time

Pr.20

Pr.7

Pr.8

Output 

frequency 

(Hz)

Pr.110

Pr.111

Pr.44

Pr.45

(60Hz/50Hz)

Time

Output frequency

(Hz)

Set

frequency

Pr. 147 

setting

Pr.7

Pr.44

Pr.44

(Pr.45)

Pr.8

Pr.7 Pr.44

Pr.44

(Pr.45)

Pr.8

Pr.110

Pr.111

RT signal

X9 signal

ON

ON

Low-speed range
(rated motor frequency/10)

Acceleration time
Slope set by Pr.7

Deceleration time
Slope set by Pr.8

Deceleration time
in low-speed range
Slope set by Pr.792

Acceleration time
in low-speed range
Slope set by Pr. 791

Time

Output

frequency (Hz)


background image

110 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

Set the current for the electronic thermal O/L relay to protect the 
motor from overheating. Such a setting will provide the optimum 
protective characteristic considering the low cooling capability of the 
motor during low-speed operation.
 • This function detects the overload (overheat) of the motor and 

trips the inverter by stopping the operation of the transistor at the 
inverter output side.

 • Set the rated motor current (A) in Pr.9.

(If the motor has both 50 Hz and 60 Hz ratings and the Pr.3 Base 
frequency is set to 60 Hz, set to 1.1 times the 60 Hz rated motor 
current.

 • Set "0" in Pr.9 to avoid activating the electronic thermal relay 

function; for example, when using an external thermal relay for 
the motor. (Note that the output transistor protection of the 
inverter is enabled. (E.THT))

 • Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor

Set one of "1, 13 to 18, 50, 53, or 54" in Pr.71. (This setting will 
enable the 100% constant-torque characteristic in the low-speed 
range.)

 • When using an IPM motor (MM-CF), perform IPM parameter 

initialization to automatically set the rated current of the IPM 
motor.

 • The outputs from the PTC thermistor built into the motor can be 

input to terminals 2 and 10. When the input from the PTC 
thermistor reaches the resistance value set in Pr.561, PTC 
thermistor operation (E.PTC) will be activated to shut off the 
inverter outputs.

 • When the PTC thermistor protection level setting is used, use 

Pr.1016 to set the time from when the resistance of the PTC 
thermistor reaches the protection level until the protective 
function (E.PTC) is activated.

 • The activation level of the electronic thermal O/L relay Pr.600 to 

Pr.604 (Pr.692 to Pr.696) can be varied according to the thermal 
characteristic of the motor.

 • While the RT signal is ON, the setting values of Pr.51 and Pr.692 

to Pr.696 are referred to provide thermal protection. Use the 
electronic thermal O/L relay function to drive two motors of 
different current ratings by one inverter. (To rotate two motors at 
once, use an external thermal relay.)

 • To change the operational characteristic of the electronic thermal 

O/L relay, set the permissible load level in Pr.607 or Pr.608 
according to the motor characteristics.

 • Use Pr.876 to set valid/invalid status of terminal OH function 

when the FR-A8TP is installed.

When stopping a motor, DC injection brake is applied to adjust the 
braking torque and timing to stop the motor.
 • By setting the frequency to 

operate the DC injection 
brake (zero speed control 
and servo lock) to Pr.10 
DC injection brake 
operation frequency, the 
DC injection brake (zero 
speed control and servo 
lock) will operate when it 
reaches this frequency at 
the time of deceleration.

 • Set the time applying the DC injection brake (zero speed control 

and servo lock) to Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time.

 • Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage will set the percent 

against the power supply voltage. (Not used at the time of zero 
speed control or servo lock)

 • Under Real sensorless vector control, Pr.850 can be used to 

select DC injection brake (setting value "0", initial value), zero 
speed control (setting value "1"), or magnetic flux decay output 
shutoff (setting value "2").

 • When speed control is selected under vector control or PM 

sensorless vector control, pre-excitation braking operation by the 
LX signal can either be zero speed control or servo lock control. 
Pre-excitation is valid at LX signal ON.

 • For the vector control and PM sensorless vector control, set the 

frequency at where the zero speed control or servo lock control 
activates (Pr.10) and the operating period of the control (Pr.11). 
Use Pr.802 to select whether the zero speed control or servo lock 
control. During vector control, the initial value of Pr.10 is 
automatically set to 0.5 Hz.

 • Turning ON the RT signal enables the second pre-excitation 

selection.

Overheat protection of the motor 
(electronic thermal O/L relay)

Name

Name

9

H000

Electronic thermal O/L 
relay

51

H010

Second electronic 
thermal O/L relay

561

H020

PTC thermistor 
protection level

600

H001

First free thermal 
reduction frequency 1

601

H002

First free thermal 
reduction ratio 1

602

H003

First free thermal 
reduction frequency 2

603

H004

First free thermal 
reduction ratio 2

604

H005

First free thermal 
reduction frequency 3

607

H006

Motor permissible 
load level

608

H016

Second motor 
permissible load level

692

H011

Second free thermal 
reduction frequency 1

693

H012

Second free thermal 
reduction ratio 1

694

H013

Second free thermal 
reduction frequency 2

695

H014

Second free thermal 
reduction ratio 2

696

H015

Second free thermal 
reduction frequency 3

876

H022

Thermal protector 
input

1016 H021

PTC thermistor 
protection detection 
time

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

DC injection brake, zero speed control, 
and servo lock

Name

Name

10

G100

DC injection brake 
operation frequency

11

G101

DC injection brake 
operation time

12

G110

DC injection brake 
operation voltage

802

G102

Pre-excitation 
selection

850

G103

Brake operation 
selection

1299 G108

Second pre-
excitation selection

Pr.802

(Pr.1299)

Setting 

value

Braking 

operation

Description

0

(initial 

value)

Zero 
speed 
control

It will try to maintain 0 r/min so the motor shaft will 
not rotate even when a load is applied. However, it 
will not return to its original position when the shaft 
moves due to external force.

1

Servo 
lock

It will try to maintain the position of the motor shaft 
even if a load is applied. When the shaft moves due 
to external force, it will return to its original position 
after the external force is removed.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Time

Pr. 10 Operation 
frequency

Time

Pr.12 
Operation 
voltage

voltage

Pr. 11 Operation time

Output 

frequency 

(Hz)

DC injection 
brake


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

111

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

The starting frequency can be set and the starting frequency can be 
held for a certain period of time.
Set these functions when starting 
torque is needed or the motor 
drive at start needs smoothing.

Set the frequency where the PM motor starts running.
 • When setting a frequency with 

analog input, set the deadband 
in the low-speed range to 
eliminate noise and offset 
deviation.

 • When the low-speed range 

high-torque characteristic 
function is enabled (Pr.788 = 
"9999"), the frequency level of 
0.01 Hz is held for the time 
period of Pr.571 after turning ON the start signal.

Optimal output characteristics (V/F characteristics) for application or 
load characteristics can be selected. Available during V/F control.

 • Switching applied load selection with a terminal (setting value "4, 

5")
The RT and X17 signals enable the switching between the 
constant-torque load operation and lift operation.

The frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for JOG operation 
can be set. JOG operation is possible in both External operation and 
PU.
JOG operation can be used for conveyor positioning, test operation, 
etc.

Starting frequency and start-time hold 
function 

Name

Name

13

F102 Starting frequency

571

F103

Holding time at a 
start

Minimum frequency at motor start  and 
start-time hold function 

Name

Name

13

F102 Starting frequency

571

F103

Holding time at a 
start

V/F patterns for various applications 

Name

14

G003

Load pattern 
selection

 • Constant-torque load application

(setting "0", initial value)
The output voltage will change linearly 
against the output frequency at the base 
frequency or lower.
Set this parameter when driving a load 
that has constant load torque even when 
the rotation speed is changed, such as a 
conveyor, dolly, or roll drive.

 • Variable-torque load applications 

(setting value "1")
The output voltage will change in square 
curve against the output frequency at 
the base frequency or lower.
Set this parameter when driving a load 
with load torque change proportionally 
against the square of the rotation speed, 
such as a fan or pump.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Output
frequency
(Hz)

Time

Pr.13

Pr. 571 setting time

STF

ON

0

60

Setting range

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Output
frequency
(Hz)

Set frequency

Output

frequency

Output from 0.01Hz

Time

60

Pr.13

Setting range

STF

ON

0

Pr.

GROUP

100%

Output voltage

Pr. 3 Base frequency

Output frequency (Hz)

100%

Output voltage

Pr. 3 Base frequency

Output frequency (Hz)

 • Vertical lift load applications (setting value "2, 3")

Set "2" for a vertical lift load that is in  power driving at forward 
rotation and in regenerative driving at reverse rotation.
Pr.0 Torque boost is valid during forward rotation, and torque 
boost is automatically changed to "0%" during reverse rotation.
Set "3" for the counterweight system, etc. that is in power driving 
at reverse rotation and in regenerative driving at forward rotation, 
according to the load weight.

Pr.14

Setting 

value

RT(X17)

signal

output characteristic

4

ON

For constant-torque load 
(same as the setting value "0")

OFF

For lift, boost at reverse rotation 0% 
(same as the setting value "2")

5

ON

For constant-torque load 
(same as the setting value "0")

OFF

For lift, boost at reverse rotation 0% 
(same as the setting value "3")

JOG operation

Name

Name

15

D200 Jog frequency

16

F002

Jog acceleration/
deceleration time

Pr.14 = 2

Pr.14 = 3

100%

Forward 
rotation

Pr.0

Output

 voltage

 Base frequency

Output frequency (Hz)

For vertical lift loads
At forward rotation boost...Pr.0 setting
At reverse rotation boost...0%

Reverse 
rotation

100%

Reverse 
rotation

Pr.0

Output

 voltage

 Base frequency

Output frequency (Hz)

For vertical lift loads
At forward rotation boost...0%
At reverse rotation boost...Pr.0 setting

Forward 
rotation

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Output frequency(Hz)

Pr.20

Pr.15 

setting range

Pr.16

Forward
rotation

Reverse
rotation

Time

ON

ON

ON

JOG signal

Forward rotation STF

Reverse rotation STR


background image

112 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

The inverter output can be shut off with the MRS signal. The logic of 
the MRS signal can also be selected.
When Pr.17="4", the MRS signal from an external terminal is be set 
as the normally closed (NC contact) input, and the MRS signal 
(output stop) via communication as the normally open (NO contact) 
input.

This function monitors the output current and automatically changes 
the output frequency to prevent the inverter from tripping due to 
overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. It can also limit the stall prevention 
and fast-response current limit operation during acceleration/
deceleration and power/regenerative driving.
This function is disabled during Real sensorless vector control, 
vector control and PM sensorless vector control.
 • Stall prevention

If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, 
the output frequency of the inverter is automatically changed to 
reduce the output current. Also the second and third stall 
prevention functions can limit the output frequency range in which 
the stall prevention function is enabled.

 • Fast-response current limit

If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is 
shut off to prevent an overcurrent. (This function is not available  
for the FR-A842-P.)

  • For  Pr.22, set the ratio of the output current to the inverter rated 

current at which the stall prevention operation will be activated. 
Normally, this should be set at 150% (initial value).
For the FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower and FR-A840-
00126(3.7K) or lower, when the control method is changed from 
V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control to Real 
sensorless vector control, or vector control, the Pr.22 setting 
changes from 150% (initial value) to 200%.

 • To set the stall prevention operation level with the analog signal 

via terminal 1 (terminal 4), set Pr.868 (Pr.858)="4".  Use Pr.148 
and Pr.149 to adjust gain and bias for the analog signals.

 • When operating at the rated motor frequency or higher, 

acceleration may not be made because the motor current does 
not increase. Also, when operating in the high-frequency range, 
the current flowing to the locked motor becomes less than the 
rated output current of the inverter; and even if the motor is 
stopped, the protective function will not operate (OL).
In a case like this, the stall prevention level can be reduced in the 
high-frequency range to improve the motor's operating 
characteristics. This is useful when operating up to the high 
speed range, such as when using a centrifuge. Normally, set 
Pr.66 to 60 Hz, and Pr.23 to 100%.

 • When Pr.23="9999" (initial value), the stall prevention operation 

level is constant at the Pr.22 level up to 590 Hz.

 • By setting Pr.49="9999" and turning ON the RT signal, Pr.48 will be 

enabled.

 • To enable Pr.114, set Pr.115

 "0" and turn ON the X9 signal.

 • Use Pr.48 (Pr.114) to set the stall prevention operation level 

applicable in the range between 0 Hz and the frequency set in 
Pr.49 (Pr.115).

 • Use Pr.154 to further suppress the activation of the protective 

function (E.OC[], E.OV[]) during stall prevention operation.

 • Use Pr.156 to suppress the stall prevention operation and the 

fast-response current limit in accordance with the operating 
status.

 • When Real sensorless vector control, vector control or PM 

sensorless vector control is selected using Pr.800, Pr.22 serves 
as the torque limit level.

Inverter output shutoff signal

Name

17

T720 MRS input selection

18

Refer to the page on Pr.1

19

Refer to the page on Pr.3

20, 21

Refer to the page on Pr.7

Stall prevention operation 

Name

Name

22

H500

Stall prevention 
operation level

23

H610

Stall prevention 
operation level 
compensation factor 
at double speed

48

H600

Second stall 
prevention operation 
level

49

H601

Second stall 
prevention operation 
frequency

66

H611

Stall prevention 
operation reduction 
starting frequency

114

H602

Third stall prevention 
operation level

115

H603

Third stall prevention 
operation frequency

148

H620

Stall prevention level 
at 0 V input

149

H621

Stall prevention level 
at 10 V input

154

H631

Voltage reduction 
selection during stall 
prevention operation

156

H501

Stall prevention 
operation selection

157

M430

OL signal output 
timer

858

T040

Terminal 4 function 
assignment

868

T010

Terminal 1 function 
assignment

Pr.

GROUP

ON

ON

MRS signal
STF (STR) 

signal

Motor coasts 

to stop

Time

(Initial 
value)

MRS

SD (PC)

Inverter

MRS

SD (PC)

Inverter

Setting value "0"

Setting value "2"

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.49 

setting

Pr.115 

setting

Operation

0 (initial value)

The second (third) stall prevention function 
disabled.

0.01 Hz to 590 Hz

The second (third) stall prevention function 
operates according to the frequency.

9999

Setting not 

available

The second stall prevention function operates 
according to the RT signal.
RT signal ON: stall level Pr.48
RT signal OFF: stall level Pr.22

Output frequency (Hz)

Pr.22

Always at the Pr.22 level 
when Pr.23 = "9999"

Pr.66

400Hz

Stall prevention operation 

level (%)

Stall prevention operation level
as set in Pr.23

During acceleration

Running frequency

Pr.48

Pr.49

During deceleration/constant speed

During deceleration/constant speed

During deceleration/constant speed

Output
frequency (Hz)

Output
frequency

Time

Pr.22

 used

Set frequency

Pr.22

 used

Output
frequency (Hz)

Output
frequency

Stall
prevention
level

Set frequency

Time

Stall
prevention
level

Pr.114

Pr.115

Pr.48(Pr.114)

 used

Pr.48(Pr.114)

 used

Set frequency exceeds Pr.49(Pr.115)

Set frequency is Pr.49(Pr.115)

 or less

Pr.49(Pr.115)

Pr.49(Pr.115)

Stall prevention

operation current


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

113

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

During speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector 
control and PM sensorless vector control, the output torque is limited 
to prevent it from exceeding a specified value.
 • The torque limit level can be set in a range of 0 to 400% using Pr.22.

When the TL signal is ON, the torque limit level 2 (Pr.815) is 
enabled.

 • The torque limit level can be selected by setting it with a 

parameter, or by using analog input terminals (terminals 1, 4). 
Also, the torque limit level at forward rotation (power driving/
regenerative driving) and reverse rotation (power driving/
regenerative driving) can be set individually.

 • When inputting an analog signal from terminal 1 (4) to set the 

torque limit level, set Pr.810="1" or Pr.868 (Pr.858)="4".

 • The torque limit value can be input via CC-Link (using the FR-

A8NC) or CC-Link IE Field network (using the FR-A8NCE or FR-
A800-GF) communication.

 • Use Pr.816 and Pr.817 to set the torque limit value during 

acceleration/deceleration.

 • To avoid overload or overcurrent of the inverter or motor, use 

Pr.801 Output limit level to limit the torque current.

 • For the torque limit operation during Real sensorless vector control 

and vector control, use Pr.803 to change the torque characteristic in 
the low-speed range and in the constant output range.



This function is only available under Real sensorless vector 
control. The upper limit of the torque at 0 Hz is determined by 
multiplying the torque limit in the constant-torque range by the 
scaling factor set in Pr.86.

 • The inverter can be set to trip at activation of torque limit 

operation and stalling of the motor. Use Pr.874 to set the output 
torque where the protective function activates.

 • Use Pr.811 to change the parameter setting increment for the 

torque limit setting from 0.1% to 0.01%.

 • If Pr.800 is used to select V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux 

vector control, the Pr.22 setting operates as the stall prevention 
operation level.

The acceleration/deceleration pattern can be set according to the 
application.
In addition, the backlash measures, which stop acceleration/
deceleration at certain frequency or time set in parameters during 
acceleration/deceleration, can be set.

Setting the torque limit level under 
speed control 

Name

Name

22

H500

Stall prevention 
operation level 
(Torque limit level)

157

M430

OL signal output 
timer

801

H704 Output limit level

803

G210

Constant output range 
torque characteristic 
selection

804

D400

Torque command 
source selection

805

D401

Torque command 
value (RAM)

806

D402

Torque command 
value (RAM, 
EEPROM)

810

H700

Torque limit input 
method selection

811

D030

Set resolution 
switchover

812

H701

Torque limit level 
(regeneration)

813

H702

Torque limit level 
(3rd quadrant)

814

H703

Torque limit level (4th 
quadrant)

815

H710 Torque limit level 2

816

H720

Torque limit level 
during acceleration

817

H721

Torque limit level 
during deceleration

858

T040

Terminal 4 function 
assignment

868

T010

Terminal 1 function 
assignment

874

H730 OLT level setting

Pr.

Setting range

Description

810

0
 (initial value)

Torque limit by parameter setting

1

Torque limit using the analog signals input to 
terminals 1 and 4.

2

Torque limit by communication options

812

0  to 400%

Set the torque limit level for forward rotation 
regenerative driving.

9999
 (initial value)

Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values.

813

0  to 400%

Set the torque limit level for reverse rotation 
power driving.

9999
 (initial value)

Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values.

814

0  to 400%

Set the torque limit level for reverse rotation 
regenerative driving.

9999
 (initial value)

Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values.

Pr.801 setting

Description

0 to 400%

Set the torque current limit level.

9999

Torque current limit using torque limit setting value (Pr.22, 
Pr.812 to Pr.817, etc.)

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.803 

setting

Torque 

characteristic in 

low-speed range

Torque characteristic in constant-

outpu range

Torque 

characteristic

Output limit

0

(initial 

value)

Torque changes 
according to the 
scaling factor set in 
Pr.86. 



Constant motor 
output

―

1

Constant torque

Constant torque

Without 

2

Constant torque

Constant torque

With

10

Constant torque

Constant motor 
output

―

11

Torque changes 
according to the 
scaling factor set in 
Pr.86. 



Constant torque

Without

24 to 28

Refer to the page on Pr.4

Acceleration/deceleration pattern and 
backlash measures 

Name

Name

29

F100

Acceleration/
deceleration pattern 
selection

140

F200

Backlash 
acceleration 
stopping frequency

141

F201

Backlash 
acceleration 
stopping time

142

F202

Backlash 
deceleration 
stopping frequency

143

F203

Backlash 
deceleration 
stopping time

380

F300

Acceleration S-
pattern 1

381

F301

Deceleration S-
pattern 1

382

F302

Acceleration S-
pattern 2

383

F303

Deceleration S-
pattern 2

516

F400

S-pattern time at a 
start of acceleration

517

F401

S-pattern time at a 
completion of 
acceleration

518

F402

S-pattern time at a 
start of deceleration

519

F403

S-pattern time at a 
completion of 
deceleration

 • Linear acceleration/deceleration (setting 

value "0", initial value)
When the frequency is changed for 
acceleration, deceleration, etc. during 
inverter operation, the output frequency is 
changed linearly (linear acceleration/
deceleration) to reach the set frequency 
without straining the motor and inverter.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

[Linear acceleration
/ deceleration]

Output frequency 

(Hz)

Time

Setting value "0"


background image

114 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

 • By using the optional high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) or the 

brake unit (FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU), the regenerative brake duty can 
be increased for the operation with frequent starts and stops.

 • The power regeneration common converter (FR-CV 55K or lower) 

or power regeneration converter (MT-RC 75K or higher) is used for 
the continuous operation in the regenerative status.
To further suppress harmonics or improve the power factor, use a 
high power factor converter  (FR-HC2).

 • For standard models and IP55 compatible models, it is possible to 

choose between the DC feeding mode 1, which will operate with 
DC power supply (terminals P and N), and DC feeding mode 2, 
which will normally operate in AC power supply (terminals R, S, 
and T) and operate in DC power supply (terminal P and N), such as 
batteries, at the time of power failure.

 • Standard model

For FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or 
lower

FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher

 • Separated converter type

 • S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A (setting 

value "1")
For the main shaft of a machine, etc.
Use this when quick acceleration/
deceleration is required to reach a high-
speed area equal to or higher than the base 
frequency.

 • S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B (setting 

value "2")
This is useful for preventing stacks from 
collapsing on a conveyor, etc.
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B can 
reduce the impact during acceleration/
deceleration by accelerating/decelerating in 
an S-pattern from the present frequency (f2) 
to the target frequency (f1).

 • Backlash measures (setting value "3", Pr.140 to Pr.143)

To avoid backlash, acceleration/deceleration is temporarily 
stopped. Set the acceleration/deceleration stopping frequency and 
time in Pr.140 to Pr.143.

 • S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C (setting value "4", Pr.380 to 

Pr.383)
The acceleration/deceleration curve is switched by the S-pattern 
acceleration/deceleration C switchover (X20) signal.
Set the ratio (%) of time for drawing an S-shape in Pr.380 to Pr.383 
with the acceleration time as 100%.

 • S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D (setting value "5", Pr.516 to 

Pr.519)
Set the time required for S-pattern operation part of S-pattern 
acceleration/deceleration with Pr.516 to Pr.519.

 • Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29="6")

This function is useful for variable-torque load such as a fan or 
blower to accelerate/decelerate in short time.
In areas where output frequency > base frequency, the speed 
accelerates/decelerates linearly.

fb

Output frequency 

(Hz)

Time

[S-pattern acceleration
/deceleration A]

f1

[S-pattern acceleration
/deceleration B]

f2

Time

Set frequency 

(Hz)

Output frequency 

(Hz)

Pr. 142

Pr. 143

Pr. 141

Pr. 140

Pr. 13

Output frequency (Hz)

[Anti-backlash measure 
function]

Time

Pr.382

Pr.383

Time

Pr.381

S-pattern
acceleration/
deceleration
C switchover
(X20)

OFF

OFF

ON

Output frequency

Output frequency

Output frequency

Set frequency

Set frequency

Set frequency

Pr.380

Frequency

Pr.516

Time

Output frequencyO

u

tp

u

t 

fr

e

q

u

e

n

c

y

Output frequency

ON

ON

ON

Start signal

Start signal

Start signal

Pr.517

Pr.518

Pr.519

[Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration]

Pr.3 Base frequency

Set frequency

Pr.7

Acceleration time

Time

Pr.8

Deceleration time

Output frequency

Selecting the regenerative brake and DC 
feeding

Name

Name

30

E300

Regenerative 
function selection

70

G107

Special regenerative 
brake duty

599

T721

X10 terminal input 
selection

Regeneration unit

Power supply 

to the inverter

Pr.30

setting 

value

Pr.70

setting 

value

When the built-in brake, 

Brake unit

(FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU 



)

R, S, T

0 (initial 
value), 100

Brake duty 
differs 
according to 
the 
capacity.

P, N

10, 110

R, S, T/P, N

20, 120

High-duty brake resistor

(FR-ABR)

R, S, T

1,  101

10%



6%



P, N

11, 111

R, S, T/P, N

21, 121

High power factor 

converter (FR-HC2), 

Power regeneration 

common converter 

(FR-CV)

P, N

2,  102

0% (initial 
value)

Regeneration unit

Power supply 

to the inverter

Pr.30

setting 

value

Pr.70

setting 

value

No regenerative function

R, S, T

0 (initial 
value), 100

―

P, N

10, 110

R, S, T/P, N

20, 120

Brake unit (FR-BU2



)

R, S, T

1,  101

0% (initial 
value)

P, N

11, 111

R, S, T/P, N

21, 121

Power regeneration 

converter (MT-RC)

R, S, T

1,  101

0% (initial 
value)

High power factor 

converter (FR-HC2)

P, N

2,  102

―

Regeneration unit

Power supply 

to the inverter

Pr.30

setting value

No regenerative function

(FR-CC2)

P, N

10 (initial value), 110

Brake unit (FR-CC2+FR-BU2



)

P, N

11,  111

High power factor converter 

(FR-HC2)

P, N

2, 102

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

115

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

 • IP55 compatible model



Used in combination with GZG, GRZG, or FR-BR.



Used in combination with MT-BR5



Setting for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-
00250(7.5K) or lower



Setting for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840-
00310(11K) or higher

 • When set to Pr.599 = "1", X10 signal can be changed to normally 

closed (NC contact) input specification.

 • Up to three areas can be set, with the jump frequencies set to 

either the top or bottom point of each area.

 • The frequency jumps 1A, 2A, 3A can be set and operation is 

performed at these frequencies in the jump areas.

 • At the initial setting "9999", frequency jumps are not performed.
 • During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within 

the set area is valid.

 • A total of six jump areas can be set Pr.552 by setting the common 

jump range for the frequencies set in Pr.31 to Pr.36.

The monitor display unit and the frequency setting on PU(FR-DU08/
FR-PU07) can be switched to motor speed and machine speed.
 • The setting increment for each monitor is determined by the 

combination of Pr.37 and Pr.144. (The initial values are shown 
within the thick lines.)

 • Use Pr.811 to change the increment for the running speed 

monitor and speed setting monitor (r/min) from 1 r/min to 0.1 r/
min.

 • Changing the number of motor poles using Pr.81 Number of 

motor poles will change the Pr.144 setting value.



Conversion formula to the motor speed r/min
Frequency 

 120 / number of motor poles (Pr.144)

Conversion formula to machine speed 
Pr.37 

 Frequency / Pr.505

For Pr.144 in the above formula, the value is "Pr.144 - 100" when 
"102 to 110" is set in Pr.144; and the value is "4" when Pr.37=0 
and Pr.144=0.



Use Pr.811 to change the increment from 1 r/min to 0.1 r/min.

Regeneration unit

Power supply 

to the inverter

Pr.30

setting value

Brake unit

(FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU



)

R, S, T

0 (initial value), 100

P, N

10, 110

R, S, T/P, N

20, 120

High power factor converter 

(FR-HC2),

Power regeneration common 

converter (FR-CV)

P, N

2,  102

Avoiding machine resonance points 
(frequency jump)

Name

Name

31

H420 Frequency jump 1A

32

H421 Frequency jump 1B

33

H422 Frequency jump 2A

34

H423 Frequency jump 2B

35

H424 Frequency jump 3A

36

H425 Frequency jump 3B

552

H429

Frequency jump 
range

When it is desired to avoid 
resonance attributable to 
the natural frequency of a 
mechanical system, these 
parameters allow resonant 
frequencies to be jumped.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.31

Frequency jump

Pr.32

Pr.34

Pr.33

Pr.35

Pr.36

Set frequency after 

frequency jump (Hz)

Input set frequency (Hz)

Speed display and speed setting

Name

Name

37

M000 Speed display

144

M002

Speed setting 
switchover

505

M001

Speed setting 
reference

811

D030

Set resolution 
switchover

Pr.37 

setting 

value

Pr.144 

setting 

value

Output 

frequency 

monitor

Set 

frequency 

monitor

Running 

speed 

monitor

Frequency 

setting 

parameter 

setting

0 (initial 

value)

0

0.01 Hz

0.01 Hz

1 r/min 



0.01 Hz

2 to 12 0.01 Hz

0.01 Hz

1 r/min 



0.01 Hz

102 to 

112

1 r/min 



1 r/min 



1 r/min 



1 r/min 



1 to 

9998

0

0.01 Hz

0.01 Hz

1 (machine 
speed) 



0.01 Hz

2 to 12

1 (machine 
speed) 



1 (machine 
speed) 



1 (machine 
speed) 



1 (machine 
speed) 



102 to 

112

0.01 Hz

0.01 Hz

1 r/min 



0.01 Hz

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

116 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

The output frequency of the inverter is detected to output as an 
output signal.
  • The  Pr.41 value can be adjusted within the range 

1% to 100% 

considering the set frequency as 100%.

 • This parameter can be used to check whether the set frequency 

has been reached, and provide signals such as the operation 
start signal for related equipment.

 • Output frequency detection signal (FU, FB) is output when the 

output frequency reaches the Pr.42 setting or higher.
This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation, 
open signal, etc.

 • Frequency detection dedicated to reverse rotation can also be set 

by setting the detection frequency to Pr.43. This is useful for 
changing the timing of the electromagnetic brake for forward 
rotation (lifting) and reverse rotation (lowering) in operations such 
as a lift operation.

 • When outputting a frequency detection signal separately from the 

FU (FB) signal, set the detection frequency in Pr.50 or Pr.116. 
When the output frequency reaches the Pr.50 setting or higher, 
the FU2 (FB2) signal is output (when it reaches the Pr.116 setting 
or higher, the FU3 (FB3) signal is output).

 • During Real sensorless vector control and vector control, FU 

(FU2, FU3) signal is output when the output frequency reaches 
the specified speed, and FB (FB2, FB3) signal is output when the 
actual motor speed (estimated actual rotations per minute) 
reaches the specified speed.
(Output timings of FU and FB signals are the same under V/F 
control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, and encoder 
feedback control.)

 • During Real sensorless vector control, vector control, and PM 

sensorless vector control, the LS signal is output when the output 
frequency drops to Pr.865 or lower.
During inverter operation, signals are output by the following 
conditions.

Use Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992 to select a monitored item to be 
displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU08) and parameter unit 
(FR-PU07).
Refer to the following table and set the monitor to be displayed. (The 
items with 

----

 are not available for monitoring. The circle in the 

display/output column denotes availability of the minus sign display/
output.)

Output frequency detection

Name

Name

41

M441

Up-to-frequency 
sensitivity

42

M442

Output frequency 
detection

43

M443

Output frequency 
detection for reverse 
rotation

50

M444

Second output 
frequency detection

116

M445

Third output 
frequency detection

865

M446 Low speed detection

870

M400

Speed detection 
hysteresis

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Output frequency 

(Hz)

ON

Set frequency

Adjustment 
range Pr.41

SU

Time

OFF

OFF

Forward

rotation

Pr.116

Pr.50

Pr.42

Pr.43

Pr.50

Pr.116

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Time

(Hz)

FU/FB

FU2/FB2

FU3/FB3

Output 
signal

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Output frequency

Reverse

rotation

Time

ON

LS

ON

OFF

Pr.865

Output frequency

(Hz)

44 to 45

Refer to the page on Pr.7

46

Refer to the page on Pr.0

47

Refer to the page on Pr.3

48 to 49

Refer to the page on Pr.22

50

Refer to the page on Pr.41

51

Refer to the page on Pr.9

Monitor display selection

Name

Name

52

M100

Operation panel main 
monitor selection

54

M300

FM/CA terminal 
function selection

158

M301

AM terminal function 
selection

170

M020 Watt-hour meter clear

171

M030

Operation hour meter 
clear

268

M022

Monitor decimal 
digits selection

290

M044

Monitor negative 
output selection

563

M021

Energization time 
carrying-over times

564

M031

Operating time 
carrying-over times

774

M101

Operation panel 
monitor selection 1

775

M102

Operation panel 
monitor selection 2

776

M103

Operation panel 
monitor selection 3

891

M023

Cumulative power 
monitor digit shifted 
times

992

M104

Operation panel 
setting dial push 
monitor selection

1018 M045

Monitor with sign 
selection

1106 M050 Torque monitor filter

1107 M051

Running speed 
monitor filter

1108 M052

Excitation current 
monitor filter

Monitored item

Unit

Pr.52, 

Pr.774 to 

Pr.776, 

Pr.992

Pr.54

 (FM/CA)

Pr.158 

(AM)

setting 

value

Terminal FM, CA, AM 

full-scale value

Minus 

(-) 

display

/output 



DU PU

Output 

frequency/

Rotation 

speed



0.01 Hz



1/0/100

1



Pr.55



Output 

current



0.01 A/
0.1 A 



2/0/100

2

Pr.56

Output 

voltage



0.1 V

3/0/100

3

200 V class: 400 V
400 V class: 800 V

Fault or alarm 

indication

----

0/100

----

----

Frequency 

setting value/

speed setting

0.01 Hz



5



5



Pr.55

Running speed

1
(r/min)

6



6

Setting value of 
Pr.55 converted by 
Pr.37 and Pr.144.



Motor torque 0.1%

7



7

Pr.866

Converter 

output voltage



0.1 V

8



8

200 V class: 400 V
400 V class: 800 V

Regenerative 

brake duty



0.1%

9



9

Brake duty 
determined by Pr.30 
and Pr.70

Electronic  

thermal O/L 

relay load factor

0.1%

10



10

Electronic thermal 
O/L relay (100%)

Output current 

peak value



0.01 A/
0.1 A 



11



11

Pr.56

Converter 

output voltage 

peak value



0.1 V

12



12

200 V class: 400 V
400 V class: 800 V

Input power

0.01 kW/
0.1 kW

 



13



13

Rated inverter 
power 

 2

Output power



0.01 kW/
0.1 kW

 



14



14

Rated inverter 
power 

 2

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

117

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs



To display the monitored items from the frequency setting value to 
the output terminal status on a parameter unit (FR-PU07), select 
"other monitor".



The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are 
accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and 
accumulated again from 0.



The actual operation time does not increase if the cumulative 
running time before power OFF is less than an hour.



When using the parameter unit (FR-PU07), "kW" is displayed



Differs according to capacities. (FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower 
and FR-A840-01800(55K)or lower/FR-A820-03800(75K) or 
higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher)

Load meter

 

0.1%

17

17

Pr.866

Motor excitation 

current



0.01 A/
0.1 A 



18

18

Pr.56

Position pulse



----

19

----

----

Cumulative 

energization 

time



1 h

20

----

----

Reference 

voltage output ----

----

21

----

Orientation 

status



1

22

----

----

Actual 

operation 

time



1 h

23

----

----

Motor load 

factor

0.1%

24

24

200%

Cumulative 

power



0.01 kWh/
0.1 kWh



25

----

----

Position 

command

1

26

----

----

Position 

command 

(upper digits)

1

27

----

----

Current position 1

28

----

----

Current position 

(upper digits) 1

29

----

----

Droop pulse

1

30

----

----

Droop pulse 

(upper digits) 1

31

----

----

Torque 

command

0.1%

32

32

Pr.866

Torque current 

command

0.1%

33

33

Pr.866

Motor output

0.01 kW/
0.1 kW

 



34

34

Rated motor 
capacity

Feedback 

pulse



----

35

----

----

Torque momitor 

(driving/

regenerative 

polarity 

switching)

0.1%

36

36

Pr.866

Trace status

1

38

----

----

SSCNET III(/H) 

communication 

status



1

39

----

----

PLC function 

user monitor 1

Increment 
set in 
SD1215

40

----

----

PLC function 

user monitor 2

41

----

----

PLC function 

user monitor 3

42

----

----

Station number 

(RS-485 

terminals)



1

43

----

----

Station number 

(PU)

1

44

----

----

Station number 

(CC-Link)

1

45

----

----

Motor 

temperature



1°C

46

46

Pr.751

Energy saving 

effect

Changeable 
by 
parameter 
setting

50

50

Inverter capacity

Cumulative 

energy saving

51

----

----

PID set point

0.1%

52

52

100%

PID measured 

value

0.1%

53

53

100%

PID deviation 0.1%

54

54



100%

Input terminal 

status

----

55



----

----

Output terminal 

status

----



----

----

Option input 

terminal 

status



----

56

─

----

----

Option output 

terminal 

status



----

57

─

----

----

Option input 

terminal status 

1

 (for 

communication)



----

---- 



---- 



----

Monitored item

Unit

Pr.52, 

Pr.774 to 

Pr.776, 

Pr.992

Pr.54

 (FM/CA)

Pr.158 

(AM)

setting 

value

Terminal FM, CA, AM 

full-scale value

Minus 

(-) 

display

/output 



DU PU

Option input 

terminal status 

2

 (for 

communication)



----

---- 



---- 



----

Option output 

terminal status 

1 

(for 

communication)



----

---- 



---- 



----

Motor thermal 

load factor

0.1%

61

61

Motor thermal 
activation level 
(100%)

Inverter thermal 

load factor

0.1%

62

62

Inverter thermal 
activation level 
(100%)

PTC thermistor 

resistance

0.01 k

64

----

----

PID measured 

value 2

0.1%

67

67

100%

PLC function 

analog output 0.1%

----

70

100%

Cumulative 

pulse



----

71

----

----



Cumulative 

pulse overflow 

times



----

72

----

----



Cumulative 

pulse (control 

terminal 

option)



----

73

----

----



Cumulative 

pulse overflow 

times (control 

terminal 

option)



----

74

----

----



32-bit 

cumulative 

power (lower 16 

bits)

1 kWh

---- 



---- 



----

32-bit 

cumulative 

power (upper 16 

bits)

1 kWh

---- 



---- 



----

32-bit 

cumulative 

power (lower 16 

bits)

0.01 kWh/
0.1 kWh 



---- 



---- 



----

32-bit 

cumulative 

power (upper 16 

bits)

0.01 kWh/
0.1 kWh 



----



---- 



----

Remote output 

value 1

0.1%

87

87

1000%

Remote output 

value 2

0.1%

88

88

1000%

Remote output 

value 3

0.1%

89

89

1000%

Remote output 

value 4

0.1%

90

90

1000%

PID manipulated 

variable

0.1%

91

91



100%

Second PID set 

point

0.1%

92

92

100%

Second PID 

measured value 0.1%

93

93

100%

Second PID 

deviation

0.1%

94

94



100%

Second PID 

measured value 

2

0.1%

95

95

100%

Second PID 

manipulated 

variable

0.1%

96

96



100%

Dancer main 

speed setting 0.01 Hz 97

97

Pr.55

Control circuit 

temperature

1°C

98

98

100

C

Monitored item

Unit

Pr.52, 

Pr.774 to 

Pr.776, 

Pr.992

Pr.54

 (FM/CA)

Pr.158 

(AM)

setting 

value

Terminal FM, CA, AM 

full-scale value

Minus 

(-) 

display

/output 



DU PU


background image

118 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9



Since the voltage and current displays on the operation panel 
(FR-DU08) are shown in four digits, a monitor value of more than 
"9999" is displayed as "----".



When the output current is less than the specified current level 
(5% of the inverter rated current), the output current is monitored 
as 0 A.Therefore, the monitored value of an output current and 
output power may be displayed as "0" when using a much 
smaller-capacity motor compared to the inverter or in other 
instances that cause the output current to fall below the specified 
value.



Available when the option is connected.



When Pr.37="1 to 9998" or Pr.144="2 to 12, 102 to 112", 1 
increment is used. (Refer to page 115)

 The monitored values are retained even if an inverter fault occurs. 

Resetting will clear the retained values.

 Can be set for the AM (Pr.158) only.

 Can be set or monitored only via communication.

 The setting is available for the standard model only.

 Setting Pr.290  0 enables the display/output with a minus sign.

 Setting Pr.1018 = 0 enables the display/output with a minus sign.

 Negative values are not displayed on the operation panel. The 

values "-1 to -32767" are displayed as "65535 to 32769" on the 
operation panel.

 The speed is not displayed on the FR-A842-P. 

 Not available for the FR-A842-P.

 • Pr.774 sets the output frequency monitor, Pr.775 sets the output 

current monitor, and Pr.776 sets the monitor description to be 
displayed at the output voltage monitor position. When Pr.774 to 
Pr.776="9999" (initial value), the Pr.52 setting value is used. (For 
the monitor display sequence, refer to page page 62.)

 • Digits in the cumulative power monitor can be shifted to the right 

by the number set in Pr.891.

 • Writing "0" in Pr.170 clears the cumulative power monitor.
 • Pr.563 allows the user to check how many times the cumulative 

energization time monitor has exceeded 65535 h. Pr.564 allows 
the use to check how many times the actual operation time 
monitor has exceeded 65535 h .

 • Writing "0" in Pr.171 clears the actual operation time monitor.

 • When Pr.52="100", the set frequency is displayed during stop, 

and output frequency is displayed during running. (LED of Hz 
flickers during stop and is lit during operation.)

 • The monitored item to be displayed at the operation panel (FR-

DU08)'s setting dial push can be selected with Pr.992.

 • Depending on the Pr.290 setting, negative output can be selected 

for terminal AM (analog voltage output), and display with a minus 
sign is enabled for the operation panel and a communication 
option. 

Full scales can be set for the values output from terminal FM/CA and 
AM.



For the monitored item names, refer to the page on Pr.52.



Minus-sign output is enabled when Pr.290 Monitor negative output 
selection = "1 and 3".

Pr.268 setting

Description

9999 

(initial value)

No function

0

When monitoring with the first or second decimal place 
(0.1 increments or 0.01 increments), the 0.1 decimal 
place or lower is dropped to display an integral value (1 
increments).
The monitor value equal to or smaller than 0.99 is 
displayed as 0.

1

When monitoring with the second decimal place (0.01 
increments), the 0.01 decimal place is dropped and the 
monitor displays the first decimal place (0.1 increments).
When monitoring with the first decimal place, the display 
will not change.

Pr.52

0

100

Operating 

status

During running/

stop

During stop

Running

Output 

frequency

Output frequency

Set frequency

Output frequency

Output 

current

Output current

Output 

voltage

Output voltage

Fault or 

alarm 

indication

Fault or alarm indication

Pr.992

0

100

Operating status

During running/

stop

During stop

Running

Monitor displayed by 

the setting dial push

Set frequency
(PU direct-in 
frequency)

Set frequency

Output 
frequency

Pr.290 

setting

Terminal AM 

output

Operation panel 

display

Monitoring on the 

communication 

option

0 (initial 

value)

-

-

-

1

Output with a 
minus sign

-

-

2

-

Displayed with a 
minus sign

-

3

Output with a 
minus sign

Displayed with a 
minus sign

-

4

-

-

Displayed with a 
minus sign

5

Output with a 
minus sign

-

Displayed with a 
minus sign

6

-

Displayed with a 
minus sign

Displayed with a 
minus sign

7

Output with a 
minus sign

Displayed with a 
minus sign

Displayed with a 
minus sign

Reference for monitor value output from 
terminal FM/CA, AM

Name

Name

55

M040

Frequency 
monitoring reference

56

M041

Current monitoring 
reference

866

M042

Torque monitoring 
reference

Monitor



Reference parameter

Initial value

Frequency

Pr.55

FM type, 60 Hz
CA type 50 Hz

Current

Pr.56

Inverter rated current

torque

Pr.866

150%

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

2400

1440

Pulse speed(terminal FM)

pulses/s

pulses/s

Output frequency
reference
Output current
reference
Output torque
reference

590Hz

500A

400%

Pr.55

Pr.56

Pr.866

DC20mA

Output Current(terminal CA)

590Hz

500A

400%

Pr.55
Pr.56
Pr.866

DC10V

-DC10V

Output voltage(terminal AM)

590Hz

500A

400%

*2

Pr.55
Pr.56
Pr.866

Pr.55
Pr.56
Pr.866


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

119

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

The inverter can be restarted without stopping the motor in the 
following conditions:
 • When switching from commercial power supply operation over to 

inverter operation

 • When an instantaneous power failure occurs during inverter 

operation

 • When the motor is coasting at start



The coasting time when Pr.57="0" is as shown below. (When 
Pr.162 is set to the initial value and the ND rating is selected. )
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or lower and, FR-A840-00052(1.5K) or lower: 0.5s
FR-A820-00167(2.2K) to FR-A820-00490(7.5K) and
FR-A840-00083(2.2K) to FR-A840-00250(7.5K):1 s
FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K) and
FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K): 3.0 s
FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher 
: 5.0 s

 • Pr.162="0 (initial value), 3, 10, or 13", the motor speed is detected 

at power restoration to start the motor smoothly.

 • During encoder feedback control with Pr.162 = "2 or 12" or during 

vector control, the motor starts at power restoration based on the 
motor speed and rotation direction detected by the encoder. (This 
operation is available when a vector control compatible option is 
installed.)

 • Setting Pr.162 = "3, 13" will lead to better-absorbed impacts and 

smoother motor start (Reduced impact restart) than the Pr.162 = 
"0, 10" setting does. (Offline auto tuning)
Under Real sensorless vector control, the reduced impact restart 
is applied, independently of the Pr.162 setting.

 • The encoder also detects the rotation direction during reverse 

rotation so that the inverter can re-start smoothly. (Pr.299 
Rotation direction detection selection at restarting to enable/
disable the rotation direction detection)

Automatic restart after instantaneous 
power failure with an induction motor 

Name

Name

57

A702 Restart coasting time 58

A703 Restart cushion time

162

A700

Automatic restart 
after instantaneous 
power failure 
selection

163

A704

First cushion time for 
restart

164

A705

First cushion voltage 
for restart

165

A710

Stall prevention 
operation level for 
restart

299

A701

Rotation direction 
detection selection at 
restarting

611

F003

Acceleration time at 
a restart

Pr.

Setting 

range

Description

162

0
(initial 
value)

Frequency search only performed at the first start

1

Reduced voltage start only at the first start (no frequency 
search)

2

Encoder detection frequency search

3

Frequency search only performed at the first start (reduced 
impact restart)

10

Frequency search at every start

11

Reduced voltage start at every start (no frequency search)

12

Encoder detection frequency search at every start

13

Frequency search at every start (reduced impact restart)

299

0
(initial 
value)

Without rotation direction detection

1

With rotation direction detection

9999

When Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection = "0", 
with rotation direction detection
Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection = "1, 2", 
without rotation direction detection

57

0

Coasting time differs according to the inverter capacity.



0.1 to 
30s

Set the waiting time for the inverter to perform a restart 
after the power lost by an instantaneous power failure 
restores.

9999
(initial 
value)

No restart

58

0 to 60 s Set the voltage cushion time for restart.

163 0 to 20 s Set the voltage cushion time for restart.

Set a value considering the load amount (moment of 
inertia, torque).

164

0 to  
100%

165

0 to 
400%

Set the stall prevention level at restart considering the 
inverter rated current as 100%.

611

0 to 
3600 s

Set the acceleration time that takes to reach Pr.20 
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency setting 
at a restart.

9999
(initial 
value)

Normal acceleration time setting (settings like Pr.7 ) is 
applied as the acceleration time for restart.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

<Connection diagram>

STF

IM

MCCB

CS
SD

CS

SD

S1/L21

R1/L11

T/L3

S/L2

R/L1

MC1

MC2

W

V

U

MC
switchover
sequence

For use for only automatic 
restart after instantaneous
power failure or flying start, 
turn ON the CS signal in 
advance.

With electronic bypass sequence

Only with restart after instantaneous power failure

MC3

Instantaneous (power failure) time

Power supply
(R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3)

Motor speed N
(r/min)

Inverter output
frequency f(Hz)

Inverter output
voltage E(V)

Coasting
time (Pr.57)

Speed
detection
time

+

Acceleration time
at a restart
(Pr.611 setting)

Restart cushion
time (Pr.58 setting)

*

* The output shut off timing differs 

according to the load condition.

V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control

Instantaneous (power failure) time

Power supply
(R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3)

Motor speed N
(r/min)

Inverter output
frequency f(Hz)
output voltage
E(V)

Coasting
time (Pr.57)

Speed
detection
time

+

Acceleration time
at a restart
(Pr.611 setting)

*

Real sensorless vector control

* The output shut off timing differs 

according to the load condition.


background image

120 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

 • When Pr.162 = "1" or "11", automatic restart operation is 

performed in a reduced voltage system, where the voltage is 
gradually risen with the output frequency unchanged from prior to 
an instantaneous power failure independently of the coasting 
speed of the motor.
During Real sensorless vector control, the output frequency and 
voltage before an instantaneous power failure are output. (The 
Pr.58 setting is disabled.)

While using an IPM motor MM-CF, the inverter can be restarted 
without stopping the motor.
By enabling the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure 
function in the following conditions, the motor can be restarted.
 • When an instantaneous power failure occurs during inverter 

operation

 • When the motor is coasting at start

Selection for the automatic restart (Pr.162)

The motor speed is detected (frequency search) at power 
restoration to start the motor smoothly.
The encoder also detects the rotation direction during reverse 
rotation so that the inverter can re-start smoothly.

Even if the operation panel is located away from the enclosure, 
contact signals can be used to perform continuous variable-speed 
operation, without using analog signals.
By simply setting this parameter, the acceleration, deceleration and setting 
clear functions of the remote speed setter (FR-FK) become available.

Inverter will perform energy saving control automatically even when 
the detailed parameter settings are made.
It is appropriate for an application such as a fan or pump.



Output current may increase slightly with the energy saving 
operation or the Optimum excitation control since the output 
voltage is controlled.

Automatic restart after instantaneous 
power failure with a PM motor

Name

Name

57

A702 Restart coasting time 162

A700

Automatic restart 
after instantaneous 
power failure 
selection

611

F003

Acceleration time at 
a restart

Pr.

Setting range

Description

57

0

No waiting time

0.1 to 30 s

Set the waiting time for the inverter to 
perform a restart after the power lost by an 
instantaneous power failure restores.

9999 (initial value)

No restart

162

0 (initial value), 1, 2, 3

Frequency search only performed at the 
first start

10, 11, 12, 13

Frequency search at every start

611

0 to 3600 s

Set the acceleration time that takes to 
reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration 
reference frequency at a restart.

9999 (initial value)

Standard acceleration time (for example, 
Pr.7) s applied as the acceleration time at 
restart.

Instantaneous (power failure) time

Coasting time
Pr.57

 setting

Restart cushion time
(Pr.58 setting)

Power supply
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)

Motor speed N
(r/min)

Inverter output
frequency f (Hz)

Inverter output
voltage E (V)

∗ The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.

∗

V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Instantaneous (power failure) time

Power supply
(R/L1,S/L2,T/L3)

Motor
speed N (r/min)
Inverter output
frequency f (Hz)

Inverter output
voltage E (V)

Coasting
time (Pr.57)

Speed
detection 
time

+

Acceleration time
at a restart
(Pr.611 setting)

* The output shut off timing differs 

according to the load condition

*

Remote setting function

Name

59

F101

Remote function 
selection

Pr.59 

setting

Description

RH, RM, RL 

signal 

function

Frequency setting

storage

Deceleration to 

the frequency 

lower than the 

set frequency

0 (initial 

value)

Multi-speed 
setting

-

Not available

1

Remote 
setting

With

2

Remote 
setting

Not used

3

Remote 
setting

Not used
(Turning STF/STR OFF clears 
remotely set frequency.)

11

Remote 
setting

With

Available

12

Remote 
setting

Not used

13

Remote 
setting

Not used
(Turning STF/STR OFF clears 
remotely set frequency.)

Energy saving control selection

Name

60

G030

Energy saving 
control selection

Pr.60 setting

Description

0(initial value)

Normal operation

4

Energy saving operation



With the energy saving operation, the inverter will 
automatically control the output voltage so the 
inverter output power during the constant-speed 
operation will become minimal.
(Available during V/F control)

9

Optimum excitation control



The Optimum excitation control is a control 
method to decide the output voltage by controlling 
the excitation current so the efficiency of the 
motor is maximized.
(Available during V/F control or Advanced 
magnetic flux vector control)

Pr.

GROUP

0

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Deceleration (RM)

Clear (RL)

Acceleration (RH)

Forward rotation (STF)

Power supply

0Hz

Time

Output frequency

(Hz)

∗1

When Pr.59 = "1, 11"

When Pr.59 = "2, 3, 12, 13"

When Pr.59 = "1, 2, 11, 12"

When Pr.59 = "3, 13"

Set frequency

∗1 External operation frequency (other than multi-speed) or PU running frequency

Pr.

GROUP


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

121

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

The inverter can be operated with the auto-adjusted parameters.
 • Without setting the acceleration/deceleration time or the V/F 

pattern, the inverter can be operated as if the appropriate value is 
set to each parameter.This function is useful for operating the 
inverter without setting detailed parameters.

 • Even if automatic acceleration/deceleration has been selected, 

inputting the JOG signal, RT signal (second function selection), or 
X9 signal (third function selection) during an inverter stop will 
switch to the normal operation and give priority to JOG operation, 
second function selection or third function selection.
After the motor is started by the automatic acceleration/
deceleration, none of JOG, RT, or X9 signal is accepted.

 • Pr.61 to Pr.63 can be used to change the reference current for 

the shortest acceleration/deceleration and the optimal 
acceleration/deceleration operation.

 • Use Pr.64 to set the starting frequency for the lift operation.
 • Acceleration/deceleration times can be individually calculated.

Such a setting can be enabled/disabled for the shortest 
acceleration/deceleration operation and the optimum 
acceleration/deceleration.

This function allows the inverter to reset itself and restart at 
activation of the protective function (fault indication). The retry 
generating faults can be also selected.
(This function is not available for the FR-A842-P.)
When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure 
function is selected (Pr.57 Restart coasting time 

 9999), the 

restart operation is also performed after a retry operation as well as 
after an instantaneous power failure.
 • Using Pr.65, you can select the fault that will cause a retry.

“●” indicates the faults selected for retry.

  • For  Pr.67, set the number of retries at a fault occurrence.

  • For  Pr.68, set the waiting time (0.1 to 600 s) from a protective 

function activation to a retry.

 • By reading Pr.69, the number of successful restarts made by 

retries can be obtained.

Automatic acceleration/deceleration

Name

Name

61

F510 Reference current

62

F511

Reference value at 
acceleration

63

F512

Reference value at 
deceleration

64

F520

Starting frequency 
for elevator mode

292

F500

Automatic 
acceleration/
deceleration

293

F513

Acceleration/
deceleration separate 
selection

Pr.292 setting

Operation

Automatic 

setting Pr.

0

(initial value 

normal 

operation)

─

─

1

(shortest 

acceleration/

deceleration)

Without brake 
resistor or the 
brake unit

Set this parameter to 
accelerate/decelerate 
the motor at the shortest 
time.
(Stall prevention 
operation level 150%)

Pr.7, Pr.8

11

(shortest 

acceleration/

deceleration)

With brake 
resistor, brake 
unit

3

(optimum 

acceleration/

deceleration)

Optimal operation that fully uses the 
inverter's capability is performed.

Pr.0, Pr.7, 
Pr.8

5

(lift mode)

Stall 
prevention 
operation level 
150%

The inverter output 
voltage is controlled so 
that enough torque is 
provided during power 
driving and regenerative 
driving.

Pr.0, Pr.13, 
Pr.19

6

(lift mode 2)

Stall 
prevention 
operation level 
180%

7

(Brake sequence 

mode 1)

With machine 
brake opening 
completion 
signal

In this operation mode, 
operation timing signals 
of the mechanical brake 
are output from the 
inverter, such as for lift 
application.

─

8

(Brake sequence 

mode 2)

Without 
machine brake 
opening 
completion 
signal

Pr.293 setting

Description

0 (initial value)

Both the acceleration and deceleration times are 
calculated.

1

Only the acceleration time is calculated.

2

Only the deceleration time is calculated.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Retry function

Name

Name

65

H300 Retry selection

67

H301

Number of retries at 
fault occurrence

68

H302 Retry waiting time

69

H303

Retry count display 
erase

Retry target Fault 

indication

Pr.65 setting

0

1

2

3

4

5

E.OC1

●

●

●

●

●

E.OC2

●

●

●

●

E.OC3

●

●

●

●

●

E.OV1

●

●

●

●

E.OV2

●

●

●

●

E.OV3

●

●

●

●

E.THM

●

E.THT

●

E.IPF

●

●

E.UVT

●

●

E. BE

●

●

E. GF

●

●

E.OHT

●

E.OLT

●

●

E.OPT

●

●

E.OP1

●

●

E. PE

●

●

E.MB1

●

●

E.MB2

●

●

E.MB3

●

●

E.MB4

●

●

E.MB5

●

●

E.MB6

●

●

E.MB7

●

●

E.OS

●

●

E.OSD

●

●

E.PTC

●

E.CDO

●

●

E.SER

●

●

E.USB

●

●

E.ILF

●

●

E.PID

●

●

E.PCH

●

●

E.SOT

●

●

●

●

●

E.LCI

●

●

E.LUP

●

●

E.LDN

●

●

E.EHR

●

●

Pr.67 setting

Description

0 (initial value)

No retry function

1 to 10

Set the number of retries at fault occurrence.
A fault output is not provided during the retry operation.

101 to 110

Set the number of retries at fault occurrence. (The 
setting value minus 100 is the number of retries.)
A fault output is provided during the retry operation.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

122 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

Setting of the applied motor selects the thermal characteristic 
appropriate for the motor. When using a constant-torque or PM 
motor, the electronic thermal O/L relay is set according to the used 
motor.



The setting is available for FR-A820-00630(11K) or lower.

 • When initial values are set in Pr.0 and Pr.12, the Pr.0 and Pr.12 

settings are automatically changed by changing the Pr.71 setting.

The motor sound can be changed.



The setting range for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-
A840-01800(55K) or lower.



The setting range for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-
A840-02160(75K) or higher.



Not available for the FR-A842-P.

 • Under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, and PM 

sensorless vector control, the following carrier frequencies are used.
(For the control method and fast-response operation selection, refer 
to Pr.800 Control method selection refer to page 126



When low-speed range high-torque characteristic is disabled 
(Pr.788="0"), 2 kHz is used.



In the low-speed range (3 Hz or lower) under Real sensorless 
vector control, the carrier frequency is automatically changed to 2 
kHz. (For FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-
00250(7.5K) or lower)

 • PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function (Pr.260)

Setting Pr.260="1 (initial value)" will enable the PWM carrier 
frequency auto-reduction function. If a heavy load is continuously 
applied while the inverter carrier frequency is set to 3 kHz or 
higher (Pr.72 

 "3"), the carrier frequency is automatically 

reduced to prevent occurrence of the inverter overload trip 
(electronic thermal O/L relay function) (E.THT). The carrier 
frequency is reduced to as low as 2 kHz. (Motor noise increases, 
but not to the point of failure.)

 • When the PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function is 

used, the operation with the carrier frequency set to 3 kHz or 
higher (Pr.72 

 "3") automatically reduces the carrier frequency 

for heavy-load operation as shown below.

 • In the low-speed range (about 10 Hz or lower), the carrier 

frequency may be automatically lowered. Motor noise increases, 
but not to the point of failure.

66

Refer to the page on  Pr.22

67 to 69

Refer to the page on Pr.65

70

Refer to the page on  Pr.30

Applicable motor

Name

Name

71

C100 Applied motor

450

C200

Second applied 
motor

Pr.71

Pr.450

Applied motor

S

e

tt

in

g

 in

cr

em

en

t

fo

r mo

to

r 

c

o

ns

ta

n

t

Operational 

characteristic of 

the electronic 

thermal O/L relay

St

a

n

d

a

rd

C

o

ns

ta

nt-

to

rq

ue

PM

0

(Pr.71 initial 

value)

Standard motor (such as SF-JR)

Ω,mΩ,
mH,%,
A,mV

○

1

Constant-torque motor
(SF-JRCA, etc.)
SF-V5RU
(except for 1500 r/min series)

○

2

―

Standard motor (such as SF-JR)
Adjustable 5 points V/F
(Refer to page 129)

○

20

Mitsubishi Electric standard motor
(SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or lower)

○

30

Vector control dedicated motor
SF-V5RU
(1500 r/min series)
SF-THY

○

40

Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor
SF-HR

○

50

Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor
SF-HRCA

○

70

Mitsubishi Electric high-performance 
energy-saving motor
SF-PR

○

330



IPM motor MM-CF

○

8090

IPM motor (other than MM-CF)

○

9090

SPM motor

○

3, 4

Standard motor (such as SF-JR)

Internal 
data

○

13, 14

Constant-torque motor
(SF-JRCA, etc.)
SF-V5RU
(except for 1500 r/min series)

○

23, 24

Mitsubishi Electric standard motor
(other than SF-JR 4P 1.5kW)

○

33, 34

Vector control dedicated motor
SF-V5RU
(1500 r/min series)
SF-THY

○

43, 44

Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor
SF-HR

○

53, 54

Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor
SF-HRCA

○

73, 74

Mitsubishi Electric high-performance 
energy-saving motor
SF-PR

○

333, 334



IPM motor MM-CF

○

8093, 8094

IPM motor (other than MM-CF)

○

9093, 9094

SPM motor

○

5

Standard motor

Star 
connection

Ω,mΩ,A

○

15

Constant-torque motor

○

6

Standard motor

Delta 
connection

○

16

Constant-torque motor

○

―

9999

(initial 

value)

No second applied motor

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Carrier frequency and Soft-PWM 
selection

Name

Name

72

E600

PWM frequency 
selection

240

E601

Soft-PWM operation 
selection

260

E602

PWM frequency 
automatic switchover

Pr.

Setting range

Description

72



0 to 15



The PWM carrier frequency can be changed. The 
setting displayed is in [kHz]. Note that 0 indicates 0.7 
kHz, 15 indicates 14.5 kHz, and 25 indicates 2.5 kHz. 
(When using an optional sine wave filter, set "25".)

0 to 6, 25



240

0

Soft-PWM disabled

1 (initial value) Soft-PWM enabled

260



0

PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction 
function disabled (for the LD, ND, or HD rating)

1 (initial value)

PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction 
function enabled

Pr.72

setting

Carrier frequency (kHz)

Real sensorless vector control,

vector control

PM sensorless 

vector control

fast-response 

operation selection

0 to 5

2

6



4

6, 7

6



6

8, 9

10 to 13

10



10

14, 15

14



14

Pr.260 

setting

Pr.570 

setting

Carrier frequency automatic reduction operation

FR-A820-04750(90K) or lower,

FR-A840-02600(90K) or lower

FR-A840-03250(110K) or higher

1

0 (SLD),
1 (LD)

Continuous operation with the 85% or higher inverter rated current 
reduces the carrier frequency automatically.

2 (ND), 
3 (HD)

Operation with the 150% or 
higher inverter rated current for 
the ND rating reduces the carrier 
frequency automatically.

Continuous operation with the 
85% or higher inverter rated 
current reduces the carrier 
frequency automatically.

0

0 (SLD)

Continuous operation with the 85% or higher inverter rated current 
reduces the carrier frequency automatically.

1 (LD)

Without carrier frequency automatic reduction
(Perform continuous operation with the carrier frequency set to 2 kHz 
or lower or with less than 85% of the rated inverter current.)

2 (ND), 
3 (HD)

Without carrier frequency 
automatic reduction

Without carrier frequency 
automatic reduction
(Perform continuous operation 
with the carrier frequency set to 2 
kHz or lower or with less than 
85% of the rated inverter current.)

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

123

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

The analog input terminal specifications, the override function, and 
the function to switch forward/reverse rotation by the input signal 
polarity can be set.
Concerning terminals 2 and 4 used for analog input, the voltage 
input (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) and current input (0 to 20 mA) are 
selectable. To input a voltage (0 to 5 V/ 0 to 10 V), set the voltage/
current input switch OFF. To input a current (0 to 20 mA), set the 
voltage/current input switch ON and change the parameters (Pr.73, 
Pr.267).
Addition compensation or fixed ratio analog compensation (override) 
with terminal 2 set to auxiliary input is applicable to the multi-speed 
operation or terminal 2/terminal 4 speed setting signal (main speed). 
(Bold frame indicates the main speed setting.)

 • Turning ON the Terminal 4 input selection (AU) signal sets 

terminal 4 to the main speed.

 • Set the Pr.267 and voltage/current input switch setting according 

to the table below.

 • Addition compensation (Pr.242, Pr.243)

A compensation signal is addable to the main speed setting for 
such as synchronous or continuous speed control operation.

Terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) is added to terminal 
2 or 4 main speed setting signal.

 • Override function (Pr.252, Pr.253)

When the override setting is selected, terminal 1 or 4 is set to the 
main speed setting, and terminal 2 is set to the override signal. (If 
the main speed of terminal 1 or 4 is not input, the compensation 
by terminal 2 is disabled.)

 • When Pr.868 (Pr.858) = "4", the terminal 1 (terminal 4) values are 

set to the stall prevention operation level.

The frequency command/torque command response level and 
stability are adjustable by using the analog input (terminals 1, 2, and 
4) signal.
 • Pr.74 is effective to eliminate noise on the frequency setting 

circuit.
Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be 
performed due to noise, etc.
A larger setting results in slower response. (The time constant 
can be between 0 and 8, which are about 5 ms to 1 s.)

 • Set the primary delay filter time constant to the external speed 

command (analog input command) by using Pr.822 or Pr.832.
Set a larger time constant when delaying the speed command 
tracking or the analog input voltage is unstable.

 • Set the primary delay filter time constant to the external torque 

command (analog input command) by using Pr.826 or Pr.836.
Set a larger time constant when delaying the torque command 
tracking or the analog input voltage is unstable.

 • Set a value other than "9999" in Pr.832 and Pr.836, which are 

enabled when the RT signal is ON.

 • Setting Pr.849 will offset the analog speed input (terminal2) and 

avoid the occurrence of a frequency command due to noise when 
the 0-speed command is given.
The offset voltage is positive when 100% < Pr.849 and negative 
when Pr.849 < 100%.The detailed calculation of the offset voltage 
is as described below:
Offset voltage [V] =
Voltage at the time of 100% (5 V or 10 V



) 

 (Pr.849 - 100)/100



It depends on the Pr.73 setting.

Analog input selection

Name

Name

73

T000

Analog input 
selection

267

T001

Terminal 4 input 
selection

242

T021

Terminal 1 added 
compensation 
amount (terminal 2)

243

T041

Terminal 1 added 
compensation 
amount (terminal 4)

252

T050 Override bias

253

T051 Override gain

Pr.73

setting

Terminal 2

input

Switch

1

Terminal 1

input

Compensation 

input terminal 

compensation 

method

Polarity 

reversible

0

0 to 10 V

OFF

0 to 

10 V

Terminal 1
Addition 
compensation

Not applied
(state in 
which a 
negative 
polarity 
frequency 
command 
signal is not 
accepted )

1

(initial 

value)

0 to 5 V

OFF

0 to 

10 V

2

0 to 10 V

OFF

0 to 

5 V

3

0 to 5 V

OFF

0 to 

5 V

4

0 to 10 V

OFF

0 to

10 V

Terminal 2
Override

5

0 to 5 V

OFF

0 to 

5 V

6

0 to 20 mA ON

0 to 

10 V

Terminal 1
Addition 
compensation

7

0 to 20 mA ON

0 to 

5 V

10

0 to 10 V

OFF

0 to 

10 V

Applied

11

0 to 5 V

OFF

0 to 

10 V

12

0 to 10 V

OFF

0 to 

5 V

13

0 to 5 V

OFF

0 to 

5 V

14

0 to 10 V

OFF

0 to 

10 V

Terminal 2
Override

15

0 to 5 V

OFF

0 to 

5 V

16

0 to 20 mA ON

0 to 

10 V

Terminal 1
Addition 
compensation

17

0 to 20 mA ON

0 to 

5 V

Pr.267 setting

Terminal 4 input

Switch 2

0 (initial value)

4 to 20 mA

ON

1

0 to 5 V

OFF

2

0 to 10 V

OFF

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Output frequency

When voltage across
terminals 2 and 5 is 2.5V
(5V)

When voltage
across terminals
2 and 5 is 0V

+5V

(+10V)

Terminal 1

0

-2.5V
(-5V)

-5V

(-10V)

STF Signal
ON

Forward rotation

Forward rotation

(a) When Pr.73 setting is 0 to 3

Output frequency

When voltage across
terminals 2 and 5 is 2.5V
(5V)

When voltage
across terminals
2 and 5 is 0V

+5V

(+10V)

Terminal 1

0

-2.5V
(-5V)

-5V

(-10V)

STF Signal
ON

Forward rotation

Forward rotation

(b) When Pr.73 setting is 10 to 13

Reverse rotation

Reverse rotation

+2.5V
(+5V)

+2.5V
(+5V)

STF Signal
ON

STF Signal
ON

Analog input responsiveness and noise 
elimination

Name

Name

74

T002

Input filter time 
constant

822

T003 Speed setting filter 1

826

T004 Torque setting filter 1 832

T005 Speed setting filter 2

836

T006 Torque setting filter 2 849

T007

Analog input offset 
adjustment

Pr.252

0V

2.5V
(5V)

5V
(10V)

0

50

100

150

200

Initial value

(50% to 150%)

Voltage across terminals 2 and 5

Pr.253

Override value (%)

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

0%

100%

(10V or 5V)

Pr.849

 setting

Frequency 

command

Speed setting 
signal

Slope determined 
according to Pr.125 
and C2 to C4

Slope does not 
change.

0%

200%

100%


background image

124 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

The reset input acceptance, disconnected PU (FR-DU08/FR-PU07) 
connector detection function and PU stop function can be selected.

 • Reset selection (P.E100)

When P.E100 = "1" or Pr.75 = "1, 3, 15, 17, 100, 101, 103, 115, or 
117" is set, reset (reset command via RES signal or 
communication) input is enabled only when the protective 
function is activated.

 • Disconnected PU detection (P.E101)

If the PU (FR-DU08/FR-PU07) is detected to be disconnected 
from the inverter for 1 s or longer while P.E101 = "1" or Pr.75 = "2, 
3, 16, 17, 102, 103, 116, or 117", PU disconnection (E.PUE) is 
displayed and the inverter output is shut off.

 • PU stop selection (P.E102)

Stop can be performed by inputting 

 from the PU in any of 

the operation modes of PU operation, External operation and 
network operation.

 • Reset limit function (P.E107)

When Pr.75 = any of "100 to 103 and 114 to 117", if an electronic 
thermal O/L relay or an overcurrent protective function (E.THM, 
E.THT, E.OC[]) is activated while one of them has been already 
activated within 3 minutes, the inverter will not accept any reset 
command (RES signal, etc.) for about 3 minutes from the second 
activation.
The reset limit function is available with the FR-A820-03800(75K) 
or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

When a fault occurs, the corresponding data can be output as a 4-bit 
digital signal using via an open collector output terminal.
The fault code can be read using a programmable controller, etc., 
and countermeasures can be displayed on the HMI (Human 
Machine Interface), etc.

 • The fault codes that can be output are shown in the table below.

(0: Output transistor OFF, 1: Output transistor ON)



When Pr.76 = "2", the terminal outputs the signal assigned by 
Pr.191 to Pr.194 in normal operation.

Reset selection/disconnected PU 
detection/PU stop selection

Name

75

E100 Reset selection

75

E101 Disconnected PU detection

75

E102 PU stop selection

75

E107 Reset limit

75

-

Reset selection/
disconnected PU detection/
PU stop selection

Pr.75

setting

Reset selection

Disconnected PU 

detection

PU stop selection

0, 100

Reset input always 
enabled

Operation 
continues even 
when PU is 
disconnected.

Decelerates to a 

stop when 

 

is input in PU 
operation mode 
only.

1, 101

Reset input enabled 
only when protective 
function activated

2, 102

Reset input always 
enabled

Inverter output shut 
off when PU 
disconnected.

3, 103

Reset input enabled 
only when protective 
function activated

14

(Initial 

value),

114

Reset input always 
enabled

Operation 
continues even 
when PU is 
disconnected.

Decelerates to a 

stop when 

 

is input in any of 
the PU, external 
and communication 
operation modes.

15, 115

Reset input enabled 
only when protective 
function activated

16, 116

Reset input always 
enabled

Inverter output shut 
off when PU 
disconnected.

17, 117

Reset input enabled 
only when protective 
function activated

Pr.

GROUP

Fault code output function

Name

76

M510

Fault code output 
selection

Pr.76 setting

Description

0 (initial value)

Without fault code output

1

With fault code output (Refer to the table below.)

2

Fault code is output only when a fault occurs. 
(Refer to the table below.)

Operation panel 

indication (FR-

DU08)

Output terminal operation

Fault code

SU

IPF

OL

FU

Normal 



0

0

0

0

0

E.OC1

E.OCT

0

0

0

1

1

E.OC2

0

0

1

0

2

E.OC3

0

0

1

1

3

E.OV1 to E.OV3

E.OVT

0

1

0

0

4

E.THM

0

1

0

1

5

E.THT

0

1

1

0

6

E.IPF

0

1

1

1

7

E.UVT

1

0

0

0

8

E.FIN

1

0

0

1

9

E.BE

1

0

1

0

A

E. GF

1

0

1

1

B

E.OHT

1

1

0

0

C

E.OLT

1

1

0

1

D

E.OPT

E.OP1

1

1

1

0

E

Other than the 

above

1

1

1

1

F

Pr.

GROUP


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

125

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

Whether to enable the writing to various parameters or not can be 
selected. Use this function to prevent parameter values from being 
rewritten by misoperation.

This function can prevent reverse rotation fault resulting from the 
incorrect input of the start signal.

Select the operation mode of the inverter.
The mode can be changed among operations using external signals 
(External operation), operation by operation panel (FR-DU08) or 
parameter unit (FR-PU07) (PU operation), combined operation of 
PU operation and External operation (External/PU combined 
operation), and Network operation (when RS-485 terminals or 
communication option is used).

Parameter write selection

Name

77

E400

Parameter write 
selection

Pr.77 

setting

Description

0 (initial 

value)

Writing is enabled only during stop.

1

Parameter writing is disabled.

2

Parameter writing is enabled in any operation mode 
regardless of the operation status. (Writing is disabled for 
some parameters.)

Reverse rotation prevention selection

Name

78

D020

Reverse rotation 
prevention selection

Pr.78 setting

Description

0 (initial value)

Both forward and reverse rotations allowed

1

Reverse rotation disabled

2

Forward rotation disabled

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Operation mode selection

Name

Name

79

D000

Operation mode 
selection

340

D001

Communication startup 
mode selection

Pr.79

setting

Description

LED display

: OFF

: ON

0

(initial 

value)

Use the External/PU switchover mode (

) 

to switch between the PU and External 
operation mode.
At power ON, the inverter is in the External 
operation mode.

PU operation 
mode

External 
operation mode

NET operation 
mode

Operation 

mode

Frequency 

command

Start 

command

1

PU operation 
mode fixed

Operation panel 
(FR-DU08)
and
PU(FR-PU07)
.

 or 

 on PU 

(FR-DU08/FR-
PU07)

PU operation 
mode

2

External 
operation 
mode fixed.
The operation 
can be 
performed by 
switching 
between the 
External and 
NET operation 
modes.

External signal 
input (terminal 2 
and 4, 
JOG, multi-
speed selection, 
etc.)

External signal 
input
(terminal STF, 
STR)

External 
operation mode

NET operation 
mode

3

External/PU 
combined 
operation 
mode 1

PU (FR-DU08/
FR-PU07) or 
external signal 
input (multi-
speed setting, 
terminal 4)

 

External signal 
input
(terminal STF, 
STR)

External/PU 
combined 
operation mode

4

External/PU 
combined 
operation 
mode 2

External signal 
input (terminal 2 
and 4, JOG, 
multi-speed 
selection, etc.)

 or 

 on PU 

(FR-DU08/FR-
PU07)

6

Switchover mode
Switching of PU, External, and NET operation 
modes can be performed during operation.

PU operation 
mode

External 
operation mode

NET operation 
mode

7

External operation mode (PU operation 
interlock)
X12 signal ON: Switchover to PU operation 
mode enabled (during External operation, 
output shutoff)
X12 signal OFF: Switchover to PU operation 
mode disabled

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

126 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

 • Selecting the operation mode for power-ON (Pr.340)

When power is switched ON or when power comes back ON after 
an instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be started up in 
the Network operation mode.
After the inverter starts up in Network operation mode, parameter 
writing and operation can be commanded from programs.
Set this mode when performing communication operation using 
the RS-485 terminals or a communication option.
Use Pr.79 and Pr.340 to set the operation mode at power-ON 
(reset).



Use Pr.340 = "2 or 12" setting to perform communication with the 
RS-485 terminals.
Even if an instantaneous power failure occurs while Pr.57 Restart 
coasting time

 "9999" (with automatic restart after 

instantaneous power failure), the inverter continues operation at 
the condition before the instantaneous failure.



The operation mode cannot be directly changed between the PU 
operation mode and Network operation mode.



Switching between the PU and NET operation modes is available 

with the 

 key on the operation panel (FR-DU08) and the 

X65 signal.

Select the inverter control method.

Pr.340

setting

Pr.79

setting

Operation mode at 

power-ON, at power 

restoration, or after a 

reset.

Operation mode switching

0

(initial 

value)

Follows the Pr.79 setting.

1, 2

 



0

NET operation mode

Switching among the 
External, PU, and NET 
operation modes is 
enabled



1

PU operation mode

PU operation mode fixed

2

NET operation mode

Switching between the 
External and NET operation 
modes is enabled.
Switching to PU operation 
mode is disabled

3, 4

External/PU combined 
operation mode

Operation mode switching is 
disabled

6

NET operation mode

Switching among the 
External, PU, and NET 
operation mode is enabled 
while running.

7

X12 (MRS) signal ON
NET operation mode

Switching among the 
External, PU, and NET 
operation modes is enabled 



X12 (MRS) signal 
OFF
External operation 
mode

External operation mode 
fixed (Forcibly switched to 
External operation mode)

10, 12

 

 



0

NET operation mode

Switching between the PU 
and NET operation mode is 
enabled 



1

PU operation mode

PU operation mode fixed

2

NET operation mode

NET operation mode fixed

3, 4

External/PU combined 
operation mode

Operation mode switching is 
disabled

6

NET operation mode

Switching between the PU 
and NET operation mode is 
enabled while running



7

External operation 
mode

External operation mode 
fixed (Forcibly switched to 
External operation mode)

Changing the control method

Name

Name

71

C100 Applied motor

80

C101 Motor capacity

81

C102 Number of motor poles 83

C104 Rated motor voltage

84

C105 Rated motor frequency 89

G932

Speed control gain 
(Advanced magnetic 
flux vector)

450

C200 Second applied motor

451

G300

Second motor control 
method selection

453

C201 Second motor capacity 454

C202

Number of second 
motor poles

569

G942

Second motor speed 
control gain

800

G200

Control method 
selection

862

C242

Encoder option 
selection

Pr.80 

(Pr.453), 

Pr.81 

(Pr.454)

Pr.71

(Pr.450)

Pr.800 

setting 



Pr.451 

setting 



Control method Control mode

Other 

than

9999

Induction
motor



0, 100

Vector control



Speed control

1, 101

Torque control

2, 102

Speed control/
torque control 
switchover

3, 103

Position control

4, 104

Speed control/
position control 
switchover

5, 105

Position control/
torque control 
switchover

6, 106

Torque control 
(variable-
current limiter 
control)

9, 109

-

Vector control test operation

10, 110

Real sensorless 
vector control

Speed control

11, 111

Torque control

12, 112

Speed control/
torque control 
switchover

20
(initial 
value)

20

Advanced 
magnetic flux 
vector control

Speed control

-

9999
(initial 
value)

Advanced magnetic flux vector 
control for the second motor

IPM
motor 
(MM-CF)



9, 109

-

PM sensorless vector control test 
operation

13, 113

PM sensorless 
vector control

Position 
control



14, 114

Speed control/
position control 
switchover



20 
(initial 
value), 
110

20, 110

Speed control

IPM/SPM 
motor 
(other 
than MM-
CF)



9, 109

-

PM sensorless vector control test 
operation

20 
(initial 
value), 
110

20, 110

PM sensorless 
vector control

Speed control

0 to 6, 100 to 106

Vector control (Refer to the 
Instruction Manual of the FR-
A8APR.)

IPM/SPM 
motor

-

9999
(initial 
value)

The setting value of Pr.800 is used 
for the second motor.
(PM sensorless vector control 
(speed control) when Pr.800="9 or 
109")

9999



(initial 

value)

-

-

V/F control

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

127

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs



The setting values of 100 and above are used when the fast-
response operation is selected.



A vector control compatible option is required.



For induction motors, the operation for the setting of Pr.800 
(Pr.451) = "10 or 110", speed control under Real sensorless 
vector control, is performed when Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "13, 14, 113, 
or 114".



For IPM motors (MM-CF), the operation for the setting of Pr.800 
(Pr.451) = "20 or 110", speed control under PM sensorless vector 
control, is performed when a value other than "9, 13, 14, 109, 
113, 114, or 9999" is set in Pr.800 (Pr.451).



For IPM/SPM motors (other than MM-CF), the operation for the 
setting of Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "20 or 110", speed control under PM 
sensorless vector control, is performed when a value other than 
"9, 109, or 9999" is set in Pr.800 (Pr.451).



V/F control when Pr.80 or Pr.81 is "9999", regardless of the 
Pr.800 setting. When Pr.71 is set to the IPM motor MM-CF, PM 
sensorless vector control is enabled even if Pr.80 

 "9999" or 

Pr.81 = "9999".



Setting Pr.788 (Pr.747)Low speed range torque characteristic 
selection = "0" (lLow-speed range high-torque characteristic 
disabled) selects speed control.

  • Set  Pr.89 (Pr.569) to make adjustments to keep the motor speed 

constant during variable load operation under Advanced 
magnetic flux vector control.

 • The second motor control method can also be selected by the RT 

signal.

 • The Pr.22 function changes according to the Pr.800 setting (stall 

prevention operation level/torque limit level).

 • Setting Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "any of 100 to 105 or 109 to 114" 

selects the fast-response operation. The fast-response operation 
is available during vector control, Real sensorless vector control, 
and PM sensorless vector control.
(During fast-response operation, the carrier frequency is always 4 
kHz. During fast-response operation, continuous operation with 
100% inverter rated current is not possible. (E.THT is likely to 
occur.))

 • Using the FR-A8TP together with the FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-

A8APR enables vector control by switching between two 
encoder-equipped motors.

Offline auto tuning operation can be executed to automatically 
calculate the motor constant under Advanced magnetic flux vector 
control, Real sensorless vector control, vector control, or PM 
sensorless vector control.
Offline tuning is necessary under Real sensorless vector control.
Also, when the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure or 
flying start function is used under V/F control or with an IPM motor 
MM-CF, offline auto tuning improves the precision of the frequency 
search for motor speed detection.

Offline auto tuning 

Name

Name

82

C125

Motor excitation 
current

83

C104 Rated motor voltage

84

C105

Rated motor 
frequency

90

C120 Motor constant (R1)

91

C121 Motor constant (R2)

92

C122

Motor constant (L1)/
d-axis inductance 
(Ld)

93

C123

Motor constant (L2)/
q-axis inductance 
(Lq)

94

C124 Motor constant (X)

96

C110

Auto tuning setting/
status

455

C225

Second motor 
excitation current

456

C204

Rated second motor 
voltage

457

C205

Rated second motor 
frequency

458

C220

Second motor 
constant (R1)

459

C221

Second motor 
constant (R2)

460

C222

Second motor 
constant (L1) / d-axis 
inductance (Ld)

461

C223

Second motor 
constant (L2) / q-axis 
inductance (Lq)

462

C224

Second motor 
constant (X)

463

C210

Second motor auto 
tuning setting/status

859

C126

Torque current/Rated 
PM motor current

860

C226

Second motor torque 
current/Rated PM 
motor current

9

C103

Electronic thermal O/
L relay

51

C203

Second electronic 
thermal O/L relay

71

C100 Applied motor

80

C101 Motor capacity

81

C102

Number of motor 
poles

298

A711

Frequency search 
gain

450

C200

Second applied 
motor

453

C201

Second motor 
capacity

454

C202

Number of second 
motor poles

560

A712

Second frequency 
search gain

684

C000

Tuning data unit 
switchover

702

C106

Maximum motor 
frequency

706

C130

Induced voltage 
constant (phi f)

707

C107

Motor inertia 
(integer)

711

C131 Motor Ld decay ratio 712

C132 Motor Lq decay ratio

717

C182

Starting resistance 
tuning compensation

721

C185

Starting magnetic 
pole position 
detection pulse width 

724

C108

Motor inertia 
(exponent)

725

C133

Motor protection 
current level

738

C230

Second motor 
induced voltage 
constant (phi f)

739

C231

Second motor Ld 
decay ratio

740

C232

Second motor Lq 
decay ratio

741

C282

Second starting 
resistance tuning 
compensation

742

C285

Second motor 
magnetic pole 
detection pulse width

743

C206

Second motor 
maximum frequency

744

C207

Second motor inertia 
(integer)

745

C208

Second motor inertia 
(exponent)

746

C233

Second motor 
protection current 
level

1002 C150

Lq tuning target 
current adjustment 
coefficient

1412 C135

Motor induced 
voltage constant (phi 
f) exponent

1413 C235

Second motor 
induced voltage 
constant (phi f) 
exponent

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

128 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9



For Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless 
vector control and vector control



For V/F control and PM sensorless vector control

 • The offline tuning data (motor constants) can be copied to 

another inverter with the operation panel (FR-DU08).

 • Even if a motor other than Mitsubishi Electric standard motors 

(SF-JR 0.4 kW or higher), high-efficiency motors (SF-HR 0.4 kW 
or higher), Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motors (SF-JRCA 
4P, SF-HRCA 0.4 kW to 55 kW), Mitsubishi Electric high-
performance energy-saving motor SF-PR, or Mitsubishi Electric 
vector-dedicated motors (SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series)), such as 
other manufacturers' induction motors, SF-JRC, SF-TH, etc., is 
used, or when the wiring length is long (approx. 30 m or longer), 
an inductive motor can run with the optimum operation 
characteristics by using the offline auto tuning function.

 • The offline auto tuning enables the operation with SPM motors 

and IPM motors other than MM-CF when using the PM motor. 
When using a PM motor other than the IPM motor MM-CF series, 
offline auto tuning must be performed.

 • When using an induction motor, the motor rotation can be locked 

(Pr.96 = "1, 11") or unlocked (Pr.96 = "101").
The tuning is more accurate when the motor can rotate 
(unlocked).

 • Requirements for offline auto tuning

 • A motor is connected.
 • For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be 

equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (It must be 0.4 
kW or higher.)
Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than 
the inverter rated current will cause torque ripples, etc. and 
degrade the speed and orque accuracies. As a reference, 
select the motor with the rated motor current that is about 
40% or higher of the inverter rated current.

 • The highest frequency is 400 Hz.
 • The target motor is other than a high-slip motor, a high-speed 

motor, or a special motor.

 • When using an induction motor, check the following points if Pr.96 

(Pr.463) = "101" (Perform offline auto tuning by rotating the motor) 
is selected.

 • Torque is not sufficient during tuning.
 • The motor can be rotated up to the frequency close to the 

motor rated frequency (Pr.84 setting value).

 • The brake is released.

 • The motor may rotate slightly even if Pr.96 (Pr.463) = "1, 11" 

(performs tuning without rotating the motor) is selected. Fix the 
motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make 
sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates.
Make sure to perform the above especially in vertical lift 
applications.
Note that if the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is 
unaffected.

Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control or Real sensorless 
vector control, the excitation current scaling factor in the low-speed 
range can be adjusted.

Pr. 96 setting

Description

0 

(initial value)

No offline auto tuning

1 



Performs offline auto tuning without rotating the motor

101 



Performs offline auto tuning by rotating the motor

11 



Performs offline auto tuning without rotating the motor 
(V/F control, PM sensorless vector control (IPM motor 
MM-CF)).

Excitation current low-speed scaling 
factor

Name

Name

85

G201

Excitation current 
break point

86

G202

Excitation current 
low speed scaling 
factor

617

G080

Reverse rotation 
excitation current 
low-speed scaling 
factor

565

G301

Second motor 
excitation current 
break point

566

G302

Second motor 
excitation current 
low-speed scaling 
factor

14

G003

Load pattern 
selection

Pr.

Setting

range

Description

14

0 (initial 
value)

Excitation 
current 
low-speed 
scaling 
factor: 
Pr.86

For constant-torque load



1

For variable-torque load



2

For constant-torque lift (boost at reverse 
rotation: 0%)



3

For constant-torque lift (boost at forward 
rotation: 0%)



4

RT signal ON...for constant-torque load
RT signal OFF...for constant-torque lift 
(boost at reverse rotation: 0%)



5

RT signal ON...for constant-torque load
RT signal OFF...for constant-torque lift 
(boost at forward rotation: 0%)



12



Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling 
factor: Pr.86
Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling 
factor: Pr.617

13



Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling 
factor: Pr.617
Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling 
factor: Pr.86

14



Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling 
factor: Pr.86
Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling 
factor: Pr.617 (X17-OFF), Pr.86 (X17 signal-ON)

15



Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling 
factor: Pr.617 (X17-OFF), Pr.86 (X17 signal-ON)
Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling 
factor: Pr.86

85

0 to 400 Hz

Set the frequency at which increased excitation is 
started.

9999 (initial 
value)

SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined 
frequency is applied.
Motor other than the above: 10 Hz is applied.

86

0 to 300%

Set an excitation current scaling factor at 0 Hz.

9999 (initial 
value)

SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined 
scaling factor is applied.
Motor other than the above: 130% is applied.

617

0 to 300%

Set an excitation current scaling factor when different 
excitation current scaling factors are used for forward 
and reverse rotation.

9999 (initial 
value)

SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined 
scaling factor is applied.
Motor other than the above: 130% is applied.

565

0 to 400 Hz

Set an excitation current break point when the RT 
signal is ON.

9999 (initial 
value)

SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined 
frequency is applied.
Motor other than the above: 10 Hz is applied.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

129

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs



The setting is applied to the operation under V/F control.



The setting is valid only under Advanced magnetic flux vector 
control or Real sensorless vector control. When Pr.14 = "12 to 15" 
and V/F control is selected, the operation is the same as the one 
for constant-torque load (Pr.14 = "0").

If online auto tuning is selected, favorable torque accuracy is 
retained by adjusting temperature even when the resistance value 
varies due to increase in the motor temperature.
When vector control is used, select the magnetic flux observer.

 • Perform offline auto tuning before performing online auto tuning 

at startup.

 • When performing the online auto tuning at start for a lift, consider 

utilization of a brake sequence function for the brake opening 
timing at a start or tuning using the external terminal. The tuning 
is completed in approximately 500 ms at the maximum after the 
start. Not enough torque may be provided during that period. 
Caution is required to prevent the object from dropping.

 • Offline auto tuning is not necessary if selecting magnetic flux 

observer for the SF-V5RU, SF-JR (with encoder), SF-HR (with 
encoder), SF-JRCA (with encoder) or SF-HRCA (with encoder). 
(However, when the wiring length is long (30 m or longer as a 
reference), perform offline auto tuning so that the resistance for 
the wiring length can be reflected to the control.)

By setting a desired V/F characteristic from the start up to the base 
frequency or base voltage with the V/F control (frequency voltage/
frequency), a dedicated V/F pattern can be generated.
Optimal V/F patterns that match the torque characteristics of the 
facility can be set.
  • Set  Pr.71 = "2" and set a voltage and frequency in Pr.100 to 

Pr.109.

 • Read only error (

) is generated when the frequency value 

for each point is the same. Also, set the frequency and voltage 
within the range of Pr.3 Base frequency and Pr.19 Base 
frequency voltage.

 • At the time of Pr.19 Base frequency voltage = "8888, 9999", 

setting of Pr.71 = "2" cannot be made. When setting Pr.71 = "2", 
set the rated voltage value in Pr.19.

566

0 to 300%

Set an excitation current low-speed scaling factor when 
the RT signal is ON.

9999 (initial 
value)

SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined 
scaling factor is applied.
Motor other than the above: 130% is applied.

89

Refer to the page on Pr.80.

Online auto tuning 

Name

Name

95

C111

Online auto tuning 
selection

574

C211

Second motor online 
auto tuning

Pr.95

Pr.574

Description

0 (initial value)

Do not perform online auto tuning

1

Perform online auto tuning at startup

2

Magnetic flux observer (tuning always)

96

Refer to the page on Pr.82.

Pr.

Setting

range

Description

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Adjustable 5 points V/F

Name

Name

71

C100 Applied motor

100

G040 V/F1 (first frequency)

101

G041

V/F1 (first frequency 
voltage)

102

G042

V/F2 (second 
frequency)

103

G043

V/F2 (second 
frequency voltage)

104

G044

V/F3 (third 
frequency)

105

G045

V/F3 (third frequency 
voltage)

106

G046

V/F4 (fourth 
frequency)

107

G047

V/F4 (fourth frequency 
voltage)

108

G048 V/F5 (fifth frequency)

109

G049

V/F5 (fifth frequency 
voltage)

110, 111

Refer to the page on Pr.7.

112

Refer to the page on Pr.0.

113

Refer to the page on Pr.3.

114, 115

Refer to the page on Pr.22.

116

Refer to the page on Pr.41.

Initial settings for communication

Name

Name

117

N020

PU communication 
station number

118

N021

PU communication 
speed

119

N022

PU communication 
data length

119

N023

PU communication 
stop bit length

119

-

PU communication 
stop bit length / data 
length

120

N024

PU communication 
parity check

121

N025

PU communication 
retry count

122

N026

PU communication 
check time interval

123

N027

PU communication 
waiting time setting

124

N028

PU communication 
CR/LF selection

331

N030

RS-485 
communication 
station number

332

N031

RS-485 
communication 
speed

333

N032

RS-485 
communication data 
length

333

N033

RS-485 
communication stop 
bit length

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Base

frequency 

voltage

Pr.19

Base

frequency

Pr.3

Torque

boost

Pr.0

V/F Characteristic

0

V/F5

V/F4

V/F3

V/F2

V/F1

Frequency

Voltage

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

130 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

Set the action when the inverter is performing operation via 
communication.

Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 
communication (Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.331 to Pr.337, 
Pr.341)

Use the following parameters to perform required settings for the 
RS-485 communication between the inverter and a personal 
computer. (Setting Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.341, Pr.343, Pr.539, or 
Pr.549 is not available for the FR-A800-E.)

 • There are two types of communication, communication using 

the inverter's PU connector and communication using the RS-
485 terminals.

 • Parameter setting, monitoring, etc. can be performed using 

the Mitsubishi inverter protocol or MODBUS RTU 
communication protocol.

 • To establish communication between the computer and 

inverter, setting of the communication specifications must be 
made to the inverter in advance.

 • Data communication cannot be established if the initial 

settings are not made or if there is any setting error.



When communication is made from the RS-485 terminal using 
the MODBUS RTU protocol, the setting range in parentheses is 
applied to Pr.331.



Values in parentheses are added to the Pr.332 setting range.

Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr.342)

When parameter write is performed via communication, the 
parameters storage device can be changed from EEPROM + 
RAM to RAM only. If parameter settings are changed frequently, 
set "1" in Pr.342.

333

-

RS-485 
communication stop 
bit length / data 
length

334

N034

RS-485 
communication 
parity check 
selection

335

N035

RS-485 
communication retry 
count

336

N036

RS-485 
communication 
check time interval

337

N037

RS-485 
communication 
waiting time setting

341

N038

RS-485 
communication CR/
LF selection

342

N001

Communication 
EEPROM write 
selection

343

N080

Communication error 
count

349

N010

Communication reset 
selection

434

N110

Network number (CC-
Link IE)

435

N111

Station number (CC-
Link IE)

500

N011

Communication error 
execution waiting 
time

501

N012

Communication error 
occurrence count 
display

502

N013

Stop mode selection 
at communication 
error

539

N002

MODBUS RTU 
communication 
check time interval

541

N100

Frequency command 
sign selection

544

N103

CC-Link extended 
setting

549

N000 Protocol selection

779

N014

Operation frequency 
during 
communication error

1434 N600 Ethernet IP address 1

1435 N601 Ethernet IP address 2 1436 N602 Ethernet IP address 3
1437 N603 Ethernet IP address 4 1438 N610 Subnet mask 1
1439 N611 Subnet mask 2

1440 N612 Subnet mask 3

1441 N613 Subnet mask 4

1427 N630

Ethernet function 
selection 1

1428 N631

Ethernet function 
selection 2

1429 N632

Ethernet function 
selection 3

1426 N641

Link speed and 
duplex mode 
selection

1455 N642 Keepalive time

1431 N643

Ethernet signal loss 
detection function 
selection

1432 N644

Ethernet 
communication 
check time interval

1424 N650

Ethernet 
communication 
network number

1425 N651

Ethernet 
communication 
station number

1442 N660

Ethernet IP filter 
address 1

1443 N661

Ethernet IP filter 
address 2

1444 N662

Ethernet IP filter 
address 3

1445 N663

Ethernet IP filter 
address 4

1446 N664

Ethernet IP filter 
address 2 range 
specification

1447 N665

Ethernet IP filter 
address 3 range 
specification

1448 N666

Ethernet IP filter 
address 4 range 
specification

1449 N670

Ethernet command 
source selection IP 
address 1

1450 N671

Ethernet command 
source selection IP 
address 2

1451 N672

Ethernet command 
source selection IP 
address 3

1452 N673

Ethernet command 
source selection IP 
address 4

1453 N674

Ethernet command 
source selection IP 
address 3 range 
specification

1454 N675

Ethernet command 
source selection IP 
address 4 range 
specification

Name

Name

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Setting range

Description

117

331

0 to 31
(0 to 247)



Specify the inverter station number.
Set the inverter station numbers when two or 
more inverters are connected to one personal 
computer.

118

332

48, 96, 192, 384, 576, 
768, 1152
(3, 6, 12, 24)



Set the communication speed.
The setting value 

 100 equals the 

communication speed.
For example, if 192 is set, the communication 
speed is 19200 bps.

E022

N032

0 (initial value)

Data length 8 bits

1

Data length 7 bits

E023

N033

0

Stop bit length 1 bit

1 (initial value)

Stop bit length 2 bit

119

333

Stop bit length

Data length

0

1  bit

8 bits

1 (initial value)

2 bits

10

1 bit

7 bits

11

2 bits

120

334

0

Without parity check

1

With odd parity check

2 (initial value)

With even parity check

121

335

0 to 10

Set the permissible number of retries for 
unsuccessful data reception. If the number of 
consecutive errors exceeds the permissible 
value, the inverter will trip.

9999

If a communication error occurs, the inverter 
will not trip.

122

336

0

No PU connector communication (Pr.122)
Communication is available using the RS-485 
terminals, but the inverter trips in the NET 
operation mode. (Pr.336)

0.1 to 999.8 s

Set the interval of the communication check 
(signal loss detection) time.
If a no-communication state persists for longer 
than the permissible time, the inverter will trip.

9999 (initial value)

No communication check (signal loss detection)

123

337

0 to 150 ms

Set the waiting time between data transmission 
to the inverter and the response.

9999 (initial value)

Set with communication data.

124

341

0

Without CR/LF

1 (initial value)

With CR

2

With CR/LF


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

131

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

Operation selection at a communication error (Pr.502, 
Pr.779)

You can select the inverter's operation when a communication 
error occurs during communication other than the one through the 
PU connector. The operation is active under the Network 
operation mode.



The "E.EHR" indication appears during Ethernet communication 
(for the FR-A800-E only). If in communication by the 
communication option, E.OP1 is displayed.

MODBUS RTU communication specification (Pr.343, 
Pr.539, Pr.549)

The MODBUS RTU protocol is valid only in communication from 
the RS-485 terminals. (The setting is not available for the FR-
A800-E.)

Initial settings and specifications of Ethernet 
communication (FR-A800-E)

Use the following parameters to perform required settings for 
Ethernet communication between the inverter and other devices.

Pr.

Setting range

At fault occurrence

At fault removal

502

0
(initial value)

Coasts to stop
E.SER display 



ALM signal output

Stays stopped (E.SER 
display 



)

1

Deceleration stop
E.SER display after stop 



ALM signal output after 
stop

Stays stopped (E.SER 
display 



)

2

Deceleration stop
E.SER display after stop 



Automatic restart

3

Operation continued at the 
set frequency of Pr.779
Normal indication

Normal operation

4

Operation continued at the 
set frequency of Pr.779
"CF" indication

779

0  to 590 Hz

Set the frequency to be run at a communication error 
occurrence.

9999
(initial value)

The motor runs at the frequency used before the 
communication error.

Pr.

Setting range

Description

N033

0

Stop bit length 1 bit

Valid when Pr.N034 
(Pr.334) = "0"

1 (initial value)

Stop bit length 2 bits

333

0

Stop bit length 1 bit

Valid when Pr.334 = "0"

1 (initial value)

Stop bit length 2 bits

10

Stop bit length 1 bit

11

Stop bit length 2 bits

334

0

Without parity check
The stop bit length is selectable between 1 bit and 
2 bits (according to Pr.333).

1

With parity check at odd numbers
Stop bit length 1 bit

2 (initial value)

With parity check at even numbers
Stop bit length 1 bit

343

-

Displays the communication error count during 
MODBUS RTU communication. Read-only.

539

0

MODBUS RTU communication, but the inverter 
trips in the NET operation mode.

0.1 to 999.8 s

Set the interval of the communication check (signal 
loss detection) time. (the same specifications as 
Pr.122)

9999 
(initial value)

No communication check (signal loss detection)

549

0 (initial value)

Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link)

1

MODBUS RTU protocol

Pr.

Setting range

Description

1434

0 to 255

Enter the IP address of the inverter to be 
connected to Ethernet.

1435
1436
1437
1438

0 to 255

Enter the subnet mask of the network to which the 
inverter belongs.

1439
1440
1441

1427 502, 

5000 to 5002, 
5006 to 5008, 
5010 to 5013, 
9999, 45237, 
61450

Set the application, protocol, etc.

1428

1429

1426 0 to 4

Set the communication speed and the 
communication mode (full-duplex/half-duplex).

1455 1 to 7200 s

When no response is returned for an alive check 
message (KeepAlive ACK) for the time (s) set in 
Pr.1455 multiplied by 4 elapsed, the connection 
will be forced to be closed.

1431

0 (initial value)

Signal loss detection
disabled.

Set the availability of 
the signal loss 
detection and select 
the action when 
Ethernet 
communication is 
interrupted by physical 
factors.

1

A warning (EHR) is 
output for a signal loss.

2

A warning (EHR) and the 
Alarm (LF) signal are 
output for a signal loss.

3

A protective function 
(E.EHR) is activated for a 
signal loss.

1432

0

Ethernet communication is available, but the 
inverter trips in the NET operation mode.

0.1 to 999.8 s

Set the interval of the communication check 
(signal loss detection) time for all devices with IP 
addresses in the range specified for Ethernet 
command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454).
If a no-communication state persists for the 
permissible time or longer, the inverter will trip.

9999 (initial 
value)

No communication check (signal loss detection)

1424 1 to 239

Enter the network number.

1425 1 to 120

Enter the station number.

1442

0 to 255

Set the range of connectable IP addresses for the 
network devices.
(When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the 
function is invalid.)

1443
1444
1445
1446

0 to 255, 9999

1447
1448

1449

0 to 255

Set the range of IP addresses to limit the network 
devices that can be used as a command source 
during Ethernet communication (with MODBUS/
TCP or CC-Link IE Field Network Basic).
When Pr.1449 to Pr.1452 = "0 (initial value)", no 
IP address is specified for sending commands 
through the Ethernet network. In this case, 
operation through the Ethernet network 
(MODBUS/TCP or CC-Link IE Field Network 
Basic) is not available.
When four or more clients attempt a connection to 
the inverter during MODBUS/TCP communication, 
the connection attempted from outside of the IP 
address range set for Ethernet command source 
selection may be forced to be closed.

1450

1451

1452

1453

0 to 255, 9999

1454


background image

132 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic function setting (FR-
A800-E)

The CC-Link IE Field Network Basic enables CC-Link IE 
communication using the general-purpose Ethernet-based 
technology. The CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is suited to 
small-scale equipment for which high-speed control is not 
necessary, and can coexist with the standard Ethernet TCP/IP 
(HTTP, FTP, etc.). (Pr.544 can be set only when the FR-A800-E is 
used or a compatible plug-in option is installed.)

CC-Link IE Field Network function setting
(FR-A800-GF)

Use the following parameters to perform required settings for CC-
Link IE Field Network communication between the inverter and 
other stations. (Pr.349, Pr.500, and Pr.501 can be set only when 
the FR-A800-GF inverter is used or when a compatible plug-in 
option is installed to the FR-A800 inverter.)

The degree (slope) of the output frequency (speed, torque/magnetic 
flux) to the frequency/torque setting signal (0 to 5 V DC, 0 to 10 V 
DC or 4 to 20 mA) is selectable to a desired amount.
 • To change the frequency (speed) for the maximum analog input 

(Pr.125, Pr.126, C14 (Pr.918))
To change only the frequency setting (gain) for the maximum 
analog input voltage (current), set Pr.125 (Pr.126, C14 (Pr.918)). 
(Other calibration parameter settings do not need to be changed.)

 • To change the torque/magnetic flux for the maximum analog input 

(C18 (Pr.920), C40 (Pr.933))
To change only the torque/magnetic flux command of the 
maximum analog input voltage (current), set to C18 (Pr.920), C40 
(Pr.933). (Other calibration parameter settings do not need to be 
changed.)

 • Calibration of analog input bias and gain (C2 (Pr.902) to C7 

(Pr.905), C16 (Pr.919) to C19 (Pr.920), C38 (Pr.932) to C41 
(Pr.933))
The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the relationship 
between the output frequency (torque/magnetic flux) and the 
setting input signal, such as 0 to 5 V DC/0 to 10 V DC or 4 to 20 
mA DC, entered from outside to set the output frequency (torque/
magnetic flux).

 • Analog input display unit changing (Pr.241)

The analog input display unit (%/V/mA) for analog input bias and 
gain calibration can be changed.

Pr.

Setting range

Description

541

0 (initial value)

Frequency command without sign

1

Frequency command with sign

544

0 (initial value), 1, 12, 
14, 18, 24, 28, 100, 
112, 114, 118, 128

The function of the remote registers can be 
extended when the CC-Link IE Field 
Network Basic is used.

Pr.

Setting range

Description

434 0 to 255

Set the inverter network number.

435 0 to 255

Set the inverter station number.

541

0 (initial value)

Frequency command without sign

1

Frequency command with sign

Changing and adjusting (calibrating) the 
frequency (speed) and torque/magnetic 
flux using analog input

Name

Name

125
(903)

T202
T022

Terminal 2 frequency 
setting gain 
frequency

126
(905)

T402
T042

Terminal 4 frequency 
setting gain 
frequency

C2
(902)

T200

Terminal 2 frequency 
setting bias 
frequency

C3
(902)

T201

Terminal 2 frequency 
setting bias 

C4
(903)

T203

Terminal 2 frequency 
setting gain

C5
(904)

T400

Terminal 4 frequency 
setting bias 
frequency

C6
(904)

T401

Terminal 4 frequency 
setting bias 

C7
(905)

T403

Terminal 4 frequency 
setting gain

C12
(917)

T100

Terminal 1 bias 
frequency (speed)

C13
(917)

T101

Terminal 1 bias 
(speed)

C14
(918)

T102

Terminal 1 gain 
frequency (speed)

C15
(918)

T103

Terminal 1 gain 
(speed)

C16
(919)

T110

Terminal 1 bias 
command (torque/
magnetic flux)

C17
(919)

T111

Terminal 1 bias 
(torque/magnetic 
flux)

C18
(920)

T112

Terminal 1 gain 
command (torque/
magnetic flux)

C19
(920)

T113

Terminal 1 gain 
(torque/magnetic 
flux)

C38
(932)

T410

Terminal 4 bias 
command (torque/
magnetic flux)

C39
(932)

T411

Terminal 4 bias 
(torque/magnetic 
flux)

C40
(933)

T412

Terminal 4 gain 
command (torque/
magnetic flux)

C41
(933)

T413

Terminal 4 gain 
(torque/magnetic 
flux)

241

M043

Analog input display 
unit switchover

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

60Hz

(50Hz)

Output frequency 

(Hz)

Pr.125
C14(Pr.918)

0

0
0

Frequency setting signal

100%

10V
20mA

Initial value

Bias

Gain

0

5V

C2
C12(Pr.917)

C3(Pr.902)
C13(Pr.917)

C4(Pr.903)
C15(Pr.918)

60 Hz
(50 Hz)

Pr.126

0

Frequency setting signal

100%

Initial value

Bias

Gain

0

20

4

20 mA

Output frequency 

(Hz)

C5

(Pr.904)

C6(Pr.904)

C7(Pr.905)

0

1

5  V

0

2

10 V

Calibration example of terminal 1

400

150

-150

0

0

Torque setting signal

100%

10V

Initial value

Bias

0

5V

(-5V)

-100%

(-10V)

C18(Pr.920)

Gain

C16(Pr.919)

C17(Pr.919)

C19(Pr.920)

T

orque(%)

400

150

0

Torque setting signal

100%

Bias

0

20

4

20mA

C40
(Pr.933)

Gain

C38

(Pr.932)

C39(Pr.932)

C41(Pr.933)

Calibration example of terminal 4

T

orque(%)

Initial value


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

133

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

PID control

Process control such as control of the flow rate, air volume or 
pressure, is possible via the inverter.
When the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is used, the display unit of 
parameters and monitored items related to PID control can be 
changed to various units.
A feedback system can be configured and PID control can be 
performed using the terminal 2 input signal or parameter setting 
value as the set point, and the terminal 4 input signal as the 
feedback value.
  •   Pr.128 = "10, 11" (deviation value signal input)

 • Pr.128 = "20, 21" (measured value input)

When the second PID function is set, two sets of PID functions 
can be switched for use. The second PID function is enabled by 
turning ON the RT signal.

Dancer control

Dancer control is performed by setting "40 to 43" in Pr.128 PID 
action selection. The main speed command is the speed 
command for each operation mode (External, PU and 
communication). PID control is performed by the dancer roll 
position detection signal, and the control result is added to the 
main speed command. For the main speed acceleration/
deceleration time, set the acceleration time to Pr.44 Second 
acceleration/deceleration time and the deceleration time to 
Pr.45 Second deceleration time.

PID control, Dancer control

Name

Name

127

A612

PID control automatic 
switchover frequency

128

A610 PID action selection

129

A613

PID proportional 
band

130

A614 PID integral time

131

A601 PID upper limit

132

A602 PID lower limit

133

A611 PID action set point

134

A615 PID differential time

553

A603 PID deviation limit

554

A604

PID signal operation 
selection

575

A621

Output interruption 
detection time

576

A622

Output interruption 
detection level

577

A623

Output interruption 
cancel level

609

A624

PID set point/
deviation input 
selection

610

A625

PID measured value 
input selection

753

A650

Second PID action 
selection

754

A652

Second PID control 
automatic switchover 
frequency

755

A651

Second PID action 
set point

756

A653

Second PID 
proportional band

757

A654

Second PID integral 
time

758

A655

Second PID 
differential time

C42
(934)

A630

PID display bias 
coefficient

C43
(934)

A631

PID display bias 
analog value

C44
(935)

A632

PID display gain 
coefficient

C45
(935)

A633

PID display gain 
analog value

1015 A607

Integral stop 
selection at limited 
frequency

1140 A664

Second PID set point/
deviation input 
selection

1141 A665

Second PID measured 
value input selection

1142 A640

Second PID unit 
selection

1143 A641

Second PID upper 
limit

1144 A642

Second PID lower 
limit

1145 A643

Second PID deviation 
limit

1146 A644

Second PID signal 
operation selection

1147 A661

Second output 
interruption 
detection time

1148 A662

Second output 
interruption 
detection level

1149 A663

Second output 
interruption cancel 
level

759

A600 PID unit selection

1134 A605

PID upper limit 
manipulated value

1135 A606

PID lower limit 
manipulated value

1136 A670

Second PID display 
bias coefficient

1137 A671

Second PID display 
bias analog value

1138 A672

Second PID display 
gain coefficient

1139 A673

Second PID display 
gain analog value

44

F020

Second acceleration/
deceleration time

45

F021

Second deceleration 
time

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

+-

M

Deviation signal

Feedback signal (measured value)

Ti   S 

1

1+

+Td   S

Kp

PID operation

To outside

Set point

Inverter circuit

Motor

Terminal 1

0 to    10VDC

(0 to    5V)

Kp: Proportionality constant   Ti: Integral time   S: Operator   Td: Differential time

Manipulated
variable

∗1

+-

M

Pr.133

 or

terminal 2

Set point

Terminal 4

0 to 5VDC
(0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA)

4 to 20mADC (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V)

Feedback signal (measured value)

PID operation

Inverter circuit

Motor

Kp: Proportionality constant   Ti: Integral time   S: Operator   Td: Differential time

Manipulated
variable

Ti   S 

1

1+

+Td   S

Kp

∗3

∗2

STF

PID adding value

Main speed

ON

Output frequency

Time

Output frequency


background image

134 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

The inverter contains complicated sequence circuits for switching 
between the commercial power supply operation and inverter 
operation. Therefore, interlock operation of the magnetic contactor 
for switching can be easily performed by simply inputting start, stop, 
and automatic switching selection signals.
The commercial power supply operation is not available with 
Mitsubishi Electric vector control dedicated motors (SF-V5RU).

Sink logic, Pr.185 = "7", Pr.192 = "17", Pr.193 = "18", Pr.194 = "19"

Electronic bypass sequence connection diagram (standard 
model)



Be careful of the capacity of the sequence output terminals.



When connecting a DC power supply, insert a protective diode.



The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 
(input terminal function selection) .

The display language of the parameter unit (FR-PU07) can be 
selected.

The output current during inverter running can be detected and 
output to the output terminal.
 • Output current detection

(Y12 signal, Pr.150, Pr.151, Pr.166, Pr.167)

 • The output current detection function can be used for 

purposes such as overtorque detection.

 • If the output during inverter running is the Pr.150 setting or 

higher for the time set in Pr.151 or longer, the output current 
detection signal (Y12) is output from the inverter's open 
collector or relay output terminal.

 • Zero current detection (Y13 signal, Pr.152, Pr.153, Pr.167)

If the output during inverter running is the Pr.152 setting or lower 
for the time set in Pr.153 or longer, the zero current detection 
signal (Y13) is output from the inverter's open collector or relay 
output terminal.

 • Output current detection operation selection (Pr.167)

Commercial power supply-inverter 
switchover function 

Name

Name

135

A000

Electronic bypass 
sequence selection

136

A001

MC switchover 
interlock time

137

A002 Start waiting time

138

A003

Bypass selection at a 
fault

139

A004

Automatic switchover 
frequency from inverter 
to bypass operation

159

A005

Automatic switchover 
frequency range from 
bypass to inverter 
operation

57

A702 Restart coasting time 58

A703 Restart cushion time

Pr.135 setting

Description

0 (initial value)

Without electronic bypass sequence

1

With electronic bypass sequence

140 to 143

Refer to the page on Pr.29.

144

Refer to the page on Pr.37.

PU display language selection

Name

145

E103

PU display language 
selection

Pr.145 setting

Description

Pr.145 setting

Description

0

Japanese

4

Spanish

1

English

5

Italian

2

German

6

Swedish

3

French

7

Finnish

147

Refer to the page on Pr.7.

148, 149

Refer to the page on Pr.22.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Inverter start

(forward rotation)

MC1

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

STF

R1/L11
S1/L21

CS
MRS

RES
SD

10
2
5

U
V

W

External
thermal relay

IM

MC1

MC2

SE

∗1

∗1

∗1

∗2

MC3

MC2

24VDC

MC1

External thermal

Frequency
setting signal 

MC3

Inverter/bypass

operation interlock

∗3

OH

MCCB

MC2

MC3

MC2

MC3

Reset

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Output current detection (Y12 signal) 
and zero current detection (Y13 signal)

Name

Name

150

M460

Output current 
detection level

151

M461

Output current detection 
signal delay time

152

M462

Zero current 
detection level

153

M463

Zero current 
detection time

166

M433

Output current detection 
signal retention time

167

M464

Output current detection 
operation selection

Pr.167 setting

Y12 signal-ON

Y13 signal-ON

0 (initial value)

Continuous operation Continuous operation

1

E.CDO

Continuous operation

10

Continuous operation E.CDO

11

E.CDO

E.CDO

154

Refer to the page on Pr.22.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Time

Pr.150

OFF

ON

OFF

Output current 

detection signal

(Y12)

Pr.166

Output current

Pr.166

     "9999", Pr.167

 = "0"

Pr.151

OFF

ON

Start signal

Time

Output 
current

OFF

ON

Zero current 
detection time 
(Y13)

Pr.153

 

Detection time

Pr.153

 

Detection time

Pr.152

OFF

ON

0[A]

0.1s 

∗

Pr.152

∗ When the output is restored to the Pr.152 level, the Y13 

signal is turned OFF after 0.1 s.

Pr.167

 = "0" 

Pr.


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

135

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

The second (third) function can be selected by the RT (X9) signal.
Operating conditions (validity conditions) for the second (third) 
function can also be set.

 • Items that can be set as the second function and third function

(When the RT (X9) signal is ON, the following second (third) 
functions are selected at the same time. )



The function can be changed by switching the RT signal ON/OFF 
while the inverter is stopped. If a signal is switched during 
operation, the operation method changes after the inverter stops.



When the RT signal is OFF, the first function is selected and when 
it is ON, the second function is selected.

This function restricts the parameters that are read by the operation 
panel and parameter unit.
The initial setting displays all parameters.

 • User group function (Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174)

The user group function is a function for displaying only the 
parameters required for a setting.
A maximum of 16 parameters from any of the parameters can be 
registered in a user group. When Pr.160 = "1", reading/writing is 
enabled only for the parameters registered in user groups. 
(Parameters not registered in user groups can no longer be read.)
To register a parameter in a user group, set the parameter 
number in Pr.173.
To clear a parameter from a user group, set the parameter 
number in Pr.174. To batch clear all the registered parameters, 
set Pr.172 = "9999".

Setting dial potentiometer mode/key lock 
operation selection (Pr.161)

The setting dial of the operation panel (FR-DU08) can be used for 
setting like a potentiometer.
The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.

Frequency change increment amount setting 
(Pr.295)

When setting a frequency using the setting dial on the operation 
panel (FR-DU08), the frequency change increment is determined by 
how quickly the setting dial is rotated.

Selecting operating conditions of the 
second function signal (RT) and the 
third function signal (X9)

Name

155

T730

RT signal function 
validity condition 
selection

Pr.155 setting

Description

0 (initial value)

The second (third) function is immediately 
enabled with ON of the RT (X9) signal.

10

The second (third) function will be enabled while the RT 
signal is ON and while running at a constant speed. 
(Disabled while accelerating or decelerating)

Function

First function

Parameter 

number

Second 

function

Parameter 

number

Third function

Parameter 

number

Torque boost

Pr.0

Pr.46

Pr.112

Base frequency

Pr.3

Pr.47

Pr.113

Acceleration time

Pr.7

Pr.44

Pr.110

Deceleration time

Pr.8

Pr.44, Pr.45

Pr.110, Pr.111

Electronic thermal 

O/L relay

Pr.9

Pr.51



Free thermal

Pr.600 to Pr.604 Pr.692 to Pr.696



Stall prevention

Pr.22

Pr.48, Pr.49

Pr.114, Pr.115

Applied motor 



Pr.71

Pr.450



Motor constant 



Pr.80 to Pr.84, 
Pr.89 to Pr.94, 
Pr.298, Pr.702, 
Pr.706, Pr.707, 
Pr.711, Pr.712, 
Pr.717, Pr.721, 
Pr.724, Pr.725, 
Pr.859

Pr.453 to Pr.457, 
Pr.560, Pr.569, 
Pr.458 to Pr.462, 
Pr.738 to Pr.747, 
Pr.860



Offline auto tuning 



Pr.96

Pr.463



Online auto tuning 



Pr.95

Pr.574



PID control

Pr.127 to Pr.134 Pr.753 to Pr.758



PID pre-charge 

function

Pr.760 to Pr.764 Pr.765 to Pr.769



Brake sequence 



Pr.278 to Pr.285, 
Pr.639, Pr.640

Pr.641 to Pr.648, 
Pr.650, Pr.651



Droop

Pr.286 to Pr.288,
Pr.994, Pr.995

Pr.679 to Pr.683



Low-speed range 

torque 

characteristic 

selection 



Pr.788

Pr.747



Motor control 

method 



Pr.800

Pr.451



Speed control gain Pr.820, Pr.821

Pr.830, Pr.831



Analog input filter

Pr.822, Pr.826

Pr.832, Pr.836



Speed detection 

filter

Pr.823

Pr.833



Torque control gain Pr.824, Pr.825

Pr.834, Pr.835



Torque detection filter Pr.827

Pr.837



156, 157

Refer to the page on Pr.22.

158

Refer to the page on Pr.52.

159

Refer to the page on Pr.135.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

User group function

Name

Name

160

E440

User group read 
selection

172

E441

User group 
registered display/
batch clear

173

E442

User group 
registration

174

E443 User group clear

Pr.160

setting

Description

0 

(initial value) Displays all parameters.

1

Displays parameters registered in the user group.

9999

Displays only the simple mode parameters.

Operation panel operation selection

Name

Name

161

E200

Frequency setting/
key lock operation 
selection

295

E201

Frequency change 
increment amount 
setting

Pr.161  setting

Description

0 

(initial value)

Setting dial frequency setting 
mode

Key lock mode 
disabled

1

Setting dial potentiometer mode

10

Setting dial frequency setting 
mode

Key lock mode 
enabled

11

Setting dial potentiometer mode

162 to 165

Refer to the page on Pr.57.

166, 167

Refer to the page on Pr.150.

168, 169

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

170, 171

Refer to the page on Pr.52.

172 to 174

Refer to the page on Pr.160.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.


background image

136 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

Use the following parameters to select or change the input terminal 
functions.
(When Pr.419 Position command source selection = "2" (simple 
pulse train position command), terminal JOG is used as a simple 
position pulse train input terminal, independently of the Pr.185 
setting.)



When Pr.59 Remote function selection 

 "0", functions of the 

RL, RM, and RH signals will be changed as in the table.



When Pr.270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed 
frequency control selection = "1, 3, 11, or 13", functions of the 
RL and RT signals will be changed as in the table.



The OH signal will operate with the relay contact "open".



When the stop position is to be input externally for orientation 
control, the FR-A8AX (16-bit digital input) is required.



Servo ON is enabled during the position control.



Available when the option is connected.



The setting is available only for standard models and IP55 
compatible models.

 • Adjusting the response of input terminal (Pr.699)

Input terminal function assignment

Name

Name

178

T700

STF terminal function 
selection

179

T701

STR terminal 
function selection

180

T702

RL terminal function 
selection

181

T703

RM terminal function 
selection

182

T704

RH terminal function 
selection

183

T705

RT terminal function 
selection

184

T706

AU terminal function 
selection

185

T707

JOG terminal 
function selection

186

T708

CS terminal function 
selection

187

T709

MRS terminal 
function selection

188

T710

STOP terminal 
function selection

189

T711

RES terminal 
function selection

699

T740 Input terminal filter

Setting

Signal 

name

Function

0

RL

Pr.59 = 0 (initial value)

Low-speed operation 
command

Pr.59 

 0 



Remote setting (setting 
clear)

Pr.270 = 1, 3, 11, 13 



Stop-on-contact selection 0

1

RM

Pr.59 = 0 (initial value)

Middle-speed operation 
command

Pr.59 

 0 



Remote setting 
(deceleration)

2

RH

Pr.59 = 0 (initial value)

High-speed operation 
command

Pr.59 

 0 



Remote setting 
(acceleration)

3

RT

Second function selection
Pr.270 = 1, 3, 11, 13 



Stop-on-contact selection 1

4

AU

Terminal 4 input selection

5

JOG

Jog operation selection

6

CS

Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power 
failure, flying start
Electronic bypass function

7

OH

External thermal relay input 



8

REX

15-speed selection (Combination with multi-speeds of 
RL, RM, and RH)

9

X9

Third function selection

10

X10

Inverter run enable signal (FR-HC2/FR-CV/FR-CC2 
connection)

11

X11

FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection, instantaneous power 
failure detection

12

X12

PU operation external interlock

13

X13

External DC injection brake operation start

14

X14

PID control valid terminal

15

BRI

Brake opening completion signal

16

X16

PU/External operation switchover (External operation 
with X16-ON)

17

X17

Load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost (for 
constant-torque load with X17-ON)

18

X18

V/F switchover (V/F control with X18-ON)

19

X19

Load torque high-speed frequency

20

X20

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover

22

X22

Orientation command (for vector control compatible 
option)



23

LX

Pre-excitation/servo ON 



24

MRS

Output stop
Electronic bypass function

25

STOP

Start self-holding selection

26

MC

Control mode switchover

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

27

TL

Torque limit selection

28

X28

Start-time tuning start external input

37

X37

Traverse function selection

42

X42

Torque bias selection 1

43

X43

Torque bias selection 2

44

X44

P/PI control switchover(P control with X44-ON)

45

BRI2

Second brake sequence open completion

46

TRG

Trace trigger input

47

TRC

Trace sampling start/end

48

X48

Power failure stop external

50

SQ

Sequence start

51

X51

Fault clear signal

52

X52

Cumulative pulse monitor clear (for vector control 
compatible option)



53

X53

Cumulative pulse monitor clear (control terminal option) 
(for FR-A8TP)



57

JOGF

JOG forward rotation command

58

JOGR

JOG reverse rotation command

59

CLRN

NET position pulse clear

60

STF

Forward rotation command (Assignable to the STF 
terminal (Pr.178) only)

61

STR

Reverse rotation command (Assignable to the STR 
terminal (Pr.179) only)

62

RES

Inverter reset

64

X64

During retry

65

X65

PU/NET operation switchover (PU operation with X65-ON)

66

X66

External/NET operation switchover (NET operation with 
X66-ON)

67

X67

Command source switchover (Command by Pr.338, 
Pr.339 enabled with X67-ON)

68

NP

Simple position pulse train sign

69

CLR

Simple position droop pulse clear

70

X70

DC feeding operation permission



71

X71

DC feeding cancel



72

X72

PID P control switchover

73

X73

Second PID P control switchover

74

X74

Magnetic flux decay output shutoff signal

76

X76

Proximity dog

77

X77

Pre-charge end command

78

X78

Second pre-charge end command

79

X79

Second PID forward/reverse action switchover

80

X80

Second PID control valid terminal

85

X85

SSCNET III(/H) communication disabled (for FR-A8NS)



87

X87

Sudden stop

88

X88

Upper stroke limit (for FR-A8NS)



89

X89

Lower stroke limit (for FR-A8NS)



92

X92

Emergency stop

93

X93

Torque control selection

94

X94

Control signal input for main circuit power supply MC

95

X95

Converter unit fault input

96

X96

Converter unit fault (E.OHT, E.CPU) input

9999

----

No function

Pr.699 setting

Description

5 to 50 ms

Set the time to delay the input terminal response.

9999 (initial value) No input terminal filter

Setting

Signal 

name

Function


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

137

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

Use the following parameters to change the functions of the open 
collector output terminals and relay output terminals.
Pr.313 to Pr.315 can be set only when the FR-A800-GF is used or a 
compatible plug-in option is installed.



Be careful when changing the frequency setting with an analog 
signal or the setting dial of the operation panel (FR-DU08) 
because this change speed and the timing of the change speed 
determined by the acceleration/deceleration time setting may 
cause the output of the SU (up to frequency) signal to switch 
repeatedly between ON and OFF. (This repeating does not occur 
when the acceleration/deceleration time setting is "0 s".)



When the power is reset, the fault output 2 signal (ALM2) turns 
OFF at the same time as the power turns OFF.



Available when the option is connected.



The setting is available only for standard models.



The setting is available only for standard models and IP55 
compatible models.



The setting can be used for Pr.313 to Pr.322 for the FR-A800-GF 
or when an option (FR-A8AY, FR-A8AR, FR-A8NC, or FR-
A8NCE) is installed. For the corresponding parameters of each 
option, refer to the Instruction Manual of the option.



The function is not available in the FR-A842-P.



The setting is available only in the FR-A842-P.



The setting is available only in the FR-A800-E.

 • Adjusting the output terminal response level (Pr.289)

Output terminal function assignment

Name

Name

190

M400

RUN terminal 
function selection

191

M401

SU terminal function 
selection

192

M402

IPF terminal function 
selection

193

M403

OL terminal function 
selection

194

M404

FU terminal function 
selection

195

M405

ABC1 terminal 
function selection

196

M406

ABC2 terminal 
function selection

289

M431

Inverter output 
terminal filter

313

M410 DO0 output selection 314

M411 DO1 output selection

315

M412 DO2 output selection

Setting

Signal 

name

Function

Positive 

logic

Negative 

logic

0

100

RUN

Inverter running

1

101

SU

Up to frequency



2

102

IPF

Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage



3

103

OL

Overload warning

4

104

FU

Output frequency detection

 

5

105

FU2

Second output frequency detection 

6

106

FU3

Third output frequency detection

7

107

RBP

Regenerative brake pre-alarm



8

108

THP

Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm

10

110

PU

PU operation mode

11

111

RY

Inverter operation ready

12

112

Y12

Output current detection

13

113

Y13

Zero current detection

14

114

FDN

PID lower limit

15

115

FUP

PID upper limit

16

116

RL

PID forward/reverse rotation output

17

----

MC1

Electronic bypass MC1

18

----

MC2

Electronic bypass MC2

19

----

MC3

Electronic bypass MC3

20

120

BOF

Brake opening request

22

122

BOF2

Second brake opening request

25

125

FAN

Fan fault output

26

126

FIN

Heatsink overheat pre-alarm

27

127

ORA

Orientation complete 
(for vector control compatible option)



28

128

ORM

Orientation fault 
(for vector control compatible option)



30

130

Y30

Forward rotation output 
(for vector control compatible option)



31

131

Y31

Reverse rotation output 
(for vector control compatible option)



32

132

Y32

Regenerative status output 
(for vector control compatible option)



33

133

RY2

Operation ready 2

34

134

LS

Low speed detection

35

135

TU

Torque detection

36

136

Y36

In-position

38

138

MEND

Travel completed

39

139

Y39

Start time tuning completion

40

140

Y40

Trace status

41

141

FB

Speed detection

42

142

FB2

Second speed detection

43

143

FB3

Third speed detection

44

144

RUN2

Inverter running 2

45

145

RUN3

Inverter running and start command is ON

46

146

Y46

During deceleration at occurrence of power 
failure



47

147

PID

During PID control activated

48

148

Y48

PID deviation limit

49

149

Y49

During pre-charge operation

50

150

Y50

During second pre-charge operation

51

151

Y51

Pre-charge time over

52

152

Y52

Second pre-charge time over

53

153

Y53

Pre-charge level over

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

54

154

Y54

Second pre-charge level over

55

155

Y55

Motor temperature detection (for FR-A8AZ)



56

156

ZA

Home position return failure

57

157

IPM

During PM sensorless vector control



60

160

FP

Position detection level

61

161

PBSY

During position command operation

63

163

ZPEND Home position return completed

64

164

Y64

During retry



67

167

Y67

Power failure signal

68

168

EV

24 V external power supply operation

70

170

SLEEP

PID output interruption

79

179

Y79

Pulse train output of output power

80

180

SAFE

Safety monitor output



84

184

RDY

Position control preparation ready

85

185

Y85

DC current feeding



86

186

Y86

Control circuit capacitor life
(For Pr.313 to Pr.322)



87

187

Y87

Main circuit capacitor life
(For Pr.313 to Pr.322)



88

188

Y88

Cooling fan life
(For Pr.313 to Pr.322)



89

189

Y89

Inrush current limit circuit life
(For Pr.313 to Pr.322)



90

190

Y90

Life alarm

91

191

Y91

Fault output 3 (power-OFF signal)

92

192

Y92

Energy saving average value updated timing

93

193

Y93

Current average monitor signal

94

194

ALM2

Fault output 2

95

195

Y95

Maintenance timer signal

96

196

REM

Remote output

97

197

ER

Alarm output 2

98

198

LF

Alarm

99

199

ALM

Fault

200

300

FDN2

Second PID lower limit

201

301

FUP2

Second PID upper limit

202

302

RL2

Second PID forward/reverse rotation output

203

303

PID2

Second During PID control activated

204

304

SLEEP2 During second PID output shutoff

205

305

Y205

Second PID deviation limit

206

306

Y206

Cooling fan operation command signal

207

307

Y207

Control circuit temperature signal

208

308

PS

PU stopped signal

211

311

LUP

Upper limit warning detection



212

312

LDN

Lower limit warning detection



213

313

Y213

During load characteristics measurement



227

327

Y227

Parallel operation ready



242

342

LNK

Inverter-to-inverter linkup



9999

----

No function

Pr. 289 setting

Description

5 to 50 ms

Set the time delay for the output terminal 
response.

9999 

(initial value)

No output terminal filter.

Setting

Signal 

name

Function

Positive 

logic

Negative 

logic


background image

138 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

A cooling fan is built into the inverter and its operation can be 
controlled.

Motor slip is estimated from the inverter output current and the 
rotation of the motor is maintained as a constant.

By turning ON the magnetic contactor (MC) on the input side before 
the motor is started and turning OFF the MC after the motor is 
stopped, supplying power to the main circuit is stopped, reducing the 
standby power.

Select whether to enable/disable earth (ground) fault detection at 
start. When enabled, earth (ground) fault detection is performed 
immediately after a start signal is input to the inverter.

 • If a ground fault is detected at start while Pr.249 = "1", the output 

side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) is displayed and the 
outputs are shut off.

Select the stopping method (deceleration stop or casting) at turn-
OFF of the start signal.
Use this function to stop a motor with a mechanical brake at turn-
OFF of the start signal.
The start signal (STF/STR) operation can also be selected.

When Pr.250 is "9999 (initial value) or 8888"

232 to 239

Refer to the page on Pr.4.

240

Refer to the page on Pr.72.

241

Refer to the page on Pr.125.

242, 243

Refer to the page on Pr.73.

Cooling fan operation selection

Name

244

H100

Cooling fan 
operation selection

Pr.244 setting

Description

0

A cooling fan operates at power ON.
Cooling fan ON/OFF control is invalid. (The cooling 
fan is always ON at power ON)

1

(initial value)

Cooling fan ON/OFF control is valid.
The fan is always ON while the inverter is running. 
During a stop, the inverter status is monitored and the 
fan switches ON/OFF according to the temperature.

101 to 105

Cooling fan ON/OFF control is valid.
Set the cooling fan stop waiting time within 1 to 5 s.
The waiting time is the Pr.244 setting minus 100.

Slip compensation 

Name

Name

245

G203 Rated slip

246

G204

Slip compensation 
time constant

247

G205

Constant-power 
range slip 
compensation 
selection

Self power management 

Name

Name

248

A006

Self power 
management 
selection

254

A007

Main circuit power 
OFF waiting time

137

A002 Start waiting time

30

E300

Regenerative 
function selection

Pr.

Setting range

Description

248

0 (initial value)

Self power management function disabled

1

Self power management function enabled (main 
circuit OFF at protective function activation)

2

Self power management function enabled (main 
circuit OFF at protective function activation due 
to a circuit failure)

137

0 to 100 s

Set a time period that is a little longer than the 
time period from the ON signal input to the 
actual pick-up operation of MC1 (0.3 to 0.5 s).

254

1 to 3600 s

Set the waiting time until the main circuit power 
supply is turned OFF after the motor is stopped.

9999

The main circuit power supply is turned OFF 
only when the protective function selected by 
Pr.248 is activated.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

30

100, 101

Power supply to the inverter: AC (terminals R, S, 
and T)
When power is supplied only to the control 
circuit, and then switched to be supplied to both 
the control and main circuits, inverter reset is not 
performed.

0 to 2, 10, 11, 20, 
21, 102, 110, 
111, 120, 121

For other settings, refer to page 114.

Earth (ground) fault detection at start 

Name

249

H101

Earth (ground) fault 
detection at start

Pr.249 setting

Description

0 (initial value)

Without the earth (ground) fault detection at start

1

With the earth (ground) fault detection at start

Motor stop method/start signal selection

Name

250

G106 Stop selection

Pr.250 

Setting

Description

Start signal (STF/STR)

Stop operation

0 to 100 s

STF signal: Forward 
rotation start
STR signal: Reverse 
rotation start

It will coast to stop after set 
time when the start signal is 
turned OFF.

1000 s to 1100 s

STF signal: Start signal
STR signal: Forward/
reverse rotation signal

It will coast to stop after 
(Pr.250 - 1000) s when the 
start signal is turned OFF.

9999

STF signal: Forward 
rotation start
STR signal: Reverse 
rotation start

It will perform deceleration 
stop when the start signal is 
turned OFF.

8888

STF signal: Start signal
STR signal: Forward/
reverse rotation signal

Pr.

Setting range

Description

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Time

ON

OFF

Start 
signal

Deceleration starts 
when start signal turns OFF

Deceleration time 
(Time set in Pr. 8, etc.)

DC brake

Output frequency 

(Hz)

ON

OFF

RUN 
signal


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

139

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

When Pr.250 is other than "9999 (initial value) or 8888"

The output phase loss protective function, which stops the inverter 
output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output 
side (load side) is lost, can be disabled.
The input phase loss protective function on the inverter's input side 
(R, S, T) can be enabled.

The degree of deterioration of the main circuit capacitor, control 
circuit capacitor, inrush current limit circuit, cooling fan, and internal 
fan alarm



 can be diagnosed on the monitor.

When a part approaches the end of its life, an alarm can be output 
by self diagnosis to prevent a fault.
(Note that the life diagnosis of this function should be used as a 
guideline only, because with the exception of the main circuit 
capacitor, the life values are theoretical calculations.)



The internal fan is only available for the IP55 compatible model.



Not compatible with the separated converter type.

At instantaneous power failure or undervoltage, the motor can be 
decelerated to a stop or decelerated once and re-accelerated to the 
set frequency.

  • Set  Pr.261 to select the action at an undervoltage and power 

failure.

I/O phase loss protection selection

Name

Name

251

H200

Output phase loss 
protection selection

872

H201

Input phase loss 
protection selection

Pr.

Setting range

Description

251

0

Without output phase loss protection

1 (initial value)

With output phase loss protection

872

0 (initial value)

Without input phase loss protection

1

With input phase loss protection

252, 253

Refer to the page on Pr.73.

Displaying the life of the inverter parts

Name

Name

255

E700

Life alarm status 
display

256

E701

Inrush current limit 
circuit life display

257

E702

Control circuit 
capacitor life display

258

E703

Main circuit capacitor 
life display

259

E704

Main circuit capacitor 
life measuring

Pr.

Setting 

range

Description

255

(0 to 31)

Displays whether or not the parts of the control 
circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling 
fan, Internal fan alarm



, and inrush current limit 

circuit have reached the life alarm output level. 
Read-only.

256



(0 to 100%)

Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush 
current limit circuit. Read-only.

257

(0 to 100%)

Displays the deterioration degree of the control 
circuit capacitor. Read-only.

258



(0 to 100%)

Displays the deterioration degree of the main 
circuit capacitor. Read-only.
The value measured by Pr.259 is displayed.

259



0, 1
(2, 3, 8, 9)

Setting "1" and turning the power supply OFF 
starts the measurement of the main circuit 
capacitor life.
If the setting value of Pr.259 becomes "3" after 
turning the power supply ON again, it means 
that the measurement is completed. The 
deterioration degree is read to Pr.258.

260

Refer to the page on Pr.72.

OFF

ON

Start signal

Output is shut off when 
set time elapses after 
start signal turns OFF

Pr.250

Motor coasts to stop

Time

OFF

RUN signal

Output frequency 

(Hz)

ON

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Power failure time deceleration stop 
function

Name

Name

261

A730

Power failure stop 
selection

262

A731

Subtracted frequency 
at deceleration start

263

A732

Subtraction starting 
frequency

264

A733

Power-failure 
deceleration time 1

265

A734

Power-failure 
deceleration time 2

266

A735

Power failure 
deceleration time 
switchover frequency

294

A785

UV avoidance 
voltage gain

606

T722

Power failure stop 
external signal input 
selection

668

T786

Power failure stop 
frequency gain

Pr.

Setting range

Description

261

0 (initial value)

Power failure time deceleration stop function 
disabled

1, 2, 11, 12, 21, 22

Power failure time deceleration stop function 
enabled
Select action at an undervoltage or when a power 
failure occurs.

262 0 to 20Hz

Normally, the motor runs at the initial value as it 
is. However, adjust to suit the size of the load 
specification (moment of inertia, torque).

263

0 to 590 Hz

When output frequency 

 Pr.263

Deceleration from (output frequency - Pr.262)
When output frequency 

 Pr.263

Deceleration from output frequency

9999

Deceleration from (output frequency - Pr.262)

264 0 to 3600 s

Set the slope applicable from the deceleration 
start to the Pr.266 set frequency.

265

0 to 3600 s

Set the slope applicable for the frequency range 
starting at Pr.266 and downward.

9999 (initial value) Same as Pr.264.

266 0 to 590 Hz

Set the frequency at which the slope during 
deceleration switches from the Pr.264 setting to 
the Pr.265 setting.

294 0 to 200%

Adjust the response level at UV avoidance 
operation. Setting a large value improves the 
response to changes in the bus voltage. If the 
inertia is high, the amount of regeneration is too 
large. Set a smaller value.

606

0

Normally open input (NO contact input 
specification)

1 (initial value)

Normally closed input (NC contact input 
specification)

668 0 to 200%

Adjust the response level for the operation where 
the deceleration time is automatically adjusted.

Pr.261 

setting

Action at 

undervoltage 

and 

power failure

Power restoration 

during 

deceleration at 

occurrence of 

power failure

Deceleration 

stop time

Undervoltage 

avoidance 

function

0

Coasts to stop Coasts to stop

-

-

1

Deceleration 
stop

Deceleration stop

According to 
Pr.262 to 
Pr.266 setting

Not used

2

Re-acceleration

Not used

11

Deceleration stop

With

12

Re-acceleration

With

21

Deceleration stop

Automatic 
adjustment of 
deceleration 
time

Not used

22

Re-acceleration

Not used

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.264
Power-failure 
deceleration time 1

Pr.265
Power-failure 
deceleration 
time 2

Time

Power supply

Output
frequency

Subtracted
frequency at
deceleration start
Pr.262

Power-failure 
deceleration 
time switchover 
frequency
Pr.266


background image

140 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

 • Power failure stop function (Pr.261 = "1, 11, 21")

Even if power is restored during deceleration triggered by a 
power failure, deceleration stop is continued after which the 
inverter stays stopped. To restart operation, turn the start signal 
OFF then ON again.

 • Continuous operation function at instantaneous power failure 

(Pr.261 = "2, 12, 22")
The motor re-accelerates to the set frequency if the power 
restores during deceleration at occurrence of power failure.
Combining with the automatic restart after instantaneous power 
failure function enables a power failure time deceleration stop and 
re-acceleration at a power restoration.
If the power is restored after stoppage by a power failure, a restart 
operation is performed when automatic restart after 
instantaneous power failure (Pr.57 

 "9999") is selected.

 • Automatic adjustment of deceleration time (Pr.261 = "21, 22" 

Pr.294, Pr.668)
When "21, 22" is set in Pr.261, the deceleration time is 
automatically adjusted to keep (DC bus) voltage constant in the 
converter when the motor decelerates to a stop at a power failure. 
Setting of Pr.262 to Pr.266 is not required.
Use Pr.668 Power failure stop frequency gain to adjust the 
response level during deceleration time auto adjustment. 
Increasing the setting improves the response level to the bus 
voltage fluctuations, but the output frequency may be unstable.
If setting Pr.294 UV avoidance voltage gain lower also does not 
suppress the vibration, set Pr.668 lower.

This function is designed to increase speed automatically under light 
load, for example to minimize the incoming/outgoing time in a multi-
story parking lot.
The load size during power driving is estimated by detecting average 
currents at set timings after a start. When the load is light, the 
frequency is increased from the originally-set frequency. (During 
regeneration load operation, the frequency is not increased.)

 • Set such items as the current and averaging range for load torque 

high-speed frequency control selected by setting Pr.270 = "2 or 
3".

 • When the load torque high-speed frequency selection (X19) 

signal is ON, the inverter automatically adjusts the maximum 
frequency in the range between the Pr.4 Multi-speed setting 
(high speed) and Pr.5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 
setting in accordance with the average current while the motor is 
accelerating from a frequency that is half of the Pr.5 setting to the 
Pr.5 setting as shown in the figure below. 

267

Refer to the page on Pr.73.

268

Refer to the page on Pr.52.

269

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

During deceleration at 
occurrence of power failure

During stop at 
occurrence of 
power failure

STF

Y46

Time

Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again

Power 

supply

Output frequency

Pr.261

 = "1"

IPF

Power
supply

Output
frequency

Y46

During deceleration
at occurrence of
power failure

Reacceleration 

*

Time

When power is restored during
deceleration at occurrence of
power failure

Pr.261

 = 2

* Acceleration time depends on Pr.7 (Pr.44 ).

During power failure

Power
supply

Time

Output
frequency

Y46

During deceleration
at occurrence of
power failure

Automatic restart
after instantaneous
power failure

Reset time + Pr.57

Pr.261 

= 2

, Pr.57    9999

When used with automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure

Deceleration time : Automatic adjustment

STF

Y46

Time

Pr.261 

= 21

Power
supply

Output
frequency

During deceleration at 
occurrence of power failure

During stop at occurrence 
of power failure

Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Load torque high-speed frequency 
control

Name

Name

270

A200

Stop-on contact/load 
torque high-speed 
frequency control 
selection

271

A201

High-speed setting 
maximum current

272

A202

Middle-speed setting 
minimum current

273

A203

Current averaging 
range

274

A204

Current averaging 
filter time constant

4

D301

Multi-speed setting 
(high speed)

5

D302

Multi-speed setting 
(middle speed)

Pr.270 setting

Description

0 

(initial value)

Normal operation

1

Stop-on-contact control

2

Load torque high-speed frequency control

3

Stop-on-contact + load torque high-speed frequency 
control

11

Stop-on-contact control

E.OLT detection invalid 
under stop-on contact 
control

13

Stop-on-contact + load torque 
high-speed frequency control

Pr.

Setting 

range

Description

4

0 to 590 Hz

Set the higher-speed frequency.

5

0 to 590 Hz

Set the lower-speed frequency.

271

0 to 400%

Set the upper and lower limits of the current at 
high and middle speeds.

272

0 to 400%

273

0 to 590 Hz

Set the average current during acceleration from 
(Pr.273 

 1/2) Hz to (Pr.273) Hz.

9999
(Initialization)

Set the average current during acceleration from 
(Pr.5 

 1/2) Hz to (Pr.5 ) Hz.

274

1 to 4000

Set the time constant of the primary delay filter 
relative to the output current.
(The time constant [ms] is 0.5 

 Pr.274, and the 

initial value is 8 ms.)
A larger setting results in a stable operation with 
poorer response.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

(STR)

X19

STF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Pr.5

Pr.4

Pr.5

1
2

Power running

Regenerating

A

B

Current averaging range

Current averaging range

Current averaging range

Current averaging range

Current averaging range

Current averaging range

Output frequency

Time

Less than 
Pr.271

 setting    rated current

Less than 
Pr.271

 setting    rated current

Less than 
Pr.271

 setting    rated current

Pr.272

 setting    rated current 

or more

Pr.272

 setting    rated current 

or more

Pr.272

 setting    rated current 

or more

ON


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

141

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

To ensure accurate positioning at the upper limit, etc. of a lift, stop-
on-contact control causes the mechanical brake to close while the 
motor creates a holding torque to keep the load in contact with a 
mechanical stopper, etc.
This function suppresses vibration that is likely to occur when the 
load is stopped upon contact in lift applications, thereby ensuring 
reliable and highly accurate positioning stop.



The setting range of FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-
A840-01800(55K) or lower



The setting range of FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-
A840-02160(75K) or higher



Not available for the FR-A842-P.

Stop-on-contact control 

Name

Name

270

A200

Stop-on contact/load 
torque high-speed 
frequency control 
selection

275

A205

Stop-on contact 
excitation current 
low-speed 
multiplying factor

276

A206

PWM carrier 
frequency at stop-on 
contact

22

H500

Stall prevention 
operation level

6

D303

Multi-speed setting 
(low speed)

48

H600

Second stall 
prevention operation 
level

Pr.270 setting

Description

0 

(initial value)

Normal operation

1

Stop-on-contact control

2

Load torque high-speed frequency control

3

Stop-on-contact + load torque high-speed 
frequency control

11

Stop-on-contact control

E.OLT invalid 
under stop-on-
contact control

13

Stop-on-contact + load 
torque high-speed frequency 
control

 • Select either Real sensorless 

vector control (speed control) 
or Advanced magnetic flux 
vector control.
When both the RT and RL 
signals are switched ON, the 
inverter enters the stop-on-
contact control, and operation 
is performed at the frequency 
set in Pr.6 Multi-speed setting 
(low speed) independently of 
the preceding speed.

Pr.

Setting 

range

Description

6

0 to 590 Hz

Set the output frequency for stop-on-contact control.
Set the frequency as low as possible (about 2 Hz). If 
a frequency higher than 30 Hz is set, it operates with 
30 Hz.
When performing stop-on-contact control during 
encoder feedback control, encoder feedback control 
is invalid due to a transition to the stop-on-contact 
control mode.

22

0 to 400%

Set the stall prevention operation level for stop-on-
contact control used under Advanced magnetic flux 
vector control.
The smaller value set in either Pr.22 or Pr.48 has 
priority. The torque limit level uses the Pr.22 setting 
for Real sensorless vector control.

48

0 to 400%

275

0 to 300%

Normally set this parameter within the range of 
130% to 180%.
Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on-contact 
control.

9999
(initial value)

No compensation.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

(a)

(b)

(c)

Time

Pr.4

RH

RM

RL

RT

Pr.5

Pr.6

0

Normal mode

Stop-on contact
control mode

(a): Acceleration time(Pr.7)
(b): Deceleration time(Pr.8)
(c): Second deceleration time(Pr.44/Pr.45)

∗

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

∗ Goes into stop-on-contact control mode when 

both RL and RT switch on.
RL and RT may be switched on in any order 
with any time difference

Output frequency

276



0 to 9



Set a PWM carrier frequency for stop-on-contact 
control.
For Real sensorless vector control, the carrier 
frequency is always 2 kHz when the setting value is 
0 to 5 and always 6 kHz when the setting value is 6 
to 9. (Valid at the output frequency of 3 Hz or less.)

0 to 4



9999
(initial value)

As set in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.

Brake sequence function

Name

Name

278

A100

Brake opening 
frequency

279

A101

Brake opening 
current

280

A102

Brake opening 
current detection 
time

281

A103

Brake operation time 
at start

282

A104

Brake operation 
frequency

283

A105

Brake operation time 
at stop

284

A106

Deceleration 
detection function 
selection

285

A107

Overspeed detection 
frequency

292

F500

Automatic 
acceleration/
deceleration

639

A108

Brake opening 
current selection

640

A109

Brake operation 
frequency selection

641

A130

Second brake 
sequence operation 
selection

642

A120

Second brake 
opening frequency

643

A121

Second brake 
opening current

644

A122

Second brake 
opening current 
detection time

645

A123

Second brake 
operation time at 
start

646

A124

Second brake 
operation frequency

647

A125

Second brake 
operation time at 
stop

648

A128

Second deceleration 
detection function 
selection

650

A128

Second brake 
opening current 
selection

651

A129

Second brake 
operation frequency 
selection

Pr.

Setting 

range

Description

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

142 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

This function outputs operation timing signals of the mechanical 
brake from the inverter, such as for lift applications.
This function is useful in preventing load slippage at a start due to 
poor mechanical brake timing and overcurrent alarm in stop status 
and enable secure operation.
<Operation example>
 • At start

When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running, 
and when the output frequency reaches the frequency set in Pr.278 and 
the output current or the motor torque is equal to or greater than the 
Pr.279 setting, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is output after the 
time set in Pr.280. The brake opening completion signal (BRI) is input, 
and the output frequency is increased to the set speed after the set time 
in Pr.281.

 • Deceleration time

When the inverter decelerates to the frequency set in Pr.282, the 
inverter turns OFF the BOF signal and decelerates further to the 
frequency set in Pr.278. After electromagnetic brake operation 
completes and the inverter recognizes the turn OFF of the BRI 
signal, the inverter holds the frequency set in Pr.283 for the time 
set in Pr.283. And after the time set in Pr.283 passes, the inverter 
decelerates again. 



 The inverter outputs is shut off when the 

frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting frequency setting or 0.5 Hz, 
whichever is lower.



When Pr.292 = "8" (without mechanical brake opening 
completion signal input), the time starts when the brake opening 
completion signal is output.

When Pr.292 = "7" (with brake opening completion signal input)

When Pr.292 = "8" (without brake opening completion signal input)

 • Turning ON the RT signal enables the second brake sequence 

function.



The speed deviation excess detection frequency is used when 
vector control is performed.

STF

ON

Output current or motor torque

(select by Pr.639)

Brake opening request

(BOF signal)

ON

Electromagnetic brake

operation

Opened

Closed

Closed

Time

Brake opening completion

(BRI signal)

ON

Pr.278

Pr.282

Target frequency

Pr.13

Pr.280

Pr.281

Output frequency(Hz)

Pr.283

Pr.279

Pr.13

 setting

or 0.5Hz,
whichever is lower

STF

ON

Output current or motor torque

(select by Pr.639)

Brake opening request

(BOF signal)

ON

Electromagnetic brake

operation

Opened

Closed

Closed

Time

Pr.278

Pr.282

Target frequency

Output frequency(Hz)

Pr.281

Pr.283

Pr.280

Pr.279

Pr.13

Pr.13

 setting

or 0.5Hz,
whichever is lower

Pr.

Setting 

range

Description

278

0 to 30Hz

Set the rated slip frequency of the motor + approx. 
1.0 Hz.
This can be set only when Pr.278 

 Pr.282.

279

0 to 400%

If the setting is too low, dropping of the load is more 
likely to occur at a start, and generally, it is set 
between 50 and 90%.
The inverter rated current is regarded as 100%.

280

0 to 2 s

Generally set between 0.1 and 0.3 s.

281

0 to 5 s

Pr.292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until 
braking eases.
Pr.292 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until 
braking eases + approx. 0.1 to 0.2 s.

282

0 to 30Hz

Frequency that turns OFF the brake opening 
request signal (BOF) and operates the 
electromagnetic brake. Generally, set the setting 
value of Pr.278 + 3 to 4 Hz.
This can be set only when Pr.282 

 Pr.278.

283

0 to 5 s

Pr.292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until the 
brake closes + 0.1 s.
Pr.292 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until the 
brake closes + approx. 0.2 to 0.3 s.

284

0 
(initial value)

The deceleration detection function disabled.

1

The protective function activates when the 
deceleration speed of the deceleration operation is 
not normal.

285 



0 to 30Hz

The brake sequence fault (E.MB1) activates when 
the difference between the detection frequency and 
output frequency is equal to or greater than the 
setting value under encoder feedback control.

9999
(initial value)

Overspeed detection disabled.

292

0, 1, 3, 5 to 8, 
11

Setting this parameter to "7, 8" enables the brake 
sequence function.

639

0 
(initial value)

Brake opening by output current

1

Brake opening by motor torque

640

0 
(initial value)

Brake closing operation by frequency command

1

Brake closing operation by the actual motor rotation 
speed (estimated value)

641

0 
(initial value)

Normal operation when the RT signal is ON

7

Second brake sequence 1 when the RT signal is ON

8

Second brake sequence 2 when the RT signal is ON

9999

First brake sequence 1 is valid when the RT signal is ON


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

143

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

 • Speed deviation excess detection (Pr.285, Pr.853)
When the difference (absolute value) between the speed command 
value and actual rotation speed in speed control under vector control 
is equal to or higher than the setting value in Pr.285 Speed 
deviation excess detection frequency for a continuous time equal 
to or longer than the setting value in Pr.853 Speed deviation time, 
Speed deviation excess detection (E.OSD) activates to shut off the 
inverter output.

 • Speed limit (Pr.873)

This function prevents overrunning even when the setting value 
for the number of encoder pulses and the value of the actual 
number of pulses are different. When the setting value for the 
number of encoder pulses is lower than the actual number of 
pulses, because the motor may increase speed, the output 
frequency is limited with the frequency of (set frequency + 
Pr.873).

This is a function to give droop characteristics to the speed by 
balancing the load in proportion with the load torque.
This is effective when balancing the load when using multiple 
inverters.



Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, the operation is the 
same with setting the parameter to "0".

 • Droop control

Droop control is enabled for Advanced magnetic flux vector 
control, Real sensorless vector control, vector control, and PM 
sensorless vector control when Pr.286 is not "0".
The upper limit of the droop compensation frequency is 120 Hz.

 • Turning ON the RT signal enables the second droop control.

 • Break point setting for droop control (Pr.994, Pr.995)

Set Pr.994 and Pr.995 to have a break point on a droop 
compensation frequency line. Setting a break point allows the 
inverter to raise the droop compensation frequency for light-load 
(no load) operation without raising it for heavy-load operation.

Avoiding motor overrunning 

Name

Name

285

H416

Speed deviation 
excess detection 
frequency

853

H417 Speed deviation time

873

H415 Speed limit

Droop control 

Name

Name

286

G400 Droop gain

287

G401

Droop filter time 
constant

288

G402

Droop function 
activation selection

679

G420 Second droop gain

680

G421

Second droop filter 
time constant

681

G422

Second droop 
function activation 
selection

682

G423

Second droop break 
point gain

683

G424

Second droop break 
point torque

994

G403

Droop break point 
gain

995

G404

Droop break point 
torque

Pr.

Setting 

range

Description

286

0
(initial value)

Droop control disabled

0.1 to 100%

Set the droop amount at the rated torque as % value 
of the rated motor frequency.

287

0 to 1 s

Set the filter time constant to apply to the current for 
torque.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Set frequency

Actual speed

Time

Speed deviation

excessive fault activated

(E. OSD)

ON

OFF

Fault output
(ALM)

Pr.853

Pr.285

Frequency

(Hz)

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

288

0
(initial value)

Without droop control 
during acceleration/
deceleration
(With 0 limit)

The Pr.84 setting is the 
droop compensation 
reference.

1



Constantly droop control 
during operation
(With 0 limit)

2



Constantly droop control 
during operation
(Without 0 limit)

10



Without droop control 
during acceleration/
deceleration
(With 0 limit)

Motor speed is the droop 
compensation reference.

11



Constantly droop control 
during operation
(With 0 limit)

20



Without droop control 
during acceleration/
deceleration
(With 0 limit)

The Pr.1121 setting is 
the droop compensation 
reference.

21



Constantly droop control 
during operation
(With 0 limit)

22



Constantly droop control 
during operation
(Without 0 limit)

994

0.1 to 100%

Set the droop amount to be changed as % value of 
the rated motor frequency.

9999
(initial value)

No function

995

0.1 to 100%

Set the torque when the droop amount is to be 
changed.

289

Refer to the page on Pr.190.

290

Refer to the page on Pr.52.

Pr.

Setting 

range

Description

Droop compensation
frequency

Torque

100%

Droop
gain

-100%

Frequency

0

Droop 
compensation 
reference

Droop break point gain
(Pr.994)

Droop compensation
frequency

Increased amount of the
droop compensation
frequency

Droop break point torque
(Pr.995)

Torque

100%

Droop gain
(Pr.286)

-100%

Frequency

0

Droop 
compensation 
reference

Pr.

Pr.


background image

144 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

A pulse train input to terminal JOG can be used to set the inverter's 
speed command.
The pulse train can be output from terminal FM by the open collector 
output system.
Speed synchronized operation of an inverter can be performed by 
using the pulse train input/output together with terminal JOG.



Regardless of the Pr.54 setting, the signal input as a pulse train is 
output as it is.



The function is assigned in Pr.185 JOG terminal function 
selection.



Only the FM type inverters support the pulse train output.

 • Changing the frequency at pulse train input (Pr.385, Pr.386)



Limit value = (Pr.386 - Pr.385)  1.1 + Pr.385

 • How to calculate the input pulse division scaling factor (Pr.384)

Maximum number of pulses (pulse/s) = Pr.384 

 400

(Allowable maximum number of pulses = 100k pulses/s)

 • If Pr.419 Position command source selection = "2" (simple 

pulse train position command) is set, terminal JOG is used for the 
simple position pulse train input regardless of the Pr.291 Pulse 
train I/O selection setting.

Registering a 4-digit password can restrict parameter reading/
writing.
 • Level of reading/writing restriction by PU/NET mode operation 

command can be selected by Pr.296.

: Enabled, 

: Disabled



 If the password is forgotten, it can be unlocked with all parameter 
clear, but doing so will also clear the other parameters.



When Pr.297 = "0, 9999", writing is always enabled, but setting is 
disabled. (The display cannot be changed.)

Pulse train input/output

Name

Name

291

D100

Pulse train I/O 
selection

384

D101

Input pulse division 
scaling factor

385

D110

Frequency for zero 
input pulse

386

D111

Frequency for 
maximum input pulse

Pr.291 setting

Input (Terminal JOG)

Output (Terminal FM) 

0 (initial value)

JOG signal 



FM output 



1

Pulse train input

FM output 



10 



JOG signal 



Pulse train output (50% duty)

11 



Pulse train input

20 



JOG signal 



Pulse train output (ON width 
fixed)

21 



Pulse train input

100 



Pulse train output (ON width 
fixed) 



292, 293

Refer to the page on Pr.61.

294

Refer to the page on Pr.261.

295

Refer to the page on Pr.161.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

60Hz(50Hz)

Pr. 386

0Hz

Maximum input pulse

Limit value

Input pulse
(pulse/s)

(Hz)

Output 

frequency

0

Pr. 385



Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Password function

Name

Name

296

E410 Password lock level

297

E411

Password lock/
unlock

Pr.296 setting

PU mode operation 

command

NET mode operation command

RS-485 

terminals

Communication 

option

Read

Write

Read

Write

Read

Write

9999

(initial value)

0, 100

1, 101

2, 102

3, 103

4, 104

5, 105

6, 106

99, 199

Only the parameters registered in the user group can be 
read/written. (For the parameters not registered in the user 
group, the same restriction level as "4, 104" applies.)

Pr. 297 

setting

Description

1000 to 9998 Register a 4-digit password.



(0 to 5)



Displays password unlock error count. (Reading only)
(Valid when Pr.296 = "100 to 106")

9999
(initial value)

No password lock

298

Refer to the page on Pr.81.

299

Refer to the page on Pr.57.

331 to 337

Refer to the page on Pr.117.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

145

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

The operation and speed commands from an external device can be 
enabled during Network operation. The operation command source 
in the PU operation mode can also be selected.



The setting is not used for the FR-A800-E.



The setting is available for the FR-A800-E only.



Ethernet connector for the FR-A800-E

The inverter can adjust the stop position (Orientation control) using 
an encoder attached to a place such as the main shaft of the 
machine.
An orientation control compatible option is required.
 • Internal stop position command

When "0" is set in Pr.350 Stop position command selection, 
the internal position command mode is activated.
In the internal position command mode, the setting value of 
Pr.356 Internal stop position command is used as the stop 
position.

 • Internal stop position command

When Pr.350 Stop position command selection is set to "1" 
and the FR-A8AX is used, 16-bit data (binary input) is used to 
give the stop position.

 • Operation timing chart

 • Using the FR-A8TP (motor end) together with the plug-in option 

FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-A8APR (machine end) enables machine 
end orientation control.
Setting Pr.862 = "1" enables machine end orientation.
When only the FR-A8AL is used, machine end orientation control 
is enabled by setting the number of machine end encoder pulses 
in Pr.829.

Start command source and frequency 
command source during 
communication operation

Name

Name

338

D010

Communication 
operation command 
source

339

D011

Communication 
speed command 
source

550

D012

NET mode operation 
command source 
selection

551

D013

PU mode operation 
command source 
selection

Pr.

Setting 

range

Description

338

0 
(initial value)

Start command source is communication.

1

Start command source is external.

339

0
(initial value)

Frequency command source is communication.

1

Frequency command source is external.

2

Frequency command source is external. (When 
there is no external input, the frequency 
command via communication is valid, and the 
frequency command from terminal 2 is invalid.)

550

0

The communication option is the command 
source when in the NET operation mode.

1



The RS-485 terminals are the command source 
when in the NET operation mode.

5



The Ethernet connector is the command source 
when in the NET operation mode.

9999
(initial value)

Communication option is recognized 
automatically.
Normally, the RS-485 terminals



 are the 

command source. When the communication 
option is mounted, the communication option is 
the command source.

551

1



The RS-485 terminals are the command source 
when in the PU operation mode.

2

The PU connector is the command source when 
in the PU operation mode.

3

The USB connector is the command source 
when in the PU operation mode.

5



The Ethernet connector is the command source 
when in the PU operation mode.

9999
(initial value)

USB automatic recognition.
Normally, the PU connector is the command 
source. When the USB is connected, the USB 
connector is the command source.

340

Refer to the page on Pr.79.

341 to 343

Refer to the page on Pr.117.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Orientation control 

Name

Name

350

A510

Stop position 
command selection

351

A526 Orientation speed

352

A527 Creep speed

353

A528

Creep switchover 
position

354

A529

Position loop 
switchover position

355

A530

DC injection brake 
start position

356

A531

Internal stop position 
command

357

A532

Orientation in-
position zone

358

A533

Servo torque 
selection

359

C141

Encoder rotation 
direction

360

A511 16-bit data selection

361

A512 Position shift

362

A520

Orientation position 
loop gain

363

A521

Completion signal 
output delay time

364

A522

Encoder stop check 
time

365

A523 Orientation limit

366

A524 Recheck time

369

C140

Number of encoder 
pulses

393

A525 Orientation selection 394

A540

Number of machine 
side gear teeth

395

A541

Number of motor 
side gear teeth

396

A542

Orientation speed 
gain (P term)

397

A543

Orientation speed 
integral time

398

A544

Orientation speed 
gain (D term)

399

A545

Orientation 
deceleration ratio

829

A546

Number of machine 
end encoder pulses

851

C240

Control terminal 
option-Number of 
encoder pulses

852

C241

Control terminal 
option-Encoder 
rotation direction

862

C242

Encoder option 
selection

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Main spindle speed (encoder)

Pr.351
Pr.352

Start signal (STF, STR)

Orientation command (X22)

Current position signal

Origin signal

Orientation speed (set with Pr.351)

Creep speed (set with Pr.352)

Creep switchover position
(set with Pr.353)

Position loop switchover
(set with Pr.354)

DC injection
brake start
position
(set with Pr.355)

Stop position command

0

DC injection brake

OFF

OFF

ON

Orientation complete signal (ORA)

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

Time

ON

OFF

ON

1)

2)

3) 4)

5)


background image

146 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

By detecting the rotation speed of the motor with the encoder and  
feeding it back to the inverter, output frequency of the inverter is 
controlled to keep the speed of the motor constant even for the load 
change. 
A vector control compatible option is required.
 • Using Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction and Pr.369 Number of 

encoder pulses, set the rotation direction and the number of 
pulses for the encoder.

 • When a value other than "9999" is set in Pr.367 Speed feedback 

range, encoder feedback control is valid.
Using the set point (frequency at which stable speed operation is 
performed) as reference, set the higher and lower setting range. 
Normally, set the frequency converted from the slip amount (r/
min) of the rated motor speed (rated load). If the setting is too 
large, response becomes slow.

  • Set  Pr.368 Feedback gain when the rotation is unstable or 

response is slow.

If the motor rotation speed exceeds the speed set in Pr.374 during 
encoder feedback control, Real sensorless vector control, vector 
control or PM sensorless vector control, Overspeed occurrence 
(E.OS) occurs, the inverter output is shut off.

If encoder signals are disconnected during encoder feedback 
control, orientation control or vector control, Signal loss detection 
(E.ECT) is turned ON to shut off the inverter output.

The inverter can be run in accordance with a sequence program.
In accordance with the machine specifications, a user can set 
various operation patterns: inverter movements at signal inputs, 
signal outputs at particular inverter statuses, and monitor outputs, 
etc.

Encoder feedback control 

Name

Name

359

C141

Encoder rotation 
direction

367

G240

Speed feedback 
range

368

G241 Feedback gain

369

C140

Number of encoder 
pulses

144

M002

Speed setting 
switchover

285

A107

Overspeed detection 
frequency

851

C240

Control terminal 
option-Number of 
encoder pulses

852

C241

Control terminal 
option-Encoder 
rotation direction

Pr.368 setting

Description

Pr.368 > 1

Response will become faster but it may cause 
overcurrent or become unstable.

1 > Pr.368

Response will become slower but it will become more 
stable.

Motor overspeeding detection

Name

374

H800

Overspeed detection 
level

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Speed feedback range

Set value

(Set command)

Driven load

Regenerative load

Pr.

GROUP

ALM

Motor speed

Time

E.OS

Coast to stop

ON

Pr.374

Signal loss detection of encoder signals 

Name

Name

376

C148

Encoder signal loss 
detection enable/
disable selection

855

C248

Control terminal 
option-Signal loss 
detection enable/
disable selection

380 to 383

Refer to the page on Pr.29.

384 to 386

Refer to the page on Pr.291.

393 to 399

Refer to the page on Pr.350.

PLC function

Name

Name

414

A800

PLC function 
operation selection

415

A801

Inverter operation 
lock mode setting

416

A802

Pre-scale function 
selection

417

A803

Pre-scale setting 
value

498

A804

PLC function flash 
memory clear

1150

to

1199

A810

to

A859

User parameters 1
to
User parameters 50

Pr.

Setting

range

Description

414

0
(initial value)

PLC function disabled

1

PLC function 
enabled

The SQ signal is enabled by input 
from a command source (external 
input terminal / communication).

2

The SQ signal is enabled by input 
from an external input terminal.

415

0
(initial value)

The inverter start command is enabled regardless of the 
operating status of the sequence program.

1

The inverter start command is enabled only while the 
sequence program is running.

416

0 to 5

Unit scale factor
0: No function
1: x 1
2: x 0.1
3: x 0.01
4: x 0.001
5: x 0.0001

When the pulse train is input from 
terminal JOG, the number of sampled 
pulses can be converted.
The result of conversion is stored to 
SD1236.

"Number of sampled pulses" = "input 
pulse value per count cycle" x "pre-
scale setting value (Pr.417)" x "unit 
scale factor (Pr.416)"

417

0 to 3267

Pre-scale 
setting value

498

0 to 9999

0: Clears the flash memory fault display (no 
operation after writing while the flash memory is 
in normal operation).

Write

9696: Clears the flash memory (no operation 
Write after writing during flash memory fault).
Other than 0 and 9696: Outside of the setting 
range
0: Normal display

Read

1: The flash memory has not been cleared 
because the PLC function is enabled.
9696: During flash memory clearing operation 
or flash memory fault

1150 

to 

1199

0 to 65535

Desired values can be set.
Because devices D206 to D255 used by the PLC 
function can be mutually accessed, the values set to 
Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 can be used by the sequence 
program. The result of performing calculation by a 
sequence program can also be monitored by Pr.1150 to 
Pr.1199.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

147

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

 • Switch the execution key (RUN/STOP) of the sequence program 

by turning the SQ signal ON/OFF. The sequence program can be 
executed by turning the SQ signal ON. To input the SQ signal, set 
"50" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function 
selection) to assign the function to a terminal.

 • To write to the sequence program, use FR Configurator2 on a 

personal computer that is connected to the inverter via RS-485 
communication.

 • This function copies the PLC function project data to a USB 

memory device.
The PLC function project data copied in the USB memory device 
can be copied to other inverters. This function is useful in backing 
up the parameter setting and for allowing multiple inverters to 
operate by the same sequence programs.

Set positioning parameters such as the number of pulses (position) 
and acceleration/deceleration time in advance to create a point table 
(point table method). Positioning operation is performed by selecting 
the point table.
 • Positioning operation by point tables, example 1 (automatic 

continuous positioning operation)
The figure below shows an operation example when the following 
settings are made for point tables.

Simple positioning function by 
parameters 

Name

Name

419

B000

Position command source 
selection

464

B020

Digital position control sudden 
stop deceleration time

465

B021

First target position lower 
4 digits

466

B022

First target position upper 
4 digits

467

B023

Second target position 
lower 4 digits

468

B024

Second target position 
upper 4 digits

469

B025

Third target position lower 
4 digits

470

B026

Third target position upper 
4 digits

471

B027

Fourth target position 
lower 4 digits

472

B028

Fourth target position 
upper 4 digits

473

B029

Fifth target position lower 
4 digits

474

B030

Fifth target position upper 
4 digits

475

B031

Sixth target position lower 
4 digits

476

B032

Sixth target position upper 
4 digits

477

B033

Seventh target position 
lower 4 digits

478

B034

Seventh target position 
upper 4 digits

479

B035

Eighth target position 
lower 4 digits

480

B036

Eighth target position 
upper 4 digits

481

B037

Ninth target position lower 
4 digits

482

B038

Ninth target position upper 
4 digits

483

B039

Tenth target position lower 
4 digits

484

B040

Tenth target position 
upper 4 digits

485

B041

Eleventh target position 
lower 4 digits

486

B042

Eleventh target position 
upper 4 digits

487

B043

Twelfth target position 
lower 4 digits

488

B044

Twelfth target position 
upper 4 digits

489

B045

Thirteenth target position 
lower 4 digits

490

B046

Thirteenth target position 
upper 4 digits

491

B047

Fourteenth target position 
lower 4 digits

492

B048

Fourteenth target position 
upper 4 digits

493

B049

Fifteenth target position 
lower 4 digits

494

B050

Fifteenth target position 
upper 4 digits

1221 B101

Start command edge 
detection selection

1222 B120

First positioning 
acceleration time

1223 B121

First positioning 
deceleration time

1224 B122

First positioning dwell 
time

1225 B123

First positioning sub-
function

1226 B124

Second positioning 
acceleration time

1227 B125

Second positioning 
deceleration time

1228 B126

Second positioning dwell 
time

1229 B127

Second positioning sub-
function

1230 B128

Third positioning 
acceleration time

1231 B129

Third positioning 
deceleration time

1232 B130

Third positioning dwell 
time

1233 B131

Third positioning sub-
function

1234 B132

Fourth positioning 
acceleration time

1235 B133

Fourth positioning 
deceleration time

1236 B134

Fourth positioning dwell 
time

1237 B135

Fourth positioning sub-
function

1238 B136

Fifth positioning 
acceleration time

1239 B137

Fifth positioning 
deceleration time

1240 B138

Fifth positioning dwell 
time

1241 B139

Fifth positioning sub-
function

1242 B140

Sixth positioning 
acceleration time

1243 B141

Sixth positioning 
deceleration time

1244 B142

Sixth positioning dwell 
time

1245 B143

Sixth positioning sub-
function

1246 B144

Seventh positioning 
acceleration time

1247 B145

Seventh positioning 
deceleration time

1248 B146

Seventh positioning dwell 
time

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

1249 B147

Seventh positioning sub-
function

1250 B148

Eighth positioning 
acceleration time

1251 B149

Eighth positioning 
deceleration time

1252 B150

Eighth positioning dwell 
time

1253 B151

Eighth positioning sub-
function

1254 B152

Ninth positioning 
acceleration time

1255 B153

Ninth positioning 
deceleration time

1256 B154

Ninth positioning dwell 
time

1257 B155

Ninth positioning sub-
function

1258 B156

Tenth positioning 
acceleration time

1259 B157

Tenth positioning 
deceleration time

1260 B158

Tenth positioning dwell 
time

1261 B159

Tenth positioning sub-
function

1262 B160

Eleventh positioning 
acceleration time

1263 B161

Eleventh positioning 
deceleration time

1264 B162

Eleventh positioning dwell 
time

1265 B163

Eleventh positioning sub-
function

1266 B164

Twelfth positioning 
acceleration time

1267 B165

Twelfth positioning 
deceleration time

1268 B166

Twelfth positioning dwell 
time

1269 B167

Twelfth positioning sub-
function

1270 B168

Thirteenth positioning 
acceleration time

1271 B169

Thirteenth positioning 
deceleration time

1272 B170

Thirteenth positioning 
dwell time

1273 B171

Thirteenth positioning 
sub-function

1274 B172

Fourteenth positioning 
acceleration time

1275 B173

Fourteenth positioning 
deceleration time

1276 B174

Fourteenth positioning 
dwell time

1277 B175

Fourteenth positioning 
sub-function

1278 B176

Fifteenth positioning 
acceleration time

1279 B177

Fifteenth positioning 
deceleration time

1280 B178

Fifteenth positioning dwell 
time

1281 B179

Fifteenth positioning sub-
function

1282 B180

Home position return 
method selection

1283 B181

Home position return 
speed

1284 B182

Home position return 
creep speed

1285 B183

Home position shift 
amount lower 4 digits

1286 B184

Home position shift 
amount upper 4 digits

1287 B185

Travel distance after proximity 
dog ON lower 4 digits

1288 B186

Travel distance after proximity 
dog  ON upper 4 digits

1289 B187

Home position return stopper 
torque

1290 B188

Home position return stopper 
waiting time

1292 B190

Position control terminal input 
selection

1293 B191 Roll feeding mode selection

Point 

table

Target 

position

Maximum  

speed 

(Hz)

Acceleration 

time

(s)

Deceleration 

time 

(s)

Dwell 

time 

(ms)

Auxiliary 

function

Upper Lower

1

100

0

60

5

5

1000

1 
(absolute 
position, 
continuous)

2

50

0

30

6

6

0

10 
(increment
al position, 
individual)

Name

Name

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

 

0

60Hz(Pr.4)

30Hz(Pr.5)

Time

Position command

speed

STF

ON

5s

5s

6s

6s

Point table 1

Point table 2

RH

Target position

1000000

500000

Servo ON

(LX)

ON

ON

Dwell time (Pr.1224)

(Pr.1222)

(Pr.1223)

(Pr.1226)

(Pr.1227)


background image

148 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

 • Selecting the home position return method (Pr.1282 to Pr.1288)



If it is set under PM sensorless vector control, Home position 
return parameter setting error (HP3) occurs.

 • Select the command pulse train with Pr.428.
 • If the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal is turned ON, output 

shutoff is canceled and the Position control preparation ready 
(RDY) signal is turned ON after 0.1 s. Turning ON STF (forward 
rotation stroke end signal) or STR (reverse rotation stroke end 
signal) rotates the motor according to the command pulse. If the 
forward (reverse) rotation stroke end signal is turned OFF, the 
motor does not rotate in the corresponding direction.

Pr.1282 

Setting

Home position 

return method

Description

0

Dog type 



Deceleration starts when the proximity dog 
signal is turned ON. For the home position after 
turn OFF of the proximity dog signal, the 
position specified by the first Z-phase signal or 
the position of the first Z-phase signal shifted by 
the home position shift amount (Pr.1285, 
Pr.1286) is used.

1

Count type 



Deceleration starts when the proximity dog 
signal is turned ON. After the proximity dog, the 
motor travels the specified travel distance 
(Pr.1287, Pr.1288). Then, it uses the position 
specified by the the first Z-phase signal or 
position of the Z-phase signal shifted by the 
home position shift amount (Pr.1285, Pr.1286).

2

Data set type

The position at which the start signal is input is 
used as the home position.

3

Stopper type

A workpiece is pressed to a mechanical 
stopper, and the position where it is stopped is 
set as the home position.
Pressing is confirmed when the estimated 
speed value has fallen blow Pr.865 Low speed 
detection for 0.5 s during activation of the 
torque limit operation. (While the stopper-type 
home position is performed, Pr.1289 Home 
position return stopper torque is applied.) 
After Pr.1290 Home position return stopper 
waiting time has passed after pressing is 
confirmed, the home position is shifted by the 
home position shift amount (Pr.1285 and 
Pr.1286). After a position command is created 
and the absolute value of the droop pulse (after 
electronic gear) falls below the in-position 
width, the home position return is completed.

4

(initial 

value)

Ignoring the 
home position
(Servo ON 
position as the 
home position)

The serve ON position is used as the home 
position.

5

Dog type back 
end reference

Deceleration starts at the front end of the 
proximity dog. After the back end is passed, the 
position is shifted by the post-dog travel 
distance and home position shift amount. The 
position after the shifts is set as the home 
position.
Set pulses required for deceleration from the 
creep speed or more as the total of the postdog 
travel distance and home position shift amount.

6

Count type front 
end reference

Deceleration starts at the front end of the 
proximity dog, and the position is shifted by the 
postdog travel distance and home position shift 
distance. The position after the shifts is set as 
the home position.
Set pulses required for changing the speed 
from the home position speed to the creep 
speed or more as the total of the post-dog 
travel distance and home position shift amount.

Position control by pulse train input 

Name

Name

419

B000

Position command 
source selection

428

B009

Command pulse 
selection

429

B010 Clear signal selection 430

B011

Pulse monitor 
selection

635

M610

Cumulative pulse 
clear signal selection

636

M611

Cumulative pulse 
division scaling 
factor

637

M612

Control terminal 
option-Cumulative 
pulse division 
scaling factor

638

M613

Cumulative pulse 
storage

Pr.

Setting 

range

Description

419

0 (initial 
value)

Simple position control by point tables (position 
command by setting parameters).

1

Position control by the pulse train input to the FR-A8AL

2

Simple pulse train command by inverter pulse input.

10

Simple position control by point tables (position 
command by setting parameters) (The home position 
information is retained at servo-OFF.)

100

Simple position control by point tables (position 
command by setting parameters).
The monitor value of the current position 2 is cleared 
when the home position return is completed.

110

Simple position control by point tables (position 
command by setting parameters).
The home position data is retained at servo-OFF. The 
monitor value of the current position 2 is cleared when 
the home position return is completed.

1110

For manufacturer setting.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Actual rotation

Forward rotation

Reverse rotation

Base signal

Operation ready completion (RDY)

Forward stroke end (STF)

Reverse stroke end (STR)

Inverter pulse train command

Sign signal (NP)

In-position (Y36)

Servo on (LX)

0.1s


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

149

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

Set the gear ratio between the machine gear and motor gear.

 • Adjust Pr.422 when any of such phenomena as unusual vibration, 

noise and overcurrent of the motor/machine occurs.
Increasing the setting improves traceability for the position 
command and also improves servo rigidity at a stop, but 
oppositely makes an overshoot and vibration more liable to occur.

 • The function of Pr.423 is to cancel a delay caused by the droop 

pulses in the deviation counter.

 • The first delay filter for the feed forward command can be input in 

Pr.425.

 • Use Pr.446 to set the gain for the model position controller.
 • Turning ON the RT signal enables the second position loop gain.

 • If the number of droop pulses is equal to or smaller than the 

Pr.426 setting value, the In-position (Y36) signal turns ON.

 • If the number of droop pulses exceeds the Pr.427 setting, a 

position error is detected, Excessive position fault (E.OD) is 
activated and the inverter output is shut off.

 • If the current position (before the electronic gear) exceeds the 

detected position (Pr.1294 + Pr.1295), the Position detected 
signal (FP) turns ON.

 • Use Pr.1296 Position detection selection to determine whether 

to detect a position in the positive position range or in the 
negative position range.

The inverter output signals can be turned ON/OFF instead of the 
remote output terminals of a programmable controller.



Any value.



Y0 to Y6 are available when the extension output option (FR-
A8AY) is installed.



RA1 to RA3 are available hen the relay output option (FR-A8AR) 
is installed.

Electronic gear setting under position 
control 

Name

Name

420

B001

Command pulse 
scaling factor 
numerator (electronic 
gear numerator) 

421

B002

Command pulse 
multiplication 
denominator (electronic 
gear denominator) 

424

B005

Position command 
acceleration/
deceleration time 
constant

Pr.

Setting range

Description

420

0 to 32767

Set the electronic gear.
Pr.420 is the numerator and Pr.421 is the 
denominator.

421

424

0 to 50 s

Use it when the rotation is not smooth because 
the electronic gear ratio is large (10 times or 
larger) and the rotation speed is slow.

Position control gain adjustment 

Name

Name

422

B003 Position control gain 423

B004

Position feed forward 
gain

425

B006

Position feed forward 
command filter

446

B012

Model position 
control gain

1298 B013

Second position 
control gain

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Position adjustment parameter 

Name

Name

426

B007 In-position width

427

B008 Excessive level error

1294 B192

Position detection 
lower 4 digits

1295 B193

Position detection 
upper 4 digits

1296 B194

Position detection 
selection

1297 B195

Position detection 
hysteresis width

428, 429

Refer to the page on Pr.419.

446

Refer to the page on Pr.422.

450

Refer to the page on Pr.71.

451

Refer to the page on Pr.80.

453, 454

Refer to the page on Pr.80.

455 to 463

Refer to the page on Pr.82.

Remote output function

Name

Name

495

M500

Remote output 
selection

496

M501 Remote output data 1

497

M502 Remote output data 2

Pr.

Setting 

range

Description

495

0
(initial value)

Remote output data is 
cleared when the power 
supply is turned OFF.

Remote output data 
is cleared during an 
inverter reset.

1

Remote output data is 
retained when the power 
supply is turned OFF.

10

Remote output data is 
cleared when the power 
supply is turned OFF.

Remote output data 
is retained during 
an inverter reset.

11

Remote output data is 
retained when the power 
supply is turned OFF.

496

0 to 4095

Refer to the diagram below.
(Even if 

Pr.77 Parameter write selection

 is set to 

"0 (initial value)", the setting value can be 
changed regardless whether the inverter is 
running or not or of the operation mode.)

497

0 to 4095

<Remote output data>

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.496

Pr.497

b11

b0

ABC1

ABC2

∗1

∗1

∗1

∗1

∗1

FU

OL

IPF

SU

RUN

b11

b0

Y5  

∗2

Y6  

∗2

RA1 

∗3

RA2 

∗3

RA3 

∗3

∗1

∗1

Y4  

∗2

Y3  

∗2

Y2  

∗2

Y1  

∗2

Y0  

∗2


background image

150 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

The maintenance timer output signal (Y95) is output when the 
inverter's cumulative energization time reaches the time period set 
with the parameter. MT1, MT2 or MT3 is displayed on the operation 
panel (FR-DU08).
This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of 
peripheral devices.

 • The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored in the 

EEPROM every hour and displayed in Pr.503 (Pr.686, Pr.688) in 
100 h increments. Pr.503 (Pr.686, Pr.688) is clamped at 9998 
(999800 h).

The motor coasts to a stop (inverter output shutoff) when inverter 
output frequency falls to Pr. 522 setting or lower.

 • When both of the frequency setting signal and output frequency 

falls to the frequency set in Pr.522 or lower, the inverter stops the 
output and the motor coasts to a stop.



The output frequency before the slip compensation is compared 
with the Pr.522 setting.

 • At a stop condition, the motor starts running when the frequency 

setting signal exceeds Pr.522 +2Hz. The motor is accelerated at 
the Pr.13 Starting frequency (0.01Hz under IPM motor control) 
at the start.

Setup of the inverter can be easily performed with FR Configurator2 
through the USB communication.

The output current average value during constant-speed operation 
and the maintenance timer value are output to the current average 
value monitor signal (Y93) as a pulse.
The output pulse width can be used in a device such as the I/O 
module of a programmable controller as a guideline for the 
maintenance time for mechanical wear, belt stretching, or 
deterioration of devices with age.
The pulse is repeatedly output during constant-speed operation in 
cycles of 20 s to the Current average monitor signal (Y93).

Maintenance timer warning

Name

Name

503

E710 Maintenance timer 1

504

E711

Maintenance timer 1 
warning output set time

686

E712 Maintenance timer 2

687

E713

Maintenance timer 2 
warning output set time

688

E714 Maintenance timer 3

689

E715

Maintenance timer 3 
warning output set time

516 to 519

Refer to the page on Pr.29.

Output stop function

Name

522

G105

Output stop 
frequency

Pr.522

setting

Description

0 to 590 Hz

Set the frequency to start coasting to a stop (output shutoff).

9999

(initial value) No function

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

First power

Time

ON

Maintenance
timer1
(Pr. 503)

Set "0" in Pr.503

Y95 signal
MT1 display

OFF

ON

ON

Pr.504

9998

(999800h)

Operation example of the maintenance timer 1 (Pr.503, Pr.504) (with both MT2 and MT3 OFF)

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Output frequency *1

Pr.522

Pr.13

STF

Time

Inverter output shutoff

RUN

Pr.522+2Hz

Target frequency 

(fixed)

Example of when target frequency>Pr.522+2Hz, and start signal is ON/OFF

USB device communication

Name

Name

547

N040

USB communication 
station number

548

N041

USB communication 
check time interval

Pr.

Setting range

Description

547

0 to 31

Inverter station number specification

548

0

USB communication is possible, however the 
inverter will trip (E.USB) when the mode 
changes to the PU operation mode.

0.1 to 999.8

Set the communication check time interval.
If a no-communication state persists for 
longer than the permissible time, the inverter 
will trip (E.USB).

9999
(initial value)

No communication check

549

Refer to the page on Pr.117.

550, 551

Refer to the page on Pr.338.

552

Refer to the page on Pr.31.

553, 554

Refer to the page on Pr.127.

Current average value monitor signal

Name

Name

555

E720 Current average time 556

E721

Data output mask 
time

557

E722

Current average 
value monitor signal 
output reference 
current

560

Refer to the page on Pr.9.

561

Refer to the page on Pr.82.

563, 564

Refer to the page on Pr.52.

569

Refer to the page on Pr.80.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Y93 signal

Data output mask time

Start pulse

1 cycle (20s)

Output current average value pulse

Next cycle

Time

Output 
frequency

From acceleration to constant speed operation

Maintenance timer pulse 

End pulse 

The averaged current value is output as low pulse shape for 
0.5 to 9s (10 to 180%) during start pulse output.

When the speed has changed to constant 
from acceleration/deceleration, Y93 signal is 
not output for Pr. 556 time.

Signal output time=

output current average value (A)

Pr. 557 (A)

5s

Signal output time=

5s

40000h

Pr. 503     100h

output as low pulse 
shape for 1 to 16.5s

The maintenance timer value (Pr. 503) is output 
as Hi output pulse shape for 2 to 9s (16000h to 
72000h).

Output as Hi pulse shape for 1s (fixed) 
The output currents are averaged during the time 
period set in Pr.555.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

151

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

Four rating types of different rated current and permissible load can 
be selected. The optimal inverter rating can be chosen in 
accordance with the application, enabling equipment size to be 
reduced.



Not compatible with the IP55 compatible model.

When current is input to the analog input terminal 2 and terminal 4, 
operation when the current input has gone below the specified level 
(loss of analog current input) can be selected. It is possible to 
continue the operation even when the analog current input is lost.

The traverse operation, which oscillates the frequency at a constant 
cycle, is available.

If the undervoltage protection (E.UVT) is activated due to unstable 
voltage in the power supply, the undervoltage level (DC bus voltage 
value) can be changed.



For the 200 V class



For the 400 V class

Multiple rating setting

Name

570

E301

Multiple rating 
setting

Pr.570 

setting

Description

0 



SLD rating
110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics)
Surrounding air temperature of 40

C

1

LD rating
120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics)
Surrounding air temperature of 50

C

2 

(initial value)

ND rating
150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics)
Surrounding air temperature of 50

C

3 



HD rating
200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics)
Surrounding air temperature of 50

C

571

Refer to the page on Pr.13.

Checking of current input on analog 
input terminal

Name

Name

573

A680 4 mA input check 

selection

777

A681 4 mA input check 

operation frequency

T052

T053

778

A682 4 mA input check 

filter

T054

Pr.

Setting range

Description

547

1

Continues the operation with output frequency 
before the current input loss.

2

When the current input loss is detected, 4 mA 
input fault (E.LCI) is activated.

3

Decelerates to stop when the current input 
loss is detected. After it is stopped, 4 mA input 
fault (E.LCI) is activated.

4

Continues operation with the Pr.777 setting.

9999
(initial value)

No current input check

548

0 to 590 Hz

Set the running frequency for current input 
loss. (Valid when Pr.573 = "4")

9999
(initial value)

No current input check when Pr.573 = "4"

778

0 to 10 s

Set the current input loss detection time.

574

Refer to the page on Pr.95.

575 to 577

Refer to the page on Pr.127.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Traverse function

Name

Name

592

A300

Traverse function 
selection

593

A301

Maximum amplitude 
amount

594

A302

Amplitude compensation 
amount during deceleration

595

A303

Amplitude compensation 
amount during acceleration

596

A304

Amplitude 
acceleration time

597

A305

Amplitude 
deceleration time

Pr.

Setting 

range

Description

592

0

Traverse function invalid

1

Traverse function valid only in External operation 
mode

2

Traverse function valid regardless of the operation mode

593

0 to 25%

Level of amplitude during traverse operation

594

0 to 50%

Compensation amount during amplitude inversion 
(from acceleration to deceleration)

595

0 to 50%

Compensation amount during amplitude inversion 
(from deceleration to acceleration)

596

0.1 to 3600 s Time period of acceleration during traverse operation

597

0.1 to 3600 s Time period of deceleration during traverse operation

Varying the activation level of the 
undervoltage protective function

Name

598

H102 Undervoltage level

Pr. 598 setting

Description

175 to 215 VDC 



Set the DC voltage value at which E.UVT occurs.

350 to 430 VDC 



9999 

(initial value)

E.UVT occurs at 215 VDC (200 V class) / 430 
VDC (400 V class).

599

Refer to the page on Pr.30.

600 to 604

Refer to the page on Pr.9.

609, 610

Refer to the page on Pr.127.

611

Refer to the page on Pr.57.

639 to 648, 650, 651

Refer to the page on Pr.278.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

f0

Output frequency(Hz)

Time(s)

f1

f1

t1

(Pr.596)

f2

f3

Pr.7

Pr.8

Pr.7

STF(STR)

signal

X37 signal

ON

ON

Traverse operation

t2

(Pr.597)

f0: set frequency
f1: amplitude amount from the set frequency

(f0 

× Pr.593/100)

f2: compensation amount at transition from

acceleration to deceleration
(f1 

× Pr.594/100)

f3: compensation amount at transition from

deceleration to acceleration
(f1 

× Pr.595/100)

t1: time from acceleration during traverse

operation (Time from (f0 

− f1) to (f0 + f1))

(Pr.596)

t2: time from deceleration during traverse

operation (Time from (f0 + f1) to (f0 

− f1))

(Pr.597)

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.


background image

152 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

If the communication between the master and the slave is lost for a 
certain period, the inverter assumes it is in disconnection state and 
activates the protective function (E.SER) to shut off the output.

The vibration (resonance) of the machine during motor operation 
can be suppressed.
  • Set  Pr.653 to 100%, and check if the vibration is suppressed. If 

the vibration is not suppressed, raise the setting value of Pr.653 
gradually to minimize the vibration.

 • When the vibrational frequency due to the mechanical resonance 

(fluctuation of torque, speed, and converter output voltage) is 
known using a tester and such, set 1/2 to 1 times of the 
vibrational frequency to Pr.654. (Setting vibrational frequency 
range can suppress the vibration better.)

An analog value can be output from the analog output terminal.

Terminals FM/CA, AM and the analog output terminal of the option 
FR-A8AY can output the values set in Pr.656 to Pr.659 (Analog 
remote output).
When Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or 
90" (remote output), the FM type inverter can output a pulse train 
from terminal FM.

When Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or 
90" (remote output), the CA type inverter can output any analog 
current from terminal CA.

When Pr.158 AM terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or 90", 
an analog voltage can be output from terminal AM.

Parallel operation communication check 
time (FR-A842-P)

Name

652

N092

Parallel operation 
communication 
check time

Pr. 652 setting

Description

0

Parallel operation communication disabled

0.1 to 120 s

Set the interval of the communication check (signal 
loss detection) time.
If a no-communication state persists for the 
permissible time or longer, the inverter will trip.

9999

No communication check (signal loss detection)

Speed smoothing control 

Name

Name

653

G410

Speed smoothing 
control

654

G411

Speed smoothing 
cutoff frequency

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

0

Vibrational frequency

159Hz (fixed)

Torque fluctuation

detection range

Cutoff frequency

Pr.654

Current for
torque

Analog remote output function

Name

Name

655

M530

Analog remote 
output selection

656

M531

Analog remote 
output 1

657

M532

Analog remote 
output 2

658

M533

Analog remote 
output 3

659

M534

Analog remote 
output 4

Pr. 655 

setting

Description

0 

(initial value)

Remote output data is cleared 
when the power supply is turned 
OFF.

Remote output data is 
cleared during an 
inverter reset.

1

Remote output data is retained 
when the power supply is turned 
OFF.

10

Remote output data is cleared 
when the power supply is turned 
OFF.

Remote output data is 
retained during an 
inverter reset.

11

Remote output data is retained 
when the power supply is turned 
OFF.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

1440

1100

1200

Pulse speed

[pulse/s]

800

1000

Analog remote output value [%]

0

2400

Terminal FM (FM output)

50K

1100

1200

Pulse speed

[pulse/s]

800

1000

Analog remote output value [%]

0

55K

Terminal FM (High-speed pulse train output)

20

1100

1200

Output current [mA]

800

1000

Analog remote output value [%]

0

Terminal CA

10

1100

1200

-10

900

Output voltage [V]

800

1000

Analog remote output value [%]

Terminal AM

0


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

153

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

Increase the loss in the motor by increasing the magnetic flux at the 
time of deceleration. Deceleration time can be reduced by 
suppressing the stall prevention (overvoltage) (oL).
It will make possible to reduce the deceleration time without a brake 
resistor. (Usage can be reduced if a brake resistor is used.)

 • Setting of increased magnetic excitation rate (Pr.660, Pr.661)

When the DC bus voltage exceeds the increased magnetic excitation 
deceleration operation level during the deceleration, excitation is 
increased in accordance with the setting value in Pr.661.

Turn ON/OFF the control circuit temperature signal (Y207) 
according to the result of comparison between the Pr.663 setting 
and the monitored value of the control circuit temperature.

As compared to our conventional SF-JR motor, the slip amount is 
small for the high-performance energy-saving SF-PR motor. When 
replacing the SF-JR to the SF-PR, the slip amount is reduced and 
the rotations per minute increases. Therefore, when the SF-PR is 
used with the same frequency setting as that of the SF-JR, power 
consumption may increase as compared to the SF-JR.
By setting the slip amount adjustment mode, the frequency 
command can be adjusted to keep the rotations per minute of the 
SF-PR equivalent to those of the SF-JR for power consumption 
reduction. (This function is not available on the FR-A842-P.)

When performing a deceleration stop on the motor, accidental 
acceleration can cause the inverter to trip.
This can prevent a malfunction due to an incorrect encoder pulse 
setting, when the motor has stopped.

Increased magnetic excitation deceleration 

Name

Name

660

G130

Increased magnetic 
excitation deceleration 
operation selection

661

G131

Magnetic excitation 
increase rate

662

G132

Increased magnetic 
excitation current level

Pr.

Setting 

range

Description

660

0 
(initial value)

Without increased magnetic excitation 
deceleration

1

With increased magnetic excitation deceleration

661

0 to 40%

Set the increase of magnetic excitation.

9999
(initial value)

Magnetic excitation increase rate 10% under V/F 
control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Magnetic excitation increase rate 0% under Real 
sensorless vector control and vector control

662

0 to 300%

The increased magnetic excitation rate is 
automatically lowered when the output current 
exceeds the setting value at the time of increased 
magnetic excitation deceleration.

Inverter

Increased magnetic excitation 

deceleration operation level

200 V class

340 V

400 V class

680 V

With 500 V input

740 V

Surrounding air temperature change 
monitoring

Name

663

M060

Control circuit 
temperature signal 
output level

665

Refer to the page on Pr.882.

668

Refer to the page on Pr.261.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode 

Name

Name

673

G060

SF-PR slip amount 
adjustment operation 
selection

674

G061

SF-PR slip amount 
adjustment gain

Pr.

Setting range

Description

673

2, 4, 6

Set the number of SF-PR motor poles.

9999
(initial value)

Slip amount adjustment mode invalid

674

0 to 500%

Setting is available for fine adjustment of the slip 
amount.
To reduce the rotations per minute, set a larger 
value. To increase the rotations per minute, set a 
smaller value.

679 to 683

Refer to the page on Pr.286.

684

Refer to the page on Pr.82.

686 to 689

Refer to the page on Pr.503.

Deceleration check 

Name

690

H881 Deceleration check time

Pr. 690

setting

Description

0 to 3600 s

Set the time required to shut off output due to 
deceleration check after the start signal is OFF.

9999

No deceleration check

692 to 696

Refer to the page on Pr.9.

699

Refer to the page on Pr.178.

702, 706, 707, 711, 712, 717, 721, 724, 725, 738 to 746

Refer to the page on Pr.82.

747

Refer to the page on Pr.788.

753 to 759

Refer to the page on Pr.127.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Motor speed

Time

Motor coasting

Fault output

(ALM)

Start signal

(STF, STR)

ON

ON

Pr.690

E.OSD

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.


background image

154 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

This function is to drive the motor at a certain speed before starting 
PID control. This function is useful for a pump with a long hose. 
Without this function, PID control would start before the pump is 
filled with water, and proper control would not be performed.

 • Example of pre-charge operation

When the measured amount reaches the pre-charge ending level 
(Pr.761 Pre-charge ending level 

 "9999")The pre-charge 

operation ends when the measured value reaches the Pr.761 
setting or higher, then the PID control is performed.

 • Turning ON the RT signal enables the second pre-charge 

function.

The torque characteristics in a low-speed range under PM 
sensorless vector control can be changed. (This function is not 
available on the FR-A842-P.)



The low-speed range high-torque characteristic (current 
synchronization operation) is disabled for PM motors other than 
MM-CF, even if "9999" is set.

 • Use Pr.747 to switch the torque characteristic according to the 

application or to switch among motors connected to one inverter.

After power ON or inverter reset, output signal (Y79 signal) is output 
in pulses every time accumulated output power, which is counted 
after the Pr.799 Pulse increment setting for output power is set, 
reaches the specified value (or its integral multiples).

 • The inverter continues to count the output power at retry function or 

when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function 
works without power OFF of output power (power failure that is too 
short to cause an inverter reset), and it does not reset the count.

 • If power failure occurs, output power is counted from 0 kWh again.
 • Assign pulse output of output power (Y79: setting value 79 

(positive logic), 179 (negative logic)) to any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 
(Output terminal function selection).

PID pre-charge function

Name

Name

760

A616

Pre-charge fault 
selection

761

A617

Pre-charge ending 
level

762

A618

Pre-charge ending 
time

763

A619

Pre-charge upper 
detection level

764

A620 Pre-charge time limit 765

A656

Second pre-charge 
fault selection

766

A657

Second pre-charge 
ending level

767

A658

Second pre-charge 
ending time

768

A659

Second pre-charge 
upper detection level

769

A660

Second pre-charge 
time limit

Pr.

Setting range

Description

760

0 (initial value)

Fault indication with output shutoff immediately 
after a pre-charge fault occurs.

1

Fault indication with deceleration stop after a 
pre-charge fault occurs.

761

0 to 100%

Set the measurement level to end the pre-
charge operation.

9999 (initial value)

Without pre-charge ending level

762

0 to 3600 s

Set the time to end the pre-charge operation.

9999 (initial value)

Without pre-charge ending time

763

0 to 100%

Set the upper limit for the pre-charged amount. 
A pre-charge fault occurs when the measured 
value exceeds the setting during pre-charging.

9999 (initial value)

Without pre-charge upper limit level

764

0 to 3600 s

Set the time limit for the pre-charge operation. 
A pre-charge fault occurs when the pre-charge 
time exceeds the setting.

9999 (initial value)

Without pre-charge time limit

774 to 776

Refer to the page on Pr.52.

779

Refer to the page on Pr.117.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.127

0Hz

STF

PID control

Pr.761

Measured value[PSI]

Output frequency[Hz]

Y49

Ending level

Time

Time

Pr.

Pr.

Low-speed range torque characteristics 
selection 

Name

Name

788

G250

Low speed range 
torque characteristic 
selection

747

G350

Second motor low-
speed range torque 
characteristic 
selection

Pr.

Setting range

Description

788

0

Disables the low-speed range torque characteristic 
(current synchronization operation).

9999
(initial value) 



Enables the low-speed range torque characteristic 
(high frequency superposition control)

747

0

Disables the low-speed range torque characteristic 
(current synchronization operation) while the RT 
signal is ON.

9999
(initial value) 



Enables the low-speed range torque characteristic 
(high frequency superposition control) while the RT 
signal is ON.

791, 792

Refer to the page on Pr.7.

Pulse train output of output power (Y79 
signal)

Name

799

M520

Pulse increment 
setting for output 
power

Pr. 799 setting

Description

0.1 kWh,

1 kWh (initial value), 

10 kWh, 100 kWh, 

1000 kWh

Pulse train output of output power (Y79) is output in 
pulses at every output power (kWh) that is specified.

800

Refer to the page on Pr.80.

802

Refer to the page on Pr.10.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

When Pr.799 = 10

10kWh

20kWh

Time

OFF

 

ON

ON for 0.15s

Output power

Pulse output of output power
(Y79)

Pr.

Pr.


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

155

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

For torque control, the torque command source can be selected.

 • Torque command based on the analog input to terminal 1

The following figure shows the torque command based on the 
analog input to terminal 1 according to C16, C17 (Pr.919), C18, 
and C19 (Pr.920).

 • Torque command by the parameters

The following diagram shows relation between the Pr.805 or 
Pr.806 setting and the actual torque command value. The torque 
command is shown by offset from 1000% that is regarded as 0%.

 • The Pr.1114 setting determines whether or not the torque 

command polarity is reversed when the reverse rotation 
command (STR) is turned ON.

When the inverter is operating under torque control, motor 
overspeeding may occur if the load torque drops to a value less than 
the torque command value. Set the speed limit value to prevent such 
overspeeding.
 • The speed limit control method can be selected using Pr.1113.

Torque command source selection 

Name

Name

801

H704 Output limit level

803

G210

Constant output range torque 
characteristic selection

804

D400

Torque command 
source selection

805

D401

Torque command 
value (RAM)

806

D402

Torque command value 
(RAM, EEPROM)

1114 D403

Torque command 
reverse selection

432

D120

Pulse train torque 
command bias

433

D121

Pulse train torque 
command gain

Pr.

Setting range

Description

801

0 to 400%

Set the torque current  limit level.

9999
(initial value)

The torque limit setting value is used for limiting the 

torque current level.

803

0 (initial value),
10

Constant motor output 

command

In the torque 

command setting, 

select torque 

command for the 

constant output 

area.

1, 11

Constant torque command

2

The torque is constant unless 

the output limit of the torque 

current is reached. (The 

torque current is limited.)

804

0 (initial value)

Torque command based on the analog input to terminal 1

1

Torque command by the parameters

Setting value of Pr.805 or Pr.806 (-400% to 400%)

2

Torque command by the pulse train input (FR-A8AL)

3

Torque command via CC-Link communication (FR-

A8NC/FR-A8NCE/FR-A800-GF)

Torque command via PROFIBUS-DP 

communication (FR-A8NP)

4

Digital input from the option (FR-A8AX)

5

Torque command via CC-Link communication (FR-

A8NC/FR-A8NCE/FR-A800-GF)

Torque command via PROFIBUS-DP 

communication (FR-A8NP)

6

805

600 to 1400%

Torque command values can be set by setting 

Pr.805 (RAM) and Pr.806 (RAM, EEPROM). 

(Communication options can also be used for the 

setting.)

In this case, set an appropriate value for the speed 

limit value to prevent overspeed.

806

600 to 1400%

Pr.1114 setting

Torque command polarity (sign) when the STR signal is ON

0

Not reversed

1 (initial value) Reversed

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Torque command value

Terminal 1
analog input

C19

(Pr.919)

C17

(Pr.920)

C18

(Pr.919)

C16

(Pr.920)

Torque command value

400%

600%

1000%

1400%

-400%

Pr.805, Pr.806
settings

Torque command value

=Pr.805(or Pr.806)-1000%

Speed limit under torque control 

Name

Name

807

H410 Speed limit selection 808

H411

Forward rotation 
speed limit/speed 
limit

809

H412

Reverse rotation 
speed limit/reverse-
side speed limit

1113 H414

Speed limit method 
selection

Pr.807 

setting

Speed limit 

control system

Speed limit

9999

Mode 1 (speed 
control by analog 
input)

Forward rotation speed limit
Pr.807 = "0": Speed command under 
speed control
Pr.807 = "1": Pr.808 setting value
Pr.807 = "2": Analog input at 0 to 10 V 
input (to terminal 1).
Pr.1 setting value at -10 to 0 V input (to 
terminal 1).

Reverse rotation speed limit
Pr.807 = "0": Speed command under 
speed control
Pr.807 = "1": Pr.809 setting value. If 
Pr.809 = "9999", the Pr.808 setting 
value applies.
Pr.807 = "2": Analog input at 0 to 10 V 
input (to terminal 1).
Analog input at -10 to 0 V input (to 
terminal 1).

0

(initial value)

Mode 2 (normal 
setting)

Speed limit
Pr.807 = "0, 2": Speed command 
under speed control
Pr.807 = "1": Pr.808 setting value

Inverted side speed limit
Pr.809 setting value

1

Mode 3 (winding/
unwinding by a 
positive torque 
command)

2

Mode 4 (winding/
unwinding by a 
negative torque 
command)

10

Switchover by 
external terminals

X93 signal OFF: Speed limit by the 
speed limit mode 3
X93 signal ON: Speed limit by the 
speed limit mode 4

810 to 817

Refer to the page on Pr.22.

811

Refer to the page on Pr.37.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.


background image

156 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

The load inertia ratio (load moment of inertia) for the motor is 
calculated in real time from the torque command and rotation speed 
during motor driving by the vector control. Gains for each control 
(Pr.422, Pr.820, Pr.821, and Pr.828) are set automatically from this 
load inertia ratio and the setting value for the response level (Pr.818).
Under Real sensorless vector control or PM sensorless vector 
control, enter the load inertia ratio manually.
The work required for gain adjustment is reduced.
 • Set the response level in Pr.818 to calculate each gain from the 

load inertia ratio.

  • The  Pr.819 setting enables/disables the easy gain tuning.

Set the proportional gain for speed loop. (Setting this parameter 
higher improves the speed response and reduces the speed 
fluctuation caused by external disturbance. However, too large 
setting causes vibration or noise.)
 • The setting range of Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr.830 Speed 

control P gain 2 is 0 to 1000%. The initial value of Pr.820 is 60%.

 • A speed loop proportional gain can be set in the per-unit system 

using Pr.1117, Pr.1118, and Pr.1121.

 • As the speed control response level is decreased in the constant 

output range (at the rated speed or more) due to the weak field 
magnet, the speed control P gain is compensated in Pr.1116.

Set the integral compensation time for speed loop.
Setting this parameter lower shortens the return time to the original 
speed when the speed fluctuates due to external disturbance. 
However, too small setting causes overshoot.
Setting this parameter higher improves the level of safety. However, large 
setting prolongs the return time (response time) and may cause undershoot.
Turning the X44 signal ON stops the seed loop integral calculation 
and clears the integral term in accordance with the Pr.1115 setting. 

Set the time constant of primary delay filter for speed feedback 
signal.
Speed loop response is reduced. Under ordinary circumstances, 
therefore, use the initial value as it is.
If there is speed ripple due to high frequency disturbance, set a time 
constant.
Speed is oppositely destabilized if the setting value is too large.

Set the proportional gain under torque control.
If the setting value is large, changes in the current command can be 
followed well and current fluctuation relative to external disturbance 
is smaller. If the setting value is however too large, it becomes 
unstable and high frequency torque pulse is produced.
The setting range of Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop 
proportional gain) and Pr.834 Torque control P gain 2 is 0 to 
500%. The initial value of Pr.824 is 100%.
For ordinary adjustment, try to set within the range of 50 to 200%.

Set the current loop integral compensation time under torque 
control.
Setting this parameter smaller increases torque response. However, 
too small setting may destabilize current.
If the setting value is small, it produces current fluctuation toward 
disturbance, decreasing time until it returns to the original current 
value.

Set the time constant of primary delay filter for torque feedback 
signal.
Current loop response is reduced. Under ordinary circumstances, 
therefore, use the initial value as it is.

Easy gain tuning selection 

Name

Name

818

C112

Easy gain tuning 
response level setting

819

C113

Easy gain tuning 
selection

Pr.

Setting range

Description

818

1 to 15

1: Slow response


15: Fast response

819

0 (initial value)

No easy gain tuning

1

Gain is calculated with load calculation.
 (This function is valid under vector control.)

2

Gain is calculated with load (Pr.880) manual input.

Proportional gain setting for speed loop 

Name

Name

820

G211 Speed control P gain 1 830

G311 Speed control P gain 2

1116 G206

Constant output range 
speed control P gain 
compensation

1117 G261

Speed control P gain 1 
(per-unit system)

1118 G361

Speed control P gain 2 
(per-unit system)

1121 G260

Per-unit speed control 
reference frequency

Integral time setting for speed control 

Name

Name

821

G212

Speed control integral 
time 1

831

G312

Speed control integral 
time 2

1115 G218

Speed control integral 
term clear time

822

Refer to the page on Pr.74.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Speed detection filter function 

Name

Name

823

G215 Speed detection filter 1 833

G315 Speed detection filter 2

Proportional gain setting for current 
loop 

Name

Name

824

G213

Torque control P gain 1 
(current loop 
proportional gain)

834

G313 Torque control P gain 2

Current control integral time setting 

Name

Name

825

G214

Torque control 
integral time 1 (current 
loop integral time)

835

G314

Torque control 
integral time 2

826

Refer to the page on Pr.74.

Torque detection filter function 

Name

Name

827

G216

Torque detection 
filter 1

837

G316

Torque detection 
filter 2

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

157

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

Speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control can be 
selected using parameter settings.
Under speed feed forward control, the motor trackability for speed 
command changes can be improved.
Under model adaptive speed control, the speed trackability and the 
response level to motor external disturbance torque can be adjusted 
individually.

 • Speed feed forward control

When the load inertia ratio is set in Pr.880, the required torque for 
the set inertia is calculated according to the acceleration and 
deceleration commands, and the torque is generated quickly.
When the inertia ratio is to be estimated by easy gain tuning, the 
estimated inertia ratio is stored as the setting value of Pr.880. The 
speed feed forward is calculated based on this setting value.
When the speed feed forward gain is 100%, the calculation result 
for speed feed forward is applied as is.
If the speed command changes suddenly, the torque is increased 
by the speed feed forward calculation. The maximum limit for the 
speed feed forward torque is set in Pr.879.
The speed feed forward result can also be lessened with a 
primary delay filter in Pr.878.

 • Model adaptive speed control

The model speed of the motor is calculated, and the feedback is 
applied to the speed controller on the model side. Also, this model 
speed is set as the command of the actual speed controller.
The inertia ratio of Pr.880 is used when the speed controller on 
the model side calculates the torque current command value.
When the inertia ratio is to be estimated by easy gain tuning, the setting 
value of Pr.880 is overwritten by the estimated inertia ratio. The torque 
current command value is calculated based on this setting value.
The torque current command of the speed controller on the model 
side is added to the output of the actual speed controller, and set 
as the input of the iq current control.
Pr.828 is used for the speed control on the model side (P control), 
and first gain Pr.820 is used for the actual speed controller. The 
model adaptive speed control is enabled for the first motor.
Even if the driven motor is switched to the second motor while 
Pr.877 = "2", the second motor is operated as Pr.877 = "0".

 • The model adaptive speed control gain can be set in the per-unit 

system using Pr.1119 and Pr.1121.

The torque bias function can be used to make the starting torque 
start-up faster. At this time, the motor starting torque can be adjusted 
with a contact signal or analog signal.

 • Pr.841 Torque bias 1, Pr.842 Torque bias 2, and Pr.843 Torque 

bias 3 
The rated torque of 100% equals to the torque bias setting value 
of 1000%, which is the central value of the torque. When the 
setting value is 1000%, the bias value is "0".

 • Pr.844 Torque bias filter

The torque start-up can be made slower. The torque start-up 
operation at this time is the time constant of the primary delay filter.

 • Pr.845 Torque bias operation time

Set the time for continuing the output torque simply by using the 
command value for the torque bias.

 • Pr.846 Torque bias balance compensation

Set the voltage of the torque bias analog input value that is input to 
terminal 1 to compensate the balance of the torque bias amount.

 • Pr.847 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias, Pr.848  Fall-time 

torque bias terminal 1 gain
Set the torque bias amount of when the cage is descended.

Speed feed forward control and model 
adaptive speed control 

Name

Name

828

G224

Model speed control 
gain

877

G220

Speed feed forward 
control/model adaptive 
speed control selection

878

G221

Speed feed forward 
filter

879

G222

Speed feed forward 
torque limit 

880

C114 Load inertia ratio

881

G223

Speed feed forward 
gain

1119 G262

Model speed control 
gain (per-unit 
system)

1121 G260

Per-unit speed 
control reference 
frequency

Pr. 877 setting

Description

0 (initial value)

Perform normal speed control.

1

Perform speed feed forward control.

2

Model adaptive speed control becomes valid.

830

Refer to the page on Pr.820.

831

Refer to the page on Pr.821.

832

Refer to the page on Pr.74.

833

Refer to the page on Pr.823.

834

Refer to the page on Pr.824.

835

Refer to the page on Pr.825.

836

Refer to the page on Pr.74.

837

Refer to the page on Pr.827.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Torque bias 

Name

Name

840

G230 Torque bias selection 841

G231 Torque bias 1

842

G232 Torque bias 2

843

G233 Torque bias 3

844

G234 Torque bias filter

845

G235

Torque bias 
operation time

846

G236

Torque bias balance 
compensation

847

G237

Fall-time torque bias 
terminal 1 bias

848

G238

Fall-time torque bias 
terminal 1 gain

Pr. 840 setting

Description

0

Set the torque bias amount using contact signals (X42, 
X43) in Pr.841 to Pr.843.

1

Set the torque bias amount using terminal 1 in any of C16 
to C19. (When the squirrel cage rises during forward 
motor rotation.)

2

Set the torque bias amount using terminal 1 in any of C16 
to C19. (When the squirrel cage rises during reverse 
motor rotation.)

3

The torque bias amount using terminal 1 can be set 
automatically in C16 to C19 and Pr.846 according to the 
load.

24

For details of the torque bias command via PROFIBUS 
communication (FR-A8NP), refer to the Instruction 
Manual of the FR-A8NP (option).

25

9999

(initial value)

No torque bias, rated torque 100%

849

Refer to the page on Pr.74.

850

Refer to the page on Pr.10.

851, 852

Refer to the page on Pr.359.

853

Refer to the page on Pr.285.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.


background image

158 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

The excitation ratio can be lowered to enhance efficiency for light 
loads. (Motor magnetic noise can be reduced.)
When excitation ratio is reduced, output torque startup is less 
responsive.

The analog input terminal 1 and terminal 4 functions are set and 
changeable with parameters.



 This function is valid under vector control.

-: No function

When the FR-A8AL or FR-A8TP is used, the encoder pulse at the 
motor end can be divided in division ratio set in Pr.413 (for the FR-
A8AL) or Pr.863 (for the FR-A8TP) for the signal output.
Use this parameter to make the response of the machine to be input 
slower, etc.

A signal is output when the motor torque is higher than the setting of 
Pr.864.
This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation, open 
signal, etc.

Fault output can be 
done after deceleration 
stop when motor thermal 
protection is activated.

Excitation ratio 

Name

854

G217 Excitation ratio

855

Refer to the page on Pr.376.

Analog input terminal (terminal 1, 4) 
function assignment

Name

Name

858

T040

Terminal 4 function 
assignment

868

T010

Terminal 1 function 
assignment

Pr.

Setting 

range

V/F control, 

Advanced 

magnetic 

flux vector 

control

Real sensorless vector control, PM 

sensorless vector control, vector control

Speed 

control

Torque 

control

Position 

control

868

0
(initial 
value)

Frequency 
setting 
auxiliary

Speed 
setting 
auxiliary

Speed limit 
assistance

-

1

-

Magnetic flux 
command

 



Magnetic flux 
command

 



Magnetic flux 
command

 



2

-

Regenerative 
driving 
torque limit
(Pr.810 = 1)

-

Regenerative 
driving 
torque limit
(Pr.810 = 1)

3

-

-

Torque 
command 
(Pr.804 = 0)

-

4

Stall 
prevention 
operation 
level input

Torque limit
(Pr.810 = 1)

Torque 
command
(Pr.804 = 0)

Torque limit
(Pr.810 = 1)

5

-

-

Forward/
reverse 
rotation
speed limit
(Pr.807 = 2)

-

6

-

Torque bias 
input
(Pr.840 =1, 
2, 3)

-

-

9999

-

-

-

-

858

0
(initial 
value)

Frequency 
command
(AU signal-ON)

Speed 
command
(AU signal-ON)

Speed limit
(AU signal-ON)

-

1

-

Magnetic flux 
command

 



Magnetic flux 
command

 



Magnetic flux 
command

 



4

Stall 
prevention 
operation 
level input

Torque limit
(Pr.810 = 1)

-

Torque limit
(Pr.810 = 1)

9999

-

-

-

-

Pr.

GROUP

Excitation ratio

[%]

100

(Initial value)

Pr.854
setting

0

100

Load[%]

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

859, 860

Refer to the page on Pr.82.

862

Refer to the page on Pr.80.

Encoder pulse dividing output 

Name

Name

413

M601

Encoder pulse 
division ratio

863

M600

Control terminal 
option-Encoder 
pulse division ratio

Output torque detection 

Name

864

M470 Torque detection

The Torque detection (TU) 
signal turns ON when the 
output torque reaches the 
detection torque value set 
in Pr.864 or higher.
The Torque detection (TU) 
signal turns OFF when the 
output torque drops lower 
than the detection torque 
value.

865

Refer to the page on Pr.41.

866

Refer to the page on Pr.55.

867

Refer to the page on Pr.C0(900).

868

Refer to the page on Pr.858.

869

Refer to the page on Pr.C0(900).

870

Refer to the page on Pr.41.

872

Refer to the page on Pr.251.

873

Refer to the page on Pr.285.

874

Refer to the page on Pr.22.

Fault definition

Name

875

H030 Fault definition

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Time

ON

TU

OFF

Output torque (%)

Pr.864

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Output

frequency

Time

Fault output

(ALM, ALM2)

E.OHT

occurrence

Alarm output 2

(ER)

E.OHT
display

ON

ON

When Pr.875 = "1"


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

159

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

The regenerative status can be avoided by detecting the 
regenerative status and raising the frequency.
 • Continuous operation is possible by increasing the frequency 

automatically so it will not go into regenerative operation even 
when the fan is turned forcefully by other fans in the same duct.

These parameters can be used for any purpose.
Any number within the setting range of 0 to 9999 can be input.
For example, these numbers can be used:
 • As a unit number when multiple units are used.
 • As a pattern number for each operation application when multiple 

units are used.

 • As the year and month of introduction or inspection.

From the power consumption estimated value during commercial 
power supply operation, the energy saving effect by use of the 
inverter can be monitored and output.
 • The items that can be monitored on the power saving monitor 

(Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992 = "50") are 
indicated below.
(Only Power saving and Average power saving can be set to 
Pr.54 (terminal FM, terminal CA) and Pr.158 (terminal AM).)

Pr.875 

setting

Operation

Description

0

(initial 

value)

Normal 
operation

The output of the inverter is shut off immediately 
if any fault occurs. At this time, the alarm output 
2 signal (ER) and a fault signal are output.

1

Fault 
definition

At activation of the external thermal relay 
(E.OHT), motor load (electronic thermal O/L 
relay) (E.THM) and PTC thermistor (PTC) 
protective functions, the alarm output 2 (ER) 
signalis is displayed, and the motor decelerates 
to stop. After it stops, a fault signal is output.
During fault occurrence aside from the E.OHT, 
E.THM and E.PTC, the output is immediately 
shut off, and the fault is outputted.
Under position control, the operation of the 
setting value "0" is applied.

876

Refer to the page on Pr.9.

877 to 881

Refer to the page on Pr.828.

Regeneration avoidance function

Name

Name

882

G120

Regeneration avoidance 
operation selection

883

G121

Regeneration avoidance 
operation level

884

G122

Regeneration avoidance 
at deceleration detection 
sensitivity 

885

G123

Regeneration avoidance 
compensation frequency 
limit value

886

G124

Regeneration avoidance 
voltage gain

665

G125

Regeneration avoidance 
frequency gain

Pr.

Setting range

Description

882

0 (initial value) Disables regeneration avoidance function

1

Constantly enables regeneration avoidance 
function

2

Enables regeneration avoidance function only 
during constant-speed operation

883

300 to 1200 V

Set the bus voltage level to operate the 
regeneration avoidance operation. When the bus 
voltage level is set low, it will be harder to 
generate overvoltage error, but actual 
deceleration time will be longer.
Set the setting value higher than power supply 
voltage 

 

.

884

0 (initial value)

Disables regeneration avoidance due to bus 
voltage change rate

1 to 5

Set the sensitivity to detect the bus voltage 
change rate.
Setting value 1 

 5

Detection sensitivity Low 

 High

885

0 to 590 Hz

Set the limit value for frequency to rise when the 
regeneration avoidance function operates.

9999

Disables frequency limit

886

0 to 200%

Adjust the response at the time of regeneration 
avoidance operation. When the setting value is 
set larger, response against the bus voltage 
change will improve, but the output frequency 
may become unstable. If the load inertia of the 
motor is large, set the setting value of Pr.886 
smaller. When the vibration cannot be stabilized 
even if the setting value of Pr.886 is made 
smaller, set the setting value of Pr.665 smaller.

665

0 to 200%

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr. 883

Time

Time

Bus voltage 

(VDC)

Output 

frequency(Hz)

During regeneration 
avoidance function operation

Regeneration avoidance operation 
example for deceleration

Free parameter

Name

Name

888

E420 Free parameter 1

889

E421 Free parameter 2

Energy saving monitor

Name

Name

891

M023

Cumulative power 
monitor digit shifted times

892

M200 Load factor

893

M201

Energy saving 
monitor reference 
(motor capacity)

894

M202

Control selection 
during commercial 
power-supply operation

895

M203

Power saving rate 
reference value

896

M204 Power unit cost

897

M205

Power saving 
monitor average time

898

M206

Power saving cumulative 
monitor clear

899

M207

Operation time rate 
(estimated value)

52

M100

Operation panel main 
monitor selection

54

M300

FM/CA terminal 
function selection

158

M301

AM terminal function 
selection

774

M101

Operation panel 
monitor selection 1

775

M102

Operation panel 
monitor selection 2

776

M103

Operation panel 
monitor selection 3

992

M104

Operation panel 
setting dial push 
monitor selection

Energy saving 

monitored 

item

Description and formula

Increment

Power saving

The difference between the estimated value of 
the required power during commercial power 
supply operation and the input power 
calculated with the inverter.
Power supply during commercial power supply 
operation - input power monitor

0.01 kW
/0.1 kW



Power saving 

rate

The power saving ratio with the commercial 
power supply operation as 100%.

 100

0.1%

The power saving ratio with Pr.893 as 100%.

 100

Average 

power saving

The average power saving per hour during a 
predetermined time (Pr.897).

0.01 kWh
/0.1 kWh



Average 

power saving 

rate

The average power saving ratio with the 
commercial power supply operation as 100%.

 100

0.1%

The average power saving ratio with Pr.893 as 
100%.

 100

Average 

power cost 

savings

The average power saving in terms of cost.
Average power saving 

 Pr.896

0.01/0.1



Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Power saving

Power during commercial

 power supply operation

Power saving

Pr.893

 (Power saving  t)

Pr.897

 (Power saving rate  t)

Pr.897

Average power saving

Pr.893


background image

160 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

 • The items that can be monitored on the cumulative energy saving 

monitor (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992 = "51") are indicated below.
(The monitor value of the cumulative monitor can be shifted to the right 
with Pr.891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times.)



Increment for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-
A840-01800(55K) or lower



Increment for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-
A840-02160(75K) or higher

By using the operation panel or parameter unit, terminals FM, CA 
and AM can be calibrated to the full scale.
 • Terminal FM calibration (C0 (Pr.900))

Terminal FM is preset to output pulses. By setting the calibration 
parameter C0 (Pr.900), the meter connected to the inverter can 
be calibrated by parameter setting without use of a calibration 
resistor.
Using the pulse train output of terminal FM, a digital display can 
be provided to connect a digital counter. The monitor value is 
1440 pulses/s output at the full-scale value of Pr.54 FM/CA 
terminal function selection.



Not needed when the operation panel (FR-DU08) or parameter 
unit (FR-PU07) is used for calibration.
Use a calibration resistor when the indicator (frequency meter) 
needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the 
indicator is located far from the inverter.
However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale 
if the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, calibrate 
additionally with the operation panel or parameter unit.

Calibration with Pr.900 cannot be done when terminal FM is set to open 
collector output with Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection.

 • Calibration of terminal AM (C1 (Pr.901))

Terminal AM is initially set to provide a 10 VDC output in the full-
scale state of the corresponding monitor item. Calibration 
parameter C1 (Pr.901) allows the output voltage ratio (gains) to 
be adjusted according to the meter scale. Note that the maximum 
output voltage is 10 VDC.

 • Using Pr.867, the output voltage response of terminal AM can be 

adjusted in the range of 0 to 5 s.

 • Terminal CA calibration (C0 (Pr.900), C8 (Pr.930) to C11 (Pr.931))

Terminal CA is initially set to provide a 20 mADC output in the full-
scale state of the corresponding monitor item. Calibration 
parameter C0 (Pr.900) allows the output current ratio (gains) to 
be adjusted according to the meter scale. Note that the maximum 
output current is 20 mA DC.

 • Set a value at the minimum current output in the calibration 

parameters C8 (Pr.930) and C9 (Pr.930). Calibration parameter 
C10 (Pr.931) and C11 (Pr.931) are used to set a value at the 
maximum current output.

 • Using Pr.869, the output current response of terminal CA can be 

adjusted in the range of 0 to 5 s.

To input a voltage between 480 V and 500 V to the 400 V class 
inverter, change the voltage protection level.

  • Set  Pr.CLR Parameter clear = "1" to initialize all parameters. 

(Calibration parameters are not cleared.)



  • Set  ALL.CL All parameter clear = "1" to initialize all parameters.



  • Set  Err.CL Fault history clear = "1" to clear the faults history.
 • Use Pr.CPY to copy the parameter setting to multiple inverters.

If the parameter setting is copied from the FR-A820-03160(55K) 
or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower to the FR-A820-
03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or 
from the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-
02160(75K) or higher to the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and 
FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, the 

 warning appears on the 

operation panel.
After setting the parameters that have the different setting range, 
set Pr.989 as follows.

To display only the numbers of the parameters that have been 
changed from their initial values, use Pr.CHG Initial value change 
list.



If Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "1", the parameter setting is 
not cleared.

Energy saving 

monitored 

item

Description and formula

Increment

Power saving 

amount

The cumulative power saving is added up per hour.

 (Power saving rate  t)

0.01 kWh 



0.1 kWh 



Power cost 

saving

The power saving amount in terms of cost.
Power saving 

 Pr.896

0.01 



0.1 



Annual power 

saving 

amount

Estimated value of annual power saving amount.

 24  365 

0.01 kWh 



0.1 kWh 



Annual power 

cost savings

Annual power saving amount in terms of cost.
Annual power saving amount 

 Pr.896

0.01 



0.1 



Adjusting terminal FM/CA and terminal 
AM (calibration)

Name

Name

C0
(900)

M310

FM terminal 
calibration

C1
(901)

M320

AM terminal 
calibration

C8
(930)

M330

Current output bias 
signal

C9
(930)

M331

Current output bias 
current

C10
(931)

M332

Current output gain 
signal

C11
(931)

M333

Current output gain 
current

867

M321 AM output filter

869

M334 Current output filter

Power saving amount

Operation time during power 

saving accumulation

Pr.899

100

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

8VDC

T2

T1

Pulse width T1: Adjust using the calibration parameter C0 (Pr.900)
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr.55 (frequency monitor)

Set with Pr.56 (current monitor)

(Digital indicator)

(-)

1440 pulses/s(+)

FM

SD

Indicator
1mA full-scale 
analog meter

(+)

1mA

FM

SD

Calibration 
resistor 

∗1

(-)

C2 (902) to C7 (905), C12 (917) to C19 (920), C38 (932) to C41 (933)

Refer to the page on Pr.125.

C8 (930) to C11 (931)

Refer to the page on Pr.C0 (900).

C42 (934) to C45 (935)

Refer to the page on Pr.127.

Using the power supply exceeding 480 V

Name

977

E302

Input voltage mode 
selection

Pr. 977 setting

Description

0 

(initial value)

400 V class voltage protection level

1

500 V class voltage protection level

Parameter clear, parameter copy, and 
initial value change list

Name

Name

989

E490

Parameter copy 
alarm release

Pr.CLR

Parameter clear

ALL.CL

All parameter clear

Err.CL

Fault history clear

Pr.CPY

Parameter copy

Pr.CHG

Initial value change 
list

Pr. CPY setting

Description

0.---

Cancel

1.RD

Copy the source parameters to the operation panel.

2.WR

Write the parameters copied to the operation panel to 
the destination inverter.

3.VFY

Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel.

Pr. 989 setting

Operation

10

Cancels the warning of FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and 
FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.

100

Cancels the warning of FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher 
and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

161

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

The buzzer can be set to "beep" when the keys of the operation 
panel (FR-DU08) and parameter unit (FR-PU07) are operated.

Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the LCD operation panel (FR-
LU08) and the parameter unit (FR-PU07) can be performed.
Decreasing the setting value makes the contrast lighter.

A fault (protective function) is initiated by setting the parameter.
This function can be used to check how the system operates at 
activation of a protective function. The read value is always "9999". 
Even if "9999" is set, the protective function is not activated.
 • Faults that can be written with Pr.997 Fault initiation

Parameter settings are changed as a batch. Those include 
communication parameter settings for the Mitsubishi Electric's 
human machine interface (GOT) connection and the parameter 
setting for the rated frequency settings of 50 Hz/60 Hz.
Multiple parameters are changed automatically. Users do not have 
to consider each parameter number. (Automatic parameter setting 
mode)

The PID set point setting screen (direct setting screen) can be 
displayed first on the LCD operation panel according to the 
parameter setting.

Buzzer control of the operation panel

Name

990

E104 PU buzzer control

Pr.990 setting

Description

0

Without buzzer

1

(initial value)

With buzzer

PU contrast adjustment

Name

991

E105

PU contrast 
adjustment

Pr. 991 setting

Description

0 to 63

0: Light


63: Dark

992

Refer to the page on Pr.52.

994, 995

Refer to the page on Pr.286.

Fault initiation function

Name

997

H103 Fault initiation

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.997 

setting

Fault

16

E.OC1

17

E.OC2

18

E.OC3

19

E.OCT

32

E.OV1

33

E.OV2

34

E.OV3

35

E.OVT

48

E.THT

49

E.THM

64

E.FIN

80

E.IPF

81

E.UVT

82

E.ILF

96

E.OLT

97

E.SOT

98

E.LUP

99

E.LDN

112

E.BE

128

E.GF

129

E.LF

144

E.OHT

145

E.PTC

160

E.OPT

161

E.OP1

164

E.16

165

E.17

166

E.18

167

E.19

168

E.20

169

E.PA1

170

E.PA2

176

E.PE

177

E.PUE

178

E.RET

179

E.PE2

192

E.CPU

193

E.CTE

194

E.P24

196

E.CDO

197

E.IOH

198

E.SER

199

E.AIE

200

E.USB

201

E.SAF

208

E.OS

209

E.OSD

210

E.ECT

Pr.997 

setting

Fault

211

E.OD

213

E.MB1

214

E.MB2

215

E.MB3

216

E.MB4

217

E.MB5

218

E.MB6

219

E.MB7

220

E.EP

222

E.MP

225

E.IAH

228

E.LCI

229

E.PCH

230

E.PID

231

E.EHR

241

E.1

242

E.2

243

E.3

245

E.5

246

E.6

247

E.7

251

E.11

253

E.13

Pr.997 

setting

Fault

Pr.998 and IPM

Refer to the page 222.

 Automatic parameter setting

Name

Name

999

E431

Automatic parameter 
setting

AUTO

Automatic parameter 
setting

Pr.999 

setting

Description

Operation in the automatic 

parameter setting mode 

(

)

9999

(initial 

value)

No action

-

1

Sets the standard monitor 
indicator setting of PID control.

"AUTO" 

 "PID"  Write "1"

2

Automatically sets the monitor 
indicator for PID control.

"AUTO" 

 "PID"  Write "2"

10

Automatically sets the 
communication parameters for 
the GOT connection with a PU 
connector (FREQROL 500/700/
800, SENSORLESS SERVO)

"AUTO" 

 "GOT"  Write "1"

11

Automatically sets the 
communication parameters for 
the GOT connection with RS-
485 terminals (FREQROL 500/
700/800, SENSORLESS 
SERVO)

-

12

Automatically sets the 
communication parameters for 
the GOT connection with a PU 
connector (FREQROL 800 
(Automatic Negotiation))

"AUTO" 

 "GOT"  Write "2"

13

Automatically sets the 
communication parameters for 
the GOT connection with RS-
485 terminals (FREQROL 800 
(Automatic Negotiation))

-

20

50 Hz rated 
frequency

Sets the related 
parameters of the 
rated frequency 
according to the 
power supply 
frequency

"AUTO" 

 "F50"  Write "1"

21

60 Hz rated 
frequency

-

Direct setting

Name

1000 E108

Direct setting 
selection

Pr.1000 

setting

Description

0 (initial 

value)

Displays the frequency setting screen.

1

Displays the direct setting screen (for set point setting).

2

Displays the direct setting screen (for set point setting) and 
the frequency setting screen.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

162 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

The master/slave inverters to be operated in parallel can be set.

The response level of speed control in the resonance frequency 
band of mechanical systems can be lowered to avoid mechanical 
resonance.

The time can be set. The time can only be updated while the inverter 
power is ON.

 • When the year, month, day, time and minute are set in the 

parameters, the inverter counts the date and time. The date and 
time can be checked by reading the parameters.

 • Because the date and time are cleared after turning OFF the 

control circuit power supply, the clock function must be reset after 
turning ON the power supply. Use a separate power supply, such 
as an external 24 V power supply, for the control circuit of the 
simple clock function, and supply power continuously to this 
control circuit.
By using the real-time clock function with the FR-LU08, it is not 
necessary to set the time again even when the power supply is 
turned OFF.

 • The set clock is also used for functions such as faults history.

Parallel operation selection (FR-A842-P)

Name

1001 E390

Parallel operation 
selection

Pr.1001 

setting

Description

First monitor

Master/slave 

station

Number of 

slave stations

1

Slave station 1

-

2

Slave station 2

-

100

(initial 

value)

Master station

0

-

200

1

-

300

2

-

1002

Refer to the page on Pr.82.

Notch filter 

Name

Name

1003 G601

Notch filter 
frequency

1004 G602 Notch filter depth

1005 G603 Notch filter width

Pr.

Setting range

Description

1003

0 (initial value)

No notch filter

8 to 1250 Hz

Set the frequency for the center of gain 
attenuation.

1004

0 to 3

0 (Deep) 

 3 (Shallow)

1005

0 to 3

0 (Narrow) 

 3 (Wide)

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Gain

Frequency

0dB

Pr.1003

Notch filter frequency

Pr.1005

Notch filter width

Pr.1004

Notch filter depth

Simple clock function

Name

Name

1006 E020 Clock (year)

1007 E021 Clock (month, day)

1008 E022 Clock (hour, minute)

Pr.

Description

1006

Set the year (A.D.).
Initial value: 2000

1007

Set the month and day.
1000 and 100 digits: January to December
10 and 1 digits: 1 to end of month (28, 29, 30 or 31)
For December 31, set "1231".
Initial value: 101 (January 1)

1008

Set the hour and minute using the 24-hour clock.
1000 and 100 digits: 0 to 23 hours
10 and 1 digits: 0 to 59 minutes
For 23:59, set "2359".
Initial value: 0 (00:00)

1018

Refer to the page on Pr.52.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

163

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

The operating status of the inverter can be traced and saved on a 
USB memory device.
Saved data can be monitored by FR Configurator2, and the status of 
the inverter can be analyzed.
 • This function samples the status (analog monitor and digital monitor) 

of the inverter, traces the sampling data when a trigger (trace start 
condition) is generated, and saves the resulting trace data.

 • Start of sampling and copying of data (Pr.1020, Pr.1024)

Set the trace operation. The trace operation is set by one of two 
ways, by setting Pr.1020 Trace operation selection and by 
setting in the trace mode on the operation panel.
To automatically start sampling when the power supply is turned 
ON or at a recovery after an inverter reset, set "1" to Pr.1024 
Sampling auto start.

Monitor indicators can be turned OFF while the operation panel (FR-
DU08) is not used.

When a USB device is connected to the USB connector (connector 
A), the USB host error can be canceled without performing an 
inverter reset.

Swinging of crane-lifted load is suppressed on the crane running 
axis.

At a failure in the host controller, the motor can be decelerated to a 
stop using an input via an external terminal.
At turn-ON of the emergency stop signal (X92), the motor is 
decelerated in the deceleration time of Pr.1103 in accordance with 
the torque limit set in Pr.815.

Trace function

Name

Name

1020 A900

Trace operation 
selection

1021 A901 Trace mode selection

1022 A902 Sampling cycle

1023 A903

Number of analog 
channels

1024 A904 Sampling auto start

1025 A905

Trigger mode 
selection

1026 A906

Number of sampling 
before trigger

1027 A910

Analog source 
selection (1ch)

1028 A911

Analog source 
selection (2ch)

1029 A912

Analog source 
selection (3ch)

1030 A913

Analog source 
selection (4ch)

1031 A914

Analog source 
selection (5ch)

1032 A915

Analog source 
selection (6ch)

1033 A916

Analog source 
selection (7ch)

1034 A917

Analog source 
selection (8ch)

1035 A918

Analog trigger 
channel

1036 A919

Analog trigger 
operation selection

1037 A920 Analog trigger level

1038 A930

Digital source 
selection (1ch)

1039 A931

Digital source 
selection (2ch)

1040 A932

Digital source 
selection (3ch)

1041 A933

Digital source 
selection (4ch)

1042 A934

Digital source 
selection (5ch)

1043 A935

Digital source 
selection (6ch)

1044 A936

Digital source 
selection (7ch)

1045 A937

Digital source 
selection (8ch)

1046 A938

Digital trigger 
channel

1047 A939

Digital trigger 
operation selection

Pr. 1020 setting

Setting by trace 

mode

Operation

0 (initial value)

Sampling standby

1

Sampling start

2

Forced trigger (sampling stop)

3

Sampling stop

4

Data transmission

Turning OFF the operation panel display

Name

1048 E106

Display-off waiting 
time

Pr. 1048 setting

Description

0 (initial value)

The display is always ON.

1 to 60 min

Set the waiting time to turn off 
the monitor display after the 
operation panel becomes idle.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Resetting USB host errors

Name

1049 E110 USB host reset

Pr. 1049 setting

Description

0 (initial value) Read only

1

Resets the USB host.

Anti-sway control

Name

Name

1072 A310

DC brake judgment 
time for anti-sway 
control operation

1073 A311

Anti-sway control 
operation selection

1074 A312

Anti-sway control 
frequency

1075 A313

Anti-sway control 
depth

1076 A314

Anti-sway control 
width

1077 A315 Rope length

1078 A316 Trolley weight

1079 A317 Load weight

Pr.

Setting range

Description

1072

0 to 10 s

Set the waiting time to start the DC injection 
brake (zero speed control, servo lock) after the 
output frequency reaches the Pr.10 DC 
injection brake operation frequency or 
lower.

1073

0 (initial value)

Anti-sway control disabled

10 to 1250 Hz

Anti-sway control enabled

1074

0.05 to 2 Hz

Sets the vibration frequency of the load.

9999

A vibration frequency is estimated based on 
the Pr.1077 to Pr.1079 settings, and anti-
sway control is performed.

1075

0 to 3

0 (Deep) 

 3 (Shallow)

1076

0 to 3

0 (Narrow) 

 3 (Wide)

1077

0.1 to 50 m

Set the rope length of the crane.

1078

1 to 50000 kg

Set the weight of the trolley.

1079

1 to 50000 kg

Set the weight of the load.

Emergency stop function

Name

1103 F040

Deceleration time at 
emergency stop

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP


background image

164 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

Ex
p

lanations

 of Pa

rame

te

rs

9

The inverter-to-inverter link function enables communication 
between multiple inverters connected by Ethernet in a small-scale 
system by using the I/O devices and special registers of the PLC 
function. The inverter-to-inverter link function is enabled by simply 
setting Pr.1124 and Pr.1125.

 • Setting procedure

 • The inverter starting times can be counted.
 • Confirming the starting times can be used to determine the timing 

of the maintenance, or can be used as a reference for system 
inspection or parts replacement.

 • Every start signal input (the RUN signal ON) while the inverter 

output is stopped is counted as the inverter starting time. (Starting 
during pre-excitation is also counted.)

Inverter-to-inverter link function
(FR-A800-E)

Name

Name

1124 N681

Station number in 
inverter-to-inverter 
link

1125 N682

Number of inverters 
in inverter-to-inverter 
link system

Pr.

Setting range

Description

1124

0 to 5

Set the station number for the inverter-to-
inverter link function.

9999 (initial value)

Inverter-to-inverter link function disabled

1125

2 to 6

Set the total number of inverters used for 
the inverter-to-inverter link function.

1.

Set a value other than "0" in Pr.414 PLC function operation 
selection to enable the PLC function.

2.

To set the inverter as the master, set "0" in Pr.1124, and to set 
the inverter as a slave, select a station number from 1 to 5 and 
set the number in Pr.1124.

3.

Set the total number of inverters used for the inverter-to-
inverter link function in Pr.1125.
For example, set "3" in Pr.1125 when two slave inverters and 
the master inverter are used.

4.

Use FR Configurator2 to write sequence programs to the 
master inverter.

1134 to 1149

Refer to the page on Pr.127.

1150 to 1199

Refer to the page on Pr.414.

1221 to 1293

Refer to the page on Pr.419.

1294 to 1297

Refer to the page on Pr.426.

1298

Refer to the page on Pr.422.

1299

Refer to the page on Pr.10.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Pr.

Start count monitor

Name

Name

1410 A170

Starting times lower 
4 digits

1411 A171

Starting times upper 
4 digits

Pr.

Setting range

Description

1410

0 to 9999

Displays the lower four digits of the number 
of the inverter starting times.

1411

0 to 9999

Displays the upper four digits of the number 
of the inverter starting times.

1412, 1413

Refer to the page on Pr.82.

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

STF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Start count

indication

Output

frequency

Time

1

2

RUN

LX

3

4

Pr.


background image

When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.

165

9

Expl

anations

 of
 Par
a

me
te

rs

This function is used to monitor whether the load is operating in 
normal condition by storing the speed/torque relationship in the 
inverter to detect mechanical faults or for maintenance. When the 
load operating condition deviates from the normal range, the 
protective function is activated or the warning is output to protect the 
inverter or the motor.
(This function is not available in the FR-A842-P.)

To perform energy-saving operation for an application such as a fan or pump

To perform energy-saving operation for an application such as a fan or pump, set the parameters as follows.

 • Load pattern selection (Pr.14) 

Optimal output characteristics (V/F characteristics)  can be 
selected for application or load characteristics.

 • Energy saving control (Pr.60) 

Inverter will perform energy saving control automatically even 
when the detailed parameter settings are made.
It is appropriate for an application such as a fan or pump.

Load characteristics fault detection

Name

Name

1480 H520

Load characteristics 
measurement mode

1481 H521

Load characteristics 
load reference 1

1482 H522

Load characteristics 
load reference 2

1483 H523

Load characteristics 
load reference 3

1484 H524

Load characteristics 
load reference 4

1485 H525

Load characteristics 
load reference 5

1486 H526

Load characteristics 
maximum frequency

1487 H527

Load characteristics 
minimum frequency

1488 H531

Upper limit warning 
detection width

1489 H532

Lower limit warning 
detection width

1490 H533

Upper limit fault 
detection width

1491 H534

Lower limit fault 
detection width

1492 H535

Load status 
detection signal 
delay time / load 
reference 
measurement waiting 
time

Pr.

Setting range

Description

1480

0 (initial value)

Load characteristics measurement is normally 
completed.

1

Load characteristics measurement mode is started.

2, 3, 4, 5, 81, 
82, 83, 84, 85

The load characteristics measurement status is 
displayed. (Read-only)

1481

0  to  400%

Set the reference value of normal load 
characteristics.
8888: The present load status is written as 
reference status.
9999: The load reference is invalid.

1482
1483
1484
1485

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

1486 0 to 590 Hz

Set the maximum frequency of the load 
characteristics fault detection range.

1487 0 to 590 Hz

Set the minimum frequency of the load 
characteristics fault detection range.

1488

0 to 400%

Set the detection width when the upper limit load 
fault warning is output.

9999

Function disabled

1489

0 to 400%

Set the detection width when the lower limit load 
fault warning is output.

9999

Function disabled

1490

0 to 400%

Set the detection width when output is shut off 
when the upper limit load fault occurs.

9999 (initial 
value)

Function disabled

1491

0 to 400%

Set the detection width when output is shut off 
when the lower limit load fault occurs.

9999 (initial 
value)

Function disabled

1492 0 to 60 s

Set the waiting time after the load fault is detected 
until warning output or output shutoff.
In the load characteristics measurement mode, set 
the waiting time after the load measurement 
frequency is reached until the load reference is set.

Pr.

Setting range

Description

Load reference 1

 (Pr.1481)

f1

(Pr.1487)

f2

f3

f4

f5

(Pr.1486)

Load reference 2

 (Pr.1482)

Load reference 3

 (Pr.1483)

Load reference 4

 (Pr.1484)

Load reference 5

 (Pr.1485)

Load status

Upper limit fault detection 
width (Pr.1490)

Lower limit warning detection 
width (Pr.1489)

Upper limit warning detection 
width (Pr.1488)

Lower limit fault detection 
width (Pr.1491)

Normal load range

Output frequency

 • Set "1" (for variable-torque load) 

in Pr.14 Load pattern selection.

 • The output voltage will change in 

square curve against the output 
frequency at the base frequency 
or lower.

 • Set this parameter when driving 

a load with load torque change 
proportionally against the square 
of the rotation speed, such as a 
fan or pump.

100%

Output voltage

Pr. 3 Base frequency

Output frequency (Hz)

  • Set  Pr.60 Energy saving 

control selection = "9" 
(Optimum excitation control 
mode).

 • The Optimum excitation 

control is a control method 
to decide the output voltage 
by controlling the excitation 
current so the efficiency of 
the motor is maximized.

 • The energy saving effect 

cannot be expected when 
the motor capacity is 
extremely smaller than the 
inverter capacity, or when 
multiple motors are 
connected to one inverter.

0

20

20

40

40

60

60

80

80

100

100

Optimum excitation control

More energy saving

V/F control

Motor load torque (%)

Motor efficiency (%)

[Comparison of Mitsubishi Electric products]


background image

166

Prote

c

tive

 Functions

10

The list of inverter protective functions

When the inverter detects a fault, depending on the nature of the fault, the operation panel displays an error message or warning, or a 
protective function is activated to trip the inverter.

Name

Description

Operation panel 

indication

E

rr

o

r m

ess

ag

e 



Faults history

The operation panel stores the fault indications which appears when a protective function is activated 
to display the fault record for the past eight faults.

Operation panel lock

Appears when operation was tried during operation panel lock.

Password locked

Appears when a password restricted parameter is read/written.

Parameter write error

Appears when an error occurred during parameter writing.

to

Copy operation error

Appears when an error occurred during parameter copying.

to

to

Error

Appears when the RES signal is on or the PU and inverter can not make normal communication.

Wa

rn

in

g

 



Stall prevention 

(overcurrent)

Appears during overcurrent stall prevention.

Stall prevention 

(overvoltage)

Appears during overvoltage stall prevention. Appears while the regeneration avoidance function is 
activated.

Regenerative brake pre-

alarm 



Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr.70 Special regenerative 
brake duty value. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV[]) 
occurs. (Standard models only)

Electronic thermal relay 

function pre-alarm

Appears when the electronic thermal O/L relay has reached 85% of the specified value.

PU stop

Appears if 

 is pressed in an operation mode other than the PU operation mode.

Speed limit indication 

(output during speed limit) Appears if the speed limit level is exceeded during torque control.

Continuous operation 

during communication 

fault

Appears when the operation continues while an error is occurring in the communication line or 
communication option (when Pr.502 = "4").

Parameter copy

Appears when parameter copy is performed between inverters FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-
A840-01800(55K) or lower, FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher

Safety stop

Appears when safety stop function is activated (during output shutoff).

Maintenance signal output 

1 to 3 



Appears when the inverter's cumulative energization time reaches or exceeds the parameter set 
value.

to

USB host error

Appears when an excessive current flows into the USB A connector.

Home position return error

Appears when an error occurs during the home position return operation under position control. (HP3 
is not available on the FR-A842-P.)

to

24 V external power supply 

operation

Flickers when the main circuit power supply is off and the 24 V external power supply is being input.

Load fault warning 



Appears when the load is deviated from the upper or lower limit of the warning detection range. (This 
function is not available in the FR-A842-P.)

Ethernet communication 

fault

Appears when Ethernet communication is interrupted by physical factors. (This function is intended for 
the FR-A800-E only.)

A

la

rm 



Fan alarm

Appears when the cooling fan remains stopped when operation is required or when the speed has 
decreased.

Internal fan alarm

Appears when the internal fan fails, or at a reference replacement time. (IP55 compatible models only)

Fa

ul

t 



Overcurrent trip during 

acceleration

Appears when an overcurrent occurred during acceleration.

Overcurrent trip during 

constant speed

Appears when an overcurrent occurred during constant speed operation.

Overcurrent trip during 

deceleration or stop

Appears when an overcurrent occurred during deceleration and at a stop.

Overcurrent trip

The output from a slave inverter in parallel operation is shut off if the input current exceeds the 
specified level. (This function is intended for the FR-A842-P only.)

Regenerative overvoltage 

trip during acceleration

Appears when an overvoltage occurred during acceleration.

Regenerative overvoltage 

trip during constant speed Appears when an overvoltage occurred during constant speed operation.

Regenerative overvoltage trip 

during deceleration or stop

Appears when an overvoltage occurred during deceleration and at a stop.

Overvoltage trip

If the DC voltage at the main circuit in a slave inverter in parallel operation reaches or exceeds the 
specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be 
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system. (This function is intended for the 
FR-A842-P only.)

Inverter overload trip 

(electronic thermal relay 

function) 



Appears when the electronic thermal relay function for inverter element protection was activated.

Motor overload trip 

(electronic thermal relay 

function) 



Appears when the electronic thermal relay function for motor protection was activated.

Heatsink overheat

Appears when the heatsink overheated.

Instantaneous power 

failure

Appears when an instantaneous power failure occurred at an input power supply. (Standard models 
and IP55 compatible models only)

Protective Functions


background image

167

10

Prote

c

tive

 Functions

Fa

ul

t 



Undervoltage

Appears when the main circuit DC voltage became low. (Standard models and IP55 compatible 
models only)

Input phase loss 



Appears if one of the three phases on the inverter input side opened. (Standard models and IP55 
compatible models only)

Stall prevention stop

Appears 3 s after the output frequency is reduced to the reference value by the stall prevention (torque 
limit) operation.

Loss of synchronism 

detection

The inverter trips when the motor operation is not synchronized. This function is only available under 
PM sensorless vector control. (This function is not available in the FR-A842-P.)

Upper limit fault detection 



Appears when the load exceeds the upper limit of the fault detection range. (This function is not 
available in the FR-A842-P.)

Lower limit fault detection 



Appears when the load falls below the lower limit of the fault detection range. (This function is not 
available in the FR-A842-P.)

Brake transistor alarm 

detection

The inverter trips if an alarm occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake transistors. In this case, 
the inverter must be powered off immediately. (Appears when an internal circuit fault occurred for 
separated converter types and IP55 compatible models. This function is not available in the FR-A842-
P.)

Output side earth (ground) 

fault overcurrent

Appears when an earth (ground) fault occurred on the Inverter’s output side.

Output phase loss

Appears if one of the three phases on the inverter output side opened.

External thermal relay 

operation 



Appears when the external thermal relay connected to terminal OH is activated.

PTC thermistor operation

The inverter trips if resistance of the PTC thermistor connected between terminal 2 and terminal 10 
has reached the Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level setting or higher.

Option fault

Appears when torque command by the plug-in option is selected using Pr. 804 when no plug-in option is 
mounted or an AC power supply is connected to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when the high power factor 
converter and power regeneration common converter connection setting (Pr.30 =2) is selected.

Communication option 

fault

Appears when a communication line error occurs in the communication option.

to

Parallel operation slave 1 

fault

Appears on the master inverter when a fault occurs in the slave inverter during the parallel operation. 
Appears on the master inverter even when the RS-485 terminals are incorrectly connected. (This 
function is intended for the FR-A842-P only.)

Parallel operation slave 2 

fault

Parameter storage device 

fault

Appears when operation of the element where parameters stored became abnormal. (control board)

PU disconnection

Appears when a communication error between the PU and inverter occurred, the communication 
interval exceeded the permissible time during the RS-485 communication with the PU connecter, or 
communication errors exceeded the number of retries during the RS-485 communication.

Retry count excess 



Appears when the operation was not restarted within the set number of retries. (This function is not 
available in the FR-A842-P.)

Parameter storage device 

fault

Appears when operation of the element where parameters stored became abnormal. (main circuit 
board)

CPU fault

Appears during the CPU and peripheral circuit errors occurred.

to

Operation panel power 

supply short circuit/RS-

485 terminals power 

supply short circuit

Appears when the RS-485 terminal power supply or operation panel power supply was shorted.

24 VDC power fault

When the 24 VDC power output via terminal PC is shorted, or when the external 24 VDC power 
supplied to terminal +24 is not enough, this function shuts off the power output.

Abnormal output current 

detection 



Appears when the output current is out of the output current detection range set by parameters.

Inrush current limit circuit 

fault

Appears when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheated. (Standard models and IP55 
compatible models only)

Communication fault 

(inverter)

Appears when a communication error occurred during the RS-485 communication with the RS-485 
terminals. (This function is not intended for the FR-A800-E.)

Analog input fault

Appears when 30 mA or more is input or a voltage (7.5 V or more) is input with terminal 2/4 set to 
current input.

USB communication fault Appears when USB communication error occurred.

Safety circuit fault

The inverter trips when a safety circuit fault occurs.

Overspeed occurrence 



Indicates that the motor speed has exceeded the overspeed setting level (Pr.374).

Speed deviation excess 

detection 



 



Stops the inverter output if the motor speed is increased or decreased under the influence of the load 
etc. during vector control and cannot be controlled in accordance with the speed command value.

Signal loss detection 



 



Stops the inverter output if the encoder signal is shut off.

Excessive position fault 



Indicates that the difference between the position command and position feedback exceeded the 
reference.

Brake sequence fault 



The inverter output is stopped when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence 
function (Pr.278 to Pr.285).

to

Encoder phase fault 



 



When the rotation command of the inverter differs from the actual motor rotation direction detected 
from the encoder, the inverter output is stopped. (detected only during tuning is performed in the 
"rotation mode" of offline auto tuning) (This function is not available in the FR-A842-P.)

Name

Description

Operation panel 

indication


background image

168

Prote

c

tive

 Functions

10



Resetting the inverter initializes the internal cumulative heat value of the electronic thermal O/L relay function.



The error message shows an operational error. The inverter output is not shut off.



Warnings are messages given before faults occur. The inverter output is not shut off.



Alarm warn the operator of failures with output signals. The inverter output is not shut off.



When faults occur, the protective functions are activated to shut off the inverter output and output the alarms.



The external thermal operates only when the OH signal is set in Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).



Appears when a vector control compatible option is installed. (The protective function may or may not be available depending on the type of the connected 
communication option.)



This protective function is not available in the initial status.

Fa

ul

t 



Magnetic pole position 

unknown 



When the offset value between the motor home magnetic pole position and the resolver home position 
is unknown, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. (This function is not available 
in the FR-A842-P.)

Abnormal internal 

temperature

The inverter output is stopped when the internal temperature of the inverter rises abnormally. (IP55 
compatible models only)

4 mA input fault 



The inverter trips when the analog input current is 2 mA or less for the time set in Pr.778 4 mA input 
check filter.

Pre-charge fault 



The inverter trips when the pre-charge time exceeds Pr.764 Pre-charge time limit.
The inverter trips when the measured value exceeds Pr.763 Pre-charge upper detection level 
during pre-charging.

PID signal fault 



The inverter trips if the measured value exceeds the PID upper limit or PID lower limit parameter 
setting, or the absolute deviation value exceeds the PID deviation parameter setting during PID 
control.

Option fault

The inverter trips when a contact fault is found between the inverter and the plug-in option, or when 
the communication option is not connected to the connector 1.

to

Ethernet communication 

fault

If Ethernet communication is interrupted by physical factors or a no-communication state persists for 
the permissible time or longer, the inverter trips. (This function is intended for the FR-A800-E only.)

Opposite rotation 

deceleration fault 



The speed may not decelerate during low speed operation if the rotation direction of the speed 
command and the estimated speed differ when the rotation is changing from forward to reverse or 
from reverse to forward under real sensorless vector control. At this time, the inverter output is 
stopped if the rotation direction will not change, causing overload.

Internal circuit fault

Appears when an internal circuit error occurred.

User definition error by the 

PLC function

Appears when the values 16 to 20 are set in the device SD1214 with the program operation of the 
PLC function.

to

Name

Description

Operation panel 

indication


background image

169

10

Prote

c

tive

 Functions

The list of converter unit protective functions

When the converter unit detects a fault, depending on the nature of the fault, the operation panel displays an error message or warning, or a 
protective function is activated to trip the inverter.



Resetting the converter unit initializes the internal cumulative heat value of the electronic thermal O/L relay function.



The error message shows an operational error. The inverter output is not shut off.



Warnings are messages given before faults occur. The inverter output is not shut off.



Alarm warn the operator of failures with output signals. The inverter output is not shut off.



When faults occur, the protective functions are activated to shut off the inverter output and output the alarms.



The external thermal operates only when the OH signal is set in Pr.178, Pr.180, Pr.187 or Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).



This protective function is not available in the initial status.

Name

Description

Operation panel 

indication

E

rr

o

r m

ess

ag

e 



Faults history

The operation panel stores the fault indications which appears when a protective function is 
activated to display the fault record for the past eight faults.

Operation panel lock

Appears when operation was tried during operation panel lock.

Password locked

Appears when a password restricted parameter is read/written.

Parameter write error

Appears when an error occurred during parameter writing.

Copy operation error

Appears when an error occurred during parameter copying.

to

Error

Appears when the RES signal is on or the PU and converter unit can not make normal 
communication.

W

arn

ing 



Electronic thermal relay 

function pre-alarm

Appears when the electronic thermal O/L relay has reached 85% of the specified value.

Maintenance signal 

output 1 to 3 



Appears when the converter unit's cumulative energization time reaches or exceeds the parameter 
set value.

to

24 V external power 

supply operation

Flickers when the main circuit power supply is off and the 24 V external power supply is being input.

Ala

rm



Fan alarm

Appears when the cooling fan remains stopped when operation is required or when the speed has 
decreased.

Fa

ul

t 



Overvoltage trip

Appears when the converter unit's internal main circuit DC voltage exceeds the specified value.

Converter overload trip 

(electronic thermal relay 

function) 



Appears when the electronic thermal O/L relay of the converter unit diode module is activated.

Heatsink overheat

Appears when the heatsink overheated.

Instantaneous power 

failure

Appears when an instantaneous power failure occurred at an input power supply.

Undervoltage

Appears when power supply voltage of the converter unit is set at a low level.

Input phase loss 



Appears if one of the three phases on the converter unit input side opened.

External thermal relay 

operation 



Appears when the external thermal relay connected to terminal OH is activated.

Parallel operation slave 1 

fault

Appears on the operation panel of the master at an occurrence of a slave converter fault during the 
parallel operation. Appears on the master converter unit even when the RS-485 terminals are 
incorrectly connected. (This function is intended for the FR-CC2-P only.)

Parallel operation slave 2 

fault

Parameter storage device 

fault

Appears when operation of the element where parameters stored became abnormal. (control 
board)

PU disconnection

Appears when a communication error between the PU and inverter occurred, the communication 
interval exceeded the permissible time during the RS-485 communication with the PU connecter, or 
communication errors exceeded the number of retries during the RS-485 communication.

Retry count excess 



Appears when the operation was not restarted within the set number of retries. (This function is not 
available for the FR-CC2-P.)

Parameter storage device 

fault

Appears when operation of the element where parameters stored became abnormal. (main circuit 
board)

CPU fault

Appears during the CPU and peripheral circuit errors occurred.

to

Operation panel power 

supply short circuit/RS-

485 terminals power 

supply short circuit

Appears when the RS-485 terminal power supply or operation panel power supply was shorted.

24 VDC power fault

When the 24 VDC power output via terminal PC is shorted, or when the external 24 VDC power 
supplied to terminal +24 is not enough, this function shuts off the power output.

Inrush current limit circuit 

fault

Appears when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheated.

Communication fault 

(inverter)

Appears when a communication error occurred during the RS-485 communication with the RS-485 
terminals.

Internal circuit fault

Appears when an internal circuit error occurred.

Option fault

The inverter trips if a plug-in option is disconnected while the converter unit power is ON.


background image

170

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

11

Option List

By fitting the following options to the inverter, the inverter is provided with more functions.
Three plug-in options can be fitted at a time. Two or more of the same options cannot be fitted, and only one communication option can be 
fitted at a time. (Two options (except for communication options) can be fitted to the FR-A800-GF at a time.)

Name

Type

Applications, Specifications, etc.

Applicable Inverter

P

lug

-i

n T

yp

e

Vector control

FR-A8AP

FR-A8AL

Vector control can be performed for encoder-equipped motors 
(induction motors).

Shared among all models

FR-A8APR

Vector control can be performed for resolver-equipped motors 
(induction/PM motors).

Orientation control

Encoder feedback control

FR-A8AP

FR-A8APR

FR-A8AL

The main spindle can be stopped at a specified position
(orientation) in combination with an encoder. The motor speed is 
sent back and the speed is maintained constant.

Position control

FR-A8AL

The external pulse train input enables position control. 
Connection with the positioning module of a programmable 
controller is also available.

Encoder pulse dividing output

The encoder pulse can be divided for the signal output.

16-bit digital input

FR-A8AX

This input interface sets the high frequency accuracy of the 
inverter using an external BCD or binary digital signal.
• BCD code 3 digits / 4 digits
• Binary 12 bits / 16 bits

Digital output

Extension analog output

FR-A8AY

Output signals provided with the inverter as standard are 
selected to output from the open collector.
This option adds 2 different signals that can be monitored such 
as the output frequency and output voltage.
20mADC or 10VDC meter can be connected.

Relay output

FR-A8AR

Output any three output signals available with the inverter as 
standard from the relay contact terminals.

Bipolar analog output

High resolution analog input

Motor thermistor interface 



FR-A8AZ

This option adds different signals that can be monitored such as 
the motor torque and torque command by the 

10 V output. 

Highly accurate operation is achieved by using high-resolution 
analog input (16 bits).
Thermistor-equipped motors can detect the motor temperature, 
and the temperature feedback is used to reduce the fluctuation 
of output torque.

C

o

mmu

ni

ca

ti

on

CC-Link IE Field Network 

communication

FR-A8NCE

This option allows the inverter to be operated or monitored or 
the parameter setting to be changed from a computer or 
programmable controller.

CC-Link communication

FR-A8NC

SSCNET III(/H)

communication

FR-A8NS

DeviceNet communication

FR-A8ND

PROFIBUS-DP 

communication

FR-A8NP

FL remote communication

FR-A8NF

C

ont

ro

l t

ermi

na

l

Screw terminal block

FR-A8TR

The screw type control circuit terminal block enables wiring 
using round crimping terminals.

Shared among all models 



Vector control terminal block

FR-A8TP

The control circuit terminal block equipped with the encoder 
power supply (24 VDC output) enables orientation control, 
encoder feedback control, vector control, encoder pulse division 
output with encoder-equipped motors (induction motors). (The 
24 VDC power supply can be used for the encoder of the SF-
V5RU.)

Shared among all models

S

tan

d

-al

o

n

e

 Sh

ar

ed

Liquid crystal display 

operation panel

FR-LU08(-01)

Graphical operation panel with liquid crystal display 



Shared among all models

Parameter unit

FR-PU07

Interactive parameter unit with LCD display

Parameter unit with battery 

pack

FR-PU07BB(-L) 



Enables parameter setting without supplying power to the 
inverter.

Parameter unit connection 

cable

FR-CB20[]

Cable for connection of operation panel or parameter unit 
[] indicates a cable length. (1m, 3m, 5m)

USB cable

MR-J3USBCBL3M 

Cable length: 3 m

Operation panel connection 

connector

FR-ADP

Connector to connect the operation panel (FR-DU08) and 
connection cable

Encoder cable

Mitsubishi Electric vector 

control dedicated motor (SF-

V5RU)

FR-V7CBL[]

Connection cable for the inverter and encoder for Mitsubishi 
Electric vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU).
[] indicates a cable length. (5m, 15m, 30m)

Control circuit terminal block 

intercompatibility attachment

FR-A8TAT

An attachment for installing the control circuit terminal block of 
the FR-A700/A500 series to that of the FR-A800 series

Panel through attachment

FR-A8CN

The heatsink of the inverter can be protruded outside the 
enclosure. For the enclosure cut dimensions, refer to page 43.

FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 
FR-A820-04750(90K)
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to
FR-A840-03610(132K)
According to capacities

Personal computer 
connector
A connector

Amplifier connector
Mini B connector (5-pin)

Option and Peripheral Devices


background image

171

11

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s



The motor thermistor interface is not available when the FR-A842-P is used.



Not available for the FR-A800-E.



Applicable inverters for the ND rating. For the SLD, LD, and HD ratings, different inverters are used depending on the applicable motor capacity.



Rated power consumption. The power supply specifications of the FR series manual controllers and speed controllers are 200VAC 50Hz, 200V/220VAC 
60Hz, and 115VAC 60Hz.



The battery (CR1216: a diameter of 12 mm, a hight of 16 mm) is not bundled.



To use a parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB) outside Japan, order a "FR-PU07BB-L" (parameter unit type indicated on the package has L at the 
end). Since batteries may conflict with laws in countries to be used (new EU Directive on batteries and accumulators, etc.), batteries are not enclosed with 
an FR-PU07BB.

St

an

d

-al

o

n

e

 S

h

ar

ed

Intercompatibility attachment

FR-AAT

Attachment for replacing with the A800 series using the 
installation holes of the FR-A700/A500/A200E series.

According to capacities

FR-A5AT

AC reactor

FR-HAL

For harmonic current reduction and inverter input power factor 
improvement

DC reactor

FR-HEL

Balance reactor

FR-POL

This option is used when the cable length from an inverter to the 
node point is less than 10 m.

FR-A842-P.
According to capacities.

Line noise filter

FR-BSF01

For line noise reduction

Shared among all models

FR- BLF

High-duty brake resistor 

FR-ABR

The regenerative braking capability can be improved 
(permissible duty 10%/6%ED).

FR-A820-01250(22K) or lower, 
FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower 



Brake unit

FR-BU2

For increasing the braking capability of the inverter (for high-
inertia load or negative load)
Brake unit and resistor unit are used in combination

According to capacities

Resistor unit

FR-BR

FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, 
FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower 



MT-BR5

FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, 
FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher 



Power regeneration common 

converter

Stand-alone reactor dedicated 

for the FR-CV

FR-CV/

FR-CVL

Unit which can return motor-generated braking energy back to 
the power supply in common converter system

FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, 
FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower 



Power regeneration converter

MT- RC

Energy saving type high performance brake unit which can 
regenerate the braking energy generated by the motor to the 
power supply.

FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher 



High power factor converter

FR-HC2

The high power factor converter switches the converter section 
on/off to reshape an input current waveform into a sine wave, 
greatly suppressing harmonics. (Used in combination with the 
standard accessory.)

According to capacities

Surge voltage suppression 

filter

FR-ASF

Filter for suppressing surge voltage on motor

FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower 



FR-BMF

FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to 
FR-A840-00930(37K) 



According to capacities

Sine wave filter

Reactor

MT- BSL (-HC)

Reduce the motor noise during inverter driving
Use in combination with a reactor and a capacitor

FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, 
FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher 



According to capacities

Capacitor

MT- BSC

FR

 S

er

ie

s 

Ma

n

u

al

 Con

tr

o

lle

r/

S

p

ee

d 

Control

le

r

Manual controller

FR-AX

For independent operation. With frequency meter, frequency 
potentiometer and start switch.

Shared among all models

DC tach. follower

FR-AL

For synchronous operation (1VA) by external signal (0 to 5V, 0 
to 10V DC) 



Three speed selector

FR-AT

For three speed switching, among high, middle and low speed 
operation (1.5VA) 



Motorized speed setter

FR-FK

For remote operation. Allows operation to be controlled from 
several places (5VA) 



Ratio setter

FR-FH

For ratio operation. Allows ratios to be set to five inverters. 
(3VA) 



Speed detector

FR-FP

For tracking operation by a pilot generator (PG) signal (2VA) 



Master controller

FR-FG

Master controller (5VA) for parallel operation of multiple 
(maximum 35) inverters. 



Soft starter

FR-FC

For soft start and stop. Enables acceleration/deceleration in 
parallel operation (3VA) 



Deviation detector

FR-FD

For continuous speed control operation. Used in combination 
with a deviation sensor or synchro (5VA) 



Preamplifier

FR-FA

Used as an A/V converter or arithmetic amplifier (3VA) 



Ot

h

ers

Pilot generator

QVAH-10

For tracking operation. 70V/35VAC 500Hz (at 2500r/min)

Deviation sensor

YVGC-500W-NS

For continuous speed control operation (mechanical deviation 
detection) Output 90VAC/90°

Frequency setting 

potentiometer

WA2W 1k

For frequency setting. Wire-wound 2W 1k

 type B characteristic

Analog frequency meter

(64mm 

 60mm)

YM206NRI 1mA

Dedicated frequency meter (graduated to 130Hz). Moving-coil 
type DC ammeter

Calibration resistor

RV24YN 10k

For frequency meter calibration. 
Carbon film type B characteristic

FR Configurator2 

(Inverter setup software)

SW1DND-FRC2-E Supports an inverter startup to maintenance.

Name

Type

Applications, Specifications, etc.

Applicable Inverter


background image

172

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

11

Control terminal option

Name (model)

Specification and structure

Screw terminal block

FR-A8TR

Replace the standard control circuit terminal block with this option (Not available for the FR-A800-E).
• Terminal layout

• Restrictions for the FR-A8TR

As compared with the standard control circuit terminal block, the FR-A8TR has the following restrictions.

(a)

When the plug-in option FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, or FR-A8NS is used, terminals +24, 10E, 4, STOP, and AU of the FR-
A8TR cannot be used.

(b)

Because the height is restricted, two wires cannot be wired to upper-row terminals (except for terminals A1, B1, C1, 
A2, B2, and C2) and middle-row terminals on the terminal block.

(c)

The safety stop function is not available.

(d)

For the connection to terminal 1, use a screwdriver with a diameter of 4 mm or less. To avoid contact with the front 
cover fixing area, put the screwdriver upright relative to the terminal screw surface.

Terminal screw size : M3.5
Tightening torque : 1.2 N m
Recommended cable gauge : 0.75 mm

2

5

PC

CS

JOG

SD

SD

SD

FU

OL

IPF

SU

RUN

SE

2

10

AM

F/C

STR

STF

RES

MRS

RT

RH

RM

RL

C2

1

4

10E

+24

STOP

AU

B2

A2

C1

B1

A1

Avoid contact with 
the front cover 
fixing area.

Keep the screwdriver 
upright relative to the 
terminal screw surface 
while rotating the 
screwdriver.

φ 4 mm or less


background image

173

11

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

Vector control terminal 

block

FR-A8TP

Replace the standard control circuit terminal block with this option. The 24 VDC power supply can be used for the encoder of the 
SF-V5RU.
• Terminal connection diagrams

• Control terminal specification

Name (model)

Specification and structure

PC

Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

Digital input terminal 1

Digital input terminal 3

Digital input terminal 2

Digital input terminal 4

Thermal protector input

Reset

Frequency setting signal (Analog)

10E(+10V)

2

(Analog common)

2

3

1

Auxiliary input

1

Frequency

 setting

 potentiometer

1/2W1k

Ω

Open collector output 1

Open collector output 2

Open collector output 3

 Open collector output common

 Sink/Source 

common

Control input signals 
(No voltage input allowed)

Relay output (fault output)

C1

B1

A1

(-)

(+)

Analog signal output
(0 to 

±10VDC)

AM

5

0 to ±5VDC selectable

0 to ±10VDC

Open collector output

Contact input common

0 to 5VDC

0 to 10VDC

selectable

Relay output

Encoder signal

0 to 20mADC

SINK

SOURCE

STF

STR

DI1

DI2

DI3

DI4

OH

RES

SD

DO1

DO2

DO3

SE

5

(+)
(-)

Initial value

Initial value

ON

OFF

4

2

Voltage/current
input switch

Safety stop signal

Safety monitor output

Safety monitor output common

So (SO)

SOC

Safety stop input (Channel 1)

Shorting wire

Safety stop input common

Safety stop input (Channel 2)

S1

S2

PC

SD

SIC

+24

24V external power

 supply input

PA3

PAR3

PB3

PBR3

PZ3

PZR3

PG

PG

PG24

Control terminal option / A-phase signal input terminal

Control terminal option / A-phase inverse signal input terminal

Control terminal option / B-phase signal input terminal

Control terminal option / Z-phase signal input terminal

Control terminal option / Z-phase inverse signal input terminal

Encoder power supply input terminal (positive side)

Encoder power supply input terminal (positive side)

Encoder power supply output terminal (positive side)

Control terminal option / B-phase inverse signal input terminal

Encoder pulse dividing output signal

FPA5

Control terminal option / Encoder A-phase output terminal

FPB5

Control terminal option / Encoder B-phase output terminal

FPZ5

Control terminal option / Encoder Z-phase output terminal

FPAR4

Control terminal option / Encoder differential 
A-phase inverse signal output terminal

FPB4

Control terminal option / Encoder differential 
B-phase output terminal

FPBR4

Control terminal option / Encoder differential 
B-phase inverse signal output terminal

FPZ4

Control terminal option / Encoder differential 
Z-phase output terminal

FPZR4

Control terminal option / Encoder differential 
Z-phase inverse signal output terminal

FPA4

Control terminal option / Encoder differential 
A-phase output terminal

SD

Common terminal

24VDC power supply

(Common for external power

 supply transistor output)

Control circuit

• Control terminal layout

Tightening torque: 0.5 N•m to 0.6 N•m (terminals A, B, and C)
0.22 N•m to 0.25 N•m (terminals other than described above)
Small flat-blade screwdriver (Tip thickness: 0.4 mm / tip 
width: 2.5 mm)

PZR3

PZ3

C

B

A

PBR3

PA

R

3

PB3

PA

3

SD

PG

PG

PC

PG24

S2

S1

SIC

SD

SOC

SO

DO3

DO2

DO1

SE

1

10E

5

5

2

AM

PC

DI1

DI2

DI3

DI4

OH

RES

STR

STF

SD

+24

FP

A4

PA

R

4

FPB4

PBR4

FPZ4

PZR4

FP

A5

FPB5

FPZ5

[Input signal]

Fu

nc

ti

o

n

Terminal

symbol

Terminal name

Terminal function description

Co

n

ta

c

t in

p

u

t

DI1 to 
DI4

Digital input terminal
1 to 4

Functions can be assigned to terminals by the input terminal function 
selection (Pr.180 to Pr.182, Pr.185).

OH

Thermal protector input

Temperature detector input terminal for overheat protection of a motor.
When the OH signal turns OFF, the external thermal relay (E.OHT) 
protective function is activated
Use Pr.876 to switch valid/invalid status of terminal function.
Switches the control logic (sink logic or source logic) independently by 
the external thermal relay switch (SW5A).

E

n

co

de

r sig

n

a

l

PA3

Control terminal option / A-phase 
signal input terminal

A-, B- and Z-phase signals are input from the encoder.

PAR3

Control terminal option / A-phase 
inverse signal input terminal

PB3

Control terminal option / B-phase 
signal input terminal

PBR3

Control terminal option / B-phase 
inverse signal input terminal

PZ3

Control terminal option / Z-phase 
signal input terminal

PZR3

Control terminal option / Z-phase 
inverse signal input terminal

PG

Encoder power supply terminal
(positive side)

Input power for the encoder power supply.
Connect the external power supply (5 V, 12 V, 15 V) and the encoder 
power cable. When the encoder output is the differential line driver 
type, only 5 V can be input. Make sure the voltage of the external 
power supply the same as the encoder output voltage. (Check the 
encoder specification.) Short terminals PG24 and PG for using the 24 
VDC power supply of the FR-A8TP.


background image

174

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

11

Vector control terminal 

block

FR-A8TP

Name (model)

Specification and structure

[Output signal]

Specifications are the same as those of the standard control circuit terminals for the input signals (STF, STR, RES, SD, PC, 10E, 2, 
1, 5, and +24) and the output signals (A, B, C, AM, S1, S2, SIC, So (SO), and SOC).

Fun

c

ti

on

Terminal

symbol

Terminal name

Terminal function description

Op

en

 co

ll

ec

to

r

DO1 to 
DO3

Digital output terminal
1 to 3

The function can be assigned to an output terminal by the output 
terminal function selection (Pr.190 to Pr.192).

SE

Open collector output common

Common terminal for terminals DO1, DO2, DO3. Isolated from 
terminals SD and 5.

Enc

o

d

e

r p

u

ls

e di

vi

di

ng

 out

p

u

t

FPA5

Control terminal option / Encoder A-
phase output terminal

Outputs A-, B- and Z-phase (home position and mark pulse) signals 
from the encoder. The A- and B-phase signals can be divided by the 
ratio (1/n) and output.
n=1 to 32767 (an integer)
Use Pr.863 Control terminal option-Encoder pulse division ratio 
for division. Common terminal is terminal SD.

FPB5

Control terminal option / Encoder B-
phase output terminal

FPZ5

Control terminal option / Encoder Z-
phase output terminal

FPA4

Control terminal option / Encoder 
differential A-phase output terminal

Outputs A-, B- and Z-phase (home position and mark pulse) signals 
from the encoder. The A- and B-phase signals can be divided by the 
ratio (1/n) and output.
n=1 to 32767 (an integer)
Use Pr.863 Control terminal option-Encoder pulse division ratio 
for division.

FPAR4

Control terminal option / Encoder 
differential A-phase inverse signal 
output terminal

FPB4

Control terminal option / Encoder 
differential B-phase output terminal

FPBR4

Control terminal option / Encoder 
differential B-phase inverse signal 
output terminal

FPZ4

Control terminal option / Encoder 
differential Z-phase output terminal

FPZR4

Control terminal option / Encoder 
differential Z-phase inverse signal 
output terminal

Po

w

er s

u

p

p

ly

 ou

tp

ut

 

fo

r en

co

de

r

PG24

Encoder power supply terminal
(positive side)

Used for the 24 VDC power supply for an encoder.
If used, connect this terminal to terminal PG, and this will supply power 
from terminal PG to the encoder.


background image

175

11

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

Stand-alone option

Name (model)

Specification and structure

Panel through 

attachment

FR-A8CN[]

With this attachment the heatsink which is the exothermic section of the inverter can be placed on the rear of the enclosure. Since 
the heat generated in the inverter can be radiated to the rear of the enclosure, the enclosure can be downsized.
The use of this attachment requires more installation area. For installation, refer to the drawing after attachment installation (page 
43).
For a panel cutting drawing, refer to page 43.

Intercompatibility 

attachment

 FR-AAT[]

FR-A5AT[]

Enables the FR-A800 inverter to be installed using the mounting holes made for the 
conventional FR-A700/A500/A200E series inverter. 
This attachment is useful for replacing a conventional inverter with the FR-A800 series 
inverter.
The inverter with this attachment requires greater installation depth. 

FAN

Heatsink

FR-A8CN 
(Option)

Cooling wind

Cooling fan

Inside the enclosure

Inverter

Enclosure

• Applicable models

Model

Applicable inverter

FR-A820

FR-A840

FR-A8CN01

00105(1.5K), 00167(2.2K), 
00250(3.7K)

00023(0.4K), 00038(0.75K), 
00052(1.5K), 00083(2.2K), 
00126(3.7K)

FR-A8CN02 00340(5.5K), 00490(7.5K)

00170(5.5K), 00250(7.5K)

FR-A8CN03 00630(11K)

00310(11K), 00380(15K)

FR-A8CN04

00770(15K), 00930(18.5K), 
01250(22K)

00470(18.5K), 00620(22K)

FR-A8CN05 01540(30K)

00770(30K)

FR-A8CN06 01870(37K), 02330(45K)

00930(37K), 01160(45K), 
01800(55K)

FR-A8CN07 03160(55K)

—

FR-A8CN08 03800(75K), 04750(90K)

03250(110K), 03610(132K)

FR-A8CN09 —

02160(75K), 02600(90K)

Inverter

FR-AAT

FR-A5AT

12

• Models replaceable with FR-A820

• Models replaceable with FR-A840

: Replaceable without the intercompatibility attachment

FR-A5AT[], FR-AAT[]: Replaceable with the intercompatibility attachment.

FR-A820

0.4K/0.75K

1.5K to 3.7K

5.5K/7.5K

11K

15K to 22K

30K

37K/45K

55K

C

o

nv

en

ti

o

n

al

 m

o

de

l an

d c

a

p

aci

ty

FR

-A

22

0E

0.4K/0.75K FR-A5AT01

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

1.5K to 3.7K FR-A5AT02

FR-A5AT02

—

—

—

—

—

—

5.5K to 11K —

FR-A5AT03

FR-A5AT03

—

—

—

—

15K

—

—

FR-AAT02

FR-AAT24

—

—

—

18.5K/22K —

—

—

FR-A5AT04

FR-A5AT04

—

—

—

30K

—

—

—

—

FR-AAT27

—

—

37K/45K

—

—

—

—

—

FR-AAT23

—

55K

—

—

—

—

—

—

FR-A5AT05

F

R

-A

52

0/A

7

20

0.4K/0.75K 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

1.5K to 3.7K  FR-AAT21

—

—

—

—

—

—

5.5K/7.5K

—

FR-AAT22

—

—

—

—

—

11K

—

—

FR-A5AT03

—

—

—

—

15K to 22K —

—

—

FR-AAT24

—

—

—

30K

—

—

—

—

FR-AAT27

—

—

37K/45K

—

—

—

—

—

FR-AAT23

—

55K

—

—

—

—

—

—

FR-A5AT05

FR-A840

0.4K to 3.7K

5.5K/7.5K

11K/15K

18.5K/22K

30K

37K to 55K

C

o

n

ven

tio

n

al m

o

de

l an

d

 ca

p

aci

ty

F

R

-A

2

40E

0.4K to 3.7K FR-A5AT02

—

—

—

—

—

5.5K/7.5K

FR-A5AT03

FR-A5AT03

—

—

—

—

11K/15K

—

FR-AAT02

FR-AAT24

—

—

—

18.5K/22K —

—

FR-A5AT04

FR-A5AT04

—

—

30K 

—

—

—

FR-AAT27

—

37K/45K

—

—

—

—

FR-AAT23

55K

—

—

—

—

—

FR-A5AT05

FR

-A

540

0.4K to 3.7K 

—

—

—

—

—

5.5K/7.5K

FR-AAT22

—

—

—

—

11K to 22K —

FR-AAT02

FR-AAT24

—

—

30K

—

—

—

FR-AAT27

—

37K to 55K —

—

—

—

FR-AAT23

FR

-A

74

0

0.4K to 3.7K 

—

—

—

—

—

5.5K/7.5K

FR-AAT22

—

—

—

—

11K/15K

—

FR-A5AT03

—

—

—

18.5K/22K —

—

FR-AAT24

—

—

30K

—

—

—

FR-AAT27

—

37K to 55K —

—

—

—

FR-AAT23


background image

176

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

11

Control circuit terminal 

block intercompatibility 

attachment

FR-A8TAT

This attachment allows the conventional FR-A700/A500 series control circuit terminal blocks to be installed without removing any 
cables. This attachment is useful for replacing a conventional inverter with the FR-A800 series inverter.

(a)

For using the control circuit terminal block of the FR-A500 series, open or remove the cover of the control circuit 
terminal block. Otherwise, the front cover of the inverter may not close properly.

(b)

Since the specifications of the control circuit terminals of the FR-A700/A500 series are different from those of the FR-
A800 series, certain functions of the inverter are restricted (refer to the table below).

(c)

The FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, or FR-A8NS plug-in option cannot be installed.

(d)

When using a plug-in option, connect the plug-in option using a cable that can be routed through the space between 
the the front cover and the control circuit terminal block (FR-A700 series: 7 mm, FR-A500 series: 0.8 mm).

AC reactor

(for power supply 

coordination)

FR-HAL-(H)[]K

Improves the power factor and reduces the harmonic current at the input side. Connect an AC reactor at the input side of the inverter.
• Selection method

Select an AC reactor according to the applied motor capacity. (Select the AC reactor according to the motor capacity even if the 
capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity.)

• Connection diagram

• Outline dimension (Unit: mm)

(a)

Approximately 88% of the power factor improving effect can be obtained (92.3% when 
calculated with 1 power factor for the fundamental wave according to the Architectural 
Standard Specifications (Electrical Installation) (2013 revision) supervised by the Ministry of 
Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism of Japan).

(b)

This is a sample outline dimension drawing. The shape differs by the model. 
W1 and D1 indicate distances between installation holes. The installation hole size is 
indicated by d.

(c)

When installing an AC reactor (FR-HAL), install in the orientation shown below.
•(H)55K or lower: Horizontal installation or vertical installation
•(H)75K or higher: Horizontal installation

(d)

Keep enough clearance around the reactor because it heats up. 
(Keep a clearance of minimum 10cm each on top and bottom and minimum 5cm each on 
right and left regardless of the installation orientation.)

Name (model)

Specification and structure

FR-A8TAT

FR-A700/A500 series
control circuit terminal block

 ... Available, 

... Not available

Relay output 2 

terminals

24 V external power 

supply input terminal

Safety stop signal 

terminals

FR-A500 series

FR-A700 series

M

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

U

V

W

R

S

T

X

Y

Z

Three-phase AC

power supply

Inverter

FR-HAL

Motor

Model

W

W1

H

D

D1

d

Mass

(kg)

200

 V

0.4K

104

84

99

72

40

M5

0.6

0.75K

104

84

99

74

44

M5

0.8

1.5K

104

84

99

77

50

M5

1.1

2.2K

115

40

115

77

57

M6

1.5

3.7K

115

40

115

83

67

M6

2.2

5.5K

115

40

115

83

67

M6

2.3

7.5K

130

50

135

100

86

M6

4.2

11K

160

75

164

111

92

M6

5.2

15K

160

75

167

126

107

M6

7.0

18.5K

160

75

128

175

107

M6

7.1

22K

185

75

150

158

87

M6

9.0

30K

185

75

150

168

87

M6

9.7

37K

210

75

175

174

82

M6

12.9

45K

210

75

175

191

97

M6

16.4

55K

210

75

175

201

97

M6

17.4

75K

240

150

210

215.5 109

M8

23

110K

330

170

325

259

127

M10 40

4

00 V

H0.4K

135

120

115

64

45

M4

1.5

H0.75K 135

120

115

64

45

M4

1.5

H1.5K

135

120

115

64

45

M4

1.5

H2.2K

135

120

115

64

45

M4

1.5

H3.7K

135

120

115

74

57

M4

2.5

H5.5K

160

145

142

76

55

M4

3.5

H7.5K

160

145

142

96

75

M4

5.0

H11K

160

145

146

96

75

M4

6.0

H15K

220

200

195

105

70

M5

9.0

H18.5K 220

200

215

170

70

M5

9.0

H22K

220

200

215

170

70

M5

9.5

H30K

220

200

215

170

75

M5

11

H37K

220

200

214

170

100

M5

12.5

H45K

280

255

245

165

80

M6

15

H55K

280

255

245

170

90

M6

18

H75K

210

75

170

210.5 105

M6

20

H110K 240

150

225

220

99

M8

28

H185K 330

170

325

271

142

M10 55

H280K 330

170

325

321

192

M10 80

H355K 330

170

325

346

192

M10 90

H560K 450

300

540

635

345

M12 190

Model

W

W1

H

D

D1

d

Mass

(kg)

Less than D

D1

W

W1

H


background image

177

11

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

DC reactor

(for power supply 

coordination)

FR-HEL-(H)[]K

Improves the power factor and reduces the harmonic current at the input side.
Make sure to install this option for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher. Also install this option 
when using a motor of 75 kW or higher capacity. (The IP55 compatible model has a built-in DC reactor.)
• Selection method

Select a DC reactor according to the applied motor capacity. (Select it according to the motor capacity even if the capacity is smaller 
than the inverter capacity.) (Refer to  page 204.)

• Connection diagram

Connect a DC reactor to the inverter terminals P1 
and P. Remove the jumper across terminals P1 and 
P. If the jumper is left attached, no power factor 
improvement can be obtained. (The jumper is not 
installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and 
the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
The connection cable between the reactor and the 
inverter should be as short as possible (5m or less).

• Outline dimension (Unit: mm)

(a)

The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). (Refer 
to page 196)

(b)

Approximately 93% of the power factor improving effect can be obtained (94.4% when calculated with 1 power factor 
for the fundamental wave according to the Architectural Standard Specifications (Electrical Installation) (2010 revision) 
supervised by the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism of Japan).

(c)

This is a sample outline dimension drawing. The shape differs by the model.
W1 and D1 indicate distances between installation holes. The installation hole size is indicated by d.

(d)

When installing a DC reactor (FR-HEL), install in the orientation shown below.
•(H)55K or lower: Horizontal installation or vertical installation
•(H)75K or higher: Horizontal installation

(e)

Keep enough clearance around the reactor because it heats up.
(Keep a clearance of minimum 10cm each on top and bottom and minimum 5cm each on right and left regardless of 
the installation orientation.)

Name (model)

Specification and structure

Three-phase 

AC power supply

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

Motor

U
V

W

P1

P1

P

M

P/+

N/-

FR-HEL

Inverter

Remove a jumper 

across terminals P1-P.

The connection cable should be 

5m maximum.

W

W1

H

FR-HEL-0.4K to 2.2K

FR-HEL-H0.4K

Less than D

W

Less than D

FR-HEL-3.7K to 55K

FR-HEL-H0.75K to H55K

W1

D1

H

W

FR-HEL-75K to 110K

FR-HEL-H75K to H355K

W1

D1

D

Within H

Model

W

W1

W1

D

D1

d

Mass

(kg)

20

0 V

0.4K

70

60

71

61

-

M4

0.4

0.75K

85

74

81

61

-

M4

0.5

1.5K

85

74

81

70

-

M4

0.8

2.2K

85

74

81

70

-

M4

0.9

3.7K

77

55

92

82

57

M4

1.5

5.5K

77

55

92

92

67

M4

1.9

7.5K

86

60

113

98

72

M4

2.5

11K

105

64

133

112

79

M6

3.3

15K

105

64

133

115

84

M6

4.1

18.5K

105

64

93

165

94

M6

4.7

22K

105

64

93

175

104

M6

5.6

30K

114

72

100

200

101

M6

7.8

37K

133

86

117

195

98

M6

10

45K

133

86

117

205

108

M6

11

55K

153

126 132

209

122

M6

12.6

75K

150

130 190

340

310

M6

17

90K

150

130 200

340

310

M6

19

110K

175

150 200

400

365

M8

20

400

 V

H0.4K

90

75

78

60

-

M5

0.6

H0.75K 66

50

100

70

48

M4

0.8

H1.5K

66

50

100

80

54

M4

1

H2.2K

76

50

110

80

54

M4

1.3

H3.7K

86

55

120

95

69

M4

2.3

H5.5K

96

60

128

100

75

M5

3

H7.5K

96

60

128

105

80

M5

3.5

H11K

105

75

137

110

85

M5

4.5

H15K

105

75

152

125

95

M5

5

H18.5K 114

75

162

120

80

M5

5

H22K

133

90

178

120

75

M5

6

H30K

133

90

178

120

80

M5

6.5

H37K

133

90

187

155

100

M5

8.5

H45K

133

90

187

170

110

M5

10

H55K

152

105 206

170

106

M6

11.5

H75K

140

120 185

320

295

M6

16

H90K

150

130 190

340

310

M6

20

H110K 150

130 195

340

310

M6

22

H132K 175

150 200

405

370

M8

26

H160K 175

150 205

405

370

M8

28

H185K 175

150 240

405

370

M8

29

H220K 175

150 240

405

370

M8

30

H250K 190

165 250

440

400

M8

35

H280K 190

165 255

440

400

M8

38

H315K 210

185 250

495

450

M10 42

H355K 210

185 250

495

450

M10 46

Model

W

W1

W1

D

D1

d

Mass

(kg)


background image

178

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

11

Balance reactor

FR-POL-H[]K

Use this option when the cable length from an inverter to the node point is less than 10 m.
• Selection method
Select a reactor according to the applied motor capacity.

• Connection diagram
Connect the balance reactor between each inverter and the motor as follows.

(a)

Always connect one balance reactor to each inverter.

(b)

FR-POL is usually earthed (grounded) by being mounted securely to the enclosure. If FR-POL is not earthed 
(grounded) enough through the enclosure, use an earthing (grounding) cable. When using an earthing (grounding) 
cable, wire the cable to the mounting hole for earthing (grounding) where varnish is removed.

• Outline dimension (Unit: mm)



Use this portion to wire an earthing cable.

Name (model)

Specification and structure

Inverter

Converter unit

Balance reactor

Number of 

inverters 

connected in 

parallel

Capacity of the 

system

Model

Multi-rating

Motor 

capacity 

(kW)

Output 

current 

(A)

FR-A842-400K-P

ND

FR-CC2-H400K-P

FR-POL-H400K

2

630

1232

3

945

1848

LD

FR-CC2-H450K-P

FR-POL-H500K

2

710

1386

3

1065

2078

FR-A842-450K-P

ND

FR-CC2-H450K-P

FR-POL-H500K

2

710

1386

3

1065

2078

LD

FR-CC2-H500K-P

FR-POL-H500K

2

800

1539

3

1200

2309

FR-A842-500K-P

ND

FR-CC2-H500K-P

FR-POL-H500K

2

800

1539

3

1200

2309

LD

FR-CC2-H560K-P

FR-POL-H500K

2

900

1750

3

1350

2626

U

V

W

X
Y
Z

Inverter

Inverter

M

Earth

X
Y

Z

U

V

W

U
V
W

U
V
W

Motor

FR-POL

Node point

FR-POL

U

V

W

U

V

W

X
Y
Z

Inverter

Inverter

M

Earth

X
Y

Z

U

V

W

U
V
W

U

V

W

X
Y
Z

Inverter

U
V
W

U
V
W

Motor

FR-POL

FR-POL

FR-POL

U

V

W

Node point

Example of parallel connection of two inverters

Example of parallel connection of three inverters

Earthing
(grounding)
point

∗1

Hole for
M8 screw - 8
(

φ10     )

±0.5

455

±1.5

170

±1.5

MAX 370

190

±1.5

25

±1

40

±1

60

±1.5

480

±2.5

MAX 220

(3.2)

Hanging hole
(

φ20)

T6 Copper
strip terminal
(

φ15-2)

W

U

X

Y

Z

V

25

±1

40

±1

∗1

W

U

X

Y

Z

MAX 240

75

±1.5

25

±1

455

±1.5

480

±2.5

MAX 310

190

±1.5

170

±1.5

40

±1

(3.2)

25

±1

V

Hanging hole
(

φ20)

T6 Copper strip terminal
(

φ15-2)

Earthing (grounding) point

Hole for M8 screw - 8
(

φ10     )

±0.5

FR-POL-H400K

FR-POL-H500K

Mass

(kg)

58

Mass

(kg)

61


background image

179

11

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

Line noise filter

FR-BSF01 

(for small capacities) / 

FR-BLF

Install an EMC filter (ferrite core) to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter. Effective in the range from about 
0.5 MHz to 5 MHz. range from about 0.5 MHz to 5 MHz. The FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower are 
equipped with built-in common mode chokes.
• Outline dimension

(a)

Wind each phase for three times (4T) in the same direction. (The greater 
the number of turns, the more effective result is obtained.)
When using several line noise filters to make 4T or more, wind the phases 
(cables) together. Do not use a different line noise filter for different phases.

(b)

When the cables are too thick to be winded, run each cable (phase) through 
four or more filters installed in series in one direction.

(c)

The filter can be used in the same way as the output side. When using 
filters at the output side, do not wind the cable more than 3 times (4T) for each filter because the filter may overheat.

(d)

A thick cable of 38 mm

2

 or more is not applicable to the FR-BSF01. Use FR-BLF for a larger diameter cable.

(e)

Do not wind the earthing (grounding) cable.

High-duty brake resistor

FR-ABR-(H)[]K

Connecting the option improves the regenerative braking capability of the inverter.
• Selection method
Select the model according to the applied inverter capacity.
• Outline dimension



For the 1.5K and 2.2K inverter.



For the 15K brake resistor, configure so that two 18 Ω resistors are 
connected in parallel.



For the 18.5K and 22K inverter.
For the 22K brake resistor, configure so that two 13 Ω resistors are 
connected in parallel.



For the H15K brake resistor, configure so that two 18 Ω resistors are 
connected in series. FR-ABR-15K is indicated on the resistor. (same resistor 
as the 200 V class 15K)



For the H18.5K and H22K inverter.
For the H22K brake resistor, configure so that two 52 Ω resistors are connected in parallel.

(a)

When using the FR-ABR type brake resistor, remove the jumper across terminal PR-PX. Failure to remove will cause 
the brake resistor to overheat.

(b)

The regenerative brake duty setting should be less than permissible brake duty in the table above.

(c)

The temperature of the brake resistor becomes 300°C or more depending on the operation frequency, care must be 
taken for installation and heat dissipation.

(d)

MYS type resistor can be also used. Note the permissible brake duty.

(e)

Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.

(f)

Install a thermal relay to prevent an overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.

Name (model)

Specification and structure

FR-BSF01

FR-BLF

110

95

2-

φ

5

22.5

65

33

65

4.5

130

85

160

180

2.3

80

35

7

φ

7

31.5

(Unit:  mm)

Line noise 
filter

Inverter

MCCB

Power 
supply

T/L3

S/L2

R/L1

Model :

FR-ABR-[]

Permissible 

brake duty

Outline dimension (mm) Resistance 

value

(Ω)

Approx 

mass

(kg)

W

W1

D

H

20

0 V

0.4K

10%

140 500 40

21 200

0.2

0.75K

10%

215 500 40

21 100

0.4

2.2K



10%

240 500 50

26 60

0.5

3.7K

10%

215 500 61

33 40

0.8

5.5K

10%

335 500 61

33 25

1.3

7.5K

10%

400 500 80

40 20

2.2

11K

6%

400 700 100 50 13

3.5

15K



6%

300 700 100 50

18
(×1/2)

2.4
(×2)

22K



6%

400 700 100 50

13
(×1/2)

3.3
(×2)

40

0 V

H0.4K

10%

115 500 40

21 1200

0.2

H0.75K 10%

140 500 40

21 700

0.2

H1.5K

10%

215 500 40

21 350

0.4

H2.2K

10%

240 500 50

26 250

0.5

H3.7K

10%

215 500 61

33 150

0.8

H5.5K

10%

335 500 61

33 110

1.3

H7.5K

10%

400 500 80

40 75

2.2

H11K

6%

400 700 100 50 52

3.2

H15K



6%

300 700 100 50

18
(×2)

2.4
(×2)

H22K



6%

450 700 100 50

52
(×1/2)

3.3
(×2)

Model :

FR-ABR-[]

Permissible 

brake duty

Outline dimension (mm) Resistance 

value

(Ω)

Approx 

mass

(kg)

W

W1

D

H

W

W1+20

0

D

H


background image

180

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

11

Brake unit

FR-BU2-(H)[]K

Discharging resistor

GZG type

GRZG type

Resistor unit

FR-BR-(H)[]K

MT-BR5-(H)[]K

Provides a braking capability greater than that is provided by an external brake resistor. This option can also be connected to the 
inverters without built-in brake transistors. Three types of discharging resistors are available. Make a selection according to the 
required braking torque.
• Specification

[Brake unit]



Please contact your sales representative to use a brake resistor other than MT-BR5.

[Resistor unit]

• Combination between the brake unit and the resistor unit



The 1 set contains the number of units in the parentheses. For the 400 V class, 2 sets are required.



The number next to the model name indicates the number of connectable units in parallel.

• Selection method

[GRZG type]

• The maximum temperature rise of the discharging resistors is about 100°C. Use heat-resistant wires to perform wiring, and make 

sure that they will not come in contact with resistors.

• Do not touch the discharging resistor while the power is ON or for about 10 minutes after the power supply turns OFF. Otherwise 

you may get an electric shock.



The number next to the model name indicates the number of connectable units in parallel.



FR-A840-00052(1.5K) or lower capacity inverters cannot be used with brake units. When using brake units with inverters, 
use the FR-A840-00083(2.2K) or higher capacity inverters.

Name (model)

Specification and structure

Model: FR-BU2-[]

200 V

400 V

1.5K 3.7K 7.5K 15K

30K 55K H7.5K H15K H30K H55K H75K H220K H280K

Applicable motor capacity The applicable capacity differs by the braking torque and the operation rate (%ED).

Connected brake resistor GRZG type, FR-BR, MT-BR5 (For the combination, refer to the table below.)

MT-BR5



Multiple (parallel) driving

Max. 10 units (However, the torque is limited by the permissible current of the connected inverter.)

Approximate mass (kg)

0.9

0.9

0.9

0.9

1.4

2.0

0.9

0.9

1.4

2.0

2.0

13

13



The 1 set contains the number of units in the parentheses. For the 400 V class, 2 sets are required.

Model: GRZG type 



200 V

400 V

GZG300W-

50Ω (1 unit)

GRZG200-

10Ω (3 units)

GRZG300-

5Ω (4 units)

GRZG400-

2Ω (6 units)

GRZG200-

10Ω (3 units)

GRZG300-

5Ω (4 units)

GRZG400-

2Ω (6 units)

Number of connectable 

units

1 unit

3 in series
(1 set)

4 in series
(1 set)

6 in series
(1 set)

6 in series
(2 sets)

8 in series
(2 sets)

12 in series
(2 sets)

Discharging resistor 

combined resistance (Ω) 50

30

20

12

60

40

24

Continuous operation 

permissible power (W)

100

300

600

1200

600

1200

2400

Model: FR-BR-[]

200 V

400 V

Model: MT-BR5-[]

200 V

400 V

15K

30K

55K

H15K H30K H55K

55K

H75K

Discharging resistor 

combined resistance (Ω) 8

4

2

32

16

8

Discharging resistor 

combined resistance (Ω) 2

6.5

Continuous operation 

permissible power (W)

990

1990

3910

990

1990

3910

Continuous operation 

permissible power (W)

5500

7500

Approximate mass (kg)

15

30

70

15

30

70

Approximate mass (kg)

70

65

Brake unit model

Discharging resistor model or resistor unit model

GRZG type

FR-BR

MT-BR5

Model 



Number of 

connectable units

200 V

FR-BU2-1.5K

GZG 300W-50Ω (1 unit)

1 unit

-

-

FR-BU2-3.7K

GRZG 200-10Ω (3 units)

3 in series (1 set)

-

-

FR-BU2-7.5K

GRZG 300-5Ω (4 units)

4 in series (1 set)

-

-

FR-BU2-15K

GRZG 400-2Ω (6 units)

6 in series (1 set)

FR-BR-15K

-

FR-BU2-30K

-

-

FR-BR-30K

-

FR-BU2-55K

-

-

FR-BR-55K

MT-BR5-55K

400 V

FR-BU2-H7.5K

GRZG 200-10Ω (3 units)

6 in series (2 sets)

-

-

FR-BU2-H15K

GRZG 300-5Ω (4 units)

8 in series (2 sets)

FR-BR-H15K

-

FR-BU2-H30K

GRZG 400-2Ω (6 units)

12 in series (2 sets)

FR-BR-H30K

-

FR-BU2-H55K

-

-

FR-BR-H55K

-

FR-BU2-H75K

-

-

-

MT-BR5-H75K

FR-BU2-H220K

-

-

-

3

MT-BR5-H75K 



FR-BU2-H280K

-

-

-

4

MT-BR5-H75K 



Power supply 

voltage

Braking 

torque

Motor capacity

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

200 V

50% 30s

FR-BU2-1.5K

FR-BU2-3.7K

FR-BU2-7.5K

FR-BU2-15K

100% 30s FR-BU2-1.5K

FR-BU2-3.7K FR-BU2-7.5K

FR-BU2-15K

2

FR-BU2-15K 



400 V

50% 30s

-



FR-BU2-H7.5K

FR-BU2-H15K

100% 30s -



FR-BU2-H7.5K

FR-BU2-H15K

FR-BU2-H30K

Power supply 

voltage

Braking 

torque

Motor capacity

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

200 V

50% 30s

2

FR-BU2-15K



3

FR-BU2-15K



4

FR-BU2-15K



100% 30s 3

FR-BU2-15K



4

FR-BU2-

15K



5

FR-BU2-15K



6

FR-BU2-15K



7

FR-BU2-15K



400 V

50% 30s

FR-BU2-H30K

2

FR-BU2-H30K 



100% 30s 2

FR-BU2-H30K



3

FR-BU2-H30K 



4

FR-BU2-H30K




background image

181

11

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

Brake unit

FR-BU2-(H)[]K

Discharging resistor

GZG type

GRZG type

Resistor unit

FR-BR-(H)[]K

MT-BR5-(H)[]K

[FR-BR]
The maximum temperature rise of the resistor unit is about 100°C. Therefore, use heat-resistant wires (such as glass wires).

%ED at short-time rating when braking torque is 100%

Braking torque (%) at 10%ED in short-time rating of 15 s

[MT-BR5]

• Be sure to select a well-ventilated place for the installation of the resistor unit. Ventilation is necessary when installing the resistor in 

a place such as an enclosure, where heat is not well diffused.

• The maximum temperature rise of the resistor unit is about 300deg. When wiring, be careful not to touch the resistor. Also, keep 

any heat-sensitive component away from the resistor (minimum 40 to 50 cm).

• The temperature of the resistor unit abnormally increases if the brake unit is operated exceeding the specified duty. Since the 

resistor unit may result in overheat if the temperature of the brake unit is left unchanged, switch off the inverter.

• A resistor unit is equipped with thermostat (NO contact) for overheat protection. If this protective thermostat activates in normal 

operation, the deceleration time may be too short. Set the inverter's deceleration time longer.

%ED at short-time rating when braking torque is 100%

Braking torque (%) in short-time rating of 15 s



The number next to the model name indicates the number of connectable units in parallel.



To obtain a large braking torque, the motor has to have a torque characteristic that meets the braking torque.
Check the torque characteristic of the motor.

Name (model)

Specification and structure

Model

Motor capacity

5.5kW 7.5kW

11kW

15kW

18.5kW

22kW

30kW

37kW

45kW

55kW

200 V

FR-BU2-15K

%ED

80

40

15

10

-

-

-

-

-

-

FR-BU2-30K

-

-

65

30

25

15

10

-

-

-

FR-BU2-55K

-

-

-

-

90

60

30

20

15

10

400 V

FR-BU2-H15K

%ED

80

40

15

10

-

-

-

-

-

-

FR-BU2-H30K

-

-

65

30

25

15

10

-

-

-

FR-BU2-H55K

-

-

-

-

90

60

30

20

15

10

Model

Motor capacity

5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW

15kW 18.5kW 22kW

30kW

37kW

45kW

55kW

200 V

FR-BU2-15K

Braking 

torque

(%)

280

200

120

100

80

70

-

-

-

-

FR-BU2-30K

-

-

260

180

160

130

100

80

70

-

FR-BU2-55K

-

-

-

-

300

250

180

150

120

100

400 V

FR-BU2-H15K

Braking 

torque

(%)

280

200

120

100

80

70

-

-

-

-

FR-BU2-H30K

-

-

260

180

160

130

100

80

70

-

FR-BU2-H55K

-

-

-

-

300

250

180

150

120

100

Example 1  Travel operation

Example 2  Lift operation

Time t

tc

tb

Speed

Speed

Time t

Descending

Ascending

tc

t1

t2

tb=t1+t2+t3+t4

t3 t4

Regeneration duty factor (operation frequency)%ED 

tb<15s (continuous operation time)

tb

tc

100

Number of 

connectable 

units



Motor capacity

75

kW

90

kW

110

kW

132

kW

160

kW

185

kW

220

kW

250

kW

280

kW

315

kW

355

kW

375

kW

400

kW

450

kW

500

kW

560

kW

200 V

FR-BU2-55K

1 5

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2 20

15

10

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

400 V

FR-BU2-H75K

1 10

5

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2 40

25

20

10

5

5

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

400 V

FR-BU2-H220K

1 80

60

40

25

15

10

10

5

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2 -

-

-

-

-

-

20

20

15

15

15

10

10

10

5

-

400 V

FR-BU2-H280K

1 -

80

65

40

30

20

15

10

10

10

5

-

-

-

-

-

2 -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

20

20

15

15

15

10

10

Number of 

connectable 

units



Motor capacity

75

kW

90

kW

110

kW

132

kW

160

kW

185

kW

220

kW

250

kW

280

kW

315

kW

355

kW

375

kW

400

kW

450

kW

500

kW

560

kW

200 V

FR-BU2-55K

1 70

60

50

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2 150

120

100

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

400 V

FR-BU2-H75K

1 100

80

70

55

45

40

35

30

25

20

20

20

-

-

-

-

2 150

150

135

110

90

80

70

60

50

45

40

40

-

-

-

-

400 V

FR-BU2-H220K

1 200

200

150

150

135

115

100

80

55

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2 -

-

-

-

-

-

190

170

150

150

140

120

110

100

90

80

400 V

FR-BU2-H280K

1 -

-

200

200

150

150

150

125

100

70

60

-

-

-

-

-

2 -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

180

160

150

150

130

115

100


background image

182

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

11

Brake unit

FR-BU2-(H)[]K

Discharging resistor

GZG type

GRZG type

Resistor unit

FR-BR-(H)[]K

MT-BR5-(H)[]K

• Connection diagram



When using the FR-BU2 with the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and the FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower inverters, be sure 
to remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX.

 A jumper is connected across BUE and SD in the initial status. 

 When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbol (P/+, N/-) at the inverter side and at the brake unit (FR-BU2) side. 

Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. (For the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 02150(22K), and the FR-A840-
00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K), use terminals P3 and N/-.)
Do not remove the jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except for connecting the DC reactor.

 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a step-down transformer.

• Outline dimensions

<FR-BU2>

<GZG, GRZG>

<FR-BR>

<MT-BR5>

Name (model)

Specification and structure

PR

N/-

MSG
SD
MSG
SD

P/+

P

A
B
C

PR

RES

SD

U
V

W

P/+

N/-

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

M

PR

N/-

MSG
SD
MSG
SD

P/+

P

A
B
C

PR

MCCB

MC

*10

RES
BUE
SD

*11

*11

*11

Three-phase 
AC power supply

Resistor unit or 
discharging resistor

Resistor unit or 
discharging resistor

Brake unit

FR-BU2

When connecting 
several brake units

Brake unit

FR-BU2

Motor

Signal for 
master/slave

Inverter

Reset 

Brake permission signal

*10

BUE

MC

OFF

ON

MC

T 

*12

*9

PR

PX

H

W

D

FR-BU2-1.5K to 55K

FR-BU2-H7.5K to H75K

H

W

D

FR-BU2-H220K, H280K

(Unit: mm)

Model

W

H

D

FR-BU2-1.5K to 15K

68

128

132.5

FR-BU2-30K

108

128

129.5

FR-BU2-55K

170

128

142.5

FR-BU2-H7.5K, H15K

68

128

132.5

FR-BU2-H30K

108

128

129.5

FR-BU2-H55K, H75K

170

128

142.5

FR-BU2-H220K, H280K

250

300

200

D

H

W

(Unit: mm)

Model

W

H

D

GZG300W

335

78

40

GRZG200

306

55

26

GRZG300

334

79

40

GRZG400

411

79

40

W

H

D

(Unit: mm)

Model

W

H

D

FR-BR-15K

170

450

220

FR-BR-30K

340

600

220

FR-BR-55K

480

700

450

FR-BR-H15K

170

450

220

FR-BR-H30K

340

600

220

FR-BR-H55K

480

700

450

300

75

75

450

4

φ 15 installation hole

7.5

7.5

M6

P PR TH1

TH2

E

M4

193

189

480
510

85

85

800

37

60

21

10

40

30

NP


background image

183

11

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

Power regeneration 

common converter

FR-CV-(H)[]K

Enables continuous regenerative operation at 100% torque. This option can support continuous regenerative operations including 
line operation.
This converter eliminates the need of preparing brake units per inverter. This converter can cut down the total space and the cost.
The regenerated energy is used by another inverter, and if there is still an excess, it is returned to the power supply, saving on the 
energy consumption.
• Selection method

Select the model according to capacity of the inverter or the applicable motor, whichever larger.

• Connection diagram



Remove the jumpers across R/L1 and R/L11 and across S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the power supply for the control 
circuit to terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do not connect anything to  the power supply input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. 
Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Connecting the opposite polarity of terminals N/- and P/+ will damage the 
inverter.



Do not install an MCCB for terminals P/+ and N/- (between terminals P/L+ and P/+ or between N/L- and N/-).
Always match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) at the inverter side and at the power regeneration common converter side. 
Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.



Assign the X10 signal to a terminal using any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).



Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, and T/MC1. Operating the inverter without connecting 
them will damage the power regeneration common converter.



Install the dedicated stand-alone reactor (FR-CVL) on a horizontal surface.



Always connect terminal RDYB of the FR-CV to the inverter terminal where the X10 signal or the MRS signal is assigned to. 
Always connect terminal SE of the FR-CV to the inverter terminal SD. Not connecting these terminals may damage the FR-
CV.

• Outline dimensions

Name (model)

Specification and structure

R/L11
S/L21
T/L31

R2/L12

S2/L22

T2/L32

R2/L1
S2/L2
T2/L3

R/L11
S/L21
T/MC1

P/L+

U

V

W

M

FR-CV type
Power regeneration 
common converter

Inverter

PC

SD

X10

 ∗3

RES

P24

SD

RDYB

RSO

SE

RDYA

N/L-

∗2

∗5

∗4

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

R1/L11
S1/L21

P/+
N/-

∗1

Three-phase

AC power

supply

MCCB

MC1

Dedicated stand-alone
reactor (FR-CVL)



H

W

D1

D

H

W

D1

D

FR-CV-(H)

FR-CV-(H)-AT

FR-CV-(H)

(Unit: mm)

FR-CV-(H)-AT

(Unit: mm)

Voltage/

capacity

W

D

D1

H

Voltage/

capacity

W

D

D1

H

20

0 V

7.5K/11K 90

303 103 300

40

0 V

7.5K/

11K/15K

120 305 105 300

15K

120 305 105 300

22K/30K 150 322 122 380

22K/30K 150 305 105 380

37K/55K 400 250 135 620

37K/55K 400 250 135 620

Voltage/

capacity

W

D

D1

H

Voltage/

capacity

W

D

D1

H

20

0 V

7.5K/11K 110 315 115 330

40

0 V

7.5K/

11K/15K

130 320 120 330

15K

130 320 120 330

22K/30K 160 350 150 410

22K/30K 160 350 150 410

D

H

W

FR-CVL

FR-CVL

(Unit: mm)

Voltage/

capacity

W

H

D

Voltage/

capacity

W

H

D

20

0 V

7.5K/

11K/15K 165

155

130

40

0 V

7.5K/11K 220

200

135

15K

220

205

135

22K

165

155

140

22K

220

215

150

30K

215

175

160

30K

245

220

185

37K

220

200

320

37K

245

265

230

55K

250

225

335

55K

290

280

230


background image

184

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

11

Power regeneration 

converter

MT-RC-H[]K

A power regeneration converter allows energy generated at braking operation of the inverter to be regenerated to the power supply.
Since a converter does not require a discharging resistor necessary like a brake unit, it is effective in space and energy saving and it 
provides a large peak braking torque.
• Selection method

Select the model according to the applied motor capacity.

• Connection diagram

• Outline dimension (Unit: mm)

Name (model)

Specification and structure

DCL

P1

P1

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

S1/L21

R

R2

RES

U

V

W

Inverter

MT-RCL

P

P/+

N/-

P

N

RDY

SE

MT-RC

Reset signal

Ready signal

Three-phase
AC power
supply

MCCB

MC2

MC1

M

STF

SD

S

T

S2

T2

R2

S2

T2

R

S

T

R1

S1

C

Alarm signal

B

A

H

H1

H2

H3

Mounting foot (detachable)

Mounting foot 

movable

D

D1

W

W1

C

Accessory cover
(parameter unit
can not be used)

2-

φC hole

H

H1

H2

H3

Mounting foot (detachable)

Mounting foot 

movable

D

D1

W

W1

W2

W2

C

Accessory cover
(parameter unit
can not be used)

3-

φC hole

MT-RC-H160K to H280K

MT-RC-H75K

Model

W

W1

W2

H

H1

H2

H3

D

D1

C

400

 V

MT-RC-H75K

480

400

-

740

714

13

13

360

196

10

MT-RC-H160K

498

400

200

1010

984

13

13

380

196

10

MT-RC-H220K

680

600

300

1010

984

13

13

380

196

10

MT-RC-H280K

790

630

315

1330

1300

15

15

440

196

12

H

W

D

MT-RCL

Model

W

H

D

40

0 V

MT-RCL-H75K

390

385

358

MT-RCL-H160K

515

465

380

MT-RCL-H220K

630

655

565

MT-RCL-H280K

690

690

620


background image

185

11

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

High power factor 

converter

FR-HC2- (H)[]K

Substantially suppresses power harmonics to obtain the equivalent capacity conversion coefficient K5 = 0 specified in "the Harmonic 
Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage" in Japan.
The power regeneration function comes standard.
The common converter driving with several inverters is possible.
• Selection method

Select the model according to capacity of the inverter or the applicable motor, whichever larger.

• Specifications



The total capacity of the connected inverters.



If a high power factor converter (FR-HC2) is purchased, it comes with reactor 1 (FR-HCL21), reactor 2 (FR-HCL22), and an 
outside box (FR-HCB2). Do not connect the DC reactor to the inverter when using a high power factor converter.
(If an H280K or higher is purchased, it comes with FR-HCL21, FR-HCL22, FR-HCC2, FR-HCR2, and FR-HCM2.)

• Outline dimension (Unit: mm)



Install reactors (FR-HCL21 and 22) on a horizontal surface.



The H280K or higher are not equipped with FR-HCB2. A filter capacitor and inrush current limit resistors are provided 
instead.

Name (model)

Specification and structure

Model:

FR-HC2-[]



200 V

400 V

7.5K

15K 30K 55K 75K H7.5K H15K

H30K

H55K

H75K H110K H160K H220K H280K H400K H560K

Applicable 

inverter 

capacity

(ND rating)



3.7K 
to 
7.5K

7.5K 
to 
15K

15K 
to 
30K

30K 
to 
55K

37K 
to 
75K

3.7K 
to 
7.5K

7.5K 
to 
15K

15K 
to 
30K

30K 
to 
55K

37K 
to 
75K

55K 
to 
110K

90K 
to 
160K

110K 
to 
220K

160K 
to 
280K

200K 
to 
400K

280K 
to 
560K

Rated input 

voltage/

frequency

Three-phase 200 V to 220 V 
50 Hz
200 V to 230 V 60 Hz

Three-phase 380 V to 460 V 50/60 Hz

Rated input 

current (A)

33

61

115

215

278

17

31

57

110

139

203

290

397

506

716

993

Vo

lt

ag

e

Capacity

High power factor 

converter

FR-HC2

Reactor 1 

FR-HCL21



Reactor 2 

FR-HCL22



Outside box

FR-HCB2



W

H

D

W

H

D

W

H

D

W

H

D

20

0 V

7.5K

220

260

170

132

150

100

237.5

230

140

190

320

165

15K

250

400

190

162

172

126

257.5

260

165

30K

325

550

195

195

210

150

342.5

305

180

270

450

203

55K

370

620

250

210

180

200.5

432.5

380

280

75K

465

620

300

240

215

215.5

474

460

280

400

450

250

40

0 V

H7.5K

220

300

190

132

140

100

237.5

220

140

190

320

165

H15K

220

300

190

162

170

126

257.5

260

165

H30K

325

550

195

182

195

101

342.5

300

180

H55K

370

670

250

282.5

245

165

392.5

365

200

270

450

203

H75K

325

620

250

210

175

210.5

430

395

280

300

350

250

H110K

465

620

300

240

230

220

500

440

370

350

450

380

H160K

498

1010

380

280

295

274.5

560

520

430

400

450

440

H220K

498

1010

380

330

335

289.5

620

620

480

H280K

680

1010

380

330

335

321

690

700

560

-

-

-

H400K

790

1330

440

402

460

550

632

675

705

-

-

-

H560K

790

1330

440

452

545

645

632

720

745

-

-

-

High power factor converter

W

D

H

Reactor 1, Reactor 2

W

H

D

PSCLR

P.CPY PWR

REGEN

DRIVE

.......

FAN

H

W

D

Outside box


background image

186

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

11

Surge voltage 

suppression filter

FR-ASF-H[]K

A surge voltage suppression filter limits surge voltage applied to motor terminals when driving the 400 V class motor by the inverter.
• Selection method

Select the model according to the applied motor capacity.

• Specifications



Determined by the specification of the connected inverter (400 V class).

• Connection diagram

• Outline dimension (Unit: mm)

Name (model)

Specification and structure

Model: FR-ASF-[]

400 V

H1.5K

H3.7K

H7.5K

H15K

H22K

H37K

H55K

Applicable motor capacity (kW)

0.4 to 1.5

2.2 to 3.7

5.5 to 7.5

11 to 15

18.5 to 22

30 to 37

45 to 55

Rated input current (A)

4.0

9.0

17.0

31.0

43.0

71.0

110.0

Overload current rating 



150% 60 s, 200% 0.5 s

Rated input AC voltage 



Three-phase 380 V to 460 V 50 Hz/60 Hz

Maximum AC voltage fluctuation 



Three-phase 506 V 50 Hz/60 Hz

Maximum frequency 



400 Hz

PWM frequency permissible range 0.5 kHz to 14.5 kHz

Maximum wiring length between 

the filter-motor

300 m

Approx. mass (kg)

8.0

11.0

20.0

28.0

38.0

59.0

78.0

E

n

vir

o

n

m

en

t

Surrounding air temperature

-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)

Surrounding air humidity

90% RH or less (non-condensing)

Atmosphere

Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt, etc.)

Altitude/vibration

Maximum 1000 m above sea level, 5.9 m/s

2

 or less at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, 

Y, Z axes)

R
S

T

X
Y
Z

FR-ASF

Motor

Within 300 m

IM

U
V

W

U

V

W

Inverter

MCCB

MC

Three-
phase AC
power supply

Within 5 m

W

D

H



This indicates the maximum dimension.



The H15K or higher has a different shape.

Model

W

H



D



FR-ASF-H1.5K

220

193

160

FR-ASF-H3.7K

220

200

180

FR-ASF-H7.5K

280

250

215

FR-ASF-H15K 



335

260

285

FR-ASF-H22K 



335

340

349

FR-ASF-H37K 



375

445

388

FR-ASF-H55K 



395

445

568


background image

187

11

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

Surge voltage 

suppression filter 

FR-BMF-H[]K

Limits surge voltage applied to motor terminals when driving a 400 V class motor with an inverter.
This filter is compatible with the 5.5 to 37 kW motors.
• Selection method
Select the model according to the applied motor capacity.
• Specifications



Indicates the maximum capacity applicable with the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor. (PM motors are not 
applicable.)



Determined by the specification of the connected inverter (400 V class).



Set the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection to 2 kHz or less.



When an inverter has a filter mounted on its back, do not use such an inverter on a moving object or in a place that vibrates 
(exceeding 1.96 m/s

2

).

• Connection diagram

• Outline dimension

Name (model)

Specification and structure

Model: FR-BMF-H[]K

7.5

15

22

37

Applicable motor 

capacity (kW) 



5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

Rated current (A)

17

31

43

71

Overload current rating



150% 60 s, 200% 0.5 s (inverse-time characteristics)

Rated AC input voltage



Three-phase 380 to 480 V

Permissible AC voltage 

fluctuation



323 to 528 V

Maximum frequency



120 Hz

PWM carrier frequency

2 kHz or lower



Protective structure (JEM 

1030)

Open type (IP00)

Cooling system

Self-cooling

Maximum wiring length

100m or lower

Approx. mass (kg)

5.5

9.5

11.5

19

E

n

vi

ro

nm

en

t

Surrounding air 

temperature

-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)

Surrounding air 

humidity

90% RH or less (non-condensing)

Atmosphere

Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt, etc.)

Altitude/vibration

Maximum 1000 m above sea level, 5.9 m/s

2

 or less



 at 10 to 55 Hz (directions 

of X, Y, Z axes)

R

S

T

X

Y

Z

TH0

TH1

FR-BMF

within 100m

M

U

V

W

Inverter

* Install a step-down transformer.

MCCB

MC

Three-

phase 

AC power  

supply

T*

ON

MC

OFF

MC

FR-BMF-H7.5K

FR-BMF-H15K, H22K

FR-BMF-H37K

7.5

7.5

60

149.5

325

340

325

370

Crimping terminal 5.5-4

6

2.3

Isolation cap color

Main terminal block (M4)

Control terminal block (M3)

(U)

Red

Blue

(W)

(V)

White

2.3

6

195

208

150

230

4-M4

4-M5

245

138

Rating  plate

2- 

φ 6 hole

13.5

75
45

X

Terminal layout

Y Z

TH0 TH1

Earth terminal (M5)

(Unit: mm)

Rating  plate

10

165

80

285

380

500

480

2- 

φ 10 hole

205

Isolation cap color

Main terminal block (M5)

Control terminal block (M3)

2.3

420

Red

(U)

2.3

Crimping terminal: 8-6

Blue

(W)

(V)

White

10

180

260

195

230

6-M5

4-M8

245

457

33

10

31

100
50

X

Terminal layout

Y Z

TH0 TH1

Earth terminal

(M6)

(Unit: mm)

Rating
plate

450

550

525

Crimping terminal
22-6

2.3

130

10

80

12.5

245

X

Terminal layout

Y Z

TH0 TH1

Earth terminal

(M8)

Isolation cap color

(U)

Red

Blue

(W)

(V)

White

Main terminal block (M6)

Control terminal block (M3)

2-

φ 10 hole

(Unit: mm)


background image

188

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

11

Sine wave filter

MT-BSL-(H)[]K

MT-BSC-(H)[]K

• Sine wave filter application

A sine wave filter can be installed to adjust the motor voltage and current waveforms to be sine waves. Install a sine wave filter to 
the output side of the inverter . This filter is compatible with the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or 
higher.
(This product is available only with general-purpose motors.) A sine wave filter will bring operation characteristic equivalent to the 
operation with a sine wave power supply and also will provide the following benefits. A sine wave filter will bring operation 
characteristic equivalent to the operation with a sine wave power supply and also will provide the following benefits.

(a)

Low noise

(b)

No surge current

(c)

Small motor losses (for a standard motor)

• Operating condition

The following settings and conditions are required to use a sine wave filter.

(a)

Set "25" in Pr.72. (The initial value is "2".)
This setting changes the carrier frequency to 2.5 kHz. (A sine wave filter is designed on the assumption of 2.5 kHz 
carrier frequency. Always change this setting.) The operation with Pr.72 = "25" setting may damage inverter and the 
sine wave filter.

(b)

A sine wave filter can be used for the operation with an inverter output frequency of 60 Hz or lower.
It cannot be used for the operation with higher frequency. (Using it with the higher frequency will increases the filter loss.)

(c)

It is applicable only under V/F control. (When Pr.72 = "25", V/F control is automatically set.)

(d)

When using the sine wave filter and the FR-HC2 together, use the MT-BSL-HC.

• Circuit configuration and connection

• Reactor for sine wave filter

• Capacitor for sine wave filter

Name (model)

Specification and structure

Sine wave filter

Inverter

(Carrier 2.5 kHz)

Inverter output

voltage

wave form

Capacitor

(Capacitor)

Wave form at a

motor terminal

IM

Motor

U
V

W

X
Y
Z

voltage

current

+

-

0

Reactor

Install the filter near the inverter. 
For a capacitor cable, use a cable 
with size larger than indicated in the 
table below "recommended cable 
size ".

*



When using two or three capacitors, 
install them in parallel as shown in the 
wiring diagram.

Motor 

capacity

(kW)

Model

Applicable inverter

Reactor for filter

Capacitor for filter



200 V

75

MT-BSL-75K

1×MT-BSC-75K

Select an inverter where 
the rated motor current 

 

× 1.1 will be 90% or less 
of the inverter rated 
current.

90

MT-BSL-90K

1×MT-BSC-90K

400 V

75

MT-BSL-H75K(-HC)

1×MT-BSC-H75K

90

MT-BSL-H110K(-HC)

1×MT-BSC-H110K

110 MT-BSL-H110K(-HC)

1×MT-BSC-H110K

132 MT-BSL-H150K(-HC)

2×MT-BSC-H75K

160 MT-BSL-H220K(-HC)

2×MT-BSC-H110K

185 MT-BSL-H220K(-HC)

2×MT-BSC-H110K

220 MT-BSL-H220K(-HC)

2×MT-BSC-H110K

250 MT-BSL-H280K(-HC)

3×MT-BSC-H110K

280 MT-BSL-H280K(-HC)

3×MT-BSC-H110K

C

B

A

4-G 
installation
hole

W

Z

V

Y

U

X

Terminal H

*

Rating plate

D
E

F

* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.

  This is a sample of the outer appearance, 

  which differs depending on the model.

Install the reactor on a horizontal surface.

Model

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Mass

(kg)

2

00 V

MT-BSL-75K

330 150 285 185 216 328 M10 M12 80

MT-BSL-90K

390 150 320 180 220 330 M12 M12 120

4

00 V

MT-BSL-H75K

330 150 285 185 216 318 M10 M10 80

MT-BSL-H75K-HC

385 150 345 185 216 315 M10 M10 110

MT-BSL-H110K

390 150 340 195 235 368 M12 M12 140

MT-BSL-H110K-HC 420 170 400 195 235 370 M12 M12 180

MT-BSL-H150K

455 200 397 200 240 380 M12 M12 190

MT-BSL-H150K-HC 450 300 455 390 430 500 M12 M12 250

MT-BSL-H220K

495 200 405 250 300 420 M12 M12 240

MT-BSL-H220K-HC 510 350 540 430 485 555 M12 M12 310

MT-BSL-H280K

575 200 470 310 370 485 M12 M12 340

MT-BSL-H280K-HC 570 400 590 475 535 620 M12 M12 480

B

A

Terminals I

G

G

4-H

Installation hole

D

C

E

F

When installing, allow 25 mm or more gap between capacitors.

• Recommended cable gauge

The gauge of the cables used between the inverter and the MT-BSL as well as the MT-BSL and 

the induction motor varies according to U, V, and W as indicated on page 196.

The following table shows the cable gauge of the MT-BSC connecting cable.

Model

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

Mass(kg)

20

0 V

MT-BSC-75K

207

191

285

233

72 41 45

φ7

M8

3.9

MT-BSC-90K

282

266

240

183

92 56 85

φ7

M12

5.5

40

0 V

MT-BSC-H75K

207

191

220

173

72 41 55

φ7

M6

3.0

MT-BSC-H110K

207

191

280

233

72 41 55

φ7

M6

4.0

MT-BSC-75K

MT-BSC-90K

MT-BSC-H75K

MT-BSC-H110K

38 mm

2

38 mm

2

22 mm

2

22 mm

2


background image

189

11

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

Dedicated cable option

Encoder connector (DDK Ltd.) (reference) (unit: mm)

Name (model)

Specification and structure

Encoder cable

FR-V7CBL[]

• For dedicated motors

• Cable fabrication specifications

When option connection cables are not available, fabricate cables according to the following table.
Use parallel connection or a large-gauge cable for wiring between terminals PG and SD and the motor end encoder. (For cables 
for other terminals, use cables 0.2 mm

2

. )

Straight plug D/MS3106B20-29S

Angle plug D/MS3108B20-29S

• This angle type connector is not an option item. Prepare the connector at the 

customer's side.

Cable clamp D/MS3057-12A

Positioning guide (key groove)

D/MS3106B20-29S

(As viewed from wiring side)

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

K

J

L

M

N

P

T

S

R

L

60 mm

Earth (Ground) wire

D/MS3057-12A

D/MS3106B20-29S

Inverter side

Encoder side connector

11 mm

Inverter (When the FR-A8AP is used)

2 

mm

2

Encoder

PA1

PA2

PB1

PB2

PZ1

PZ2

PG

SD

A

B

C

D

F

G

S

R

F-DPEVSB 12P    0.2 mm

Model

Length L (m) 

FR-V7CBL5

5

FR-V7CBL15 15
FR-V7CBL30 30

 • A shield earthing (grounding) P-clip is 

included.

• For cables of 30 m or longer, contact your sales representative.

Wiring 

distance

Options

dedicated encoder 

cable

Cable gauge for terminals PG and SD

For wiring using cables 

0.2 mm

2

For wiring using a cable 

with larger gauge

5 m or lower

FR-V7CBL5

2 or more cables in parallel

0.4 mm

2

 or more

10 m or lower

FR-V7CBL15

2 or more cables in parallel

15 m or lower

4 or more cables in parallel

0.75 mm

2

 or more

20 m or lower

FR-V7CBL30

4 or more cables in parallel

30 m or lower

6 or more cables in parallel

1.25 mm

2

 or more

50 m or lower

* Cables on order
Consult us separately.

6 or more cables in parallel

100 m or lower

9.53 or more

55.57 or less

47 or less

φ

37.28

18.79 or less

B

A

F

- 3

0

2

2 P

Y

Z

X

W

1-3/16-18UNEF-2A hole

1-1/4-18UNEF-2B hole

18.26

φ

37.28

76.98 or less

9.53 or more

B

A

F

- 3

0

2

2 P

Y

Z

X

W

33.3

22.92

1-3/16-18UNEF-2A hole

1-1/4-18UNEF-2B hole

18.26

φ19.0

  

±0.7

37.3

（Cable clamp ID）

(Movable range on one side)

（Bushing ID）

1-3/16-18UNEF hole

φ15.9

23.8

9

35.0

4.0


background image

190

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

11

Cable glands and nuts (IP55 compatible model)

For wiring of the IP55 compatible model, fix the cables using a cable gland and a nut, according to the diameter of the holes of the wiring 
cover.
For the details such as wiring cover hole diameters and recommended cable glands, refer to the following table.



EMC-compliant cable gland



General-purpose cable gland

Inverter capacity

Symbol

Recommended 

layout example

Hole 

diameter 

(mm)

Recommended cable gland

(Manufactured by LAPP KABEL)

Recommended nut

(Manufactured by LAPP KABEL)

FR-A846-00023(0.4K) 

to 00170(5.5K)

(a)

Control circuit wiring

20.3

SKINTOP MS-SC-M20 53112630 



SKINTOP MS-M20 53112020 



SKINDICHT SM-M20 52103020

(b)

AC power input wiring

32.3

SKINTOP MS-SC-M32 53112650 



SKINTOP MS-M32 BRUSH 53112677 



SKINTOP MS-M32 53112040 



SKINDICHT SM-M32 52103040

(c)

Brake unit connection wiring

(d)

Inverter output wiring

FR-A846-00250(7.5K) 

to 00470(18.5K)

(a)

Control circuit wiring

20.3

SKINTOP MS-SC-M20 53112630 



SKINTOP MS-M20 53112020 



SKINDICHT SM-M32 52103020

(b)

AC power input wiring

40.4

SKINTOP MS-SC-M40 53112660 



SKINTOP MS-M40 BRUSH 53112678 



SKINTOP MS-M40 53112050 



SKINDICHT SM-M40 52103050

(c)

Brake unit connection wiring

(d)

Inverter output wiring

FR-A846-00620(22K) 

to 02600(90K)

(a)

Control circuit wiring

20.3

SKINTOP MS-SC-M20 53112630 



SKINTOP MS-M20 53112020

SKINDICHT SM-M20 52103020

(b)

AC power input wiring

63

SKINTOP MS-M63 BRUSH 53112680 



SKINTOP MS-M63 53112070 



SKINDICHT SM-M63 52103070

(c)

Brake unit connection wiring

(d)

Inverter output wiring

FR-A846-03250(110K) 

to 03610(132K)

(a)

Control circuit wiring

20.3

SKINTOP MS-SC-M20 53112630 



SKINTOP MS-M20 53112020 



SKINDICHT SM-M20 52103020

(b)

AC power input wiring

63

SKINTOP MS-M63 BRUSH PLUS 53112681 



SKINTOP MS-M63 PLUS 53112080 



SKINDICHT SM-M63 52103070

(c)

Brake unit connection wiring

(d)

Inverter output wiring

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(a)

(a)

(a)

FR-A846-00620(22K) to 
01160(45K)

FR-A846-01800(55K) to 03610(132K)

(a)

(a)

(a)

(a)

(a)

(c)

(b)

(d)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(a)

(a)

(a)

FR-A846-00023(0.4K) to 
00170(5.5K)

FR-A846-00250(7.5K) to 
00470(18.5K)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(a)

(a)

(a)

(a)


background image

191

11

Option a

nd Pe

riphera

l De

vic
e

s

Recommended EMI filter by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd.

The following table indicates the specifications of the EMI filters used with inverters.

 • Noise filter wiring example

Install the recommended EMI filter by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd. to the input 
side of the inverter, as shown below.

Recommended ferrite core by NEC TOKIN Corporation

The following ferrite core is recommended to be used in combination with the inverter (IP55 compatible model) to support compliance with the 
shipping classifications.
Model: ESD-SR-250

Inverter model

FR-A840-[ ]

EMI filter model

SLD

LD

ND

HD

00023(0.4K)

HF3010C-SZA

00038(0.75K)

00052(1.5K)
00083(2.2K)

HF3020C-SZA

00126(3.7K)
00170(5.5K)

HF3030C-SZA

HF3020C-SZA

00250(7.5K)

HF3030C-SZA

00310(11K)

HF3040C-SZA

00380(15K)

HF3050C-SZA

HF3040C-SZA

00470(18.5K)

HF3060C-SZA

00620(22K)

HF3080C-SZA

00770(30K)

HF3100C-SZA

00930(37K)

HF3150C-SZA

HF3100C-SZA

01160(45K)

HF3150C-SZA

01800(55K)

HF3200C-SZA

02160(75K)

HF3250C-SZA

02600(90K)

03250(110K)

HF3600C-SJB

HF3300C-SJB

03610(132K)

HF3600C-SJB

HF3300C-SJB

04320(160K)

HF3600C-SJB

04810(185K)
05470(220K)
06100(250K)
06830(280K)

HF31000C-SJB

Inverter model

FR-A842-[ ]

EMI filter model

SLD

LD

ND

HD

07700(315K)

HF31000C-SJB

08660(355K)
09620(400K)
10940(450K)

HF31200C-SJB

12120(500K)

HF31600C-SJB

Inverter model

FR-A840-[ ]

EMI filter model

SLD

LD

ND

HD

Inverter

Motor

EMI filter 

Three

phase

AC

1 R 

S 

T 

U 

V 

W 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 


background image

192

Low

-V

olt
a

ge Switc

h

g

ear/
C

ab

les

12

Low-Voltage Switchgear/Cables

Mitsubishi Electric Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers 
WS-V Series

"WS-V Series" is the new circuit breakers that have a lot of superior aspects such as higher breaking 
capacity, design for easy use, standardization of accessory parts, and compliance to the global 
standards.

Features

Technologies based on long years of experience are brought 

together to achieve improved performance

The new circuit breaking technology "Expanded ISTAC" has improved the 
currentlimiting performance and upgraded the overall breaking capacity.
Expansion of the conductor under the stator shortens the contact parting time of the 
mover as compared to the conventional ISTAC structure.
The current-limiting performance has been improved remarkably. (The maximum 
peak current value has been reduced by approx. 10%.)

Compact design for ease of use

The thermal adjustable circuit breakers and electronic circuit breakers are smaller.

Types of internal accessories are reduced from 3 types to 1 type

Standardization of internal accessories contributes to a reduction of stock and 
delivery time.

Lineup of UL 489 listed circuit breakers with 54 mm width "Small Fit" 

The compact breakers contribute to a size reduction of machines, and IEC 35 mm rail mounting is standard.

Lineup of UL 489 listed circuit breakers for 480 V AC "High Performance"

The breaking capacity has been improved to satisfy the request for SCCR upgrading.

Breaking capacity comparison with a conventional model 

250-H

250-RG

250-S

250-C

125-RG

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

20

%

UP

50

%

UP

20

%

UP

38.8

%

UP

20

%

UP

WS-V Series
WS Series

kA at 400 V AC lcu

Model Name

Arc

Fixed conductor

Movable conductor

Grid

Reaction circuit

Reaction circuit

Reaction circuit

Increased reaction force of 

Increased reaction force of 
movable conductor

movable conductor

Increased reaction force of 
movable conductor

Current C

Current

Current B

New circuit breaking technology (Expanded ISTAC)

(New model: 

105 × 165 × 68 mm)

NF250-SGW

NF250-SGV

Volume ratio

79

%

(Compared with our conventional models)

(Conventional model: 

105 × 165 × 86 mm)

Conventional models

New models

Three types

One type

For 32 to 250AF

For 32/63AF

For 125AF

For 250AF

Applicable accessories

AL

AX

AL+AX

SHT

UVT

NF50-SVFU

NV50-SVFU

NV100-CVFU

NF100-CVFU

For security and standard compliance of machines, F-type and V-
type operating handles are available for breakers with 54 mm width.

Breaking capacity of UL 489 listed circuit breakers for 480 V 
AC (UL 489)
NF125-SVU/NV125-SVU ................................30 kA
NF125-HVU/NV125-HVU ................................50 kA
NF250-SVU/NV250-SVU ................................35 kA
NF250-HVU/NV250-HVU ................................50 kA

NF125-SVU

NF250-SVU

NF250-HVU

NF125-HVU


background image

193

12

Low

-V

olt
a

ge Switc

h

g

ear/
C

ab

les

Mitsubishi Electric Magnetic Motor Starters and Magnetic Contactors MS-T Series

MS-T series is newly released.
The MS-T series is smaller than ever, enabling more compact control panel. The MS-T series is suitable for other Mitsubishi 
Electric FA equipment. In addition, the MS-T conforms to a variety of global standards, supporting the global use.
DC operated SD-T magnetic contactors (13 A frame to 32 A frame) are now available.

Features

Compact

The width of the 10 A-frame model is as small as 36 mm.
General-purpose magnetic contactor with smallest width



 in the industry.

The width of MS-T series is reduced by 32% as compared to the prior MS-N series, enabling a more compact panel.
For selection, refer to page 196.



Based on Mitsubishi Electric research as of February 2015 in the general-purpose magnetic contactor industry for 10 A-frame class.

[Unit: mm]

Standardization

Global Standard

 • Conforms to various global standards

Not only major global standards such as IEC, JIS, UL, CE, and CCC but also ship standards and other country standards are planned to be certified.

 • Conforms to various global standards



The MS-T series also provide safe isolation (mirror contact) specified in the IEC standard.



The motor starters are certified under each type name of the magnetic contactors and the thermal overload relays on the condition that the magnetic 
contactors and the thermal overload relays are used in combination.

Frame size

11 A

13 A

20 A

25 A

MS-N series

S-N10

S-N11 (Auxiliary 1-pole) S-N12 (Auxiliary 2-pole)

S-N20

S-N25

New MS-T series

S-T10

S-T12 (Auxiliary 2-pole)

S-T20

S-T25

Frame size

13 A

18 A

20 A

32 A

SD-N

SD-N11

SD-N12

None

SD-N21

None

SD-T (New model)

SD-T12

SD-T20

SD-T21

SD-T32

 • Covers provided as standard equipment

Safety improvement is achieved by the standard terminal cover.

It is not necessary for the new MS-T series to order a dedicated 

terminal cover (S-N[]CX) or a retrofit cover (UN-CW, etc.), which is 

required for the former MS-N series. (Prevention of failure to order)

The number of items in stock can be reduced.

 • The standard integrated terminal cover eliminates the need for 

additional ordering.

 • Widened range of operation coil ratings (AC operated model)

The widened range reduces the number of operation coil rating 
types from 14 (MS-N series) to 7.
The reduced number of the operation coil types enables more 
simplified customers' ordering process and the faster delivery.

 • Customers can select the operation coil more easily.

Standard

Applicable Standard

Safety Standard

International

Japan

Europe

China

U.S.A./ Canada

IEC



JIS

EN

Certification 

body

GB

EC Directive



S-T10

13

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

14

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

43

13

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

14

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

43

14

13

21

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

22

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

53

21

13

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

22

14

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

63

6/T3

2/T1

4/T2

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

13
21

22
14

43
31

32
44

75

36

-7 mm!

43

-10 mm!

43

-20 mm!

63

-12 mm!

43

13

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

14

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

14

13

21

5/L3

3/L2

1/L1

22

6/T3

4/T2

2/T1

53

22

32

31

21

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

14

44

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

13

43

63

43

-10 mm!

New

43

63

New

43

Covers are

attached as

standard.

Covers + Contactor

(Conventional product)

（MS-T series）

(Conventional product)

(MS-T series)

24 VAC

12 VAC

48 VAC
100 VAC
120 VAC
127 VAC
200 VAC
220 VAC
230 VAC
260 VAC
380 VAC
400 VAC
440 VAC
500 VAC

24

48 to 50

100

110 to 120
125 to 127

200

208 to 220
220 to 240
240 to 260
346 to 380
380 to 415
415

−440

500

24

12

12

48 to 50

100 to 110
115 to 120

127

200 to 220

220

230 to 240
260 to 280

380

400 to 440
460 to 480
500 to 550

Coil

designation

Rated voltage [V]

50 Hz

60 Hz

24 VAC

∗12 VAC type is made on order.

48 VAC
100 VAC
200 VAC
300 VAC
400 VAC
500 VAC

24

48 to 50

100 to 127
200 to 240
260 to 300
380 to 440
460 to 550

50 Hz/60 Hz

Integrated 

coil ratings 

facilitate 

selection!

Rated voltage [V]

Coil

designation


background image

194

Low

-V

olt
a

ge Switc

h

g

ear/
C

ab

les

12

Mitsubishi Electric Magnetic Motor Starters and Magnetic Contactors 
MS-N Series (32 A-Frame Class or Higher)

Environment-friendly Mitsubishi Electric MS-N series ensures safety and conforms to various global standards. Its 
compact size contributes to space-saving in a machine. The MS-N series is suitable for other Mitsubishi Electric FA 
equipment and can be used globally.

Features

Bifurcated contact adopted to achieve high contact reliability

Contact reliability is greatly improved by combining bifurcated moving contact and stationary contact.
This series responds to the various needs such as the application to safety circuit.
(The MS-T series also has bifurcated contacts.)

Mirror contact (auxiliary contact off at main contact welding)

The MS-N series meets requirements of "Control functions in the event of failure" described in EN 60204-
1 "Electrical equipment of machines", being suitable as interlock circuit contact. The MS-N series is 
applicable for category 4 safety circuit. We ensure safety for our customers.
(The MS-T series also has mirror contacts.)

Various option units

Various options including surge absorbers and additional auxiliary contact blocks are available.

Motor Circuit Breaker MMP-T Series

Motor circuit protection (against overload / phase loss / short-circuit) is achievable the MMP-T series alone.
The wire-saving, space-saving design enables downsizing of the enclosure.
The MMP-T series can be used in combination with the MS-T series (DC operated model).





The connection conductor unit for the DC operated compact model (SD-T) is to be released soon.

Features

Compliance to major standards support customers' overseas business

 • Compliance with major global standards

Not only major international standards such as IEC, JIS, UL, CE, and CCC but also other national standards are certified. This will help our 
customers expand their business in foreign countries.

 • UL60947-4-1A Type E/F is also covered.

Compliance of the device to UL's Type E/F combination can surely support export to the United States.

What is the motor circuit breaker?

The motor circuit breaker, applicable to the motor circuit, has the 
functions of a circuit breaker and a thermal overload relay in one 
unit. The motor circuit breaker provides protection against 
overload, phase loss, and short circuit.

Space-saving design for downsizing of the enclosure

Wire saving

Using a connection conductor unit (option) for connecting a 
motor circuit breaker and a contactor reduces work hours 
required for wiring.
A connection conductor unit for the high sensitivity contactor 
(SD-Q) is also available. (Model: UT-MQ12)

Standard

Applicable Standard

Safety Standard

International

Japan

Europe

China

U.S.A./ Canada

IEC

JIS

EN

Certification 

body

GB

EC Directive

S-N35CX

Main contact welding

Auxiliary
normally
closed
contact

Gap

MMP-T32

Magnetic contactor

(New MS-T series)

Motor circuit breaker

All operations 

other than motor control 

are performed alone

Disconnection

Circuit opening/

closing

Short-circuit

protection

Device

protection

Motor control

Overload protection

Motor circuit configuration 

using a circuit breaker and a 

magnetic contactor

Motor circuit configuration using a 

motor circuit breaker and a 

magnetic contactor

Thermal overload relay

Thermal overload relay

Circuit breaker

Circuit breaker

Circuit breaker

Magnetic contactor

Magnetic contactor

Magnetic contactor

Thermal overload relay

Inside the enclosure

Inside the enclosure

Example of space saving

Further downsizing 

of the enclosure

Conventional system

Motor circuit breakers system

With motor circuit breakers

Example of wire saving

Wire connection example

Conductor unit connection example

Wire

Connection 
conductor unit

Magnetic 
contactor 
coil terminal 
section

UT-MQ12 application example


background image

195

12

Low

-V

olt
a

ge Switc

h

g

ear/
C

ab

les

Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage circuit breaker

When using an earth leakage circuit breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows, independently of the PWM 
carrier frequency.

Inverter/converter unit leakage current

200 V class (Input power supply conditions: 220 V/60 Hz, power supply unbalance: within 3%)

400 V class (Input power supply conditions: 440 V/60 Hz, power supply unbalance: within 3%)



Do not change the initially set ON (enabled) position of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector in the case of the inverter with a built-in C2 filter. The Class C2 
compatibility condition is not satisfied with the EMC filter OFF. (The FR-A846-00250(7.5K)-C2 to FR-A846-00470(18.5K)-C2 are not provided with the EMC 
filter ON/OFF connector. The EMC filter is always ON.)



The inverter with a built-in C2 filter must be used in the earthed-neutral system.

 • Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression

Rated sensitivity current
I

n

10×(Ig1+Ign+Igi+Ig2+Igm)

 • Standard breaker

Rated sensitivity current
I

n

10×{Ig1+Ign+Igi+3×(Ig2+Igm)}

Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents in wire path during commercial power 
supply operation
Ign: Leakage current of inverter input side noise filter
Igm: Leakage current of motor during commercial power supply 
operation
Igi: Leakage current of inverter unit

<Example>

(a)

Install the earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) on the input side of the 
inverter.

(b)

In the 

 connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current 

is blunt against a ground fault in the inverter output side. Earthing 
(Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local 
safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 61140 
class 1 and other applicable standards)

Selection example (in the case of the above figure)



For whether to use the EMC filter or not, refer to the Instruction Manual 
(Detailed).

Inverter

FR-A800

(Standard model)

EMC filter

ON

OFF

22

1

(mA)

Inverter/

converter unit

FR-A800

(Standard model)

FR-A846-C3

(IP55 compatible model)

FR-A846-C2

(IP55 compatible model)

FR-A842

(Separated converter type)

Converter unit FR-CC2

EMC filter

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON 



—

ON

OFF

35

2

35

2

— 



2

70

2

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

(mA)

Example of leakage current of
cable path per 1 km during the
commercial power supply operation
when the CV cable is routed in
metal conduit
(200 V 60 Hz)

Leakage current example of
three-phase induction motor
during the commercial
power supply operation
(200 V 60 Hz)

Motor capacity (kW)

Cable size(mm )

2

1.5 3.7

2.2

7.5 1522

11

37

30

55

45

5.5

18.5

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.5

0.7

1.0

2.0

Leakage currents (mA)

0

2 0

4 0

6 0

8 0

100

120

Leakage currents (

m

A

)

2 3.5

5.5

8 14 22

30

38

60

80

100

150

Motor capacity (kW)

For "   " connection, the amount of leakage current is appox.1/3 of the above value.

(Three-phase three-wire delta
 connection 400 V 60 Hz)

Example of leakage current per 1 km during 
the commercial power supply operation 
when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit

Leakage current example of three-
phase induction motor during the 
commercial power supply operation

(Totally-enclosed fan-cooled
 type motor 400 V 60 Hz)

0

2 0

4 0

6 0

8 0

100

120

leakage currents (mA)

leakage currents (mA)

2 3.5

5.5

8 1422

30

38

60

80

100

150

Cable size (mm

2

)

0. 1

0. 2

0. 3

0. 5

0. 7

1. 0

2. 0

1. 5 3. 7

2. 2

7. 5 1522

11

37

30

55

45

5.5

18. 5

Noise 

filter

Inverter

ELB

Ig1

Ign

Igi

Ig2

Igm

M

5.5 mm

2 

   5 m

5.5 mm

2     

50 m

200 V

2.2 kW

φ3

Breaker designed 

for harmonic and 

surge suppression

Standard breaker

Leakage current Ig1 

(mA)

33×

5 m

=0.17

1000 m

Leakage current Ign 

(mA)

0 (without noise filter)

Leakage current Igi 

(mA)

1 (without EMC filter)
Refer to the following table for the leakage 
current of the inverter.



Leakage current Ig2 

(mA)

33×

50 m

=1.65

1000 m

Motor leakage current 

Igm (mA)

0.18

Total leakage current 

(mA)

3.00

6.66

Rated sensitivity 

current (mA)

(

Ig × 10)

30

100

Phase 
earthing
(grounding)

Phase 
earthing
(grounding)

Earthed-neutral 
system


background image

196

Low

-V

olt
a

ge Switc

h

g

ear/
C

ab

les

12

Molded case circuit breaker, magnetic contactor, cable gauge

280K or lower



Assumes the use of a Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor with the motor capacity of 200 VAC 50 Hz.



Select an MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per inverter.
(For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction Manual 
(Startup), and select an appropriate fuse or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB).)



The magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 
500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor is used for emergency stops during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using it on the motor side during commercial power supply operation, select an MC with the class 
AC-3 rated current for the rated motor current.



Cables
For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, it is the gauge of a cable with the continuous maximum permissible 
temperature of 75°C. (HIV cable (600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wire), etc.) It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 50°C or lower and the 
wiring distance of 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, it is the gauge of the cable with the continuous maximum permissible 
temperature of 90°C or higher. (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable), etc.) It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 
50°C or lower and in-enclosure wiring.

NOTE

 • When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the inverter model, and 

select cables and reactors according to the motor output.

 • When the breaker on the inverter's input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter etc. The 

cause of the trip must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker.

Vo

lt

ag

e

Motor 

output 

(kW) 



Applicable inverter 

model

(ND rating)

Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 



 

or earth leakage circuit breaker

(ELB) (NF, NV type)

Input side magnetic

contactor

 



Recommended cable gauge (mm

2

) 



R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

U, V, W

Power factor improving (AC or DC) 

reactor connection

Power factor improving 

(AC or DC) reactor 

connection

Power factor improving 

(AC or DC) reactor 

connection

Without

With

Without

With

Without

With

2

00 V

0.4

FR-A820-00046(0.4K)

5 A

5 A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

0.75

FR-A820-00077(0.75K)

10 A

10 A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

1.5

FR-A820-00105(1.5K)

15 A

15 A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

2.2

FR-A820-00167(2.2K)

20 A

15 A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

3.7

FR-A820-00250(3.7K)

30 A

30 A

S-T21

S-T10

3.5

3.5

3.5

5.5

FR-A820-00340(5.5K)

50 A

40 A

S-T35

S-T21

5.5

5.5

5.5

7.5

FR-A820-00490(7.5K)

60 A

50 A

S-T35

S-T35

14

14

8

11

FR-A820-00630(11K)

75 A

75 A

S-T35

S-T35

14

14

14

15

FR-A820-00770(15K)

125 A

100 A

S-T50

S-T50

22

22

22

18.5

FR-A820-00930(18.5K)

150 A

125 A

S-T65

S-T50

38

22

22

22

FR-A820-01250(22K)

175 A

125 A

S-T100

S-T65

38

38

38

30

FR-A820-01540(30K)

225 A

150 A

S-T100

S-T100

60

60

60

37

FR-A820-01870(37K)

250 A

200 A

S-N150

S-N125

80

60

60

45

FR-A820-02330(45K)

300 A

225 A

S-N180

S-N150

100

100

100

55

FR-A820-03160(55K)

400 A

300 A

S-N220

S-N180

100

100

100

75

FR-A820-03800(75K)

-

400 A

-

S-N300

-

125

125

90

FR-A820-04750(90K)

-

400 A

-

S-N300

-

150

150

400

 V

0.4

FR-A840-00023(0.4K)

5 A

5 A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

0.75

FR-A840-00038(0.75K)

5 A

5 A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

1.5

FR-A840-00052(1.5K)

10 A

10 A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

2.2

FR-A840-00083(2.2K)

10 A

10 A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

3.7

FR-A840-00126(3.7K)

20 A

15 A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

5.5

FR-A840-00170(5.5K)

30 A

20 A

S-T21

S-T12

2

2

2

7.5

FR-A840-00250(7.5K)

30 A

30 A

S-T21

S-T21

3.5

3.5

3.5

11

FR-A840-00310(11K)

50 A

40 A

S-T21

S-T21

5.5

5.5

5.5

15

FR-A840-00380(15K)

60 A

50 A

S-T35

S-T21

8

5.5

5.5

18.5

FR-A840-00470(18.5K)

75 A

60 A

S-T35

S-T35

14

8

8

22

FR-A840-00620(22K)

100 A

75 A

S-T35

S-T35

14

14

14

30

FR-A840-00770(30K)

125 A

100 A

S-T50

S-T50

22

22

22

37

FR-A840-00930(37K)

150 A

100 A

S-T65

S-T50

22

22

22

45

FR-A840-01160(45K)

175 A

125 A

S-T100

S-T65

38

38

38

55

FR-A840-01800(55K)

200 A

150 A

S-T100

S-T100

60

60

60

75

FR-A840-02160(75K)

-

200 A

-

S-T100

-

60

60

90

FR-A840-02600(90K)

-

225 A

-

S-N150

-

60

60

110

FR-A840-03250(110K)

-

225 A

-

S-N180

-

80

80

132

FR-A840-03610(132K)

-

350 A

-

S-N220

-

100

100

150

FR-A840-04320(160K)

-

400 A

-

S-N300

-

125

125

160

FR-A840-04320(160K)

-

400 A

-

S-N300

-

125

125

185

FR-A840-04810(185K)

-

400 A

-

S-N300

-

150

150

220

FR-A840-05470(220K)

-

500 A

-

S-N400

-

2×100

2×100

250

FR-A840-06100(250K)

-

600 A

-

S-N600

-

2×100

2×100

280

FR-A840-06830(280K)

-

600 A

-

S-N600

-

2×125

2×125

MCCB

INV

MCCB

INV

M
M


background image

197

12

Low

-V

olt
a

ge Switc

h

g

ear/
C

ab

les

315K or higher

NOTE

 • When the converter unit capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the converter unit 

model, and select cables and reactors according to the motor output.

 • When the breaker on the converter unit's input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter and the 

converter unit, etc. The cause of the trip must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker.

Voltage

Motor

output

(kW) 



Applicable

inverter  model

(ND rating)

Applicable 

converter model

Molded case circuit breaker 

(MCCB) 



or

earth leakage circuit breaker 

(ELB)

(NF, NV type)

Input-side

magnetic

contactor 



HIV cables, etc. (mm

2

) 



R/L1,

S/L2,

T/L3

P/+, N/-

U, V, W

400 V

315

FR-A842-07700(315K)

FR-CC2-H315K

700 A

S-N600

2

150

2

150

2

150

355

FR-A842-08660(355K)

FR-CC2-H355K

800 A

S-N600

2

200

2

200

2

200

400

FR-A842-09620(400K)

FR-CC2-H400K

900 A

S-N800

2

200

2

200

2

200

450

FR-A842-10940(450K)

FR-CC2-H450K

1000 A

1000 A rated 
product

2

250

2

250

2

250

500

FR-A842-12120(500K)

FR-CC2-H500K

1200 A

1000 A rated 
product

3

200

3

200

2

250



Assumes the use of a Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor with the motor capacity of 400 VAC 
50 Hz.



Select an MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per converter.
(For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction 
Manual (Hardware), and select an appropriate fuse or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB).)



The magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor 
is used for emergency stops during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during driving the motor, select an MC regarding the converter unit input side current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated 
current. When using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial-power supply operation switching using a general-purpose motor, select an MC 
regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current.



The gauge of the cable with the continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C or higher. (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene 
insulated cable), etc.). It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or lower and in-enclosure wiring.

MCCB Converter unit

MCCB Converter unit

M

M

INV

INV


background image

198

Pre
c

aution on S

e

le

ction a

nd Oper

ation

13

Precautions for use

Safety instructions

 • To use the product safely and correctly, make sure to read the 

"Instruction Manual" before the use.

 • This product has not been designed or manufactured for use with 

any equipment or system operated under life-threatening 
conditions.

 • Please contact our sales representative when considering using 

this product in special applications such as passenger mobile, 
medical, aerospace, nuclear, power or undersea relay equipment 
or system.

 • Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict 

quality control, install safety devices to prevent serious accidents 
when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the product or 
other failures are likely to cause a serious accident.

 • Do not use the inverter for a load other than the three-phase 

induction motor and the PM motor.

 • Do not connect a PM motor in the induction motor control settings 

(initial settings). Do not use an induction motor in the PM 
sensorless vector control settings. It will cause a failure.

 • When using an IPM motor (MM-CF), also refer to the precautions 

for use of the IPM motors (MM-CF).

Operation

 • When a magnetic contactor (MC) is installed on the input side, do 

not use the MC for frequent starting/stopping. Otherwise the 
inverter may be damaged.

 • When a fault occurs in the inverter, the protective function is 

acticvated to stop the inverter output. However, the motor cannot 
be immediately stopped. For machinery and equipment that 
require an immediate stop, provide a mechanical stop/holding 
mechanism.

 • Even after turning OFF the inverter/the converter unit, it takes 

time to discharge the capacitor. Before performing an inspection, 
wait 10 minutes or longer after the power supply turns OFF, then 
check the voltage using a tester, etc.

Wiring

 • Applying the power to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W) 

causes a damage to the inverter. Before power-on, thoroughly 
check the wiring and sequence to prevent incorrect wiring, etc.

 • Terminals P/+, P1, N/-, and P3 are the terminals to connect 

dedicated options or DC power supply (in the DC feeding mode). 
Do not connect any device other than the dedicated options or 
DC power supply (in the DC feeding mode). Do not short-circuit 
between the frequency setting power supply terminal 10 and the 
common terminal 5, and between terminals PC and SD.

 • To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 

10cm or more away from the power cables. Also, separate the 
main circuit cables at the input side from the main circuit cables at 
the output side.

 • After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter/the 

converter unit. Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or 
malfunction. Always keep the inverter/the converter unit clean. 
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution 
not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter/
the converter unit.

 • Set the voltage/current input switch correctly. Incorrect setting 

may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.

Power supply

 • When the inverter is 

connected near a large-
capacity power 
transformer (1000 kVA or 
more) or when a power 
factor correction capacitor 
is to be switched over, an 
excessive peak current 
may flow in the power 
input circuit, damaging the 
inverter. To prevent this, always install an optional AC reactor 
(FR-HAL).

 • If surge voltage occurs in the power supply system, this surge 

energy may flow into an inverter, and the inverter may display the 
overvoltage protection (E. OV[]) and trip. To prevent this, install an 
optional AC reactor (FR-HAL).

Installation

 • Install the inverter in a clean place with no floating oil mist, cotton 

fly, dust and dirt, etc. Alternatively, install the inverter inside the 
"sealed type" enclosure that prevents entry of suspended 
substances. For installation in the enclosure, decide the cooling 
method and the enclosure size to keep the surrounding air 
temperature of the inverter/the converter unit within the 
permissible range (for specifications, refer to page 27).

 • Some parts of the inverter/the converter unit become extremely 

hot. Do not install the inverter/the converter unit to inflammable 
materials (wood etc.).

 • Attach the inverter vertically.

Setting

 • Depending on the parameter setting, high-speed operation (up to 

590 Hz) is available. Incorrect setting will lead to a dangerous 
situation. Set the upper limit by using the upper frequency limit 
setting.

 • Setting the DC injection brake operation voltage and operating 

time larger than their initial values causes motor overheating 
(electronic thermal O/L relay trip).

Real sensorless vector control

 • Under Real sensorless vector control, always execute offline auto 

tuning before starting operations.

 • The selectable carrier frequencies under Real sensorless vector 

control are 2, 6, 10, and 14 kHz.

 • Torque control is not available in the low-speed (about 10 Hz or 

less) regenerative range, or in the low speed with the light load 
(about 5 Hz or less with about 20% or less of the rated torque). 
Select the vector control.

 • Performing pre-excitation (LX signal and X13 signal) under torque 

control may start the motor running at a low speed even when the 
start command (STF or STR) is not input. The motor may run also 
at a low speed when the speed limit value = 0 with a start 
command input. Confirm that the motor running will not cause any 
safety problem before performing pre-excitation.

 • Under torque control, do not switch between the forward rotation 

command (STF) and reverse rotation command (STR). The 
overcurrent trip (E. OC[]) or opposite rotation deceleration fault 
(E.11) occurs.

 • For FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower and FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or 

lower, if continuous operation is performed under Real sensorless 
vector control, speed fluctuation may increase at 20 Hz or lower, 
or insufficient torque may occur in a low-speed range under 1 Hz. 
In such a case, stop the inverter once and re-accelerate it.

 • If the inverter may restart during coasting under Real sensorless 

vector control, set the automatic restart after instantaneous power 
failure function to enable frequency search (Pr.57 

 "9999", 

Pr.162 = "10").

 • Under Real sensorless vector control, sufficient torque may not 

be obtained in the extremely low-speed range of about 2 Hz or 
less.

 • The approximate speed control range is as described below.

Power drive: 1:200 (2, 4, 6 poles), 0.3 Hz or more for 60 Hz 
rating.
         1:30 (8, 10 poles), 2 Hz or more for 60 Hz rating
Regenerative driving: 1:12 (2 to 10 poles), 5 Hz or more for 60 Hz 
rating

5000

5300

4000
3000
2000
1000

110165 247 330 420

550 kVA

Capacities requiring 

installation of  

AC reactor

Inverter capacity

Power supply system 

capacity

(kVA)

Precaution on Selection and Operation


background image

199

13

Pre
c

aution on S

e

le

ction a

nd Oper

ation

Waterproof and dustproof performances (IP55 
compatible model)

 • The inverter is rated with an IPX5



 waterproof rating and an 

IP5X



 dustproof rating when the operation panel (FR-DU08-01), 

the front cover, the wiring cover, and the cable glands are 
securely fixed with screws.

 • The items enclosed with the inverter such as the Instruction 

Manual or CD are not rated with the IPX5 waterproof or IP5X 
dustproof ratings.

 • Although the inverter is rated with the IPX5 waterproof and IP5X 

dustproof ratings, it is not intended for use in water. Also, the 
ratings do not guarantee protection of the inverter from needless 
submersion in water or being washed under strong running water 
such as a shower.

 • Do not pour or apply the following liquids over the inverter: water 

containing soap, detergent, or bath additives; sea water; 
swimming pool water; warm water; boiling water; etc.

 • The inverter is intended for indoor



 installation and not for 

outdoor installation. Avoid places where the inverter is subjected 
to direct sunlight, rain, sleet, snow, or freezing temperatures.

 • If the operation panel (FR-DU08-01) is not installed, if the screws 

of the operation panel are not tightened, or if the operation panel 
is damaged or deformed, the IPX5 waterproof performance and 
the IP5X dustproof performance are impaired. If any 
abnormalities are found on the operation panel, ask for an 
inspection and repair.

 • If the screws of the front cover or the wiring cover are not 

tightened, if any foreign matter (hair, sand grain, fiber, etc.) is 
stuck between the inverter and the gasket, if the gasket is 
damaged, or if the front cover or the wiring cover is damaged or 
deformed, the IPX5 waterproof performance and the IP5X 
dustproof performance are impaired. If any abnormalities are 
found on the front cover, wiring cover, or the gasket of the 
inverter, ask for an inspection and repair.

 • Cable glands are important components to maintain the 

waterproof and dustproof performances. Be sure to use cable 
glands of the recommended size and shape or equivalent. The 
standard protective bushes cannot sufficiently maintain the IPX5 
waterproof performance and the IP5X dustproof performance.

 • If a cable gland is damaged or deformed, the IPX5 waterproof 

performance and the IP5X dustproof performance are impaired. If 
any abnormalities are found on the cable glands, ask the 
manufacturer of the cable glands for an inspection and repair.

 • To maintain the waterproof and dustproof performances of the 

inverter, daily and periodic inspections are recommended 
regardless of the presence or absence of abnormalities.



IPX5 refers to protection of the inverter functions against water 
jets from any direction when about 12.5-liter water



 is injected 

from a nozzle with an inside diameter of 6.3 mm from the distance 
of about 3 m for at least 3 minutes.



IP5X refers to protection of the inverter functions and 
maintenance of safety when the inverter is put into a stirring 
device containing dust of 75 μm or smaller in diameter, stirred for 
8 hours, and then removed from the device.



Water here refers to fresh water at room temperature (5 to 35°C).



Indoor here refers to the environments that are not affected by 
climate conditions.

Precautions for use of IPM motor (MM-
CF)

For using an IPM motor (MM-CF), also check the following 
precautions.

Safety instructions

 • Do not use an IPM motor for an application where the motor is 

driven by the load and runs at a speed higher than the maximum 
motor speed.

Combination of motor and inverter

 • The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter 

capacity. (It must be 0.4 kW or higher.)
Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the 
inverter rated current will cause torque ripples, etc. and degrade 
the speed and torque accuracies.
As a reference, select the motor with the rated motor current that 
is about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.

 • Only one IPM motor can be connected to an inverter.
 • An IPM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.

Installation

 • While power is ON or for some time after power-OFF, do not 

touch the motor since the motor may be extremely hot. Touching 
these devices may cause a burn.

 • An outline dimension differs between MM-CF and a standard 

motor.

 • Do not apply the load larger than the permissible load to the 

motor shaft. Doing so may lead to breakage of the shaft.

 • Avoid places where the equipment is subjected to oil mist, dust, 

dirt, etc. for installation.
When it is inevitable to install the equipment in such a place, take 
such measures as to provide a cover to the motor.

 • Always use the motor at the specified surrounding air 

temperature. Increase in the motor temperature may cause the 
torque to decrease.

 • When installing the motor with its shaft facing upward, take 

countermeasures on the machine side to avoid infiltration of oils 
from the gear box, etc.

 • Select the appropriate cable clamping method to avoid bending 

stresses or stresses from its own weight at the cable joint section.

 • For certain applications in which the motor moves, determine the 

cable bending radius based on the necessary bending life and the 
cable type.

 • To prevent moving of the power supply cable coming out of the 

motor, take such measures as to fix the cable to the motor. 
Otherwise the cable may break.
Do not modify the connector, terminal, etc. at the end of the cable.

Earth (ground)

 • To prevent an electric shock and to stabilize the potential of 

control circuit, always earth (ground) the motor and inverter.

 • Earth (ground) the motor and inverter at one point. Connect the 

both earth (ground) terminals for the ground connection from the 
inverter side.

Wiring

 • Applying the commercial power supply to input terminals (U,V, W) 

of a motor will burn the motor. The motor must be connected with 
the output terminals (U,V, W) of the inverter.

 • Do not install a magnetic contactor at the inverter's output side.
 • An IPM motor is a motor with permanent magnets embedded 

inside. High voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the 
motor is running. Before wiring or inspection, confirm that the 
motor is stopped.
In an application, such a as fan or blower, where the motor is 
driven by the load, a low-voltage manual contactor must be 
connected at the inverter's output side, and wiring and inspection 
must be performed while the contactor is open. Otherwise an 
electric shock may be caused. The inverter power must be turned 
ON before closing the contacts of the contactor at the output side.

 • Match the input terminals (U, V, W) of the motor and the output 

terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter when connecting.

 • Keep the wiring length to 100 m or shorter when connecting an 

IPM motor .


background image

200

Pre
c

aution on S

e

le

ction a

nd Oper

ation

13

Operation

 • About 0.1 s (magnetic pole detection time) takes to start a motor 

after inputting a start signal.

 • An IPM motor is a motor with embedded permanent magnets. 

Regression voltage is generated when the motor coasts at an 
instantaneous power failure or other incidents.
The inverter's DC bus voltage increases if the motor coasts fast in 
this condition. When using the automatic restart after 
instantaneous power failure function, it is recommended to also 
use the regeneration avoidance operation to make startups 
stable.

 • The relationship between speed and frequency setting is:

Speed = 120 

×

 frequency setting value / number of motor poles

Permissible 
vibration of the 
motor

 • Bearing is subjected to 

fretting while the motor is 
stopped. Suppress the 
vibration to about the half of 
the permissible value.
Amplitude at each vibration 
condition is as shown right.

Permissible load of the shaft

 • Use the flexible coupling to decrease the shaft center gap to keep 

its radial load value within the permissible radial load of the shaft.

 • When selecting a pulley, sprocket or timing belt, keep its radial 

load value within the permissible radial load value.

 • Do not use a rigid coupling because it gives excessive bending 

force to the shaft and may break the shaft.



For "L" in the table, refer to the figure below.

Selection precautions

Inverter capacity selection

 • When operating a special motor or multiple motors in parallel by 

one inverter, select the inverter capacity so that 1.05 times of the 
total of the rated motor current becomes less than the rated 
output current of the inverter.
(Multiple PM motors cannot be connected to an inverter.)

Starting torque of the motor

 • The starting and acceleration characteristics of the motor driven 

by an inverter are restricted by the overload current rating of the 
inverter. In general, the torque characteristic has small value 
compared to when the motor is started by a commercial power 
supply. When a large starting torque is required, and torque boost 
adjustment, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real 
sensorless vector control, and vector control cannot generate the 
sufficient torque, select the HD rating, or increase both the motor 
and inverter capacities.

Acceleration/deceleration time

 • The motor acceleration/deceleration time is decided by the torque 

generated by the motor, load torque, and moment of inertia (J) of 
load.

 • The required time may increase when the torque limit function or 

stall prevention function operates during acceleration/
deceleration. In such a case, set the acceleration/decelerations 
time longer.

 • To shorten the acceleration/deceleration time, increase the torque 

boost value (too large setting value may activate the stall 
prevention function, resulting in longer acceleration time at 
starting on the contrary). Alternatively, use Advanced magnetic 
flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or vector 
control, or select the larger inverter and motor capacities. To 
shorten the deceleration time, use an addition brake unit (FR-
BU2) to absorb braking energy, power regeneration common 
converter (FR-CV), or power supply regeneration unit (MT-RC), 
etc.

Power transfer mechanisms 

(reduction gear, belt, 

chain, etc.)

 • Caution is required for the low-speed continuous operation of the 

motor with an oil lubricated gear box, transmission, reduction 
gear, etc. in the power transfer mechanism. Such an operation 
may degrade the oil lubrication and cause seizing. On the other 
hand, the high-speed operation at more than 60 Hz may cause 
problems with the noise of the power transfer mechanism, life, or 
insufficient strength due to centrifugal force, etc. Fully take 
necessary precautions.

Instructions for overload operation

 • When performing frequent starts/stops by the inverter, rise/fall in 

the temperature of the transistor element of the inverter will 
repeat due to a repeated flow of large current, shortening the life 
from thermal fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is related to the 
amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing current at 
locked condition, starting current, etc. Reducing current may 
extend the service life but may also cause torque shortage, which 
leads to a start failure. Adding a margin to the current can 
eliminate such a condition. For an induction motor, use an 
inverter of a higher capacity (up to two ranks for the ND rating). 
For an IPM motor, use an inverter and IPM motor of higher 
capacities.

Speed (r/min) 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2000 2400 2700 3000

MM-CF (8 poles) 

frequency 

setting (Hz)

20

40

60

80

100

120

133.33 160

180

200

Motor

L (mm)



Permissible 

radial load (N)

Permissible 

thrust load (N)

MM-CF52(C)(B) to152(C)(B)

55

980

490

MM-CF202(C)(B) to352(C)(B)
MM-CF502(C) to702(C)

79

2058

980

Vibration amplitude

(double amplitude)

 (μm)

100

80

60

50

40

30

20

500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500

Rotation speed (r/min)

200

Radial load 

Thrust load 

L

L: Distance from the flange mounting 

surface to the center of the load 


background image

201

13

Pre
c

aution on S

e

le

ction a

nd Oper

ation

Precautions on peripheral device 
selection

Selection and installation of molded case 
circuit breaker

Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power 
receiving side to protect the wiring at the inverter/the converter 
unit input side. Select an MCCB according to the inverter power 
supply side power factor, which depends on the power supply 
voltage, output frequency and load. Refer to page 196. Especially 
for a completely electromagnetic MCCB, a slightly large capacity 
must be selected since its operation characteristic varies with 
harmonic currents. (Check the reference material of the 
applicable breaker.) As an earth leakage circuit breaker, use the 
Mitsubishi Electric earth leakage circuit breaker designed for 
harmonics and surge suppression. (Refer to page 195.)
When installing a molded case circuit breaker on the inverter 
output side, contact the manufacturer of each product for 
selection.

Handling of the input side magnetic contactor 
(MC)

For the operation using external terminals (using terminal STF or 
STR), install the input-side magnetic contactor to prevent 
accidents due to automatic restart when the power is restored 
after power failures such as an instantaneous power failure, or for 
safety during maintenance works. Do not use this magnetic 
contactor for frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. (The 
switching life of the converter part is about 1 million times.) In the 
operation by parameter unit, the automatic restart after power 
restoration is not performed and the magnetic contactor cannot 
be used to start the motor. The input-side magnetic contactor can 
stop the motor. However, the regenerative brake of the inverter 
does not operate, and the motor coasts to a stop.

Handling of the output side magnetic contactor 
(MC)

 • Switch the MC between the inverter and motor only when both 

the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the magnetic contactor 
is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent 
protection of the inverter and such will activate. When an MC is 
provided to switch to a commercial power supply, for example, it 
is recommended to use the commercial power supply-inverter 
switchover function Pr.135 to Pr.139.

 • Do not install a magnetic contactor at the inverter's output side 

when using a PM motor.

Installation of thermal relay

In order to protect the motor from overheating, the inverter has an 
electronic thermal O/L relay. However, install an external thermal 
overcurrent relay (OCR) between the inverter and motors to 
operate several motors or a multi-pole motor with one inverter. In 
this case, set 0 A to the electronic thermal O/L relay setting of the 
inverter. For the external thermal overcurrent relay, determine the 
setting value in consideration of the current indicated on the 
motor's rating plate and the line-to-line leakage current. (Refer to 
page 202.)
Self cooling ability of a motor reduces in the low-speed operation. 
Installation of a thermal protector or a use of a motor with built-in 
thermistor is recommended.

Output side measuring instrument

When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is long, especially for 
the 400 V class, small-capacity models, the meters and CTs may 
generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, 
choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the 
current rating.
When measuring and displaying the output voltage and output 
current of the inverter, use of terminals AM and 5 output function 
of the inverter is recommended.

Disuse of power factor improving capacitor 
(power factor correction capacitor)

The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on 
the inverter output side may be overheated or damaged by the 
harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an 
excessive current flows in the inverter to activate overcurrent 
protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor. To 
improve the power factor, use an AC reactor (on page 176), a 
DC reactor (on page 177), or a high power factor converter (on 
page 185).

Connection between the converter unit and the 
inverter

 • Perform wiring so that the commands sent from the converter unit 

are transmitted to the inverter without fail. Incorrect connection 
may damage the converter unit and the inverter.

 • For the wiring length, refer to the table below.

 • For the cable gauge of the cable across the main circuit terminals 

P/+ and N/- (P and P, N and N), refer to page 197.

Electrical corrosion of the bearing

When a motor is driven by the inverter, axial voltage is 
generated on the motor shaft, which may cause electrical 
corrosion of the bearing in rare cases depending on the wiring, 
load, operating conditions of the motor or specific inverter 
settings (high carrier frequency and EMC filter ON).
Contact your sales representative to take appropriate 
countermeasures for the motor.
The following shows examples of countermeasures for the 
inverter.
 • Decrease the carrier frequency.
 • Turn OFF the EMC filter.
 • Provide a common mode choke on the output side of the 

inverter.



(This is effective regardless of the EMC filter ON/OFF 
connector setting.)



Recommended common mode choke: FT-3KM F series 
FINEMET

®

 common mode choke cores manufactured by Hitachi 

Metals, Ltd.
FINEMET is a registered trademark of Hitachi Metals, Ltd.

Total wiring 

length

Across terminals P and P and 

terminals N and N

50 m or lower

Other signal cables

30 m or lower


background image

202

Pre
c

aution on S

e

le

ction a

nd Oper

ation

13

Cable gauge and wiring distance

If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, 
during the output of a low frequency in particular, use a large 
cable gauge for the main circuit cable to suppress the voltage 
drop to 2% or less. (The table on page 196 indicates a selection 
example for the wiring length of 20 m.)
Especially for long-distance wiring or wiring with shielded 
cables, the inverter may be affected by a charging current 
caused by stray capacitances of the wiring, leading to an 
incorrect activation of the overcurrent protective function. Refer 
to the maximum wiring length shown in the following table.
When multiple motors are connected, use the total wiring length 
shown in the table or shorter (100 m or shorter under vector 
control and PM sensorless vector control. )

When the operation panel is installed away from the inverter and 
when the parameter unit is connected, use a recommended 
connection cable.
For the remote operation using analog signals, keep the 
distance between the remote speed setter and the inverter to 30 
m or less. Also, to prevent induction from other devices, keep 
the wiring away from the power circuits (main circuit and relay 
sequential circuit).
When the frequency setting is performed using the external 
potentiometer, not using the parameter unit, use a shielded or 
twisted cable as shown in the figure below. Connect the shield 
cable to terminal 5, not to the earth (ground).

Earth (ground)

When the inverter is set for the low acoustic noise operation, the 
leakage current increases compared to in the normal operation 
due to the high speed switching operation. Always earth 
(ground) the inverter, the converter unit, and the motor. Also, 
always use the earth (ground) terminal of the inverter/the 
converter unit for earthing (grounding). (Do not use a case or 
chassis.)

Electromagnetic interference (EMI)

For the low acoustic noise operation with high carrier frequency, 
electromagnetic noise tends to increase. Take countermeasures 
by referring to the following examples. Depending on an 
installation condition, noise may affect the inverter also in the 
normal operation (initial status).
 • Decrease the carrier frequency (Pr.72) setting to lower the 

EMI level.

 • For countermeasures against the noise in AM radio 

broadcasting or malfunction of sensors, turn ON the EMC 
filter. (For the switching method, refer to the Instruction 
Manual.)

 • For effective reduction of induction noise from the power 

cable of the inverter/the converter unit, secure the distance of 
30 cm (at least 10 cm) from the power line and use a shielded 
twisted pair cable for the signal cable. Do not earth (ground) 
the shield, and connect the shield to a common terminal by 
itself.

EMI measure example

leakage current

Capacitances exist between the inverter/the converter unit I/O 
cables and other cables or the earth, and within the motor, 
through which a leakage current flows. Since its value depends 
on the static capacitances, carrier frequency, etc., low acoustic 
noise operation at the increased carrier frequency of the inverter 
will increase the leakage current. Therefore, take the following 
countermeasures. Select the earth leakage circuit breaker 
according to its rated sensitivity current, independently of the 
carrier frequency setting.

To-earth (ground) leakage currents

Line-to-line leakage current

Pr.72 setting

(carrier frequency)

FR-A820-

00046(0.4K),

FR-A840-

00023(0.4K)

FR-A820-

00077(0.75K),

FR-A840-

00038(0.75K)

FR-A820-00105(1.5K) 

or higher, FR-A840-

00052(1.5K) or higher

2 (2 kHz) or lower 300 m

500 m

500 m

3 (3 kHz) or higher 200 m

300 m

500 m

Twisted cable

Frequency setting
potentiometer

Shielded cable

Frequency setting
potentiometer

 

 

 

(3)

(2)

(1)

10 (10E)

2

5

(3)

(1)

(2)

10 (10E)

2

5

Type

Influence and countermeasure

Influence and 

countermeasure

• Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter/the 

converter unit's own line but also into the other lines 
through the earthing (grounding) cable, etc. These 
leakage currents may operate earth leakage circuit 
breakers and earth leakage relays unnecessarily.

Countermeasure
• If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the 

Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting.
However, the motor noise increases. Selecting Pr.240 
Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound 
inoffensive.

• By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for 

harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter's own 
line and other line, operation can be performed with the 
carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).

Transmission 

path

Type

Influence and countermeasure

Influence and 

countermeasure

• Line-to-line leakage current flows through the capacitance 

between the inverter/the converter unit output lines.

• Harmonic component of the leaked current may cause 

unnecessary operation of an external thermal relay. Long 
wiring length (50 m or longer) for the 400V class small 
capacity models (7.5 kW or lower) will increase the rate of 
leakage current against the rated motor current. In such a 
case, an unnecessary operation of the external thermal 
relay may be more liable to occur.

Countermeasure
• Use Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay.
• If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.72 

PWM frequency selection setting.
However, the motor noise increases. Selecting Pr.240 
Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound 
inoffensive.
To protect motor securely without being subject to the 
influence of the line-to-line leakage current, direct 
detection of the motor temperature using a temperature 
sensor is recommended.

Transmission 

path

Inverter

Sensor

Use a twisted pair shielded cable

Enclosure

Decrease carrier frequency

Motor

M

FR-
BLF

Do not earth (ground) control cable.

Inverter 
power 
supply

Install filter (FR-BLF, 
FR-BSF01) on 
inverter output side.

Separate inverter and 
power line by more than 
30 cm (at least 10 cm) 
from sensor circuit.

Control 
power 
supply

Do not earth (ground) 
enclosure directly.

Power 

supply for 

sensor

Use 4-core cable for motor 
power cable and use one cable 
as earth (ground) cable.  

Do not earth (ground) shield but 
connect it to signal common cable.

EMC 

filter

Power 

supply

Leakage 

breaker

Leakage 

breaker

NV1

NV2

Inverter

Motor

Motor

C

C

C

Power
supply

Thermal relay

Line-to-line static 
capacitances

MCCB

MC

Line-to-line leakage currents path

Motor

Inverter/
converter

M


background image

203

13

Pre
c

aution on S

e

le

ction a

nd Oper

ation

Harmonic Suppression Guidelines

Inverters have a converter section (rectifier circuit) and generate a 
harmonic current.
Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point 
via a power transformer. The Harmonic Suppression Guidelines was 
established to protect other consumers from these outgoing 
harmonic currents.
The three-phase 200 V input specifications 3.7 kW or lower were 
previously covered by the "Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for 
Household Appliances and General-purpose Products" and other 
models were covered by the "Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for 
Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage". 
However, the general-purpose inverter has been excluded from the 
target products covered by the "Harmonic Suppression Guidelines 
for Household Appliances and General-purpose Products" in 
January 2004 and the "Harmonic Suppression Guideline for 
Household Appliances and General-purpose Products" was 
repealed on September 6, 2004.
All capacity and all models of general-purpose inverter used by 
specific consumers are now covered by the "Harmonic Suppression 
Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special 
High Voltage".
 • "Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive 

High Voltage or Special High Voltage”
This guideline sets the maximum values of outgoing harmonic currents 
generated from a high-voltage or specially high-voltage receiving 
consumer who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. 
If any of the maximum values is exceeded, this guideline requires that 
consumer to take certain suppression measures.

The users who are not subjected to the above guidelines do not 
need follow the guidelines, but the users are recommended to 
connect a DC reactor and an AC reactor as usual.
Compliance with the "Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for 
Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage"

For compliance to the "Harmonic Suppression Guideline of the 
General-purpose Inverter (Input Current of 20A or Less) for 
Consumers Other Than Specific Consumers" published by JEMA

Calculation of outgoing harmonic current

 • Harmonic contents (values when the fundamental wave current is 

100%)

 • Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents when driven by 

inverter

 • Conversion factors

Input 

power

Target 

capacity

Countermeasure

Three-

phase 

200 V

All capacities

Confirm the compliance with the "Harmonic 
Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who 
Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage" 
published in September 1994 by the Ministry of 
International Trade and Industry (the present 
Japanese Ministry of Economy, Trade and 
Industry). Take countermeasures if required. Use 
the following materials as reference to calculate 
the power supply harmonics.
Reference materials
• "Harmonic Suppression Measures of the 

General-purpose Inverter"
January 2004, Japan Electrical Manufacturers' 
Association

• "Calculation Method of Harmonic Current of the 

General-purpose Inverter Used by Specific 
Consumers"
JEM-TR201 (Revised in December 2003), Japan 
Electrical Manufacturers' Association

Three-

phase 

400 V

Input 

power

Target 

capacity

Measures

Three-

phase

200 V

3.7 kW or 
lower

Connect the AC reactor or DC reactor 
recommended in the Catalogs and Instruction 
Manuals.
Reference materials
• "Harmonic Suppression Guideline of the 

General-purpose Inverter (Input Current of 
20A or Less)"
JEM-TR226 (Published in December 2003), 
Japan Electrical Manufacturers' Association

Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted 
from received power voltage) × operation ratio × harmonic content
• Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor × operation time 

ratio during 30 minutes

• Harmonic content: Found in the table below.

Reactor

5th

7th

11th

13th

17th

19th

23rd

25th

Not used

65

41

8.5

7.7

4.3

3.1

2.6

1.8

Used (AC side)

38

14.5

7.4

3.4

3.2

1.9

1.7

1.3

Used (DC side)

30

13

8.4

5.0

4.7

3.2

3.0

2.2

Used (AC, DC sides) 28

9.1

7.2

4.1

3.2

2.4

1.6

1.4

Applied

motor

(kW)

Fundamental 
wave current 

 

(A)

Fundamental 

wave current 

converted 

from 6.6 kV 

(mA)

Rated

capacity

(kVA)

Outgoing harmonic current converted 

from 6.6 kV (mA)

(No reactor, 100% operation ratio)

200 V 400 V

5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th

0.4 1.61 0.81 49

0.57

31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882

0.75 2.74 1.37 83

0.97

53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494

1.5 5.50 2.75 167

1.95

108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006

2.2 7.93 3.96 240

2.81

156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320

3.7 13.0 6.50 394

4.61

257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092

5.5 19.1 9.55 579

6.77

376.1 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42

7.5 25.6 12.8 776

9.07

504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97

11

36.9 18.5 1121

13.1

728.7 459.6 95.29 86.32 48.20 34.75 29.15 20.18

15

49.8 24.9 1509

17.6

980.9 618.7 128.3 116.2 64.89 46.78 39.24 27.16

18.5 61.4 30.7 1860

21.8

1209 762.6 158.1 143.2 79.98 57.66 48.36 33.48

22

73.1 36.6 2220

25.9

1443 910.2 188.7 170.9 95.46 68.82 57.72 39.96

30

98.0 49.0 2970

34.7

1931 1218 252.5 228.7 127.7 92.07 77.22 53.46

37

121 60.4 3660

42.8

2379 1501 311.1 281.8 157.4 113.5 95.16 65.88

45

147 73.5 4450

52.1

2893 1825 378.3 342.7 191.4 138.0 115.7 80.10

55

180 89.9 5450

63.7

3543 2235 463.3 419.7 234.4 169.0 141.7 98.10

Applied

motor

(kW)

Fundamental 

wave current 

(A)

Fundamental 

wave current 

converted 

from 6.6 kV 

(mA)

Rated

capacity

(kVA)

Outgoing harmonic current converted 

from 6.6 kV (mA)

(With a DC reactor, 100% operation ratio)

200 V 400 V

5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th

75

245 123 7455

87.2

2237 969 626 373 350 239 224 164

90

293 147 8909

104

2673 1158 748 445 419 285 267 196

110 357 179 10848

127

3254 1410 911 542 510 347 325 239

132 -

216 13091

153

3927 1702 1100 655 615 419 393 288

160 -

258 15636

183

4691 2033 1313 782 735 500 469 344

220 -

355 21515

252

6455 2797 1807 1076 1011 688 645 473

250 -

403 24424

286

7327 3175 2052 1221 1148 782 733 537

280 -

450 27273

319

8182 3545 2291 1364 1282 873 818 600

315 -

506 30667

359

9200 3987 2576 1533 1441 981 920 675

355 -

571 34606

405

10382 4499 2907 1730 1627 1107 1038 761

400 -

643 38970

456

11691 5066 3274 1949 1832 1247 1169 857

450 -

723 43818

512

13146 5696 3681 2191 2060 1402 1315 964

500 -

804 48727

570

14618 6335 4093 2436 2290 1559 1462 1072

560 -

900 54545

638

16364 7091 4582 2727 2564 1746 1636 1200

630 -

1013 61394

718

18418 7981 5157 3070 2886 1965 1842 1351

Classification

Circuit type

Conversion 

coefficient Ki

3

Three-phase bridge
(Capacitor 
smoothing)

Without reactor

K31 = 3.4

With reactor (AC side) K32 = 1.8
With reactor (DC side) K33 = 1.8
With reactors (AC, DC 
sides)

K34 = 1.4

5

Self-excitation 
three-phase bridge

When a high power 
factor converter is 
used

K5 = 0


background image

204

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

14

List of applicable inverter models by rating (motor capacity 

 inverter model)

For the combinations within the thick boarders, always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.

200 V class (model: FR-A820-[])

400 V class (model: FR-A840-[])

400 V class (model: FR-A842-[])



Indicates the maximum capacity applicable with the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.



The power factor may be slightly lower.



The FR-HEL-110K supports the 200 V class 132 kW motor.

Overload current rating

Motor 

capacity 

(kW)



DC reactor

SLD (superlight load)

LD (light load)

ND (normal load, initial value)

HD (heavy load)

FR-HEL-[]

Model

Rated 

current (A)

Model

Rated 

current (A)

Model

Rated 

current (A)

Model

Rated 

current (A)

0.2

0.4K



0.4K

00046

4.6

0.4K

00046

4.2

0.4K

00046

3

0.4K

00046

1.5

0.4

0.4K

0.75K

00077

3

0.75

0.75K

0.75K

00077

5

1.5K

00105

5

1.5

1.5K

0.75K

00077

7.7

0.75K

00077

7

1.5K

00105

8

2.2K

00167

8

2.2

2.2K

1.5K

00105

10.5

1.5K

00105

9.6

2.2K

00167

11

3.7K

00250

11

3.7

3.7K

2.2K

00167

16.7

2.2K

00167

15.2

3.7K

00250

17.5

5.5K

00340

17.5

5.5

5.5K

3.7K

00250

25

3.7K

00250

23

5.5K

00340

24

7.5K

00490

24

7.5

7.5K

5.5K

00340

34

5.5K

00340

31

7.5K

00490

33

11K

00630

33

11

11K

7.5K

00490

49

7.5K

00490

45

11K

00630

46

15K

00770

46

15

15K

11K

00630

63

11K

00630

58

15K

00770

61

18.5K

00930

61

18.5

18.5K

15K

00770

77

15K

00770

70.5

18.5K

00930

76

22K

01250

76

22

22K

18.5K

00930

93

18.5K

00930

85

22K

01250

90

30K

01540

90

30

30K

22K

01250

125

22K

01250

114

30K

01540

115

37K

01870

115

37

37K

30K

01540

154

30K

01540

140

37K

01870

145

45K

02330

145

45

45K

37K

01870

187

37K

01870

170

45K

02330

175

55K

03160

175

55

55K

45K

02330

233

45K

02330

212

55K

03160

215

75K

03800

215

75

75K

55K

03160

316

55K

03160

288

75K

03800

288

90K

04750

288

90

90K

75K

03800

380

75K

03800

346

90K

04750

346

-

-

-

110

110K

90K

04750

432

-

-

-

-

-

-

132

110K



90K

04750

475

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Motor 

capacity 

(kW)



DC reactor

SLD (superlight load)

LD (light load)

ND (normal load, initial value)

HD (heavy load)

FR-HEL-[]

Model

Rated 

current (A)

Model

Rated 

current (A)

Model

Rated 

current (A)

Model

Rated 

current (A)

0.2

H0.4K



0.4K

00023

2.3

0.4K

00023

2.1

0.4K

00023

1.5

0.4K

00023

0.8

0.4

H0.4K

0.75K

00038

1.5

0.75

H0.75K

0.75K

00038

2.5

1.5K

00052

2.5

1.5

H1.5K

0.75K

00038

3.8

0.75K

00038

3.5

1.5K

00052

4

2.2K

00083

4

2.2

H2.2K

1.5K

00052

5.2

1.5K

00052

4.8

2.2K

00083

6

3.7K

00126

6

3.7

H3.7K

2.2K

00083

8.3

2.2K

00083

7.6

3.7K

00126

9

5.5K

00170

9

5.5

H5.5K

3.7K

00126

12.6

3.7K

00126

11.5

5.5K

00170

12

7.5K

00250

12

7.5

H7.5K

5.5K

00170

17

5.5K

00170

16

7.5K

00250

17

11K

00310

17

11

H11K

7.5K

00250

25

7.5K

00250

23

11K

00310

23

15K

00380

23

15

H15K

11K

00310

31

11K

00310

29

15K

00380

31

18.5K

00470

31

18.5

H18.5K

15K

00380

38

15K

00380

35

18.5K

00470

38

22K

00620

38

22

H22K

18.5K

00470

47

18.5K

00470

43

22K

00620

44

30K

00770

44

30

H30K

22K

00620

62

22K

00620

57

30K

00770

57

37K

00930

57

37

H37K

30K

00770

77

30K

00770

70

37K

00930

71

45K

01160

71

45

H45K

37K

00930

93

37K

00930

85

45K

01160

86

55K

01800

86

55

H55K

45K

01160

116

45K

01160

106

55K

01800

110

75K

02160

110

75

H75K

55K

01800

180

55K

01800

144

75K

02160

144

90K

02600

144

90

H90K

75K

02160

180

90K

02600

180

110K

03250

180

110

H110K

75K

02160

216

90K

02600

216

110K

03250

216

132K

03610

216

132

H132K

90K

02600

260

110K

03250

260

132K

03610

260

160K

04320

260

160

H160K

110K

03250

325

132K

03610

325

160K

04320

325

185K

04810

325

185

H185K

132K

03610

361

160K

04320

361

185K

04810

361

220K

05470

361

220

H220K

160K

04320

432

185K

04810

432

220K

05470

432

250K

06100

432

250

H250K

185K

04810

481

220K

05470

481

250K

06100

481

280K

06830

481

280

H280K

220K

05470

547

250K

06100

547

280K

06830

547

-

-

-

315

H315K

250K

06100

610

280K

06830

610

-

-

-

-

-

-

355

H355K

280K

06830

683

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Motor 

capacity 

(kW)



Converter 

unit

SLD (superlight load)

LD (light load)

ND (normal load, initial value)

HD (heavy load)

FR-CC2-[]

Model

Rated 

current (A)

Model

Rated 

current (A)

Model

Rated 

current (A)

Model

Rated 

current (A)

280

H315K

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

315K

07700

547

315

H315K

-

-

-

-

-

-

315K

07700

610

355K

08660

610

355

H355K

-

-

-

315K

07700

683

355K

08660

683

400K

09620

683

400

H400K

315K

07700

770

355K

08660

770

400K

09620

770

450K

10940

770

450

H450K

355K

08660

866

400K

09620

866

450K

10940

866

500K

12120

866

500

H500K

400K

09620

962

450K

10940

962

500K

12120

962

-

-

-

560

H560K

450K

10940

1094

500K

12120

1094

-

-

-

-

-

-

630

H630K

500K

12120

1212

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

SLD

110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40

C

LD

120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50

C

ND

150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50

C

HD

200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50

C

Compatible Motors


background image

205

14

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

High-performance energy-saving motor superline premium series SF-PR 

We have released the superline premium series SF-PR models 
compatible with the Top Runner Standard in Japan, which is 
equivalent with IE3 premium efficiency for three-phase motors, and 
with the Energy Independence and Security Act (EISA) in the United 
States.
The SF-PR has achieved the efficiency class IE3 with the same 
dimensions as those of conventional models using our unique 
technology of the steel plate frame and new core materials.
It maintains interchangeability with our standard efficiency motor SF-
JR and easy replacement becomes possible.
By adopting a high-efficiency motor, energy savings in plant facilities 
and reduction of electricity consumption are expected, as well as the 
effects of recovering the investment cost. 

One motor conforms to the power supply in 
Japan and the United States.

 • The SF-PR series conform to the Top Runner Standard of the "Act 

on the Rational Use of Energy (energy saving law)" started on 
April 1, 2015.

 • The 230 V 60 Hz motor also conforms to the Energy 

Independence and Security Act (EISA).

Interchangeable installation size

 • Replacement can be smoothly 

performed because the installation 
size (frame number) is compatible 
with our standard efficiency motor 
SF-JR series.

 • It is possible to use a power 

distribution control equipment 
(thermal relay and breaker), which 
is the same as a conventional 
model.

 For the frame number 180 LD or higher and some models of the 6-pole product, 

the total length or diametrical dimension is greatly different.

 The frame number is different from 1.5 kW6P (112M), 2.2 kW6P(132S) of the 

SF-HR models.

 When replacing the SF-JR to the SF-PR, it is required to consider upgrading the 

contactor to secure the same electric durability as using the SF-JR because the 
electric durability of the contactor may reduce by about 30%. Besides, when 
replacing the SF-JR to the SF-PR, the existing thermal relay may trip depending 
on the operating conditions (long starting time ). As a countermeasure, consider 
"Adjusting the heater set value of the thermal" or "Adopting the thermal with a 
saturated reactor ", etc.

 If the breaker NF400-SW manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric is used with the 55 

kW motor, change the breaker. (Change the rated current of the breaker NF400-
SW from 300 A to 350 A.)

Introduction effects of the superline premium 
series SF-PR

The SF-PR motor conforms to the Top Runner Standard (IE3 
equivalent), which remarkably reduces its operation cost (electricity 
charges) and greatly contributes minimization of TCO (Total Cost 
Ownership).
 • Trial calculation example of an annual saved sum of money ( at 

upgrading the motor from energy-efficiency class IE1 to IE3) 
Motor with 4-poles 200 V50 Hz

 • Economic efficiency on an energy saving effect

230 V
60 Hz

200/200/220 V
50/ 60/ 60 Hz

50

60

60

200

V

Hz

200

220

230

60

In Japan

In the United States

∗ For the 200 V 
   class

Replaceable in the 
same space

Replaceable in the 
same space

Excellent interchangeability 
with the same shaft diameter 
and the same shaft height!

SF-PR

SF-PR

Output (kW)

0.75 1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

0

20000

40000

60000

80000

Annual saved sum of money (yen)

The annual saved sum 
of money is calculated in 
the following conditions.

(When adjusted to be the same load.)

Annual operation time
4,380 h (12 h/day, 365 days)
Electricity rate
16 yen/kWh
Load ratio
75%

Type : 11 kW 4P 200 V 50 Hz 75% load
Units : 10 units
Operation time : 12 h/day 365 day/year
Electricity rate: 16 yen/kWh

＜Condition＞

The point of the energy saving effect

Number of years of use

Breakeven point

Recovery period for 
the amount of a price 
increase

Cost

benefits

Existing motor

SF

ｰPR

(Premium Efficiency)

<Calculation formula>

When replacing our standard motor SF-JR with the SF-PR on the ventilation 
fan in plant

Reduction in the electricity charges 
through the energy saving enables 
the investment cost to be 
recovered, and after that, the 
energy saving effect will bring 
some profit through power saving.
The annual saved sum of money 
can be calculated according to the 
following formula. The longer 
operation time in an application, 
the more money can be saved.

Reduced cost of 

about 350,000 yen 

per year

Trial calculation results in replacing the SF-JR with the SF-PR with improved efficiency by 5% 
under the same conditions of the load factor, operation time, and electricity charges, etc.

Cost (Product + Electricity rate)

Output

(kW)

Efficiency of 

current motor

(%)

Efficiency of 

SF-PR model

(%)

Number 

of 

motors

Number 

of

 hours 

of use

(h/day)

Number 

of 

days of 

operation

(day/year)

Electricity 

rate

(yen/kWh)


background image

206

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

14

Lineup

Japan and 
the U.S.A.

●Model

●Available models

PR

Symbol 

Premium series
Steel plate frame

Series

F

Symbol

Totally enclosed 
fan-cooled

Enclosure type

S

Symbol

Superline series

Structure

S F - P R V O B - K R

Symbol

None Without brake

B

With brake

None

Symbol

Foot mounting
type

V

Vertical type

Installation

F

Flange type

None

Symbol

Indoor type (IP44)

O

Outdoor type (IP44)

Classification

P

Dust-proof and 
waterproof type(IP55)

With or without

brake

Model

Number of poles

Type

SF-PR

2P

4P

6P

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

18.5

22
30
37
45
55

SF-PRV

Totally-enclosed fan-cooled type

2P

4P

6P

SF-PRF

Foot mounting type

Vertical type

Flange type

2P

4P

6P

SF-PRO

Outdoor type

• The vertical type and the flange 

type are also available for the 

outdoor type and the dustproof/

waterproof type.

2P

4P

6P

SF-PRP

Dustproof/waterproof type

2P

4P

6P

Output

(kW)

●: Available model

None

Symbol Country code

Korea

Europe

KR

US UL standard

UL

EU

China

CN


background image

207

14

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

The SF-PR best matches Mitsubishi Electric inverters

This enables a constant-torque operation in the low-speed range. (expanding the constant-torque 
range)

 • Combining with the standard motor SF-PR enables a constant-torque operation in the low-speed range.
 • The SF-PR has superior performance to the SF-HRCA.
 • The 400 V class motors are insulation-enhanced motors as standard.

60 Hz torque reference indicates that the rated motor torque is 100% during 60 Hz operation.

Motor torque

The following shows torque characteristics of the high-performance, energy-saving motor (SF-PR, 4-pole) in combination with an inverter with 
the ND or HD rating. The overload capacity decreases for the LD or SLD rating. Observe the specified range of the inverter.

Maximum short-time torque

Continuous torque 

Combination with Advanced magnetic flux 
vector control

 • Enables a constant-torque operation down to 0.5 Hz in a super 

low-speed range.
Expanding the constant-torque continuous operation range 
enables 0.5 to 60 Hz (1: 120) operation.

Combination with V/F control

 • Enables a constant-torque operation down to 6 Hz in a low-speed 

range.
Expanding the constant-torque continuous operation range 
enables 6 to 60 Hz (1: 10) operation.

Real sensorless vector control

V/F control

3

0.5

6

60

45

50

100

120

220, 230/440, 460 V

200 V/400 V

Frequency

(Hz)

60 Hz reference

SF-PR model

SF-HRCA model(High-efficiency constant-torque motor)

SF-HR model(High-efficiency motor)

Significantly 

expanded

Continuous

operation 

torque (%)

6

20

60

45

50

100

120

220, 230/440, 460 V

200 V/400 V

SF-HRCA

Improved

Frequency

(Hz)

60 Hz reference

SF-PR model

Continuous

operation

torque (%)

150

100

200

70

(56)

63

(50)

0

0.3

60

120

220 V

200 V

Output torque

 (

%

)

The values in parentheses are applicable to 1.5 kW and 2.2 kW.

Output frequency (Hz)

3.7 kW or lower

5.5 kW or higher

150

100

70

(56)

63

(50)

0

6

60

120

220, 230/440, 460 V

200/400 V

The values in parentheses are applicable to 2.2 kW.

Output frequency (Hz)

Output torque

 (

%

)

Real sensorless vector control

V/F control

100

50

45

0

0.3

60

120

220, 230/440, 460 V

200/400 V

Output frequency (Hz)

Output torque

 (

%

)

100

50

45

0

6

60

120

220, 230/440, 460 V

200/400 V

Output frequency (Hz)

Output torque

 (

%

)


background image

208

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

14

Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor with encoder superline 
premium series SF-PR-SC

Fast-response / high-accuracy vector control

Fast-response and high-accuracy vector control can be performed 
by the use in combination with the general-purpose FR-A800 
inverter, plug-in option (FR-A8AP/A8AL), and control terminal option 
(FR-A8TP).

Wide range of constant-torque characteristics

By selecting vector control, constant-torque continuous operation 
can be performed in the range from 0 Hz to 60 Hz (zero speed 
control and servo lock are available).

Energy saving / CO

2

 emission reduction

The premium efficiency motor with encoder (compatible with IE3) 
meets the Top Runner Standard in Japan and the Energy 
Independence and Security Act (EISA) in the United States.

Compatibility with the inverter

The motor is used in combination with an inverter of the same 
capacity.

Improved environmental resistance

 • Environmental resistance was improved due to the change from 

the fan cooled type to the blower cooled type. The IP55 
compatible motor with an encoder is now also available.

 • With the wire-saving design, improved reliability can be obtained.
 • Anti-corrosive coating (type 3) is also available.

Motor torque

 • Excellent speed accuracy

Speed fluctuation ratio: ±0.01% (for power driving)

 • Wide range of speed control

Speed control range: 1:1800 (for power driving)

Continuous operation torque

Lineup

Vector control

The reference torque differs from that of the SF-V5RU series motor.

100%

(60 Hz reference)

57%

(60 Hz reference)

0

60

100

Frequency [Hz]

●Model

S F - P R F O B - S C 7 K 4 P H A

None

Symbol

Indoor type (IP44)

O

Outdoor type (IP44)

Classification

P

Dustproof/waterproof

type (IP55)

None

B

Symbol

Without brake

With brake

Classification

T
A

None

Symbol

Without

Thermostat

Protective equipment

Thermistor

H

None

Symbol

200 V class

400 V class

Classification

None

Symbol

Foot mounting type

F

Flange type

Installation method

1K

2K

3K

5K

7K

11K

15K

Symbol

1.5 kW

2.2 kW

3.7 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

11 kW

15 kW

Output

18K

22K

30K

37K

45K

55K

Symbol

18.5 kW

22 kW

30 kW

37 kW

45 kW

55 kW

Output


background image

209

14

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

Application to standard motors

Motor loss and temperature rise

The motor operated by the inverter has a limit on the continuous 
operating torque since it is slightly higher in temperature rise than 
the one operated by a commercial power supply. At a low speed, 
reduce the output torque of the motor since the cooling effect 
decreases. When 100% torque is needed continuously at low speed, 
consider using a constant-torque motor.

Torque characteristic

The motor operated by the inverter may be less in motor torque 
(especially starting torque) than the one driven by the commercial 
power supply. It is necessary to fully check the load torque 
characteristic of the machine.

Vibration

The machine-installed motor operated by the inverter may be slightly 
greater in vibration than the one driven by the commercial power 
supply. The possible causes of vibration are as follows.
 • Vibration due to imbalance of the rotator itself including the machine
 • Resonance due to the natural oscillation of the mechanical 

system. Caution is required especially when the machine used at 
constant speed is operated at variable speed. The frequency 
jump function allows resonance points to be avoided during 
operation. (During acceleration/deceleration, the frequency within 
the setting range is passed through.) An effect is also produced if 
Pr.72 PWM frequency selection is changed. When a two-pole 
motor is operated at higher than 60 Hz, caution should be taken 
since such an operation may cause abnormal vibration.

Motor torque

When the Mitsubishi Electric standard squirrel cage motor (SF-JR, 4-pole) and inverter of the same capacity are used, the torque 
characteristics are as shown below. It is assumed that the motor is used in combination with an inverter with the ND or HD rating. The 
overload capacity decreases when the LD or SLD rating is selected. Observe the specified range of the inverter.

Maximum short-time torque



Torque boost minimum (0%)



Torque boost standard (initial value)



Torque boost large

10%: FR-A820-00046(0.4K), FR-A820-00077(0.75K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K), FR-A840-00038(0.75K)
7%: FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K), FR-A840-00052(1.5K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K)
6%: FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K)
4%: FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher, FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher



Torque boost adjustment (3.7 kW or lower)

 • The maximum short-time torque indicates the maximum torque characteristics within 60 s.
 • Under Real sensorless vector control, 200% (150%) torque (60 Hz torque reference) is output at 0.3 Hz operation.
 • A 60 Hz torque reference indicates that the rated torque of the motor running at 60 Hz is 100%, and a 50 Hz torque reference indicates that 

the rated torque of the motor running at 50 Hz is 100%

 • Under V/F control, all of SF-JR 2-pole, 4-pole, and 6-pole motors have the same torque characteristics.

Continuous torque (Real sensorless vector control)

 • A general-purpose squirrel cage motor must be used at lower continuous operating torque in rated operation as shown in the chart since 

the cooling capability of the fan installed on the rotor reduces at a lower speed. (Instantaneous torque occurs.)

 • The toque with 200 or 220 V at 60 Hz or 200 V at 50 Hz in the chart indicates a motor torque reference (base frequency set in Pr.3 of the 

inverter) and is not the frequency of the power supply. In a 50 Hz power supply area, the 60 Hz setting can be set.

 • When continuously operating a motor with the 50 Hz torque reference setting, set the load torque to 85% or lower.

60 Hz torque reference

50 Hz torque reference

R

e

al

 se

ns

or

le

ss

vec

to

r co

nt

ro

l

V/

F co

nt

ro

l

60 Hz torque reference

50 Hz torque reference

200

150

100

70
63

0

0.3

20

60

120

220 V

200 V

Output torque

(%)

Maximum torque for short time (0.4 to 3.7K)

(5.5K to 55K)

Output frequency (Hz)

170

130

100

53

0

0.3

20

50

120

Output torque

(%)

Maximum torque for short time(0.4 to 3.7K)

(5.5K to 55K)

Output frequency (Hz)

150

110

100

70

63

0

1 3

20

60

120

80

10

30

140

∗4 ∗3

∗2 ∗1

220 V

200 V

6

Output torque

(%)

Output frequency (Hz)

130
120

53

9

1 3

20

50

120

25

95

80

67

∗4 ∗3

∗2 ∗1

6

Output torque

(%)

Output frequency (Hz)

85

80

90

95

100

70

65

50
45

30

0

3 6

20 30 40

60

120

5.5K

0.4K to 3.7K

7.5K to 30K

220 V

200 V

37K to 55K

37K to 55K

37K to 55K

V/F control
(0.2K to 55K)

V/F control
(0.2K to 55K)

V/F control
(0.2K to 55K)

Output torque

(%)

Output frequency (Hz)

85

80
70

75
65

60

55

45
38

25

0

3 6

20 30 40 50

120

0.4 to 3.7K

5.5K 7.5K to 30K

37K to 55K

37K to 55K

37K to 55K

V/F control

(0.2K to 55K)

V/F control

(0.2K to 55K)

V/F control

(0.2K to 55K)

Output torque

(%)

Output frequency (Hz)


background image

210

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

14

Application to constant-torque motors

SF-HRCA type

 • Continuous operation even at low speed of 0.3 Hz is possible 

(when using Real sensorless vector control).
For the 37 kW or lower (except for 22 kW), load torque is not 
needed to be reduced even at a low speed and constant torque 
(100% torque) continuous operation is possible within the range 
of speed ratio 1/20 (3 to 60 Hz).
(The characteristic of motor running at 60 Hz or higher is that 
output torque is constant.)

 • Installation size is the same as that of the standard motor.
 • Note that operation characteristic in the chart below cannot be 

obtained if V/F control is used.

Standard specifications (indoor type)

Motor torque

It is assumed that the motor is used in combination with an inverter with the ND or HD rating. The overload capacity decreases when the LD 
or SLD rating is selected. Observe the specified range of the inverter.

Continuous rated range of use (Real sensorless vector control)

The maximum short-time torque indicates the maximum torque characteristics within 60 s.
For the motor constant under Real sensorless vector control, please contact your sales representative.

Output 

(kW)

Number of 

poles

Frequency 

range

Common specification

0.4

4

3 to 120 Hz

Base frequency 60 Hz
• Rotation direction (CCW)

Counterclockwise when viewed 
from the motor end

• Lead wire

3.7 kW or lower: 3 wires
5.5 kW or higher: 6 or 12 wires

• Surrounding air temperature: 40

C 

or lower
The protective structure is IP44.

0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11

3 to 100 Hz

15
18.5
22
30
37

3 to 65 Hz

45
55

60 Hz torque reference

(when the inverter is 0.4 kW to 7.5 kW)

60 Hz torque reference

(when the inverter is 11 kW to 22 kW)

60 Hz torque reference

(when the inverter is 30 kW)

60 Hz torque reference

(when the inverter is 37 kW to 55 kW)

Values in parenthesis apply to the 0.4 kW to 0.75 kW

Maximum torque for short time
(5.5 kW to 7.5 kW)

Maximum torque for short time (0.4 kW to 3.7 kW)

Output torque

(%)

Output frequency (Hz)

150

100

200

70

(60)

63

(50)

50

(45)

45

(40)

0

3

0.3

60

120

220 V

200 V

95

Continuous operation torque (3.7 kW)

Continuous operation torque
(0.4 kW to 2.2 kW, 5.5 kW, 7.5 kW)

Maximum torque for short time

Continuous operation torque 
(15 kW, 18.5 kW)

Continuous operation torque 
(22 kW)

Continuous operation torque 
(11 kW)

Output torque

(%)

Output frequency (Hz)

Values in parenthesis apply to the 22 kW

57

(51)

150

100

85
80

60

0

3

60

100

220 V

200 V

0.3

10

95

150

100

85
80

57

54

0

60

100

220 V

200 V

0.3

Maximum torque for short time

Continuous operation torque

Output torque

(%)

Output frequency (Hz)

150

100

92

80

0

3

0.3

10

60 65

130

Maximum torque for short time

Continuous operation 
torque (37 kW)

Continuous operation 
torque (45 kW, 55 kW)

Output torque

(%)

Output frequency (Hz)


background image

211

14

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

Application to vector control dedicated motors (SF-V5RU) (55 kW or lower)

For performing vector control, the FR-A8AP/FR-A8TP (vector control compatible option) is required.
When the FR-A8TP is not used, a 12 V or 24 V power supply is required as the power supply for the encoder of the SF-V5RU. (When the FR-
A8TP is used, the 24 V power supply of the FR-A8TP can be used for the encoder of the SF-V5RU.)

Motor torque

When the vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU) and inverter are used, the torque characteristics are as shown below.
It is assumed that the motor is used in combination with an inverter with the ND or HD rating. The overload capacity decreases when the LD 
or SLD rating is selected. Observe the specified range of the inverter.
  • SF-V5RU

 • SF-V5RU1, 3, and 4

 • The maximum rotation speed of the SF-V5RU-55kW and SF-V5RU3-30kW is 2400 r/min.
 • The SF-V5RU-3.7kW or lower can be operated with the maximum rotation speed of 3600 r/min. For the use of those motors, please 

contact your sales representative.

 • The maximum rotation speed of motors with a brake is 1800 r/min.
 • The maximum short-time torque of the SF-V5RU[]K1, SF-V5RU[]K3, and SF-V5RU[]K4 is 120%.

As the motor compatible with the maximum short-time torque of 150%, specify the SF-V5RU[]K1Y, SF-V5RU[]K3Y, or SF-V5RU[]K4Y.

Rated speed of 1500 r/min series

<1.5 to 22 (kW)>

<30 to 55 (kW)>

1000 r/min torque reference (speed ratio 1:2)

1000 r/min torque reference (speed ratio 1:3)

500 r/min torque reference (speed ratio 1:4)

<1.5 to 37 (kW)>

<1.5 to 30 (kW)>

<1.5 to 15 (kW)>

Constant power

Maximum torque for short time

Speed (r/min)

Continuous 
operation torque

50

0

75

100

1500

3000

150

Output torque

(%)

Constant power

Reduced output

40

0

60

63

94

100

1500

2400

3000

150

Speed (r/min)

Output torque

(%)

Maximum torque for short time

Continuous 
operation torque

120

150

100

0

Speed (r/min)

Maximum torque for short time
(SF-V5RU[]K1)

Maximum torque for short time
(SF-V5RU[]K1Y)

Continuous operation 
torque

60

75

50

0

1000

2000

Constant power

45

54

Reduced output
30 kW
(SF-V5RU30K1)

Output torque

(%)

150

120

100

0

Maximum torque for short time
(SF-V5RU[]K3)

Continuous operation 
torque

33

42

50

63

40

0

1000

3000

Constant power

2400

Maximum torque for short time
(SF-V5RU[]K3Y)

Speed (r/min)

Output torque

(%)

120

100

0

Speed (r/min)

Maximum torque for short time
(SF-V5RU[]K4)

Maximum torque for short time
(SF-V5RU[]K4Y)

Continuous 
operation 
torque

30

37.5

25

0

500

2000

Constant power

150

Output torque

(%)


background image

212

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

14

Motor model



Since a brake power device is a stand-alone,  install it inside the enclosure.  (This device should be arranged at the customer side.)



To use the thermistor function of the thermistor-equipped motor SF-V5RU [][][][][] T, the plug-in option (FR-A8AZ) is required additionally.

Model lineup (: Available model, -: Not available)

 • Rated speed: 1500 r/min (4 poles)

 • Rated speed: 1000 r/min (4 poles), maximum speed: 2000 r/min, speed ratio 1:2

 • Rated speed: 1000 r/min (4 poles), maximum speed: 3000 r/min, speed ratio 1:3

 • Rated speed: 500 r/min (4 poles), maximum speed: 2000 r/min, speed ratio 1:4

Since motors with frame No. 250 or higher, 400 V class, speed ratio 1:4 specifications are available as special products, please contact your sales representative.

Combination with the SF-V5RU1, 3, 4, SF-THY and inverter

When using the SF-V5RU1, 3, or 4(Y), always set Pr.83 Rated motor voltage and perform the offline auto tuning according to the Instruction 
Manual and additional materials, which are enclosed with the motor, and the Instruction Manual of the inverter.

Models surrounded by black borders and 400 V class are developed upon receipt of order. (For the SF-THY model, refer to page 218.)



The maximum speed is 2400 r/min.



90% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 1000 r/min or faster. For details, please contact your sales representative.)



For motors with overload capacity 150% 60 s ("Y" at the end of their model names), contact your sales representative.

Model

Standard 

type

Rated output (kW)

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

Frame number

90L

100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S

Standard horizontal type

SF-V5RU(H)[]

Flange type

SF-V5RUF(H)[]

-

Standard horizontal type with brake SF-V5RU(H)[]B

Flange type with brake

SF-V5RUF(H)[]B

-

-

-

-

-

-

Model

Standard 

type

Rated output (kW)

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

Frame number

100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180L 200L 200L 225S

Standard horizontal type

SF-V5RU(H)[]1(Y)

Flange type

SF-V5RUF(H)[]1(Y)

-

Standard horizontal type with brake SF-V5RU(H)[]1B(Y)

Flange type with brake

SF-V5RUF(H)[]1B(Y)

-

-

-

-

-

Model

Standard 

type

Rated output (kW)

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

Frame number

112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180L 200L 200L 225S

Standard horizontal type

SF-V5RU(H)[]3(Y)

Flange type

SF-V5RUF(H)[]3(Y)

-

Standard horizontal type with brake SF-V5RU(H)[]3B(Y)

Flange type with brake

SF-V5RUF(H)[]3B(Y)

-

-

-

-

-

Model

Standard 

type

Rated output (kW)

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

Frame number

132M 160M 160L 180L 200L 225S 225S

Standard horizontal type

SF-V5RU(H)[]4(Y)

Flange type

SF-V5RUF(H)[]4(Y)

-

-

Standard horizontal type with brake SF-V5RU(H)[]4B(Y)

Flange type with brake

SF-V5RUF(H)[]4B(Y)

-

-

-

-

S F - V 5 RU

Symbol

Structure

None

F

Horizontal type

Flange type

Symbol

Structure

None

H

200 V class
400 V class

Symbol Output (kW)

1K
2K
3K
5K
7K

11K
15K

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15

Symbol Output (kW)

18K
22K
30K
37K
45K
55K

18.5

22
30
37
45
55

Symbol Electromagnetic brake

None

B

Without

With 

∗1

Symbol

None

1
3
4

Rated speed (r/min) 

1500
1000
1000

500

Symbol

None

T

With thermal protector

With thermistor 

∗2

H

5K

1

B

T

Y

F

Maximum speed (r/min)

3000
2000
3000
2000

Protective device

Symbol

None

Y

120% 60 s
150% 60 s

Permissible load

SF-V5RU[]1 (1:2)

SF-V5RU[]3 (1:3)

SF-V5RU[]4 (1:4)

Voltage

200 V class

Rated speed

1000 r/min 

1000 r/min 

500 r/min 

Base frequency

33.33 Hz

33.33 Hz

16.6 Hz

Maximum speed

2000 r/min 

3000 r/min 

2000 r/min 

Motor 

capacity

Motor 

frame 

number

Motor model

Inverter model 

FR-A820-[]

(ND rating)

Motor 

frame 

number

Motor model

Inverter model 

FR-A820-[]

(ND rating)

Motor 

frame 

number

Motor model

Inverter model 

FR-A820-[]

(ND rating)

1.5 kW

100L

SF-V5RU1K1(Y)

00167(2.2K)

112M

SF-V5RU1K3(Y)

00167(2.2K)

132M

SF-V5RU1K4(Y)

00167(2.2K)

2.2 kW

112M

SF-V5RU2K1(Y)

00240(3.7K)

132S

SF-V5RU2K3(Y)

00240(3.7K)

160M

SF-V5RU2K4(Y)

00240(3.7K)

3.7 kW

132S

SF-V5RU3K1(Y)

00340(5.5K)

132M

SF-V5RU3K3(Y)

00340(5.5K)

160L

SF-V5RU3K4

*3

00490(7.5K)

5.5 kW

132M

SF-V5RU5K1(Y)

00490(7.5K)

160M

SF-V5RU5K3(Y)

00490(7.5K)

180L

SF-V5RU5K4(Y)

00490(7.5K)

7.5 kW

160M

SF-V5RU7K1(Y)

00630(11K)

160L

SF-V5RU7K3(Y)

00630(11K)

200L

SF-V5RU7K4(Y)

00630(11K)

11 kW

160L

SF-V5RU11K1(Y)

00770(15K)

180M

SF-V5RU11K3(Y)

00770(15K)

225S

SF-V5RU11K4(Y)

00770(15K)

15 kW

180M

SF-V5RU15K1(Y)

00930(18.5K)

180L

SF-V5RU15K3(Y)

00930(18.5K)

225S

SF-V5RU15K4

*3

01250(22K)

18.5 kW

180L

SF-V5RU18K1(Y)

01250(22K)

200L

SF-V5RU18K3(Y)

01250(22K)

250MD SF-THY

01250(22K)

22 kW

200L

SF-V5RU22K1(Y)

01540(30K)

200L

SF-V5RU22K3(Y)

01540(30K)

280MD SF-THY

01540(30K)

30 kW

200L

*2

SF-V5RU30K1(Y)

01870(37K)

225S

*1

SF-V5RU30K3(Y)

01870(37K)

280MD SF-THY

01870(37K)

37 kW

225S

SF-V5RU37K1(Y)

02330(45K)

250MD

*1

SF-THY

02330(45K)

280MD SF-THY

02330(45K)

45 kW

250MD SF-THY

03160(55K)

250MD

*1

SF-THY

03160(55K)

280MD SF-THY

03160(55K)

55 kW

250MD SF-THY

03800(75K)

280MD

*1

SF-THY

03800(75K)

280L

SF-THY

03800(75K)


background image

213

14

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

Motor specifications

*1

80% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 2400 r/min or more. Contact us separately for details.)

*2

A dedicated motor of 3.7 kW or less can be run at the maximum speed of 3600 r/min. Consult our sales office when using the motor at the maximum speed.

*3

Power (current) at 50 Hz/60 Hz.

*4

Since a motor with brake has a window for gap check, the protective structure of both the cooling fan section and brake section is IP20. S of IP23S is an

additional code indicating the condition that protection from water intrusion is established only when a cooling fan is not operating.

*5

The value when high carrier frequency is set (Pr.72 = 6, Pr.240 = 0).

*6

The 12 V/24 V power supply is required as the power supply for the encoder. (When the FR-A8TP is used, the 24 V power supply of the FR-A8TP can be

used for the encoder of the SF-V5RU.)

*7

The cooling fan is equipped with a thermal protector. The cooling fan stops when the coil temperature exceeds the specified value in order to protect the fan

motor. A restrained cooling fan or degraded fan motor insulation could be causes for the rise in coil temperature.The cooling fan re-starts when the coil

temperature drops to normal. 

*8

The cooling fan voltage and input values are the basic specifications of the cooling fan alone and free air values. The input value becomes slightly larger

when it is rotated by this motor due to an increased workload, but the cooling fan can be used as it is.When preparing a thermal relay at the user side, use

the recommended thermal setting.

200 V class (Mitsubishi Electric dedicated motor [SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series)])

Motor type
SF-V5RU[ ]K

1

2

3

5

7

11

15

18

22

30

37

45

55

Applicable inverter model
FR-A820-[ ]K (ND rating)

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

Rated output (kW)

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30 

*1

37 

*1

45 

*1

55

Rated current (A)

8.5

11.5

17.6

28.5

37.5

54

72.8

88

102

126

168

198

264

Rated torque (N

·

m)

9.55

14.1

23.6

35.0

47.7

70.0

95.5

118

140

191

235

286

350

Maximum torque 150% 60 s (N

·

m)

14.3

21.1

35.4

52.4

71.6

105

143

176

211

287

353

429

525

Rated speed (r/min)

1500

Maximum speed (r/min)

3000 

*2

2400

Frame No.

90L

100L

112M

132S

132M 160M

160L

180M

180M

200L

200L

200L

225S

Inertia moment J (

10

-4 

kg

·

m

2

)

67.5

105

175

275

400

750

875

1725

1875

3250

3625

3625

6850

Noise 

*5

75 dB or less

80 dB or less

85 dB

or less

Cooling fan
(with thermal 
protector) 

*7*8

Voltage

Single-phase 200 V/50 Hz

Single-phase 200 V to 230 V/60 Hz

Three-phase 200 V/50 Hz

Three-phase 200 to 230 V/60 Hz

Input 

*3

36/55 W

(0.26/0.32 A)

22/28 W

(0.11/0.13 A)

55/71 W

(0.39/0.39 A)

100/156 W

(0.47/0.53 A)

85/130 W

(0.46/0.52 A)

Recommended
thermal setting

0.36 A

0.18 A

0.51 A

0.69 A

0.68 A

Surrounding air temperature, 
humidity

-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)

Structure (Protective structure)

Totally enclosed forced draft system (Motor: IP44, cooling fan: IP23S) 

*4

Detector

Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase +12 V/24 VDC power supply 

*6

Equipment

Encoder, thermal protector, fan

Heat resistance class

F

Vibration rank

V10

Approx. mass (kg)

24

33

41

52

62

99

113

138

160

238

255

255

320

400 V class (Mitsubishi Electric dedicated motor [SF-V5RUH (1500 r/min series)])

Motor type
SF-V5RUH[ ]K

1

2

3

5

7

11

15

18

22

30

37

45

55

Applicable inverter model
FR-A840-[ ]K (ND rating)

2.2

2.2

3.7

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

Rated output (kW)

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30 

*1

37 

*1

45 

*1

55

Rated current (A)

4.2

5.8

8.8

14.5

18.5

27.5

35.5

44

51

67

84

99

132

Rated torque (N

·

m)

9.55

14.1

23.6

35.0

47.7

70.0

95.5

118

140

191

235

286

350

Maximum torque 150% 60 s (N

·

m)

14.3

21.1

35.4

52.4

71.6

105

143

176

211

287

353

429

525

Rated speed (r/min)

1500

Maximum speed (r/min)

3000 

*2

2400

Frame No.

90L

100L

112M

132S

132M 160M

160L

180M

180M

200L

200L

200L

225S

Inertia moment J (

10

-4 

kg

·

m

2

)

67.5

105

175

275

400

750

875

1725

1875

3250

3625

3625

6850

Noise 

*5

75 dB or less

80 dB or less

85 dB or less

Cooling fan
(with thermal 
protector) 

*7*8

Voltage

Single-phase 200 V/50 Hz

Single-phase 200 V to 230 V/60 Hz

Three-phase 380 to 400 V/50 Hz

Three-phase 400 to 460 V/60 Hz

Input 

*3

36/55 W

(0.26/0.32 A)

22/28 W

(0.11/0.13 A)

55/71 W

(0.19/0.19 A)

100/156 W

(0.27/0.30 A)

85/130 W

(0.23/0.26 A)

Recommended
thermal setting

0.36 A

0.18 A

0.25 A

0.39 A

0.34 A

Surrounding air temperature, 
humidity

-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)

Structure (Protective structure)

Totally enclosed forced draft system (Motor: IP44, cooling fan: IP23S) 

*4

Detector

Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase +12 V/24 VDC power supply 

*6

Equipment

Encoder, thermal protector, fan

Heat resistance class

F

Vibration rank

V10

Approx. mass (kg)

24

33

41

52

62

99

113

138

160

238

255

255

320


background image

214

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

14

Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (standard horizontal type)

Dimensions table

(Unit: mm)

Note) 1. Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal.

2. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate 

cooling.
Also, check that the ventilation direction of a fan is from the opposite load side to the 
load side.

3 The size difference of top and bottom of the shaft center height is 
4 The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its type name.

Frame Number 90L

Frame Number 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M

Frame Number 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L

Frame Number 200L, 225S

SF-V5RU

[ ]K

SF-V5RU

[ ]K1

SF-V5RU

[ ]K3

SF-V5RU

[ ]K4

Frame 

No.

Mass

(kg)

Motor

Terminal screw 

size

A

B

C

D

E

F

H

I

KA

KG KL(KP)

L

M

ML

N

XB

Q

QK

R

S

T

U

W

U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2

1

—

—

—

90L

24

256.5 114

90

183.6

70

62.5 198

—

53

65

220(210) 425

175

—

150

56

—

—

168.5 24j6

7

4

8

M6

M4

M4

2

1

—

—

100L

33

284

128

100

207

80

70

203.5 230

65

78

231

477

200

212

180

63

60

45

193

28j6

7

4

8

M6

M4

M4

3

2

1

—

112M

41

278

135

112

228

95

70

226

253

69

93

242

478

230

242

180

70

60

45

200

28j6

7

4

8

M6

M4

M4

5

3

2

—

132S

52

303

152

132

266

108

70

265

288

75

117

256

542

256

268

180

89

80

63

239 38k6

8

5

10

M6

M4

M4

7

5

3

1

132M

62

322

171

132

266

108

89

265

288

94

117

256

580

256

268

218

89

80

63

258 38k6

8

5

10

M6

M4

M4

11

7

5

2

160M

99

412

198

160

318

127

105

316

367

105

115

330

735

310

—

254

108

—

—

323 42k6

8

5

12

M8

M4

M4

15

11

7

3

160L

113

434

220

160

318

127

127

316

367

127

115

330

779

310

—

298

108

—

—

345 42k6

8

5

12

M8

M4

M4

18

—

—

—

180M

138

438.5 225.5 180

363 139.5 120.5 359

410

127

139

352

790

335

—

285

121

—

—

351.5 48k6

9

5.5

14

M8

M4

M4

22

15

11

—

160

—

18

15

5

180L

200 457.5 242.5 180

363 139.5 139.5 359

410

146

139

352

828

335

—

323

121

—

—

370.5 55m6 10

6

16

M8

M4

M4

30

—

—

7

200L

238

483.5 267.5 200

406

159 152.5 401

—

145

487 (546) 909

390

—

361

133

—

—

425.5 60m6 11

7

18

M10

M4

M4

37, 45

22, 30

18, 22

—

255

55

37

30

11, 15

225S

320

500

277

225

446

178

143

446

—

145

533 (592) 932

428

—

342

149

—

—

432 65m6 11

7

18

M10

M4

M4

S

T

W

U

Section AA

15

9

Frame leg viewed from above

Sliding distance

Earth (ground) terminal (M5)

Mark for earthing 
(grounding)

Direction of 
cooling fan wind

Exhaust

Suction

40

50

L

A

Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P

XB

F

F

N

KA

B

R

A

A

D

φ27

4

C

H

KG

KL

E

E

M

KP

4

12

Sliding distance

Frame leg viewed 

from above

S

U

T

W

Section AA

Mark for earthing 

(grounding)

Earth (ground) terminal (M5)

φ27

40

E

E

M

ML

6.5

C

H

I

KG

D

KL

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

Exhaust

Suction

XB

F

F

N

QK

KA

Q

B

A

R

L

A

A

For motor (U, V, W)

For cooling fan (A, B)

Thermal protector (G1, G2)

A B

G2

G1

U

V

W

Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

Mark for earthing 

(grounding)

Earth (ground) 

terminal (M8)

With guard 

wires

Exhaust

Suction

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

φ56

KG

XB

F

F

N

90

KA

110

B

A

R

L

50

E

E

M

D

KL

8

C

H

I

A

A

Section AA

T

U

S

W

14.5

4

Sliding distance

Frame leg viewed 

from above

Frame leg viewed 

from above

4

18.5

Sliding distance

S

W

T

U

Section AA

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

Mark for earthing 

(grounding)

Earth (ground) 

terminal (M12)

With guard 

wires

KG

KP

L

A

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

Exhaust

Suction

φ90

70

E

E

M

11

C

H

D

XB

F

F

N

110

KA

140

B

R

A

A

For motor (U, V, W)

For cooling fan (A, B, C)

For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Earthing (grounding) 

terminal (M8)

Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the frame 
installation foot as well as the earth terminal in the 
terminal box.

 0 

-0.5


215

14

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (standard horizontal type with brake)

Dimensions table

(Unit: mm)

Note) 1. Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal.

2. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate 

cooling. 
Also, check that the ventilation direction of a fan is from the opposite load side to the 
load side.

3 The size difference of top and bottom of the shaft center height is 
4 The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its type name.
5. Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure.

(This device should be arranged at the customer side.)

Frame Number 90L

Frame Number 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M

Frame Number 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L

Frame Number 200L, 225S

SF-V5RU

[ ]KB

SF-V5RU

[ ]K1B

SF-V5RU

[ ]K3B

SF-V5RU

[ ]K4B

Frame 

No.

Mass

(kg)

Motor

Shaft end

Terminal screw 

size

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

KA KD KG KL KP

L

M

ML

N

X

XB

Z

Q

QK

R

S

T

U

W

U,V,

W

A,B
,(C)

G1,

G2

B1,

B2

1

—

—

—

90L

29

296.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 4

—

—

—

53

27

65 220 245 465 175 — 150 15

56

9

50

40 168.5 24j6 7

4

8

M6 M4 M4 M4

2

1

—

—

100L

46

333.5 128 100 207 80

70

6.5 —

—

40

65

27

78 231 265 526.5 200 212 180

4

63

12

60

45 193 28j6 7

4

8

M6 M4 M4 M4

3

2

1

—

112M

53

355 135 112 228 95

70

6.5 —

—

40

69

27

93 242 290 555 230 242 180

4

70

12

60

45 200 28j6 7

4

8

M6 M4 M4 M4

5

3

2

—

132S

70

416 152 132 266 108 70

6.5 —

—

40

75

27 117 256 329 655 256 268 180

4

89

12

80

63 239 38k6 8

5

10 M6 M4 M4 M4

7

5

3

1

132M

80

435 171 132 266 108 89

6.5 —

—

40

94

27 117 256 329 693 256 268 218

4

89

12

80

63 258 38k6 8

5

10 M6 M4 M4 M4

11

7

5

2

160M

140 522.5 198 160 318 127 105

8

—

—

50 105 56 115 330 391 845.5 310 — 254

4

108 14.5 110 90 323 42k6 8

5

12 M8 M4 M4 M4

15

11

7

3

160L

155 544.5 220 160 318 127 127

8

—

—

50 127 56 115 330 391 889.5 310 — 298

4

108 14.5 110 90 345 42k6 8

5

12 M8 M4 M4 M4

18

—

—

—

180M

185

568.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 8

—

—

50 127 56 139 352 428 920 335 — 285

4

121 14.5 110 90 351.5 48k6 9

5.5 14 M8 M4 M4 M4

22

15

11

—

215

—

18

15

5

180L

255 587.5 242.5 180 363 139.5 139.5 8

—

—

50 146 56 139 352 428 958 335 — 323

4

121 14.5 110 90 370.5 55m6 10

6

16 M8 M4 M4 M4

30

—

—

7

200L

305

644.5 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 11

—

—

70 145 90 487 — 546 1070 390 — 361

4

133 18.5 140 110 425.5 60m6 11

7

18 M10 M4 M4 M4

37, 45

22, 30

18, 22

—

330

55

37

30

11, 15

225S

395

659 277 225 446 178 143 11

—

—

70 145 90 533 — 592 1091 428 — 342

4

149 18.5 140 110 432 65m6 11

7

18 M10 M4 M4 M4

Sliding distance

Frame leg viewed 

from above

Z

X

Section AA

U

W

T

S

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

Mark for earthing 

(grounding)

Earth (ground) 

terminal (M5)

A

A

R

B

N

F

F

XB

50

40

Suction

Exhaust

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

Terminal box for cooling fan

L

A

KA

M

E

E

C

G

D

φ22

2

2

1

1

KL

KP

KG

φ27

Main 

terminal box

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

Earth (ground) 

terminal (M5)

Mark for earthing 

(grounding)

Suction

Exhaust

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

A

A

R

N

F

F

XB

C

G

D

ML

M

E

E

J

B

Q

QK

Main 

terminal box

A

L

Terminal box for cooling fan

φ22

φ27

KA

KL

KP

H

KG

Section AA

W

S

U

T

Sliding distance

Frame leg viewed 

from above

Z

X

1

2

1

2

V

U

B2

B1

W G1 G2

C

B

A

For motor (U, V, W)

For cooling fan (A, B)

For brake (B1, B2)

For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Earthing (grounding) 

terminal (M4)

Main terminal box

Earthing (grounding) 

terminal (M4)

Terminal box for cooling fan

Sliding distance

Frame leg viewed 

from above

X

Z

W

S

U

T

Section AA

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

Earth (ground) 

terminal (M8)

Mark for earthing 

(grounding)

Suction

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

Terminal box for cooling fan

1, 2

1

2

A

A

R

B

110

KA

Exhaust

90

N

F

F

XB

L

A

H

C

G

D

M

E

E

J

KG

φ56

φ22

KL

KP

Main 

terminal box

Sliding distance

Z

X

Frame leg viewed 

from above

Section AA

U

T

W

S

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

Earth (ground) 

terminal (M12)

Mark for earthing 

(grounding)

1

2

D

H

C

G

M

E

E

J

φ90

KP

KG

A

A

R

B

140

KA

110

N

F

F

XB

Suction

Exhaust

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

L

A

Terminal box for cooling fan

1, 2

φ22

Main 

terminal box

B2

B1

U

G2

G1

W

V

C

B

A

For cooling fan (A, B, C)

For motor (U, V, W)

Earthing 

(grounding) 

terminal (M8)

Earthing (grounding) 

terminal (M4)

For brake (B1, B2)

For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Main terminal box

Terminal box for cooling fan

 indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex 

head holes for manual opening.
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the frame 
installation foot as well as the earth terminal in the 
terminal box.

 0 

-0.5


background image

216

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

14

Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (flange type)

Dimensions table

(Unit: mm)

Note) 1. Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal.

For use under the shaft, the protection structure of the cooling fan is IP20.

2. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate 

cooling.
Also, check that the ventilation direction of a fan is from the opposite load side to the 
load side.

3. The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its type name.

Frame Number 90L

Frame Number 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M

Frame Number 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L

Frame Number 200L

SF-V5RU

F[ ]K

SF-V5RU

F[ ]K1

SF-V5RU

F[ ]K3

SF-V5RU

F[ ]K4

Flange 

Number

Frame 

No.

Mass

(kg)

Motor

Shaft end

Terminal screw 

size

D

IE

KB

KD

KL

LA

LB

LC

LE

LG

LL

LN

LZ

LR

Q

QK

S

T

U

W

U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2

1

—

—

—

FF165

90L

26.5

183.6

—

198.5

27

220

165 130j6 200

3.5

12

402

4

12

50

50

40

24j6

7

4

8

M6

M4

M4

2

1

—

—

FF215 100L

37

207

130

213

27

231

215 180j6 250

4

16

432

4

14.5

60

60

45

28j6

7

4

8

M6

M4

M4

3

2

1

—

FF215 112M

46

228

141

239

27

242

215 180j6 250

4

16

448

4

14.5

60

60

45

28j6

7

4

8

M6

M4

M4

5

3

2

—

FF265 132S

65

266

156

256

27

256

265 230j6 300

4

20

484

4

14.5

80

80

63

38k6

8

5

10

M6

M4

M4

7

5

3

1

FF265 132M

70

266

156

294

27

256

265 230j6 300

4

20

522

4

14.5

80

80

63

38k6

8

5

10

M6

M4

M4

11

7

5

2

FF300 160M

110

318

207

318

56

330

300 250j6 350

5

20

625

4

18.5

110

110

90

42k6

8

5

12

M8

M4

M4

15

11

7

3

FF300 160L

125

318

207

362

56

330

300 250j6 350

5

20

669

4

18.5

110

110

90

42k6

8

5

12

M8

M4

M4

18

—

—

—

FF350 180M

160

363

230 378.5

56

352

350 300j6 400

5

20

690

4

18.5

110

110

90

48k6

9

5.5

14

M8

M4

M4

22

15

11

—

185

—

18

15

5

FF350 180L

225

363

230 416.5

56

352

350 300j6 400

5

20

728

4

18.5

110

110

90

55m6

10

6

16

M8

M4

M4

30

—

—

7

FF400 200L

270

406

255

485

90

346

400 350j6 450

5

22

823.5

8

18.5

140

140

110 60m6

11

7

18

M10

M4

M4

37, 45

22, 30

18, 22

—

290

LN   LZ

KL

KD

LA

A

A

Section BB

U

W

T

S

Earth (ground) terminal (M5)

Mark for earthing (grounding)

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

LL

KB

LR

LG

LE

QK

Q

LC

LB

B

B

Section

AA

D

Suction

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

Exhaust

Section BB

W

U

T

S

LN   LZ

KD

KL

IE

A

A

LA

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

Earth (ground) terminal (M5)

Mark for earthing (grounding)

LL

KB

LR

LG

LE

QK

Q

LC

LB

Section

AA

B

B

D

Suction

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

Exhaust

For motor (U, V, W)

For cooling fan (A, B)

For thermal protector (G1, G2)

A B

G2

G1

U

V

W

Earthing (grounding) 

terminal (M4)

Section BB

W

S

T

U

A

A

LN   LZ

LA

IE

KL

KD

QK

Q

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

Earth (ground) terminal (M8)

Mark for earthing (grounding)

With guard wires

Section

AA

LC

LB

B

B

LR

KB

LG

LE

LL

D

Suction

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

Exhaust

Section BB

W

S

T

U

LR

Q

QK

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

Earth (ground) terminal (M12)

Mark for earthing (grounding)

With guard wires

Section

AA

LC

LB

B

B

KB

LG

LE

LL

D

Suction

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

Exhaust

A

A

LN   LZ

LA

IE

KL

KD

For motor (U, V, W)

For cooling fan (A, B, C)

For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Earthing (grounding) 

terminal (M8)

Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange 
section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal 
box.


background image

217

14

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (flange type with brake)

Dimensions table

(Unit: mm)

Note) 1. Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal.

2. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate 

cooling.
Also, check that the ventilation direction of a fan is from the opposite load side to the 
load side.

3. The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its type name.
4. Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure.

(This device should be arranged at the customer side.)

Frame Number 90L

Frame Number 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M

Frame Number 160M, 160L

SF-V5RU

F[ ]KB

SF-V5RU

F[ ]K1B

SF-V5RU

F[ ]K3B

SF-V5RU

F[ ]K4B

Flange 

Number

Frame 

No.

Mass

(kg)

Motor

Shaft end

Terminal screw size

D

KB

KD

KL

KP

LA

LB

LC

LE

LG

LL

LN

LZ

LR

Q

QK

S

T

U

W

U,V,W A,B,(C) B1,B2 G1,G2

1

—

—

—

FF165

90L

31.5

183.6 198.5

27

220

155

165 130j6 200

3.5

12

442

4

12

50

50

40

24j6

7

4

8

M6

M4

M4

M4

2

1

—

—

FF215 100L

50

207

213

27

231

165

215 180j6 250

4

16 481.5

4

14.5

60

60

45

28j6

7

4

8

M6

M4

M4

M4

3

2

1

—

FF215 112M

58

228

239

27

242

178

215 180j6 250

4

16

525

4

14.5

60

60

45

28j6

7

4

8

M6

M4

M4

M4

5

3

2

—

FF265 132S

83

266

256

27

256

197

265 230j6 300

4

20

597

4

14.5

80

80

63

38k6

8

5

10

M6

M4

M4

M4

7

5

3

1

FF265 132M

88

266

294

27

256

197

265 230j6 300

4

20

635

4

14.5

80

80

63

38k6

8

5

10

M6

M4

M4

M4

11

7

5

2

FF300 160M

151

318

318

56

330

231

300 250j6 350

5

20 735.5

4

18.5

110

110

90

42k6

8

5

12

M8

M4

M4

M4

15

11

7

3

FF300 160L

167

318

362

56

330

231

300 250j6 350

5

20 779.5

4

18.5

110

110

90

42k6

8

5

12

M8

M4

M4

M4

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

Earth (ground) terminal (M5)

Mark for earthing (grounding)

Suction

Exhaust

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

Terminal box for cooling fan

1

2

B

B

Section

AA

LC

LB

LG

LE

LL

LR

Q

QK

D

KB

LN   LZ

1

2

KD

A

A

LA

KL

φ22

KP

Section BB

U

W

T

S

Main 

terminal box

Section BB

W

S

U

T

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

QK

Q

Earth (ground) terminal (M5)

Mark for earthing (grounding)

Suction

Exhaust

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

Terminal box for cooling fan

1

2

Section

AA

LC

LB

B

B

LR

LG

LE

LL

D

KB

A

LN    LZ

A

1

2

LA

KD

KL

φ22

KP

Main 

terminal box

V

U

B2

B1

W

G1 G2

C

B

A

For motor (U, V, W)

For cooling fan (A, B)

For brake (B1, B2)

For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Earthing 

(grounding) 

terminal (M4)

Earthing 

(grounding) 

terminal (M4)

Main terminal box

Terminal box for cooling fan

Section BB

W

S

U

T

A

A

LN    LZ

2

1

LA

KD

KL

φ22

KP

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P

QK

Q

D

Earth (ground) terminal (M8)

Mark for earthing (grounding)

Suction

Direction of 

cooling fan wind

Terminal box for cooling fan

1, 2

Section

AA

LC

LB

B

B

LL

KB

LR

LG

LE

Exhaust

Main 

terminal box

B2

B1

U

G2

G1

W

V

C

B

A

For cooling fan (A, B, C)

For motor (U, V, W)

Earthing 

(grounding) 

terminal (M8)

Earthing 

(grounding) 

terminal (M4)

For brake (B1, B2)

For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Terminal box for cooling fan

Main terminal box

 indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex 

head holes for manual opening.

Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange 
section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal 
box.


background image

218

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

14

Application to vector control dedicated motors (SF-THY) (75 kW or higher)

For performing vector control, the FR-A8AP/FR-A8TP (vector control compatible option) is required.
When the FR-A8TP is not used, a 12 V or 24 V power supply is required as the power supply for the encoder of the SF-THY. (When the FR-
A8TP is used, the 24 V power supply of the FR-A8TP can be used for the encoder of the SF-THY.)

Motor torque

When the vector control dedicated motor (SF-THY) and inverter of the same capacity are used and rated voltage is input, the torque 
characteristics are as shown below.

Model lineup

 • Rated speed: 1500 r/min (4 poles)

 • Both 200 V and 400 V classes have the same model name.

Since motors speed ratio, 1:2, 1:3, or 1:4 specifications are available as special products, contact your sales representative.

Motor specifications



The 12 V/24 V power supply is required as the power supply for the encoder.



A motor with a thermal protector is also available. Contact your sales representative.

<75 (kW)>

<90 to 250 (kW)>

Model

Standard type

Rated output (kW)

75

90

110

132

160

200

250

Standard horizontal 

type

SF-THY[]

75

90

110

132

160

200

250

Motor type

SF-THY

Applicable inverter

(ND rating)

FR-A820-[ ]K

FR-A840-[ ]K

90

90

110

132

160

185

220

280

Rated output (kW)

75

75

90

110

132

160

200

250

Rated torque (N

·

m)

477

477

572

700

840

1018

1273

1591

Maximum torque 150%60 s (N

·

m)

715

715

858

1050

1260

1527

1909

2386

Rated speed (r/min)

1500

1500

Maximum speed (r/min)

2400

2400

1800

Frame No.

250MD

250MD

250MD

280MD

280MD

280MD

280L

315H

Inertia moment J (kg

·

m

2

)

1.1

1.1

1.7

2.3

2.3

4.0

3.8

5.0

Noise

90 dB

90 dB

95 dB

Cooling fan

Voltage

Three-phase, 200 V/50 Hz, 200 V/60 Hz, 220 V/60 Hz (400 V class cooling fan is available upon order)

Input (W)

50 Hz

750

400

400

400

400

400

750

750

60 Hz

750

750

750

750

750

1500

1500

Approx. mass (kg)

610

610

660

870

890

920

1170

1630

Co

m

m

o

n sp

ec

ifica

tio

n

s

Surrounding air 
temperature, humidity

-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)

Structure 

Totally enclosed forced draft system 

Equipment

Encoder, thermal protector



, fan

Insulation

Class F

Vibration rank

V10

D

ed

icate

d e

nco

der

Resolution

2048 pulse/rev

Power supply voltage

12 V/24 VDC±10%

 



Current consumption

90 mA

Output signal form

A, B phases (90° phase shift) Z phase: 1 pulse/rev

Output circuit

Complementary (constant voltage output matched by emitter follow)

Output voltage

"H" level: Power supply voltage 9 V or more (I

OH

: -20 mA)

"L" level: Power supply voltage 3 V or less (I

OL

: 20 mA)

150

100

94

63

0 1.5

1500

2400

Rated torque

Maximum torque

Speed (r/min)

(%)

Output torque

150

100

125

83

0 1.5

1500

1800

Rated torque

Maximum torque

Speed (r/min)

(%)

Output torque


background image

219

14

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (1500 r/min series)

Dimensions table

(Unit: mm)

Note) The tolerance of the top and bottom of the center shaft height *C is 

 for the 250 frame and 

 for the 280 frame or more.

Frame Number 250MD, 280MD

75 kW to 160 kW

Frame Number 280L, 315H

200 kW, 250 kW

Output

Frame 

No.

Mass

(kg)

Motor

Shaft end size

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

K

K1

K2

L

M

N

R

Z

XB

KA

KG

Q

QK

S

W

T

U

75

250MD

610

988.5 340.5

250

557

203

174.5

30

775

100

130

168

50

1471

486

449

482.5

24

168

157.5

635

140

110

75m6

20

12

7.5

90

250MD

660

988.5 340.5

250

557

203

174.5

30

775

100

130

168

50

1471

486

449

482.5

24

168

157.5

635

140

110

75m6

20

12

7.5

110

280MD

870

1049.5 397.5

280

607

228.5 209.5

30

845

110

130

181

40

1619

560

449

569.5

24

190

210.5

705

170

140

85m6

22

14

9

132

280MD

890

1049.5 397.5

280

607

228.5 209.5

30

845

110

130

181

40

1619

560

449

569.5

24

190

210.5

705

170

140

85m6

22

14

9

160

280MD

920

1049.5 397.5

280

607

228.5 209.5

30

845

110

130

181

40

1619

560

499

569.5

24

190

210.5

705

170

140

85m6

22

14

9

200

280L

1170

1210.5 416.5

280

652

228.5 228.5

30

885

110

160

160

75

1799

560

607

588.5

24

190

214.5

745

170

140

85m6

22

14

9

250

315H

1630

1343

565

315

717

254

355

35

965   130

175

428

80

2084

636

870

741

28

216

306

825

170

140

95m6

25

14

9

L

A

R

B

KA

Q

QK

Exhaust

Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P

Suction

K2

K2

K1

F

F

XB

N

K

4-

φZ hole

Hole (not used)

PF4 Class B screw

J

E

E

S

W

M

H

KG

C

T

U

G

Terminal box for cooling fan

Direction of 
cooling fan wind

Terminal box for cooling fan

L

A

R

B

K2

K1

K

K2

XB

F

F

N

KA

Q

QK

Exhaust

Suction

4-

φZ hole

Hole (not used)

PF4 Class B screw

S

W

T

U

H

KG

G

C-

1.0

J

E

E

M

0

Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P

Direction of 
cooling fan wind

 0 

-0.5

 0 

-1.0


background image

220

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

14

Application to IPM motors (MM-CF series)

Motor model

Motor specifications

IPM motor MM-CF (2000 r/min series)



When the power supply voltage drops, we cannot guarantee the above output and rated speed.



When the load torque is 20% of the motor rating. The permissible load inertia moment ratio is smaller when the load torque is larger.
Consult us if the load inertia moment ratio exceseds the above value.



This does not apply to the shaft through portion.



Value for the MM-CF[ ]2C.



The value for the MM-CF[ ]2B is indicated in parentheses.



Set 3150 r/min (210 Hz) or less in Pr.374 Overspeed detection level. The inverter may be damaged by the motor induction voltage if the motor speed 
exceeds 3150 r/min (210 Hz).

Motor type: MM-CF[ ]

52(C)(B)

102(C)(B)

152(C)(B)

202(C)(B)

352(C)(B)

502(C)

702(C)

Applicable inverter 

FR-A820-[ ]

SLD

0.4K

0.4K

0.75K

1.5K

2.2K

3.7K

5.5K

LD

0.4K

0.4K

0.75K

1.5K

2.2K

3.7K

5.5K

ND

0.4K

0.75K

1.5K

2.2K

3.7K

5.5K

7.5K

HD

0.75K

1.5K

2.2K

3.7K

5.5K

7.5K

11K

Continuous

characteristics



Rated output (kW)

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

3.5

5.0

7.0

Rated torque (N·m)

2.39

4.78

7.16

9.55

16.70

23.86

33.41

Rated speed



 (r/min)

2000

Max. speed (r/min)

3000

Instantaneous permissible speed (r/min)

3450 



Maximum torque (N·m)

4.78

9.56

14.32

19.09

33.41

47.73

66.82

Inertia moment J



 (

10

-4

kg·m

2

)

6.6
(7.0)

13.7
(14.9)

20.0
(21.2)

45.5
(48.9)

85.6
(89.0)

120.0

160.0

Recommended ratio of load inertia moment to motor 

shaft inertia moment



100 times max.

50 times max.

Rated current (A)

1.81

3.70

5.22

7.70

12.5

20.5

27.0

Insulation rank

Class F

Structure 

Totally-enclosed, self-cooling (protective system: IP44 



, IP65 



)

Surrounding air temperature, humidity

-10

C to +40C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)

Storage temperature and humidity

-20

C to +70C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)

Ambience

Indoors (no direct sunlight), free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt

Altitude

Max. 1000 m above sea level

Vibration

X:  9.8 m/s

2

, Y:  24.5 m/s

2

Mass (kg)



5.1 (7.8)

7.2 (11)

9.3 (13)

13 (20)

19 (28)

27

36

MM-CF[]2 

MM-CF[]2B 

MM-CF[]2C 

MM-CF[]2K 

Motor model

(The rated output is indicated in square brackets.)

 

Rated speed 

2000 r/min

Motor capacity

 

0.5 kW 






1.0 kW 






1.5 kW 






2.0 kW 






3.5 kW 






5.0 kW 



-




7.0 kW 



-




Remarks

Standard

Made on order

 : Released model   - : Not available 

None

B

N/A

Yes

Symbol

Electromagnetic

brake

*1

None

C

Terminal box lead

(standard part)

Cannon connector

Symbol

Input power
supply form

None

K

Standard

(straight axis)

With key groove

Symbol

Axis form

5

10

15

20

0.5 kW

1.0 kW

1.5 kW

2.0 kW

35

50

70

3.5 kW

5.0 kW

7.0 kW

Output Symbol Output

Symbol

M M - C F 5 2

2

2000 r/min.

Symbol Rated speed


background image

221

14

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

Motor torque characteristic

Motor outline dimension

Under high frequency superposition control

MM-CF

1.5 kW or lower

ND rating selected

HD rating selected

MM-CF

2.0 kW or higher

ND rating selected

HD rating selected

Under current synchronization operation

MM-CF

All capacities

ND rating selected

2000

100

150

200

100

Torque %

Speed r/min

Instantaneous (3 s)

Continuous

120

3000

Short duration (60 s) 

2000

150

200

100

Torque %

Instantaneous (3 s)

Continuous

Speed r/min

3000

Short duration (60 s)

2000

100

150

200

100

Continuous

120

Instantaneous (3 s)

Torque %

Speed r/min

3000

Short duration (60 s)

2000

100

150

200

100

Instantaneous (3 s)

Continuous

Torque %

∗ Zero speed up to a 150% instantaneous output torque

Speed r/min

3000

Short duration (60 s)

2000

3000

200

150

200

100

Torque %

Speed r/min

Instantaneous (3 s)

Continuous

50

Short duration (60 s)

R

L

L

L

□

LD

KL

45°

Q

LG 

KB

KT

φ

S

φ

LB

4-

φ

Z

φ

KD

φ

L

A

φ

LC

R

L

L

L

□

LD

KL

45° 

Q

LG

3

KB

φ

S

φ

LB

4-

φ

Z

KT

φ

LA

φ

L C

R

L

L

L

□

LD

KL

45° 

Q

LG

3

KB

KT

φ

S

φ

LB

4-

φ

Z

φ

KD

φ

LA

φ

LC

R

QK QL 

r  

Q

A

Cross section A-A

A

φ

S

U

W

A

A

A

B

B

B

H

G

G

F

E

E

F

W

W

W

V

V

V

U

U

U

Earth (Ground)

Earth (Ground)

Earth (Ground) 

To the motor flange

To the motor flange

To the motor flange

Power supply connector arrangement 

CE05-2A32-17SD-D 

(7 kW)               

Power supply connector arrangement 

CE05-2A24-10PD-B 

<2 to 5 kW>

Power supply connector arrangement

CE05-2A22-23PD-P

<1.5 kW or lower>

       

C

C

C

D

D

D

MM-CF52

MM-CF102 

MM-CF152

MM-CF202

MM-CF352 

MM-CF502 

MM-CF702 

(kW)

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

3.5

5.0

7.0

LL 

97

122

147

128

170

224

299

φLA

145

200

φLC 

165

230

□LD 

130

176

LG 

12

18

KB 

62

87

112

81.5 

123.5

172.5

 

247.5

φKD 

22

27

KL 

110

141

KT 

56

93

φZ 

9

13.5

LR 

55

79

Q 

50

75

φS 

24h6 

35

+0.010

0

4

+0.2

     

0 

5

+0.2

0

35

+0.010

0 

8

0 

   

10

0

-0.036

-0.036

MM-CF[] (Standard)

[Unit: mm]

Model

MM-CF52C 

MM-CF102C 

MM-CF152C

 

MM-CF202C

 

MM-CF352C

MM-CF502C 

MM-CF702C

Output

(kW)

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

3.5

5.0

7.0

LL

97

122

147

128

170

224

299

φLA

145

200

φLB

110h7

φLC

165

230

□LD

130

176

LG

12

18

KB

57.5 

82.5

 

107.5

83.3

125.3

179.3

249.3

KL

111

141

150

KT

41

46

58

φZ

9

13.5

LR

55

79

Q

50

75

φS

24h6

35

+0.010

0

MM-CF[]C

(Waterproof type)

Model

 

MM-CF52 to 152

MM-CF202 to 702

 

φ

S 

24h6

R 

55 

79

Q 

50 

75

W QK 

36 

55

QL 

5 

5

U r 

4 

5

Motor

MM-CF52B 

MM-CF102B 

MM-CF152B

 

MM-CF202B

 

MM-CF352B

(kW)

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

3.5

LL

159

184

209

231

279

φLA 

145

200

φLB 

110h7

φLB 

110h7

φLC 

165

230

□LD 

130

176

LG 

12

18

KB

58

83

108

97.5

139.5

φKD 

22

27

KL 

108

141

KT 

80

93

φZ 

9

13.5

LR 

55

79

Q 

50

75

φS 

24h6

35

+0.010

0

MM-CF[]B (With an electromagnetic brake)

[Unit: mm]

Model

With key groove

[Unit: mm]

[Unit: mm]

114.3

-0.025 

0

114.3

-0.025

0 

114.3

-0.025

0

The outline dimensions may be changed. When precise outline dimensions are required, 
contact your sales representative.

The outline dimensions may be changed. When precise outline dimensions are required, 
contact your sales representative.

3

The outline dimensions may be changed. When precise outline dimensions are required, 
contact your sales representative.

Output

Output


background image

222

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

14

Performing the IPM parameter initialization makes the IPM motor MM-CF ready for PM sensorless vector control. (This function is not 
available in the FR-A842-P.)
PM sensorless vector control requires the following conditions.
 • The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
 • Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is preformed.
 • The overall wiring length with the motor is 100 m or shorter. (Even with the IPM motor MM-CF, when the wiring length exceeds 30 m, 

perform offline auto tuning.)

Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control

Selecting the PM sensorless vector control by the IPM initialization mode

This inverter is set for an induction motor in the initial setting. Follow the following procedure to change the setting for the PM sensorless 
vector control.

POINT

POINT

 • The parameters required to drive an MM-CF IPM motor are automatically changed as a batch.
 • To change to the PM sensorless vector control, perform the following steps before setting other parameters. If the PM sensorless vector control 

is selected after setting other parameters, some of those parameters will be initialized too. (Refer to "IPM parameter initialization list" for the 
parameters that are initialized.)

NOTE

 • Performing IPM parameter initialization in the parameter setting mode automatically changes the Pr.998PM parameter initialization setting.
 • In the initial parameter setting, the capacity same as the inverter capacity is set in Pr.80 Motor capacity. To use a motor capacity that is one 

rank lower than the inverter capacity, set Motor capacity by selecting the mode on the operation panel.

 • To set a speed or to display monitored items in frequency, set Pr.998. (Refer to Instruction Manual (Detailed).)

Selecting the PM sensorless vector control by Pr.998

 • Setting Pr.998 PM parameter initialization as shown in the following table activates PM sensorless vector control.

NOTE

 • The S-PM geared motor cannot be driven.

PM sensorless vector control, PM parameter initial setting

Name

Name

998

E430

PM parameter 
initialization

IPM

IPM initialization

Pr.

GROUP

Pr.

GROUP

Operation

1.

Screen at power-ON

The monitor display appears.

2.

Changing the operation mode

Press 

 to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator is lit.

3.

Parameter setting mode

Press 

 to choose the parameter setting mode. [PRM] indicator is lit.

4.

IPM parameter initialization

Turn 

 until 

(IPM parameter initialization) appears.

5.

Setting value display

Press 

 to read the present set value. " " (initial value) appears.

6.

Changing the setting value

Turn 

 to change the set value to "

", then press 

.

"

" and "

" flicker alternately. The setting is completed.

Setting value

Description

0

Parameter settings for an induction motor

3003

Parameter settings for an IPM motor MM-CF (rotations per minute)

Pr.998 setting

Description

Operation on IPM parameter initialization

0 (initial value)

Parameter settings for an induction motor (frequency)

(IPM) 

 write "0"

3003

Parameter settings for an IPM motor MM-CF (rotations per minute)

(IPM) 

 write "3003"

3103

Parameter settings for an IPM motor MM-CF (frequency)

-

8009

Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF (after tuning) -

8109

Parameter (frequency) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF (frequency)

-

9009

Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an SPM motor (after tuning)

-

9109

Parameter (frequency) settings for an SPM motor (after tuning)

-


background image

223

14

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

PM parameter initialization list

 • The parameter settings in the following table are changed to the settings required to perform PM sensorless vector control by selecting PM 

sensorless vector control with the IPM parameter initialization mode on the operation panel or with Pr.998 PM parameter initialization.

 • Performing parameter clear or all parameter clear sets back the parameter settings to the settings required to drive an induction motor.

-: Not changed



Initial value for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower



Initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher



Setting Pr.71 Applied motor = "333, 334, 8093, 8094, 9093, or 9094" does not change the Pr.71 Applied motor setting.



When a value other than "9999" is set, the set value is not changed.



200 r/min when Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection = "0"



13.33 Hz when Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection = "0"



110% for SLD, 120% for LD, 150% for ND, and 200% for HD (Refer to Pr.570 Multiple rating setting on page 151.)



Pr.702 Maximum motor frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency (rotations per minute). When Pr.702 = "9999 (initial value)", Pr.84 Rated 

motor frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency (rotations per minute).



The setting value is converted from frequency to rotations per minute. (The value after the conversion differs according to the number of motor poles.)

NOTE

 • If IPM parameter initialization is performed in rotations per minute (Pr.998 = "3003, 8009, or 9009"), the parameters not listed in the table and 

the monitored items are also set and displayed in rotations per minute.

Pr.

Name

Setting

Setting increments

Induction 

motor

PM motor (rotations per minute)

PM motor (frequency)

Pr.998 

0

(initial value)

3003

(MM-CF)

8009

9009

(other than MM-

CF)

3103

(MM-CF)

8109

9109

(other than MM-

CF)

3003, 8009, 

9009

0, 3103, 

8109, 9109

FM

CA

1

Maximum frequency

120 Hz



3000 r/min

Maximum motor 

rotations per 

minute



200 Hz

Maximum motor 

frequency



1 r/min

0.01 Hz

60 Hz



4 

Multi-speed setting (high speed)

60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min

Pr.84

133.33 Hz

Pr.84

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

9

Electronic thermal O/L relay

Inverter rated 
current

Rated motor 

current

(Refer to page 220.)

-

Rated motor 

current

(Refer to page 220.)

-

0.01 A



0.1 A



13

Starting frequency

0.5 Hz

8 r/min



Pr.84 

 10%

0.5 Hz



Pr.84 

 10%

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

15

Jog frequency

5 Hz

200 r/min

Pr.84 

 10%

13.33 Hz

Pr.84 

 10%

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

18

High speed maximum 

frequency

120 Hz



3000 r/min

-

200 Hz

-

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

60 Hz



20

Acceleration/deceleration 

reference frequency

60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min

Pr.84

133.33 Hz

Pr.84

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

22

Stall prevention operation level 150%



150%



0.1%

37

Speed display

0

0

1

55

Frequency monitoring reference

60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min

Pr.84

133.33 Hz

Pr.84

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

56

Current monitoring reference

Inverter rated 
current

Rated motor 

current

(Refer to page 220.)

Pr.859

Rated motor 

current

(Refer to page 220.)

Pr.859

0.01 A



0.1 A



71

Applied motor

0

330



-

330



-

1

80

Motor capacity

9999

Motor capacity 

(MM-CF)



-

Motor capacity 

(MM-CF)



-

0.01 kW



0.1 kW



81

Number of motor poles

9999

8



-

8



-

1

84

Rated motor frequency

9999

2000 r/min

-

133.33 Hz

-

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

116

Third output frequency detection 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min

Pr.84

133.33 Hz

Pr.84

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

125
(903)

Terminal 2 frequency setting 

gain frequency

60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min

Pr.84

133.33 Hz

Pr.84

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

126
(905)

Terminal 4 frequency setting 

gain frequency

60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min

Pr.84

133.33 Hz

Pr.84

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

144

Speed setting switchover

4

108

Pr.81 + 100

8

Pr.81

1

240

Soft-PWM operation selection 1

0

1

263

Subtraction starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min

Pr.84

133.33 Hz

Pr.84

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

266

Power failure deceleration 

time switchover frequency

60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min

Pr.84

133.33 Hz

Pr.84

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

374

Overspeed detection level

9999

3150 r/min

Maximum motor 

rotations per 

minute + 10 Hz



210 Hz

Maximum motor 

frequency + 10 

Hz



1 r/min

0.01 Hz

386

Frequency for maximum input pulse

60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min

Pr.84

133.33 Hz

Pr.84

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

505

Speed setting reference

60 Hz 50 Hz 133.33 Hz

Pr.84

133.33 Hz

Pr.84

0.01 Hz

557

Current average value 

monitor signal output 

reference current

Inverter rated 
current

Rated motor 

current

(Refer to page 220.)

Pr.859

Rated motor 

current

(Refer to page 220.)

Pr.859

0.01 A



0.1 A



820

Speed control P gain 1

60%

30%

1%

821

Speed control integral time 1

0.333 s

0.333 s

0.001 s

824

Torque control P gain 1 (current 

loop proportional gain)

100%

100%

1%

825

Torque control integral time 1 

(current loop integral time)

5 ms

20 ms

0.1 ms

870

Speed detection hysteresis

0 Hz

8 r/min

0.5 Hz



0.5 Hz

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

885

Regeneration avoidance 

compensation frequency limit value 6 Hz

200 r/min

Pr.84 

 10%

13.33 Hz

Pr.84 

 10%

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

893

Energy saving monitor 

reference (motor capacity)

Inverter rated 
current

Motor capacity (Pr.80)

0.01 kW



0.1 kW



C14
(918)

Terminal 1 gain frequency 

(speed)

60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min

Pr.84

133.33 Hz

Pr.84

1 r/min

0.01 Hz

1121

Per-unit speed control 
reference frequency

120 Hz



3000 r/min

Maximum motor 

rotations per 

minute



200 Hz

Maximum motor 

frequency



1 r/min

0.01 Hz

60 Hz




background image

224

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

14

Specification comparison between PM sensorless vector control and induction motor control



The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (It must be 0.4 kW or higher.) Using a motor with the rated current substantially 
lower than the inverter rated current will cause torque ripples, etc. and degrade the speed and torque accuracies. As a reference, select the motor with the 
rated motor current that is about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.

NOTE

 • Before wiring, make sure that the motor is stopped. Otherwise an electric shock may occur.
 • Never connect an IPM motor to the commercial power supply.
 • No slippage occurs with an IPM motor because of its characteristic. If an IPM motor, which took over an induction motor, is driven at the same 

speed as for the induction motor, the running speed of the IPM motor becomes faster by the amount of the induction motor's slippage. Adjust 
the speed command to run the IPM motor at the same speed as the induction motor, as required.

Item

PM sensorless vector control (MM-CF)

Induction motor control

Applicable motor

IPM motor MM-CF series (0.5 to 7.0 kW) (Refer to page 220.)
IPM motors other than MM-CF (tuning required) 



Induction motor 



Starting torque

High frequency 
superposition 
control

200% (200% for the 1.5 kW or lower with MM-CF,
150% for the 2.0 kW or higher)

200% (FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to FR-A820-
00250(3.7K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to FR-A840-
00126(3.7K))
150% (FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A840-
00170(5.5K) or higher)
under Real sensorless vector control and
vector control

Current 
synchronization 
operation

50%

Zero speed

High frequency 
superposition 
control

Available (Select the HD rating for zero speed 200%)

Available under Real sensorless vector control
and vector control

Current 
synchronization 
operation

Not available

Carrier frequency

High frequency 
superposition 
control

6 kHz (Pr.72 = "0 to 9"),
10 kHz (Pr.72 = "10 to 13"),
14 kHz (Pr.72 = "14 or 15")
(6 kHz in a low-speed range of 10 kHz or higher.
The frequency of 2 kHz is not selectable.)

FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower,
FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
: Any value in the range of 0.75 kHz to 14.5 kHz
FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher,
FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
: 0.75 kHz to 6 kHz

Current 
synchronization 
operation

2 kHz (Pr.72 = "0 to 5"),
6 kHz (Pr.72 = "6 to 9"),
10 kHz (Pr.72 = "10 to 13"),
14 kHz (Pr.72 = "14 or 15")
(6 kHz in a low-speed range of 10 kHz or higher.)

Automatic restart 

after 

instantaneous 

power failure

No startup waiting time.
Using the regeneration avoidance function or retry function together is 
recommended.

Startup waiting time exists.

Startup delay

Startup delay of about 0.1 s for magnetic pole position detection.

No startup delay (when online auto tuning is not 
performed at startup).

Driving by the

commercial power 

supply

Cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.

Can be driven by the commercial power supply. 
(Other than vector control dedicated motor.)

Operation during 

coasting

While the motor is coasting, potential is generated across motor terminals.

While the motor is coasting, potential is not 
generated across motor terminals.

Torque control

Not available

Available under Real sensorless vector control
and vector control

Position control

High frequency 
superposition 
control

Available (sensorless)

Available under vector control.

Current 
synchronization 
operation

Not available


background image

225

14

Comp

at

ible Mot

o

rs

Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation

When driving a 400 V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals, 
deteriorating the insulation of the motor. When the 400 V class motor is driven by the inverter, consider the following countermeasures:

With induction motor

It is recommended to take one of the following countermeasures:

Rectifying the motor insulation and limiting the PWM carrier frequency according to the wiring length

For the 400 V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced motor.
The Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor SF-HR, the Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor SF-HRCA, and the Mitsubishi Electric high-
performance energy-saving motor SF-PR are insulation-enhanced motors as standard.
Specifically,
 • Order a "400 V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor".
 • For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use an "inverter-driven dedicated motor".
  • Set  Pr.72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below according to the wiring length.

Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side

 • For FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, connect a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) at the output side of the inverter.
 • For FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, connect a sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) at the output side of the inverter.

With PM motor

Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below according to the wiring length.

NOTE

 • A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) can be used under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control.

A sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) can be used under V/F control. Do not use the filters under unspecified controls.

Application to special motors

Motors with brake

Use the motor with brake having independent power supply for the 
brake, connect the brake power supply to the inverter primary side 
power and make the inverter output off using the output stop 
terminal (MRS) when the brake is applied (motor stop). Rattle may 
be heard according to the type of the brake in the low speed region 
but it is not a fault.

Pole changing motor

As this motor differs in rated current from the standard motor, 
confirm the maximum current of the motor and select the inverter. Be 
sure to change the number of poles after the motor has stopped. If 
the number of poles is changed during rotation, the regenerative 
overvoltage protection circuit may be activated to cause an inverter 
alarm, coasting the motor to a stop.

Submersible motor

Since the motor rated current is larger than that of the standard 
motor, make selection of the inverter capacity carefully. In addition, 
the wiring distance between the motor and inverter may become 
longer, refer to page 196 to perform wiring with a cable thick 
enough. Leakage current may flow more than the land motor, take 
care when selecting the earth leakage current breaker.

Explosion-proof motor

To drive an explosion-proof type motor, an explosion-proof test of the 
motor and inverter together is necessary. The test is also necessary 
when driving an existing explosion-proof motor.
The inverter is a non-explosion proof structure, install it in a safety 
location.

Geared motor

The continuous operating rotation range of this motor changes 
depending on the lubrication system and maker. Especially in the 
case of oil lubrication, continuous operation in the low-speed range 
only can cause gear seizure. For fast operation at higher than 60 Hz, 
please consult the motor maker.

Synchronous motor other than PM motor

This motor is not suitable for applications of large load variation or 
impact, where out-of-sync is likely to occur. Please contact your 
sales representative when using this motor because its starting 
current and rated current are greater than those of the standard 
motor and will not rotate stably at low speed.

Single phase motor

The single phase motor is not suitable for variable operation by the 
inverter.
For the capacitor starting system, the capacitor may be damaged 
due to harmonic current flowing to the capacitor. For the split-phase 
starting system and repulsion starting system, not only output torque 
is not generated at low speed but it will result in starting coil burnout 
due to failure of centrifugal force switch inside. Replace with a three-
phase motor for use.

Inverter

Wiring length

50 m or shorter

Wiring length

50 m to 100 m 

Wiring length

Longer than 100 m

Standard model

15 (14.5 kHz) or lower 9 (9 kHz) or lower

4 (4 kHz) lower

IP55 compatible model

Separated converter type

6 (6 kHz) or lower

6 (6 kHz) or lower

4 (4 kHz) lower

Applicable Inverter

Wiring length

50 m or shorter

50 m to 100 m

FR-A840-00023(0.4K), 00038(0.75K)

0 (2 kHz) to 15 (14 kHz) 

5 (2 kHz) or lower

Others

0 (2 kHz) to 15 (14 kHz) 

9 (6 kHz) or lower


background image

226

Comp

at

ibil
ity

15

Major differences from the FR-A700 series

Installation precautions

 • Removal procedure of the front cover is different. (Refer to the Instruction Manual.)
 • Plug-in options of the FR-A700 series are not compatible.
 • Operation panel (FR-DU07) cannot be used.

Wiring precautions

 • The spring clamp type terminal block has changed to the screw type. Use of blade terminals is recommended.

Instructions for continuous use of the FR-PU07 (parameter unit) manufactured in September 2015 or 
earlier

 • For the FR-A800 series, many functions (parameters) have been added. When setting these parameters, the parameter names and 

setting ranges are not displayed.

 • Only the parameter with the numbers up to "999" can be read and set. The parameters with the numbers after "999" cannot be read or set.
 • Many protective functions have been added for the FR-A800 series. These functions are available, but all faults are displayed as "Fault". 

When the faults history is checked, "ERR" appears. Added faults will not appear on the parameter unit. (However, MT1 to MT3 are 
displayed as MT.)

 • Parameter copy/verification function are not available.
For information on the restrictions on the purchase of the FR-PU07, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-PU07.

Copying parameter settings

 • The FR-A700 series' parameter settings can be easily copied to the FR-A800 series by using the setup software (FR Configurator2). (Not 

supported by the setup software FR-SW3-SETUP or older.)

Item

FR-A700

FR-A800

Control method

V/F control
Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Real sensorless vector control
Vector control (with plug-in option)
PM sensorless vector control (IPM motor)

V/F control
Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Real sensorless vector control
Vector control (with plug-in option/control terminal option)
PM sensorless vector control (IPM motor/SPM motor)

Added functions

―

USB host function
Safety stop function
PLC function
etc.

Brake transistor

(brake resistor usable)

Built in for the FR-A720-0.4K to 22K
Built in for the FR-A740-0.4K to 22K

Built in for the FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K)
Built in for the FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 01800(55K)

Max

im

u

m

ou

tp

ut

 fr

eq

ue

nc

y

V/F control

400 Hz

590 Hz

Advanced magnetic 

flux vector control

120 Hz

400 Hz

Real sensorless

vector control

120 Hz

400 Hz

vector control

120 Hz

400 Hz

PM sensorless

 vector control

300 Hz

400 Hz

PID control

Turn the X14 signal ON to enable PID control.

When the X14 signal is not assigned, just set a value other than "0" in 
Pr.128 to enable PID control.
When the X14 signal is assigned, turn the X14 signal ON while Pr.128 

 

"0" to enable PID control.
The PID pre-charge function and dancer control are added.

Automatic restart after 

instantaneous power failure

Turn the CS signal ON to enable restart.

CS signal assignment not required. (Restart is enabled with the Pr.57 
setting only.)

Number of motor poles

V/F control switching

The V/F switching signal (X18) is valid when 
Pr.81 = "12 to 20 (2 to 10 poles)".

Pr.81 = "12 (12 poles)"
X18 is valid regardless of the Pr.81 setting. (The Pr.81 settings "14 to 
20" are not available.)

PTC thermistor input

Input from terminal AU (The function of terminal 
AU is switched by a switch.)

Input from terminal 2. (The function of terminal 2 is switched by the 
Pr.561 setting.)

USB connector

B connector

Mini B connector

Control circuit terminal block

Removable terminal block (screw type)

Removable terminal block (spring clamp type)

Terminal response level

The FR-A800's I/O terminals have better response level than the FR-A700's terminals. By setting Pr.289 Inverter output 
terminal filter and Pr.699 Input terminal filter, the terminal response level can be compatible with that of FR-A700. Set to 
approximately 5 to 8 ms and adjust the setting according to the system.

PU

FR-DU07 (4-digit LED)
FR-PU07

FR-DU08 (5-digit LED)
FR-LU08 (LCD operation panel)
FR-PU07 (Some functions are limited or not available.)
FR-DU07 is not supported.

Plug-in option

Dedicated plug-in options (not interchangeable)

Communication option

Connected to the connector 3

Connected to the connector 1

Installation size

For standard models, installation size is compatible for all capacities. (Replacement between the same capacities does not 
require new mounting holes.)
For separated converter types, installation size is not compatible. (New mounting holes are required.)

Converter

Built-in for all capacities

An optional converter unit (FR-CC2) is required for separated converter 
types.

DC reactor

The 75K or higher comes with a DC reactor (FR-
HEL).

For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or 
higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, select a DC reactor 
suitable for the applicable motor capacity. (A DC reactor is not 
included.)
Separated converter types (converter unit FR-CC2) and IP55 
compatible models have a built-in DC reactor.

Brake unit (75 kW or higher)

FR-BU2, MT-BU5

FR-BU2

Compatibility


background image

227

15

Comp

at

ibil
ity

Comparison with the FR-A700 series in functions

Major differences between the standard model (FR-A840) and the separated 
converter type (FR-A842)

Parameter/function

Addition

Modification

Related parameter

Remarks

Maximum frequency

Pr.1 etc.

Max. 590 Hz
(Max. 400 Hz under other than V/F control)

Free thermal

(electronic thermal O/L relay)

Pr.600 to Pr.604, 
Pr.692 to Pr.696

Thermal characteristics can be freely set.

PTC thermistor

Pr.561

The protection level can be set by parameters.

Strengthened excitation 

deceleration

Pr.660 to Pr.662

Loss of the motor is increased to reduce regenerative 
power.

4 mA input check

Pr.573, Pr.777, Pr.778

Loss of 4 mA input is detected.

Input terminal filter

Pr.699

The terminal response can be adjusted.

Output terminal filter

Pr.289

The terminal response can be adjusted.

Remote output terminal

(analog)

Pr.655 to Pr.659

Optional analog output

Parameter display by group

Pr.Md

The parameters are displayed in the conventional 
numerical order in the initial state.

Speed smoothing

Pr.653, Pr.654

Machine resonance is reduced.

Traverse function

Pr.592 to Pr.597

Only speed control is available under vector control.

USB host

(USB memory connection)

Pr.1049

Parameter read/copy, data logging, execution of the ladder 
in the USB (PLC function), etc.

Second PID control

Pr.753 to Pr.758, Pr.1134, 
Pr.1135, Pr.1140, Pr.1141, 
Pr.1143 to Pr.1149

PID pre-charge function

Pr.760 to Pr.769

PID output suspension function

Pr.575 to Pr.577

PLC function

Pr.414 to Pr.417, Pr.498, 
Pr.1150, Pr.1199

Maintenance timer

Pr.503, Pr.504, 
Pr.686 to Pr.689

Up to three timers can be set.

Fault initiation

Pr.997

Faults can be initiated.

Multiple rating selection

Pr.570

The rating can be selected from SLD, LD, ND, or HD.

Fast-response operation selection 

Pr.800

High response of the vector control, real sensorless vector 
control, and PM sensorless vector control 

24 V external power supply input

―

Operation is unavailable.
(Communication and parameter setting are available.)

Cooling fan operation selection

Pr.244

Waiting time at stop can be changed.

GOT automatic recognition

―

The GOT2000 series is supported.

Optimum excitation

control mode

Pr.60

Item

FR-A842

Remarks (FR-A840)

Pr.30 Regenerative function selection

Setting ranges "2, 10, 11, 102, 110, 111"
Initial value "10"

Setting ranges "0 to 2, 10, 11, 20, 21, 100, 101, 110, 111, 
120, 121"
Initial value "0"

Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty Without the parameter

Monitor function

(Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158, Pr.774 to Pr.776, 

Pr.992, Pr.1027 to Pr.1034)

Regenerative brake duty
Without (Unacceptable)

Input terminal function selection

(Pr.178 to Pr.189)

DC feeding operation permission (X70), DC feeding 
cancel (X71)
Without (Unacceptable)

Pr.187 MRS terminal function 

selection

Initial value "10" (X10)

Initial value "24" (MRS)

Output terminal function assignment 

selection

(Pr.190 to Pr.196, Pr.313 to Pr.322)

Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage (IPF), 
Regenerative brake pre-alarm (RBP), DC current feeding 
(Y85), Main circuit capacitor life (Y87), Inrush current 
limit circuit life (Y89)
Without (Unacceptable)

Pr.192 IPF terminal function selection Initial value "9999" (No function)

Initial value "2" (IPF)

Inrush current limit circuit life display, 

Main circuit capacitor life display

(Pr.256, Pr.258, Pr.259)

Without the parameter

Pr.599 X10 terminal input selection

Initial value "1"(NC contact specification)

Initial value "0" (NO contact specification)

Pr.872 Input phase loss protection 

selection

Without the parameter

Warning, protective functions

Regenerative brake pre-alarm (RB), Instantaneous 
power failure (E.IPF), Undervoltage (E.UVT), Input 
phase loss (E.ILF), Brake transistor alarm detection 
(E.BE), Inrush current limit circuit fault (E.IOH)
Not available


background image

228

Comp

at

ibil
ity

15

Major differences between the standard model (FR-A840) and the IP55 compatible 
model (FR-A846)

Major differences between the FR-A800 (RS-485 communication model) and the FR-
A800-E (Ethernet communication model)

CC-Link family compatible with the FR-A800 series inverters



The actual number of connectable inverters differs according to the setting of the master.



The numbers of inverter's remote I/O devices and the addresses of inverter's remote registers are common between CC-Link and CC-Link IE Field Network 
Basic.

Item

FR-A840

FR-A846

Protective structure

Enclose type (IP20): FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower
Open type (IP00): FR-A840-00770(30K) or higher

Dust-proof and waterproof type (IP55): All capacities

DC reactor

Optional

Built-in

Internal air circulation fan

Without

With

Protective function

―

Internal fan alarm (FN2), Abnormal internal temperature 
(E.IAH)

Circuit board coating (conforming 

to IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2)

With / Without (Selectable)

With

Environment

Surrounding air 

temperature

LD, ND, HD rating: 
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
SLD rating: 
-10°C to +40°C (non-freezing)

LD, ND rating: 
-10°C to +40°C (non-freezing)

Surrounding air 

humidity

With circuit board coating: 
95% RH or less (non-condensing)
Without circuit board coating: 
90% RH or less (non-condensing)

95% RH or less (non-condensing)

Brake transistor 

(usable brake resistor)

Built-in for the FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K)
Built-in for the FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 01800(55K)

Without (Brake resistor is not applicable.)

Multiple rating

(Pr.570 Multiple rating setting)

SLD, LD, ND (initial setting), HD rating
(Setting range: "0 to 3")

LD, ND (initial setting) rating
(Setting range: "1 or 2")

Pr.30 Regenerative function 

selection

Setting range: 
"0 to 2, 10, 11, 20, 21, 100, 101, 110, 111, 120, or 121"

Setting range: 
"0, 2, 10, 20, 100, 110, or 120"

Pr.70 Special regenerative brake 

duty

Available

Not available

Regenerative brake duty

(Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158, 

Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992, 

Pr.1027 to Pr.1034 setting "9")

Available (can be set)

Not available (cannot be set)

Operation panel

FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector section)

FR-DU08-01: IP55 (except for the PU connector section)

Item

FR-A800 (RS-485 communication model)

FR-A800-E (Ethernet communication model)

Standard equipment

RS-485 terminals

Ethernet connector

Communication

Mitsubishi inverter protocol
MODBUS RTU protocol

MODBUS/TCP
MELSOFT / FA product connection
SLMP
iQSS
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

Number of connectable plug-in 

options

3

2 (initial status)

Optional screw-type terminal block 

(FR-A8TR)

Can be used.

Cannot be used.

Item

Compatible inverter

FR-A800-E

FR-A800-GF,
FR-A800+FR-A8NCE

FR-A800+FR-A8NC

Communication speed

100 Mbps

1 Gbps

10 Mbps

Cable

Ethernet category 5 or higher

Ethernet category 5e or higher

Dedicated cable

Number of connectable inverters

64 (open specification)



64

42 (maximum)

Cyclic communication

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Number of links



RX

64

64

64

RY

64

64

64

RWr

32 (64 bytes)

128 (256 bytes)

32 (64 bytes)

RWw

32 (64 bytes)

128 (256 bytes)

32 (64 bytes)

Combination with TCP/IP

Supported

Not supported

Not supported

Topology

Star

Line, star, ring, line-star

Bus


background image

229

15

Comp

at

ibil
ity

Major differences between the standard inverter and the inverter with parallel 
operation function

The following functions of the FR-A800 standard inverter are changed in the FR-A842-P.

Function name

Description

FWD and REV keys on the operation panel

The FWD and REV keys on the operation panel of the slave are disabled.

Mitsubishi inverter protocol communication

Since RS-485 terminals are used for RS-485 communication between the master and slave inverters, 
communication using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol through the RS-485 terminals is not available.

MODBUS RTU protocol communication

The MODBUS RTU protocol communication is not available.

Safety stop function

The safety stop function is not supported.

High speed maximum frequency (Pr.18)

The upper limit of the output frequency is 120 Hz. Even if a value higher than 120 Hz is set as a high speed 
maximum frequency, the setting is fixed to 120 Hz.

Current monitoring reference (Pr.56)

The initial value of Pr.56 varies according to the setting in Pr.1001 Parallel operation selection as follows.
• Inverter rated current × Number of the inverters × 0.8 when Pr.1001 = "200 or 300"
• Inverter rated current × 0.8 when Pr.1001 = "1 or 2"

Optimum excitation control (Pr.60)

The Optimum excitation control mode (Pr.60 = "9") is not available.

Reference current (Pr.61)

It is determined by the following formula: Inverter rated current × Number of the inverters × 0.8, when Pr.61 
= "9999 (initial value)"

Applied motor (Pr.71 (Pr.450))

The electronic thermal relay characteristic when Pr.71 (Pr.450) = "8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, or 9094" 
is the same as that the standard motor.

Carrier frequency (Pr.72)

The carrier frequency is fixed at 2 kHz. It cannot be changed using parameters.

PU stop selection (Pr.75)

The setting for PU stop selection (Pr.75) in the slave inverter is invalid. (The setting of Pr.75 in the master 
inverter is applied to the slave inverter.)
• When the STOP/RESET key on PU of the slave inverter is pressed while Pr.75 of the master inverter = 

"14 to 17 or 114 to 117", the motor decelerates to stop regardless of the inverter's operation mode and the 
warning "PS" (PU stop) indication appears on the slave inverter. The "PS" can be reset on the master 
inverter.

• When Pr.75 of the master inverter = "0 to 3, 100 to 103", the motor does not stop by pressing the STOP/

RESET key on the PU of the slave inverter even if the inverters are in the PU operation mode.

Auto tuning setting/status (Pr.96)

Tuning is not available although "101" (offline tuning with motor rotation) is set in Pr.96.

PID action selection (Pr.128 (Pr.753))

When Pr.128 (Pr.753) of the slave inverter ≠ "2000, 2001, 2010, or 2011" , the PID action selection function 
of the slave inverter is invalid.

Bypass selection at a fault (Pr.138)

Setting "1" in Pr.138 of the master inverter enables automatic switchover to commercial power supply 
operation when a protective function (E.OHT or E.CPU) is activated in the slave inverter. Install a thermal 
relay to the master inverter to protect the motor from overheating.

Output current detection level (Pr.150),

Zero current detection level (Pr.152)

The result of the following formula corresponds to "100" (100%) of Pr.150 (Output current detection level) 
and Pr.152 (Zero current detection level) in the master inverter: Inverter rated current × Number of the 
inverters × 0.8.

Fast-response current limit (Pr.156)

This function is not available.

Frequency setting / key lock operation 

selection (Pr.161)

Regardless of the Pr.161 setting of the slave inverter, the setting dial frequency setting mode and setting 
dial potentiometer mode are disabled on the slave inverter. (The function to lock the operation panel keys is 
available.)

Automatic restart after instantaneous power 

failure selection (Pr.162)

Even when a value other than "3 or 13" is set in Pr.162, a frequency search (reduced impact restart) is 
performed.

Slip compensation (Pr.245 to Pr.247)

To use the slip compensation function, set the motor capacity in Pr.80 (Pr.453) of the master in advance.

Self power management selection (Pr.248)

When "2" is set in Pr.248 of the master inverter, the MC1 signal turns OFF when the circuit failure protective 
function or E.PA1/E.PA2 (Parallel operation slave 1 fault / Parallel operation slave 2 fault) is activated.

High-speed setting maximum current (Pr.271),

Middle-speed setting minimum current 

(Pr.272)

During operation with the X19 signal ON, when the average current of the current averaging range 
becomes equal to or less than the result of the following formula 1: Inverter rated current × Number of the 
inverters × 0.8 × Pr.271 setting (%), the maximum frequency is automatically defined as the setting of Pr.4 
Multi-speed setting (high speed).
During operation with the X19 signal ON, when the average current of the current averaging range 
becomes equal to or more than the result of the following formula 2: Inverter rated current × Number of the 
inverters × 0.8 × Pr.272 setting (%), the maximum frequency is automatically defined as the setting of Pr.5 
Multi-speed setting (middle speed).
When the average current is more than the result of the formula 1 and less than the result of the formula 2, 
linear compensation is performed.

Stop mode selection at communication error 

(Pr.502), 

Operation frequency during communication 

error (Pr.779)

The settings of Pr.502 and Pr.779 does not affect communication between the inverters via the RS-485 
terminals. (The setting affects only communication via the communication option.)

PU mode operation command source 

selection (Pr.551)

The command source is the PU connector when Pr.551 = "1" and the inverters are in the PU operation 
mode. When a USB memory device is connected to the USB connector, the command source is the USB 
connector.

Multiple rating setting (Pr.570)

The SLD and HD ratings are not supported. When "0 or 3" is set in Pr.570, the ND rating is applied.

Control method selection (Pr.800 (Pr.451))

The PM sensorless vector control is not available. When Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "13, 14, 113, or 114", Real 
sensorless vector control is applied.

Fast-response operation (Pr.800 (Pr.451))

Even if the fast-response operation is selected in Pr.800 (Pr.451), the normal-response operation is 
applied.


background image

230

W

a

rra
nt

y

16

When using this product, make sure to understand the warranty described below.

1. Warranty period and coverage

We will repair any failure or defect (hereinafter referred to as "failure") in our FA equipment (hereinafter referred to as the "Product") 
arisen during warranty period at no charge due to causes for which we are responsible through the distributor from which you 
purchased the Product or our service provider. However, we will charge the actual cost of dispatching our engineer for an on-site repair 
work on request by customer in Japan or overseas countries. We are not responsible for any on-site readjustment and/or trial run that 
may be required after a defective unit are repaired or replaced.

[Term]

The term of warranty for Product is twelve months after your purchase or delivery of the Product to a place designated by you or 
eighteen months from the date of manufacture whichever comes first ("Warranty Period"). Warranty period for repaired Product cannot 
exceed beyond the original warranty period before any repair work.

[Limitations]

(1)  You are requested to conduct an initial failure diagnosis by yourself, as a general rule. It can also be carried out by us or our 

service company upon your request and the actual cost will be charged.
However, it will not be charged if we are responsible for the cause of the failure.

(2)  This limited warranty applies only when the condition, method, environment, etc. of use are in compliance with the terms and 

conditions and instructions that are set forth in the instruction manual and user manual for the Product and the caution label affixed 
to the Product.

(3)  Even during the term of warranty, the repair cost will be charged on you in the following cases;

1)  a failure caused by your improper storing or handling, carelessness or negligence, etc., and a failure caused by your hardware 

or software problem

2)  a failure caused by any alteration, etc. to the Product made on your side without our approval
3)  a failure which may be regarded as avoidable, if your equipment in which the Product is incorporated is equipped with a safety 

device required by applicable laws and has any function or structure considered to be indispensable according to a common 
sense in the industry

4)  a failure which may be regarded as avoidable if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual, etc. are duly 

maintained and replaced

5)  any replacement of consumable parts (condenser, cooling fan, etc.)
6)  a failure caused by external factors such as inevitable accidents, including without limitation fire and abnormal fluctuation of 

voltage, and acts of God, including without limitation earthquake, lightning and natural disasters

7)  a failure generated by an unforeseeable cause with a scientific technology that was not available at the time of the shipment of 

the Product from our company

8)  any other failures which we are not responsible for or which you acknowledge we are not responsible for

2. Term of warranty after the stop of production

(1)  We may accept the repair at charge for another seven (7) years after the production of the product is discontinued. The 

announcement of the stop of production for each model can be seen in our Sales and Service, etc.

(2)  Please note that the Product (including its spare parts) cannot be ordered after its stop of production.

3. Service in overseas

Our regional FA Center in overseas countries will accept the repair work of the Product; however, the terms and conditions of the repair 
work may differ depending on each FA Center. Please ask your local FA center for details.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to:
(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi.
(2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products.
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for 

damages to products other than Mitsubishi products.

(4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

5. Change of Product specifications

Specifications listed in our catalogs, manuals or technical documents may be changed without notice.

6. Application and use of the Product

(1)  For the use of our product, its applications should be those that may not result in a serious damage even if any failure or 

malfunction occurs in product, and a backup or fail-safe function should operate on an external system to product when any failure 
or malfunction occurs.

(2)  Our product is designed and manufactured as a general purpose product for use at general industries.

Therefore, applications substantially influential on the public interest for such as atomic power plants and other power plants of 
electric power companies, and also which require a special quality assurance system, including applications for railway companies 
and government or public offices are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these 
applications when used.
In addition, applications which may be substantially influential to human lives or properties for such as airlines, medical treatments, 
railway service, incineration and fuel systems, man-operated material handling equipment, entertainment machines, safety 
machines, etc. are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these applications when used.
We will review the acceptability of the abovementioned applications, if you agree not to require a specific quality for a specific 
application. Please contact us for consultation.

Warranty


background image

231

MEMO


background image

L:  Mitsubishi Electric do Brasil Comércio e 

Serviços Ltda.  

R:  MELCO CNC do Brasil Comércio e 

Serviços S.A

Kraków, Poland

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.

Polish Branch

(Europe FA Center)

Ratingen, Germany

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.

German Branch (Germany FA Center)

Istanbul, Turkey

Mitsubishi Electric Turkey

A.Ş Ümraniye Branch (Turkey FA Center)

Seoul, Korea

Mitsubishi Electric Automation 

Korea Co., Ltd. (Korea FA Center)

Pune, Gurgaon, Bangalore,

Chennai, Ahmedabad, India

Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd. 

Hanoi,

Ho Chi Minh, Vietnam

L:  Mitsubishi Electric Vietnam Co., Ltd. 

Hanoi Branch 

R:  Mitsubishi Electric Vietnam Co., Ltd.

Taipei,

Taichung, Taiwan

L: Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd.

R: Mitsubishi Electric Taiwan Co.,Ltd.

Sao Paulo SP, Brazil

Mitsubishi Electric Factory Automation 

(Thailand) Co., Ltd. (Thai FA Center)

Bangkok, Thailand

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. 

UK Branch (UK FA Center)

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.

Czech Branch 

(Czech Republic FA Center)

Mitsubishi Electric 

Asia Pte, Ltd. (ASEAN FA Center)

PT. Mitsubishi Electric

Indonesia Cikarang Office 

（Indonesia FA Center）

Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. 

(North America FA Center)

Mitsubishi Electric

Automation, Inc. Mexico Branch

(Mexico FA Center)

St. Petersburg, Russia

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.

Representative Office in St. Petersburg 

（Russia FA Center）

Nagoya, Japan

Hatfield, UK

Chicago IL, USA

Praha, Czech Republic

Singapore

Jakarta, Indonesia

Tlalnepantla De Baz, Mexico

FA Center Satellite 
(China)

Mitsubishi Sales Offices

Global FA Center

Mechatronics Service Base 
(China)

Production Facility

Development Center

Shanghai

Dalian 

Qingdao 

Wuhang 

Chengdu 

Chongqing

Shenyang

Fuzhou

Taipei

Taichung

Xiangfan 

Zhengzhou 

Tianjin

Beijing

Guangzhou

Shenzhen

China (including Hong Kong District)

Global network for comprehensive support of     customers' manufacturing.

Tianjin

Mitsubishi Automation (China) Ltd.

Tianjin Office (Tianjin FA Center)

Beijing

Mitsubishi Automation (China) Ltd.

Beijing Office (Beijing FA Center)

Guangzhou

Mitsubishi Electric Automation 

(China) Ltd. Guangzhou 

Office (Guangzhou FA Center)

Shanghai

Mitsubishi Automation (China) Ltd.

(Shanghai FA Center)

Shanghai

Mitsubishi Electric Automation 

Solution Center

Service bases are established around the world to globally provide the same services as in Japan.

Overseas bases are opened one after another 

to support business expansion of our customers.

* Some includes distributors

As of July 2014

Overseas bases

Area

Our overseas offices

FA Center 

(Satellite)

Bases providing

our products

Countries 

(Regions)

54

1

10

16

2

83

Changchun

6

 (2)

4

 (10)

13

4

 (0)

0

27

 (12)

11

13

21

14

1

60

146

171

79

130

3

529

EMEA

China

Asia

America

Others

Total

232


background image

L:  Mitsubishi Electric do Brasil Comércio e 

Serviços Ltda.  

R:  MELCO CNC do Brasil Comércio e 

Serviços S.A

Kraków, Poland

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.

Polish Branch

(Europe FA Center)

Ratingen, Germany

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.

German Branch (Germany FA Center)

Istanbul, Turkey

Mitsubishi Electric Turkey

A.Ş Ümraniye Branch (Turkey FA Center)

Seoul, Korea

Mitsubishi Electric Automation 

Korea Co., Ltd. (Korea FA Center)

Pune, Gurgaon, Bangalore,

Chennai, Ahmedabad, India

Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd. 

Hanoi,

Ho Chi Minh, Vietnam

L:  Mitsubishi Electric Vietnam Co., Ltd. 

Hanoi Branch 

R:  Mitsubishi Electric Vietnam Co., Ltd.

Taipei,

Taichung, Taiwan

L: Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd.

R: Mitsubishi Electric Taiwan Co.,Ltd.

Sao Paulo SP, Brazil

Mitsubishi Electric Factory Automation 

(Thailand) Co., Ltd. (Thai FA Center)

Bangkok, Thailand

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. 

UK Branch (UK FA Center)

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.

Czech Branch 

(Czech Republic FA Center)

Mitsubishi Electric 

Asia Pte, Ltd. (ASEAN FA Center)

PT. Mitsubishi Electric

Indonesia Cikarang Office 

（Indonesia FA Center）

Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. 

(North America FA Center)

Mitsubishi Electric

Automation, Inc. Mexico Branch

(Mexico FA Center)

St. Petersburg, Russia

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.

Representative Office in St. Petersburg 

（Russia FA Center）

Nagoya, Japan

Hatfield, UK

Chicago IL, USA

Praha, Czech Republic

Singapore

Jakarta, Indonesia

Tlalnepantla De Baz, Mexico

FA Center Satellite 
(China)

Mitsubishi Sales Offices

Global FA Center

Mechatronics Service Base 
(China)

Production Facility

Development Center

Shanghai

Dalian 

Qingdao 

Wuhang 

Chengdu 

Chongqing

Shenyang

Fuzhou

Taipei

Taichung

Xiangfan 

Zhengzhou 

Tianjin

Beijing

Guangzhou

Shenzhen

China (including Hong Kong District)

Global network for comprehensive support of     customers' manufacturing.

Tianjin

Mitsubishi Automation (China) Ltd.

Tianjin Office (Tianjin FA Center)

Beijing

Mitsubishi Automation (China) Ltd.

Beijing Office (Beijing FA Center)

Guangzhou

Mitsubishi Electric Automation 

(China) Ltd. Guangzhou 

Office (Guangzhou FA Center)

Shanghai

Mitsubishi Automation (China) Ltd.

(Shanghai FA Center)

Shanghai

Mitsubishi Electric Automation 

Solution Center

Service bases are established around the world to globally provide the same services as in Japan.

Overseas bases are opened one after another 

to support business expansion of our customers.

* Some includes distributors

As of July 2014

Overseas bases

Area

Our overseas offices

FA Center 

(Satellite)

Bases providing

our products

Countries 

(Regions)

54

1

10

16

2

83

Changchun

6

 (2)

4

 (10)

13

4

 (0)

0

27

 (12)

11

13

21

14

1

60

146

171

79

130

3

529

EMEA

China

Asia

America

Others

Total

233


background image

Automation solutions

Overall production information is captured in addition to energy information, enabling the realization of efficient production and energy use (energy savings).

Quality

Safety

Productivity

Security

Sustainability

MES interface

C Controller

Programmable
Controller

Sensor

Energy-saving

Drive

Mechatronics

FA-IT

Information

Interface

since2003

Sales and 

distribution

Operation and

maintenance

Product

design

Process

design

Procurement

Production

Supply chain

Engineering

chain

MES

SCADA

SCM

Simulator

ERP

CAD/CAM

IT system

Edge-computing

Shop floor

Data handling

Data primary processing/

analysis

YOUR SOLUTION PARTNER

Mitsubishi Electric offers a wide range of automation equipment from PLCs and HMIs to 
CNC and EDM machines.

A NAME TO TRUST

Since its beginnings in 1870, some 
45 companies use the Mitsubishi 
name, covering a spectrum of 
finance, commerce and industry.

The Mitsubishi brand name is 
recognized around the world as a 
symbol of premium quality.

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation is 
active in space development, 
transportation, semi-conductors, 
energy systems, communications 
and information processing, audio 
visual equipment and home 
electronics, building and energy 
management and automation 
systems, and has 237 factories and 
laboratories worldwide in over 121 
countries.

This is why you can rely on 
Mitsubishi Electric automation 
solution - because we know first 
hand about the need for reliable, 
efficient, easy-to-use automation and 
control in our own factories.

As one of the world’s leading 
companies with a global turnover of 
over 4 trillion Yen (over $40 billion), 
employing over 100,000 people, 
Mitsubishi Electric has the resource 
and the commitment to deliver the 
ultimate in service and support as 
well as the best products.

Medium voltage: VCB, VCC 

Power monitoring, energy management

Compact and Modular Controllers

Inverters, Servos and Motors

Visualisation: HMIs

Numerical Control (NC)

Robots: SCARA, Articulated arm

Processing machines: EDM, Lasers, IDS

Transformers, Air conditioning, Photovoltaic systems

Low voltage: MCCB, MCB, ACB

* Not all products are available in all countries.

This solution solves customers' issues and concerns by 

enabling visualization and analysis that lead to improvements 

and increase availability at production sites.

FA integrated solutions

reduce total cost

Utilizing our FA and IT technologies and collaborating with e-F@ctory Alliance partners, we reduce the total cost across the entire 
supply chain and engineeringchain, and support the improvement initiatives and one-step-ahead manufacturing of our customers.

Supply chain

Sale, logistics,

and service

Production

and

manufacturing

iQ-Works/EZSocket

(CAD/simulation linkage)

iQ Care

(prevention, predictive maintenance,

remote maintenance service)

Product

design

Process

design

Operation/Maintenance

Engineering 

chain

Procurement

•Trademarks

DeviceNet is a trademark of the ODVA, PROFIBUS is a trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organization, and MODBUS is a registered trademark of SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC USA, INC.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Corporation in Japan.
Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.

234


background image

Automation solutions

Overall production information is captured in addition to energy information, enabling the realization of efficient production and energy use (energy savings).

Quality

Safety

Productivity

Security

Sustainability

MES interface

C Controller

Programmable
Controller

Sensor

Energy-saving

Drive

Mechatronics

FA-IT

Information

Interface

since2003

Sales and 

distribution

Operation and

maintenance

Product

design

Process

design

Procurement

Production

Supply chain

Engineering

chain

MES

SCADA

SCM

Simulator

ERP

CAD/CAM

IT system

Edge-computing

Shop floor

Data handling

Data primary processing/

analysis

YOUR SOLUTION PARTNER

Mitsubishi Electric offers a wide range of automation equipment from PLCs and HMIs to 
CNC and EDM machines.

A NAME TO TRUST

Since its beginnings in 1870, some 
45 companies use the Mitsubishi 
name, covering a spectrum of 
finance, commerce and industry.

The Mitsubishi brand name is 
recognized around the world as a 
symbol of premium quality.

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation is 
active in space development, 
transportation, semi-conductors, 
energy systems, communications 
and information processing, audio 
visual equipment and home 
electronics, building and energy 
management and automation 
systems, and has 237 factories and 
laboratories worldwide in over 121 
countries.

This is why you can rely on 
Mitsubishi Electric automation 
solution - because we know first 
hand about the need for reliable, 
efficient, easy-to-use automation and 
control in our own factories.

As one of the world’s leading 
companies with a global turnover of 
over 4 trillion Yen (over $40 billion), 
employing over 100,000 people, 
Mitsubishi Electric has the resource 
and the commitment to deliver the 
ultimate in service and support as 
well as the best products.

Medium voltage: VCB, VCC 

Power monitoring, energy management

Compact and Modular Controllers

Inverters, Servos and Motors

Visualisation: HMIs

Numerical Control (NC)

Robots: SCARA, Articulated arm

Processing machines: EDM, Lasers, IDS

Transformers, Air conditioning, Photovoltaic systems

Low voltage: MCCB, MCB, ACB

* Not all products are available in all countries.

This solution solves customers' issues and concerns by 

enabling visualization and analysis that lead to improvements 

and increase availability at production sites.

FA integrated solutions

reduce total cost

Utilizing our FA and IT technologies and collaborating with e-F@ctory Alliance partners, we reduce the total cost across the entire 
supply chain and engineeringchain, and support the improvement initiatives and one-step-ahead manufacturing of our customers.

Supply chain

Sale, logistics,

and service

Production

and

manufacturing

iQ-Works/EZSocket

(CAD/simulation linkage)

iQ Care

(prevention, predictive maintenance,

remote maintenance service)

Product

design

Process

design

Operation/Maintenance

Engineering 

chain

Procurement

•Trademarks

DeviceNet is a trademark of the ODVA, PROFIBUS is a trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organization, and MODBUS is a registered trademark of SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC USA, INC.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Corporation in Japan.
Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.

235


background image

FACTORY AUTOMATION

• Approach to the leading 

drive performance

• Security & safety

• Easy setup 

& easy to use

• Eco-friendly factories

• System support

L(NA)06075ENG-G(1902)MEE

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

FR-A

800

INVERTER

FR-A800

Unparalleled Performance. Uncompromising Quality.
  [Parallel operation function compatible model added to the line-up]

Mitsubishi  Electric  Corporation  Nagoya  Works  is  a  factory  certified  for  ISO14001  (standards  for 
environmental management systems)and ISO9001(standards for quality assurance management systems)